T35-8.5x-AP1

GE
Grid Solutions
T35
Transformer Protection System
Instruction Manual
Product version: 8.5x
GE publication code: 1601-0114-AP1
E83849
S T ER
GI
ED
RE
ISO 9001
LISTED
G
E
IN
M U LT I L
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
1601-0114-AP1
Copyright © 2023 GE Multilin. All rights reserved.
T35 Transformer Protection System Instruction Manual for version 8.5x.
T35, FlexLogic, FlexElement, FlexCurve, FlexAnalog, FlexInteger, FlexState, EnerVista,
CyberSentry, HardFiber, Universal Relay, Multilin, and GE Multilin are trademarks or
registered trademarks of GE Multilin or General Electric Company Corporation.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
It is the responsibility of the user for verifying and validating the suitability of all GE Grid
Solutions products. This equipment must be used within its design limits. The proper
application including configuration and setting of this product to suit the power system
assets is the responsibility of the user, who is also required to ensure that all local or
regional safety guidelines are adhered to. Incorrect application of this product could risk
damage to property/the environment, personal injuries or fatalities and shall be the sole
responsibility of the person/entity applying and qualifying the product for use.
The content in this document has been developed to provide guidance to properly install,
configure and maintain this product for its intented use. This guidance is not intended to
cover every possible contingency that may arise during commissioning, operation, service,
or maintenance activity. Should you encounter any circumstance’s not clearly addressed
in this document, contact your local GE service site.
IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO SECURE THEIR NETWORK AND
ASSOCIATED DEVICES AGAINST CYBER SECURITY INTRUSIONS OR ATTACK. GE GRID
AUTOMATION AND ITS AFFILIATES ARE NOT LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGE AND/OR LOSSES
ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO SUCH SECURITY INTRUTION OR ATTACK.
Part number: 1601-0114-AP1 (November 2023)
T35 Transformer Protection System
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Safety symbols and definitions ........................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 General cautions and warnings .................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 For further assistance........................................................................................... 1-2
2 PRODUCT 2.1 Product description ............................................................................................... 2-1

DESCRIPTION 2.2 Security.................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Order codes............................................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.1 Order codes with enhanced CT/VT modules........................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 Order codes with process bus modules ..................................................................2-11
2.3.3 Replacement modules .....................................................................................................2-14
2.4 Signal processing ................................................................................................. 2-16
2.4.1 UR signal processing ........................................................................................................2-16
2.5 Specifications........................................................................................................ 2-18
2.5.1 Protection elements ..........................................................................................................2-19
2.5.2 User-programmable elements ....................................................................................2-22
2.5.3 Monitoring..............................................................................................................................2-23
2.5.4 Metering..................................................................................................................................2-24
2.5.5 Inputs .......................................................................................................................................2-25
2.5.6 Power supply ........................................................................................................................2-26
2.5.7 Outputs....................................................................................................................................2-27
2.5.8 Communication protocols..............................................................................................2-29
2.5.9 Inter-relay communications..........................................................................................2-30
2.5.10 CyberSentry security.........................................................................................................2-32
2.5.11 Graphical front panel........................................................................................................2-32
2.5.12 Environmental......................................................................................................................2-32
2.5.13 Type tests ...............................................................................................................................2-34
2.5.14 Production tests ..................................................................................................................2-34
2.5.15 Approvals ...............................................................................................................................2-35
2.5.16 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................2-35
3 INSTALLATION 3.1 Unpack and inspect ............................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Panel cutouts .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Horizontal units ..................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Vertical units ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.3 Rear terminal layout......................................................................................................... 3-10

3.3 Wiring .....................................................................................................................3-13
3.3.1 Typical wiring ....................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Dielectric strength ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.3 Control power ...................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.4 CT/VT modules .................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.3.5 Process Bus Module for HardFiber ............................................................................ 3-18
3.3.6 Contact inputs and outputs .......................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.7 Transducer inputs and outputs................................................................................... 3-31
3.3.8 RS232 port............................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.3.9 CPU communication ports ............................................................................................ 3-34
3.3.10 IRIG-B....................................................................................................................................... 3-37
3.4 Direct input and output communications .......................................................3-38
3.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................................ 3-38
3.4.2 Fiber: LED and ELED transmitters............................................................................... 3-41
3.4.3 Fiber laser transmitters................................................................................................... 3-41
3.4.4 G.703 interface.................................................................................................................... 3-42
3.4.5 RS422 interface................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.4.6 RS422 and fiber interface .............................................................................................. 3-48
3.4.7 G.703 and fiber interface................................................................................................ 3-49
3.4.8 IEEE C37.94 interface ....................................................................................................... 3-49
3.4.9 C37.94SM interface........................................................................................................... 3-52
3.5 Activate relay ........................................................................................................3-55
3.6 Install software .....................................................................................................3-56
3.6.1 EnerVista communication overview ......................................................................... 3-56
3.6.2 System requirements....................................................................................................... 3-57
3.6.3 Install software.................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.7 Add device to software........................................................................................3-60
3.7.1 Set IP address in UR.......................................................................................................... 3-60
3.7.2 Configure serial connection.......................................................................................... 3-66
3.7.3 Configure Ethernet connection ................................................................................... 3-67
3.7.4 Configure modem connection.....................................................................................3-68
3.7.5 Automatic discovery of UR devices........................................................................... 3-69
3.8 Connect to the T35 ...............................................................................................3-70
3.8.1 Connect to the T35 in EnerVista.................................................................................. 3-70
3.8.2 Use Quick Connect via front RS232 port................................................................. 3-71
3.8.3 Use Quick Connect via front USB port ..................................................................... 3-72
3.8.4 Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port.......................................................... 3-72
3.9 Set up CyberSentry and change default password .......................................3-73
3.10 Import settings .....................................................................................................3-74
3.10.1 import settings from XML file ....................................................................................... 3-74
3.10.2 Import settings from device files ................................................................................ 3-78
3.11 Connect to D400 gateway ..................................................................................3-79
3.11.1 Oscillography files.............................................................................................................. 3-79
3.11.2 Event records ....................................................................................................................... 3-80
3.11.3 Log files................................................................................................................................... 3-80
3.11.4 Setting files............................................................................................................................ 3-80
4 INTERFACES 4.1 EnerVista software interface................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 Settings files ............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 Event viewing..........................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.4 File support ..............................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.5 EnerVista main window .....................................................................................................4-3
4.1.6 Protection summary window..........................................................................................4-5
iv T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1.7 Settings templates............................................................................................................... 4-6

4.1.8 Secure and lock FlexLogic equations........................................................................4-10
4.1.9 Settings file traceability ...................................................................................................4-13
4.2 Front panel interface........................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.1 Front panel ............................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.2 Front panel display ............................................................................................................4-18
4.2.3 Front panel navigation keys..........................................................................................4-39
4.2.4 LED indicators ......................................................................................................................4-40
4.2.5 Front panel labelling .........................................................................................................4-45
4.2.6 Menu navigation.................................................................................................................4-51
4.2.7 Change settings ..................................................................................................................4-53
4.2.8 View actual values.............................................................................................................4-58
4.2.9 Breaker control....................................................................................................................4-59
4.2.10 Change passwords............................................................................................................4-60
4.2.11 Invalid password entry ....................................................................................................4-62
4.3 Logic diagrams ..................................................................................................... 4-63
4.4 FlexLogic design using Engineer ....................................................................... 4-64
4.4.1 Design logic...........................................................................................................................4-66
4.4.2 Send file to and from device .........................................................................................4-76
4.4.3 Monitor logic.........................................................................................................................4-77
4.4.4 View front panel and print labels................................................................................4-78
4.4.5 Generate connectivity report........................................................................................4-78
4.4.6 Preferences ...........................................................................................................................4-79
4.4.7 Toolbars ..................................................................................................................................4-82
5 SETTINGS 5.1 Settings menu......................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Overview.................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1 Introduction to elements .................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Introduction to AC sources .............................................................................................. 5-6
5.3 Product setup.......................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.1 Security ..................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2 Display properties ..............................................................................................................5-27
5.3.3 Graphical front panel........................................................................................................5-30
5.3.4 Clear relay records.............................................................................................................5-43
5.3.5 Communications ................................................................................................................5-43
5.3.6 Modbus user map ........................................................................................................... 5-125
5.3.7 Real-time clock.................................................................................................................5-126
5.3.8 User-programmable fault reports...........................................................................5-135
5.3.9 Oscillography.....................................................................................................................5-136
5.3.10 Data logger ........................................................................................................................5-138
5.3.11 User-programmable LEDs ..........................................................................................5-140
5.3.12 User-programmable self-tests .................................................................................5-144
5.3.13 Control pushbuttons ...................................................................................................... 5-145
5.3.14 User-programmable pushbuttons ..........................................................................5-147
5.3.15 Flex state parameters ...................................................................................................5-153
5.3.16 User-definable displays................................................................................................5-154
5.3.17 Direct inputs and outputs............................................................................................5-156
5.3.18 Teleprotection ...................................................................................................................5-162
5.3.19 Installation ..........................................................................................................................5-163
5.4 Remote resources ..............................................................................................5-164
5.4.1 Remote resources configuration .............................................................................5-164
5.5 System setup ......................................................................................................5-165
5.5.1 AC inputs .............................................................................................................................5-165
5.5.2 Power system....................................................................................................................5-167
5.5.3 Signal sources...................................................................................................................5-168
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL v

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.5.4 Transformer....................................................................................................................... 5-173

5.5.5 Breakers .............................................................................................................................. 5-186
5.5.6 Disconnect switch control .......................................................................................... 5-196
5.5.7 FlexCurves .......................................................................................................................... 5-204
5.6 Process Bus Module .......................................................................................... 5-211
5.6.1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) ....................................................................... 5-211
5.6.2 High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR)................................................... 5-212
5.6.3 General ................................................................................................................................ 5-214
5.6.4 SV Stream Config ............................................................................................................ 5-220
5.7 FlexLogic.............................................................................................................. 5-236
5.7.1 FlexLogic operands........................................................................................................ 5-236
5.7.2 FlexLogic rules.................................................................................................................. 5-249
5.7.3 FlexLogic evaluation...................................................................................................... 5-250
5.7.4 FlexLogic example.......................................................................................................... 5-250
5.7.5 FlexLogic equation editor............................................................................................ 5-255
5.7.6 FlexLogic timers............................................................................................................... 5-255
5.7.7 FlexElements ..................................................................................................................... 5-256
5.7.8 Non-volatile latches....................................................................................................... 5-260
5.8 Grouped elements ............................................................................................. 5-262
5.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 5-262
5.8.2 Setting group 1................................................................................................................. 5-262
5.8.3 Transformer elements .................................................................................................. 5-262
5.8.4 Phase current ................................................................................................................... 5-274
5.8.5 Neutral current................................................................................................................. 5-283
5.8.6 Ground current ................................................................................................................ 5-288
5.9 Control elements ............................................................................................... 5-298
5.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 5-298
5.9.2 Trip bus ................................................................................................................................ 5-298
5.9.3 Setting groups .................................................................................................................. 5-300
5.9.4 Selector switch................................................................................................................. 5-302
5.9.5 Underfrequency (ANSI 81U)........................................................................................ 5-309
5.9.6 Digital elements............................................................................................................... 5-310
5.9.7 Digital counters................................................................................................................ 5-313
5.9.8 Monitoring elements ..................................................................................................... 5-315
5.10 Inputs/outputs ................................................................................................... 5-330
5.10.1 Contact inputs .................................................................................................................. 5-330
5.10.2 Virtual inputs ..................................................................................................................... 5-332
5.10.3 Contact outputs............................................................................................................... 5-333
5.10.4 Virtual outputs.................................................................................................................. 5-337
5.10.5 Resetting ............................................................................................................................. 5-337
5.10.6 Direct inputs and outputs ........................................................................................... 5-338
5.10.7 Teleprotection................................................................................................................... 5-342
5.11 Transducer inputs/outputs.............................................................................. 5-344
5.11.1 DCmA inputs...................................................................................................................... 5-344
5.11.2 RTD inputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-345
5.11.3 DCmA outputs .................................................................................................................. 5-346
5.12 Testing ................................................................................................................. 5-350
5.12.1 IED mode config .............................................................................................................. 5-350
5.12.2 Force contact inputs ..................................................................................................... 5-353
5.12.3 Force contact outputs .................................................................................................. 5-354
5.13 Simulation ........................................................................................................... 5-354
5.13.1 Subscribe to simulated values.................................................................................. 5-355
5.13.2 Publish simulated values............................................................................................. 5-356
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 Actual values menu................................................................................................6-1
vi T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 6-3

6.2.1 Enhanced and standard front panels......................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Graphical front panel.......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Status ....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.1 IED................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.3.2 Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.3 Virtual inputs........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.4 RxGOOSE boolean inputs.................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.5 RxGOOSE DPS inputs .......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.6 Teleprotection inputs.......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.7 Contact outputs .................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.8 Virtual outputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.9 RxGOOSE status .................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.10 RxGOOSE statistics .............................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.11 Fixed GOOSE ........................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.12 Digital counters ..................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.13 Breaker status........................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.3.14 Selector switches.................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.15 Flex States..............................................................................................................................6-10
6.3.16 Ethernet ..................................................................................................................................6-10
6.3.17 Real time clock synchronizing......................................................................................6-10
6.3.18 Direct inputs..........................................................................................................................6-11
6.3.19 Direct devices status ........................................................................................................6-12
6.3.20 EGD protocol status ..........................................................................................................6-12
6.3.21 Teleprotection channel tests ........................................................................................6-12
6.3.22 Remaining connection status.......................................................................................6-13
6.3.23 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)...........................................................................6-13
6.3.24 TxGOOSE status ..................................................................................................................6-14
6.3.25 Protocol...................................................................................................................................6-15
6.4 Metering................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.4.1 Metering conventions.......................................................................................................6-15
6.4.2 Transformer ..........................................................................................................................6-19
6.4.3 Sources....................................................................................................................................6-20
6.4.4 Tracking frequency............................................................................................................6-24
6.4.5 FlexElements.........................................................................................................................6-24
6.4.6 RxGOOSE analogs ..............................................................................................................6-25
6.4.7 Restricted ground fault....................................................................................................6-25
6.4.8 Transducer inputs/outputs ............................................................................................6-25
6.4.9 Harmonic detection ..........................................................................................................6-26
6.5 Remote resources ................................................................................................ 6-26
6.5.1 Field unit .................................................................................................................................6-26
6.6 Process Bus Module ............................................................................................. 6-27
6.6.1 General status......................................................................................................................6-27
6.6.2 RxSV status............................................................................................................................6-27
6.6.3 Time synchronizing............................................................................................................6-28
6.6.4 PRP ............................................................................................................................................6-29
6.6.5 HSR............................................................................................................................................6-31
6.7 Records .................................................................................................................. 6-31
6.7.1 User programmable fault reports ..............................................................................6-31
6.7.2 Event records .......................................................................................................................6-32
6.7.3 Oscillography........................................................................................................................6-34
6.7.4 Data logger ...........................................................................................................................6-34
6.7.5 Breaker maintenance.......................................................................................................6-35
6.7.6 Through-fault monitoring...............................................................................................6-36
6.8 Product information ............................................................................................ 6-36
6.8.1 Model information..............................................................................................................6-36
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.8.2 Firmware revisions ............................................................................................................ 6-37
7 COMMANDS AND 7.1 Commands menu ...................................................................................................7-1

TARGETS 7.1.1 Virtual inputs ...........................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Clear records...........................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Set date and time..................................................................................................................7-3
7.1.4 Relay maintenance ..............................................................................................................7-3
7.1.5 Security ......................................................................................................................................7-4
7.1.6 Transformer auto-setting..................................................................................................7-5
7.2 Targets menu ..........................................................................................................7-5
7.2.1 Target messages...................................................................................................................7-6
7.2.2 Relay self-tests .......................................................................................................................7-6
8 COMMISSIONING 8.1 Differential characteristic test.............................................................................8-1

8.1.1 Description ...............................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Differential characteristic test examples ..........................................................8-3
8.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.2 Test example 1 .......................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.3 Test example 2 .......................................................................................................................8-9
8.2.4 Test example 3 .................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.5 Test example 4 .................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3 Inrush inhibit test .................................................................................................8-13
8.3.1 Inrush inhibit test procedure ........................................................................................ 8-13
8.4 Overexcitation inhibit test ..................................................................................8-14
8.4.1 Overexcitation inhibit test procedure....................................................................... 8-14
8.5 Blank test tables ...................................................................................................8-14
8.5.1 Differential restraint tests .............................................................................................. 8-14
8.5.2 Inrush inhibit tests ............................................................................................................. 8-15
8.5.3 Overexcitation inhibit tests............................................................................................ 8-16
9 THEORY OF 9.1 Directional principle...............................................................................................9-1

OPERATION 9.1.1 Current directional protection ........................................................................................9-1
9.2 Saturation detector................................................................................................9-2
9.2.1 CT saturation detection......................................................................................................9-2
9.3 Transformer through-fault monitoring..............................................................9-4
9.4 Transformer interturn fault detection................................................................9-5
10 MAINTENANCE 10.1 Monitoring .............................................................................................................10-1

10.1.1 Devices with Site Targets ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Data with Modbus Analyzer.......................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 General maintenance ..........................................................................................10-3
10.2.1 In-service maintenance.................................................................................................. 10-3
10.2.2 Out-of-service maintenance ........................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption) .............................................. 10-3
10.3 Retrieve files ..........................................................................................................10-3
10.3.1 CyberSentry security event files.................................................................................. 10-4
10.4 Convert device settings.......................................................................................10-5
10.5 Copy settings to other device ............................................................................10-7
10.6 Export settings ......................................................................................................10-7
10.7 Compare settings .................................................................................................10-8
10.7.1 Compare against defaults ............................................................................................. 10-8
10.7.2 Compare two devices ...................................................................................................... 10-8
viii T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
10.8 Back up and restore settings ............................................................................. 10-9

10.8.1 Back up settings..................................................................................................................10-9
10.8.2 Restore settings ...............................................................................................................10-12
10.9 Upgrade software ..............................................................................................10-14
10.10 Upgrade firmware..............................................................................................10-15
10.11 Replace module ..................................................................................................10-17
10.12 Battery .................................................................................................................10-19
10.12.1 Replace battery ................................................................................................................10-19
10.12.2 Dispose of battery...........................................................................................................10-20
10.13 Clear files and data after uninstall .................................................................10-23
10.14 Repairs .................................................................................................................10-24
10.15 Storage.................................................................................................................10-24
10.16 Disposal ...............................................................................................................10-25
A FLEXANALOG A.1 FlexAnalog items .................................................................................................... A-1

OPERANDS A.1.1 T35 FlexAnalog data items .............................................................................................. A-1
B RADIUS SERVER B.1 RADIUS server configuration ............................................................................... B-1

CONFIGURATION
C COMMAND LINE C.1 Command line interface ....................................................................................... C-1

INTERFACE
D MISCELLANEOUS D.1 Warranty .................................................................................................................D-1

D.2 Revision history ......................................................................................................D-1
D.2.1 Major changes ........................................................................................................................D-3
D.3 Open source licenses ............................................................................................D-3
ABBREVIATIONS
INDEX
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
x T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
This chapter outlines safety and technical support information.
1.1 Safety symbols and definitions

Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury,
equipment damage, or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
1.1.1 General cautions and warnings

The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage terminals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the alternating current (AC), and voltage input match the ratings
specified on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1-1

FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety
cautions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
1 Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to such
equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated,
unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are working
on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
Personal safety can be affected if the product is physically modified by the end user. Modifications to the product
outside of recommended wiring configuration, hardware, or programming boundaries is not recommended end-use
practice. Product disassembly and repairs are not permitted. All service needs to be conducted by the factory.
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M
devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
1.2 For further assistance

For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe e-mail: multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
When contacting GE by e-mail, optionally include a device information file, which is generated in the EnerVista software by
clicking the Service Report button. The service report also can be generated in the field, for example with a USB cable
connected between the graphical front panel and a computer, and the Device Setup configured for the USB connection.
1-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE
Figure 1-1: Generate service report in EnerVista software

FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Chapter 2: Product description
Product description
This chapter outlines the product, order codes, and specifications.
2.1 Product description

The T35 Transformer Protection System is part of the Universal Relay (UR) family of products. It is a microprocessor-based
relay for protecting small, medium, and large three-phase power transformers involved in complicated power system
configurations. The relay is available with two to six banks of three-phase inputs: either CTs or CTs and VTs.
Typical T35 applications include:
• Transformers with windings connected between two or more breakers
• Transformers with windings without associated breakers, where the only available ones are those on buses, lines, or
feeders
The percent and instantaneous differential elements are the primary protection elements. The backup protection
elements, such as instantaneous overcurrent, can be expressed in fully configurable FlexElements™. The relay can also be
configured to protect transformers with any phase shift between the windings and handle up to 32 times the ratio
mismatch.
Voltage, current, and power metering are built into the relay as standard features. Current parameters are available as
total waveform root mean square (RMS) magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of
storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content, and sampling rate, as well as data logger acquisition of up to
16 channels, with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized
with an IRIG-B signal, using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) over the Ethernet port, or using the Precision Time
Protocol (PTP). This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system. Events
can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography data capture that can be set to record the
measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a computer. These tools significantly reduce
troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.
Several options are available for communication. An RS232 port (USB port with the graphical front panel) can be used to
connect to a computer to program settings and monitor of actual values. The rear RS485 port allows independent access
by operating and engineering staff. It can be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. All serial
ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is supported on the RS485 interface. IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP, and Modbus cannot be enabled simultaneously on this interface. Also only one of the DNP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC
60870-5-104 protocols can be enabled at any time on the relay. When the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is chosen, the RS485
port has a fixed even parity and the baud rate can be either 9.6 kbps or 19.2 kbps. The 100Base-FX Ethernet interface
provides fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/TCP, TFTP,

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
and PTP (according to IEEE Std. 1588-2008 or IEC 61588), and it allows access to the relay via any standard web browser
(T35 web pages). The IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port also supports the
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) of IEC 62439-3 (clause 4, 2012) when purchased as an option.
GOOSE and secure Routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE) are supported with software options. Process Bus GOOSE is supported with
a hardware module and software options.
With a Process Bus Module that supports IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869, PRP is supported on two Ethernet ports to IEC
62439, and High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) is supported on four Ethernet ports for dual HSR ring
2 architecture.
Settings and actual values can be accessed from the front panel or EnerVista software.
The T35 uses flash memory technology that allows field upgrading as new features are added. Firmware and software are
upgradable.
The following single-line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
device numbers.
Table 2-1: ANSI device numbers and functions supported
Device Function
number
49 Thermal Overload Protection
50/87 Instantaneous Differential Overcurrent
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
51G Ground Time Overcurrent
51P Phase Time Overcurrent
81U Underfrequency
87RGF Restricted Ground Fault
87T Transformer Differential

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SECURITY
Figure 2-1: Single-line diagram
Measure Measure
3I_0 3I_0
87RGF 87RGF
Calculate
3I_0
Calculate
3I_0 2
50G 50G
Calculate Calculate Calculate 2nd and
restraint current operate current 5th harmonics
51G 51G
51P 50/87 51P
50P 50P
87T
49 49
Metering
81U
Transducer input FlexElementTM

828785A1.CDR
Table 2-2: Other device functions

Function Function Function
Breaker Arcing Current I2t Event Recorder Time Synchronization over SNTP
Breaker Control FlexElements (16) Transducer Inputs/Outputs
Contact Inputs (up to 120) FlexLogic Equations Transformer Aging Factor
Contact Outputs (up to 72) IEC 60870-5-103 Communications Transformer Hottest-Spot Temperature
Control Pushbuttons IEC 61850 Communications Transformer Loss-of-Life
CT Failure Detector IEC 62351-9 Data and Communications Trip Bus
Security
CyberSentry™ Security Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, Power User Definable Displays
Factor, Frequency
Data Logger Modbus Communications User-Programmable Fault Reports
Digital Counters (8) Modbus User Map User Programmable LEDs
Digital Elements (96) Non-Volatile Latches User Programmable Pushbuttons
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) Non-Volatile Selector Switch User Programmable Self-Tests
Disconnect Switches Oscillography Virtual Inputs (128)
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Setting Groups (6) Virtual Outputs (256)
Ethernet Global Data Protocol Time synchronization over IRIG-B or IEEE
1588
2.2 Security
The following security features are available:

SECURITY CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
• Password security — Basic security present by default

• EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The
feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
• CyberSentry security — Advanced security available using a software option. When purchased, the option is enabled
automatically, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
To maximize security, see the UR Family Secure Deployment Guide.
2 2.2.0.1 EnerVista security

The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows an administrator to
manage the privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of UR devices by multiple personnel within a
substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The EnerVista security
management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after
installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
Basic password or enhanced CyberSentry security applies, depending on purchase.
From EnerVista UR Setup version 8.50, the user management is removed under Admin menu. The Login User is for Factory
login only.
2.2.0.2 Password security

Password security is a basic security feature present by default.
Two levels of password security are provided: command and setting. Use of a password for each level controls whether all
users can enter commands and/or change settings.
Two types of connection security are provided: password entry from local or remote connection. Local access is defined as
access to settings or commands via the front panel interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through a front
panel port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. These two settings are on by default and apply to all users.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the T35, the remote password is used. If the
connection is to a front panel port, the local password applies. (These two local and remote password settings are not
shown in the figure.)
Password access events are logged in the Event Recorder.
Figure 2-2: Access control by passwords and connection type

2.2.0.3 CyberSentry security

CyberSentry security is available using software options that provide advanced security. When the option is purchased, the
basic password security is disabled automatically.
CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
• An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) client that is
managed centrally, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses secure standards-
based strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection. In other words, this option uses a RADIUS
server for user authentication. 2
• A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR device
operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA server.
That is, Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, and Observer roles are used.
• Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management (SIEM)
systems for centralized cybersecurity monitoring
• Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and UR devices
using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in Galois Counter
Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH and approved by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for cryptographic systems
CyberSentry user roles

CyberSentry user roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) limit the levels of access to various UR
functions. This means that the EnerVista software allows for access to functionality based on the user’s logged in role.
Example: Administrative functions can be segmented from common operator functions, or engineering type access, all of
which are defined by separate roles so that access of UR devices by multiple personnel within a substation is allowed.
One role of one type is allowed to be logged in at a time. For example, one Operator can be logged in but not a second
Operator at the same time. This prevents subsets of settings from being changed at the same time.
Figure 2-3: CyberSentry user roles
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Observer Supervisor
842838A2.CDR
The table lists user roles and permissions.
Table 2-3: Permissions by user role with CyberSentry

Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer
Summary Complete access Complete access Command Authorizes Default role
except for menu writing
CyberSentry
Security
Device Definition R R R R R
Settings
|---------- Product Setup

SECURITY CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

|--------------- Security RW R R R R
(CyberSentry)
|--------------- Supervisory See table notes R R See table R
notes
|--------------- Display Properties RW RW R R R
|--------------- Clear Relay Records RW RW R R R
(settings)
2 |--------------- Communications RW RW R R R
|--------------- Modbus User Map RW RW R R R
|--------------- Real Time Clock RW RW R R R
|--------------- Oscillography RW RW R R R
|--------------- Data Logger RW RW R R R
|--------------- Demand RW RW R R R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW RW R R R
LEDs
Self Tests
|--------------- Control Pushbuttons RW RW R R R
Pushbuttons
|--------------- Flex state RW RW R R R
Parameters
|--------------- User-Definable RW RW R R R
Displays
|--------------- Direct I/O RW RW R R R
|--------------- Teleprotection RW RW R R R
|--------------- Installation RW RW R R R
|---------- System Setup RW RW R R R
|---------- FlexLogic RW RW R R R
|---------- Grouped Elements RW RW R R R
|---------- Control Elements RW RW R R R
|---------- Inputs / Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Input RW RW R R R
threshold
|--------------- Virtual Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Contact Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Virtual Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Resetting RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Inputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Outputs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Teleprotection RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Analogs RW RW R R R
|--------------- Direct Integers RW RW R R R
|---------- Transducer I/O RW RW R R R
|---------- Testing RW RW R R R
|---------- Front Panel Label Designer NA NA NA NA NA
|---------- Protection Summary NA NA NA NA NA
Commands RW RW RW R R
|---------- Virtual Inputs RW RW RW R R


|---------- Clear Records RW RW RW R R
|---------- Set Date and Time RW RW RW R R
User Displays R R R R R
Targets R R R R R
Actual Values R R R R R
|---------- Front Panel R R R R R
|---------- Status R R R R R 2
|---------- Metering R R R R R
|---------- Transducer I/O R R R R R
|---------- Records R R R R R
|---------- Product Info R R R R R
Maintenance RW RW R R R
|---------- Modbus Analyzer NA NA NA NA NA
|---------- Change front panel RW RW RW R R
|---------- Update firmware Yes No No No No
|---------- Retrieve file Yes No No No No
Table Notes:
RW = read and write access
R = read access
Supervisor = RW (default), Administrator = R (default), Administrator = RW (only if Supervisor role is disabled)
NA = the permission is not enforced by CyberSentry security
CyberSentry user authentication

The following types of authentication are supported by CyberSentry to access the UR device:
• Device Authentication (local UR device authenticates)
• Server Authentication (RADIUS server authenticates)
The EnerVista software allows access to functionality that is determined by the user role, which comes either from the local
UR device or the RADIUS server.
The EnerVista software has a device authentication option on the login screen for accessing the UR device. When the
"Device" button is selected, the UR uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to authenticate the
user. In this case, it uses its built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Observer, Operator, or Administrator and
Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled) as login names and the associated passwords are stored on the UR
device. As such, when using the local accounts, access is not user-attributable.
In cases where user-attributable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance reasons, use
RADIUS authentication.
When the "Server" Authentication Type option is selected, the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device, nor is such
information ever transmitted without cryptographic protection.
CyberSentry server authentication

The UR has been designed to direct automatically the authentication requests based on user names. In this respect, local
account names on the UR are considered as reserved and not used on a RADIUS server.
The UR detects automatically whether an authentication request is to be handled remotely or locally. As there are five local
accounts possible on the UR, if the user ID credential does not match one of the five local accounts, the UR forwards
automatically the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided.

ORDER CODES CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
If a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In this
situation, use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system.
2.3 Order codes

The order code is on the product label and indicates the product options applicable.
2 The T35 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit. It consists of the following
modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, contact input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay
communications. Module options are specified at the time of ordering.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest options.
The letters in the top row of the table correspond to slots in the UR chassis, for example slot F, H, or U.
The R-GOOSE protocol described in IEC 61850-8-1 is available through the IEC 61850 software option. R-GOOSE
security requires the CyberSentry software option.
Process Bus GOOSE requires an IEC 61850-9-2LE / IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, as well as IEC 61850, PRP, and
IEEE 1588 software options.
For Japanese, the settings display in Japanese on the graphical front panel, while the keys printed on the panel are
in English.
2.3.1 Order codes with enhanced CT/VT modules

Table 2-4: T35 order codes for horizontal units
T35 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P ** - U ** - W/X ** For Full Size Horizontal Mount
BASE UNIT T35 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC)
U | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and Two Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC), One 10/100Base-TX
(SFP with RJ45)
V | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three 10/100Base-TX (SFP with RJ45)
W | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with Two 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet,
RJ-45
SOFTWARE OPTIONS 00 | | | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
03 | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850
04 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
A0 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
A3 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C0 | | | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C3 | | | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
D3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
E0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ORDER CODES

MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
A | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE C | | | | | | | English display
D | | | | | | | French display
R | | | | | | | Russian display
P | | | | | | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
G | | | | | | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
S | | | | | | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
K | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
2
N | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
H | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Polish display
O | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Polish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
E | | | | | | | 7" Graphical front panel display in multiple languages with USB front port and
programmable pushbuttons (English, French, Chinese, Russian, Turkish, German,
Polish, Japanese)
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
(redundant supply must H | | | | | RH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
be same type as main supply) L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | RL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
CT/VT DSP | | XX | XX | No DSP module
8L | 8L | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8M | 8M | 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8N | 8N | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
8R | 8R | 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B 4B 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C 4C 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D 4D 4D 4D 16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a
case)
4L 4L 4L 4L 4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 67 67 67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A 6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B 6B 6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C 6C 6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D 6D 6D 6D 16 Contact inputs
6E 6E 6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 6F 6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G 6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6H 6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 6K 6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L 6L 6L 6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 6M 6M 6M 6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 6N 6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6P 6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 6R 6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 6S 6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 6T 6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6U 6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 6V 6V 6V 6V 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8
contact inputs
6W 6W 6W 6W 6W 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
6X 6X 6X 6X 6X 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
(select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD inputs
5D 5D 5D 5D 5D 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 5E 5E 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
5F 5F 5F 5F 5F 8 DCmA inputs
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS 2A 2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2B 2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
2H 2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
2I 2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode,
Laser
2J 2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode,
Laser
72 72 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
73 73 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
76 76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 7A 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 7B 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 7D 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
7F 7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
7G 7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 7H 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 7I 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 7K 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
7M 7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
7N 7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P 7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
7Q 7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
7R 7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S 7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T 7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W 7W RS422, 2 Channels

Table 2-5: T35 order codes for reduced-size vertical units

T35 - * ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P/R ** Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
BASE UNIT T35 | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC)
U | | | | | | | | RS485 and Two Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC), One 10/100Base-TX (SFP with RJ45)
V | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three 10/100Base-TX (SFP with RJ45)
W | | | | | | | | RS485 with Two 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
SOFTWARE OPTIONS 00 | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
03 | | | | | | | IEC 61850
04 | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
A0 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
2
A3 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C0 | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C3 | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
D3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
E0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
MOUNT/COATING V | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
B | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE F | | | | | English display
D | | | | | French display
R | | | | | Russian display
K | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
CT/VT DSP XX | XX | No DSP module
8L | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8M | 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
8N | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
8R | 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D 4D 16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
4L 4L 4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A 6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B 6B 6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C 6C 6C 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D 6D 16 Contact inputs
6E 6E 6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G 6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6H 6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 6K 6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L 6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 6M 6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 6N 6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6P 6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 6R 6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 6S 6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 6T 6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6U 6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 6V 6V 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
6W 6W 6W 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
6X 6X 6X 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5A 5A 5A 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
(select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5C 5C 5C 8 RTD inputs
5D 5D 5D 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
5E 5E 5E 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
5F 5F 5F 8 DCmA inputs
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS 2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
(select a maximum of 1 per unit) 2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
For the last module, rear slot P is used for digital 2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
and transducer input/output modules; rear slot R 2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
is used for inter-relay communications modules. 72 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
2
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
2.3.2 Order codes with process bus modules

Table 2-6: T35 order codes for horizontal units with process bus
BASE UNIT T35 | | | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC)
U | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and Two Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC), One 10/100Base-TX
(SFP with RJ45)
V | | | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three 10/100Base-TX (SFP with RJ45)
W | | | | | | | | | | RS485 with Two 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet,
RJ-45
SOFTWARE OPTIONS 00 | | | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
03 | | | | | | | | | IEC 61850
04 | | | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
A0 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
A3 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C0 | | | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C3 | | | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
D3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
E0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850


MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack)
A | | | | | | | | Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh environmental coating
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE C | | | | | | | English display
D | | | | | | | French display
R | | | | | | | Russian display
P | | | | | | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
G | | | | | | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
S | | | | | | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
K | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
2
N | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
H | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Polish display
O | | | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Polish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
E | | | | | | | 7" Graphical front panel display in multiple languages with USB front port and
programmable pushbuttons (English, French, Chinese, Russian, Turkish, German,
Polish, Japanese)
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
(redundant supply must H | | | | | RH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
be same type as main supply) L | | | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
L | | | | | RL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
PROCESS BUS XX 81 XX | XX | IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
(non-HardFiber requires IEC 61850, XX 85 XX | XX | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 2 x 1000Base-SX, LC
PRP, IEEE 1588 software options) XX 86 XX | XX | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 1000Base-SX + 4 x
100Base-FX, LC
XX 87 XX | XX | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 100Base-FX, LC
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX XX XX No Module
4A 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 4D | 16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a
case)
4L 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
6D 6D | 16 Contact inputs
6E 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8
contact inputs
6W 6W | 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
6X 6X | 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode,
Laser
2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode,
Laser
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7T RS422, 1 Channel

Table 2-7: T35 order codes for reduced-size vertical units with process bus
BASE UNIT T35 | | | | | | | | | Base Unit
CPU T | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC)
U | | | | | | | | RS485 and Two Multi-mode fiber 100Base-FX (SFP with LC), One 10/100Base-TX (SFP with RJ45)
V | | | | | | | | RS485 and Three 10/100Base-TX (SFP with RJ45)
W | | | | | | | | RS485 with Two 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
SOFTWARE OPTIONS 00 | | | | | | | No software options
01 | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
03 | | | | | | | IEC 61850
04 | | | | | | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
A0 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1
A1 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
2
A3 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
A4 | | | | | | | CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588
B1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
B3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
B4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C0 | | | | | | | Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
C1 | | | | | | | PRP and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
C3 | | | | | | | PRP and IEC 61850
C4 | | | | | | | PRP, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), and IEC 61850
D0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
D1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
D3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
D4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850 and Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
E0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 and PRP
E1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
E3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
E4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
F0 | | | | | | | PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
F1 | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
F3 | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
F4 | | | | | | | PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
G0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
G1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
G3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
G4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
J0 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103
J1 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
J3 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
J4 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
K0 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
K1 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
K3 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
K4 | | | | | | | IEEE 1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
L0 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
L1 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
L3 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
L4 | | | | | | | IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE 1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
MOUNT/COATING V | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack)
B | | | | | | Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE F | | | | | English display
D | | | | | French display
R | | | | | Russian display
K | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display
M | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display
Q | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
U | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
L | | | | | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
N | | | | | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
T | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
V | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
W | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Y | | | | | Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
I | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display
J | | | | | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
POWER SUPPLY H | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
L | | | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
PROCESS BUS XX 81 XX | IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
(non-HardFiber requires IEC 61850, XX 85 XX | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 2 x 1000Base-SX, LC
PRP, IEEE 1588 software options) XX 86 XX | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 1000Base-SX + 4 x 100Base-FX, LC
XX 87 XX | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 100Base-FX, LC
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX XX XX No Module
4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
4D 16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6C 8 Form-C outputs
6D 16 Contact inputs
6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs
6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
6V 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
6W 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
6X 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)

For the last module, rear slot P is used for digital 2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
input/output modules; rear slot R is used for inter- 2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
relay communications modules. 72 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
2
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7T RS422, 1 Channel
2.3.3 Replacement modules

Replacement modules can be ordered separately. When ordering a replacement CPU module or front panel, provide the
serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules apply to the T35 relay. The modules specified in the order codes for the T35 are available as
replacement modules for the T35.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest options.
Table 2-8: UR order codes for replacement modules, horizontal units
UR - ** - *
POWER SUPPLY | SH A| 125 / 250 V AC/DC module with control power external output
| SL A| 24 to 48 V DC-only module with control power external output
TH A 125 / 250 V AC/DC module with NO control power external output
CPU | T | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| U | RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| V | RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
| W | RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE | 3C | Horizontal front panel with keypad and English display
| 3D | Horizontal front panel with keypad and French display
| 3R | Horizontal front panel with keypad and Russian display
| 3A | Horizontal front panel with keypad and Chinese display
| 3P | Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
| 3G | Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
| 3S | Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
| 3B | Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
| 3K | Enhanced front panel with English display
| 3M | Enhanced front panel with French display
| 3Q | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
| 3U | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
| 3L | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3N | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3T | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3V | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3I | Enhanced front panel with German display
| 3J | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3H | Enhanced front panel with Polish display
| 3O | Enhanced front panel with Polish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3Z | Enhanced front panel with Japanese display
| 3X | Enhanced front panel with Japanese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3E | 7" Graphical front panel display in multiple languages with USB front port and user-programmable pushbuttons
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
| 4D | 16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
| 6D | 16 Contact inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6W | 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)

UR - ** - *
| 6X | 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
CT/VT MODULES | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
(not available for the C30) | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
PROCESS BUS MODULES | 81 | IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
| 85 | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 2 x 1000Base-SX, LC
| 86 | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 1000Base-SX + 4 x 100Base-FX, LC
| 87 | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 100Base-FX, LC
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 2H | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 2I | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
2
| 2J | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 72 | 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5A | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
| 5C | 8 RTD inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
| 5F | 8 DCmA inputs
Table 2-9: UR order codes for replacement modules, vertical units

UR - ** - *
POWER SUPPLY | SH B| 125 / 250 V AC/DC module with control power external output
| SL B| 24 to 48 V DC-only module with control power external output
TH B 125 / 250 V AC/DC module with NO control power external output
CPU | T | RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| U | RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
| V | RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
| W | RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE | 3F | Vertical front panel with keypad and English display
| 3D | Vertical front panel with keypad and French display
| 3R | Vertical front panel with keypad and Russian display
| 3A | Vertical front panel with keypad and Chinese display
| 3K | Enhanced front panel with English display
| 3M | Enhanced front panel with French display
| 3Q | Enhanced front panel with Russian display
| 3U | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
| 3L | Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3N | Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3T | Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3V | Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
| 3I | Enhanced front panel with German display
| 3J | Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 4A | 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
| 4B | 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
| 4C | 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
| 4D | 16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
| 4L | 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
| 67 | 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
| 6A | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6B | 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6C | 8 Form-C outputs
| 6D | 16 Contact inputs
| 6E | 4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6F | 8 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6G | 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6H | 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6K | 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
| 6L | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6M | 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6N | 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6P | 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6R | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6S | 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6T | 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6U | 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
| 6V | 2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
| 6W | 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
| 6X | 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
CT/VT MODULES | 8L | Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
(not available for the C30) | 8N | Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8M | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
| 8R | Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
PROCESS BUS | 81 | IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
| 85 | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 2 x 1000Base-SX, LC
| 86 | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 1000Base-SX + 4 x 100BaseFx, LC
| 87 | IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 Process Bus Module, 4 x 100Base-FX, LC

SIGNAL PROCESSING CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
UR - ** - *
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS | 2A | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
| 2B | C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
| 2H | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 2I | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 2J | Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 76 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 77 | IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7A | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7B | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
| 7C | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
| 7D | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
2
| 7F | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
| 7G | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
| 7H | 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7I | 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
| 7J | 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
| 7K | 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
| 7M | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
| 7N | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
| 7P | Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
| 7Q | Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
| 7R | G.703, 1 Channel
| 7S | G.703, 2 Channels
| 7T | RS422, 1 Channel
| 7W | RS422, 2 Channels
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS | 5A | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
| 5C | 8 RTD inputs
| 5D | 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
| 5E | 4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
| 5F | 8 DCmA inputs
2.4 Signal processing

2.4.1 UR signal processing
The URs are microprocessor-based protective relays that are designed to measure power system conditions directly via CT
and VT inputs and via other sources of information, such as analog inputs, communications inputs, and contact inputs. The
following figure shows the overall signal processing in URs.
An analog low pass anti-aliasing filter with a 3 dB corner frequency is set at 2.4 kHz and is used for current and voltage
analog filtering as well as signal conditioning. The same filtering is applied for phase, ground currents, phase-to-phase
(when applicable), and auxiliary voltages. The 2.4 kHz cut-off frequency applies to both 50 and 60 Hz applications and fixed
in the hardware, and thus is not dependent on the system nominal frequency setting.

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SIGNAL PROCESSING
Figure 2-4: UR signal processing
Analog Analog low- Analog-to- Digital band- Phasor

Inputs pass filter Digital pass filter estimation
Converter
½ cycle Fundament
U A Fourier al freq.
Phasors,
From 1 cycle Seq. com-
2
CT/VT Fourier ponents
I Frequency
D
T
RMS
values
Synchro-
Sampling phasors Analog Outputs
frequency filtering
DSP module module
Tracking
HMI frequency Events
selection,
Protection
Ethernet algorithms
ports
estimation Control Comtrade, data
I> elements,
Commun logger
Serial i-cation Z< monitoring
Serial
ports protocols U< elements,
FlexLogic, DNP, Modbus,
IEC60870
IRIG-B Accurate
Real- Time PMU (IEEE C37.118,
IEEE stamping
Ethernet
1588 Time Synchrophasors IEC 61850-90-5)
clock Aggregation,
SNTP calculations post-filtering IEC 61850 (GOOSE,
CPU module MMS Server)
comms module
Contact Inputs
Analog Inputs
Inter-relay
Inter-relay
module
Channel module comms module

Ddebounce monitorin A
filtering g CRC
check D Contact Outputs
module
G.703, RS-422,
Optoisolated C37.94, direct fiber DCmA, RTD
859740A1.vsd
The UR samples its AC signals at 64 samples per cycle, that is, at 3840 Hz in 60 Hz systems, and 3200 Hz in 50 Hz systems.
The sampling rate is adjusted dynamically to the actual system frequency by an accurate and fast frequency tracking
system.
The analog/digital converter has the following ranges of AC signals:
Voltages:
r 2 260 V Eq. 2-1
Currents:
r 2 46rated A Eq. 2-2
Current harmonics are estimated based on raw samples with the use of the full-cycle Fourier filter. Harmonics 2nd through
25th are estimated.

SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
True RMS value for the current is calculated on a per-phase basis. The true RMS can be used for demand recording or as an
input signal to Time Overcurrent function, if the latter is intended for thermal protection. The true RMS is calculated as per
the widely accepted definition:
t
1 2
I RMS t = -- ³ i t dt
T
t–T Eq. 2-3
2 RMS values include harmonics, inter-harmonics, DC components, and so on, along with fundamental frequency values.
The true RMS value reflects thermal effects of the current and is used for the thermal related monitoring and protection
functions.
Protection and control functions respond to phasors of the fundamental and/or harmonic frequency components
(magnitudes and angles), with an exception for some functions that have an option for RMS or fundamental
measurements, or some function responding to RMS only. This type of response is explained typically in each element's
section in this instruction manual.
Currents are pre-filtered using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter. The filter is designed to reject DC components
and low-frequency distortions, without amplifying high-frequency noise. This filter is referred to as a modified MIMIC filter,
which provides excellent filtering and overall balance between speed and accuracy of filtering. The filter is cascaded with
the full-cycle Fourier filter for the current phasor estimation.
Voltages are pre-filtered using a patented FIR digital filter. The filter has been optimized to reject voltage-transformer-
specific distortions, such as Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) noise and high-frequency oscillatory components. The
filter is cascaded with the half-cycle Fourier filter for the voltage phasor estimation.
The URs measure power system frequency using the Clarke transformation by estimating the period of the waveform from
two consecutive zero-crossings in the same direction (negative-to-positive). Voltage or current samples are pre-filtered
using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter to remove high frequency noise contained in the signal. The period is
used after several security conditions are met, such as true RMS signal must be above 6% nominal for a certain time. If
these security conditions are not met, the last valid measurement is used for a specific time after which the UR reverts to
nominal system frequency.
Synchrophasors are calculated using a patented convolution integral algorithm. This algorithm allows use of the same
time-stamped samples, which are used for protection and taken at the same sampling frequency. This allows URs to use
one sampling clock for both protection algorithms and synchrophasors.
Synchrophasors on firmware versions 7.23 and up have been tested and certified to meet IEEE C37.118-2011 and
C37.118.1a-2014 standards for both metering and protection classes with outputs available up to 60 synchrophasors per
second for the metering class and 120 synchrophasors per second for the protection class. Synchrophasors measurement
is also available via IEC 61850-90-5 protocol.
The contact inputs threshold is settable in the firmware with 17, 33, 84, and 166 V DC settings available. Inputs are scanned
every 0.5 ms and can be conditioned for the critical applications, using debounce time timer, settable from 0.0 to 16.0 ms.
Contact inputs with auto-burnishing are available as well, when external contacts are exposed to the contamination in a
harsh industrial environment.
All measured values are available in the UR metering section on the front panel and via communications protocols.
Measured analog values and binary signals can be captured in COMTRADE format with sampling rates from 8 to 64
samples per power cycle. Analog values can be captured with the Data Logger, allowing much slower rates extended over
a long period of time.
Other advanced UR order code options are available to support IEC 61850 (including fast GOOSE, ICD/CID/IID files, and so
on), IEEE 1588 (IEEE C37.238 power profile) based time synchronization, CyberSentry (advanced cyber security), the Parallel
Redundancy Protocol (PRP), IEC 60870-5-103, and so on.
2.5 Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
2.5.1 Protection elements

The operating times include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic
operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. Take this into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other
protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other intelligent electronic
devices (IEDs) or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. If not specified, the operate times
given here are for a 60 Hz system at nominal system frequency. Operate times for a 50 Hz system are 1.2 times longer.
Timer Accuracy is specified as a percentage of the total operating time that is the sum of the Operate Time and settable
Pickup Delay.
NOTE 1 — Protection and control elements with NOTE 1 have additional operating time delay of up to 3 ms if the T35 is
2
ordered with an IEC 61850-9-2LE / IEC 61869 Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87).
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
Characteristic: Differential restraint pre-set
Number of zones: 1
Minimum pickup: 0.05 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.001
Slope 1 range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1%
Slope 2 range: 20 to 100% in steps of 1%
Kneepoint 1: 1.0 to 2.0 pu in steps of 0.001
Kneepoint 2: 2.0 to 30.0 pu in steps of 0.001
2nd harmonic inhibit level: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
2nd harmonic inhibit function: Adaptive, Traditional, Disabled
2nd harmonic inhibit mode: Per-phase, 2-out-of-3, Average, 1-out-of-3
5th harmonic inhibit range: 1.0 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1
Operate times:
Harmonic inhibits selected: 20 to 30 ms at 60 Hz (see NOTE 1)
20 to 35 ms at 50 Hz (see NOTE 1)
No harmonic inhibits selected: 5 to 20 ms (see NOTE 1)
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated (whichever is greater) for two windings setup
TRANSFORMER INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION

Operating parameter: Compensated differential current per phase
Number of elements: 2
Auto-setting: On demand from keypad or recurring automatic update, per phase (with forced update provi-
sion)
Pickup threshold: 0.010 to 0.500 PU in steps of 0.001
Pickup level accuracy: 0.002 pu for <1 pu current
Hysteresis: 5% or 0.001 pu (whichever is greater)
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or 3 cycles (whichever is greater)
INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL
Pickup level: 2.00 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01
Level accuracy: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated (whichever is greater) for two windings setup
Operate time: <20 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz (see NOTE 1)
RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT

Pickup: 0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout: 97 to 98% of pickup
Slope: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated (whichever is greater)
>2.0 x CT rating: ±1.5% of reading
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Dropout delay: 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Operate time: <2 power system cycles (see NOTE 1)

PHASE/GROUND TOC
Current: Phasor or RMS
Pickup level: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (standard CT for ground)
0.002 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (sensitive ground CT)
0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (Process Bus Module, ground)
Dropout level: 97% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater)
2 > 2.0 × CT:
Timing characteristics:
±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse,
Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™ (programmable); (Curve multiplier 0.00 to 600.00
in steps of 0.01 s)
Definite Time (Time delay = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s)
Reset type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Curve timing accuracy at 1.03 to 20 x pickup:
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate (see NOTE 1)
Voltage restraint: Modifies pickup current for voltage in the range of 0.1 < V < 0.9 VT Nominal in a fixed linear rela-
tionship
PHASE/GROUND IOC
Current: Phasor only
Pickup level: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (standard CT for ground)
0.002 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (sensitive ground CT)
0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 (Process Bus Module, ground)
Dropout level: 97% of pickup
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.5% of reading or ±0.4% of rated (whichever is greater)
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.5% of reading
Overreach: <2%
Pickup delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Operate time: <16 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz (Phase IOC) (see NOTE 1)
<20 ms at 3 × pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC) (see NOTE 1)
<25 ms at 3 x pickup at 60 Hz (Ground IOC) (see NOTE 1)
Timer accuracy: ±3.5% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
TRANSFORMER HOTTEST-SPOT TEMPERATURE

Operating quantity: computed temperature in °C
Pickup level: 50 to 300°C in steps of 1
Dropout level: 1°C below pickup
Pickup delay: 0 to 30000 min. in steps of 1
TRANSFORMER AGING FACTOR

Operating quantity: computed aging acceleration factor (pu)
Pickup level: 1 to 10 pu in steps of 0.1
Pickup delay: 0 to 30000 min. in steps of 1
TRANSFORMER LOSS OF LIFE

Operating quantity: computed accumulated transformer loss of life, in hours
Pickup level: 0 to 500000 hours in steps of 1
TRANSFORMER THROUGH-FAULT MONITORING

Current: RMS
Operation: per phase
Number of elements: 3 per transformer
Through-fault current pickup threshold: 5 pu
Hysteresis: 5%
Total per phase thermal/mechanical damage threshold: 0.100 to10.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Per phase maximum number of through faults: 1 to 2000

Available records on non-volatile memory (since last reset): last 5 events start date, time, duration, thermal/mechanical damage, and
max RMS current per phase. Total of all events damage and fault counters per phase.
UNDERFREQUENCY
Minimum signal: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
Pickup level: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dropout level: pickup + 0.03 Hz
Level accuracy:
Time delay:
±0.001 Hz
0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 2
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
Operate time: typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change
typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change
Typical times are average operate times including variables, such as frequency change instance, and test method, and can vary by ±0.5
cycles.
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT

Principle: accumulates breaker duty (I2t) and measures fault duration
Initiation: programmable per phase from any FlexLogic operand
Compensation for auxiliary relays: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Alarm threshold: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
Fault duration accuracy: 0.25 of a power cycle
Availability: 1 per CT bank with a minimum of 2
THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

Thermal overload curves: IEC 255-8 curve
Base current: 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01
Overload (k) factor: 0.2 to 4 pu in steps of 0.05
Alarm level: 0.2 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.1
Trip time constant: 0 to 999 min. in steps of 0.1
Reset time constant: 0 to 999 min. in steps of 0.1
Minimum reset time: 0 to 999 min. in steps of 0.1
Timer accuracy (cold curve): ±100 ms or 2%, whichever is greater
Timer accuracy (hot curve): ±500 ms or 2%, whichever is greater for Ip < 0.9 × k × Ib and I / (k × Ib) > 1.1
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)

Number of inputs: 16
Operate time: <2 ms at 60 Hz
Timer accuracy: ±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
HARMONIC DETECTION
Pickup threshold: 2.0 to 100.0% of I(f1) (current fundamental frequency phasor) in steps of 0.1%
Pickup level accuracy:
Harmonics: With I(f1) from 0.4 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±2% of reading or ±1% of 100%, whichever is greater
THD: With I(f1) from 0.4 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±2% of reading or ±1% of 100% per each harmonic, which-
ever is greater
Pickup delay: 0 to 600.00s in steps of 0.01
Timer accuracy: ±3% of delay setting or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater) from pickup to operate
Operating time: <10 ms at 2 × pickup at 60 Hz
Note: Accuracy of the DC measurement depends on the duration and content of the DC component, compared to the fundamental fre-
quency current. It also depends on the source of the signal. DSP or HardFiber transducers can saturate and cause higher error than
stated here, while with an MU-320 merging unit as a source, it meets the accuracy stated here due to immunity of the MU-320 to satura-
tion.

TRANSIENT GROUND FAULT DETECTION

Voltage pickup level: 0.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01
Voltage dropout level: 98% of pickup
Timer accuracy: ±3% of operate time or ±1/4 cycle (whichever is greater)
Operating time: <40 ms for 60Hz
<50 ms for 50Hz
2 2.5.2 User-programmable elements

FLEXLOGIC
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable)
Lines of code: 1024
Internal variables: 64
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs),
latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers
Inputs: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Number of timers: 64
Pickup delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Dropout delay: 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
Timer accuracy: ±0.1% of operate time or ±1/8 cycle, whichever is greater
FLEXCURVES™
Number: 4 (A through D)
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
Number: up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability: any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
FLEXELEMENTS™
Operating signal: any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode
Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value
Operating mode: level, delta
Comparator direction: over, under
Pickup level: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Hysteresis: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Delta dt: 20 ms to 60 days
Pickup and dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: set-dominant or reset-dominant
Number: 16 (individually programmed)
Output: stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence: as input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs (Enhanced and basic front panels)

Number: 48 plus trip and alarm
Programmability: from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset mode: self-reset or latched
LED TEST
Initiation: from any contact input or user-programmable condition
Number of tests: 3, interruptible at any time

Duration of full test: approximately 3 minutes

Test sequence 1: all LEDs on
Test sequence 2: all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Test sequence 3: all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS (Enhanced and basic front panels)

Number of displays: 16
Lines of display: 2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters:
Invoking and scrolling:
up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons 2
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number of pushbuttons: 7
Operation: drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 12 on basic front panel
16 on enhanced horizontal front panel
6 on enhanced vertical front panel
48 on graphical front panel (8 physical pushbuttons, 40 graphical interface pushbuttons)
Mode: self-reset, latched
Display message: 2 lines of 20 characters each
Drop-out timer: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
Autoreset timer: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hold timer: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
SELECTOR SWITCH
Upper position limit: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
Selecting mode: time-out or acknowledge
Time-out timer: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Control inputs: step-up and 3-bit
Power-up mode: restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/restore mode
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Operating signal: any FlexLogic operand
Pickup delay: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Dropout delay: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
Timing accuracy: ±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
2.5.3 Monitoring
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Number of records: 3 to 64, configurable
Sampling rate: 8, 16, 32, or 64 samples per power cycle, configurable
Triggers: any FlexLogic operand, configurable
Trigger position: 0 to 100%, configurable
Recorded data: raw AC input channels
up to 127 configured digital channels (+ 1 trigger operand), representing any FlexLogic operand
up to 32 configured analog channels, representing any measured analog value
Data storage: in non-volatile memory
Format: COMTRADE IEEE C37.111 (1999 or 2013)
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: 1024 events
Time-tag: to 1 microsecond

Triggers: any FlexLogic operand, configurable

Data storage: in non-volatile memory
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT

Pre-fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Fault trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Recorder quantities: 32 (any FlexAnalogTM value)
2 DATA LOGGER
Number of channels: 1 to 16
Parameters: any available analog actual value
Sampling rate: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
Trigger: any FlexLogic operand
Mode: continuous or triggered
Storage capacity: (NN is dependent on memory)
1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
↓
60-minute rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
2.5.4 Metering
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater)
> 2.0 × CT rating: ±1.0% of reading
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy at 0.1 to 1.5 x CT rating and 0.8 to 1.2 x VT rating:
±1.0% of reading at –1.0 ≤ PF < –0.8 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

±1.0% of reading at –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2
APPARENT POWER (VA)

±1.0% of reading
FREQUENCY
Accuracy for 20 to 65 Hz input at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: ±0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement)
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: ±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)
I > 0.25 pu: ±0.005 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)

2.5.5 Inputs
AC CURRENT
CT rated primary: 1 to 50000 A
CT rated secondary: 1 or 5 A by connection
Relay burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Conversion range:
Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground CT module: 0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical 2
Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated
1 sec at 100 times rated
continuous 4x Inom
URs equipped with 24 CT inputs have a maximum operating temperature of 50°C
Short circuit rating: 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (primary current to external CT)
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: 25.0 to 240.0 V
VT ratio: 1.00 to 24000.00
Relay burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V
Conversion range: 1 to 275 V
Voltage withstand: continuous at 260 V to neutral
1 min/hr at 420 V to neutral
FREQUENCY
Nominal frequency setting: 25 to 60 Hz
Sampling frequency: 64 samples per power cycle
Tracking frequency range with DSP: 20 to 70 Hz
with Process Bus Module 81, 85, 86, 87: 20 to 65 Hz
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance: ±10%
Contacts per common return: 4
Recognition time: < 1 ms
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Continuous current draw: 4 mA (when energized)
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Dry contacts: 1000 Ω maximum
Wet contacts: 300 V DC maximum
Selectable thresholds: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Tolerance: ±10%
Contacts per common return: 2
Recognition time: < 1 ms
Debounce time: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
Continuous current draw: 4 mA (when energized)
Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA
Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): 0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Input impedance: 379 Ω ±10%
Conversion range: –1 to + 20 mA DC
Accuracy: ±0.2% of full scale
Type: Passive

RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): 100 Ω Platinum, 100 and 120 Ω Nickel, 10 Ω Copper
Sensing current: 5 mA
Range: –50 to +250°C
Accuracy: ±2°C
Isolation: 36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
2 IRIG formats accepted:
IRIG control bits:
B000, B001, B004, B005, B120, B121, B124, B125
IEEE Std C37.118.1-2011
Amplitude modulation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift:
Operating range: 0 to 10 V DC
TTL logic low: 0.0 to 0.8 V DC
TTL logic high: 2.0 to 5.0 V DC
Input impedance: 50 kΩ
Isolation: 2 kV
DIRECT INPUTS
Input points: 32
Remote devices: 16
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Ring configuration: Yes, No
Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
CRC: 32-bit
CRC alarm:
Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
TELEPROTECTION
Input points: 16
Remote devices: 3
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Ring configuration: No
Data rate: 64 or 128 kbps
CRC: 32-bit
2.5.6 Power supply

LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: 24 to 48 V
Minimum DC voltage: 20 V
Maximum DC voltage: 75 V for SL power supply module
Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at maximum load
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: 125 to 250 V
Minimum DC voltage: 88 V
Maximum DC voltage: 300 V
Nominal AC voltage: 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz

Minimum AC voltage: 88 V at 25 to 100 Hz

Maximum AC voltage: 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
Voltage loss hold-up: 200 ms duration at maximum load
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: 2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Power consumption: typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
maximum = 45 W/VA
contact factory for exact order code consumption
2
INTERNAL FUSE
Ratings:
Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V
High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V
Interrupting capacity:
AC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical
DC: 10 000 A
2.5.7 Outputs
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Carry continuous: 6A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Voltage Current
24 V 1A
48 V 0.5 A
125 V 0.3 A
250 V 0.2 A
Operate time: < 4 ms

Contact material: silver alloy
LATCHING RELAY
Carry continuous: 6 A as per IEEE C37.90
Break (DC resistive as per IEC 61810-1):
Voltage Current
24 V 6A
48 V 1.6 A
125 V 0.4 A
250 V 0.2 A

Control: separate operate and reset inputs
Control mode: operate-dominant or reset-dominant
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

Applicable voltage: approx. 15 to 250 V DC
Trickle current: approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR

Threshold current: approx. 80 to 100 mA

FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

Carry continuous: 8A
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Voltage Current
24 V 1A
48 V 0.5 A
2 125 V
250 V
0.3 A
0.2 A

FAST FORM-C RELAY

Make and carry: 0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Minimum load impedance:
Input voltage Impedance

2 W Resistor 1 W Resistor
250 V DC 20 KΩ 50 KΩ
120 V DC 5 KΩ 2 KΩ
48 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
24 V DC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load
impedance.
Operate time: < 0.7 ms

Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 Ω, 2 W
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY

Operate and release time: <100 µs
Maximum voltage: 265 V DC
Maximum leakage current in off state
(excluding voltage monitor circuit current): 100 µA
Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C
Make and carry:
for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
for 0.03 s: 300 A
Breaking capacity:
Specification UL 508 Utility application Industrial application

(autoreclose scheme)
Operations per 5000 operations, 5 operations, 10000 operations,
interval 1 second on, 0.2 seconds on, 0.2 seconds on,
9 seconds off 0.2 seconds off, 30 seconds off
within 1 minute
1000 operations,
0.5 seconds on,
0.5 seconds off
Break capability 3.2 A at L/R = 10 ms 10 A at L/R = 40 ms 10 A at L/R = 40 ms
(0 to 250 V DC)
1.6 A at L/R = 20 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (For dry contact input)

Capacity: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC*
Isolation: ±300 Vpk

*Note: Applicable only to SH and SL models and earlier. There is no DC output for the TH model.
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points: 32
DCMA OUTPUTS
Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Max. load resistance: 12 kΩ for –1 to 1 mA range
12 kΩ for 0 to 1 mA range
600 Ω for 4 to 20 mA range 2
Accuracy: ±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms
Isolation: 1.5 kV
Driving signal: any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
2.5.8 Communication protocols

IEC 61850
IEC 61850: Supports IEC 61850 Editions 1.0 and 2.0. See the UR Family Communications Guide and its con-
formance statements.
RS232 (Enhanced and basic front panels)

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU
USB (Graphical front panel)

Front port: USB 2.0 type B
RS485
1 rear port: up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, DNP 3, IEC 60870-5-103
Typical distance: 1200 m
Isolation: 2 kV, isolated together at 36 Vpk
FIBER ETHERNET PORT

Operates with 50/125 μm and 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Parameter Fiber type

100 Mb multimode
Wavelength 1310 nm
Connector LC
Transmit power –20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity –30 dBm
Power budget 10 dB
Maximum input power –14 dBm
Typical distance 2 km
Full duplex yes
Redundancy yes
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)

Modes: 10 Mb, 10/100 Mb (auto-detect)
Connector: RJ45
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)

Clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)

PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)

PTP IEEE Std 1588-2008 (version 2)
Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238-2017
Clock: Slave-only ordinary clock when using station bus Ethernet interface
Boundary clock when using process bus Ethernet interface
Peer delay measurement mechanism
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)

2 (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
Ethernet ports used: 2 and 3
Networks supported: 10/100 Mb Ethernet
PROCESS BUS MODULE (NON-HARDFIBER)

Ethernet ports: 2 x 1000Base-SX, 1 Gbps LC connectors,
4 x 1000Base-SX (1 Gbps) + 4 x 100Base-FX (100 Mbps) LC connectors, or
4 x 100Base-FX, LC connectors
Number of sampled value (SV) streams: Up to 8
SV subscription profiles: IEC 61850-9-2LE (1 ASDU) or IEC 61869-9 (1 ASDU)
Sampling Rate:
IEC 61850-9-2: 4800 Hz (80 samples/cycle) fixed for 60 Hz - Protection class
4000 Hz (80 samples/cycle) fixed for 50 Hz - Protection class
IEC 61869-9: 4800 Hz for 60/50 Hz - Protection class
GOOSE support: P1 class 1 TxGOOSE, and 8 RxGOOSE
Network Config modes: IEC 62439-3:2012 PRP (ports 1 and2); IEC 62439-3:2012 HSR (ports 1 and 2); IEC 62439-3:2012
Dual HSR (ports 1 and 2, 5 and 6); or Point-to-Point (ports 1 to 8)
Time synchronization: IEC 61850-9-3 PTPv2 Utility profile; PTPv2/PP (IEEE C37.238-2017 over Process Bus Module;
PTPv2/PP (IEEE C37.238-2017; or IRIG-B over CPU for PTP master
Time synchronization mode: Slave-only, master-slave on Process Bus Module, and slave-only on CPU
Simulation mode: Supported for both GOOSE and SV
Test mode (test, test/block): Supported for both GOOSE and SV
OTHER
TFTP, SFTP, HTTP, IEC 60870-5-104, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), IEEE C37.118
2.5.9 Inter-relay communications

SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
Interface type Typical distance
RS422 1200 m
G.703 100 m
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by
the user.
LINK POWER BUDGET AND MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

The following specifications apply to filter interface modules manufactured from January 2012.
Emitter, fiber type Cable type Transmit power Received Power budget Maximum
sensitivity optical input
power
820 nm, Multimode 62.5/125 μm -16 dBm -32 dBm 16 dBm -8 dBm
50/125 μm -20 dBm 12 dBm
1300 nm, Multimode 62.5/125 μm -16 dBm -32 dBm 16 dBm -8 dBm
50/125 μm -20 dBm 12 dBm

Emitter, fiber type Cable type Transmit power Received Power budget Maximum
sensitivity optical input
power
1300 nm, Single 9/125 μm -15 dBm -32 dBm 17 dBm -8 dBm
mode
1300 nm Laser, 9/125 μm 0 dBm -34 dBm 34 dBm -8 dBm
Single mode
1550 nm Laser, 9/125 μm 5 dBm -34 dBm 39 dBm -10 dBm
Single mode
2
The following specifications apply to filter interface modules implemented before January 2012.
Emitter, fiber type Transmit Received Power budget Maximum optical

power sensitivity input power
820 nm LED, Multimode –20 dBm –30 dBm 10 dB –7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode –21 dBm –30 dBm 9 dB –11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Single mode –23 dBm –32 dBm 9 dB –14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Single mode –1 dBm –30 dBm 29 dB –14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Single mode +5 dBm –30 dBm 35 dB –14 dBm
The power budgets are calculated from the manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver
sensitivity.
The power budgets for the 1300 nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver
sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values deviate based on component tolerance.
On average, the output power decreases as the temperature is increased by a factor of 1 dB / 5 °C.
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

Emitter, fiber type Cable type Connector Typical distance
type
Before From
January January
2012 2012
820 nm LED, 62.5/125 μm ST 1.65 km 2 km
multimode
50/125 μm ST 1.65 km 2 km
1300 nm LED, 62.5/125 μm ST 4 km 5 km
multimode
50/125 μm ST 4 km 5 km
1300 nm ELED, 9/125 μm ST 11.4 km 20 km
single mode
1300 nm Laser, 9/125 μm ST 64 km 65 km
single mode
1550 nm Laser, 9/125 μm ST 105 km 125 km
single mode
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses vary from one
installation to another, the distance covered by your system can vary.
CONNECTOR LOSSES (Total of both ends)

ST connector: 0.7 dB (each)
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode: 3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode: 1 dB/km
1300 nm single mode: 0.35 dB/km
1550 nm single mode: 0.25 dB/km

Splice losses: one splice every 2 km at 0.05 dB loss per splice
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.5.10 CyberSentry security

2
OPTIONS
Software options: Level 1
2.5.11 Graphical front panel

DISPLAY
Type: color graphical back-lit LCD display
Size: 7 inches (17.8 cm)
Resolution: 800 by 480 pixels
Pages: 5 single-line diagram pages with controls, status, and metering values
up to 8 annunciator pages with total of 96 annunciator windows
1 phasor metering page for each AC Source
5 tabular metering pages with dynamic metering and status
event records page with dynamic update
product information page
settings, actual values, error messages (targets)
LED INDICATORS
Functions: 5 device status indicators
9 event cause indicators
8 user-programmable pushbutton indicators
PUSHBUTTONS
Type: membrane
Functions: 5 bottom Tab pushbuttons and 1 Home pushbutton for page recall
4 directional, 1 ENTER, and 1 ESCAPE pushbutton element selection
10 side pushbuttons for power system element control
RESET pushbutton
INGRESS PROTECTION
IP code: IP40 front (IP54 front with IP54 mounting collar accessory)
IP10 back (IP20 back with IP20 cover accessory)
2.5.12 Environmental
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Maximum operating range: –40 to 85°C
Continuous operating range: –40 to 60°C1
1 Based on IEC 60068-2-1 and IEC 60068-2-2, Variant Bd and Ad for 16 hrs. The UR can operate up to a surrounding ambient of 85°C,
however operating outside the recommended continuous temperature range for extended periods can result in MTBF degradation and
decrease the response time of the LCD.
Ideal Storage Temperature Range: 15ºC to 27ºC
HUMIDITY
Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at 55°C (as per IEC 60068-2-30 variant 1, 6 days)
Ideal Storage Humidity Range: 30% to 60%
Relative Humidity (RH) Air Quality: Proper ventilation is recommended

OTHER
Altitude: 2000 m (maximum)
Pollution degree: II
Overvoltage category: II
Ingress protection: IP20 front, IP10 back (basic front panel and Rev. 1 enhanced front panel)
IP40 front, IP10 back (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
IP54 front with IP54 mounting collar accessory (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
Ingress protection with IP20 cover accessory:
Noise:
IP20 back
0 dB
2

2.5.13 Type tests

T35 TYPE TESTS
Test Reference standard Test level
1
Dielectric voltage withstand EN 60255-5 2.2 kV
Impulse voltage withstand EN 60255-51 5 kV
2 Damped oscillatory
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 61000-4-18 / IEC 60255-22-1
EN 61000-4-2 / IEC 60255-22-2
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Level 3
RF immunity EN 61000-4-3 / IEC 60255-22-3 Level 3
Fast transient disturbance EN 61000-4-4 / IEC 60255-22-4 Class A and B
Surge immunity EN 61000-4-5 / IEC 60255-22-5 Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity EN 61000-4-6 / IEC 60255-22-6 Level 3
1
Power frequency immunity EN 61000-4-7 / IEC 60255-22-7 Class A and B
Voltage interruption and ripple DC IEC 60255-11 12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC 60255-25 Class A
Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Power magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-8 Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-9 Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity IEC 61000-4-10 Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption IEC 61000-4-11 0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory IEC 61000-4-121 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16 Level 4
Voltage ripple IEC 61000-4-17 15% ripple
1
Ingress protection IEC 60529 IP20 front, IP10 back
Cold IEC 60068-2-1 –40°C for 16 hours
Hot IEC 60068-2-2 85°C for 16 hours
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety UL 508 e83849 NKCR
Section 43 - Temperature test
Energization of Contact Inputs and/or Contact
Outputs for continuous duty is not to exceed a
total of 31 W of power
Safety UL C22.2-14 e83849 NKCR7
Safety UL 1053 e83849 NKCR
Safety IEC 60255-27 Insulation: class 1, Pollution degree: 2, Over
voltage cat II
1 Not tested by third party.
2.5.14 Production tests

THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.

2.5.15 Approvals
APPROVALS
Compliance Applicable council directive According to
CE Low voltage directive EN 60255-5
EMC directive EN 60255-26 / EN 50263
EN 61000-6-5
C-UL-US --- UL 508
UL 1053
2
C22.2 No. 14
2.5.16 Maintenance
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required. When dust has accumulated on the front panel display, wipe with a dry cloth.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
state once per year, for one hour continuously.


Chapter 3: Installation
Installation
This chapter outlines installation of hardware and software. You unpack, mount, wire the unit, turn on power, then install
the software and configure settings.
3.1 Unpack and inspect

1. Open the package and check that the following items have been delivered:
– The relay
– Mounting screws
– Certificate of Calibration
– Test Report
– EC Declaration of Conformity
– Front panel label package
2. Inspect the unit for physical damage.
3. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been delivered. The model number is at the top right.
4. Any protective plastic film on the front panel is normally peeled off, but also can be left on.
5. For any issues, contact GE as outlined in the For Further Assistance section in chapter 1.
6. Check that you have the latest copy of the T35 Instruction Manual and the UR Family Communications Guide, for the
applicable firmware version, available from the GE website.
Instruction manuals and software are not normally delivered with the device. You will need to download all relevant
documentation and software from the GE website, unless you have specifically ordered printed copies of the
documentation. You will need the following:
• GE EnerVista™ software and documentation
• Instruction Manual
• UR Family Communications Guide
The instruction manual outlines how to install, configure, and use the unit. The communications guide is for advanced use
with communication protocols. The warranty is included at the end of this instruction manual and on the GE website.

PANEL CUTOUTS CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.2 Panel cutouts

This section does not apply to the HardFiber Brick; see its instruction manual.
Install the relay in an indoor environment within the environmental specifications. The relay complies with Pollution
Category II, which means installation in an office, laboratory, or testing environment.
3.2.1 Horizontal units

The T35 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable front panel. The front panel is specified as
enhanced, basic, or graphical at the time of ordering. The enhanced and graphical front panels have additional user-
programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators, while the basic front panel has additional user-programmable
pushbuttons.
3 The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The front panel is hinged
to allow access to the modules. The front panel is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth and
for upgrading.
In November 2017, GE began transitioning to a new enhanced horizontal front panel, referred to as the IP54 Front Panel or
Enhanced Front Panel Rev. 2. This panel can be identified by the use of a screw instead of a knob to close the panel. It can
conform to an IP54 rating with the IP54 mounting collar purchased separately. The IP54 mounting collar can be used in
panel-mount installations, not 19-inch rack-mount installations. The IP54 mounting collar cannot be used with Rev. 1
enhanced front panels.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figures, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the front panel to swing open without
interference to or from adjacent equipment.
Mount the relay such that the front panel sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to
the keypad and the front communications port.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-1: Horizontal dimensions (Rev. 1 enhanced front panel)
11.016”
[279,81 mm]
9.687”
[246,05 mm]
17.56”
[446,02 mm]
3
7.460”
[189,48 mm]
6.995” 6.960”
[177,67 mm] [176,78 mm]
19.040”
[483,62 mm] 842807A1.CDR

Figure 3-2: Horizontal dimensions (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
9.687”
[24.605 cm] 10.97”
[27.86 cm]
3 17.59” [44.68 cm]
6.995” 6.96”
[17.767 cm] [17.68 cm]
18.974” [48.194 cm]

842496A1.cdr
Figure 3-3: Horizontal mounting (enhanced and graphical front panels)

18.370”
[466,60 mm]
0.280”
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
7.13” 4.000”
[181.1 mm] [101,60 mm]
17.750”
[450,85 mm] 842808A2.CDR

Figure 3-4: Horizontal dimensions and mounting (basic front panel)

HORIZONTAL TOP VIEW (19” 4RU) REMOTE MOUNTING
VIEW FROM REAR OF PANEL
BEZEL OUTLINE
8x0.156”
(9.5 mm)
0.375”
(3.962 mm)
(47.6 mm)
10.90”
1.875”
8.97”
(227.8 mm) (276.8 mm)
9.80”
(248.9 mm) 6.960”
(9.5 mm)
0.375”
(176.8 mm)
(121.5 mm)
4.785”
0.375”
17.52” Brackets repositioned (9.5 mm)
(445.0 mm) for switchgear mounting 5.000” 0.375”
(127.0 mm)
9.520” (9.5 mm)
14.520” (241.8 mm)
HORIZONTAL PANEL MOUNTING

4x0.28”
(368.8 mm)
17.720”
(450.1 mm)
3
18.37” (7.1 mm
(466.6 mm) diameter)
HORIZONTAL FRONT VIEW
CUTOUT
7.13” 4.00”
(181.1 mm) (101.6 mm) 7.00”
(177.8 mm)
17.75” 19.00”
(450.8 mm) (482.6 mm)
827704B5.cdr
Figure 3-5: Horizontal dimensions (graphical front panel)
µ
>PP@
´
>PP@
µ µ
>PP@ >PP@
µ
>PP@
$FGU

Figure 3-6: Horizontal dimensions (IP54 mounting collar)
MOUNTING PANEL
1.3” [3.3 cm]
3 16.00” [40.64 cm]

Ø 0.200
6 PLACES
8.34”
[21.18 cm]
7.65”
[19.43 cm]
20.19” [51.28 cm]
IP54 COLLAR
NOTES
1. INSPECT THE COLLAR BEFORE INSTALLATION, VERIFY GASKET IS ADHERED TO THE METAL ON ALL SIDES
2. MAKE SURE THE RELAY IS POSITIONED CENTER TO THE CUT OUT
3. INSTALL IP-54 COLLAR, CONFIRM THE GASKET PROPERLY MATES WITH THE PANEL ON ALL SIDES
SECURE USING #8-32 HEX NUT AT 6 PLACES. 842497A1.cdr
3.2.2 Vertical units

The T35 is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable front panel. The front panel is specified as
enhanced or basic at the time of ordering. The enhanced front panel contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons
and LED indicators, while the basic front panel has additional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The front panel is hinged
to allow easy access to the modules. The front panel is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth
and for upgrading.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figures, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the front panel to swing open without
interference to or from adjacent equipment.
Mount the relay such that the front panel sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to
the keypad and the RS232 communications port.

Figure 3-7: Vertical dimensions and mounting (enhanced front panel)

0RXQWLQJ%UDFNHW )URQWRI3DQHO
µ
PP
)URQW
%H]HO
µ
µ PP
PP
3
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG6LGH9LHZ
)URQWRI3DQHO
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG)URQW9LHZ µ
PP
µ µ
PP PP µ
µ PP
PP
7HUPLQDO%ORFNV
µ
µ PP &87287
PP
)URQWRI3DQHO
5HIHUHQFHRQO\ µ
PP
µ
PP
0RXQWLQJ%UDFNHW
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG7RS9LHZ
µ PP
3ODFHV 9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG0RXQWLQJ3DQHO
$FGU

Figure 3-8: Vertical dimensions and mounting (basic front panel)

)URQWRI PP
SDQHO 3DQHO
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
)URQW
EH]HO

PP PP
9HUWLFDOVLGHYLHZ
9HUWLFDOIURQWYLHZ
µ
PP

PP
µ µ
PP PP
3DQHOVKRZQIRU
UHIHUHQFHRQO\

PP 0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
PP
PP
µ
µ
7HUPLQDOEORFNV

PP
9HUWLFDOERWWRPYLHZ
PP
SODFHV
$&'5 9HUWLFDOSDQHOPRXQWLQJ
For side-mounting T35 devices with the enhanced front panel, see the following documents available on the UR DVD and
the GE Grid Solutions website:
• GEK-113180 — UR-Series UR-V Side-Mounting Front Panel Assembly Instructions
• GEK-113181 — Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertical UR Device Instruction Sheet
• GEK-113182 — Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically-Mounted Horizontal UR Device
Instruction Sheet

STEP 1 - CREATE THE HOLES AND CUT-OUT INTO THE PANEL
AS PER DRAWING 843753. PLUG THE DISPLAY CABLE INTO
THE FRONT BEZEL
#8-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BEFORE MOUNTING THE
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
BLACK OXIDE SCREW

UNIT ON THE PANEL
P/N: 1408-0306
#8-3/8" 8 PLACES TO MOUNT THE UNIT
PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
#8 LOCKWASHER
SCREW
EXTERNAL TOOTH
UR 19" P/N: 1435-0002
MOUNTING #6x1/2" PAN PHILIPS 8 PLACES TO MOUNT
BRACKET HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
PLASTITE SCREW
DISPLAY CABLE
GROUND CABLE
ATTACH CABLE TO
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FRONT BEZEL
BEFORE MOUNTING
FRONT BEZEL ON
THE
PANEL
#10-32 NYLOCK
NUT
For side-mounting T35 devices with the basic front panel, use the following figures.
P/N: 1422-1032
4 PLACES SIDE MOUNT COVER
#10-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD P/N: 1004-0018
ZINC
P/N: 1410-0006 UR-V FRONT BEZEL
4 PLACES TO MOUNT THE ASSEMBLY UR-V UNIT
BRACKETS PANEL
Figure 3-9: Vertical side-mounting installation (basic front panel)
STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

MOUNT BRACKETS TO MOUNT FRONT BEZEL TO ASSEMBLE UR-V UNIT
PANEL PANEL TO MOUNTING BRACKETS
843757A2.cdr
3-9
PANEL CUTOUTS
3
Figure 3-10: Vertical side-mounting rear dimensions (basic front panel)
6.66"
(169.2)
5.33"
(135.4)
INCHES
(MILLIMETERS) 2.83"
1.00"
(71.9)
(25.4)
PANEL SHOWN FOR
0.68" 0.04" 1.33" REFERENCE ONLY
(17.3) (1.0) (33.9) (VIEWED FROM FRONT)
3 'X' 'X'
1.00"
(25.4)
OUT
T-
CU
5.27"
(133.8)
0.159" DIA. (6 PLACES)

(4.0)
10.05"
(255.3)
12.20"
(309.9)
'X' 'X'
0.213" DIA. (5.4) 843753A3.cdr

(4 PLACES)
SEE HOLES MARKED 'X'
3.2.3 Rear terminal layout

The rear terminals depend on order code. An example is shown.

Ground
RATINGS: Model: T35H00HCHF8FH6AM6BP8BX7A
T35 Transformer Management Relay

Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual
E83849
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
000
See manual
1601-0114
MAZB98000029
D
GE Multilin Mfg. Date: NOV 26, 2012
- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
PO Num: 600001234.56
LISTED
Item Num:
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
- M A A B 9 7 0 0 0 0 9 9 -
X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F D B
c b a c b a c b a c b a
b a
LK1
Tx1 1
1
2
Rx1
ACT1
2
3
LK2
3
Tx1
4
4
5
Tx2 b a
ACT2 5
1 6
3
1
2 LK3
2 6
3
Rx2 3 7
4
4 7
8
Tx2 ACT3 8
IN
Optional Optional Optional Optional CT/VT CPU module Power

direct contact CT/VT or contact module (T module shown) supply
input/output input/output contact input/output module
module module input/output module
module
828783A3.CDR
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized, else death or serious injury can
result from electrical shock.
Small form-factor pluggable ports (SFPs) are pluggable transceivers. They transmit, receive, and
convert electrical signals to optical signals and vice-versa. Supplied with the device, they are inserted
into the Ethernet ports on the CPU and/or Process Bus modules. A photo in the Maintenance chapter
shows this plug-in device. Do not use non-validated transceivers or install validated transceivers in
the wrong Ethernet slot, else damage can occur.
When using a copper SFP with a Process Bus Module, GE recommends limiting the length of the
copper Ethernet cable to three meters (9.8 feet) and confining it within one bay/cubicle.
When using a Process Bus Module, to view if the SFP is 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps, enter the IP address of
the T35 in a web browser and access Process Card Menu > Process Card SFP Information.
Terminal number assignments are three characters long and assigned by module slot position, row number, and column
letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module), indicated by
an arrow on the terminal block. The figure shows an example of rear terminal assignments.

Figure 3-11: Example of modules in F and H slots
J H G F Slot position
c b a c b a Column letter
Torque 9 inch-pounds
1 H1c H1b H1a F1c F1b F1a 1 Row number

Torque 19 ±1 inch-pounds
2 H2c H2b H2a F2c F2b F2a 2
3 6 H6c H6b H6a F6c F6b F6a 6
842761A2.CDR
The torque used to connect the screws that connect the terminal blocks (top screws a, b, c) and the metal plates over
empty slots to the chassis is 9 inch-pounds. For the screws used to wire the terminal blocks (rows 1 to 8), use 19±1 inch-
pounds.
The CPU module type depends on order code. During manufacturing, the power supply and CPU modules are installed in
slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch-pounds of torque on the screws at the top and bottom of the modules. Wire
connections to these two modules at 13 inch-pounds.
Figure 3-12: CPU modules and power supply
56 (WKHUQHW 56 (WKHUQHW 56 (WKHUQHW 56 (WKHUQHW 3RZHU
E D
/. /. /.
5-
/& FRSSHU
ILEHU

$&7 $&7 $&7 /LQN
/. /. /. $FWLYLW\

E D
$&7
E D
$&7
E D
$&7
E D

/. /. /.

%1&

67
IRU $&7 $&7 $&7 ILEHU
,5,*%
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7&38PRGXOH 8&38PRGXOH 9&38PRGXOH :&38PRGXOH 3RZHUVXSSO\

PRGXOH
$&'5
The following figure shows the optical connectors for CPU modules.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION WIRING
Figure 3-13: LC fiber connector (left) and ST fiber connector (right)
Speeds for the LC connections on non-HardFiber Process Bus Modules are as follows:
• Order code 85 — 1000Base-SX ports 1a and 1b, or ports 3a and 3b
• Order code 86 — 1000Base-SX ports 1a, 1b, 3a, 3b; 100Base-FX ports 2a, 2b, 4a, 4b
• Order code 87 — 100Base-FX ports 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b 3
3.3 Wiring
3.3.1 Typical wiring
For Sampled Value (SV) applications using a Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87 with IRIG-B for
synchronization, follow the recommended cables and grounding connections outlined here and later.

3
3-14
WIRING
7<3,&$/&21),*85$7,21
7+($&6,*1$/3$7+,6&21),*85$%/(
23(1'(/7$
97&211(&7,21 $%& DPS&7V
$ $
% %
& &
:,1',1*
:,1',1*
DPS&7V
$
%
&
:,1',1*
*URXQG
)XVH LVRODWLRQ
OLQN
)D
)D
)D
)D
)F
)F
)F
)F
)F
)F
)F
)F
)F
)E
)E
)E
)E
)D
)D
)D
)D
)D
)D
)D
)F
)F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0F
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
0E
0D
0D
0D
0D
0D
0D
0D
0D
9;
9$
9$
9&
9&
9%
9%
,$
,%
,&
,$
,$
,%
,&
,%
,&
,*
,*
,*
9;
9$
9$
9&
9&
9%
9%
,$
,*
,$
,*
,%
,&
,%
,$
,$
,&
,*
,*
,$
,$
,*
,*
,%
,%
,&
,&
,%
,%
,&
,&
92/7$*(,13876 92/7$*(,13876 &855(17,13876 &855(17,13876

92/7$*($1'
)* +-
+D &217$&7,1387+D ',*,7$/,138762873876 + , +D 7&

+F &217$&7,1387+F + +E
&855(17683(59,6,21
9
+D &217$&7,1387+D +F
+F &217$&7,1387+F , +D
+E &20021+E + +E
9
+F
+E 685*(
, +D
+ +E
9 7&
%E +F

&5,7,&$/
'&21/<
%D )$,/85(
, +D
%E + +E
9
%D 9'& +F
92/7$*(683(59,6,21
%E 287387 , +D

'&
%D 0(' + +E
9
%E +, &21752/ +F
$&RU'& %E /2 32:(5 775$16)250(53527(&7,216<67(0 , +D
%D + +E
9
%D 685*( +F
32:(56833/<
%E ),/7(5 1 &20387(5

7;' 5;'
5;' 7;'
)LEUH
7[ %DVH);
7
2SWLF 5[
3257 6*1' 6*1'

7[ %DVH); ',*,7$/,138762873876 '
5[ 3257

6KLHOGHG 7[ %DVH);
*URXQGDW 3257 ',*,7$/,138762873876
WZLVWHGSDLUV 5[ &
85
'HYLFH 'D
56
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
'D 3,1 3,1
685*(
&20
'D FRP &211(&725 &211(&725
&200218E
&200218E
&200218E
&200218E
'E
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878F
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
&217$&7,13878D
'D ,5,*% 56
,QSXW '%
&RD[LDO %1&
&38
IURQW 3(5621$/
&20387(5
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3F
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3E
3D
3D
3D
3D
3D
3D
3D
3D
8F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8E
8E
8E
8E
8E
8D
8D
8D
8D
8D
8D
8D
8D
Figure 3-14: Typical wiring diagram (T module shown for CPU)
$&'5
1R$:*
PLQLPXP
*5281'%86 &217$&766+2:1
:,7+12 02'8/($55$1*(0(17
02'8/(60867%( &21752/32:(5
*5281'(',) ; : 9 8 7 6 5 3 1 0 / . - + * ) ' %
7(50,1$/,6
3529,'(' ,QSXWV ,QSXWV
RXWSXWV RXWSXWV &7 ,QSXWV &797 &38 3RZHU
7KLVGLDJUDPLVEDVHGRQWKHIROORZLQJRUGHUFRGH
RXWSXWV VXSSO\ 77+&/))++0+3&8':;;
7KLVGLDJUDPSURYLGHVDQH[DPSOHRIKRZWKHGHYLFH
5HDUYLHZ
2SWLRQDO LVZLUHGQRWVSHFLILFDOO\KRZWRZLUHWKHGHYLFH3OHDVH
UHIHUWRWKH,QVWUXFWLRQ0DQXDOIRUDGGLWLRQDOGHWDLOVRQ
ZLULQJEDVHGRQYDULRXVFRQILJXUDWLRQV

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.3.2 Dielectric strength

Dielectric strength is the maximum electric strength that can be sustained without breakdown. It is measured in volts.
The table shows the dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware.
Table 3-1: Dielectric strength of UR modules
Module type Module function Terminals Dielectric strength
From To
1 Power supply High (+); Low (+); (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply 48 V DC (+) and (–) Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
1 Power supply Relay terminals except Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
terminals 8a and 8b
2 Reserved N/A N/A N/A
3 Reserved N/A N/A N/A 3
4 Digital contact inputs/ All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
outputs
5 Analog inputs/outputs All except 8b Chassis < 50 V DC
6 Digital contact inputs/ All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
outputs
7 G.703 All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
RS422 All except 6a, 7b, 8a Chassis < 50 V DC
8 CT/VT All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
9 CPU All Chassis 2000 V AC for 1 minute
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused
by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference
(EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90
specified test voltage for longer than the specified minute.
3.3.3 Control power
Power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the relay. If
incorrect voltage is applied or voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.
The T35, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well-
known to deteriorate over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by
powering up the relay at least once a year.
The power supply module is ordered with one of two possible voltage ranges, and the T35 can be ordered with or without a
redundant power supply module option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges
are as follows (see the Specifications section of chapter 2 for details):
• Low (LO) range — 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
• High (HI) range — 125 to 250 V nominal
All the power supply modules provide power to the relay and a critical failure relay. The critical failure relay is a form-C
device that is energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test
failures. If ongoing self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors section in chapter 7) or
control power is lost, the relay de-energizes.
SL and SH modules also provide an control power external output of 48 V DC for dry contact input connections. The TH
model does not provide this control power external output.
Connect all wires at the back of a UR before connecting to power, else death or serious injury can
result from electrical shock.

WIRING CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
To connect power to the relay:

1. On the power supply module in the first slot, slot B, on the back of the device, connect the three wires to the terminals,
or connect two to the terminals and the third to the ground screw. 14 gauge stranded wire with disconnect devices is
recommended. Use 13 inch-pounds torque. Connect all wires to the relay before turning on power.
For high-reliability systems, the T35 has a redundant option in which two T35 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies becomes faulted, the second power supply assumes the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate that it is functional. The critical fail
relay of the module also indicates a faulted power supply.
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply, as outlined in the table.
Table 3-2: Power supply LED on module
LED indication Power supply
3 Continuous on
On/off cycling
OK
Failure
Off Failure or no power
Figure 3-15: Control power connection
127(
$&RU'& JDXJHVWUDQGHG
ZLUHZLWKVXLWDEOH
GLVFRQQHFWGHYLFHV
LVUHFRPPHQGHG
+HDY\FRSSHUFRQGXFWRU )XVHV
RUEUDLGHGZLUH
%E %D %D %E %E

¯ /2: +,*+
),/7(5 685*(
&21752/
32:(5
6ZLWFKJHDU 85
JURXQGEXV SURWHFWLRQV\VWHP
$&'5
3.3.3.1 Non-volatile data storage

Non-volatile data is temporary data required after a power cycle for relay state, such as latch status before reboot. The
relay saves this data in non-volatile storage every two minutes or when a state change occurs.
If a state change occurs just before a power down (less than two minutes) and the relay power is cycled, some temporary
data can be saved and the prior state is retained at power up. Otherwise, a two-minute powered on period after a state
change ensures that all temporary state changes required after reboot have been saved. A command also is available to
initiate saving of data in the compact flash memory using Commands > Relay Maintenance > Save Volatile Data.
3.3.4 CT/VT modules

The CT and VT inputs are analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines. The
UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
A CT/VT module can have current or voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive.
Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labelled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6
are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C.

Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channels are labelled as
auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and
ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG).
Verify that the connection made to the relay terminals for nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the
secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs can result in equipment damage or
inadequate protection.
To connect to the module, size 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) is used commonly; the maximum size is 10 AWG.
CT/VT modules can be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC
current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is
withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1
to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries can be used.
CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is 10
times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase VT 3
inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules.
These modules have enhanced diagnostics that can detect automatically CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay out of
service.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical, as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram.
The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown as follows. Twisted-pair
cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.
Figure 3-16: Zero-sequence core balance CT installation
UNSHIELDED CABLE SHIELDED CABLE
Ground connection to neutral
Stress cone
Source must be on the source side Source shields
A B C N G A B C
Ground
outside CT
To ground;
LOAD must be on
load side
LOAD 996630A6.CDR
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features, which are optional features for some UR models.
Substitute the tilde “~” symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.

Figure 3-17: CT/VT module wiring
IA5 ~ 1a
IA ~ 1b
IA1 ~ 1c
IB5 ~ 2a
IA5 ~1a IB ~ 2b
IA ~1b IB1 ~ 2c
IA1 ~1c IC5 ~ 3a
IB5 ~2a IC ~ 3b
3 IB ~2b IC1 ~ 3c
Current inputs
8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)

IB1 ~2c IG5 ~ 4a
8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)
IC5 ~3a IG ~ 4b
Current inputs
IC ~3b IG1 ~ 4c
IC1 ~3c IA5 ~ 5a
IG5 ~4a IA ~ 5b
IG ~4b IA1 ~ 5c
IG1 ~4c IB5 ~ 6a
VA ~5a IB ~ 6b
VA ~5c IB1 ~ 6c
VB ~6a IC5 ~ 7a
Voltage inputs
VB ~6c IC ~ 7b
VC ~7a IC1 ~ 7c
VC ~7c IG5 ~ 8a
VX ~8a IG ~ 8b
VX ~8c IG1 ~ 8c
842766A4.CDR
3.3.5 Process Bus Module for HardFiber

The T35 can be ordered with a process bus interface module to interface with the HardFiber Process Bus System, or
HardFiber Brick, allowing bidirectional IEC 61850 fiber-optic communications with up to eight HardFiber Bricks. The
HardFiber system integrates seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic,
metering, and communications.
This process bus system offers the following benefits:
• Reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the UR by
reducing the number of individual copper terminations
• Integrates seamlessly with existing UR applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules
• Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging
For details on the HardFiber system, see its Instruction Manual.

3.3.6 Contact inputs and outputs

Nearly all contact input/output modules have 24 terminal connections. The connections are arranged typically as three
terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals can be used for the outputs of one relay. For
example, for form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common
contacts of the relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision,
depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The input/output modules have three versions of grouping: four
inputs per common return, five inputs per common return on a high-density module, and two inputs per common return.
When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used. If the inputs must be isolated per row,
then two inputs per common return are selected (4D module). If the space limitation in the relay requires use of a high-
density input module (6W), five inputs share one common return and the module has six banks of inputs.
The tables and diagrams that follow illustrate the module types (6A and so on) and contact arrangements that can be
ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
3
position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is
open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector
whose output is set to logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is
set to “On = 1” when there is a voltage across open contact (the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2.5 mA), and the
current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current flowing through the closed contact exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The
voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in
the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as
a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld
the output contacts.
Block diagrams are shown as follows for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional
current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact
outputs. Form-A contact output with or without a current or voltage monitoring option is not polarity sensitive. The polarity
shown in the figure is required for solid-state contact output connection.

Figure 3-18: Form-A and solid-state contact outputs with voltage and current monitoring
~#a ~#a
I I
~#b ~#b Load
V Load V
~#c + ~#c +
a) Voltage with optional
Voltage monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
current monitoring
~#a ~#a
V V
3 I ~#b
Load
I ~#b Load
~#c + ~#c +
b) Current with optional
Current monitoring only Both voltage and current monitoring
voltage monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b
Load
~#c +
c) No monitoring
827862A5.CDR
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON,
CONT OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) that can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command.
See the Digital Elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied
for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
Consider relay contacts unsafe to touch when the unit is energized. Death or serious injury can
result from touching live relay contacts.
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH-IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS

For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring circuit across the
contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high-input
impedance monitoring equipment, such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits can
continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured
as an impedance.
The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-A contact
through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a
source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or
the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module. Where a number sign “#” appears,
substitute the contact number.

When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, give the
FlexLogic operand driving the contact output a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output
contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the
region of the pickup value).
For high-density input/output modules 6W and 6X, use the following guidelines to connect. The new I/O modules use pin
type terminal blocks instead of the current ring type. The new terminals are required to achieve higher I/O count per
module.
• 12 to 24 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.2 mm2), single wire termination
• 16 to 24 AWG (1.31 mm2 to 0.2 mm2), multiple wire termination with matching wire sizes and stranding. Two wires
maximum per circuit
• Suggested wiring screw tightening torque is a minimum 4.43 in-lb (0.5 Nm) and maximum 5.31 in-lb (0.6 Nm)
•
•
Minimum suggested temperature rating for the conductors is 75°C
Wire type: copper
3
For module types 67, 6A, 6B, 6C, 6D, 6E, 6F, 6G, 6H, 6K, 6L, 6M, 6N, 6P, 6R, 6S, 6T, 6U, 6V, 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D, and 4L, use the
following guidelines to connect:
• 12 to 24 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.2 mm2)
• Wiring screw tightening torque is 19 inch-pounds, (2.15 Nm)
• Minimum suggested temperature rating for the conductors is 75°C
• Wire type: copper
Table 3-3: Contact input and output module assignments
~6A module ~6B module ~6C module ~6D module
Terminal Output or Terminal Output or Terminal Output Terminal Output
assignment input assignment input assignment assignment
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-C ~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-C ~2a, ~2c 2 Inputs
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3a, ~3c 2 Inputs
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4a, ~4c 2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6E module ~6F module ~6G module ~6H module

Terminal Output or Terminal Output Terminal Output or Terminal Output or
assignment input assignment assignment input assignment input
~1 Form-C ~1 Fast Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-A
~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs

~6K module ~6L module ~6M module ~6N module

Terminal Output Terminal Output or Terminal Output or Terminal Output or
assignment assignment input assignment input assignment input
~1 Form-C ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-C ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Fast Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Fast Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7 Fast Form-C ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8 Fast Form-C ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
3
~6P module ~6R module ~6S module ~6T module
Terminal Output or Terminal Output or Terminal Output or Terminal Output or
assignment input assignment input assignment input assignment input
~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-C ~3 Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-C ~4 Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5 Form-C ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~6 Form-C ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs
~6U module ~6V module ~6W module 6X module

~1 Form-A ~1 Form-A ~1a Input ~1a, ~2a Form-A
~2 Form-A ~2 Form-A ~2a Input ~3a, ~4a Form-A
~3 Form-A ~3 Form-C ~3a Input ~5a, ~6a Form-A
~4 Form-A ~4 2 Outputs ~4a Input ~7a, ~8a Form-A
~5 Form-A ~5a, ~5c 2 Inputs ~5a Input ~9a, ~10a Form-A
~6 Form-A ~6a, ~6c 2 Inputs ~7a Input ~11a, ~12a Form-A
~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~7a, ~7c 2 Inputs ~8a Input ~13a, ~14a Form-A
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~9a Input ~15a, ~16a Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~10a Input ~17a, ~18a Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~11a Input ~1b, ~2b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~13a Input ~3b, ~4b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~14a Input ~5b, ~6b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~15a Input ~7b, ~8b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~16a Input ~9b, ~10b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~17a Input ~11b, ~12b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~1b Input ~13b, ~14b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~2b Input ~15b, ~16b Form-A
--- --- --- --- ~3b Input ~17b, ~18b Form-A

~6U module ~6V module ~6W module 6X module

--- --- --- --- ~4b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~5b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~7b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~8b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~9b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~10b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~11b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~13b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~14b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~15b Input --- --- 3
--- --- --- --- ~16b Input --- ---
--- --- --- --- ~17b Input --- ---
~67 module ~4A module ~4B module ~4C module

Terminal Output Terminal Output Terminal Output Terminal Output
assignment assignment assignment assignment
~1 Form-A ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used ~1 Not Used
~2 Form-A ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State ~2 Solid-State
~4D module ~4L module

Terminal Output Terminal Output
assignment assignment
~1a, ~1c 2 Inputs ~1 2 Outputs
~8a, ~8c 2 Inputs ~8 Not Used

Figure 3-19: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)
842762A4.CDR


a D a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 / 9 a D a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 0 9 a D
.
, ,
a E a a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E
a F a D a
&217$&7,1D a F a D a
&217$&7,1D a F
a D a F a
&217$&7,1F 9 a D a F a
&217$&7,1F 9 a D
, ,
a E a a E a
&20021E a a E a E a
&20021E a a E
a F a F a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D a E 685*(
a D a D a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F
a E a a a E a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D
a F a F a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F
a D a D a D
a E a
&20021E
a E a a a E a a E
a F a E 685*( a F a F
a D a D
a E a a a E
a F a F
a D a D
a E a a a E
a F a F
a D
',*,7$/,2
a E a
a F
a D
a E a
a F
3
a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 1 9 a D a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 3 9 a D
, ,
a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D a F a D a
&217$&7,1D a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F 9 a D a F a
&217$&7,1F 9 a D
, ,
a E a
&20021E a a E a E a
&20021E a a E
a F a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D a E 685*(
9 a D 9 a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F , ,
a a E a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D
a F a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F
9 a D 9 a D
a E a
&20021E , ,
a a E a a E
a E 685*( a F a F
9 a D
,
a a E
a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 5 a D 9 a D
,
a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D a F a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F a D
a E a
&20021E a a E
a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D
a D a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 6 a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F
a a E a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D
a F a D a
&217$&7,1D a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F
a D a F a
&217$&7,1F a D
a E a
&20021E
a a E a E a
&20021E a a E
a E 685*( a F a F
a E 685*(
a D
a a E
a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 7 a D a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D a F a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F a D a D
a E a
&20021E a a E a a E
a F a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D
a D a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F
a a E a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D
a F a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F
a D
a E a
&20021E
a a E
a E 685*( a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 8 a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D ',*,7$/,2 9 9 a D
, a F a
&217$&7,1F a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F a a E
a E a
&20021E a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D a F
a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F 9 a D a E 685*(
, a D
a E a
&20021E a a E
a a E
a F
a D a
&217$&7,1D a F
a D
a F a
&217$&7,1F a D
a a E
a D a
&217$&7,1D a a E
a F
a F a
&217$&7,1F a F
a D
a E a
&20021E a D a D
a E
a F a a E
a E 685*( a F
a F
a D
a a E
a F
$&'5


',*,7$/,2 : ',*,7$/,2 ;
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a E a D
a a
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a E a D
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a E a D
a a
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a E a D
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a E a D
a a
a E &20021aE &20021aD a D a E a D
a E a D
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a a
a E a D
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a E a D
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D a a
aE a D
aE a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1 aD aE a D
aE a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D aD a a
aE a D
aE &20021aE &20021aD aD aE a D
a a
a E a
&217$&7,1E &217$&7,1D
a a D aE a D
a E a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D a D aE a D
a a
a E a
&217$&7,1E &217$&7,1D
a a D aE a D
aE a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D aD aE a D
a a
aE a
&217$&7,1E a
&217$&7,1D aD aE a D
aE &20021aE &20021aD aD
$&'5
3 For proper functionality, observe the polarity shown in the figures for all contact input and output
connections.
3.3.6.1 Contact inputs

A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply
module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal that must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA flows through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this
contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external
source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source
voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
Figure 3-22: Dry and wet contact input connections
Terminals from type 6B Terminals from type 6B
(Dry) contact input/output module (Wet) contact input/output module
~7a Contact input 1 ~7a Contact input 1
~7c Contact input 2 ~7c Contact input 2
~8a Contact input 3 24 to 250 V ~8a Contact input 3
~8c Contact input 4 ~8c Contact input 4
~7b Common ~7b Common
~8b Surge ~8b Surge
B1b
B1a Critical failure
B2b
Power supply module
B3a
48 V DC output
B3b
B5b HI+
B6b LO+ Control power
B6a
B8a Surge
B8b Filter
827741A5.CDR
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.

There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend
using an external DC supply.
3.3.6.2 General application considerations

Contacts outputs of protective relays, auxiliary contacts from breakers, disconnectors and other devices are connected
generally to contacts inputs of protective relays. In some situations, the contact outputs of some protective relays can
have high impedance connected across it. When such a contact output is connected across a T35 contact input, it can
spuriously operate the T35 input even when the output is open, if there is a substantial distributed capacitance
(represented by C1) present in the wiring between the output and the T35 input, and the debounce time setting in the T35
relay is low enough. This false assertion of the contact input, when there is inadvertent ground present at the DC positive
terminal, can be prevented by inserting a resistor across the T35 input.
The following figure shows a typical DC circuit, with battery ground detection, of contact input. The contact output has
parallel impedance across it (represented by R1).
Figure 3-23: Typical contact input DC circuit 3
$POUBDU*OQVU
$FGU
The presence of the impedance path (R1) across the contact output allows the stray (distributed) capacitance C1 to charge
as shown, thus developing a voltage across the contact input enough to momentarily operate the input while the
capacitance discharges in the presence of DC ground on the positive terminal of the battery.
The duration of the discharge depends on the value of the distributed capacitance, the initial voltage of the distributed
capacitance, and the input impedance of the contact input. If the duration is greater than the debounce time setting, then
the contact input operates.
The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this issue by connecting a resistor across the contact
input, as shown in the next figure, or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the discharge time to
prevent spurious operation of the contact input only if the voltage (with output open) across the contact input due to trickle
current is less than the threshold voltage. This operation of contact inputs also can be prevented by using the Auto-Burnish
contact inputs or contact inputs with active impedance.

Figure 3-24: Contact input connected to a contact output with resistor (R2) across the input
$POUBDU*OQVU
3
$FGU
Application example
This example is for illustrative purposes only and the calculations present the worst-case scenario. In practice, the value of
debounce time can be lower.
Contact input ON state impedance used in the calculation of the discharge period is based on the following table.
Table 3-4: Discharge period
Battery voltage (V) Input impedance (kΩ)
130 50
250 97
Debounce time setting = 2 ms

Assume a stray capacitance of 0.1 μF.
Assume an initial voltage across the stray capacitance "Vinitial" = 19 V (Vthreshold - 65 V), where Vthreshold = 84 V. The
initial voltage Vinitial depends on values of impedance of R1 and contact inputs when the contact input is OFF (non-
activated state).
Therefore, discharge time constant (τ) =50 kΩ *0.1 μF = 5 ms.
Discharge period t is calculated from the following equation:
Vthreshold = (Vbatt - VInitial) *e^ (-t/τ)
84 = -149 *e^ (t/0.005) Eq. 3-1
T = -0.005 * ln (84/149) = 0.0029 s
Therefore, in this example the contact inputs operate.
To prevent this operation, the debounce time must be increased to 4 ms (set debounce time as per the following table) or
insert a resistor less than or equal to "R" as calculated later.
Table 3-5: Typical debounce time setting
Stray capacitance (μF) Battery voltage (V) Debounce time (ms)
0.05 130 2
0.1 130 4
0.2 130 6
0.05 250 3
0.1 250 6*

Stray capacitance (μF) Battery voltage (V) Debounce time (ms)

0.2 250 11
* Default debounce time on contact inputs is 6 ms.

The value of this resistor "R" is calculated as follows:
1. Determine the minimum voltage (V threshold) required to turn on the input. This is determined by direct measurement
or referenced in the input specifications.
2. Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1/3 V threshold (when the contact is OFF, the non-activated
state) as follows:
R = (Vthreshold / 3) / (2 mA) Eq. 3-2
The 2 mA current is used in case the contact input is connected across the GE Form A contact output with voltage
monitoring. Otherwise use the amperage of the active circuit connected to the contact input when its contact output
3.
is open and the voltage across the contact input is third trigger threshold to calculate the resistor value.
When the contact is ON (operate state), the battery voltage appears across the resistor. The wattage rating of the
3
resistor is then:
PR = 1.3 * (Vbatt) ^2 / R Watts Eq. 3-3
4. Applying the following equation to our example:
R = 84 V / 3 * (1 / 2 mA) = 14 kΩ
PR = 1.57 Watts Eq. 3-4
5. Calculating the voltage across the contact input with the Burden Resistor, Voltage across the contact Input:
Vresistor = 2 mA * 14 Kohm = 28 V
Vresistor < contact input threshold (84 V) Eq. 3-5
In conclusion, in this example, the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input AND
when a battery ground is present.
3.3.6.3 Use of contact inputs with auto-burnishing

The contact inputs sense a change of state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external
devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various
types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of
the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of state. This film must be removed to
establish circuit continuity — an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
impulse has a five-second delay after a contact input changes state.
Figure 3-25: Current through contact inputs with auto-burnishing
Current
50 to 70 mA
3 mA
Time
25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR

Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with
auto-burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state is sensed. Then, within 25
to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts,
allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when
external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two
contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (see the Contact
Input and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources.
Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
Figure 3-26: Auto-burnish DIP switches
3 &RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2II
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2II
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2Q
$&'5
The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, check the auto-burnish
functionality using an oscilloscope.
3.3.6.4 Use of contact inputs with active impedance

Contact inputs can be susceptible to parasitic capacitance, caused by long cable runs affected by switching surges from
external circuits. This can result in inadvertent activation of contact inputs with the external contact open. In this case, GE
recommends using the contact I/O module with active impedance circuit.
Active impedance contact input can tolerate external cable capacitance of up to 0.2 µF, without entering the ON state for
more than 2 ms. The contact input debounce time can still be set above 2 ms for added security to prevent contact input
activations caused by external transient ON states.
An active impedance contact input is normally in Low impedance mode during OFF contact state (non-activated
condition). During Low impedance state, contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow fast
discharge of the stray capacitance of the long cables.
When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold, active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance. If voltage
starts rapidly decreasing, this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input. If, however,
voltage stabilizes above the set threshold, the input impedance is switched to High impedance mode of 100 K Ohms. This
value reduces the input current to <3 mA, and contact input switches to the ON state (operated state).
The figure shows the active impedance contact input V-I characteristic. Different thresholds with their corresponding
characteristics are shown by color. The contact input is in the ON (operated) state if the input voltage is to the right of the
colored threshold band (+/-10% tolerance), and the contact input is in the OFF (non-activated) state when input voltage is
to the left of the band. A contact input is in LOW state during non-operated system condition, and actively switches to
HIGH state upon detection of input voltage above the settable threshold.

Figure 3-27: Active impedance contact input V-I characteristic
30
84 V threshold
166 V threshold
17 V threshold
33 V threshold
e
at
st
e
25
nc
da
pe
im
w
Lo
20
3
Current (millamperes)
15
s
m
oh
K
10
10
166 V threshold
84 V threshold
33 V threshold
5 17 V threshold
100 K ohms dance state

HIgh impe
0 5
0 100 150 200 250 300
0
Voltage (Volts) 859757A2.vsd
3.3.7 Transducer inputs and outputs

Transducer input modules receive input signals from external DCmA output transducers (DCmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs). Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard DCmA ranges. Software is provided to
configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Each transducer input/output module has 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals
per row over eight rows. A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive
polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/output channel,
the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The following figure illustrates the
transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that can be ordered for the relay.

Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.
Figure 3-28: Transducer input/output module wiring
$&'5
The following figure show how to connect RTDs.

Figure 3-29: RTD connections

7KUHHZLUHVKLHOGHGFDEOH
5RXWHFDEOHLQVHSDUDWHFRQGXLWIURP
FXUUHQWFDUU\LQJFRQGXFWRUV
57'WHUPLQDOV
685*( aE 57'
+RW aD
57' a
&RPS aF
)RU57' a a 5HWXUQ aE 57'WHUPLQDOV
+RW aD
57' a
&RPS aF
57'
3
0D[LPXPWRWDOOHDGUHVLVWDQFH
RKPVIRU3ODWLQXP57'V
$&'5
3.3.8 RS232 port

On the enhanced and basic front panels is a nine-pin RS232C serial port for programming with a computer. All that is
required to use this interface is a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for
the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for the nine-pin connector on the UR and nine or 25-pin connector on a
computer.
The baud rate for this port can be set, with a default of 115200 bps.
Figure 3-30: RS232 front panel port connection
Front panel 9 pin RS232 Program port
1: N/A
2: (TXD)
3: (RXD)
RELAY
PERSONAL 4: N/A
COMPUTER 5: (SGND) Signal Ground
FRONT PANEL
6: N/A
PROGRAM PORT 7: N/A
8: N/A
9: N/A
9 PIN
RS232 RS232
D CONNECTOR D CONNECTOR
URS232 INTERFACE COM1 OR COM2

SERIAL PORT
RELAY COMPUTER
1 1 8 827758A3.cdr
TXD 2 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 3 2 TXD
4 4 20
SGND 5 5 7 SGND
6 6 6
7 7 4
8 8 5
9 9 22
9 PIN 25 PIN
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

3.3.9 CPU communication ports
3.3.9.1 Overview
There is a rear RS485 communication port on the CPU module.
The CPU module does not require a surge ground connection.
For Sampled Value (SV) applications using a Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87 with IRIG-B for
synchronization, follow the recommended cables and grounding connections. If using a Process Bus Module and IRIG-B as
the synchronizing source, GE recommends moving the grounding from the IRIG-B generator to UR terminal D4a in order to
better protect the IRIG-B input from long bursts of transient noise.

Figure 3-31: CPU module wiring when using a Process Bus Module
00ILEHU
3RUW
7
RSWLFFDEOH 7[ 5[ %DVH);
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOH
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
85 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
*URXQGFRD[LDOFDEOHXVLQJWHUPLQDO'D
6KLHOGHG(WKHUQHWFDEOH 3
8
%DVH7; 3RUW
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH 7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
85 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
3RUW
9
%DVH7;
6KLHOGHG(WKHUQHWFDEOH
%DVH7; 3RUW
%DVH7; 3RUW
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
85 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
6KLHOGHG(WKHUQHWFDEOH
:
%DVH7; 3RUW
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
85 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
*URXQGFRD[LDOFDEOHXVLQJWHUPLQDO'D $&'5
If not using a Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, 87), the following IRIG-B cable and ground connection is appropriate.

Figure 3-32: CPU module wiring for IRIG-B without Process Bus Module
00ILEHU
3RUW
7
RSWLFFDEOH 7[ 5[ %DVH);
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
6KLHOGHG 7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
WZLVWHGSDLUV
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
UHPRWH 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
8
%DVH7; 3RUW
7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
6KLHOGHG 7[ 5[ %DVH); 3RUW
WZLVWHGSDLUV
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
UHPRWH 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
3RUW
9
%DVH7;
%DVH7; 3RUW
6KLHOGHG %DVH7;
WZLVWHGSDLUV 3RUW
'D
56
'D ³
&20
*URXQGDW 'D &20021
UHPRWH 'E
GHYLFH
'D ³ ,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
$&'5
3.3.9.2 RS485 port

RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted-pair wire with transmit and receive data
alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of the port, continuous monitoring and control from a remote
computer, SCADA system, or Power Line Carrier (PLC) is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted-pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must be observed.
For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–” terminals
connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared reference,
or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the shield (drain
wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the T35 COM terminal (#3); others function correctly only if the
common wire is connected to the T35 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.
To avoid loop currents, ground the shield at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to be
grounded at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding
point. Each relay needs to be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also
possible to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Avoid star or stub
connections entirely.

Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally at both communication ports. An
isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum
reliability, ensure that all equipment has similar transient protection devices installed.
Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown in the figure.
Figure 3-33: RS485 serial connection
SCADA / PLC / computer UR-series device

Shield Twisted pair
ZT (*) RS485 +
Data Optocoupler Optocoupler Data
RS485 –
COM
COMP 485COM 3
Ground shield at SCADA / PLC /
computer only or at
UR-series device only Relay
RS485 +
ZT (*) Terminating impedance at
RS485 –
each end (typically 120 Ω and 1 nF)
COMP 485COM
Up to 32 devices,
maximum 4000 feet
(1200 m)
Relay
ZT (*)
RS485 +
RS485 –
COMP 485COM Last device

827757AA.CDR
3.3.9.3 100Base-FX fiber optic ports

The fiber-optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 100 Mbps. Optical
fiber can be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 1310 nm in multimode.
Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use. Dirty or scratched connectors can lead to high losses
on a fiber link.
3.3.10 IRIG-B
There is a round IRIG-B connector at the back of the CPU module, marked "IN." Use is optional.
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices. The
IRIG-B code allows time accuracies of up to 100 ns. The GE MultiSync 100 1588 GPS Clock as well as third-party equipment
are available for generating the IRIG-B signal. This equipment can use a global positioning system (GPS) satellite system to
obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can be synchronized. The IRIG time code
formats are serial, pulse width-modulated codes that can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Using
IRIG-B input, the T35 operates an internal oscillator with 1 µs resolution and accuracy.

DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-34: Options for IRIG-B connection
*36FRQQHFWLRQ *36VDWHOOLWHV\VWHP
85
,5,*% % ,5,*%
WLPHFRGHJHQHUDWRU $ ,5,*% ²
5*FRD[LDOFDEOH 5HFHLYHU
'&VKLIWRU
%1& LQ
DPSOLWXGHPRGXODWHG
VLJQDOFDQEHXVHG
*36FRQQHFWLRQ *36VDWHOOLWHV\VWHP
,5,*%
WLPHFRGHJHQHUDWRU 85
% ,5,*%
'&VKLIWRU
$ ,5,*% ²
DPSOLWXGHPRGXODWHG
VLJQDOFDQEHXVHG 5HFHLYHU
%1& LQ
$&'5
Using an amplitude-modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping.
3.4 Direct input and output communications

3.4.1 Description
The direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules and allows direct
messaging between UR devices. The communications modules are outlined in the table later in this section.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration, as shown in the following figure. The
transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then
connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure
illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to
UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of 16 URs can be connected in a single ring.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-35: Direct input and output single-channel connection
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Tx
UR 2
Rx
Tx
UR 3
Rx
Tx
UR 4
3
Rx
842006A2.CDR
Inter-relay communication (IRC) modules with protocol C37.94 and G.703 are designed for back-to-back communication
connections, so the ring configuration shown in the previous figure does not apply. To establish inter-relay communication
in more than two URs, you need to have a two-channel IRC module and enable the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting
in all relays, as shown in the next figure. This configuration can be expanded to 16 URs, and this configuration does not
provide a redundancy ring since both channels are made into a single ring by the channel crossover function. As per the
figure entitled Typical Pin Interconnection between Two G.703 Interfaces later in this chapter, the clock is supplied typically
by multiplexer (MUX) and all URs are in Loop Timing Mode. If there is no MUX, then UR1 and UR3 can be in Internal Timing
Mode and UR2 and UR4 can be in Loop Timing Mode. That is, connected channels must have opposite timing modes.
Figure 3-36: Ring configuration for C37.94 module (concept also applies to G.703)
7[ 7[ 7[ 7[

08; 85 08; 08; 85 08;
5[ 5[ 5[ 5[
7[ 7[ 7[ 7[

08; 85 08; 08; 85 08;
5[ 5[ 5[ 5[
$&'5
The interconnection for dual-channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows. Two-channel modules allow for
a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The
required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the
first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.

Figure 3-37: Direct input and output dual-channel connection
Tx1
Rx1
UR 1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
3 Tx1
Rx1
UR 3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A3.CDR
The following figure shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels. UR1
and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication channels
can be of different types, depending on the type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to cross-over
from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, set the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting to “Enabled” on UR2. This forces UR2 to
forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
Figure 3-38: Direct input and output single/dual channel combination connection
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Channel 1
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
Channel 2
Tx
UR 3
Rx
842013A2.CDR
The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces and some are outlined here in more detail.
Those that apply depend on options purchased. The options are outlined in the Inter-Relay Communications section of the
Order Code tables in Chapter 2. All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors.

3.4.2 Fiber: LED and ELED transmitters

The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Figure 3-39: LED and ELED fiber modules
7A, 7B, and 7H, 7I, and
7C modules 7J modules
Rx1 Rx1
Tx1 Tx1
3
Rx2
Tx2
1 channel 2 channels
831719A3.CDR
3.4.3 Fiber laser transmitters

The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser modules.
Figure 3-40: 7x Laser fiber modules
72 and 7D 73 and 7K
modules modules
Tx1 Tx1
Rx1 Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
1 channel 2 channels
831720A5.CDR
The following figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber-laser modules.

Figure 3-41: 2I and 2J laser fiber modules

2I and 2J
modules
Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
3 Tx2
2 channels
831827A1.CDR
Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye.
When using a laser Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
3.4.4 G.703 interface
3.4.4.1 Description
G.703 is an International Telecommunications Union (ITU) standard for the transmission of data and voice signals. Modules
7R (one channel) and 7S (two channels) apply.
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. This is module 7S.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not
applicable to this module.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end.
Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are connected internally to ground. Thus, if
pin X1a or X6a is used to ground the shield at one end, do not ground the shield at the other end. This interface module is
protected by surge suppression devices.
Figure 3-42: G.703 interface configuration
Shield ~1a
7S
Tx – ~1b
G.703 Rx – ~2a
channel 1
Tx + ~2b
Rx + ~3a
G.703 communications
Surge ~3b
Shield ~6a
Tx – ~6b
G.703 Rx – ~7a
channel 2
Tx + ~7b
Rx + ~8a
Surge ~8b
842773A3.CDR

The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical
arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Layout section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 3-43: Typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces
Shield X1a X1a Shield
7S
7S
Tx – X1b X1b Tx –
G.703 Rx – X2a X2a Rx – G.703
channel 1 channel 1
Tx + X2b X2b Tx +
Rx + X3a X3a Rx +
Surge X3b X3b Surge
Shield X6a X6a Shield
Tx – X6b X6b Tx –
G.703 Rx – X7a X7a Rx – G.703
channel 2 channel 2
3
Tx + X7b X7b Tx +
Rx + X8a X8a Rx +
Surge X8b X8b Surge
831727A5.CDR
Pin nomenclature differs from one manufacturer to another. It is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB,
RxA, and RxB. In such cases, assume that “A” is equivalent to “+” and “B” is equivalent to “–.”
3.4.4.2 G.703 selection switch procedures

1. With the power to the relay off, remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S) as follows. Record the original location of the
module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal. (For more information on accessing modules, see the Maintenance chapter.)
3. Remove the module cover screw.
4. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes.
6. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7. Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the
module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips
simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.

Figure 3-44: G.703 timing selection switch setting

Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Table 3-6: G.703 timing selections

Switches Function
S1 OFF → octet timing disabled
ON → octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6 S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → dual loopback mode
3.4.4.3 G.703 octet timing

If octet timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal is asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to
higher order systems. When T35s are connected back-to-back, octet timing is disabled (OFF).
3.4.4.4 G.703 timing modes

There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
• Internal Timing Mode — The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the G.703 timing selection to internal
timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set octet timing (S1 = OFF) and
timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
• Loop Timing Mode — The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the G.703 timing
selection to loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (UR-
to-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown.

Figure 3-45: Switches

Loop timing mode
Internal timing mode (factory default)
842752A2.CDR
3.4.4.5 G.703 test modes

In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch that also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer,
and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
3
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
Figure 3-46: G.703 minimum remote loopback mode
'05 'LIIHUHQWLDO0DQFKHVWHUUHFHLYHU
'05 *; '0; 'LIIHUHQWLDO0DQFKHVWHUWUDQVPLWWHU
*; *WUDQVPLWWHU
*5 *UHFHLYHU
'0; *5
$&'5
In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing.
One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the
interface.
Figure 3-47: G.703 dual loopback mode
'05 'LIIHUHQWLDO0DQFKHVWHUUHFHLYHU
'05 *; '0; 'LIIHUHQWLDO0DQFKHVWHUWUDQVPLWWHU
*; *WUDQVPLWWHU
*5 *UHFHLYHU
'0; *5
$&'5

3.4.5 RS422 interface
3.4.5.1 Description
There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel (module 7T) and dual-channel (module
7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 20 to 24 twisted shielded pair cable is
recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are connected internally to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
• Site 1 — Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both
• Site 2 — Terminate shield to COM pin 2b
Match the clock terminating impedance with the impedance of the line.
Figure 3-48: RS422 interface connections
3 Single-channel RS422 module Dual-channel RS422 module
7W
Tx – ~3b Tx – ~3b
7T
Rx – ~3a Rx – ~3a
RS422 communications
RS422 Tx + ~2a RS422 Tx + ~2a

channel 1 channel 1
Rx + ~4b Rx + ~4b
Shield ~6a Shield ~6a
+ ~7a Tx – ~5b
Clock
– ~8b Rx – ~5a
RS422 communications
Common COM ~2b RS422 Tx + ~4a
channel 2
Surge ~8a Rx + ~6b
Shield ~7b
Tx – ~7a
Clock
Rx – ~8b
Common COM ~2b
~ indicates the slot position Surge ~8a
842776A3.CDR
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Figure 3-49: Typical pin interconnect between two RS422 interfaces
7[² :E :E 7[²

7
7
5[² :D :D 5[²

56FRPPXQLFDWLRQV
56FRPPXQLFDWLRQV
56 7[ :D :D 7[ 56

FKDQQHO FKDQQHO
5[ :E :E 5[
6KLHOG :D :D 6KLHOG
:D :D
&ORFN &ORFN
² :E :E ²
&RPPRQ &20 :E :E &20 &RPPRQ
6XUJH :D :D 6XUJH
²
RUNESV
$&'5
3.4.5.2 Two-channel application via multiplexers

The RS422 interface can be used for single-channel or two-channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems.
When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher-order systems in a typical way, observing
transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain
criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system functions correctly when
the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common
feature in most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the
terminal timing feature, two-channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: the send timing

outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1) connects to the clock inputs of the UR RS422 interface in the usual way. In
addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 are also paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By
using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR RS422 channels is derived from a single clock
source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR RS422 channels is synchronized via the send timing leads on data
module 1, shown as follows. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not wanted, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Figure 3-50: Timing configuration for RS422 two-channel, three-terminal application
'DWDPRGXOH
6LJQDOQDPH
7[ :D 6' $ 6HQGGDWD
:
7[ ² :E 6' % 6HQGGDWD

56
5[ :E 5' $ 5HFHLYHGGDWD
&+$11(/
5[ ² :D 5' % 5HFHLYHGGDWD
6KLHOG

:D
:D
56 $ 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
56 % 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
3
&/2&.
² :E 57 $ 5HFHLYHWLPLQJ
56&20081,&$7,216
7[ :D 57 % 5HFHLYHWLPLQJ

7[ ² :E &6 $ &OHDU7RVHQG
56
5[ :E &6 % &OHDU7RVHQG
&+$11(/
5[ ² :D /RFDOORRSEDFN
6KLHOG :E 5HPRWHORRSEDFN
&20021 &20 :E 6LJQDOJURXQG
685*( :D 67 $ 6HQGWLPLQJ
67 % 6HQGWLPLQJ
'DWDPRGXOH
6LJQDOQDPH
77 $ 7HUPLQDOWLPLQJ
77 % 7HUPLQDOWLPLQJ
6' $ 6HQGGDWD
6' % 6HQGGDWD
5' $ 5HFHLYHGGDWD
5' % 5HFHLYHGGDWD
56 $ 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
56 % 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
&6 $ &OHDU7RVHQG
&6 % &OHDU7RVHQG
/RFDOORRSEDFN
5HPRWHORRSEDFN
6LJQDOJURXQG
67 $ 6HQGWLPLQJ
67 % 6HQGWLPLQJ
$&'5
Data module 1 provides timing to the T35 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure because they vary by manufacturer.
3.4.5.3 Transmit timing

The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.

Figure 3-51: Clock and data transitions
7[FORFN
7[GDWD
$&'5
3.4.5.4 Receive timing

The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and therefore does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated digital phase lock loop (DPLL) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the serial communication controller (SCC) receive clock.
3.4.6 RS422 and fiber interface

The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64 K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P,
and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is
employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 20 to 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external RS422 connections. Ground the shield only at one
end. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly.
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed
Figure 3-52: RS422 and fiber interface connection
+ ~1a
7L, 7M, 7N,
7P, and 74
Clock
channel 1 – ~1b
Common COM ~2b
Tx – ~3b
Rx – ~3a
RS422 Tx + ~2a
channel 1
communications
Rx + ~4b
Shield ~6a
Fiber Tx2 Rx2
RS422
channel 2
Surge ~8a
842777A3.CDR
The connections shown in the figure are for multiplexers configured as data communications equipment (DCE) units.

3.4.7 G.703 and fiber interface

The following figure shows the combined G.703 plus fiber-optic interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and
75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer)
and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external G.703 connections
connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly. See
previous sections for details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
Figure 3-53: G.703 and fiber interface connection
Shield ~1a
75, 7E, 7F, 7G,

and 7Q
3
Tx – ~1b
G.703 Rx – ~2a
channel 1
Tx + ~2b
communications
Rx + ~3a
Surge ~3b
Fiber Tx2
G.703
channel 2 Rx2
842778A2.CDR
3.4.8 IEEE C37.94 interface

IEEE C37.94 is a standard interface between teleprotection equipment and digital multiplexers.
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 modules (module types 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94
compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output
applications. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer
and a teleprotection device. Data speed is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n
= 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) or 128 kbps (with n fixed at
2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint
of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048
kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
• IEEE standard — C37.94 for 1 × 128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 × 64 kbps
optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules)
• Fiber-optic cable type — 50 nm or 62.5 μm core diameter optical fiber
• Fiber-optic mode — multimode
• Fiber-optic cable length — up to 2 km
• Fiber-optic connector — type ST
• Wavelength — 820 ±40 nm
• Connection — as per all fiber-optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94 module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94
standard. The figure shows the concept.

Figure 3-54: IEEE C37.94 connection to compliant digital multiplexer

IEEE C37.94
fiber interface
Digital
UR-series multiplexer,
device IEEE C37.94
compliant
up to 2 km
842755A2.CDR
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-
compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard. The
following figure shows the concept.
3 Figure 3-55: IEEE C37.94 connection to non-compliant digital multiplexer
IEEE C37.94 RS422

fiber interface interface
Digital
UR-series IEEE C37.94 multiplexer
device converter with EIA-422
interface
up to 2 km
842756A2.CDR
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 76 and 77 for C37.94 communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 76 and 77 shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" or "Rev E" printed on it and is to be used on all ends of T35
communication for two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication
alarms. For customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches to set the clock configuration. The following figure shows
the functions of these control switches.
Loop timing mode
842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to internal
timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing selection to
loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
To remove the IEEE C37.94 communications module cover and set the switches:
1. With power to the relay off, remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, or 77 module) as follows. Record
the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct
slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module in order to release the
module for removal.

5. Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
7. Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
Figure 3-57: IEEE C37.94 timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
FRONT 3
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
Channel 2
Cover screw
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 3-58: Status LEDs
^|:
&+/LQN$FWLYLW\/('
&2006
\|:
%
M<@B=]W
:<88rqwmrkpiqshi
OVON
;glerrip
^|:
^|;
\O`N &+/LQN$FWLYLW\/('
îglrmgepwyttsvx
3
îp0B8>1;B=?;;;
Pe|0B8>1;8:;8BA \|;
0XY\^RKWO\SMK1
:A88>=@A?;B
QOWypxmpmr
WehimrMerehe ^|;
&+&ORFN&RQILJXUDWLRQ/('
)52179,(: 5($59,(: $FGU
The clock configuration LED status is as follows:

• Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
• Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
• Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
• Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
• Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
• Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.4.9 C37.94SM interface

The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94
compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-
mode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link
for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard
provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid ITU-recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The
frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
• Emulated IEEE standard — Emulates C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps)
• Fiber-optic cable type — 9/125 μm core diameter optical fiber
• Fiber-optic mode — Single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver
• Fiber-optic cable length — Up to 11.4 km
• Fiber-optic connector — Type ST
• Wavelength — 1300 ±40 nm
• Connection — As per all fiber-optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that
supports C37.94SM, as shown.
C37.94SM
fiber interface
Digital
UR-series
multiplexer
device
C97.94SM
up to 10 km
842757A2.CDR
It also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module, as shown.
C37.94SM
fiber interface 3
UR-series UR-series
device with device with
C37.94SM C37.94SM
module module
up to 10 km
842758A2.CDR
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 2A and 2B for C37.94SM communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 2A and 2B shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on it and is to be used on all ends of T35 communication for
two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94SM module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The following figure shows
the functions of these control switches.
Loop timing mode

842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to internal
timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing selection to
loop timing mode for connections to higher-order systems.
To remove the C37.94SM communications module cover and set the switches:
1. With power to the relay off, remove the C37.94SM module (module 2A or 2B) as follows. Record the original location of
the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2. Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal.
5. Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).


7. Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
Figure 3-60: C37.94SM timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
FRONT
3 Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
Channel 2
Cover screw
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION ACTIVATE RELAY
Figure 3-61: Status LEDs
^|:
&+/LQN$FWLYLW\/('
&2006
\|:
%
M<@B=]W
:<88rqwmrkpiqshi
OVON
;glerrip
^|:
^|;
\O`N &+/LQN$FWLYLW\/('
îglrmgepwyttsvx
îp0B8>1;B=?;;;
Pe|0B8>1;8:;8BA
0XY\^RKWO\SMK1
:A88>=@A?;B
\|;
3
QOWypxmpmr
WehimrMerehe ^|;
)52179,(: 5($59,(: $FGU
The clock configuration LED status is as follows:

• Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
• Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
• Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
• Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
• Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
• Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.5 Activate relay

The relay is in the default “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. When powered up successfully, looking at
the front panel, the "Trouble" LED is on and the "In Service" LED is off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state blocks
signaling of any output relay. These conditions remain until the relay is explicitly put into “Programmed” state.
RELAY SETTINGS: When the relay is powered up, the "Trouble LED" is on, the "In Service" LED is off, and this message
Not Programmed displays, indicating that the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output
relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This
message remains until the relay is explicitly put into "Programmed" state.
The relay can be activated on the front panel or in the EnerVista software.
To activate the relay using the front panel:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message displays.
2. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the SECURITY message displays.
3. Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the INSTALLATION message displays.
4. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays.

INSTALL SOFTWARE CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
SETTINGS

 SETTINGS  SECURITY
 PRODUCT SETUP  
 DISPLAY
  PROPERTIES

 INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS:
   Not Programmed
3 5. After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays, press a VALUE key to change the selection to
"Programmed."
6. Press the ENTER key to save the change.
RELAY SETTINGS: RELAY SETTINGS: NEW SETTING

Not Programmed Programmed HAS BEEN STORED
7. When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay is in "Programmed" state and the "In Service"
LED turns on.
To activate the relay using EnerVista software:
1. Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Installation and change the Relay Settings field to "Programmed."
2. Save the change.
3.6 Install software

3.6.1 EnerVista communication overview
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the front panel RS232 or USB port or the rear RS485 /
Ethernet ports.
To communicate via the RS232 port, use a standard straight-through serial cable. Connect the DB-9 male end to the relay
and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end to the computer COM2 port as described in the CPU Communication Ports section
earlier in this chapter.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION INSTALL SOFTWARE
Figure 3-62: Relay communication options
Regional
control
center
Ethernet Remote
10/100 Mbps communications link
Local
control
UR-series IED
EnerVista Engineer
GE Multilin F485
communications converter
Modem
3
RS485 115 kbps
RS232
EnerVista
Reports
EnerVista
Troubleshooting
Commissioning
Setting changes
842759A2.CDR
To communicate through the T35 rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, the GE Grid Solutions RS232/RS485
converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial
cable. A shielded twisted-pair wire (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the T35 rear communications port.
The converter terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the T35 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. See the CPU
Communication Ports section in chapter 3 for details. The line is terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 Ω, 1 nF) as
described in this chapter.
3.6.2 System requirements

The relay front panel or the EnerVista UR Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more
information.
The system requirements for the EnerVista software are as follows:
• Intel Pentium processor (dual core) or (recommended) Core Duo
• One of the following operating systems in the required EnerVista language, such as English or French:
– Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 (32-bit or 64-bit)
– Windows 10
– Windows Server 2008 Release 2 with Service Pack 1 (64-bit)
– Windows Server 2012 Release 2 (64-bit)
– Windows Server 2016
• 1 GB free hard drive space

INSTALL SOFTWARE CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
• 2 GB RAM
• 1280 x 800 display screen
3.6.3 Install software

After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met, there are three ways to install the
software:
• From the DVD
• Download EnerVista Launchpad software from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin and install it
• Download the EnerVista UR Setup software from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin and install it
Install on a computer that has an operating system in the required language, for example a German operating system for
use with EnerVista software in German.
3 Unless specifically granted, the software can be installed on one computer and used by one user.
The front panel can be switched in the EnerVista software between enhanced and basic panels under
Maintenance > Change Front Panel.
When installing on a computer with Windows Server 2012, its Release 2 needs the KB2919355 update first. Follow the
instructions described in the link, which works in Internet Explorer, not Chrome.
https://www.microsoft.com/en-US/download/details.aspx?id=42334
To install the software from the DVD and using EnerVista Launchpad:
1. Insert the DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2. Click the Install Now button and follow the instructions.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
Figure 3-63: Adding a UR device in Launchpad window
5. In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the appropriate product as follows.
Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have an Internet
connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the product. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the
software from the Internet or DVD and automatically starts the installation program after prompting about updates.
From the web, the software is downloaded. A wizard opens.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION INSTALL SOFTWARE
Figure 3-64: Identifying the UR device type
6. In the wizard, click the Next button and complete the process. The files are installed in the directory indicated, and the
installation program automatically creates icons and adds an entry to the Windows start menu.
The UR device is added to the EnerVista Launchpad window, as shown.
Figure 3-65: UR device added to Launchpad window
7. For other than English, configure the language for the front panel in the EnerVista software under Settings > Product
Setup > Display Properties. User-entered strings are not translated, for example relay names, so setting the language
now ensures that the names are entered/displayed in the required language. For the EnerVista software language,
access the View > Language menu item.
3.6.3.1 Install EGD software

Install Ethernet Global Data (EGD) software separately if required. Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or later is required.
1. Access the folder in which the UR software is installed, such as C:\Program Files (x86)\GE Power Management\URPC
2. Access the EGD Client Installer folder, double-click the .exe file, such as the EgdClient6101.exe file, and complete the
wizard.
The software installs. When Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or higher is not installed, it installs automatically version 4.5.
When an EGD device/client is connected to a UR, an Ethernet Global Data item displays in the UR EnerVista Setup
software.

ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.7 Add device to software

You connect remotely to the T35 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup
software. The T35 also can be accessed locally with a computer through the front panel RS232 or USB port or the rear
Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
The following procedures are outlined:
• Add device for serial access; see the Configure Serial Connection section
• Add device for the rear Ethernet port; see the Configure Ethernet Connection section
• Add device for access using a modem; see the Configure Modem Connection section
• Connect locally with a computer through either the front RS232 or USB port or rear Ethernet port; see the Connect to
the T35 section
3 • Discover automatically UR devices within a network; see the Automatic Discovery of UR Devices section
Devices in the Device Setup window are listed in the order entered.
Devices in the main software window are listed alphabetically. Use the Device Name to order them as required, for
example B30 Odessa, B30 Truro, B90, T35.
You cannot import a file to add a device to the software. You can import settings as outlined at the end of the chapter.
The Quick Connect button also can be used to add devices. The device is added to a Quick Connect menu item in the
Online Window area, cannot be moved from it to another grouping, and needs to be renamed in the Device Setup window.
GE instead recommends using the Device Setup window to add devices, as outlined here.
3.7.1 Set IP address in UR

Implement IP addresses for the computer and a T35 device as follows.
The UR family supports the use of subnetworks as documented in RFC 950, which divides class-based networks into
subnetworks (non-CIDR). The classes and IP address ranges are defined as follows.
Table 3-7: IP address classes
Classes IP address range Default subnet mask address UR devices
A 1.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 255.0.0.0 65,535 or more
B 128.0.0.0 to 191.255.255.255 255.255.0.0 255 to 65,534
C 192.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255 255.255.255.0 0 to 254
D 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Reserved for multicasting)
E 240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 (Reserved)
Both network and subnet addresses are contained within a range. The number of hosts determines the class and
addresses as follows:
• Class A 255.0.0.0 — The first octet (255) specifies the network, the second to fourth octets (0) specify the subnet and
host. Use this class when you have more than 65,535 hosts (UR devices).
• Class B 255.255.0.0 — The first two octets (255) specify the network, the third octet (0) specifies the subnet, and the
fourth octet (0) specifies the host. Use this class when you have 255 to 65,534 hosts (UR devices).
• Class C 255.255.255.0 — The first three octets (255) specify the network and the last octet (0) specifies the subnet and
host. Use this class when you have up to 254 hosts (UR devices).
An example of implementation is one computer and one UR device. Because there is one UR device, class C addressing is
required. So we use UR 192.167.2.x with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and computer 192.167.3.x with subnet mask
255.255.255.0.
For older, non-CIDR routing protocols, such as RIP version 1, follow these restrictions:
• Identical subnet masks — Use a single mask for all subnets within a network

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
• Contiguous subnets — The subnets must be contiguous and not split among networks. The subnets cannot pass
traffic through other networks.
The IP and subnet addresses need to be added to the UR for Ethernet communication.
For serial communication, for example using any front RS232 port and the Quick Connect feature, the addresses are not
required, but typically they are entered to add/configure devices for regular use.
To add the IP addresses:
1. On the front of the UR, press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu displays.
2. Navigate to one of the ports under SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  NETWORK PORT
 PRT IP ADDRESS.
3. Enter an IP address, for example 10.11.33.01, and press the ENTER key to save the value. For example, press the period
4.
key to clear any existing address, then press the number keys to add a new address.
In the same menu, select the PRT SUBNET IP MASK setting. Enter a subnet IP address, for example 255.000.000.000 for
3
255.0.0.0. Press the ENTER key to save the value.
5. When connecting through an Ethernet network, also configure the gateway address under SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IPv4 ROUTE TABLE  DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE  GATEWAY ADDRESS. Press the ENTER key to
save the value.
If using a blue or grey Ethernet cable, skip the rest of the this section. If using an orange cross-over Ethernet cable, the
computer needs to be set up as follows.
1. Use an orange Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the computer to the rear Ethernet port. In case you need it, the
following figure shows the pinout for an Ethernet cross-over cable.
Figure 3-66: Ethernet cross-over cable PIN layout
3 4 5 6
END 1 END 2
2 7 Pin Wire color Diagram Pin Wire color Diagram
1 8 1 White/orange 1 White/green
2 Orange 2 Green
3 White/green 3 White/orange
4 Blue 4 Blue
5 White/blue 5 White/blue
6 Green 6 Orange
7 White/brown 7 White/brown
8 Brown 8 Brown
842799A1.CDR
Next, assign the computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network
connections window. Or in Windows 7, access the Network and Sharing Center in the Control Panel.

2. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
3. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list, and click the Properties button.
4. Click the “Use the following IP address” box.

5. Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the T35 relay and the last number
different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6. Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the T35 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7. Click the OK button to save the values.

Before continuing, test the Ethernet connection.

1. Open a Windows console window, for example by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing
“cmd” or clicking the Start button and entering "cmd".
2. Type the following command, substituting the IP address of 1.1.1.1 with yours:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3. If the connection is successful, the system returns four replies similar to the following:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms 3
Note that the values for time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration.
4. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
verify the physical connection between the T35 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
verify the physical connection between the T35 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
Destination host unreachable.
verify the IP address is programmed in the local computer by entering the ipconfig command in the command
window.

C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\WINNT>
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, disable any configured proxy settings in Internet
3 Explorer.
1. Start the Internet Explorer software.
2. Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click the Connections tab.
3. Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4. Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been
disconnected from the T35 relay.
1. Start the Internet Explorer software.
2. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.

3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4. Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the T35, then click the Connect button. The 3
EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them on the left side of the screen.
5. Expand the sections to view data directly from the T35 device.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the T35. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the T35 model
number.
When direct communications with the T35 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network
connections window.
2. Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3. Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4. Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown.

If the computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been
disconnected from the T35 relay.
3.7.2 Configure serial connection

Two options are possible: local connection between computer and front RS232 port, and remote connection using the rear
RS485 terminals.
If using Windows 10 and a GE USB-to-Serial Cable Converter (part number 0100-0001) connected between a USB port on
the computer and the front serial port on the UR, use the Prolific driver version 3.2.0.0 from the Internet.
To use the RS485 terminals at the back of the relay, a GE Grid Solutions F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485
converter) is required. See the F485 instruction manual for details.
1. Connect the computer to the F485 and the F485 to the RS485 terminal on the back of the UR device. Or connect the
3 2.
computer to the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3. Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4. Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add a short
Description of the site. This example uses “Location 1” as the site name.
5. Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6. Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 16 characters, and optionally add a Description of the site. The Color is
for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. Interface parameters display that must be entered for serial
communications. Try to load automatically the fields by clicking the Read Order Code button.
Figure 3-67: Configuring serial communication

8. Enter the COM port used by the computer, the baud rate, and parity settings from the front panel SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS menu, and the relay slave address setting from the front panel SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL  MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS menu in their respective
fields.
Baud Rate — Typically 19200 bits per second (bps) for RS232, and higher for RS485. Both modems need to use the
same rate, meaning at the computer and the T35 ends.
Parity — Set to None if unsure
Bits — Set to 8 if unsure
Stop Bits — Set to 1 if unsure
Post Terminal Window — Enable this option if you have a Schweitzer Engineering (SEL) SEL-203x Communications
Processor, such as an SEL-2030 or SEL-2032. This option enables display of a terminal window to allow interaction
with the other device.
9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the T35 and upload the order code to the EnerVista software. If a
communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista software serial communications values entered in the
3
previous step correspond to the relay setting values, and also ensure that the same IP address is not assigned to
multiple T35 ports.
10. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new site and device are added to the Online
Window.
The device has been configured for serial communications. Proceed to the Connect to the T35 section to begin
communication.
3.7.3 Configure Ethernet connection

You connect the Ethernet cable, define a site in the software, then add the relay as a device for the site.
The Ethernet cable can be connected from the relay to an Ethernet network or directly to the computer. The computer and
UR device must be on the same subnet.
1. Connect the Ethernet network cable and any SFP supplied with the T35 to the Ethernet port on the CPU module at the
back of the device.
2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
4. Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add a short
Description of the site. This example uses “Location 1” as the site name.
7. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for Ethernet functionality.

Figure 3-68: Configuring Ethernet communication
8. Enter the relay IP Address, which can be viewed on the device front panel under SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  NETWORK PORT  PRT IP ADDRESS. Once the IP address is entered, try to load
automatically the fields by clicking the Read Order Code button.
9. Enter the relay Slave address and Modbus Port address values from the settings in the front panel SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
10. If using a gateway to connect to the device, select Yes from the drop-down list.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the T35 device and upload the order code. If the device was entered
already, a message displays "Device ’x’ is also using IP address...." If a communications error occurs, ensure that the
values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values, and also ensure that the same IP address
is not assigned to multiple T35 ports.
12. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new site and device are added to the Online
Window.
The device has been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connect to the T35 section to begin
communications.
3.7.4 Configure modem connection

A modem connection allows a computer to communicate with a UR device over phone lines.
Two modems are required. One modem is connected to the UR device, either by connecting the serial cable to the front
panel port or through a RS485 box to the rear terminals of the UR device. The second modem is connected to the
computer that initiates the connection.
To add a UR device for modem connections:
1. Connect the modems to the computer and UR.

4. Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field, such as London East.
Optionally add a short Description of the site, such as the address or intersection.
7. Select “Modem” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be
entered.
8. Select "Generic Modem" from the Modem Name drop-down list, then enter the Phone Number to dial to establish
communication with the remote modem.
Post Terminal Window — Enable this option if you have a Schweitzer Engineering (SEL) SEL-203x Communications
Processor, such as an SEL-2030 or SEL-2032. It enables display of a terminal window to allow interaction with the
other device.
3
9. Once the phone number is entered, try to load automatically the device information by clicking the Read Order Code
button.
10. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Online window.
The UR device has been added to the software.
3.7.5 Automatic discovery of UR devices

The EnerVista UR Setup software can find and communicate to all UR-family devices located on an Ethernet network.
Using the Discover button in the Device Setup window, a single click of the mouse triggers the software to detect any URs
located on the network. This is done by searching a range of IP addresses based on the subnet mask of the computer.
When a UR device is detected, the EnerVista UR Setup software proceeds to configure all settings and order code options
in the window. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate all UR devices at a location.
Examples of address ranges are as follows:
• If the host has an IP address of 3.94.247.10 and its subnet mask is 255.255.252.0, then the host’s subnet is 3.94.244.0,
and the possible IP addresses in this subnet are
3.94.244.1 to 254
3.94.245.1 to 254
3.94.246.1 to 254
3.94.247.1 to 254
The discover function scans all those possible IP addresses to detect UR relays.
• If the host has an IP address of 3.94.247.145 and its subnet mask is 255.255.255.128, then the host’s subnet is
3.94.247.128, and the discover function scans IP addresses of 3.94.247.128 to 3.94.248.254 for UR relays
To automatically add UR devices:
1. In the EnerVista software, click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
2. Click the Discover button. The software searches for UR devices on the computer subnet and adds any found to the
Online Window area. If a required device is not found, add it manually as outlined earlier.

CONNECT TO THE T35 CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-69: Discover button to detect UR devices in network
3 3.8 Connect to the T35

There are four ways to the connect to the device, as follows:
• RS232 or USB port (outlined here)
• RS485 port
• Ethernet port (outlined here)
• LAN
When unable to connect because of an "ACCESS VIOLATION," access Device Setup and refresh the order code for the
device.
When unable to connect, ensure that the same IP address is not assigned to multiple T35 ports, for example under
Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Network.
If still unable to connect, try unplugging and replugging the Ethernet connection. If that does not work, try to ping the
device from the computer, and if unsuccessful, restart the computer.
When multiple computers are connected to a T35 device, EnerVista settings windows are not updated
automatically. They are refreshed when re-opened. If a user changes a setting on one computer, the other users
need to refresh the display by closing and opening the settings window to see the change. To ensure that current
settings are always viewed, close settings windows when not in use so that they are up-to-date when next
accessed.
3.8.1 Connect to the T35 in EnerVista

For information on using the EnerVista software, see the Interfaces chapter.
To access the relay in EnerVista:
1. Open the Settings > Product Setup > Display Properties window as shown. The window opens with a status indicator
on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION CONNECT TO THE T35
Figure 3-70: EnerVista window
Quick action hot links
3
Expand the site list by double-clicking
or selecting the +/– box.
Communications status indicators:

Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly set up for communication.
3. If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, then a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4. The Display Properties settings can now be viewed, edited, or printed.
3.8.1.1 Quick action hot links

The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are
performed often when using URs. From the online window, users can select the relay to interrogate from a pull-down
window, then click the button for the action to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
• View the event record
• View the last recorded oscillography record
• View the T35 protection summary
• View all of the T35 metering values
• View the status of all T35 inputs and outputs
• Generate a service report
3.8.2 Use Quick Connect via front RS232 port

This feature applies to the enhanced and basic front panels.
To connect to the UR from a computer using a serial cable:
1. Connect an RS232 serial cable to the computer and the front panel RS232 port. For example, use a USB-to-serial
RS232 DB9M converter cable when connecting to the USB port on the computer. If using Windows 10 and a GE USB-
to-Serial Cable Converter (part number 0100-0001) connected between a USB port on the computer and the front
serial port on the UR, use the Prolific driver version 3.2.0.0 from the Internet.

CONNECT TO THE T35 CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3. Click the Quick Connect button. The window opens.
Figure 3-71: Quick Connect window to access a device
3
4. Select the serial Interface and the communications port (COM Port) from the drop-down lists, then click Connect. The
COM Port is that of the computer.
5. The EnerVista software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them in the Online Window. Expand the sections to view data directly from the UR device. Use
the Device Setup button to change the site name.
number.
3.8.3 Use Quick Connect via front USB port

This feature applies to the graphical front panel.
To connect to the UR from a computer using a USB cable:
1. Connect the cable to the computer and the front panel USB port (square connector).
3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4. Select the USB Interface and the "GE Virtual Serial Port" driver from the drop-down list, then click Connect. If the GE
driver does not display, it means that the USB cable was connected on Windows 10 when upgrading the UR software.
You need to re-install the EnerVista software with the USB cable disconnected.
5. The EnerVista software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them in the Online Window. Expand the sections to view data directly from the UR device. Use
the Device Setup button to change the site name.
number.
3.8.4 Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port

To connect to a UR using an Ethernet cable:
1. In the EnerVista software, click the Quick Connect button. The window opens.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION SET UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD
Figure 3-72: Quick Connect window for Ethernet connection
2. Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the T35, then click the Connect button. The 3
EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named "Quick
Connect" and displays them in the Online Window.
3. Expand the sections to view data directly from the T35 device. Use the Device Setup button to change the site name.
Each time that the EnerVista software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to
the T35. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the T35 model number.
3.9 Set up CyberSentry and change default password

If and when first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for set up.
1. Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel or through EnerVista connected serially
(so that no IP address is required). If logging in through EnerVista choose Device authentication (see figure). Enter the
default password "ChangeMe1#". Note that the LOCK SETTINGS setting needs to be disabled (default) in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY menu.
2. Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3. Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4. Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
Next, device or server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista. Use
Device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer,
or Administrator and Supervisor when Device authentication is disabled). When using a serial connection, only Device
authentication is supported. When Server authentication is required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS
server must be configured on the UR. This is possible only through the EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also
must be configured. At the end of this instruction manual, the appendix called RADIUS Server Configuration gives an
example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and the parameters for connecting the UR
to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on the login screen of EnerVista.

IMPORT SETTINGS CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-73: Login screen for CyberSentry
3
During the commissioning phase, you have the option to bypass the use of passwords. Do so by enabling the Bypass
Access setting under Settings > Product Setup > Security > Supervisory. Be sure to disable this bypass setting after
commissioning the device.
You can change the password for any role either from the front panel or through EnerVista. If using EnerVista, navigate to
Settings > Product Setup > Security. Change the Local Administrator Password, for example. It is strongly recommended
that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the passwords for the other three roles is
optional.
3.10 Import settings

Options are:
• Import settings from XML or CID file — Import all settings or a group of settings from an XML or CID file to a device in
the Offline Window area. Examples are Control elements, FlexLogic operands, and System Setup settings. This feature
uses a built-in import/export tool.
• Import settings from device files — Import a URS, IID, or CID file to a device in the Offline Window area.
3.10.1 import settings from XML file

All settings, groups of settings, and/or individual settings can be imported, such as System Setup, FlexLogic operands,
inputs/outputs, protection, and Control elements. A built-in import/export tool is used.
Note the following behavior:
• Available in English only
• Works in the Offline Window area
• Supports older firmware versions too, such as 6.x
• Import must be to same version, such as 8.03 to 8.03
• Except for B90, import can be to a different product, such as L90 to D60; order codes do not need to match
• Setting must exist in target device
• Complete single-line diagram can be imported, not parts of it
• Engineer function/menu item is not included
• Order codes must match when applying settings from the Offline Window area to a live device in the Online Window
area. For example, settings from a C30 in the Offline Window area cannot be applied directly to a live C60 device.
A B90 device can import settings only from a B90 device.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION IMPORT SETTINGS
For information on exporting, see the Maintenance chapter.

Features in the tool include
• Ability to perform global import (Import All button), by current window (Import button), or individual setting (right-
click)
• Can import from a different dataset, such as from Dataset 3 to Dataset 2
• When a setting is not present in the target device, it cannot be selected/activated for the import device and the
Import button is inactive
• Use the search box at the top-left to locate setting names and values, highlighted in blue
• Use the Compare by Lines and Compare VOs drop-down lists to sort display of FlexLogic equations
• Use the Left Entry From / Left Entry To boxes to display select rows
• Enable the Synchronous Scrolling check box to lock scrolling for target and import devices
•
•
Add rows by right-clicking; validation is done later by the software
Use the Comparison Report button to view quickly all differences, whether saved or not
3
• Use the Target Device Report to view quickly the imported settings, whether saved or not
• Click the Save button to save imports, otherwise none are
The following procedures outline how to import settings, apply to a live device, compare settings, and view imported
settings.
To import settings:
1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area and select the Import Settings option. A window opens.
If the device is not listed in the Offline Window area, right-click it in the Online Window area and select the Add Device
to Offline Window option.
2. Select the XML file to import, and click the Open button.
When the firmware versions differ, a message displays and the file cannot be imported.
When the firmware versions match, a window opens that compares existing and import settings. Existing settings are
on the left, and settings to be imported are on the right. The window for FlexLogic operands differs, allowing more
granularity.
When the order codes of the existing and imported setting files do not match, but both devices share the same
function(s), then the comparison list shows the common settings instead of all the settings. For example, the distance
protection function exists both in L90 and D60. The software allows importing L90 distance protection to D60
distance, and vice versa.
With successful launch, the device with the settings to be imported displays on the right, and the targeted device to
receive these settings is on the left. The differences are highlighted in orange. When check boxes are deselected on
the right side, it means that there are no differences or that settings are not present in the target device. (For a
summary, click the Comparison Report button at the top-right, as outlined in the next procedure.)

Figure 3-74: Import settings window before clicking Import button
3. Review the settings, either in the main window or using the Comparison Report.
If required, deselect any settings on the right side that are no longer wanted for import.
If required, copy any setting in the import device by right-clicking the value, selecting the Copy option, and Pasting it
in the target setting field. Or select the Import option.
4. To filter FlexLogic operands, click the Compare by Lines / Compare VOs button to toggle.
Compare by Lines — Displays FlexLogic operands 1 to 1024.
Compare VOs — For virtual outputs, enable the check boxes of those wanted, for both the import and target devices.
5. To import the settings for the window currently active, click the Import button. Or to import all settings, click the
Import All button. The settings are imported, as shown in green.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION IMPORT SETTINGS
Figure 3-75: Import settings window after clicking Import button
6. If required, to undo an import, click the Undo Import button. Or, to undo an import and to refresh all entries to their
original state, click the Restore button.
7. To save the changes, click the Save button and confirm at the prompt. Or to cancel all changes, click the Cancel
button. The window closes.
To apply the settings to a live device:

1. Drag-and-drop the device entry from the Offline Window area to an entry in the Online Window area. Individual
settings also can be dragged and dropped. The order codes must match.
To compare settings:
1. Click the Comparison Report button at the top-right of the window. This displays a summary of activity and includes
following settings: different, missing, imported, and invalid.
Number of Differences — The number of settings in the target device having setting values different from the import
device
Number of Missing Settings — The number of settings that are not found in the target device settings
Number of Settings Imported — The number of settings imported in the target device
Number of Invalid Settings — The number of settings that are same in both devices but the import device setting
value is not within range (out-of-range) of the target device setpoint range. For example, a 'FuncName Block' setting is
available in both import and target devices. The import device 'FuncName Block' setting is configured as '87L TRIP
OPIOC 1 OP,' however operand '87L TRIP OPIOC 1 OP' is not within the range of the target device.
2. To save the display as an HTML file, click the Save to File button.
To view imported settings on the target device:

1. Click the Target Device Report button at the top-right of the window.

When no settings have been imported yet, the window shows basic information about the receiving device, such as
order code.
When settings have been imported, whether saved or not, a report displays. It is a comparison of the target device
before and after import.
For invalid settings for the target device, a message displays, they are highlighted in red in the main window, and they
are listed in red at the bottom of the window. This means that the target device does not have the feature and cannot
accept the settings. In the example shown, the device does not have bus functions, so the settings are invalid. Scroll
through the list to review the invalid settings. Note that the sets of invalid setting groups are highlighted in red on the
left side of the window (not shown).
Figure 3-76: Invalid settings on the target device in red
2. To save the display as an HTML file, click the Save to File button.
3.10.2 Import settings from device files

The following file types can be imported:
• URS — UR settings file (firmware version 7.3x or earlier)
• IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings on UR
• CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not be actual settings). When using IEC
61850, network settings can also be configured by accepting a CID file that includes them, as long as the IP address of
at least one port is manually configured in the relay before the CID file is sent and the IP address matches that in the
file.
The import is done in the Offline Window area.
To import a settings file:
1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Add Device from File option. The device is that from
which you want to import settings.
2. If required, change the Files of type drop-down list.
3. Select the file to import.

CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION CONNECT TO D400 GATEWAY
To apply the settings to a live device:

1. Drag-and-drop the device entry from the Offline Window area to its entry in the Online Window area. Individual
settings also can be dragged and dropped. The order codes must match.
This is what happens:

• CID — For version 7.30 or later, a new URS file generates and moves into a new device folder, generating SCL files from
the new URS file. Files in the folder have new time stamps. The CID file retains its time stamp.
• URS — When not IEC 61850 and version is lower than 7.30, the file is added and time stamp is unchanged. When
clicking in the software on the tree element, a device folder is created, the original file moves into it, and time stamp is
on the URS file is retained.
When IEC 61850 and version is 7.30 or later, the file is added and time stamp is unchanged. When clicking in the
software on the tree element, a device folder is created, the original file moves into it, SCL files are generated there,
and the "Last modified" time stamp on the URS file changes. 3
3.11 Connect to D400 gateway

A GE Multilin D400 Substation Gateway can be used to collect data from UR devices in a local area network (LAN). It collects
metering, status, event, and fault report data from serial or LAN-based intelligent substation devices, and it pre-processes
the data. The D400 supports up to 16 serial and eight network connections, with multiple devices possible on each serial
connection. Up to 10 concurrent file transfer sessions are possible, meaning data for up to 10 URs can be transferred at
the same time and any additional IEDs are queued on a first-come-first-served basis. The D400 can then upload files to a
demilitarized zone (DMZ) server at the enterprise level.
Setup is as follows. For UR devices with the CyberSentry software option, when there is a need to retrieve periodically the
logs from the UR securely without a human interface, the following approach can be used. See the D400 manual for
configuration details to achieve it.
A UR in the substation can authenticate a user either connecting to a RADIUS server or on the device itself. This depends
on the user name used for authentication on a connection. The D400 connects to the UR device using an Ethernet, USB, or
serial port on the UR. At the other end, the cable attaches to the rear of D400. Use the D400 software to configure a serial
or network communication/connection for the UR, then to configure the IED device blocks/clients for the UR, and then to
configure record retrieval. Once configured, the UR and D400 use a keyfile authentication mechanism to establish
communication.
For UR devices with the IEC 61850 software option, also use the D400 IEC 61850 Loader software.
When a D400 detects new files available for download from a UR, it connects to the UR and reads the files via Secure File
Transfer Protocol (SFTP) protocol. The following files can be transferred:
• Oscillography files
• Event records
• Log files
• Configuration (setting) files
The D400 information is viewable in its software and in a web browser.
The D400 is discontinued and no longer offered. The G500 is a replacement to the D400, where the
same file retrieval services and cyber security connection can be used.
3.11.1 Oscillography files

These are stored in COMTRADE format in the D400 folder system using the UR site and device name.

CONNECT TO D400 GATEWAY CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.11.2 Event records

These are stored as the EVT.TXT file in the D400 folder system using the UR site and device name.
3.11.3 Log files

Log files can be retrieved for UR 7.0 and later. The following file types are possible, stored in the D400 folder system using
the UR site and device name:
• factory_event.txt — Information about change methods and origins. Saved with a "_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval time
stamp, for example FACTORY_EVENT_170525183124.TXT.
• setting_changes.log — Information on what settings have been changed. Saved with a "_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval
time stamp, for example SETTING_CHANGES_170525183124.TXT.
3 3.11.4 Setting files

These are the configuration/settings files in the IEC 61850 SCL/IID format. The ur.iid file is saved with a
"_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval time stamp, for example ur_170525183124.iid. It is stored in the D400 folder system using
the UR site and device name.

Chapter 4: Interfaces
Interfaces
This chapter explains the EnerVista software interface, the front panel interface, logic diagrams, and Engineer interface for
logic design and monitoring.
4.1 EnerVista software interface

4.1.1 Introduction
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot relays
connected over local or wide-area networks. It can be used while disconnected (offline) or connected (online) to a UR
device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In online mode,
communication with the device is real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is provided with every T35. This chapter outlines the EnerVista software interface. The
EnerVista UR Setup help file in the software also provides details for getting started and using the software interface.
4.1.2 Settings files

The EnerVista software supports the following three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
• In offline mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later transfer to relays
• While connected to a relay to modify relay settings, and then save the settings to the relay
• Create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while connected to the relay
See the back up section in the Maintenance chapter for instructions on how to create a settings file either offline or online.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Device definition
• Product setup
• System setup
• FlexLogic
• Grouped elements
• Control elements
• Inputs/outputs

ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
• Remote resources
• Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the T35 with settings files:
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus TCP Port Number
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate
RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address (see end of previous chapter for information)
IP Subnet Mask
IP Routing
When a settings file is loaded to a T35 that is in-service, the following sequence occurs:
4 1. The T35 takes itself out of service.
2. The T35 issues a UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED major self-test error.
3. The T35 closes the critical fail contact.
The Maintenance chapter outlines how to use a settings file in the .urs format for backup and restore.
4.1.3 Event viewing

In online or offline mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered parameters as follows:
• Event recorder — The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed
chronologically from most recent to oldest
• Oscillography — The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power
system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events
Event records are viewable at software and device-specific levels. Access the former under Admin > Event Log > View.
Access the latter under Actual Values > Records > Event Record.
Event record entries for CyberSentry are explained in the next chapter. The following table outlines some software-level
entries.
Table 4-1: Event record descriptions
Event Description
EnerVista UR Setup SESSION STARTED The EnerVista software was launched
Language was changed. The user changed the software language using the View > Language menu item
: Successful upload of firmware The firmware on a device was upgraded
END
Firmware verified
Firmware uploaded
Firmware erased
START: Upload new firmware
EnerVista UR Setup EVENT LOG CLEARED The event record was cleared. All event records were deleted using the Admin > Event Log >
Clear menu item.
4.1.4 File support

The following support applies, where the Settings List is at the bottom left and the Site List is at the top left of the EnerVista
window:

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
• Execution — Any EnerVista UR Setup file that is opened launches the application or provides focus to the already
opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a .urs extension) that had been removed from the Settings List
navigation menu, it is added back to the menu.
• Drag and Drop — The device settings and individual settings can be dragged and dropped between the Online and
Offline Window areas. Also, any Windows Explorer directory folder is a file drag source and drop target.
New files that are dropped into the Offline Window are added to the tree, which is automatically sorted alphabetically
with respect to settings file names. In the Online Window, files or individual menu items that are dropped in the
selected device menu are sent automatically to the online device.
4.1.5 EnerVista main window

The EnerVista UR Setup software window has the following components:
1. Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view or the name of the software
2. Main window menu bar
3. Main window toolbar
4. Site list / online window area
5. Settings list / offline window area
6. Software windows, with common toolbar 4
7. Settings file data view windows, with common toolbar
8. Workspace area with data view tabs
9. Status bar
10. Quick action hot links

Figure 4-1: EnerVista UR Setup software window
2 1 6 7
10
4
4 5
9 8 842786A2.CDR
When the Offline Window has devices saved to it, it includes a Reserved entry with spare settings when customer-specific
functions are provided on a UR.

Figure 4-2: Reserved settings
4.1.6 Protection summary window

The Protection Summary is a graphical user interface to manage elements, such as enabling and disabling them. Access it
under Settings > Protection Summary. See the Settings chapter for information on use.

Figure 4-3: Protection Summary interface (B30 example shown)
4.1.7 Settings templates

Settings file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An
example is a substation that has 10 similar feeders protected by 10 UR F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical among devices. The templates allow engineers to
configure and test these common settings, then lock them so that they are not available to users. For example, locked
settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and made available to field engineers installing
the devices. These are settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings are visible in the software. Settings templates can be
applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is
identical for both purposes.
Template mode is available in the English software only.
Settings file conversion from previous firmware versions is supported.
4.1.7.1 Enable the settings template

The settings file template feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled in offline or online mode.
To enable in offline mode the settings template for UR settings files:
1. Locate the settings file in the Offline Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software. If not there, a file can be added
from an online device by right-clicking it and selecting the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2. In the Offline Window area, right-click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create
Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file menus display in light blue. The settings file is now in template
editing mode. To undo the action, select Template Mode > Remove Template.

Alternatively, to apply the settings template to online settings:

1. Locate the device in the Online Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. Right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option. The software prompts for a template
password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length.
Figure 4-4: Entering a settings file password
3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.

The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
4.1.7.2 Edit the settings template 4

The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in
EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1. With the template already enabled, locate the device or settings file in the Online or Offline Window area in the
software.
2. Right-click the device or file and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to verify or place the device in
template editing mode (check mark beside option). If prompted, enter the template password then click OK.
3. Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase
time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 4-5: Settings template with all settings specified as locked
4. Specify the settings to make viewable by clicking them.

A setting available to view displays with a yellow background.

Figure 4-6: Settings template with two settings specified as editable
5. Click the Save button to save changes to the settings template.

6. Continue through any other settings window to specify all viewable settings.
4 The next time that the device/settings are accessed, only those specified as viewable/editable display in the menu
hierarchy.
4.1.7.3 Add password protection to a template

GE recommends that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
To add password protection to a settings file template:

1. In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Password Protect Template
option.
The software prompts for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
2. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.

The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
4.1.7.4 View the settings template

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
• Display only those settings available for editing
• Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out
To display settings available for editing:
1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >

View In Template Mode option.

2. Enter the template password if prompted, then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of
applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown.
Figure 4-7: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode command
4
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings menu, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings menu is shown as follows.
Figure 4-8: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode settings command
To display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template:
1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >
View All Settings option.
2. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings are
shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown as follows.

Figure 4-9: Applying templates using the View All Settings command
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied. Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
4
the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
4.1.7.5 Remove the settings template

Once a settings template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use.
1. Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and select the Template Mode > Remove Template option.
2. Enter the template password if prompted and click OK to continue.
3. Confirm that you want to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software removes all template information and all settings are available.
4.1.8 Secure and lock FlexLogic equations

The UR allows users to secure some or all FlexLogic equations, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical
FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within FlexLogic
equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
Locking can be tied to the serial number too.
4.1.8.1 Lock FlexLogic equations

To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation:
1. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the
settings template feature.
2. If prompted, enter the template password.
3. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and display against a yellow background. The icon on the
upper right of the window also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4. Specify the entries to lock by clicking them.
The locked entries display a grey background as shown in the example.

Figure 4-10: Locking FlexLogic equation entries in Edit Mode
5.
6.
Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
4
7. Optionally apply a password to the template by right-clicking the device and selecting the Template Mode >
Password Protect Template option.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template.
The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries is shown here.
Figure 4-11: Locking FlexLogic entries through settings templates
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied. Typical FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR
The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view and on the front panel display.

Figure 4-12: Secured FlexLogic in graphical view
4.1.8.2 Lock FlexLogic equations to the serial number

A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic entries in a
settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number. A serial number is
viewable under Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information, the inside front panel, and the rear of the device.
1. Right-click the setting file in the Offline Window area and select the Edit Device Properties item. The window opens.

Figure 4-13: Settings file properties window
2. Enter the serial number of the T35 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
3. Click the OK button to apply the change. The serial number is not validated.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the T35 device specified by the serial
number.
4.1.9 Settings file traceability

A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a T35 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transferred to a T35 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the T35 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local computer. This
information can be compared with the T35 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the T35
device or obtained from the T35 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.

Figure 4-14: Settings file traceability
1 SETTING FILE TRANSFERRED

TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date

are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the setting file when setting files
are transferred to the device.
4 Compare transfer dates in the setting file and the

UR-series device to determine if security SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
has been compromised. 2 SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTING FILE. 842864A2.CDR
With respect to the figure, the traceability feature is used as follows.

• The transfer date of a settings file written to a T35 is logged in the relay and can be viewed in the EnerVista software
or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a settings file saved to a local computer is logged in the
EnerVista software.
• Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future indicates if any changes have
been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
4.1.9.1 Settings file traceability information

The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a T35 device.
The T35 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example.
Figure 4-15: Device definition showing traceability data
Traceability data in settings

file device definition
842863A1.CDR
This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example. A report is generated by right-
clicking and selecting the Print Settings option.

Figure 4-16: Settings file report showing traceability data
Traceability data
in settings report
4
842862A1.CDR
4.1.9.2 Online device traceability information

The T35 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista online window as shown in the example.
Figure 4-17: Traceability data in Actual Values window
7UDFHDELOLW\GDWDLQRQOLQH
GHYLFHDFWXDOYDOXHVSDJH
$&'5
This information is also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  LAST SETTING CHANGE
4.1.9.3 Additional traceability rules

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature:
• If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file
• If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file
• If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file
• If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file

FRONT PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.2 Front panel interface

This section explains use of the enhanced, basic, and graphical front panels.
4.2.1 Front panel
4.2.1.1 Enhanced front panel

The enhanced front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional
user-programmable pushbuttons.
The front panel is hinged to allow access to removable modules inside the chassis. The T35 enhanced front panel can be
horizontal or vertical. The following figure shows the horizontal front panel.
Figure 4-18: Enhanced horizontal front panel
Five column LED indicator panel
4 Display
Keypad
Control
pushbuttons (3)
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16 842810A2.CDR
4.2.1.2 Basic front panel

The basic front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional user-
programmable pushbuttons.
The front panel is hinged to allow easy access to removable modules inside the chassis. There is also a removable dust
cover that is to be removed when accessing the keypad. The T35 basic front panel can be horizontal or vertical. The
following figure shows the horizontal front panel.

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-19: Basic horizontal front panel

LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable
User-programmable Keypad
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
pushbuttons 1 to 12
827801A9.CDR
The following figure shows the vertical front panel for relays ordered with the vertical option.
Figure 4-20: Basic vertical front panel
4
GE Multilin
Display
MENU 7 8 9
HELP MESSAGE 4 5 6
ESCAPE 1 2 3
Keypad
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
1 3 5
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
User-programmable
2 4 6
pushbuttons 1 to 6
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
LED panel 2
STATUS EVENT CAUSE

IN SERVICE VOLTAGE
TROUBLE CURRENT RESET
TEST MODE FREQUENCY
TRIP OTHER USER 1
ALARM
PICKUP
PHASE A
PHASE B USER 2 LED panel 1
Front panel PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3
RS232 port
827830A3.CDR

4.2.1.3 Graphical front panel

The graphical front panel consists of a USB port, LED panel, color screen display, user-programmable pushbuttons, and
navigation keys. The screen is used to read data, such as metering actual values, alarms, self-test messages, and event
records, and for viewing single-line diagrams. Settings can be changed on the front panel, except for the graphical front
panel itself and for IEC 61850. The USB port connects to a computer with the EnerVista software and can be used to
upgrade the relay and to transfer files and settings. The USB port is the square type B.
User-programmable pushbuttons 9 to 40 can be programmed among the 10 pushbuttons on the left and right sides of the
display.
Figure 4-21: Graphical front panel
Side pushbuttons
LEDs Display User-programmable pushbuttons
1 5
IN SERVICE
TROUBLE
TEST MODE
TRIP
ALARM 2 6
4
PICKUP
VOLTAGE
CURRENT 3 7
USB port FREQUENCY
OTHER
PHASE A 4 8
PHASE B
Not used
PHASE C
NEUTRAL / GND
RESET ESC
ENTER
Reset Tab pushbuttons Home Escape Navigation keys

859760A1.CDR
4.2.2 Front panel display
4.2.2.1 Enhanced and basic front panels

Messages display on a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. When the
keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-priority event-
driven message overrides the default messages.
Up to 20 characters can be used to configure some setting names in the software, while up to 12 characters display on the
front panel. A tilde ~ symbol is used for the twelfth character on the front panel when a name extends beyond the 12
character limit. An example is shown for a Virtual Input.
Figure 4-22: Tilde symbols displays with names 12 or more characters long
The front panel can be viewed and used in the EnerVista software, for example to view an error message displayed on the
front panel or the LEDs.
To view the front panel in EnerVista software:
1. Click Actual Values > Front Panel, then any option.

Figure 4-23: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown)

The graphical front panel has a seven-inch (17.8 cm) color liquid crystal display (LCD). The display provides convenient
access to operational data generated by the relay, enables local control of power system devices, and allows display/
editing of settings.
Header content varies by page. The home page displays any active icons, such as security status, active setting group, and
active target messages. It shows the date and time of the relay. If the relay synchronizes to an external time source via PTP,
IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow. On pages other than the home page, the
header displays the name of the page.
The footer dynamically labels the Tab, or control, pushbuttons immediately below.
Page content displays between the header and footer.

Figure 4-24: Home page example with default content (product information)
Setting Group
Alarm Target Relay Date and Time
4
859850A1.cdr
There are multiple ways to navigate pages, by using the pushbuttons and the menu hierarchy. The menu hierarchy is
similar to the other front panels whereby you select a submenu using Up and Down arrow pushbuttons, and press the
ENTER or Right pushbutton. On setting pages, opening a setting for editing is done by highlighting the setting using Up and
Down pushbuttons, and pressing the ENTER or Right pushbutton.
Home page
Press the Home pushbutton to display the root page no matter the state. Any edit, control, or password entry sessions are
canceled. The header shows several relay/system status icons. The default content of the home page is the product
information page and can be user-configured to show the content of any single-line diagram page, annunciator page,
metering page, or event records page for example. The Tab pushbuttons on the bottom row each navigate to their page.
The home page displays for a user-configured time period, then scrolls through user-configured pages, a feature referred
to as rolling.
Holding the Home pushbutton for one second displays the product information page. The Home page also can display
when settings are saved.
Security indicator, showing how many people are logged in, including local and remote users. The lock is red when
one or more users are logged in and other otherwise green.
When no users are logged in because login is not required, an icon does not display.
Identifies the active setting group number (not shown)
Displays when an abnormal annunciator alarm is present. Navigate to the Annunciator for details. When there
are no such alarms, the icon does not display.
Even when you acknowledge/reset an alarm, the icon displays as long as the condition remains. For example, a
breaker trouble alarm displays, you acknowledge it, but the icon remains because the breaker trouble remains.
Active targets symbol, where targets are error messages.
View error messages by pressing the Menu Tab pushbutton, then accessing the TARGETS menu. Pressing the
RESET button clears those messages that can be.
Configure the home page in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page. The menu
does not display when there is no graphical front panel.

Rolling mode
After a user-defined period of inactivity, the graphical front display rolls among up to 10 user-selected pages. The roll-to-
pages are selected in the EnerVista software, with the defaults being the product information page. Each page displays for
less than five seconds. Also, the display backlight intensity is lowered after a configurable period to a user-defined level (0,
10, 20, or 30%); lower intensity extends the life of the display.
Configure rolling mode in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Rolling Mode.
Operation works as follows:
• Press the Home pushbutton or ESCAPE pushbutton twice to cancel rolling, restore full backlight intensity, and return
to the Home page
• Press the ENTER, ESCAPE, or a pushbutton to pause rolling once and restore full backlight intensity
Rolling is disabled by setting the delay to 0.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
• Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
• Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
• Default — Changes all rolling mode settings to their factory default values
• Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous changes are not lost unless you save the reset window.
Single-line diagrams
4
A single-line diagram, or mimic diagram, is a line drawing of elements in an electrical system. The graphical front panel
displays up to five single-line diagrams. Each can be configured to show the arrangement of a portion of the power
system, the status of circuit breakers and of ground and disconnect switches, user-programmable pushbuttons, and
metering and status values. Each also enables control of the displayed breakers and switches when operand status
assigned to the Enable Controls from GFP setting is ON.
One diagram is provided by default, single_bus_line_dsc.mif, which can be modified.
Configure the diagrams under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor.
Each single-line diagram page has a user-configurable name that appears in the header and in the footer Tab pushbutton
label. Factory default names are SLD 1 to SLD 5. Pages that have no configured content have a blank Tab pushbutton
label, and the Tab pushbutton does nothing. The label for the current page has a blue background.

Figure 4-25: Toolbar options for single-line diagram
Select Breaker IEEE Transformer 3W IEEE

Line Breaker IEC Transformer 2W IEEE
Line Crossover Breaker GE Transformer 3W IEC
Bus Crossover Switch IEEE Transformer 2W IEC

Bus Switch IEC Reactor IEEE
Feeder Switch GE Reactor IEC
Ground
Metering Capacitor General IEC
Generator Status Capacitor Polarity IEEE
Motor Text Current Transformer IEEE
AC Source
Pushbutton Current Transformer IEC
Voltage Transformer IEEE

4 Voltage Transformer IEC
859875A1.cdr
The letters T, S, B, R, and X next to a controllable element have the following meaning. An example (TSB) is shown in the
next figure.
• T — The element is “tagged” (irrespective of whether it is tagged from graphical front panel or via IEC 61850). Local and
remote control of the device are inhibited, both open and close. Tripping is unaffected unless additional logic has been
configured.
• S — The position indication of the device is substituted with a manually entered value
• B — Blocking open/close command is bypassed
• R — Autoreclose is enabled and not blocked
• X — The device is out-of-service and control is not available
Single-line diagram example

The following example outlines how to create a circuit breaker diagram, then how to close the second circuit breaker. The
figure shows six switches (SW, M), two breakers (CB), feeder (arrow), and ground (lined arrow).

Figure 4-26: Single-line diagram of open circuit breakers
Under Settings > System Setup > Switches and Breakers, enable and name the six switches and two breakers. Switch 6,
M568G, has the A/3 Pole Opened setting on.
Figure 4-27: Configure Breaker and Switch settings
In the EnerVista software, open the single-line diagram editor under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single
Line Diagram Editor.
Add the four switches for the top line by clicking the GE switch symbol in the toolbar, then clicking in the window. (If the UR
device is not online, the software attempts to connect.) Right-click to edit properties. Rotate switches SW569 and SW5682
to 270 degrees. Rotate switches 5681 and SW523 to 90 degrees. Ignore the TSB text.

Add the two lower switches. Leave rotation at 0 degrees.

Add the two breakers by clicking the GE breaker symbol in the toolbar, then click in the window. Right-click to edit
properties, rotating 90 degrees and setting the color to red (open).
Draw lines to fill in the gaps between the switches and breakers by clicking the line symbol in the toolbar, then clicking and
dragging on the canvas to draw a line. Do not draw a single line for the top line, but instead draw several small lines.
Add the feeder arrow head by clicking the symbol in the toolbar, then clicking the end of the line.
Add the ground symbol by clicking the symbol in the toolbar, then clicking the end of the line.
Add three metered values by clicking the M symbol in the toolbar, then clicking near the feeder arrow. Double-click to edit.
The three metered values are SRC1 Vag Mag, SRC 1 P, and SRC 1 Q.
Name the page by right-clicking the bottom tab. Here, page 1 is renamed "Milton line M568M."
Note that active symbols in the toolbar display and those that are inactive are greyed-out.
The diagram has been created. Save it by clicking the Save button.
Next is to close circuit breaker CB523. This circuit breaker is shown at the top right of the figure. A vertical line means that
it is open, and the color can be set as red or green.
On the graphical front panel, press the Home pushbutton, then press the SLDs pushbutton to activate the first single-line
4 diagram page.
Figure 4-28: Single-line diagram on graphical front panel
Press the Enable Control pushbutton, which displays when the Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page
> Enable Controls From GFP setting is configured and its FlexLogic operand is ON. The side pushbutton labels display.

Figure 4-29: Side pushbutton display on graphical front panel
Press the CB523 breaker pushbutton. Its menu displays.

Figure 4-30: Pushbuttons to control the breaker 4
Press the pushbutton to close the breaker, confirming the action at the prompt.
If at the prompt the control action is prevented this is because status of the operand assigned to the Enable
Controls From GFP setting has changed back to OFF before confirming the prompt action. As a result, the
command is not issued, and the screen goes to the top SLD page.
In this diagram, the two circuit breakers have hard-coded actions available to them. No action is possible on the switches.
Note the USER PB 9 and 10 entries in the earlier figure. As outlined later, these are activated by clicking the PB icon on the
software toolbar. These two pushbuttons can be configured under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable
Pushbuttons.
When a breaker is tagged, the letter T displays under the breaker in the diagram. The Tag pushbutton shown toggles to
Remove Tag.
Single-line diagram editor use

Start the application in the EnerVista software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram
Editor.


• Load — Opens single-line diagram files, which replaces one or all windows with that in the file selected
• Store — Saves all single-line diagrams as a .mif file. Because single-line diagrams are not retained when using the
Convert Device Settings function, for example when converting in the Offline Window area from version 7.6 to 7.7, GE
recommends making backup files using this function.
On the right side of the window is a toolbox containing the components that can be added to the window. These include
line, breaker, disconnect, metering value, status value, text, and miscellaneous power system elements. To create the
single-line diagram, click the symbol, then click in the window. Once in the window, the component can be positioned and
its properties modified. When using the pointing device to position a component, the component can snap to the nearest
snap point. Snap points are in a 4 x 4 rectangular grid. The keyboard arrow keys move the selected component(s) in one
pixel increments when snap locations are inadequate. Multiple components can be selected and moved or deleted as a
group, or copied and pasted to another location. Right- or double-clicking a component opens the properties window.
Ctrl+A selects all objects in a diagram.
Lines
4 Line components represent power system buses or electrical connections between power system elements. They can also
be used as visual dividers and underline.
To add a line component, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Double-click a line to open its properties window
to set orientation.
Figure 4-31: Line and bus crossover symbols
Static symbols
Static symbols depicting power system elements are available. For information, see the ANSI/IEEE 315A and IEC 60617
standards.
Up to 32 static symbols can be used per single-line diagram.
To add a symbol, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Double-click the symbol to open its properties window to
set orientation.

Figure 4-32: IEEE and IEC static symbols
Breaker and disconnect components

Breaker components and disconnect components are interfaces to the UR breaker control elements and disconnect
switch elements. On a UR device they show dynamically the breaker or disconnect status as calculated by the element,
and provide means to open, close, tag, bypass interlock, and substitute (force status of) the element. Breaker components
in addition provide means to enable/disable breaker autoreclose.
Each breaker and disconnect component can be configured to use UR-style symbols, IEC symbols, or simple square/slash
symbols as shown in the following figure. The symbols assume horizontal symbol orientation, red - closed color, and green
- open scheme. With vertical orientation, they are rotated 90 degrees.

Figure 4-33: Single-line diagram symbols
To add a breaker or disconnect component, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Up to 10 dynamic components
can be added to each single-line diagram.
Breaker and disconnect components have three different parts: label, symbol, and flags. Drag each of its parts to their final
locations. Double or right-click any of these parts to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited are label
text, breaker control element or disconnect switch element number, symbol orientation (horizontal or vertical), color
scheme (red - closed, or red - open), and assigned side button (if any). If the selected breaker or disconnect element does
not exist in the target relay or has not been enabled, then the component is displayed in the graphical front panel and in
the drawing edit window in grey. The color scheme selection has no effect when an IEC style symbol is used because IEC
style symbols do not use color.

Symbol orientation
The figure shows the orientation available for the breaker and disconnect switch (taking Open status as examples). The
default position is 0 degrees.
Figure 4-34: Single-line diagram symbol orientation
A question mark displays in a symbol on the graphical front panel when status is bad. The question mark does not rotate
with orientation.
Figure 4-35: Symbols when status is bad
The following figures show the orientation available for the static components. The default position is 0 degrees.

Figure 4-36: Single-line diagram static symbol orientation (sheet 1 of 2)

Figure 4-37: Single-line diagram static symbol orientation (sheet 2 of 2)
User-programmable pushbuttons
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 8 are physical pushbuttons on the right side of the graphical front panel, numbering
down the two columns.
Any remaining user-programmable pushbuttons are programmed among the 10 pushbuttons on the left and right sides of
the screen display. They show dynamically and provide a means to perform the same control as the other pushbuttons.

Figure 4-38: Assigning pushbuttons to the display
4 As an example, if you set up a single-line diagram with two breakers and six switches, then eight of the side pushbuttons
are used automatically for control of the breakers and switches. Side pushbuttons 9 and 10 are available. In the single-line
diagram, let us set side pushbutton 9 to clear event records as follows:
• Show side pushbutton 9 on the graphical front panel — Click the PB symbol in the toolbar, then set Side button 9 to
pushbutton 9 in the drop-down list. This pushbutton then displays when appropriate on the right side of the screen
display.
• Program event record clearing — Set Settings > Product Setup > Clear Relay Records > Clear Event Records to
FlexLogic operand PUSHBUTTON 9 ON
• Program pushbutton 9 — Set Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Pushbuttons > Pushbutton 9
Function to "Self-reset." When pressed, pushbutton 9 clears the event records.
To instead set the second user pushbutton (not a side pushbutton) to clear events, follow the second and third bullet
points, selecting settings of PUSHBUTTON 2 ON and Pushbutton 2.
Metering components
Metering components show dynamically the value of a FlexAnalog operand or actual value. Up to 16 metering
components can be added to each single-line diagram.
To add a metering component, click the M symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location.
Double-click it to open the properties window. The figure shows the properties that can be edited.

Figure 4-39: Metering properties
Status components
Status components show dynamically the value of a FlexLogic operand. Up to 16 can be used in a diagram and 30 in all
single-line diagrams.
An example is to show the Off or On state of the ANY MAJOR ERROR FlexLogic operand. The name of the operand
displays in the single-line diagram editor, then as Off or On on the graphical front panel.
To add a status component, click the S symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location. Double-
click it to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited include parameter (any FlexLogic operand), text color
background color, and on and off text.
Optionally add a text label to display beside the status.
Text
Text components show a single line of user-configured text.
Up to 16 text components can be used per single-line diagram.
To add a text component, click the T symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location. Double-
click it to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited are text, color, and size.
Annunciator
An annunciator is a grid of small windows for alarms, actual values, self-test messages, and product information.
The graphical front panel emulates a conventional annunciator panel. The annunciator has 96 windows, each with a
description of the alarm condition that lights the window. The windows are arranged in rows and columns of 3 x 4, 4 x 6, or
6 x 8 over several pages. Each window can have up to three lines of configurable text, and one line can instead be a
metered value. Normally the window background is dark, and when the configured FlexLogic operand becomes On, the
window lights up.
The figure shows that two alarms are active. One alarm is configured red and the other alarm is configured blue. The red
alarm type is Self Reset, so the alarm displays in a solid color. The blue alarm type is Acknowledgeable, so the alarm flashes
until it is acknowledged, for example by navigating with the arrow keys and pressing the ENTER button. The alarm then
remains blue until the trigger condition is eliminated.

Figure 4-40: 3x4 annunciator page with two active windows
To display the annunciator, press the Home pushbutton, then the Annunciator Tab pushbutton. If there is one or more
4 window in alarm or requiring reset, the annunciator page showing the first of these opens. Otherwise the first annunciator
page opens.
Alarms do not display automatically. Set the Home page and/or rolling pages to display annunciator pages.
The Tab pushbutton labels populate with the annunciator pages. The label text for each annunciator page is configurable
and displays in the header and Tab label. The current page has a blue Tab label. Tab labels for annunciator pages that
have an active window (that is, on, latched, or unacknowledged) are red. Pages where alarms are not triggered have a grey
Tab label. Pages that have no configured windows do not have Tab pushbuttons and do not display.
The Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons cause the selection to move one window in the indicated direction. Pressing the
Right pushbutton past the last window in a row scrolls the display to any next annunciator page, not the next row. The
behavior is similar for the other pushbuttons, for example pressing the Up pushbutton while in the top row goes to any
previous page. If no previous page exists, no action occurs.
Annunciator windows are positioned statically, so that all windows are visible no matter their state.
Alarm types of each window can be configured as Self Reset, Latched, or Acknowledgeable. In Self Reset mode, the
window lighting follows the state of the configured FlexLogic operand. The self-reset mode alarm sequence conforms to
ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type A 4 5 6.
Figure 4-41: Annunciator alarm sequence in Self Reset mode
Process: Normal
Sequence: Normal
Visual: Off
Return to Normal
To Abnormal
Process: Abnormal
Sequence: Acknowledged
Visual: On
859856A1.vsd

Latched mode is intended for transient signals such as trip, and it conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type M 6.
Figure 4-42: Annunciator alarm sequence in Latched mode
Process: Normal
Sequence: Normal To Abnormal
Visual: Off
Return to Normal Reset while

Process: Abnormal or Normal
Sequence: Alarm
Normal
Visual: Fast Flash
Process: Abnormal
Reset while
Sequence: Acknowledged
Abnormal
Visual: On
859857A1.vsd
4
In Acknowledgeable mode, both Off to On and On to Off state changes in the configured operand cause the background to
flash; the window must be acknowledged/reset to cancel flashing. This mode conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard
type R-6.
Figure 4-43: Annunciator alarm sequence in Acknowledgeable mode
Process: Normal
Reset Sequence: Normal To Abnormal
Visual: Off
Process: Normal Reset while Normal Process: Abnormal or Normal

Sequence: Ringback Sequence: Alarm
Visual: Slow Flash Return to Abnormal Visual: Fast Flash
Process: Abnormal
Reset while
Return to Normal Sequence: Acknowledged
Abnormal
Visual: On
859858A1.vsd
To reset all annunciator windows:

1. In the software, access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Panel.
To acknowledge/reset all annunciator windows on a page:

1. On the graphical front panel with none of the annunciator windows selected, press the RESET pushbutton once for
acknowledgement and twice for reset. The flashing stops.
To acknowledge an annunciator window:

1. On the graphical front panel, press the Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons to select the window, so that is has a
yellow outline. Press the RESET or ENTER pushbutton. While a window is selected, if that window has activated since
the last restart, the date/time of the last activation of that window displays in the header.

An alarm remains in an alarm state (for example, displays red) when the condition remains. That is, if you acknowledged a
flashing alarm but the alarm condition remains, the background color remains red.
The SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > RESETTING > RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting can be used to select a FlexLogic
operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows.
Annunciator editor
The annunciator editor is used to configure alarms and actual value displays for the graphical front panel.
The path in the EnerVista software is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Editor.
The figure shows the annunciator editor and its preview window. The page name is entered as General at the top right.
Acknowledgeable and self-resetting alarms are set for basic functions, such as online/offline, Ethernet ports, unauthorized
access/failed logins, and battery failure. The text to display in the annunciator window is entered. The IN SERVICE LED is set
to be green because when the device is on, this LED is green. The preview shows what the annunciator looks like with all
alarms triggered. The last window is not configured and displays blank/grey. In order for the Ethernet and battery alarms
to work, the corresponding self-test alarms have been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable
Self Tests (not shown). The LEDs can be viewed on the front panel, so adding them to the annunciator is for illustrative
purposes only.
4 Figure 4-44: Annunciator editor and preview window

The three page layouts (3 × 4, 4 × 6, and 6 × 8) select the number of rows x columns of windows that appear in a page.
Annunciator window size and text size shrink as the number of annunciator windows in a page increases.
Properties that can be edited include alarm type (acknowledgeable, latched, self-reset), alarm input (any FlexLogic
operand), text color, and alarm background color.
• Default — Changes all annunciator settings to their factory default values
• Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window.
Metering editor
The metering editor is an actual values display tool. It creates pages of actual values for the graphical front panel. There
are two types: tables and phasor diagrams. Tabular actual values pages have settings to configure, while phasor actual
values pages have no settings. Five tabular metering pages can be configured, while there can be a phasor page for each
configured AC source. They display on the graphical front panel using the Metering Tab pushbutton.
The path to the editor is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.
Figure 4-45: Metering editor with preview window
4
The inputs are selected at the top. Select from the drop-down list or start typing in the field.
The page, page name, and grid layout are set below the inputs.
Content to display is configured with the cell lines. The content can be actual values, a status indicator, or text.

• Actual value — Select from the FlexAnalogs applicable to the T35, where a FlexAnalog is an analog parameter
• Status — Select from the FlexLogic operands identified in the Status Inputs at the top of the window. An example is to
display text to indicate whether the BATTERY FAIL operand is on or off.
• Text — Enter text to display in the table, for example name of table or column heading
If the metering input is other than OFF, the value of the selected metering input displays, formatted according to the size,
text color, units, multiplier, and decimal configuration. Otherwise either the Text or the Off Text displays depending on the
value of the operand selected by setting Status Input/Index.
A maximum of eight Status Inputs/Indexes can be used per metering page and 16 in all metering pages.
• Default — Changes all actual value settings to their factory default values
Configurable navigation editor

Configurable Navigation is a feature that opens specified pages when specific FlexLogic operands are activated. This
4 feature is useful to open the annunciator page containing an annunciator window that has entered its abnormal state.
In the example shown, failure of any of the three Ethernet ports triggers the Product Information page to display. With
unauthorized access (such as wrong password), IRIG-B clock failure, or breaker trouble, the Event Records display. When a
breaker opens, a single-line diagram displays. For the Ethernet and IRIG-B failure pages to work, these functions also have
been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests. For the breaker trouble, the single-line
diagram has been configured.
Figure 4-46: Navigation editor
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Configurable Navigation.
The settings consist of 64 field pairs, each with a condition and an activation page. The condition selects any FlexLogic
operand. The activation page selection is the standard set, such as product information, event records, annunciator pages,
and single-line diagrams.
To use the feature, select a CONDITION, select its ACTIVATE PAGE option, then save. When selecting the condition
operand, open the drop-down list and start typing in the field to auto-fill. For example, typing F displays FIRST ETHERNET
FAIL.

• Default — Changes all settings in the window to factory default values

4.2.3 Front panel navigation keys

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into further submenus.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the submenus. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting values when
in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values can
be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores setting values.
When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the
decimal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the address, press
the ENTER key. 4
When entering or changing an order code with two lines, press the down arrow to access the second line. On a basic front
panel, do this under ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION.
The figure shows the sequence to use to enter a setting. Subsequent sections provide more detail.
Figure 4-47: Front panel keypad use (basic front panel shown)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
1. Press to scroll top level:

SETTINGS
MENU 7 8 9
HELP 4 5 6
3. Press to scroll third level fields MESSAGE
2. Press to scroll second level:
ESCAPE 1 2 3 PRODUCT SETUP.
4. Press to scroll through values
ENTER VALUE 0 . +/-
5. Press to save change
842231A1.cdr

These keys and pushbuttons navigate and select items.
Up/Down/Left/Right — These pushbuttons move the selector among the options on a page. The selection is
indicated by a yellow background or a yellow border. On menu pages, the Right pushbutton activates the selected
submenu drilling down the menu hierarchy, and the Left pushbutton backs up the menu hierarchy. These
pushbuttons have a typematic feature on some pages: after a short pause, the pushbutton repeats as long as it is
pressed.
ENTER — Activates the selection on the display, for example a submenu, a control, a keypad key, or a setting. Also
stores updated settings.

ESCAPE — If a setting is open for edit, this pushbutton closes the setting without saving. If an item is selected, this
pushbutton deselects it. Otherwise this pushbutton activates the previous page in the page hierarchy.
RESET — Clears all latched LED indications and target messages. When a page with acknowledgeable/resettable
items is displayed, it instead resets/acknowledges all items on that page, or if an item on that page is selected, it
resets/acknowledges that item.
If you reset/acknowledge alarms, they stop flashing but remain in the alarm state as long as that state remains. In
other words, a red alarm does not switch off just because you acknowledged the alarm.
Home — Activates the home page, which is the root page. The page displays product information by default and
is configurable.
Side pushbutton — Five pushbuttons on the left side of the display and five pushbuttons on the right side of the
display. They perform various functions depending on the displayed page, such as switchgear controls. The
display dynamically shows its label next to each side pushbutton when the pushbutton has an assigned function.
These pushbuttons can also be programmed to function as user-programmable pushbuttons 9 and above.
Tab pushbutton — Five pushbuttons under the display. They navigate through the page hierarchy, and on some
pages activate other actions. The display footer dynamically labels the page or action that is activated by the Tab
pushbutton.
User-programmable pushbutton — Eight physical pushbuttons are associated with the first eight user-
4 programmable pushbutton elements. Numbering is down, that is, 1 to 4 down the left column and 5 to 8 down the
right column.
These elements control a set of FlexLogic operands that can be used to initiate outputs or select modes. Each
physical pushbutton has an integrated LED indicator that can be user-configured to display the appropriate
status.
These pushbuttons have clear covers behind which custom labels can be mounted. A utility is available to print
the labels, under File > Front Panel Report in the software.
4.2.4 LED indicators

The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event-
cause LEDs. The next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu).
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
Figure 4-48: Typical LED panel for enhanced front panel
842811A1.CDR
The status indicators in the first column are as follows:

• IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, and
the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup > Installation)
• TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages outlined at the
end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values > Records. For a beta /
pre-release, this LED is always on.
• TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For information, see the Testing section in the Settings chapter.
• TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip input has operated. Set the operand under
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator latches; initiate the reset
command to reset the latch.
• ALARM — Indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. Set the operand under
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator never latches.
• PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator never latches.
The event-cause indicators in the first column are as follows.
Event-cause LEDs are below the status LEDs. They are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective
target setting selected as either “Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the
corresponding event-cause LEDs remain on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a
protection element target setting is “Latched,” then the corresponding event-cause LEDs turn on when the operate
operand associated with the element is asserted and remains on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after
the operand is reset. 4
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate
operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
• VOLTAGE — This LED indicates voltage was involved
• CURRENT — This LED indicates current was involved
• FREQUENCY — This LED indicates frequency was involved
• OTHER — This LED indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based (distance or
power for example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
• PHASE A — This LED indicates phase A was involved
• PHASE B — This LED indicates phase B was involved
• PHASE C — This LED indicates phase C was involved
• NEUTRAL/GROUND — This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is user-
defined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label
package of every T35, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used
to communicate with operators. See the User-Programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

The basic front panel consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used
to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can
also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is for connection to a computer.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.

Figure 4-49: LED panel 1
Status indicators
• IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, and
the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup > Installation)
4 • TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages outlined at the
• TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For information, see the Testing section in the Settings chapter.
• TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; initiate the reset command to reset the latch.
• ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator never
latches.
• PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator never latches.
Event-cause indicators
Event-cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs
remain on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is
“Latched,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remains on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
• VOLTAGE — Indicates voltage was involved
• CURRENT — Indicates current was involved
• FREQUENCY — Indicates frequency was involved
• OTHER — Indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based (distance or power for
example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
• PHASE A — Indicates phase A was involved
• PHASE B — Indicates phase B was involved
• PHASE C — Indicates phase C was involved
• NEUTRAL/GROUND — Indicates that neutral or ground was involved
User-programmable indicators
The second and third panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Custom labeling
can be done.

User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used
to communicate with operators. See the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 4-50: LED panels 2 and 3 (index template)
Default labels for LED panel 2

The default labels are intended to represent the following:
• GROUP 1...6 — The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group
4
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting
groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Even
though the LEDs have default labels, they are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in
the next section.
Figure 4-51: LED panel 2 (default labels)

The graphical front panel has 14 LEDs. LEDs 1 to 5 are fixed status LEDs, and LEDs 6 to 14 are programmable.
Status indicators
• IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, the
relay’s test mode is disabled, and the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup >
Installation)
• TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages outlined at the

• TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in Test Blocked (solid) or Test (flashing) mode. For information, see the Testing
section in the Settings chapter.
• TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip input has operated. Set the operand under
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator latches; initiate the reset
command to reset the latch.
• ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm input has operated. Set the operand
under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs.
Figure 4-52: Example of LEDs on graphical front panel
User-programmable event-cause indicators

Event-cause LEDs are below the status LEDs. They are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective
target setting selected as “Self-Reset” or “Latched.” If set to “Self-Reset,” then the corresponding event cause LED remains
on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If set to “Latched” and asserted, then it remains
on until the operand is reset and then a reset command initiated.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
The LEDs have defaults and can be configured to show instead the status of any FlexLogic operand.
The labeling area has a clear cover for custom labels. A utility is available to print stick-on labels, as outlined later in this
chapter.
These LEDs are programmed by default as follows:
• PICKUP — LED 6 — Indicates that an element is picked up, and hence a trip can be imminent
• VOLTAGE — LED 7 — Indicates voltage was involved
• CURRENT — LED 8 — Indicates current was involved
• FREQUENCY — LED 9 — Indicates frequency was involved
• OTHER — LED 10 — Indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based (distance or
power for example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
• PHASE A — LED 11 — Indicates phase A was involved
• PHASE B — LED 12 — Indicates phase B was involved
• PHASE C — LED 13 — Indicates phase C was involved
• NEUTRAL/GROUND — LED 14 — Indicates that neutral or ground was involved

4.2.5 Front panel labelling

The following procedure requires these pre-requisites:
• The UR front panel label cutout sheet (GE part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed
• Small-bladed knife
To create custom LED and pushbuttons labels for the enhanced front panel:
1. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. If not already copied to the Offline Window area, right-click the online device and select the Add Device to Offline
Window option. Click the Receive button in the window that opens to save the settings file to the Offline Window area.
3. Type labels as follows. Select the File > Front Panel Report. The window opens.
Figure 4-53: Enhanced front panel label designer
4. Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbutton in the fields provided. The
LED Offsets and Button Offsets buttons move all labels left/right and up/down on the page (they both do the same
action, so use either button). The Button Offsets button does not display when there are no pushbuttons to customize.
5. Feed the UR front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
6. When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
7. Remove the UR label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
Use the tool with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user.

The label package shipped with every T35 contains the three default labels, the custom label template sheet, and the label
removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, use the following procedures to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
To set up and use the label removal tool:
1. Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown.
4
Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown.
To remove the LED labels from the T35 front panel and insert the custom labels:
1. Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Ensure that the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.

2. Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the label tool to the LED label.
3. Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown.
4. Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown.
To remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the T35 front panel and insert the custom labels:
1. Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown. Ensure that the bent

tab points away from the relay.
2. Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the
label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3. Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label.
4. Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the

buttons.
4
After programming LEDs and pushbuttons under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Leds and User-
Programmable Pushbuttons, labels can be created for the front panel.
To create LED and pushbutton labels for a basic front panel:
1. In the EnerVista software, if the T35 is not already listed in the Offline Window area, add it by right-clicking it and
selecting the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2. Click the File > Front Panel Report menu item and select the device.
3. In the Front Panel Report window, double-click an LED or pushbutton slot and type a label. If you need to see the
existing front panel remotely, access Actual Values > Front Panel for the online device. If you need to see the In the
figure, note that labeling is being done for the third set of LEDs because the second panel of LEDs was factory-labeled.

Figure 4-54: Basic front panel label designer (LEDs shown)
4
4. Optionally save the changes by clicking the Save icon on the toolbar.
5. Click the Print icon on the toolbar. Consider printing to PDF format and adjusting the zoom for appropriate label size,
then print on a physical printer.
6. Cut labels as a block or individually, for example with scissors or an Exacto knife.
7. If there is a plastic cover over the front panel, remove it by gently pushing in on the right side and lifting off the cover.
8. Remove the plastic cover over the LEDs or pushbutton(s) using a screw driver.
9. Insert the labels.
10. Re-attach the plastic covers.

The T35 includes software for labeling the LEDs and pushbuttons on the graphical front panel and a sticker sheet with pre-
printed and blank labels. The pre-printed labels are on the top-left of the template sheet, and the blank labels are on the
bottom-right. Use the pre-printed labels, or use the designer provided in the software and print labels onto the template.
One sheet is provided.
The example shows LED labeling, with pushbutton labeling below it (cut off).
To create LED and pushbutton labels for the front panel:
1. In the EnerVista software, in the Online or Offline Window area, access Settings > Front Panel Label Designer or
Front Panel Label Designer (at the product root level). The designer window opens with pre-configured labels.
2. Under File > Print Setup, change the page orientation to Landscape.
3. In the label designer window, delete all labels not wanted for printing. This can be done by clicking the Reset button to
clear all labels, or by selecting each unwanted label and deleting it. Otherwise, all labels displayed print on the
template and use up the template. If you make a mistake, exit the window and open it again to view the default labels.
4. Based on the location on the template on which to print, create the labels by typing in the appropriate slots.

Figure 4-55: Front panel label designer for graphical front panel
5. Click the Print button in the window and select the printer.
6. Once printed, peel the labels off the template and stick them on the front panel. For the enhanced and graphical front
panels, they go over the clear plastic inserts, not under. For the basic front panel, they go under or over the plastic
covers.
Any changes are not saved. Each time that the label designer window opens, the original template displays. Any labels
deleted are not lost.
4.2.6 Menu navigation

Press the MENU key to display selections or home page. Each press of the key advances through the following main
headings:
• Actual Values
• Settings
• Commands
• Targets
• Factory Service
• User displays (when enabled)

The setting and actual value pages are arranged hierarchically. Header display pages are indicated by double scroll bars
(), while sub-header pages are indicated by a single scroll bar (). The header display pages represent the highest level
of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. Use the down, right, left, and up arrows to navigate
the menu. The MESSAGE up and down arrow keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual

values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE right arrow from a header display displays specific information for the category.
Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE left arrow from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header
display.
Default values are indicated in this instruction manual in mixed case. In the example shown here, the default access level is
Restricted.
Highest level Lowest level (setting value)
 SETTINGS  SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL:

 PRODUCT SETUP    Restricted

 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP
Example
 ACTUAL VALUES Press the MENU key until the Actual Values header page appears. This page contains system
 STATUS and relay status information.
4  SETTINGS

Press the MENU key until the Settings header page appears. This category contains settings to
 PRODUCT SETUP configure the relay.

 SECURITY Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first sub-header (Security).


ACCESS LEVEL: Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Security.
Restricted

 SECURITY Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Security heading.


 DISPLAY Press the MESSAGE down arrow to display the second setting sub-header associated with the
 PROPERTIES Product Setup header.

LANGUAGE: Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Display Properties.
English

 SETTINGS Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Display Properties page, then again to return to
 SYSTEM SETUP the Product Setup Page. Press the MESSAGE down arrow to move to the next Settings page. This
page contains settings for System Setup.

Access the main menu by pressing the Home pushbutton, then the Menu Tab pushbutton.
Use the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons to select a submenu, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton to drill into that
submenu. The Left and ESCAPE pushbuttons back up the menu hierarchy.
The Page Up and Page Down Tab pushbuttons also navigate through the list. When there is only a single page of options,
they jump to the first and last entries.
The options displayed depend on order code.

Figure 4-56: Main menu on graphical front panel
4.2.7 Change settings

4
Numerical data
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE For example, select the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH
TIME: 10.0 s MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key again to view the
MAXIMUM: 10.0 next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
• 0 to 9 and decimal point — The relay numeric keypad works the same as a calculator. A number is entered one digit at
a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE left arrow or
pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
• VALUE keys — The VALUE up arrow increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE up arrow again allows the setting selection to continue
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE down arrow decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to
the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE down arrow again allows the setting selection to
continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric
TIME: 2.5 s keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message changes as the digits are being entered.

NEW SETTING Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Press ENTER to store the
HAS BEEN STORED new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing
process. Numerical values that contain decimal places are rounded-off if more decimal place digits
are entered than specified by the step value.

Enumeration data
Enumeration settings have data values that are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set has
two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL: For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted," "Command," "Setting," and
Restricted "Factory Service."
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE up arrow displays the next selection while the
VALUE down arrow displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL: If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting," press the VALUE keys until the proper selection displays.
Setting Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

NEW SETTING Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER stores the
HAS BEEN STORED new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation.
4 Alphanumeric text
Text settings have data values that are fixed in length, but user-defined in characters. They can be upper-case letters,
lower-case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages can be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific
applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example, enter the text “Breaker #1”.
1. Press the decimal point to enter text edit mode.
2. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4. Press ENTER to store the text.
5. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages appear sequentially for several
seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.

When enabling an element in the EnerVista software that outputs to an actual value, the actual values menu is not
updated on the graphical front panel via Ethernet connection when that menu is active on the graphical front panel.
Navigate out and back into the menu for activation.
Numerical data
This example outlines how to change the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. Flash messages are status, warning, error, and
information messages displayed in response to certain key presses during settings programming. An example is a
confirmation message upon saving settings. This setting specifies how long to display the message.
Press the Menu pushbutton to display the main menu.

Figure 4-57: Main menu
Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select SETTINGS, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.
Figure 4-58: Settings menu 4
With PRODUCT SETUP selected, press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.

Figure 4-59: Product Setup menu
Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select DISPLAY PROPERTIES, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.
4 Figure 4-60: Display Properties menu
Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select FLASH MESSAGE TIME, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton. If the relay is
configured to require login to edit settings, and the user is not already logged in, the login page displays. When the user
has successfully logged in, the setting is opened for edit. As the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting accepts a numerical value, a
keypad displays. The time is to be changed to 4.0 seconds.
The current setting displays. A flashing cursor line marks the insertion point, initially positioned after the last character of
the setting. The setting range displays under the text.
Press the <-- Move Cursor and Move Cursor --> Tab pushbuttons to move the insertion point. Place it after the 2.
Press the Backspace Tab pushbutton to remove the character to the left of the cursor, in this case the 2.
Using the arrow keys, enter another time, for example 4 for four seconds. These Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons
move the keypad key selector. Pressing the ENTER pushbutton with the - key selected inverts the sign. Pressing the ENTER
pushbutton with the decimal point selected enters that character at the insertion point. Push ENTER now to accept the 4.

Figure 4-61: Settings page with numeric keypad
Press the Save Tab pushbutton, which does a range check on the value, saves the setting when valid, closes the page, and
displays the previous page.
4
When a setting is not saved due to an invalid value, a message flashes, for example being out of range. In cases where the
relay needs to be restarted for settings to take effect, the flash message advises.
Setting entry can be canceled without impact on the original value by pressing the ESCAPE or Home pushbutton.
Alphanumeric text
Settings that accept alphanumeric values display a keyboard. An example is a pushbutton name.
The &123 key toggles between text and numbers.
The shift key (up arrow on keyboard) is green upon activation, while the keyboard letters switch to upper case. Double-click
the shift key to lock capital lettering, or full capitals.
The globe key (shown greyed-out) toggles the keyboard language between English and another display language selected,
for example between English and French. (The second language needs to be activated under Settings > Product Setup >
Display Properties.)
For Japanese and Chinese, up to 10 characters can be input in a field, not 20.
To add accents, highlight a key and hold the ENTER pushbutton on the graphical front panel. Any special characters
associated with the key display.
To avoid conflict with XML programming, do not enter the following characters on the Annunciator and Metering editor
panels: " (quotation mark), ' (apostrophe), < (less than), > (greater than), & (ampersand). When used, the text following the
character does not display or the Annunciator and Metering panels do not display on the graphical front panel.

Figure 4-62: Settings page with keyboard and accents
4.2.8 View actual values

4
In addition to data viewable in the Actual Values menu on the front panel, phasor diagrams and metered data can be
displayed. The metered data can be arranged as a table.
The update rate of metered values is 500 ms.
A phasor page for each configured AC Source and up to five user-configurable metering pages can be displayed. The
phasor pages are not configurable. Each phasor page shows a phasor plot and numerical values of all currents, voltages,
and symmetrical components of a single AC source.
The Annunciator and Metering pages can be configured to display data. Each has a user-configured number of rows and
columns. Each cell can include either configurable static text or the value of a selected FlexLogic operand, FlexAnalog
operand, or actual value.
To display a metering page, press the Home pushbutton, then the Metering Tab pushbutton. The first metering page
opens, with phasor pages listed before tabular pages. The Tab pushbuttons display any other metering page, as do the Up,
Down, Left and Right pushbuttons. The current page is highlighted with a blue Tab pushbutton.
Each phasor page has a name, which consists of the value of the SOURCE NAME # setting appended with " Phasors."
Phasor pages that have no configured CTs or VTs do not have a Tab pushbutton, and phasor pages that have no
configured cells cannot be displayed.

Figure 4-63: Phasor display
The configurable name displays in the header and Tab pushbutton label. Factory default names are Page 1, Page 2, and so 4
on.
Figure 4-64: Metered actual values
The phasor sources are configured under Settings > System Setup > Signal Sources. The tables to display the actual
values are configured in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.
4.2.9 Breaker control

The T35 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
that can be presented on front panel LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from the front panel keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign
names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided
for two breakers; the user can use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
It is assumed in the following discussion that the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.

4.2.9.1 Control mode selection and monitoring

Installations can require that a breaker be operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1-
pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed
position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be
in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed that the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.
4.2.9.2 Front panel (user key) control

After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
4.2.9.3 Control of two breakers

For the following setup example, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
For this example, the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The USER 1 key performs the
selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key manually closes the breaker, and
the USER 3 key manually opens the breaker.
4
ENTER COMMAND This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND
PASSWORD PASSWORD is required, that is, if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been
issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1 This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message
To Select Breaker displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED This message displays after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per the following items (1), (2) and (3).
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed
To Close BKR1-(Name) again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to
close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed
To Open BKR1-(Name) again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1), (2) and (3). Repeatedly
pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers. Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2,
or 3 at any time cancels the breaker control function.
4.2.9.4 Control of one breaker

For this application, the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical to
that described in the previous section for two breakers.
4.2.10 Change passwords

The information in this section refers to password security. For information on how to set the password for the first time or
change CyberSentry passwords, see the previous chapter or the Settings > Product Setup > Security > CyberSentry section
in the next chapter.

The T35 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the front panel. This includes both keypad entry and the
RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this functionality.
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the T35, the remote password must be used. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the front panel, the local password must be used.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of a
password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify
setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
• Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
– Changing any setting
– Test mode operation
• Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following
operations:
– Changing the state of virtual inputs
– Clearing the event records
– Clearing the oscillography records 4
– Changing the date and time
– Clearing the breaker arcing current
– Clearing the data logger
– Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states
To enter the initial setting or command password:
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
 SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL:
  Restricted
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE COMMAND

  PASSWORDS  PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
 PASSWORD: No
5. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE up or down arrow to change the
selection to “Yes.”
6. Press the ENTER key and the display prompts you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7. Type in a password and press the ENTER key.

8. When VERIFY NEW PASSWORD displays, re-type the password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING ENTER NEW VERIFY NEW

PASSWORD: Yes PASSWORD: ########## PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
9. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) password is active.
4.2.10.1 Resetting the password in a device without CyberSentry
EnerVista UR Setup
1. In Settings > Product Setup, click the CHANGE button for the Command Password or Setting Password.
2. The pop-up states “Password Status: Set”, confirming that the user has previously set a password. Type
“ChangeMe1#” in both the New Password and Confirm Password fields, and press OK.
4 3. If the device has not been logged into using the previously set password, a prompt will request that the previous
password should be entered. Do this and press OK.
4. A message will appear confirming that this was a valid password - click OK.
5. A pop-up will now appear confirming “Password Status: Default” (i.e. the password is reset to the default
“ChangeMe1#”) and prompting for the new password. Type the new password, confirm it in the next field, then click
OK.
Front panel
1. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3. Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4. Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
5. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE up or down arrow to change the
selection to “Yes”.
6. Type “ChangeMe1#” and press the ENTER key. This will clear the current password and make “ChangeMe1#” the
password.
7. The display will prompt you to ENTER CURRENT PASSWORD. Type in a new password and press the ENTER key.
4.2.11 Invalid password entry

By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the front panel three times within five
minutes, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the T35 does not allow settings or command
level access via the front panel for five minutes.
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via any external communications interface
three times within five minutes, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the T35 does not
allow settings or command access via the any external communications interface for five minutes. The REMOTE
ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “Off” after five minutes for a Command password or 30 minutes for a
Settings password.
These default settings can be changed in EnerVista under Settings > Product Setup > Security.

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES LOGIC DIAGRAMS
4.3 Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams in this instruction manual provide an overview of function and settings. A logic diagram is based on
• Inputs-on the left side, which are setting and operands
• Logical gates, which is Boolean algebra to combine logical lines using AND, OR, NOT, and other gates to get a new
logical state
• Logical operators, which are timers, one-shot operations, latches, and so on
• Outputs-on the right side, which are products of the manipulations with inputs, logical gates, and logical operators to
produce new operands and define the output state of the element
True and false values are denoted by 1 and 0 respectively. A function usually is high/on/enabled when 1.
Reading from right to left in the following diagram, the TRIP BUS 1 OP and TRIP BUS 1 PKP FlexLogic operands on the
right side are triggered when either the settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered. When this applies,
the TRIP BUS 1 OP operand is triggered after the delay set by the TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY or TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY
setting, while the TRIP BUS 1 PKP operand initiates immediately. The settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram
is triggered as follows.
• For the reset, one of three conditions are required to meet the OR requirement shown at the bottom left. That is, the
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING setting must be 0=Disabled (which is negated by the NOT function to become 1=Enabled), output
from the TRIP BUS 1 RESET FlexLogic operand must be 1, or output from the RESET OP FlexLogic operand must be 4
1.
• For the settings, one of 16 input conditions at the top left must be met for the OR, the TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION must be
Enabled, and the TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK output must output as 0, which is then negated/reversed by NOT to become 1.
Table 4-2: Logic diagram symbols
Symbol Description
= Off Output from FlexLogic operand, so user-defined
= Enabled 1 = Enabled and 0 = Disabled
OR Any function input on the left side satisfies the condition
AND All functions input on the left side are required to satisfy the condition
 Not. Negates/reverses the output, for example 0 becomes 1.
 Connection
S, R Set, Reset
TPKP Timer pickup. Triggered by the settings latch in the diagram.
TRST Timer reset. Triggered by the reset latch in the diagram.

FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-65: Logic diagram

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
DELAY
= Off Non-volatile,
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
OR set-dominant
***
DELAY
AND S TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 TRIP BUS 1 OP
Latch
= Off TRST
R
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND
= Off
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
4 = Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP 842023A1.CDR
4.4 FlexLogic design using Engineer

The IED internally uses the FlexLogic equations. EnerVista Engineer provides a graphical way to design the logic. When the
user presses “compile” in Logic Designer, the software converts the graphical logic into equations and updates the
FlexLogic Equations.
There are two ways to create, edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations:
1. Using the FlexLogic Equation Editor available at FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor
2. Using the Logic Designer available at Engineer > Logic Designer
EnerVista Engineer is only available through the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup.
FlexLogic Equation Editor and Logic Designer are designed to be mutually exclusive as using them interchangeably
to create, edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations may cause inconsistencies in the resulting equations. The user
is recommended to use only one of the two methods throughout the process.
Parts of EnerVista Viewpoint Engineer software are integrated in the EnerVista UR Setup software. Engineer can be used to
create and modify FlexLogic that is used by a device, such as to monitor output, monitor triggers, and create self-tests.
Features include
• Automatically displays existing FlexLogic
• Drag-and-drop interface
• Open multiple tabs and edit simultaneously
• Display symbols in IEC, ISO, or UR formats
• Export a diagram as BMP file or copy it to the clipboard for import into other applications
• Scale and print files in various paper sizes
• Works with all UR firmware versions
The figure shows an example where several inputs are used to trigger an output. With the OR function, any one of the
inputs can trigger the output.

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Figure 4-66: Inputs triggering output in Engineer
The process is as follows:

• Modify or create a logic diagram in the Offline Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software
• Compile it and troubleshoot any errors
• The logic populates automatically into the FlexLogic Equation Editor
• Upload the file to the live device
• Monitor the output
This section explains how to use Engineer. It outlines the following topics:
• Design logic
• Send file to and from device
• Monitor logic
• View front panel
• Generate connectivity report
• Preferences

• Toolbars
4.4.1 Design logic

FlexLogic can be created with a block diagram. Note that although work is completed in the Offline Window area of the
software, communication occurs with the online device, for example when switching to monitoring mode.
The following procedures are outlined:
• Examples
• Add existing FlexLogic equations
• Create a logic diagram/sheet
• Rapidly add logic blocks in sequence
• Connect two logic diagrams/sheets
• Optimize the logic
• Change logic order
• Search logic
• Exclude sheet from compile
4 4.4.1.1 Examples
The symbols are displayed in the UR format.
Create oscillography trigger every three minutes

Figure 4-67: Three-minute timer turns on LED for 10 seconds
Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, the first and second virtual outputs are named
OscTrigger
Top logic — Three-minute timer trigger
Bottom logic — Turn on LED 1 for 10 seconds when the trigger starts
Create data logger trigger every seven minutes

Figure 4-68: Seven-minute timer turns on LED for 10 seconds
Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, virtual outputs 3 and 4 are named DLTrigger
Top logic — Seven-minute timer trigger
Bottom logic — Turn on LED 9 for 10 seconds when the trigger starts

Create events every minute, then every 100 ms

Figure 4-69: One-minute timer turns on LED and creates events every 100 ms
Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, virtual output 5 is named EVStart, 6 is named
EVTriggered, and 7 is named EVMakeEvent 4
Top logic — One-minute timer trigger
Middle logic — Turn on LED 17 for 10 seconds when trigger starts
Bottom logic — Create events at 100 ms intervals for the same 10 second period
4.4.1.2 Add existing FlexLogic equations

A logic diagram can be created using existing FlexLogic equations (this section) or by creating new ones (next section).
To create a logic diagram using existing FlexLogic equations:
1. In the Offline Window area, modify the FlexLogic for the device under FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor. If the
device is not listed, right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window
option.
Upon saving the modified FlexLogic, a yellow icon appears for the device in the Offline Window area to indicate that
the logic differs from the Online device.
2. In the Offline Window area, access Engineer for the device, then Logic Designer. The logic opens.
3. Click the Edit > Auto Populate Workbook menu item. If the software prompts if you want to keep or discard existing
sheets, either is acceptable, with the older excluded sheeted being denoted by brackets, such as < Sheet 1 >. The logic
displays in the various tabs. The FlexLogic created in the equation editor appears in Sheet 1, for example.
4.4.1.3 Create logic diagram

Upon access of the Logic Designer, the FlexLogic equations of the device display. You can create new logic in new sheets or
modify the ones that display.
This procedure uses input / output logic as an example.
1. In the Offline Window area, access Engineer for the device, then Logic Designer. If the device is not listed, right-click
the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window option.

Figure 4-70: Access Engineer in the Offline Window area
4 A default block diagram opens that shows 48 inputs (boxes) and 48 user-programmable LEDs (circles).
For the graphical front panel, no LEDs can be added to the window and the LEDs are removed when opening any
existing files. For these existing files with the LEDs removed, save the file without them.
Figure 4-71: Default view of FlexLogic designer
2. Optionally delete the default logic diagram by right-clicking its tab at the bottom of the window and selecting Delete.
3. To add a blank sheet, click Edit > Add Sheet. A new tab displays. Or use the last tab displayed, which is a blank sheet.
4. Optionally right-click the new tab and Rename it.
5. Add the input blocks to the logic diagram. For example, click the I/O Tokens tab on the right, click the Input element,

then click in the logic sheet to add it. Or drag-and-drop it.

6. Double-click the block on the sheet to configure it, selecting from the two drop-down lists. The figure shows that
virtual input 61 is being added. The View Associated Screen button opens its settings window.
Figure 4-72: Configuring an input block
7. Add the output blocks to the logic diagram. For example, click the I/O Tokens tab, click the Virtual Output element, 4
then click in the logic sheet to add it. Double-click the block on the sheet to configure it. For the name, make it unique.
The figure shows virtual output 61 is being added, with a suffix of "io" added to the name to make it unique. Note that
the outline color of a block is red until it is configured, and that this properties window varies by block and the
selectable options by order code.
Figure 4-73: Configuring an output block
8. Connect the input blocks to the output blocks by drawing a line as follows. Click at the end of one block and drag the
line to the next block. Or click the Drawing Tools tab, then select the Line option. The cursor needs to be at the
connection point to end the line, not elsewhere on the block. Note that the outline color is no longer red on the blocks.

Figure 4-74: Completed inputs and outputs
9. Add any remaining blocks or information. Right-click a block to copy and paste it. Notes are as follows.
Add a text box — Drawing Tools > Text
Add a FlexElement — Elements > FlexElement. An analog input is expected where a small arrow head shows in the
box.
Figure 4-75: FlexElement accepts analog inputs on left side where arrow heads display
Add an Element — Elements tab. Available elements reflect the product, for example the Control Elements category.
Figure 4-76: Elements reflect Control Elements
10. Check for any blocks that have a red outline. These are invalid. Fix them before continuing, for example by configuring
them.
11. Compile the logic diagram to check for errors by clicking the Compile button at the bottom left or by pressing the F7
key.
If prompted about a message about sorting, click Yes to apply the default (for this example), which can be automatic
sorting based on an algorithm that applies fastest execution time.
With successful compiling, the file is saved and the FlexLogic equations populate automatically. Scroll up through the
compile messages, with the red errors being the only messages that require fixing before proceeding.
The figure shows that we forgot to add the "Io" suffix to the names of virtual outputs 62 and 63, as indicated by
"Warning: Virtual output xx using default name." This warning is a minor warning.
The warning "input using disabled feature" means that input needs to be enabled. Double-click the block, click the
View Associated Screen button, enable the setting, save, and recompile.
The output and messages are explained in the next section.

Some information displayed in the compile messages updates automatically, for example messages after a device is
unplugged.
Figure 4-77: Compile and check the logic
12. View the FlexLogic equations by navigating in the Offline Window area to FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor. The
window opens with the entries displayed in the next tab.
Figure 4-78: Logic displayed in FlexLogic Equation Editor
4
13. Save the work.

The logic diagram has been created and the FlexLogic equations populated. The next steps are to upload the file to the
device and to monitor the device.
4.4.1.4 Compiled results and warning messages

When a yellow caution symbol displays in the Offline Window area, it means that the settings file is not synchronized with
the online device. Right-click the device in the Offline Window area, and select the Update SCL files option. SCL refers to
the Substation Configuration Language. An Instantiated IED capability description (IID) file is an example of an SCL file and
contains the actual settings on a UR device.
Figure 4-79: Settings files not synchronized between offline and online files
When the Update SCL files option is selected, the CID and IID files in the device folder are updated by the user
configuration in the IEC 61850 panel and thereby become synchronized. The CID file and the IID file (depending on the
preference 'Do not update IID file when updating SCL files') are updated. If the CID file is not already there, it is generated.

The location of these files is C:\ProgramData\GE Power Management\urpc, for example, in the Offline and Online folders.
Any FlexLogic equations entered in the Offline Window area are erased. The logic drawn in the Logic Designer window in
Engineer in the Offline Window area remain. The warning icon disappears after updating.
The following information is contained in the compile window.
Figure 4-80: Compiled results
Number of Lines Saved — The number of compiled logic lines eliminated by using the optimization algorithm, as set in the
Optimize Compiled Output option of the Preferences. In the example shown, no lines were saved because the optimizer is
disabled.
FlexLogic Lines — The number of lines that the compiled logic uses, for example seven of 512 available.
Virtual Output equations — The number of FlexLogic equations used in the Logic Designer window.
Timers used — The number of timers used in the Logic Designer window.
Memory Used — The percent of memory used in the Logic Designer window.
Errors
Table 4-3: Errors from compiling
Category Block or gate Message Description
affected
Error All Number of lines (nnn) exceeds The compiled result exceeds the limit of 512. Reduce the number of
maximum limit of 512 equations to 512 or less.
Error Tag-In Tag-in not configured (TAG_ID, A Tag-In is connected to a circuit but the Tag-In is not referencing an
SheetReference) existing Tag-Out
Error 1 Shots One Shot is over limit The number of One-Shots contained within all of the VO blocks has
(SYMBOL_ID, SheetReference) exceeded the maximum allowed for the firmware revision. This value can
either be 0 or 32.
Error =VO VO has no inputs (VO_ID, A Virtual Output block is located within the FlexLogic diagram and there
SheetReference) is no block connected as input to it. Connect and identify the inputs.

Category Block or gate Message Description

affected
Error Timer Timer used more than once The same timer is used in more than one place in the editor. This means
(TIMER_ID, SheetReference) either the circuit that the Timer belongs to has been branched, or the
Timer has been duplicated.
Error Input Unrecognized Parameter An Input symbol is configured to an item that is not recognized by the
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,SheetRefere current order code and version. Possible cause: The order code and/or
nce) version of the settings file was converted causing the input parameter to
become unavailable.
Warnings
When using the 'Reset OP' operand, a warning can appear indicating that this is a disabled feature. This means that the
Reset Settting's FlexLogic operand is set to OFF. Resetting of the relay can be done by pressing the reset button on the front
panel of the relay or by sending a Reset command through communications.
Table 4-4: Warning messages from compiling
Category Block or Message Description
gate
affected
Minor warning Input Input set to unused VO An Input symbol is using an unassigned Virtual Output
Major warning Tag-Out

(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
Tag-out not connected A Tag-Out symbol has no input
4
(TAG_ID,Sheet)
Major warning All Symbol not connected A symbol’s input and/or output is not connected and is not part of a
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet) VO block. Draw the input and/or output to the block.
Minor warning =VO Virtual Output n using default The Assigned Virtual Output is using the default name. Change the
name (VO_ID,Sheet) name.
Minor warning Input Input using default name An Input symbol is using a Contact Input, Contact Output, Digital
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet) Element, FlexElement, or Digital Counter set to the default name.
Change the name so that it is unique.
Setting warning Input Input using disabled feature An Input symbol is using a disabled Virtual Input, Contact Input, Digital
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet) Element, FlexElement, Digital Counter, Control Pushbutton,
Programmable Pushbutton, Contact Output, or Protection/Monitoring
Element. Enable it and try again.
Major warning Input Input set to OFF An Input symbol is set to OFF
(SYMBOL_ID,Sheet)
Major warning Input Input set to ON An Input symbol is set to ON
(SYMBOL_ID,Sheet)
Setting warning Input Contact Output Operate is OFF The symbol block is using the default setting of OFF
(SYMBOL_ID, Contacts)
Setting warning Input Contact Output Seal-In is OFF The symbol block is using the default setting of OFF
(SYMBOL_ID, Contacts)
4.4.1.5 Rapidly add logic blocks in sequence

Blocks are added by clicking an element then clicking in the drawing area, or by dragging and dropping the element onto
the canvas. Blocks can be added rapidly in sequence, for example when you have inputs 1 to 10, without having to select
the element each time.
1. In Engineer, click File > Preferences. The window opens.
2. Click the Editor entry.
3. Enable the Repeat Symbol check box.
4. Click the Ok button to save and exit from the window.
5. In the logic diagram, select an element, then click in the drawing area to add it, click again to add a second box, and
so on.

4.4.1.6 Connect two logic diagrams

When the logic is complex and requires two sheets, for example, these two sheets can be connected. By connecting them,
the logic is continuous from one sheet to the next.
1. In the first sheet, click the I/O Tokens tab.
2. Scroll to the bottom, and click and drag the Tag Out element to the sheet where the next sheet is to connect.
3. Double-click the element and in the window that opens, give it a name, such as "To Sheet 2" or "To IO Sheet 2."
Figure 4-81: Connecting sheet 1 to sheet 2
4. In the second sheet, click and drag the Tag In element to the sheet where the first sheet is to connect.
5. Double-click the element and in the window that opens, select the first sheet from the drop-down list to connect the
two sheets.
6. Save the work.
4.4.1.7 Optimize the logic

The number of available FlexLogic entries depends on firmware, for example 515 or 1024 lines. The software can
automatically optimize a logic diagram to reduce space and free up entries.
1. In Engineer, enable the optimization check box in the Compile tab. With this option enabled, the software
automatically optimizes a logic diagram to reduce space and free up FlexLogic entries.
2. Run the compiler by clicking the Compile button. The number of saved lines displays in the Optimization Summary.
Changes also display when the FlexLogic Equation Editor is accessed. The logic diagram does not change. In the
example shown, no lines were saved to free up space.
Figure 4-82: Code optimization results
4.4.1.8 Change logic order

The order in which the FlexLogic is populated in the FlexLogic Equation Editor window depends on settings.

First, when automatic sorting is not enabled, the sequence in which the blocks were drawn is followed.
Second, the order in which equations are executed can be manually changed, as outlined here.
Third, automatic sorting can be set in preferences, as outlined here. It is enabled by default and means that an algorithm is
implemented to give best results and quickest performance, For example, the block with the fastest execution time is
entered first in the FlexLogic. When two block functions have the same execution time the block drawn first displays first in
the FlexLogic. For example, drawing input 61 to output 61, then input 62 to output 62 causes the input/output 61 to be
entered into the FlexLogic first. Automatic sorting takes precedence over manual sort; if you enable this option, manual
sorting is not implemented.
To manually change logic order:
1. In the compile area, click the VO Order tab.
2. If the window is blank, click the Refresh button.
3. Select an entry and click the up or down arrow. To cancel any manual changes, click the Sort or Refresh button.
4. Recompile. The change is not executed or saved if automatic sorting is enabled.
Figure 4-83: Ordering FlexLogic entries
To set automatic sorting:

1. In Engineer, under File > Preferences, select the Compiler option. The Automatically Sort VOs option means that the
block with the fastest execution time is entered first in the FlexLogic. When two block functions have the same
execution time the block drawn first displays first in the FlexLogic. For example, drawing input 61 to output 61, then
input 62 to output 62 causes the input/output 61 to be entered into the FlexLogic first.
4.4.1.9 Search logic

Items that can be searched in a logic diagram include gates, Input, Contact Input, Contact Output, Timer, Virtual Output,
Tag In, Tag Out, and User-programmable LED. A search can be performed while designing or monitoring.
1. In the compiler area of Engineer, click the Search tab.
2. Use one of the following methods to set search criteria:
– Select an element from the first drop-down list. Results display automatically.
– Type in the second text string box, or select any of the 32 previous searches from the drop-down list. Click the
Search button. Any results display.
The search applies to all tabs, not just the active tab.
3. Double-click a search result to view the item.
Figure 4-84: Search function

You can also select an element from the drop-down list on the toolbar. It is then highlighted in the logic diagram.
4.4.1.10 Exclude sheet from compile

While designing the FlexLogic equations, entire sheets can be removed from the compile logic. This allows the user to test
various schemes by placing schemes on separate sheets and including either sheet at compile time.
1. In the Logic Designer window, right-click the tab and select the Exclude from Compile option so that the check mark
displays. When sheets are excluded, a message displays with each compile that "excluded sheets will not be reflected
in the RPN." An excluded sheet is denoted with end brackets, similar to < Sheet 1 >.
Figure 4-85: Excluding a tab from compiling
Figure 4-86: Tab excluded from compiling
4.4.2 Send file to and from device

With the logic diagram created, compiled, and errors eliminated, the FlexLogic can be sent to a live device. And,
conversely, a file from a live device can be added to the Offline Window area for additional work.
To send a file to a device:
1. In the Offline Window area of the software, right-click the device name and select the Write Settings to Device option.
A prompt can appear that the URS file has been repaired; acknowledge the message.
2. When a window opens, select the device to which you want to send the file, then click the Send button and confirm.
The order codes and IEC 61850 edition must match. The file is sent to the live device. Any errors can be viewed in the
log file at the prompt.
To import a file from a device:

1. Close all open files in Engineer that relate to the device, else a message displays to that effect, for example to close
the FlexLogic view associated with the file. When the file is not associated with a live device, a message displays to
that effect; you need to identify the device to which you want to send the file. The order codes must match.
2. Right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window option. After you enter
a name for the file, it is written to the Offline Window area.

4.4.3 Monitor logic

After creating the logic diagram, validating it, and uploading the FlexLogic to a device, the results from the device can be
viewed.
The following checks are performed automatically when switching from design to monitoring, and prompts display when
necessary:
• Verify that the order code of the linked relay matches the settings file
• Verify that the version of the linked relay matches the settings file
• Verify that the FlexLogic Equation Editor of the linked relay matches the settings file. Solution: Compile the FlexLogic
logic diagram and send the settings file to the relay.
• Verify that the FlexLogic Timers of the linked relay match the settings file. Solution: Compile the FlexLogic logic
diagram and send the settings file to the relay.
• If the settings file contains a serial number lock, then verify that the serial number of the linked relay matches the
settings file
To view results:
1. In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2. Double-click the Logic Designer entry and Compile the logic.
3. Double-click the Logic Monitor entry, or click the M button in the toolbar at the top of the window. With successful 4
launch, the logic displays and a green indicator displays at the bottom of the tab.
When the file is not associated with a live device, a message displays to that effect; you need to identify the device to
which you want to send the file. The order codes must match between the Offline Window and the Online Window.
When the device is offline, a message indicates problems communicating with the device.
When the devices are not synchronized, a message indicates the FlexLogic does not match the settings file. To send
the offline file to the device, right-click the device name and select the Write Settings to Device option.
When the state of a symbol is OFF, the symbol is shown in the default color or no color.
When a symbol's state changes to ON, the symbol and connection line turns green.
The state of some symbols can either be unknown or the state transitions faster than the update interval. For these
two cases, the state of the symbol is considered 'UNKNOWN' and the symbol is outlined in red.
The colors for the ON and Unknown state can be customized in the Preferences.
The figure shows that the software is communicating with devices (square green indicator) and that a minor error is
present (green box outline). In this case, the battery is weak and needs to be replaced. This can be viewed as the
Replace Battery message on the front panel of the device and in the EnerVista software under Actual Values > Front
Panel > Front Panel or Display/Keypad.
Figure 4-87: Monitoring a device, with minor error caused by weak battery

4.4.4 View front panel and print labels

This window displays the LEDs that are on the front panel. You can create labels and print them for the device. You do not
use the window to add text labels and upload them to the device. Custom labelling is also outlined earlier in this chapter;
see the Front Panel Labelling section.
To view the front panel:
2. Double-click the Front Panel Report entry. The report displays. The Device Summary is read from the settings file and
cannot be changed. The LEDs and pushbuttons display below the summary.
3. To save the report, click File > Save As, enter a file name, and select the front panel report (FPR), JPG, or PDF format.
Figure 4-88: Front panel display in Engineer
To print labels:
1. In the Front Panel Report window, double-click an LED or pushbutton and enter text.
2. To print the labels, click the Print icon on the toolbar.
3. To save the report and labels, click File > Save As, enter a file name, and select the FPR, JPG, or PDF format.
4. Use the instructions in the second tab of the window to add the labels to the physical device.
4.4.5 Generate connectivity report

This report displays basic information about a device, such as order code, port numbers, inputs and outputs. You can use it
to create a PDF file of basic information. The report is based on CID and/or IID files, and not the system or full SCD. All
device details including Remote Inputs, Remote Outputs, and Analog Inputs/Outputs are indicated, including quantities
used and available.
To display a device report:
2. Double-click the Device Connectivity Report entry. The report displays.
3. To save as a PDF file, click File > Save As.

Figure 4-89: Device Connectivity Report
4.4.6 Preferences
Preferences determine functionality. As such, you are encouraged to review them. This section outlines some options
available in the menus and preference panels.
Access them in the Logic Designer panel under the View menu and under File > Preferences. The Logic Designer and
Logic Monitor preferences are outlined here, not all preferences for a device.
4.4.6.1 View menu

View > Toolbar > Advanced Actions — Active when in Logic Designer. Toggles a toolbar to nudge, rotate, flip, or change
the order of an element.
View > Show Unused Pins — Enable to display unconnected pins. Disable to eliminate unconnected pins from the view, for
example when printing.
Figure 4-90: Unused pins on and off
4.4.6.2 Logic designer

The path is File > Preferences > Logic Designer.

Workbook Setup
Size and Units

Size and Units — Changes the size of diagram area displayed in Engineer. If you set the size to be smaller than an existing
logic diagram, the content is cut off.
WorkBook
Print Scale — The scale for logic diagram when printing. Scaling a large diagram to 200 percent, for example, results in the
diagram being cut off.
Orphan Protection — When enabled, the printing output prevents Virtual Output circuits from spanning more than a single
page. The largest Virtual Output circuit is scaled to fit on a single page and all remaining Virtual Output circuits are scaled
so that all circuits are printed using the same scale.
Show Title Block — When enabled, places an information box at the bottom right of the diagram when printing. Enter the
information in the File Information panel.
Show Sheet Name — When enabled, shows Sheet 1, Sheet 2, or any other name at the top of the logic diagram when
printing.
Start Sheet On New Page — Places the sheet on the next page when printing.
4 Show Notes Selection — When other than None, prints the text from any information notes added to the document (under
Drawing Tools tab > Note). The text is printed after the logic diagram.
File Information
The text entered here displays at the bottom right of a diagram when printing, provided that the Show Title Block option is
enabled. Note the option to change the logo from the GE logo to your company logo.
Display
The panel sets how the element boxes display. The figure shows how an AND gate displays when the UR default, IEC, or
ISO symbol type is selected.
Figure 4-91: AND gate varies by standard selected
Symbol Style — IEC, ISO, UR Setup — Sets how the gates display in the logic diagram.
Symbol Color — When set to Black & White, only logic blocks with issues continue to display red.
Zoom Operation — Determines what happens when the View > Zoom functions are used. When set to Sheet Only and the
zoom is changed, the single tab changes. When set to Workbook, all tabs change.
Editor
Repeat Symbol — Enable this feature to add element blocks rapidly in sequence, for example when you have inputs 1 to
10, without having to select the element each time. Select the element block from the toolbox, click the diagram, then
continue to click to add additional blocks.
Use first available VO / Timer — When enabled and you copy and paste a virtual output or timer element, the numbering
continues in sequence. For example, you copy timer 5 and paste it as timer 6. When disabled and you copy and paste a
virtual output or timer element, the same number is used. For example, you copy timer 5 and paste it as timer 5.
Auto-Save Logic Designer every x minutes — Logic diagrams with changes are saved automatically according to this
interval. The range is 5 minutes (default) to 30 minutes. With auto-save, the file extension of the saved file is .auto. This file
remains until you save the file manually.

Auto Populate
These options work in the Edit > Auto Populate Workbook function.
VOs per Worksheet — When an existing settings file is opened in the Logic Designer, the Logic Designer populates the
canvas and attempts to evenly distribute the Virtual Output circuits across multiple sheets. A value of 100 in this setting
places all FlexLogic equations on a single sheet until there are 100, then the next ones are placed on another sheet. A value
of 1 places each Virtual Output circuit on a separate sheet.
Show / FlexLogic Merge / Show Unused — If Show Contact Outputs and Show LEDs are selected, for example, the function
places Contact Output and User-programmable LED symbols for settings that are configured. If you disable the LED check
boxes, then the LED tab/sheet does not display when you next open the Logic Designer window. The settings apply to all
products, not just the active window when it is next opened. Close then reopen the Logic Designer window for the setting
to take effect.
Compiler
Show Warnings — Options to filter the messages that display when logic compiles.
Minor — Enable to display minor errors. An example is using the default values of an element added to the diagram, such
as the name of the element. An example is "Warning: Virtual output xx using default name," for which you simply click into
the element to rename it.
Major — Enable to display major errors. Examples are an input that does not have a corresponding output, using disabled
features, and failing to connect a symbol. Fix these errors.
4
Setting — Enable to display error message related to settings, such as an improperly configured setting, such as using ON
or OFF.
Automatically Sort VOs — When enabled, the logic is compiled with an algorithm to give best results and quickest
performance, for example the fastest logic first. The fastest logic displays in the FlexLogic Equation Editor output as the
first entries in the table. Use sorting when virtual outputs have dependencies on other virtual outputs. This setting takes
precedence over order set manually in the VO Order tab in the compiler.
When disabled, the sequence in which the blocks were drawn is followed.
Optimize Compiled Output — Not applicable. Use the check box outlined earlier in the Optimize the Logic section.
4.4.6.3 Logic monitor
Display
The software displays the color specified when an element is on. There is no color when the element is off.
The software displays another color when the status cannot be determined and is unknown.
Timing
Timing Information can be displayed in the monitoring window. This timing information is only an approximate
representation of how Engineer sees transitions. Use the device's Event Record to view accurate timing information.
The timing information can also be streamed to a comma-separated values (CSV) spreadsheet.
The timing information displayed and recorded can be filtered based on six categories. If a category is not selected, any
timing information related to that category does not display and is not recorded to the CSV file.
Show Timing Information in Output Window — Enable to display times in the monitoring window.
Because of the update rate of the Logic Monitoring, the timing information cannot be used as an accurate representation
of the events that occur within the relay. Use instead the device's event record. Timing information can be delayed by 30
seconds.
Save Timing Information to CSV File — Enable to write timing information in a spreadsheet. The timing information is
recorded in a text file that uses commas to separate each of the fields. This file uses the extension CSV that is supported by
any spreadsheet application.
Every change written to the CSV file requires a timestamp.

The format for the timing information in the output window is as follows:
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss
devicename offline
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss
devicename ONLINE
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss
VO1: Virt Out 1- 0
VI4: Virt In 4- 1
DI3: Direct In 3- 0
RI2: Remote In 2- 1
H5a: Contact In 1- 1
H1: Contact Output 1- 0
Data is only appended to the CSV file. The format for the data is as follows:
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, devicename, offline
4 yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, devicename, ONLINE
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, VO1: Virt Out 1, 0
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, VI4: Virt In 4, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, DI3: Direct In 3, 0
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, RI2: Remote In 2, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, H5a: Contact In 1, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, H1: Contact Output 1, 0
Options display for filtering, such as recording timing for Virtual Inputs and Outputs, but not Communications Status.
4.4.6.4 COMTRADE waveforms

Waveform files are viewable in the EnerVista software. The preferences are unrelated to Engineer and are outlined in the
UR Family Communications Guide.
4.4.7 Toolbars
These are toggled in the View > Toolbar menu.
The UR symbols are displayed for the toolbox icons. They change when the default setting is changed to IEC or ISO
symbols. The symbols displayed in the toolbox also vary by firmware version, reflecting what is supported for each release.
4.4.7.1 FlexLogic Editor toolbar
New Device Create a new settings file
Open File Open an existing settings file in the URS, CID, or IID format
Save FlexLogic Save the Logic Designer diagram

PDF Report Create a PDF document from Logic Designer diagram(s). Settings can be
changed under File > Preferences > Workbook Setup.
Toggle Compile Window Display or hide the compile window area
Sort Order Select to change the sort order of the Virtual Output list to the right of the
icon. Virtual Outputs can be sorted numerically in ascending and
descending order based on numbers and names.
Select VO to View (x - x) Select a Virtual Output to locate and select it in the workbook. Each Virtual
Output listed also contains the name of the sheet where the Virtual Output
is located.
Edit Mode Switch to Logic Designer mode
Logic Designer
Monitor Mode Switch to Logic Monitor mode
Logic Monitor
Turn On ALL Communications Turn on all communications to all Logic Designer diagrams that are in the
monitoring mode. Default upon each launch of Engineer.
Turn Off All Communications Turn off all communications to all Logic Designer diagrams that are in the
monitoring mode. This is a legacy function for serial communication to turn
off communication to devices. Turning off communication applies to the
current session only. When you re-launch the EnerVista software,
communication is on by default.
4
4.4.7.2 Token Toolbox
Drawing Tools
Draw a line. Click and drag to draw.
Draw multiple joined lines. Click and drag for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw multi-sided object. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw four-sided object. Click and drag to draw.
Draw multiple curves. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw multiple, closed curves. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw oval or circle. Click and drag to draw.

Add text box with rectangle around it. Click to add. Double-click it to change text.
Add figure. Select file in the window that opens, then click on diagram canvas to add figure.
Add note icon and text. Click to add. Double-click to edit the title and text.
I/O Tokens
These are parts used in FlexLogic equations. They are the inputs and outputs of the Virtual Output equations. The display
can vary from that shown here.
Input symbol that can be configured to any FlexLogic operand value
Remote inputs from other devices
Input from another UR device. Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive and
cannot be used simultaneously.
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive and cannot be used simultaneously.
FlexAnalog symbol that can be used as the input to a FlexElement or use the FlexAnalog symbol to monitor an actual
value when in logic Monitoring mode
Contact Input Gate is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Contact Input
Contact Output Gate is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Contact Output.
The Operate and Seal-In settings can be configured graphically.
The Non-Volatile Latch is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Non-Volatile
Latch. The Set and Reset settings can be configured graphically.

The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input
operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.
Place and configure a Remote Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the availability of the
Remote Output.
Place and configure a Direct Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the availability of the
Direct Output to another UR device.
Place and configure a Teleprotection Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the availability
of the Teleprotection Output.
Place a User Programmable LED in the Logic Designer diagram. Not applicable when using a graphical front panel.
A Tag Out can be used in 1 of 2 ways. The first use of the Tag Out is to break up logic that needs to span several sheets.
The second use of the Tag Out is to associate a frequently used block of code with the Tag Out and then repeatedly use 4
the same block of code using a Tag In. When a Tag Out is referenced more than once, the Tag Out is replaced with a
Virtual Output during the compile phase.
Tag-In can is used to reference an existing Tag-Out. It joins another diagram to a previous diagram.
Boolean Tokens
These symbols are used to create FlexLogic Equations. Use them as intermediate logic for the Virtual Output equations.
The display can vary from that shown here.
Place an OR gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Only one action needs to occur. Any function input on the left side
satisfies the condition.
The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
Place an AND gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Multiple actions need to occur. All functions input on the left side are
required to satisfy the condition.
Place a NOR gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of one when all input operands have a value of zero
and otherwise gives a value of zero. It gives an output signal when there are no input signals. An inverter that reverses
the logic state.
Place a NAND gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of zero when all input operands have a value of one
and otherwise gives a value of one. It gives an output signal until all signals are present on its inputs. An inverter that
reverses the logic state.

Place a XOR gate in the Logic Designer diagram, which is two exclusive OR gates. Only one action needs to occur. If
there are two inputs or there is no input, there is no output.
Place a NOT gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of one when the input operand has a value of zero and
otherwise gives a value of zero. It gives an output signal when there is no input signal. An inverter that reverses the
logic state.
Place a latch in the Logic Designer diagram. A latch has two inputs and one output. One input is the Set input, and
other input is the Reset input.
Place a positive one shot symbol that responds to a positive going edge in the Logic Designer diagram. A "one shot" is a
single input gate that generates a pulse ins response to an edge on the input.
Place a negative one shot symbol that responds to a negative going edge in the Logic Designer diagram
Place a positive one shot and a negative one shot symbol in the Logic Designer diagram
4
Place a timer in the Logic Designer diagram
Elements
These blocks configure properties of the element or use element operands as input to FlexLogic equations.
Place and configure a FlexElement. A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog actual value
calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type.
Place and configure the Settings Group settings
Place and configure a Selector Switch element. Firmware version determines feature availability. The Selector Switch
element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic. The element provides for two control inputs.
Place and configure a Digital Element. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state.

Place and configure a Digital Counter element. A Digital Counter counts the number of state transitions
from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element.
4.4.7.3 Basic Actions toolbar
Select Select components. Click one component and hold down the CTRL key to select others.
Or click and drag an area that contains multiple components to select.
Edit Vertices Shows vertices points for the component selected (if the component support vertices
manipulation)
Properties Shows the properties of the selected component
Zoom Normal Zoom in and center the screen to the spot selected
Zoom to Fit Zoom in to a magnitude that fits your entire schema layout on your entire screen 4
Zoom Custom Zoom in on the components that you have selected
Pan Move the viewable area of your screen around the schema. To activate, select this tool
and then place the hand icon over and part of your schema. Click and drag the hand in
a direction to move around the schema.
Align Top, Middle, Bottom Align the selected components to the top, middle, or bottom of the reference
component
Align Left, Center, Right Align the selected components to the left, middle, or right of the reference component
Space Across Evenly space the selected components across a horizontal axis, starting from the far
left component and ending at the far right component
Space Down Evenly space the selected components across a vertical axis, starting from the top
component and ending at the bottom component
Same Width Set the width of the selected components to the same width as the reference
component
Same Height Set the height of the selected components to the same height as the reference
component
Same Size Set the width and height of the selected components to the same width and height of
the reference component
4.4.7.4 Advanced Actions toolbar
Only basic objects (lines, rectangles, ellipses) can be rotated and flipped.
Only objects from the Drawing Toolbar can be structured (grouped, ungrouped, forward, backward).
Nudge Up, Down, Left, Right Moves selected component one pixel upward, downward, left, right
Rotate Rotates selected component freely. Once selected, put your mouse cursor over the
component and move the component clockwise or counter-clockwise depending on
what you need.
Rotate Left, Right Rotates selected component 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise

Flip Vertical Flips the selected component on the vertical axis
Flip Horizontal Flips the selected component on the horizontal axis
Group, Ungroup Combines all selected components into one combined entity. Ungroups them into
separate components.
Front, Back Moves current components to the absolute front or back of all viewable layers
Forward, Backward Moves current components on layer higher or lower than its original layer hierarchy
For the above elements from FlexElement to Trip Bus plus the Progrmmable LEDs, they all can be configured either
within the Logic Designer or in each own setting screen, the user should use only the Logic Designer or the setting
screen for the configuration but not both methods to avoid the inconsistencies issues.

Chapter 5: Settings
Settings
This chapter outlines front panel and/or software settings. The relay is not taken out of service when saving settings; the
relay is taken out of service when a settings file is written to it.
Settings can be viewed remotely in a web browser by entering the IP address of the relay, accessing the Device
Information Menu option, then the Front-Panel Display Report option.
When indicated that a restart is required for a setting change to take effect, use the Maintenance > Reboot Relay
Command in the software.
Settings file conversion from previous firmware versions is supported. See the Maintenance chapter.

SETTINGS MENU CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.1 Settings menu
5.2 Overview
 SETTINGS  SECURITY See page 5-9
 PRODUCT SETUP  
 DISPLAY See page 5-27

   PROPERTIES
 CLEAR RELAY See page 5-43

  RECORDS
 COMMUNICATIONS See page 5-43

 
 MODBUS USER MAP See page 5-125

 
 REAL TIME See page 5-126

  CLOCK
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE See page 5-135

  FAULT REPORTS
 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 5-136

 
5   DATA LOGGER

See page 5-138

  LEDS

  SELF TESTS
 CONTROL See page 5-145

  PUSHBUTTONS

  PUSHBUTTONS
 FLEX STATE See page 5-153

  PARAMETERS
 USER-DEFINABLE See page 5-154

  DISPLAYS
 DIRECT I/O See page 5-156

 
 TELEPROTECTION See page 5-162

 
 INSTALLATION See page 5-163

  
 REMOTE RESOURCES  Access in EnerVista

   See page 5-164
 SETTINGS  AC INPUTS See page 5-165

 SYSTEM SETUP  
 POWER SYSTEM See page 5-167

  

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS OVERVIEW
 SIGNAL SOURCES See page 5-168

 
 TRANSFORMER See page 5-173

 
 BREAKERS See page 5-186

 
 SWITCHES See page 5-196

 
 FLEXCURVES See page 5-204

  
 PROCESS BUS  GENERAL See page 5-211

 MODULE  
 SV STREAM CONFIG Access in EnerVista

   See page 5-220
 SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC See page 5-255

 FLEXLOGIC   EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC See page 5-255

   TIMERS
 FLEXELEMENTS See page 5-256

 
 NON-VOLATILE See page 5-260

   LATCHES
 SETTINGS
 GROUPED ELEMENTS   SETTING GROUP 1

See page 5-262 5
 SETTING GROUP 2
  
 SETTING GROUP 3
 
 SETTING GROUP 4
 
 SETTING GROUP 5
 
 SETTING GROUP 6
  
 SETTINGS  TRIP BUS See page 5-298

 CONTROL ELEMENTS  
 SETTING GROUPS See page 5-300

  
 SELECTOR SWITCH See page 5-302

 
 UNDERFREQUENCY See page 5-309

 
 DIGITAL ELEMENTS See page 5-310

 
 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 5-313

 
 MONITORING See page 5-315

   ELEMENTS

OVERVIEW CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
 SETTINGS  CONTACT INPUTS See page 5-330

 INPUTS / OUTPUTS  
 VIRTUAL INPUTS See page 5-332

  
 CONTACT OUTPUTS See page 5-333

 
 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 5-337

 
 RESETTING See page 5-337

 
 DIRECT INPUTS See page 5-338

 
 DIRECT OUTPUTS See page 5-339

 

  
 SETTINGS  DCMA INPUTS See page 5-344

 TRANSDUCER I/O  
 RTD INPUTS See page 5-345

  
 DCMA OUTPUTS See page 5-346

  
5  SETTINGS
 TESTING   IED MODE CONFIG

See page 5-350
 FORCE CONTACT See page 5-353

   INPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT See page 5-354

   OUTPUTS
 SETTINGS  SUBSCRIBE TO See page 5-354

 SIMULATION   SIMULATED VALUES
 PUBLISH See page 5-356

  SIMULATED VALUES
5.2.1 Introduction to elements

For URs, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided
with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is
within the defined range that sets the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator can make
multiple tests and provide multiple outputs. For example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a pickup flag when the
current input is above the setting and sets an operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup
setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators use analog actual values as the input.
An exception to this rule is digital elements, which use logic states as inputs.
Elements are arranged into two classes, grouped and control. Each element classed as a grouped element is provided with
six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a grouped element is defined by
the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a control element is independent of the selected active
setting group.

The main characteristics of an element are shown on a logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic, and the
output operands generated. The previous chapter explains how to read a logic diagram, and the abbreviations used in a
diagram are defined in the Abbreviations chapter.
Some settings are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
Where the current source is from a single current transformer (CT), the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary
current of the CT. Use the secondary current base to convert per-unit settings to/from a secondary current value, and use
the primary current base to convert to/from a primary current value.
Where the current source is the sum of two or more CTs with different nominal primary current, the primary base quantity
is the largest nominal primary current. For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 1 A, then in order to sum these, CT2
is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity is 300 A primary, 5 A secondary for CT1, and 300/(100/1) = 3 A
secondary for CT2.
For voltage elements, the primary base quantity is the nominal phase-to-phase primary voltage of the protected system
provided that the VT ratio setting is set to the nominal ratio of the VTs and the secondary voltage setting is set to the
phase-to-phase voltage seen by the relay when the voltage of the protected system in nominal. The UR uses the
convention that nominal voltages in a three-phase system are phase-to-phase voltages.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage, the base quantity is 13800 V. With 14400:120 V delta-
connected VTs, the secondary base quantity and secondary voltage setting is:
13800
-------------- u 120 = 115 V Eq. 5-1
14400
For wye-connected VTs, the primary and secondary base quantities are as before, but the secondary voltage setting (here
a phase-to-ground value) is:
5
13800 120
-------------- u -------- = 66.4 V
14400 3 Eq. 5-2
Some settings are common to many elements, outlined as follows:

• FUNCTION setting — This setting allows the element to operate when selected as “Enabled.” The factory default is
“Disabled.” Once “Enabled,” any element associated with the function becomes active and all options become
available.
• NAME setting — This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
• SOURCE setting — This setting is used to select the AC source to be monitored. See the Introduction to AC Sources
section later.
• PICKUP setting — For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings can be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters that cause the element to pick up.
• PICKUP DELAY setting — This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
• RESET DELAY setting — This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
• BLOCK setting — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand, which when active blocks the element from running. When
the FlexLogic operand is selected as 'ON', the element is permanently blocked; when the FlexLogic operand is selected
as 'OFF', the block is disabled and the element is always running.
• TARGET setting — This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to "Disabled,"
no target message or illumination of a front panel LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to
“Self-Reset,” the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element and self-resets once the
operate element condition clears. When set to “Latched,” the target message and LED indication remains visible after
the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.

• EVENTS setting — This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout, or operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to “Disabled,” element pickup, dropout, or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
“Enabled,” events are created for
<Element> PKP (pickup)
<Element> DPO (dropout)
<Element> OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This can happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not zero.
Not every operand of a given element in a UR relay generates events, only the major output operands. Elements,
asserting output per phase, log operating phase output only, without asserting the common three-phase operand
event.
5.2.2 Introduction to AC sources
5.2.2.1 Background
A mechanism called a Source creates a group of CT and VT input channels to be used by one or more protection and
control elements. Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals
such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power system. A given
source can contain some, or all, of the following signals:
• Three-phase currents
• Single-phase ground current
• Three-phase voltages
5 • An auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
For example, a line protection system having distance protection, phase and ground overcurrent protection supervised by
a directional element, and breaker failure protection, can use a single source (SRC 1) shown in the table below. For some
functions, two sources are needed. For example, for the synchrocheck function, voltage across the breaker needs to be
measured, therefore both SRC1 with a phase voltage and source SRC 2 with an auxiliary voltage are needed.
Two AC sources are provided for each DSP module in UR relays. In relays with two DSP modules, four AC sources are
provided. In relays with three DSP modules, six AC sources are provided.
Parameter Source 1 Source 2
Name SRC 1 SRC 2
Phase CT F1 None
Ground CT F1 None
Phase VT F5 None
Aux VT None F5
Another important feature of the UR source is the ability to sum currents internally. In conventional analog or electronic
relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an external electrical connection of all CTs, through which any portion of
the current for the element being protected can flow. In this case, auxiliary interposing CTs are needed to perform ratio
matching, if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, all the current signals
are input to the UR device individually, where grouping, ratio correction, and summation are calculated internally with the
help of configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are still available to the protection device
along with a summed current. For example, in a breaker-and-a-half configuration, CT current summed from both breakers
is used for the line distance and overcurrent protection, while still being available as individual currents, for breaker failure
protection for both breakers.
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an AC source. This source can be given a specific name through
the settings and becomes available to protection and metering elements. Individual names can be given to each source to
help identify them for later use.

Once the sources have been configured, you have them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the
protection elements and as metered quantities.
5.2.2.2 CT/VT module configuration

Current transformer (CT) and voltage transformer (VT) input channels are contained in CT/VT modules, which are also
known as DSP modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive
ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical
components, and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules can
calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A DSP module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows. Channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a "bank," and all four are either current or voltage. The same principle applies to channels 5, 6, 7, and 8.
Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B, and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or
voltage. The following table shows an example configuration for the 8L type module in the F-slot.
Channel /Terminal Bank Quantity
Channel 1 (F1) 1 VA
Channel 2 (F2) 1 VB
Channel 3 (F3) 1 VC
Channel 4 (F4) 1 Vx
Channel 5 (F5) 2 IA
Channel 6 (F6) 2 IB
Channel 7 (F7) 2 IC
Channel 8 (F8) 2 IG
5
Note. The above table is an example configuration only. There are several different possible combinations of CT/VT sets.
The UR platform allows for a maximum of six sets of three-phase quantities, totaling 24 channels in all. The maximum
configuration would therefore occupy 3 slots, each slot containing two banks of four AC quantities (CTs or VTs).
The arrangement of the DSP modules and banks are shown as follows:
DSP module 1 (e.g. slot F) DSP module 2 (e.g. slot M) DSP module 3 (e.g. slot S)
Bank 1 Bank 3 Bank 5
Bank 2 Bank 4 Bank 6
5.2.2.3 T35 AC sources implementation

Some protection elements, like breaker failure, require an individual CT current as an input. Other elements, like distance
and overcurrent, require the sum of both currents as an input. The transformer differential function requires the CT
currents to be processed individually to cope with a possible CT saturation of one CT during an external fault. The current
into the protected transformer is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1, CT2 and CT 3, depending on the
current distribution on the upper bus and bottom bus. These three CTs are assigned to different sources 1 to 3, which are
configured under the SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > WINDING menu.
When a T-model relay is ordered for systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations, two or three DSP
modules, with an appropriate number of CT and VT channels in each DSP are needed. The following figure shows how a T-
model relay can be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations.

CT1 CB1 CB2 CT2
VT1
UR
Breaker Breaker
LV backup
failure 1 failure 2
Source 1 Source 2 Source 3
HV winding
Transformer differential

LV winding
Source 4
HV winding backup
protection
CT3
5
CB3
ϴϯϭϳϴϯϯ
For example, in the scheme shown in the above figure, four different sources are configured as inputs for separate
elements:
• Source 1 - CT1 current, for the breaker failure 1 element and first current source for the transformer differential
element HV winding 1
• Source 2 - CT2 current, for breaker failure 2 element and second current source for the transformer differential
element HV winding 2
• Source 3 - CT3 current, for LV backup protection elements and third current source for the transformer differential
element LV winding 3
• Source 4 - sum of CT1 and CT2 measuring full HV winding current for the backup protection of the HV winding. This
source also has VT1 configured for the functions requiring both current and voltage, such as power metering.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
5.3 Product setup

5.3.1 Security
Cyber security
The UR family of products are digital devices designed to be installed and operated in utility substations & industrial
plant environments and connected to secure private networks. UR Family IED should not be connected to the public
internet.
GE strongly recommends that users protect their digital devices using a defense-in-depth strategy which will protect
their products, their network, their systems and interfaces against cyber security threats. This includes, but is not
limited to, placing digital devices inside the control system network security perimeter, deploying and maintaining
access controls, monitoring and Intrusion Detection, security awareness training, security policies, network
segmentation and firewalls installation, strong and active password management, data encryption, antivirus and
other mitigating applicable technologies.
UR Family IEDs are available with an optional software option, which provides additional cyber security mechanisms
to help users protect against cyber security intrusion. GE strongly recommends use this "CyberSentry" option.
For additional details and recommendations on how to protect the UR Family IED, please see Hardening Setup section
below. GE Grid Solution may also provide additional instructions and recommendations to users from time to time
relating to UR Family IED and cyber security threats or vulnerabilities.
It is the users' sole responsibility to make sure that UR Family IEDs are installed and operated considering its cyber
security capabilities, security context, and the instructions and recommendations provided to the user relating to UR
Family IED. Users assume all risks and liability associated with damages or losses incurred in connection with any and
5
all cyber security incidences.
5.3.1.1 Security overview

The following security features are available:
• Password security — Basic security present by default
• EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The
feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
• CyberSentry security — Advanced security available using a software option. When purchased, the option is enabled
automatically, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
To maximize security, see the UR Family Secure Deployment Guide.
Lost password
If all passwords are lost, reset the unit to default values. Follow the instructions outlined later for COMMANDS  RELAY
MAINTENANCE  SERVICE COMMAND. Note that the relay is reset to default values, not just the passwords.
Then for CyberSentry, change the default password of ChangeMe1# as outlined in the Set Up CyberSentry and Change
Default Password section at the end of the Installation chapter.
Password requirements
A user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following requirements:
• Password is case-sensitive
• Password cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user account that exceed two consecutive
characters
• Password must be 8 to 20 characters in length
• Password must contain characters from all of the following categories:

PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
– English uppercase characters (A through Z)

– English lowercase characters (a through z)
– Base 10 digits (0 through 9)
– Non-alphabetic characters (for example, ~, !, @, #, $,%, &)
5.3.1.2 Password security

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
  Restricted Factory Service (for factory use only)
 CHANGE LOCAL See page 5-11

  PASSWORDS
 CHANGE REMOTE See page 5-12

  PASSWORDS
 ACCESS See page 5-12

  SUPERVISION
 DUAL PERMISSION See page 5-13

  SECURITY ACCESS
PASSWORD ACCESS Range: Disabled, Enabled

 EVENTS: Disabled
The T35 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the front panel. This includes both keypad entry and the
5 RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this functionality.
For a relay without a CyberSentry software option, any user can activate the RESET button or Reset/Acknowledge
an alarm in the Graphical Front Panel Annunciator without password entry.
ACCESS LEVEL — This setting is viewable on the front panel. The Setting and Command passwords can be changed in the
EnerVista interface.
The "Restricted" option means that settings and commands can be accessed, but there is no access to factory
configuration. Access automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS values. The
access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled.
The "Factory Service" level is for factory functions.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of a
password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify
setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
• Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
– Change any setting
– Test mode operation
• Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following
operations:
– Change the state of virtual inputs
– Clear the event records
– Clear the oscillography records
– Change the date and time
– Clear the data logger
– Clear the user-programmable pushbutton states

corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the T35, use the remote password. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the front panel, use the local password.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either
by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command
sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands:
• ACCESS LOC SETG OFF — Asserted when local setting access is disabled
• ACCESS LOC SETG ON — Asserted when local setting access is enabled
• ACCESS LOC CMND OFF — Asserted when local command access is disabled
• ACCESS LOC CMND ON — Asserted when local command access is enabled
• ACCESS REM SETG OFF — Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
• ACCESS REM SETG ON — Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
• ACCESS REM CMND OFF — Asserted when remote command access is disabled
• ACCESS REM CMND ON — Asserted when remote command access is enabled
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of the remote and local security operands
listed.
When a setting password or command password is set or updated, user access with a graphical front panel is
removed. Simply log in again on the graphical front panel.
When the setting password is set or updated, the graphical front panel Access Level displays as Command. This is
because the graphical front panel is a Modbus client and it does not have automatic access to the password
change. 5
PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS — This setting allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
Change local passwords

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes
 PASSWORDS  PASSWORD: No
CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes

 PASSWORD: No
As outlined in the previous section, there are two user security access levels, setting and command. Use of a password for
each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings.
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE
SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is
invoked:
1. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access is allowed. Access automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the
access level timeout setting values and when power is cycled.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and
settings.
If a remote connection is established, local passcodes are not visible.

Change remote passwords

Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access, which are explained in the previous
section.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE REMOTE PASSWORDS
 CHANGE REMOTE CHANGE SETTING Range: No, Yes
 PASSWORDS  PASSWORD: No
CHANGE COMMAND Range: No, Yes

 PASSWORD: No
To set the command or setting password in EnerVista:

1. In the EnerVista software or from the front panel, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security menu item to open
the remote password settings window.
2. Click the command or setting password Change button.
3. Enter the new password in the New Password field. Requirements are outlined in the Password Requirements section
earlier in this chapter. When an original password has already been used, enter it in the Enter Password field and click
the Send Password to Device button.
4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field.
5. Click the OK button. The password is checked to ensure that it meets requirements.
If you establish a local (serial) connection to the relay, you cannot view remote passcodes.
Access supervision
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION
 ACCESS  ACCESS LEVEL See below
 SUPERVISION   TIMEOUTS
INVALID ATTEMPTS Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1

 BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
PASSWORD LOCKOUT Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1

 DURATION: 5 min
FACTORY SERVICE MODE: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
LOCK FIRMWARE: Enabled Range: Enabled, Disabled


This menu displays when the ACCESS LEVEL setting is other than Restricted or Command.
The following access supervision settings are available.

INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT — This setting specifies the number of times that an incorrect password can be entered
within three minutes before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS
DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to “On.” These operands return to the “Off” state upon expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION — This setting specifies the time that the T35 locks out password access after the number
of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting.
The T35 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. If password verification fails while accessing a
password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  RESET UNAUTHORIZED
ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, password-protect the Command level. The operand does
not generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element
programmed with event logs or targets enabled.
FACTORY SERVICE MODE — A factory service user is supported to perform additional operations intended only for them. This
setting allows access by GE support staff to be turned on and off. A factory service user can log in only when this setting is
configured as Enabled. It is disabled by default. When Enabled, the relay logs events and activates the TROUBLE LED.
GE recommends that Factory Service Mode be disabled when factory operations are not intended to be performed. The
TROUBLE LED de-activates when a user disables Factory Service Mode.
Login is required for this user, and the password is unique for each relay.
A factory service user is logged out with any of the following circumstances:
• UR restarts
• FACTORY SERVICE MODE setting is disabled by Administrator or factory service user 5
• ACCESS LEVEL setting is changed from "Factory Service" via front panel or serial connection
LOCK FIRMWARE — This setting determines whether the device accepts or blocks a firmware upgrade. When Disabled,
firmware can be updated. When Enabled, the firmware cannot be updated. When Enabled/locked and a firmware upgrade
is attempted using the software, the UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT FlexLogic operand does not assert. When locked and a
firmware upgrade is attempted without using the software, the operand asserts. A user with an Access Level of "Settings"
can modify this setting.
The following table outlines access level timeout settings.

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION  ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
 ACCESS LEVEL COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
 TIMEOUTS  TIMEOUT: 5 min
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

 TIMEOUT: 30 min
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the Restricted access level.
Note that the access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT — This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to
return to Restricted access from the Command password level.
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT — This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return
to Restricted access from the Settings password level.
Dual-permission security access

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
 DUAL PERMISSION LOCAL SETTING AUTH: Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
 SECURITY ACCESS  On

REMOTE SETTING AUTH: Range: FlexLogic operand

 On
ACCESS AUTH Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

 TIMEOUT: 30 min
This menu displays when the ACCESS LEVEL setting is other than Restricted or Command.
This feature provides a mechanism to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local
or remote interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
• LOCAL SETTING AUTH — This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision. Valid
values for the FlexLogic operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On,“ then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the local
setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message displays on the front panel.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
• REMOTE SETTING AUTH — This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required. If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to
providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
5 • ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT — This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On.” The state of the FlexLogic operand
is monitored continuously for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer
programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the
timeout is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.

The Remote Settings Authorized setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision. If this
setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required.
If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this
setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the remote setting
password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. It applies when the Remote
Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off.” The state of the FlexLogic operand is
continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted, and the timer
programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access
is denied immediately. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout is
restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
5.3.1.3 EnerVista security
From EnerVista UR Setup version 8.50, Change Password and User Security menus are removed under the Admin
menu, so the users can not setup different access rights like Delete Entry, Settings, Commands etc in the new
software, the Login User menu is changed to Factory Use Only: Login only for the factory service to use.
Figure 5-1: Admin menu of EnerVista UR Setup
5.3.1.4 CyberSentry security
This feature requires a CyberSentry software option, specified at the time of ordering.
The EnerVista software provides the means to configure and authenticate the T35 access using either a server or the
device. Access to functions depends on user role.
The login screen of EnerVista has two options for access to the T35, these being Server and Device authentication.

Figure 5-2: Login screen for CyberSentry
When the “Server” Authentication Type is selected, the T35 uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
When the “Device” button is selected, the T35 uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to
authenticate the user. In this case, it uses built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Operator, Observer, or
Administrator and Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled), as login accounts and the associated passwords
are stored on the T35 device. In this case, access is not user-attributable. In cases where user-attributable access is
required, especially for auditable processes for compliance reasons, use server authentication (RADIUS) only.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or the UR device, nor are they ever
transmitted without cryptographic protection.
Only (TCP/UDP) ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features are
5 open. All the other ports are closed. For example, Modbus is on by default, so its TCP port 502, is open. But if
Modbus is disabled, port 502 is closed. This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found open.
When CyberSentry is enabled, Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted for all roles but for the Observer. The
built-in Observer role has read-only access to data over Modbus over Ethernet without authentication. Encrypted Modbus
communication over Ethernet is not always tolerated by SCADA systems. The UR has a bypass access feature for such
situations, which allows unencrypted Modbus over Ethernet. The Bypass Access setting is available on the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY screen. Note that other protocols (DNP, 101, 103, 104, EGD) are not encrypted,
and they are good communications options for SCADA systems when CyberSentry is enabled.
When using the rear RS485 port and CyberSentry, registers can be read with a maximum buffer of 64 bytes. Settings may
not be written, so use another port or configure the SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT setting to a high value, such as eight
minutes, to give the relay enough time to finish the task.
CyberSentry settings through EnerVista

CyberSentry security settings are configured under Settings > Product Setup > Security.

Figure 5-3: Security panel when CyberSentry installed
For the Device > Settings > Product Setup > Supervisory option, the panel looks like the following.
5
Figure 5-4: Supervisory panel
For the Security panel, the following settings are available.

Table 5-1: RADIUS server settings

Setting name Description Minimum Maximum Default Units Minimum
permission
Primary RADIUS IP IP address of the main RADIUS server. 0.0.0.0 223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 - Administrator
Address Default value indicates no Primary
RADIUS server is configured, and hence
RADIUS is disabled.
Restart the relay for any change to take
effect.
Primary RADIUS authentication port 1 65535 1812 - Administrator
Authentication Port
Primary Accounting RADIUS accounting port 1 65535 1813 - Administrator
Port
Vendor ID An identifier that specifies RADIUS Value that Administrator
vendor-specific attributes used with the represents
protocol General
Electric
RADIUS Authentication method used by RADIUS EAP-TTLS PAP EAP-TTLS - Administrator
Authentication server
Method
RADIUS Shared secret used in authentication. It See the See the following N/A - Administrator
Authentication displays as asterisks. This setting must Password password section
(Shared) Secret meet the CyberSentry password Requirements for requirements
requirements. section earlier
in this chapter
Confirm RADIUS Confirmation of the shared secret. The See the 245 characters N/A - Administrator
Authentication entry displays as asterisks. Password
(Shared) Secret Requirements
5 section
Table 5-2: General security settings

permission
Session Lockout Number of failed authentications before the 0 (lockout 99 3 - Administrator
device blocks subsequent authentication disabled)
attempts for the lockout period
Session Lockout The period in minutes that a user is prevented 0 (no period) 9999 3 min Administrator
Period from logging in after being locked out
Device When enabled, local Device authentication Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
Authentication with roles is allowed. When disabled, the UR
only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
NOTE: Administrator and Supervisor (if still
enabled) remain active even after Device
authentication is disabled. The only permission
for local Administrator is to re-enable Device
authentication when Device authentication is
disabled. To re-enable Device authentication,
the Supervisor unlocks the device for setting
changes, and then the Administrator can re-
enable Device authentication.
Factory Service When enabled, the device can go into factory Disabled Enabled Disabled - Supervisor
Mode service mode. To enable, Supervisor (Administrator
authentication is necessary. when Supervisor
is disabled)
Lock Settings When disabled, the device allows modification Disabled Enabled Disabled - Supervisor
of settings. To enable, Supervisor (Administrator
is disabled)


permission
Lock Firmware When enabled, the device denies firmware Disabled Enabled Disabled - Supervisor
upload. To change setting, Supervisor (Administrator
is disabled)
Restore to Defaults Sets the device to factory defaults No Yes No - Administrator
Supervisor Role When enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator to
enable, Administrator authentication is enable and
necessary. When disabled, the Supervisor role Supervisor to
is inactive. To disable, Supervisor disable
authentication is necessary.
RADIUS user names Ensures that RADIUS user names are not the See RADIUS See - Administrator
same as local/device role names server RADIUS
documents server
document
s
Password Local/device roles except for Observer are See the See the Change Text The specified
password-protected. All RADIUS users are Password following Me1# role and
password-protected. Requirements password Administrator,
section earlier section for except for
in this chapter requireme Supervisor,
nts where it is only
itself
Table 5-3: Security alarm settings

Setting name Description / Details Min Max Default Units Minimum
permissions 5
Failed A threshold number indicating when an alarm Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
Authentications is set off to indicate too many failed
authentication attempts
Firmware Lock A value indicating if the device can receive a Disabled Enabled Enabled - Administrator
firmware upgrade. If Enabled and a firmware
upgrade attempt is made, the device alarm
activates. If Disabled, the device alarm does
not activate. On each firmware upgrade this
setting goes back to the default.
Settings Lock A value indicating if the device can accept any Disabled Enabled Enabled - Supervisor
settings changes. If Enabled and a settings (Administrator if
change attempt is made, the device alarm Supervisor has
activates. If Disabled, the device alarm does been disabled)
not activate.
CyberSentry settings through the front panel

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY LOGIN: Range: Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor,
  None Operator, Factory (for factory use only), None
 CHANGE DEVICE See page 5-21

  PASSWORD
LOGOUT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 No
DEVICE Range: Yes, No

 AUTHENTICATION: Yes
FACTORY SERVICE Range: Enabled, Disabled

 MODE: Disabled

 SESSION See page 5-21

  SETTINGS
 RESTORE DEFAULTS See page 5-21

 
 SYSLOG See page 5-21

  SETTINGS
 SUPERVISORY See page 5-22

 
LOGIN — This setting is applicable for Device authentication only. This setting allows a user to log in with a specific role, as
outlined here. For the Supervisor role, enable the “Supervisor Role” setting. Log out by right-clicking the device in EnerVista
and selecting the Disconnect option.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password. Passwords must obey the requirements
specified earlier in the chapter in the Password Requirements section.The UR device supports five roles. Roles have their
corresponding passwords, except the Observer role, which does not require a password. There are no time-outs for the
Administrator, Engineer, Operator, and Supervisor when logged in using the front panel; log out manually or use the
Command > Security commands in the software.
The roles are defined as follows:
• Administrator — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands. This role does not allow concurrent
access. This role has an operand to indicate when it is logged on.
• Engineer — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands except configuring Security settings and
firmware upgrades. This role does not allow concurrent access.
• Operator — The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the Commands menu/section. This role does not
5 •
exist offline.
Supervisor — This is only an approving role. This role’s authentication commits setting changes submitted by
Administrator or Engineer. The Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not
approve changes after the fact. Only a Supervisor can set the Settings Lock and Firmware Lock in the Security
settings. This role also has the ability to forcefully log off any other role and clear the security event log. This role can
also be disabled, but only through a Supervisor authentication. When this role is disabled its permissions are assigned
to the Administrator role.
• Observer — This role has read-only access to all T35 settings. This role allows concurrent Observer access but it has no
download access to any files on the device. Observer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the
device. This role displays as "None" on the front panel. When local authentication is used, no password is required for
this role. When RADIUS server authentication is used, a password is required.
CLIENT AUTHENTICATION — SSH Client authentication is available from firmware version 8.50. If CLIENT AUTHENTICATIO is
enabled, then the passcode will be required for the client to connect to the device over SSH.
If Client authentication is disabled, then any client can connect to device without passcode. In that case, 3rd party clients
can connect to the device as before.
CLIENT PASSCODE— The client passcode is a string can be configured in UR device under “Administrator” role. It can be
configured from front panel as well as EnerVista UR Setup. The client passcode will follow password complexity rules.
• The default passcode is SSHpassphrase1#.
• The passcode is not stored in clear text but will be securely stored with salted hash mechanism.
• Administrator can modify the SSH passcode from the UR software or the front panel, the existing SSH passcode will be
required to enter first.
• When the device is set the the factory default as outlined later in SERVICE COMMAND, the relay settings, user
password as well as SSH passcode will all be set to default.
• This SSH passcode should be retained in case of power cycle as well as firmware upgrade.
• The SSH passcode will be same for all clients.

The Factory service role is not available. It is for factory use only. The FACTORY SERVICE MODE setting must be
enabled for access.
The Local Access Denied message on the front panel can mean that you need to log in to the UR in order to
complete the action.
Change device password

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE DEVICE PASSWORD
 CHANGE DEVICE NEW PASSWORD: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters
 PASSWORD 
CONFIRM PASSWORD: Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

The menu displays on the front panel upon successful login of the Administrator role.
Passwords are stored in salted hash format.
In Device authentication mode, the Observer role does not have a password associated with it. In Server
authentication mode the Observer role requires a password.
If you are locked out of the software, reset the device to factory defaults as outlined later for COMMANDS  RELAY
MAINTENANCE  SERVICE COMMAND. When using CyberSentry, the default password is “ChangeMe1#”.
Once the passwords are set, the Administrator with Supervisor approval can change the role-associated password. 5
Session settings
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SESSION SETTINGS
 SESSION SESSION LOCKOUT: Range: 0 to 99
 SETTINGS  3
SESSION LOCKOUT Range: 0 to 9999 minutes

 PERIOD: 3 min
SESSION LOCKOUT — This setting specifies the number of failed authentications before the device blocks subsequent
authentication attempts for the lockout period. A value of zero means lockout is disabled.
SESSION LOCKOUT PERIOD — This setting specifies the period of time in minutes of a lockout period. A value of 0 means that
there is no lockout period.
Restore defaults
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  RESTORE DEFAULTS
 RESTORE DEFAULTS LOAD FACTORY Range: Yes, No
  DEFAULTS: No
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS — This setting is used to reset all the settings, communication, and security passwords. An
Administrator role is used to change this setting and a Supervisor role (if not disabled) approves it.
Syslog settings
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SYSLOG SETTINGS
 SYSLOG SYSLOG FUNCTION: Range: Enable, Disable
 SETTINGS  Disable

SYSLOG IP ADDRESS: Range: 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255

 0.0.0.0
SYSLOG PORT NUMBER: Range: 1 to 65535

 514
SYSLOG FUNCTION — This setting allows the Syslog functionality to be enabled or disabled in the T35.
SYSLOG IP ADDRESS — The IP address of the target Syslog server to which all security events are transmitted.
SYSLOG PORT NUMBER — The UDP port number of the target Syslog server to which all security events are transmitted.
Figure 5-5: Example of the Syslog data
Supervisory
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY
5  SUPERVISORY DEVICE Range: Yes, No
  AUTHENTICATION: Yes
BYPASS ACCESS: Range: Local, Remote, Local and Remote, Disabled,

 Disabled Pushbuttons
RESET KEY ACCESS: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
FACTORY SERVICE Range: Enabled, Disabled

 MODE: Disabled
 SELF TESTS See below

 
SUPERVISOR ROLE: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
SERIAL INACTIVITY Range: 1 to 9999 minutes

 TIMEOUT: 1 min
LOCK SETTINGS: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
LOCK FIRMWARE: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Enabled
The Supervisory menu settings are available for Supervisor role only, or if the Supervisor role is disabled then for the
Administrator role only.
DEVICE AUTHENTICATION — This setting is enabled by default, meaning "Yes" is selected. When enabled, Device
authentication with roles is enabled. When this setting is disabled, the UR only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
However, the Administrator and Supervisor (when enabled) remain active even after device authentication is disabled and
their only permission is to re-enable Device authentication. To re-enable Device authentication, the Supervisor unlocks the
device for settings changes, then the Administrator re-enables device authentication.

BYPASS ACCESS — The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for those
special situations when this is considered safe. Only the Supervisor, or the Administrator when the Supervisor role is
disabled, can enable this feature.
Mode Front panel or serial (RS232, RS485) Ethernet
Normal mode Authentication — Role Based Access Control (RBAC) Authentication — RBAC and passwords encrypted
and passwords in clear SSH tunneling
Bypass access mode No passwords for allowed RBAC levels No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No SSH tunneling
The bypass options are as follows:

• Local — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, and RS232
• Remote — Bypasses authentication for RS485 and Ethernet
• Local and Remote — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, RS485, and Ethernet
• Pushbuttons — Bypasses authentication for front panel push buttons, including in the software. On the graphical front
panel, the authentication for side pushbuttons to control breakers and disconnects also is bypassed.
With BYPASS ACCESS set to other than "Disabled," the software displays a message that LOCK SETTINGS is ignored.
RESET KEY ACCESS — Indicates whether user authentication is required for executing the RESET button on the front panel or
the front panel in the software. When Disabled, user authentication is required at the Administrator or Engineer level.
When Enabled, any user can execute the RESET command without authentication. A Supervisor, or the Administrator if the
Supervisor role is disabled, can enable this feature.
FACTORY SERVICE MODE — This setting allows access by GE support staff to be turned on and off. When Enabled, the device
can go into factory service mode. A Supervisor role is necessary to enable the setting, and otherwise an Administrator role
when the Supervisor role is disabled. The default value is Disabled.
An event is generated when disabling and enabling, and the TROUBLE LED activates when enabled. The factory service 5
user enters a password that is unique for each device.
When a factory service user is logged in on the front panel, a remote user cannot access the device at the same time.
A factory service user is logged out with any of the following circumstances:
• UR restarts
• Factory Service Mode setting is disabled by Administrator or factory service user
• When a non-factory service user logs in via front panel or serial connection
SUPERVISOR ROLE — When Enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disable this setting a Supervisor authentication is
necessary. If disabled, the Supervisor role is not allowed to log in. In this case, the Administrator can change the settings
under the Supervisory menu.
If enabled, Supervisor authentication is required to change the settings in the Supervisory menu. If the Supervisor disables
their role after authentication, the Supervisor session remains valid until they switch to another role using MMI or until they
end the current Supervisor session if using communications.
This role is disabled by default.
SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT — The role logged via a serial port is auto logged off after the Serial Inactivity timer times out. A
separate timer is maintained for RS232 and RS485 connections. Set this value to a high number, such as eight minutes,
when using the rear RS485 terminals for settings write.
GE recommends setting this value to at least 3 minutes for the following scenario: while connected to a CyberSentry
device, with serial or USB cable connected to the front panel, and performing "Add Device to Offline Window" or an online/
offline comparison. With less than the recommended 3 minutes, the serial activity timeout interrupts the connection and
the security role login window appears. Upon login, the process resumes.
LOCK SETTINGS — Specifies whether the device accepts settings changes, with a default of Disabled to allow changes. The
Supervisor role Disables this setting for the relay to start accepting setting changes or command changes. After all the
setting changes are applied or commands executed, the Supervisor then Enables the setting to lock setting changes.
When set to "Enabled," all other settings in the Supervisory window cannot be edited. Any setting changes on other
Modbus screens and IEC 61850 screens cannot be saved to the relay.

When the BYPASS ACCESS setting is set to a local or remote option, it overrides LOCK SETTINGS and allows changes.
LOCK FIRMWARE — Specifies whether the device accepts a firmware upgrade, with a default of Enabled to deny upgrade.
The Supervisor role Disables this setting to allow upgrades. After the upgrade, the Supervisor then Enables the setting to
prevent upgrades.
When the BYPASS ACCESS setting is set to a local or remote option, it overrides LOCK FIRMWARE and allows changes.
Self-tests
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY  SELF TESTS
 SELF TESTS  FAILED See below
   AUTHENTICATE
FIRMWARE LOCK: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Enabled
SETTINGS LOCK: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Enabled
FAILED AUTHENTICATE — If this setting is Enabled then the number of failed authentications is compared with the Session
Lockout threshold. When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded, this minor alarm indication comes up.
FIRMWARE LOCK — If this setting is Enabled, then any firmware upgrade operation attempt when the LOCK FIRMWARE
setting is enabled brings up this self test alarm.
SETTINGS LOCK — If this setting is Enabled then an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates this self
test.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY  SELF TESTS  FAILED AUTHENTICATE
5  FAILED
 AUTHENTICATE  FAILED AUTHENTICATE:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
CyberSentry setup
When first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for setup.
1. Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel to enter the default password
"ChangeMe1#". Note that the LOCK SETTINGS setting needs to be disabled (default) in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
SECURITY  SUPERVISORY menu.
2. Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3. Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4. Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
5. Next, Device or Server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista.
Use Device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator,
Observer). When using a serial connection, only Device authentication is supported. When Server authentication is
required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured. This is possible only in the
EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be configured. The appendix called RADIUS Server at the end of
this instruction manual gives an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and
the parameters for connecting the UR to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on
the login screen of EnerVista.

The use of CyberSentry for devices communicating through an Ethernet-to-RS485 gateway is not
supported. Because these gateways do not support the secure protocols necessary to communicate
with such devices, the connection cannot be established. Use the device as a non-CyberSentry
device.
Users logged in through the front panel are not timed out and cannot be forcefully logged out by a
supervisor. Roles logged in through the front panel that do no allow multiple instances
(Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator) must switch to None (equivalent to a logout) when
they are done in order to log out.
For all user roles except Observer, only one instance can be logged in at a time, for both login by front
panel and software.
To configure Server authentication:
1. In the EnerVista software, choose Device authentication and log in as Administrator.
2. Configure the following RADIUS server parameters: IP address, authentication port, shared secret, and vendor ID.
3. On the RADIUS server, configure the user accounts. Do not use the five pre-defined roles as user names (Administrator,
Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) in the RADIUS server. If you do, the UR relay automatically provides the
authentication from the device.
4. In the EnerVista software, choose Server authentication and log in using the user name and password configured on
the RADIUS server for Server authentication login.
5. After making any required changes, log out.
When changing settings offline, ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the
settings download are changed because only those changes are applied.
Pushbuttons (both user-control buttons and user-programmable buttons) located on the front panel can be pressed by an
5
Administrator or Engineer role. This also applies to the RESET button, which resets targets, where targets are errors
displayed on the front panel or the Targets panel of the EnerVista software. The RESET button has special behavior in that it
allows these two roles to press it even when they are logged in through the RS232 port and not through the front panel.
To reset the security event log and self-test operands:
1. Log in as Supervisor (if the role is enabled) or Administrator (if the Supervisor role is disabled) and execute a clear
security command under Commands > Security > Clear Security.
Security events
The security events produced when the CyberSentry option is purchased are sent as sytem log (syslog) messages to a
syslog server, if one is configured. The format is as follows.
Security log Event Date & Username IP address Role Category LogType Activity Event
Number Timestamp Value Result
Event Number — Event identification number (index)

Date & Timestamp — UTC date and time
Username — 255 chars maximum, but in the security log it is truncated to 20 characters
IP address — Device IP address
Role — 16 bit unsigned, of type format F617
Enumeration Role
0 None
1 Administrator
2 Supervisor
3 Engineer
4 Operator

Enumeration Role
5 Factory
Category — Based on IEC62443-402 CR2.8

a) Access Control
b) Request Error
c) Control System event
d) Backup and Restore event
e) Configuration Changes
f) Audit Log event
LogType — Fixed string: “IEC62351-14”
Activity Value — 16 bit unsigned
Activity Value/ Event Result Category

Event ID
1 Authentication Failed a) Access Control
2 User Lockout a) Access Control
3 FW Upgrade e) Configuration Changes
4 FW Lock a) Access Control
5 Settings Lock a) Access Control
6 Settings Change. Because this can fill the entire event e) Configuration Changes
log, it is supported by the already existing
Settings_Change.log file. This event is not required.
5
7 Clear Oscillography command c) Control System event
8 Clear Data Logger command (not applicable to all UR c) Control System event
products)
9 Clear Demand Records command (not applicable to all c) Control System event
UR products)
10 Clear Energy command (not applicable to all UR c) Control System event
products)
11 Clear Unauthorized Access command a) Access Control
12 Clear Teleprotection Counters command (not applicable c) Control System event
to all UR products)
13 Clear All Relay Records command c) Control System event
14 Role Log in a) Access Control
15 Role Log out a) Access Control
16 WRITE_SETTING_FILE e) Configuration Changes
17 Factory Mode enabled f) Audit Log event
18 Factory Mode disabled f) Audit Log event
19 FW file validation successful f) Audit Log event
20 FW file validation failed b) Request Error
21 Supervisor password changed e) Configuration Changes
22 Administrator password changed e) Configuration Changes
23 Engineer password changed e) Configuration Changes
24 Operator password changed e) Configuration Changes
25 Bypass mode activated a) Access Control
26 Bypass mode deactivated a) Access Control
27 SSH client passcode change e) Configuration Changes
28 Successful client authentication a) Access Control
29 Failed client authentication a) Access Control
30 CERT_V_FORMAT f) Audit Log events

Activity Value/ Event Result Category

Event ID
31 CERT_PK_SIG_ALG f) Audit Log events
32 CERT_V_PK_EXPIRED f) Audit Log events
33 CERT_V_PK_EARLY f) Audit Log events
In addition to supporting syslog, a T35 with CyberSentry also saves the security events in two local security files, these
being SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV and SETTING_CHANGES.LOG. Details on these files and how to retrieve them are available in
the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Retrieve File. Depending on the level of criticality/severity, a syslog server or
a reporting tool gathering information from a syslog server can produce reports, charts, and so on. All severity levels are
per RFC 5424.
Table 5-4: CyberSentry system events recorded
Event Severity Description
FAILED_AUTH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Notice (5) A failed authentication with origin information (username and IP:MAC
address), a time stamp in UTC time when it occurred
AUTH_LOCKOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Warning (4) An authentication lockout has occurred because of too many failed
authentication attempts
FIRMWARE_UPGD, ORIGIN, Information (6) Indicates that a change of firmware has occurred
TIMESTAMP
FIRMWARE_LOCK, ORIGIN, Warning (4) An attempt was made to change firmware while the firmware lock was
TIMESTAMP enabled
SETTING_CHG, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Notice (5) Indicates setting change(s)
SETTING_LOCK, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Warning (4) An attempt was made to change settings while the settings lock was enabled
LOGIN, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Information (6) Indicates when a certain role logged in
LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Information (6) Indicates when a certain role logged out or timed out 5
CLEAR_OSCILLOGRAPHY Notice (5) Clear oscillography command was issued
CLEAR_DATA_LOGGER Notice (5) Clear data logger command was issued
CLEAR_DEMAND_RECS Notice (5) Clear demand records command was issued
CLEAR_ENERGY Notice (5) Clear energy command was issued
RESET_UNAUTH_ACCESS Notice (5) Reset Unauthorized access command was issued
CLEAR_TELEPROTECTION_CNT Notice (5) Clear teleprotection counters command was issued
CLEAR_ALL_RECS Notice (5) Clear all records command was issued
WRITE_SETTING_FILE Notice (5) Write settings file to the relay
BYPASS_ACTIVATE Warning (4) Bypass was activated (serial, keypad or both)
BYPASS_DEACTIVATE Warning (4) Bypass was deactivated
FACTORY_MODE_ENABLED Warning (4) Factory Service Mode activated
FACTORY_MODE_DISABLED Warning (4) Factory Service Mode deactivated
FW_FILE_VALIDATION_SUCCESSFUL Information (6) Firmware file signature validation successful
FW_FILE_VAILDATION_FAILED Warning (4) Firmware file signature validation failed
SUPERVISOR_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Supervisor user account’s password changed
ADMIN_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Administrator user account’s password changed
ENGINEER_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Engineer user account’s password changed
OPERATOR_PSWD_CHANGED Notice (5) Operator user account’s password changed
5.3.2 Display properties

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DISPLAY LANGUAGE: Range: English; English, French; English, Russian; English,
 PROPERTIES  English Chinese; English, German (examples; depends on order code)
Visible when language other than English purchased

FLASH MESSAGE Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

 TIME: 1.0 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

 TIMEOUT: 300 s
DEFAULT MESSAGE Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%

 INTENSITY: 25 % Visible when a VFD is installed
SCREEN SAVER Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FEATURE: Disabled Visible when an LCD is installed
SCREEN SAVER WAIT Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1

 TIME: 30 min Visible when an LCD is installed
CURRENT CUT-OFF Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001

 LEVEL: 0.020 pu
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF Range: 0.1 to 2.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1

 LEVEL: 1.0 V
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
LANGUAGE — This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. This setting displays
when a language other than English was purchased, and the range depends on the order code of the relay.
For Japanese, the settings display in Japanese on the graphical front panel, while the keys printed on the panel are in
English.
For Japanese and Chinese, up to 10 characters can be input in a field on the graphical front panel, not 20.
With the graphical front panel, the language can be changed regardless of the language purchased. That is, all languages
5 can be used. If you select a language with which you are unfamiliar and want to switch back to English for example, the
menu order remains the same. That is, Settings is always second, Product Setup is always first, Display Properties is always
second, and Language is always first.
If the language is changed after entering user-configured names, such as relay names, the strings are not translated. For
example, a relay name is entered in English, the language is changed to Japanese, and the relay name remains in English.
Set the language before changing settings.
Restart the relay after changing the LANGUAGE setting.
The language can be selected also for the front panel in EnerVista under Maintenance > Change Front Panel.
The language of the EnerVista software can be changed under View > Language. Languages supported by the operating
system display; that is for Polish or Japanese to display, the software needs to be installed on a Polish or Japanese
operating system.
FLASH MESSAGE TIME — Flash messages are status, warning, error, and information messages displayed in response to
certain key presses during settings programming. These messages override any normal messages. Use this setting to
change the duration of flash messages on the display.
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT — If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified using this setting to ensure that messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values. This setting is not supported on the graphical front panel.
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY — To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated
during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness. This setting is
not supported on the graphical front panel.
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME — These settings are only visible if the T35 has a liquid crystal display
(LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled,” the LCD backlighting turns off after the
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, provided that no keys have been pressed and no
target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting turns on. These
settings are not supported on the graphical front panel.

CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL — This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value)
are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current to
display even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The T35 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes
and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to
phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies
to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the
cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current
samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL — This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements
(at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero,
while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The T35
applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level,
it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off
operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications
protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated using the following equations. For Delta connections:
3 u CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL u VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL u VT primary u CT primary

3-phase power cut-off = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Eq. 5-3
VT secondary
For Wye connections:
3 u CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL u VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL u VT primary u CT primary

3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VT secondary Eq. 5-4
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL u VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL u VT primary u CT primary

5
per-phase power cut-off = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VT secondary Eq. 5-5
where VT primary = VT secondary × VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary × CT ratio.

For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: “0.02 pu”
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: “1.0 V”
PHASE CT PRIMARY: “100 A”
PHASE VT SECONDARY: “66.4 V”
PHASE VT RATIO: “208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION: “Delta”
We have:
CT primary = “100 A”, and
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off= (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × CT primary × VT primary)/VT secondary
=( × 0.02 pu × 1.0 V × 100 A × 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off does not display.
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid
measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02 pu” for CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.

The graphical front panel is a hardware option.
Use the EnerVista software to configure the graphical front panel. The settings are not accessible from the graphical front
panel.
The following screens are available:
• Home page
• Rolling mode
• Metering editor
• Single-line diagram editor
• Annunciator editor
• Configurable navigation
The settings menu itself and the event record pages are not configurable.
Multiple screens can be opened in the EnerVista software, but the first remains active and the others can be read-only. For
example, the Annunciator Editor and Single Line Diagram Editor can be open and active, then subsequently opened Rolling
Mode and Home Page screens are read-only. Close the windows, then re-open the one required.
5.3.3.1 Home page
5 This window sets the home page displayed on the graphical front panel and the date and time formats for all pages. Home
page options include display of product information, alarms, actual values, and event records. In addition, the window
allows selection of a FlexLogic operand that enables/disables local control of breakers and switches from the graphical
front panel.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page. The menu does not display when there is no
graphical front panel.
Figure 5-6: Home page with product information
Setting Group
Alarm Target Relay Date and Time
859850A1.cdr

Figure 5-7: Home page settings
Home Page Content

Range: Product Information, SLD 1…5, Annunciator, Annunciator 1…8, Phasors 1…6, Tabular 1…5, Event Records, Targets
Default: Product Information
This setting specifies the page to display between the home page header and footer. Pressing the Home button returns
the display to this page. The home page displays for the rolling mode delay specified, then changes to the rolling mode
pages.
The "Annunciator" option without a page number specifies the first annunciator page in the following sequence:
– The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in alarm (fast flash)
– The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in ringback. Ringback is a "return alert."
Visual and audible signals are given when conditions return to normal, then the sequence returns to normal by
pushing the RESET button.
– The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in abnormal state
– Annunciator page 1
Whenever an annunciator window changes state this list is re-evaluated, which can result in the home page displaying a
5
different annunciator page.
The Tabular option displays a configured actual values/metering page.
The Targets option displays error messages, such as wrong transceiver, similar to event record entries.
Date Format
Range: yyyy-mm-dd, dd-mmm-yy, yyyy/mm/dd, m/d/yyyy, m/d/yy, mm/dd/yy, mm/dd/yyyy, yy/mm/dd
Default: yyyy-mm-dd
This setting specifies the format for dates on the graphical front panel. It applies to the page header, the events records,
the annunciator, and everywhere else a date displays on the panel. If the relay is synchronized to an external time source
via PTP, IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow.
yyyy — four-digit year, for example 2017
yy — two-digit year, for example 17 for 2017
mmm — abbreviation of month name, for example Jan for January
mm — two-digit month, for example 01 for January
m — one or two-digit month, for example 1 for January and 10 for October
dd — two-digit day, for example 08
d — one or two-digit day, for example 8 and 28
To set the date and time, access Synchronize Devices in the software, synchronize to a time source using Settings >
Product Setup > Real Time Clock, or synchronize to the computer using Commands > Set Date and Time.

Time Format
Range: hh:mm:ss, h:mm:ss tt
Default: hh:mm:ss
This setting specifies the format for time on the graphical front panel. It applies to the page header and everywhere else
a time displays on the panel. When the Date Format and the Time Format use the defaults, the date and time are
separated by the character "T" per the ISO convention, such as "2017-09-24T10:58:31". Otherwise the date and time are
separated by a space. If the relay is synchronized to an external time source via PTP, IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/
time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow.
hh — two-digit hour, for example 02 for two o’clock
h — one or two-digit hour, for example 2 for two o’clock
mm — two-digit minute, for example 51 minutes
ss — two-digit second (can have a decimal and further digits appended), for example 16 seconds
tt — AM or PM based on 12 hour clock
If microseconds have to be displayed, for example, in the event records, the 24-hour clock is adopted. The
representation of an accumulated period (for example hh:mm) is not affected by the selected time format.
To set the date and time, access Synchronize Devices in the software or synchronize to a time source using Settings >
Product Setup > Real Time Clock.
Enable Controls From GFP
Range: FlexLogic operand
Default: ON
This setting enables/disables local control of breakers and switches from the graphical front panel.
The FlexLogic operand assigned to this setting applies to controls of all the single-line diagram pages. The assigned
5 operand status is reflected in the ENABLE CTRL FROM GFP FlexLogic operand.
When the operand assigned to this setting is ON, controls are enabled, as indicated on a single-line diagram with an
Enable Control label. Pressing the side pushbutton next to the label populates the front panel display with control soft
keys.
When the operand assigned to this setting is OFF, controls are disabled, and the Enable Control label does not display.
If already in control mode and the operand status assigned to this setting changes to OFF, at the confirmation prompt
the control command is not issued and the SLD screen goes to the top SLD page instead.
5.3.3.2 Rolling mode

After a user-defined period of inactivity, the graphical front panel changes, or rolls, to user-selected pages. Up to 10 pages
can be specified. Similarly, the display backlight intensity is lowered to a specified level; lower intensity extends the life of
the display.
Each rolling page displays for a few seconds; duration cannot be set.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Rolling Mode.

Figure 5-8: Rolling mode settings
Rolling Mode Delay

Range: 0 to 900 s in steps of 1
Default: 300 s
Set this delay to 0 to disable the rolling mode feature.
Otherwise, after no pushbutton has been pressed for the amount of time specified by this setting, the display
automatically enters rolling mode. While in the rolling mode, the Rolling Mode Pages display. Rolling mode can be
interrupted when a setting changes, such as changing the home page, then resumes rolling.
5
Automatic Annunciator Recall
Default: Enabled
When Enabled, an annunciator window changes state, and the display is in rolling mode, this setting terminates rolling
mode and displays the annunciator page containing the changed state.
The Configurable Navigation feature takes precedence over this setting when the Automatic Annunciator Recall and
Configurable Navigation are activated by the same input.
Screen Saver Delay
Default: 300 s
The screen saver mode extends the life of the display. After the amount of time set here, the screen saver activates and
the display intensity is reduced to the level set by the Screen Saver Intensity setting. When in rolling mode, rolling
continues while the screen saver is active. The screen saver terminates when rolling mode terminates. To disable the
screen saver, set the delay to 0.
Screen Saver Intensity
Range: 0, 10, 20, or 30 %
Default: 30 %
This setting sets the brightness of the display while the screen saver is active. For example, 0% means that the screen is
dark and nothing displays. Pressing a pushbutton or changing a setting in the software, for example, re-activates the
display.
Number of Rolling Mode Pages
Range: 1 to 10 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of rolling pages. During rolling mode, the graphical front panel displays pages from 1 to
the selected number.

Rolling Mode Page 1 to 10

Range: Product Information, SLD 1…5, Annunciator, Annunciator 1…8, Phasors 1…6, Tabular 1…5, Event Records, Targets
These settings specify the pages to display on the graphical front panel while in rolling mode.
The "Annunciator" selection without a page number specifies the first annunciator page in the following sequence:
Whenever an annunciator window changes state the list is re-evaluated, which can result in the display of a different
annunciator page in the rolling sequence.
5.3.3.3 Metering editor

This feature creates tables of actual/metered values for the graphical front panel. It configures the content that displays in
the Metering Tab pushbutton. An actual value, status, or text can be displayed. Five tabular metering pages can be
configured. There also can be a phasor page for each configured AC source, and these pages are not configurable.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.
5 Set the Current Page, Page Name, Layout, configure the top inputs, then the cells. The 16 inputs at the top of the page are
used as inputs for the Status Index fields. Click the Preview button to view the page.
For a phasor diagram, configure the source under Settings > System Setup > Signal Sources. The diagram is then
viewable by pushing the Metering Tab pushbutton on the graphical front panel. The Metering Editor is not used for these
phasor diagrams.
The figures show setup and table preview.
The Cells configured are not retained when using the Convert Device Settings function, for example when converting a file
in the Offline Window from version 7.6 to 7.7.

Figure 5-9: Metering Editor window
5
Figure 5-10: Preview for graphical front panel
STATUS INPUTS 1 to 16
Range: OFF, ON, any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting identifies the potential inputs for use in the STATUS INDEX fields, for display of the status of FlexLogic
operands.

A maximum of eight Status Inputs can be used per metering page, and 16 in all metering pages.
Select the metering input from the drop-down list. The options reflect the FlexLogic operands applicable to the T35. They
are inputs for all five metering pages, not just the current page.
CURRENT PAGE
Range: Page 1...Page 5
Default: Page 1
Select the metering page to configure from the drop-down list. There are five pages possible, viewable with the Tab
pushbuttons on the graphical front panel.
PAGE NAME
Range: Page 1...Page 5
Default: Page 1
Up to 20 characters can be input here as the name of each metering page. The name displays for the Tab pushbutton on
the graphical front panel.
LAYOUT
Range: 3x4, 4x6, 6x8, 6x4, 8x6, 12x8, 12x4, 16x6, 18x8
Default: 6x4
This setting determines how many rows and columns display on the graphical front panel with the metering information.
The configurable rows in the settings window change dynamically based on this setting.
CONTENT
Range: Actual, Status, Text
Default: Text
Select the type of content to display.
5 – Actual — an actual value/data. The Configure button becomes active for the actual value to be selected.
– Status — one of the operands selected from the STATUS INPUTS fields. Select it in the STATUS INDEX field.
– Text — indicates that text is to display instead of a metered value
STATUS INDEX
Range: 1...16
Default:
This field becomes active when the CONTENT field is set to Status. It selects the input from the STATUS INPUTS to display
the on/off status of the selected operand.
A maximum of eight Status Inputs can be used per metering page, and 16 in all metering pages.
TEXT
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Default:
Enter the text to display on the graphical front panel. This field is active when the CONTENT field is set to Text or Status.
When Status is selected, the text displays when the status input is in the "on" state.
OFF TEXT
Default:
Enter the text to display on the graphical front panel when the element being monitored is in an off/closed state. This
field is active when the CONTENT field is set to Status. The text displays when the status input is in the "off" state.
FONT
Range: 16, 18, 20
Default: 16
Set the font size to display on the graphical front panel.

TEXT COLOR
Range: 24-bit color selector
Default: Black
Set the text color to display in the specified cell.
BACK COLOR
Default: Grey
Set the background color to display in the specified cell.
ACTUAL (Configure)
Range: Configure
Default: Configure
The Configure button becomes active when the CONTENT field is set to "Actual." The window specifies the metering
data to display.
Figure 5-11: Metering value properties window
Parameter
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Default:
This setting selects a FlexAnalog parameter that specifies the metered value to display in the metering window. A
FlexAnalog is an analog parameter.
Units
Range: up to eight alphanumeric characters
Default:
This setting specifies the units of measurement for the metered value and is populated based on the Parameter
selected. The field can be left blank when units of measure do not apply.
Scale Factor
Range: G Giga, M Mega, k Kilo, None
Default: None
This setting allows the user to specify the scaling factor for the metering units value. Options depend on the Parameter.
Multiplier
Range: -1000000 to 1000000
Default: 1.0
This setting allows the user to specify a multiplier for the metering parameter value. The multiplier must be in
compliance with the 32-bit floating-point format per IEEE 754, otherwise, the input value is represented as per the IEEE
standard. For example, 1234.56789 is represented as 1234.567871094, and 9876.54321 as 9876.54296875.

Number of Integers
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of integers in the displayed metered value. It can be used to provide for leading
character spacing of the display value.
For example, setting the number to 2 displays 00.000[V] and setting it to 3 displays 000.000[V].
Number of Decimals
Default: 3
This setting specifies the number of decimal places in the displayed metered value. For example, setting the number to 1
displays 0.0 and setting it to 2 displays 0.00.
5.3.3.4 Single-line diagram editor

The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor. Use is explained in the Interfaces
chapter.
5.3.3.5 Annunciator editor

The annunciator editor is used to create annunciator content for the graphical front panel, including alarms and actual
values. Use is explained in the Interfaces chapter.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Editor.
To add an alarm, access the Annunciator Editor, configure the Layout and Page Name, configure the alarm or actual value,
set the text and color, then save. On the graphical front panel, view the content by pressing the Annunciator Tab
5 pushbutton at the bottom of the Home page. (Alarms do not display automatically.) Acknowledge the alarm by navigating
to it with the arrow pushbuttons, then pressing the ENTER or RESET pushbutton.
The figure shows alarms for basic functions. The last annunciator page is named Device Alarms. Alarms are set for the
device being offline, Ethernet cable issues, unauthorized access, battery failure, and high ambient temperature. They can
reset themselves when conditions return to normal, except for unauthorized access and temperature monitoring, which
require the alarms to be acknowledged. The self-test error functions, here for Ethernet and battery failures, also have been
enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests (not shown). When the alarms are triggered,
they display with a red background. An alarm is acknowledged by using the arrow keys on the graphical front panel then
pressing the ENTER button.

Figure 5-12: Annunciator editor with preview shown
Reset
Range: ON, OFF, any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows in the
graphical front panel. For example, to have the first user pushbutton resets all alarms, set this to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
and turn on the pushbutton under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Pushbuttons. This setting is the
same as the one defined in Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Resetting > Reset Annunciator. See the Resetting section later
in this chapter.
LAYOUT
Range: 3x4, 4x6, 6x8
Default: 3x4
Selects the number of rows and columns to display on the annunciator pages. For example, 3x4 means 12 windows
display per page over eight pages. Up to 96 entries are possible.
To view the layout, click the Preview button.

PAGE NAMES
Default: Page 1...Page 8
Up to 20 characters can be input as the name of each annunciator page. The number of pages depends on the Layout.
The name displays for the Tab pushbutton on the graphical front panel.
PARAMETER
Range: Indicator 1...Indicator 96
Default: Indicator 1...Indicator 96
Read-only field. Up to 96 windows are possible.
CONTENT
Range: Actual, Alarm, Mixed
Default: Alarm
Select if the cell is to be an alarm, an actual value, or a combination thereof, for example consists of a single metered
value (set to “Actual”), contains a single alarm indication (set to “Alarm”), or contains both a metered value and an alarm
indication (set to “Mixed”).
ALARM INPUT
Default: OFF
Select a trigger for the alarm, or the input signal connected to the alarm. For example, when set to "FIRST ETHERNET
FAIL" and the Ethernet cable connected to port 1 is removed, the alarm is triggered. (Note that when the Ethernet cable
is inserted into an SFP connector and the SFP connector is removed, the alarm is not triggered.) The field is read-only for
an actual value.
5 The selectable options are the FlexLogic operands specific to the product.
ALARM TYPE
Range: Acknowledgeable, Self Reset, Latched
Default: Acknowledgeable
Set the alarm type. The field is read-only for an actual value.
Acknowledgeable — Follow the state transitions, as outlined in the Annunciator section of the Interfaces chapter. The
alarm blinks until acknowledged, then remains on until the condition clears.
Self Reset — Track the state of the input operand. The alarm turns on when the trigger activates and off when the trigger
clears.
Latched — Alarm is on until acknowledged/reset individually or until the RESET button is pressed.
To acknowledge/reset/unlatch an alarm, use the arrow buttons on the graphical front panel and press the ENTER
button.
TEXT (LINE 1 to 3)
Default:
The text that displays in the annunciator cell. Three lines can be displayed. Note that a specified metering value replaces
the text for the selected line. This means that a line can display text or be set to show an actual metered value. If the text
does not display it is because an actual metered value is over-riding it; change the line for the text or for the actual value.
TEXT COLOR
Default: White
The color to display for the three text or actual value lines specified.
BACK COLOR
Default: Red
The background color to display for any triggered cell, for example when an alarm is triggered.

ACTUAL (Configure)
Range: Configure
Default: Configure
The Configure button becomes active when the CONTENT field is set to "Actual" or "Mixed." The window specifies the
metering data to display.
Parameter
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Default:
This setting selects a FlexAnalog parameter that specifies the metered value to display in the annunciator alarm.
Units
Range: up to eight alphanumeric characters
Default:
This setting specifies the units of measurement for the metered value and is populated based on the Parameter
selected. The field can be left blank when units of measure do not apply.
Scale Factor
Range: G Giga, M Mega, k Kilo, None
Default: None
This setting allows the user to specify the scaling factor for the metering units value. Options depend on the Parameter.
Multiplier
Range: -1000000 to 1000000
Default: 1.0
This setting allows the user to specify a multiplier for the metering parameter value. The multiplier must be in
compliance with the 32-bit floating-point format per IEEE 754, otherwise, the input value is represented as per the IEEE 5
standard. For example, 1234.56789 is represented as 1234.567871094, and 9876.54321 as 9876.54296875.
Number of Integers
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of integers in the displayed analog value. It can be used to provide for leading
character spacing of the display value.
For example, setting the number to 2 displays 00.000[V] and setting it to 3 displays 000.000[V].
Number of Decimals
Default: 3
This setting specifies the number of decimal places in the displayed analog value. For example, setting the number to 1
displays 0.0 and setting it to 2 displays 0.00.
Display in Line
Range: 1, 2, 3
Default: 1
This setting specifies the line in the annunciator alarm window to display the metered value. The actual value replaces
the text for the selected line. For example, 2 means the value displays in line 2 of the text; any text configured to display
in that line does not display.
5.3.3.6 Configurable navigation

The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Configurable Navigation.

This feature allows FlexLogic operands to trigger page display on the graphical front panel. It consists of 64 setting pairs,
each with a condition and an activation page. The condition selects any FlexLogic operand. The activation page selects
any page available for the graphical front panel. The page opens whenever the selected operand transitions from Off to
On. The page remains open until rolling mode initiates, another trigger initiates from Configurable Navigation, or the Home
button is pressed.
Avoid selecting condition operands that are likely to operate simultaneously but activate different pages, as only one page
can be opened at a time. For example, do not select a single-line diagram page for breaker status open and select an
annunciator page for a trip alarm.
In the example shown, failure of any of the three Ethernet ports triggers the Product Information page to display. With
unauthorized access (such as wrong password), IRIG-B clock failure, or breaker trouble, the Event Records display. When a
breaker opens, a single-line diagram displays. For the Ethernet and IRIG-B failure operation to work, these functions also
have been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests.
Figure 5-13: Configurable navigation editor
To use the feature, select a CONDITION, select an ACTIVATE PAGE, then save.
CONDITION
Default: OFF
Select the FlexLogic operand for the trigger. When it transitions from Off to On, it opens the page specified by the
ACTIVATE PAGE setting. The FlexLogic operands selectable depend on product. Select it from the drop-down list. Or click
or select the field and start typing to auto-fill. For example, typing F displays FIRST ETHERNET FAIL, while typing BR
displays the first breaker option.
ACTIVATE PAGE
Range: Product Information, SLD 1…5, Annunciator, Annunciator 1…8, Actual Values Phasors 1…6, Tabular 1…5, Event
Records, Targets
This setting specifies the page to display on the graphical front panel when the FlexLogic operand selected by its
CONDITON setting transitions from Off to On.
The "Annunciator" option without a page number specifies the first annunciator page in the following sequence:

5.3.4 Clear relay records

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
 CLEAR RELAY CLEAR USER REPORTS: Range: FlexLogic operand
 RECORDS  Off
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

CLEAR ARC AMPS 6: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off Visible only for units with Direct I/O module
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS — Resets the access restriction counter. 5

Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-
programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records is a typical application for these commands. Since the T35 responds
to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-
programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-
programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign user-programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, apply the following settings.
1. Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
2. Set the properties for user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”
5.3.5 Communications
5.3.5.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS
 COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS See below
  
 NETWORK See page 5-45

 

 IPv4 ROUTE TABLE See page 5-50

 
 MODBUS PROTOCOL See page 5-53

 
 PROTOCOL See page 5-54

 
 DNP PROTOCOL See page 5-56

 
 DNP / IEC104 See page 5-59

  POINT LISTS
 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL Access in EnerVista

  See page 5-60
 LEGACY FIXED GOOSE See page 5-111

 
 WEB SERVER See page 5-116

  HTTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL See page 5-116

 
 IEC 60870-5-104 See page 5-117

  PROTOCOL
 EGD PROTOCOL See page 5-118

 
5   IEC103
 PROTOCOL
See page 5-120
 USB 2.0 PORT See page 5-124

 
5.3.5.2 Serial ports

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS
 SERIAL PORTS RS232 PORT FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
  Enabled
RS232 BAUD Range: 19200, 115200

 RATE: 115200 ms
RS485 COM2 PORT Range: Disabled, Enabled

 FUNCTION: Enabled
RS485 COM2 BAUD Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
 RATE: 19200 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s
RS485 COM2 PARITY: Range: None, Odd, Even

 Even
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

 MIN TIME: 0 ms
RS232 PORT FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the RS232 serial port on the front panel. When the port function
is “Enabled”, a standard RS232 serial cable allows a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve, display,
and write settings either individually or collectively, to display status and actual values, to initiate controls, and to retrieve
and display event records, oscillography records, data logger records, and disturbance records. This setting is applicable to
both enhanced and basic front panels.
RS232 BAUD RATE, RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE, and PARITY — The T35 is equipped with two independent serial communication
ports. The front panel RS232 port (USB port with graphical front panel) is intended for local use. The rear COM2 port is
RS485 and has settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the

computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports can be connected to a computer
running the EnerVista software, for example to download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and
upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or computer
using the RS485 ports. If IEC 60870-103 is chosen as the protocol, valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit/s, and valid
parity is Even.
RS485 PORT FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the RS485 COM2 serial port on the rear panel. When the port
function is “Disabled”, SCADA (Modbus or IEC103 communications) and other comms on the rear RS485 port are not
permitted.
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME — This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after
receiving data from a host. This feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time
after each transmission.
5.3.5.3 Ethernet network topology

The T35 has three Ethernet ports. Each Ethernet port must belong to a different network or subnetwork. Configure the IP
address and subnet to ensure that each port meets this requirement. Two subnets are different when the bitwise AND
operation performed between their respective IP address and mask produces a different result. Communication becomes
unpredictable when more than one port is configured to the same subnet.
Example 1
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN 1 is 10.1.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN2 is 10.2.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN3 is 10.3.1.x/255.255.255.0)
5
Example 2
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN1 is 10.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
Example 3 — Incorrect
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.0.0.0
This example is incorrect because the mask of 255.0.0.0 used for the three IP addresses makes them belong to the same
network of 10.x.x.x.
Single LAN, no redundancy

The topology shown in the following figure allows communications to SCADA, local configuration/monitoring through
EnerVista, and access to the public network shared on the same LAN. No redundancy is provided.

Figure 5-14: Network configuration for single LAN
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
ML3000
P1
IP1/ P2 P3
MAC1
UR
859708A2.vsd
Multiple LANS, with redundancy

5 The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software and access to the public
network shared on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is connected. There is no redundancy provided on LAN1. Communications to
SCADA is provided through LAN2. P2 and P3 are connected to LAN2, where P2 is the primary channel and P3 is the
redundant channel. In this configuration, P3 uses the IP and MAC addresses of P2.
Figure 5-15: Multiple LANs, with redundancy
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1 LAN2
LAN2
ML3000
ML3000 ML3000
P1 P2 P3
IP1/ IP2/ IP2/
MAC1 MAC2 MAC2
Redundancy mode
UR
859709A4.vsd

Multiple LANS, no redundancy

The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is
connected, access to the public network on LAN2, to which port 2 (P2) is connected, and communications with SCADA on
LAN3, to which port 3 (P3) is connected. There is no redundancy.
Figure 5-16: Multiple LANS, no redundancy
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1 LAN2
LAN3
ML3000
ML3000 ML3000
P1 P2 P3
IP1/ IP2/ IP3/
MAC1 MAC2 MAC3
UR
859710A2.vsd
5
5.3.5.4 Network
As outlined in the previous section, when using more than one Ethernet port, configure each to belong to a different
network or subnet using the IP addresses and mask. Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the
routing settings.
Follow the IP and subnet mask rules outlined in the Set IP Address in UR section of the Installation chapter.
To obtain a list of all port numbers used, for example for audit purposes, contact GE technical support with substantiating
information, such as the serial number and order code of your device.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  NETWORK PORT 1(3)
 NETWORK PORT 1 PRT1 IP ADDRESS: Range: standard IPV4 address format
  127.0.0.1
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK: Range: standard IPV4 address format

 255.0.0.0
PRT1 FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Enabled

  127.0.0.1

 255.0.0.0
PRT2 REDUNDANCY: Range: None, Failover, PRP

 None Range if no PRP license: None, Failover
PRP MCST ADDR: Range: 01-15-4E-00-01-00 to 01-15-4E-00-01-FF

 01154E000100


 Enabled

  127.0.0.1

 255.0.0.0

 Enabled
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, HTTP, and PRP protocols. PRP is
explained in its own section later.
Use the front panel to change these settings. When online, the EnerVista software can be used to enable/disable each port
only. In the Offline Window area, all settings can be changed except port 2 redundancy (depending on firmware version).
When using GOOSE, in failover or PRP mode, port 3 configuration in the CID file is ignored. The Port 3 ConnectedAP
elements has no meaning, as ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask.
PRT1 (2 or 3) IP ADDRESS — This setting sets the port’s IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on port 3 if
port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 or 3) SUBNET MASK — This setting sets the port’s IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on
port 3 if port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 or 3) FUNCTION — This setting enable/disables network communication on the respective port. When the port
function is Disabled, the network traffic on this port is disabled. The PRT2 redundancy setting has no effect on this
5 functionality. The change takes effect upon relay restart.
If you disable a port here that is used to communicate between the relay and the software, this can take down all
communication between the two. For example, an Ethernet connection set to the IP address of the relay can be disabled
and cannot be reached, even when pinging. The port needs to be re-enabled, IP and any gateway addresses need to be
checked, and the relay needs to be set to Programmed.
PRT2 REDUNDANCY — Determines if ports 2 and 3 operate in redundant or independent mode. If the software options in the
order code include PRP, the available options are None, Failover, and PRP. If the software options in the order code do not
include PRP, the available options are None and Failover. In non-redundant mode (REDUNDANCY set to None), ports 2 and 3
operate independently with their own MAC, IP, and mask addresses. If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover, the operation of ports
2 and 3 is as follows:
• Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
• The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden
• Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link to the
Ethernet switch. If port 2 detects a problem with the link, communications is switched to Port 3. Port 3 is, in effect,
acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port 2. Once port 2 detects that the link between itself and the
switch is good and that communication is healthy for five minutes, then switching back to port 2 is performed. The
delay in switching back ensures that rebooted switching devices connected to the T35, which signal their ports as
active prior to being completely functional, have time to completely initialize themselves and become active. Once
port 2 is active again, port 3 returns to standby mode.
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
• Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
• The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are overwritten with those from port 2. This is visible on the
front panel but not displayed in the EnerVista software.
• Port 2 MCST ADDRESS field is visible
• The port 2 PTP function still uses only port 2 and the port 3 PTP function still uses only port 3. The relay still
synchronizes to whichever port has the best master. When ports 2 and 3 see the same master, as is typically the case
for PRP networks, the port with the better connectivity is used.

Behavior for GOOSE messages is as follows:

• If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover or PRP, In order to transmit a GOOSE message on port 2, the CID file must be
configured to have the corresponding GSE element in both ConnectedAPs S2 and S3. In the EnerVista software, the
TxGOOSE CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT needs to be "Ports-1,2,3" to transmit GOOSE on both ports 1 and 2, or "Ports-2,3" to
have GOOSE only on port 2, with failover/ PRP.
• If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the port 2 configured GOOSE message is simultaneously transmitted on ports 2 and 3
• If REDUNDANCY is set to failover and the port 2 link fails, then only the port 2 configured GOOSE message is transmitted
on port 3
The two ports must be connected to completely independent LANs with no single point of failure, such as common
power supplies that feed switches on both LANs.
When REDUNDANCY is set to PRP or failover and the network path with resolved default gateway is broken, then the
ARP table needs approximately five seconds to rebuild. The layer 2 protocols (GOOSE and PTP) are not affected.
However, the TCP/IP or UDP protocols (MMS connections, DNP3.0, and so on) can require reconnection if their active
connection does not ride through re-transmission frames.
For any changes to this setting to take effect, restart the unit.
PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR — This setting allows the user to change the multicast address used by the PRP supervision frames.
This setting is available if REDUNDANCY is set to PRP. All devices in the same PRP network need to have the same multicast
address. Choose an address that does not conflict with another multicast protocol.
5.3.5.5 Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI)

Since 100BASE-FX does not support Auto-Negotiation, a Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI) feature is included since UR 7 that
allows for detection of link failures.
The purpose of the Far-End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there 5
is a problem with one of the fibers. Without the Far-End Fault feature, it is impossible for a fiber interface to detect a
problem that affects only its transmit fiber.
When the Far-End Fault feature is supported, a loss of receive signal (link) causes the transmitter to generate a Far-End
Fault pattern in order to inform the device at the far end of the fiber pair that a fault has occurred.
When the local receiver again detects a signal, the local transmitter automatically returns to normal operation.
If a Far-End Fault pattern is received by a fiber interface that supports the Far-End Fault feature and it is enabled, it reacts
by dropping the link as if there were no signal at all.
If the receiving interface does not support the Far-End Fault feature or has it disabled, an incoming Far-End Fault pattern is
ignored.
It is strongly recommended to have switches used for substation automation that support the Far-End Fault feature,
especially when UR 7 redundancy Failover is selected for redundancy.
5.3.5.6 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
The T35 is provided with optional PRP capability, specified as a software option at the time of ordering.
The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation
networks. It applies to networks based on Ethernet technology (ISO/IEC 8802-3) and is based on the second edition (July
2012) of IEC 62439-3, clause 4.
PRP is designed to provide seamless recovery in case of a single failure in the network, by using a combination of LAN
duplication and frame duplication. Identical frames are sent on two completely independent networks that connect source
and destination. Under normal circumstances both frames reach the destination and one of them is sent up the OSI stack
to the destination application, while the second one is discarded. If an error occurs in one of the networks and traffic is

prevented from flowing on that path, connectivity is provided through the other network to ensure continuous
communication. Take care when designing the two LANs, so that no single point of failure (such as a common power
supply) is encountered, as such scenarios can bring down both LANs simultaneously.
Figure 5-17: Example of parallel redundant network
PRP uses specialized nodes called doubly attached nodes (DANPs) for handling the duplicated frames. DANP devices have
an additional module, called a Link Redundancy Entity (LRE). LRE is responsible for duplicating frames and adding the
specific PRP trailer when sending the frames out on the LAN, as well as making decisions on received frames as to which
one is sent up the OSI stack to the application layer and which one is discarded. LRE is responsible for making PRP
transparent to the higher layers of the stack.
In addition, there is a second type of specialized device used in PRP networks, called RedBox, with the role of connecting
Single Attached Nodes (SANs) to a redundant network.
UR relays implement the DANP functionality. The RedBox functionality is not implemented.
The original standard IEC 62439-3 (2010) was amended to align PRP with the High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
5 protocol. To achieve this, the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 version. The
revised standard IEC 62439-3 (2012) is commonly referred to as PRP-1, while the original standard is PRP-0. The UR relays
support PRP-1.
The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports, specifically Ports 2 and 3 of the CPU module. Use the previous
section (network port configuration) to configure PRP.
PRP is purchased as a separate option. If purchased (valid order code), PRP can be enabled in configuration through a
setting available on the network configuration menu, REDUNDANCY, which already has the capability of enabling failover
redundancy. The options on this setting must be changed to accommodate two types of redundancy: failover and PRP.
When REDUNDANCY is set to either failover or PRP, the ports dedicated for PRP (Ports 2 and 3) operate in redundant mode.
In this mode, Port 3 uses the MAC, IP address, and mask of Port 2.
5.3.5.7 IPv4 route table

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IPv4 ROUTE TABLE 1(6)
 IPv4 ROUTE TABLE  DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE
  
 IPv4 NETWORK
  ROUTE 1

 IPv4 NETWORK
  ROUTE 6
A default route and up to six static routes can be configured.

The default route is used as the last choice when no other route towards a given destination is found.
 DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE GATEWAY ADDRESS: Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
  127.0.0.1

 IPv4 NETWORK RT1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IPV4 address format

 ROUTE 1  127.0.0.1
RT1 NET MASK: Range: standard IPV4 subnet mask format

 255.0.0.0
RT1 GATEWAY: Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format

 127.0.0.1
Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the routing settings.
Add and delete static routes

Host routes are not supported at present.
The routing table configuration is available on the serial port and front panel. This is a deliberate decision, to avoid loss of
connectivity when remotely configuring the T35.
By default, the value of the destination field is 127.0.0.1 for all static routes (1 to 6). This is equivalent to saying that the
static routes are not configured. When the destination address is 127.0.0.1, the mask and gateway also must be kept on
default values.
By default, the value of the route gateway address is 127.0.0.1. This means that the default route is not configured.
To add a route:
1. Use any of the static network route entries numbered 1 to 6 to configure a static network route. Once a route
destination is configured for any of the entries 1 to 6, that entry becomes a static route and it must meet all the rules
listed in the next section, General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes.
2. To configure the default route, enter a default gateway address. Once a default gateway address is configured, it must 5
be validated against condition 2 of the General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes, where the route gateway
must be on a connected network.
To delete a route:
1. Replace the route destination with the default loopback address of 127.0.0.1. When deleting a route, the mask and
gateway also must be brought back to default values.
2. Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value of 127.0.0.1.
General conditions to be satisfied by static routes

The following rules are validated internally:
• The route mask has IP mask format. In binary this needs to be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
• The route destination and mask must match. This can be verified by checking that
RtDestination and RtMask = RtDestination
Example of good configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
The following rules must be observed when you configure static routes:
• The route destination must not be a connected network
• The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well. This can be verified by checking that:
(RtGwy & Prt1Mask) == (Prt1IP & Prt1Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt2Mask) == (Prt2IP & Prt2Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt3Mask) == (Prt3IP
& Prt3Mask)
where
& is the bitwise-AND operator
== is the equality operator
|| is the logical OR operator

Routing behavior compared to previous releases

Prior to release 7.10, UR devices did not have an explicit manner of configuring routes. The only available route was the
default route configured as part of the network settings (port gateway IP address). This limited the ability to route to
specific destinations, particularly if these destinations were reachable through a different interface than the one on which
the default gateway was.
Starting with UR 7.10, up to six static network routes can be configured in addition to a default route. The default route
configuration was also moved from the network settings into the routing section.
The figure shows an example of topology that benefits from the addition of static routes.
Figure 5-18: Using static routes
Router1
Public network
.1
Router2
10.1.2.0/24 10.1.3.0/24
10.1.1.0/24
ML3000 ML3000 .1
EnerVista Software
P1 P2 P3
IP1/ IP2/ IP3/
.2 .2 MAC2 MAC3
MAC1
UR
5 859714A1.vsd
In the figure, the UR connects through the following two Ethernet ports:
• Port 1 (IP address 10.1.1.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.1.0/24 and to the Internet through Router1. Router1 has an
interface on 10.1.1.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.1.1.
• Port 2 (IP address 10.1.2.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.2.0/24 and to the EnerVista software through Router2. Router2
has an interface on 10.1.2.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.2.1.
The configuration before release 7.10 was as follows:
• PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
The behavior before release 7.10 was as follows. When sending packets to EnerVista, the UR noticed that the destination
was not on a connected network and it tried to find a route to destination. Since the default route was the only route it
knew, it used it. Yet EnerVista was on a private network, which was not reachable through Router1. Hence a destination
unreachable message was received from the router.
The configuration starting with release 7.10 is as follows:
• PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE: GATEWAY ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
STATIC NETWORK ROUTE 1: RT1 DESTINATION = 10.1.3.0/24; RT1 NET MASK = 255.255.255.0; and RT1 GATEWAY =
10.1.2.1

The behavior since release 7.10 is as follows. There is one added static network route to the destination 10.1.3.0/24, where
a computer running EnerVista is located. This static route uses a different gateway (10.1.2.1) than the default route. This
gateway is the address of Router2, which has knowledge about 10.1.3.0 and is able to route packets coming from the UR
and destined to EnerVista.
Show routes and ARP tables

This feature is available on the web page interface when using basic security and by SFTP to an Administrator when using
CyberSentry. The main menu contains an additional Communications menu and two submenus:
• Routing Table
• ARP Table
The tables outline the information displayed when the two submenus are selected.
Table 5-5: Routing table information
Field Description
Destination The IP address of the remote network to which this route points
Mask The network mask for the destination
Gateway The IP address of the next router to the remote network
Interface Interface through which the specified network can be reached
Table 5-6: IP ARP information

Field Description
IP Address The network address that corresponds to Hardware Address
Age (min)
Hardware Address
Age, in minutes, of the cache entry. A hyphen (-) means the address is local.
LAN hardware address, a MAC address that corresponds to network address
5
Type Dynamic or Static
Interface Interface to which this address mapping has been assigned
5.3.5.8 Modbus protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL
 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
  ADDRESS: 254
MODBUS TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 NUMBER(502): 502
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless the port is configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-103
operation. This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used on the port. UR devices operate as Modbus slave devices
only.
For more information on the protocol, including the memory map table, see the UR Family Communications Guide.
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS — When using the Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the T35 responds regardless of the
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 port, each device on the serial bus must have a unique slave address
from 1 to 254. Address 0 and addresses from 248 and up are reserved by the Modbus protocol specification, and so their
use here is not recommended. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. Addresses do
not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors occur. Generally,
starting at 1, set each device added to the link to use the next higher address. When using Modbus TCP/IP, the client must
use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field.
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER — Modbus over TCP/IP can also be used on any of the Ethernet ports. The listening TCP port 502
is reserved for Modbus communications, and only in exceptional cases when MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER is set to any other
port. The MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting sets the TCP port used by Modbus on Ethernet. A MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER of
0 disables Modbus over TCP/IP, meaning closes the Modbus TCP port. When the port number is changed to 0, the change
takes effect when the T35 is restarted. When it is set to 0, use the front panel or serial port to communicate with the relay.

Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
5.3.5.9 Protocol selection

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL& AUTHORITY
 PROTOCOL & AUTHORITY SCADA Protocol: Range: DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103
  DNP 3.0
SFTP Protocol: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Enabled
MMS Port Function: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Enabled
CID FILE WRITE VIA Range: Disabled, Enabled

 MMS: Enabled
IEC 61850 MULTILEVEL Range: Disabled, Enabled

 CONTROL: Enabled
IED LOCAL STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
The PROTOCOL menu allows selection of one of the following protocols: DNP 3.0, IEC60870-104, or IEC60870-103.
SCADA PROTOCOL — This setting selects the SCADA protocol on which the unit communicates, either DNP3.0, IEC 60870-104
or IEC 60870-103, with DNP being the default. Options depend on order code. For any change to take effect, restart the
5 unit.
The following table shows the protocols that are operational on the RS232, RS485, and Ethernet ports. It shows all possible
combinations of the PROTOCOL and DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT settings.

Table 5-7: Port and protocol combinations

PROTOCOL DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT RS232 RS485 Ethernet
setting settings
DNP Channel 1: Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: Eth TCP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
Channel 1: none Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: Eth UDP Modbus Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
Channel 1: Eth TCP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: Eth TCP DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: Eth UDP Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS485
Channel 1: Eth UDP DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: RS485 Modbus DNP DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: RS232 DNP Modbus DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Channel 1: RS485 DNP DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: RS232
Channel 1: RS232
Channel 2: RS485
DNP DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
5
Channel 1: RS485 Modbus DNP Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 2: none
IEC 104 Modbus Modbus IEC 104, Modbus, IEC 61850
IEC 103 Modbus IEC 103 Modbus, IEC 61850
SFTP — Enables and disables file transfer to/from the relay by Secure Shell (SSH) and Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP).
This setting displays when using IEC 61850 without CyberSentry.
MMS PORT FUNCTION — When set to “Disabled”, MMS port 102 is closed and MMS client connection to UR fails. This setting
does not, however, affect the GOOSE operation. When set to “Enabled”, MMS client can connect to UR IEDs over port 102.
CID FILE WRITE FROM MMS — When set to “Enabled”, CID file write from MMS client is enabled, otherwise CID file write from
MMS client is not allowed.
MULTILEVEL CONTROL — When set to “Enabled”, control authority from multiple levels (Bay, Station and Remote) are allowed
simultaneously based on Local/Remote status and status authority status. Otherwise only one level has the authority to
control, based on Local/Remote status and status authority status.
MULTILEVEL CONTROL setting is only available for order codes with the IEC 61850 software option. It is only
applicable to Breaker and Disconnect switch control related logical nodes (XCBR/XSWI and CSWI), which
instantiates Loc and LocSta data objects. For all other controllable data objects in other logical nodes (like virtual
inputs in GGIO2) MULTILEVEL CONTROL setting is not applicable.
IED LOCAL STATUS — Selects an operand, that indicates the IED is in Local or Remote mode. When the operand value is set,
the IED is in Local mode and any commands from remote protocols (IEC 61850) are rejected.

IED LOCAL STATUS setting is only available for order codes with the IEC 61850 software option. It is applicable for all
IEC 61850 commands including Breaker and Disconnect switch controls, and the commands are allowed only
when the FlexOperand assigned to IED LOCAL STATUS setting is at logic “0”. When the FlexOperand assigned to IED
Local Status is at logic “1”, all the control actions from IEC 61850 client are blocked.
5.3.5.10 DNP protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL
 DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS See below
  
DNP ADDRESS: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 1
 DNP NETWORK See below

  CLIENT ADDRESSES
DNP TCP/UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 NUMBER(20000): 20000
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: Enabled, Disabled

 FUNCTION: Disabled
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1

 TIMEOUT: 5 s
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1

5  MAX RETRIES: 10
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

 DEST ADDRESS: 1
DNP CURRENT SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
 FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
 FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP POWER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
 FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP ENERGY SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
 FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP PF SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
 FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP OTHER SCALE Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
 FACTOR: 1 100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 DEADBAND: 30000
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 DEADBAND: 30000
DNP POWER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 DEADBAND: 30000
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 DEADBAND: 30000
DNP PF DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 DEADBAND: 30000

DNP OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 DEADBAND: 30000
DNP TIME SYNC IIN Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1

 PERIOD: 1440 min
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

 SIZE: 240
DNP OBJECT 1 Range: 1, 2

 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
DNP OBJECT 2 Range: 1, 2, 3

DNP OBJECT 20 Range: 1, 2, 5, 6




DNP OBJECT 30 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

DNP OBJECT 32 Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

 DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED

CONTROL POINTS: 0
Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1 5
DNP TCP CONNECTION Range: 10 to 7200 s in steps of 1
 TIMEOUT: 120 s
DNP EVENT TIME BASE: Range: UTC, LOCAL

 LOCAL
The Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) allows for the optimization of control and data acquisition between the equipment
in the substation and the central control center. The protocol is scalable; that is, it is designed to be compatible with the
latest high speed LAN technology yet still be implemented over slower speed serial links.
The DNP improves upon many master-slave protocols by improving overall communication performance requirements
and provides time-stamping with millisecond accuracy.
The T35 supports DNP version 3.0.
DNP is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to DNP 3.0. The T35
can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since
the T35 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively
communicate with the T35 at one time.
DNP is not available using the USB port on the graphical front panel.
See the UR Family Communications Guide for more information on DNP.
For any change to DNP settings, restart the relay.
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown.

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS
 DNP CHANNELS DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
  NONE PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP

DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
 NONE PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, DNP is the only protocol running on that port; Modbus or IEC
60870-5-103 are disabled. If DNP is assigned to RS485, the protocol must be set to DNP on the serial port configuration as
well, for the change to take effect. When the DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT setting is set to “Network - TCP,” the channel 1(2) DNP
protocol can be used over TCP/IP on the Ethernet ports. When this value is set to “Network - UDP,” the DNP protocol can be
used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. The “Front Panel - RS232” setting does not apply to the graphical front panel; when
selected the DNP client cannot establish a connection on a USB port.
those protocols.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the T35 on a DNP communications link. Assign a
unique address to each DNP slave.
The T35 can specify a maximum of five clients for its DNP connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to which
the T35 can connect. The settings follow.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS 1: Range: standard IP address
 CLIENT ADDRESSES  0.0.0.0

5  CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address
The DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER setting is for normal DNP operation. To close the port, set the port number to 0.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION is set to “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the T35 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the T35 retransmits an
unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP
UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which
solicited responses are sent is determined by the T35 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the T35 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to “1000,”
all DNP analog input points that are voltages are returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000 V
on the T35 is returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain
ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value is 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the T35 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger
unsolicited responses from the T35 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting
is set to “15”. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change
deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point.
The T35 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR and DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND settings are not applicable.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the T35.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.

The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to
be necessary, which provides more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
Check the “DNP Points Lists” T35 web page to view the analog inputs and/or binary inputs points lists. This page
can be viewed with a web browser by entering the IP address of the T35 Ethernet port employed to access the T35
Main Menu, then by clicking the Device Information Menu item, then the DNP Points Lists item.
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings select the DNP default variation
number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation
0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. See the DNP Implementation section in the UR Family Communications
Guide.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the T35 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some
legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support
the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP
master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The T35 can be configured to
support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED
CONTROL POINTS setting allows configuration of 0 to 64 binary output paired controls. The control points pairing starts from
the highest number of binary outputs available i.e. 128. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis. So
if the user selects a value of “2” for this setting, the pairing starts from the highest number; 128. Control points 128-127 and
126-125 operate in pairs and the rest (1-124) are operated individually.
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection is
aborted by the T35. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
5
For any change to DNP settings, restart the relay.
5.3.5.11 DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
 DNP / IEC104  BINARY INPUT / MSP See below
 POINT LISTS   POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME See below

  POINTS
Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104
protocol, can be configured. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic
operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
 BINARY INPUT / MSP Point: 0 Range: FlexLogic operand
 POINTS  Off
Point: 1 Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

Point: 255 Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. See the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the range of
assignable operands.

Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the T35 is restarted.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  ANALOG INPUT / MME
POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME Point: 0 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
 POINTS  Off
Point: 1 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

 Off

Point: 255 Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
 Off
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is
configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. See the FlexAnalog Parameters section in
Appendix A for the range of assignable parameters.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the T35 is restarted.
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP / IEC
60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are ignored.
5.3.5.12 IEC 61850 protocol
5 The T35 is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications, specified as a software option at the time of
ordering.
The IEC 61850 settings are accessible in EnerVista software or a substation configuration language (SCL) generating tool.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 or Settings > IEC 61850. The settings are not
accessible from the front panel of the device.
IEC 61850 messaging can form part of protection schemes. Consider IEC 61850 settings with the same criticality as
protection element settings. To ensure reliable performance of protection schemes utilizing IEC 61850 messaging,
route IEC 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications, or use redundant, independent ports, and
a high-speed network recovery method, such as PRP.
Overview
IEC 61850 is a series of international standards and technical reports applicable to power utility automation systems. It
includes semantics, abstract communication services, specific communication services, performance specifications,
network engineering guidelines, configuration description methodologies, and engineering processes. The standard
enables interoperability among intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from different suppliers and interoperability among
software configuration tools from different suppliers. Interoperability in this case is the ability for IEDs to operate on the
same network or communication path sharing information and commands, and for configuration tools to understand the
communication aspects of each other's configuration files.
The UR family supports a large subset of IEC 61850 features. These are detailed in the UR Family Communications Guide
and include the information model, GOOSE publish, GOOSE subscribe, buffered reports, unbuffered reports, and
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) query, read, write, and control services. In addition, the URs and their
EnerVista UR Setup software support IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language (SCL) file import/export and merging.
Many settings of UR protection, control, and monitoring elements, that is to say elements that are not concerned with the
IEC 61850 protocol, can nevertheless be accessed via IEC 61850. These settings are documented elsewhere in this Settings
chapter. This section of the Settings chapter deals solely with the settings that configure the IEC 61850 protocol itself.
The maximum number of simultaneous clients supported by the UR family is six.

IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2

The relay supports both IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2. The default is Edition 2.
Edition 2 relays use extensions to support IEC/TR 61850-90-5. Edition 2 IEC 61850 configuration tools can only
interoperate with Edition 2 devices, (UR 7.3x or later). When using Edition 2, the relay uses Edition 2 SCL, which differs from
Edition 1 SCL.
Edition 1 support is not present in UR versions 7.3x to 7.6x. support for edition 1 in edition 2 relays was introduced from
firmware version 7.7x.
When set to Edition 1:
• The test flag in the Tx GOOSE PDU is set to TRUE when the IED BEHAVIOUR setting has a value of "Test" or "Test
Blocked".
• Routable GOOSE is not supported
• Process Bus Module is not supported (order code 85, 86, or 87)
• Process Bus GOOSE is not supported
• The FlexLogic category does not display in the IEC 61850 panes in the EnerVista UR Setup software
• With SCL file import, for Edition 1 the IP address in the ConnectedAP element must match one IP address of the device,
while for Edition 2 one of the three IP addresses in the ConnectedAP element must match
The fields that display in the software depend on the selected Edition and the relay. Differences are noted in the sections
that follow. If required, consult the Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) section of the UR Family
Communications Guide to understand what applies to your setup.
To switch from Edition 2 to Edition 1, the EnerVista UR Setup software must be used. A new device must be created in the
Offline Window either from an existing device or as a new device. When creating the new device, select the "IEC61850
Edition" as "Edition 1". For an existing device, select IEC 61850 Edition 1 or Edition 2 under Settings > Product Setup >
Communications > Protocol & Authority. When a non- HardFiber Process Bus Module is present, only Edition 2 is used. 5
Switching defaults to the IEC 61850 settings, except GGIO1, GGIO2, GGIO4, and those for the graphical front panel. When a
message displays that a reboot is required, use the Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.
EnerVista setup for IEC 61850

The EnerVista UR Setup software provides the interface to configure T35 for the IEC 61850 protocol. This section describes
the interface. The software also supports import/export and merging of IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language
(SCL) files as documented in the UR Family Communications Guide.
The IEC 61850 settings cannot be accessed through the UR front panel and are instead accessible with the UR EnerVista
Setup software, via MMS query, read, and write services, or via IEC 61850 SCL file transfer. Accordingly, whereas other
settings are presented in this manual as they appear on the front panel, IEC 61850 settings are presented as they appear
in the software. See the UR Family Communications Guide for MMS and SCL access. Note that if you update the IEC 61850
settings in the EnerVista software by writing to them by MMS while the corresponding IEC 61850 panel is open in EnerVista,
you need to close then open the panel in EnerVista for the correct readings to display.
The IEC 61850 protocol settings are accessed through software panels, which are selected either in the Online Window
area (see figure) or the Offline Window area in the EnerVista software.
The EnerVista software also includes an interface that is compatible with firmware versions 5.0 to 7.2 to configure
subscribers. Use the Simplified GOOSE Configurator in the Offline Window area.

Figure 5-19: IEC 61850 Edition 2 setup screen in EnerVista
The IEC 61850 window is divided into a navigation pane on the left and a settings panel on the right. You expand and click
an option on the left to display its panel on the right. The following figure shows an example for Server Configuration. The
SETTING column contains the names of the settings, and the PARAMETER column is used to enter the settings. Hovering
the mouse over a setting name displays a tool-tip showing the IEC 61850 information model name of the setting or its
location in SCL files.
The content displayed varies with UR firmware version. For example, the version 8.4 fields shown differ from the version
7.9 fields.
5 Figure 5-20: IEC 61850 panel (Edition 2)
Opening the IEC 61850 window while online causes the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve and import an SCL file from
the T35. This System Configuration Description (SCD) file contains all the settings in the UR at the time of the file request,
both those that are mapped into the IEC 61850 information model (that is, the "public" sections) and those that are not in
the model (that is, the "private" section). The software imports all of these settings into the current session, not just those in
the IEC 61850 window. To avoid loss of any unsaved setting changes made in other panes during the current session, all
other panes for the T35 must be closed before the IEC 61850 pane opens, and the software prompts for this when required.
Panels for other devices can be open concurrently to facilitate parameter coordination.

When CyberSentry security is enabled, editable settings depend on the user role logged in. For example, an Administrator
and Engineer can change settings. If prompted for a "Settings password," it means the Administrator or Engineer
password.
The Restore button restores settings in the window to their last saved values. The Default button reverts settings in the
window to factory default values on th current view or Oscillography, Data Logger, or FlexLogic Equation Editor pre-
configured values. The Reset button reverts all IEC 61850 settings to the factory default values, not just the current
window. (In other settings windows, the button reverts settings in the window to factory default values.)
When a setting is enabled, its pane continues to read Disabled until relaunched. There is no polling capability to
automatically update the IEC 61850 readings, so the panel needs to be closed then opened for the correct status to
display. Good practice is to close any panel not in use because changes being made by other users are reflected only upon
relaunch of the panel.
Some of the IEC 61850 settings use floating point data, which guarantees accurate representation of real numbers up to
seven digits. Numbers with more than seven digits are approximated within a certain precision. This can result in
differences between what is entered and what is saved, and can result in differences shown on a settings comparison
report.
Create CID and settings files

A configured IED description (CID) file is created when settings are sent to the device, for example from the Offline Window
area. A CID file can be created by right-clicking a device in the Offline Window area and selecting the Save As option.
When the Save button is clicked in the online IEC 61850 window, the software prepares a CID file containing all the settings
of the device and sends the CID file to the device. Upon receipt, the T35 checks the CID file for correctness, going out of
service, then back into service when the CID file is accepted. The software displays a message when the T35 is running the
new settings, confirming successful transfer. This process can take a minute or so due to the amount of processing
required by the software and the T35.
When the Save button is clicked in the offline IEC 61850 window, the software saves to local storage, for example the hard
5
drive, a .urs file containing all settings of the device.
View IID/CID files

The IEC 61850 file types are as follows:
• ICD - IED capability description - Template file for an unconfigured IED
• IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings in the UR
• CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not contain the present settings)
• ICD, IID, and CID files are all XML text files that use the same IEC 61850 XML schema.
Note: The IID file type applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2 only.
IID and CID files are viewable. For example, after modifying settings in the IEC 61850 panels and clicking Developer IID/
CID Viewer in the software, a CID file generates and an SCL Viewer shows the updated CID file content. There are no edit
or save functions; use instead the Back Up and Restore Settings instructions later in this document to save the files.
Searches are case insensitive.

Figure 5-21: View CID settings file (Edition 2)
Server configuration
The Server Configuration panel contains IEC 61850 settings relevant to the server functions of the IED implementation.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration.
The following settings are available, where <iedName> is a syntactic variable representing the present value of the IED
NAME setting. The settings vary with firmware version, IEC 61850 edition, and device capability.
5 IED NAME
Range: 1 to 58 VisibleString characters
Default: TEMPLATE
The value entered sets the name used by IEC 61850 for the T35. An IED name unique within the network must be entered
for proper operation. Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first
character must be a letter.
The IED NAME and the Product LD inst name comprise the <LDName> for a product. The longest LD inst are "Master"
and "System" at six characters, with Master being fixed and the others configurable with the configurable Logical device
feature. The IED NAME is therefore restricted to 58 characters to meet a 64 character limit.
SUBNETWORK1(5) NAME
Range: 0 to 255 ASCII characters
Default: W1, W2, W3, W4, W5
Subnetworks 1 to 3 display for Editions 1 and 2. Subnetworks 4 and 5 display for Edition 2 with Process Bus Module.
When importing an SCL file:
– Subnetwork 1 to 3 names are identified by the contained ConnectedAP element of the target IED
– If a ConnectedAP element is missing, the respective subnetwork name uses the default value
– When the IEC 61850 server Edition is set to 1 (under Product Setup > Communications > Protocol), one
ConnectedAP is available in the SCL file. Only the respective subnetwork name is populated and editable. The rest
of the subnetwork names are read-only with default values. After importing an Edition 1 SCL file, you can select
the Access Point that needs to be populated from the Edition 1 SCL file and you can edit the subnetwork name in
the EnerVista UR Setup software.
– Subnetwork 1 to 3 names need to be unique
When exporting an SCL file:
– Subnetwork 1 to 3 names are preserved
– When the IEC 61850 server Edition is set to 1, the selected Access Point and respective subnetwork names are
populated

Access Point
Range: S1, S2, S3
Default: S1
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 1. It is the subnetwork.
Location
Default: Location
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.location. This data attribute is
provided by the protocol to allow the user to declare where the equipment is installed.
Latitude
Range: -90.000 to 90.000 degrees in steps of 0.001 degree
Default: 0.000 deg
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.latitude. This data attribute is provided
by the protocol to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates -latitude. Negative values
indicate a southern latitude. WGS refers to the world geodetic system, which is used in global positioning systems (GPS),
and 84 is the current version of the standard.
Longitude
Range: -180.000 to 180.000 degrees in steps of 0.001 degree
Default: 0.000 deg
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.longitude. This data attribute is
provided by the protocol to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates -longitude. Negative
values indicate a western longitude.
Altitude 5
Range: 0 to 10,0000 m in steps of 1 m
Default: 0.000 m
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.altitude. This data attribute is provided
by the protocol to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates - altitude.
LLN0.Mod.ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: sbo-with-normal-security
This setting specifies the control service that clients must use to provide control input to the IED MODE logic of the B30. An
"on" control to <LDName>/LLN0.Mod triggers the “On” behavior logic, a “test” control triggers the “Test” behavior logic, and
a “test/blocked” control triggers the “Test-Blocked” logic.
Configuration Type
Range: G2, E3-2.0
Default: G2
This setting is read only. It specifies the method used to describe GOOSE subscription configuration in SCL. See the UR
Family Communications Guide for details. In the G2 mode, the CID file contains IED elements for IEDs subscribed to by
this IED containing GOOSE subscription information. In the E3 2.0 mode, the CID file has only one IED element and
GOOSE subscription information is coded in data objects in the standard LGOS logical node used to monitor reception of
the subscribed GOOSE. UR 7.30 or later accepts either mode. The set value is for the entire EnerVista installation and is
preserved between sessions. To change this global field, click File > Preferences and access the IEC 61850 panel; the
device does not need to be connected.
Logical devices
The Edit Data Model panel contains IEC 61850 settings relevant to the configurable logical devices feature, wherein logical
devices can be created, naming can be reconfigured and logical nodes can be added, removed, or reassigned.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Edit Data Model.

Figure 5-22: Edit Data Model pane with devices center and nodes right
To configure logical devices and logical nodes:

1. Right-click one or more entries and edit an existing device, add a new one, or move a logical node. Depending on
selection, the prefix and instance number of a node are editable, for example prefix CBArc0 and instance 30 can be
edited in CBArc0SCBR30. Nodes that are not editable are grayed-out.
5 The rest of this section explains the functions.
The default logical device categories are as follows:

• Master — Communications, including GOOSE, reports, remote inputs, virtual Inputs, and setting group control
• System — Power system devices: breakers, switches, CTs, VTs, and so on, including interfaces to these, such as AC
inputs, contact I/O, transducer I/O, HardFiber I/O
• Prot — Protection and protection-related functions
• Ctrl — Control and monitoring functions
• Meter — Metering and measurement functions, including signal sources
• Gen — FlexLogic, Virtual Outputs, non-volatile latches, FlexElements, recording (for example oscillography), security,
front panel, clock
• PBus — UR Process Bus Module functions, such as SV subscription, AC Banks, and process bus Time Synchronization.
Displays when order code includes a Process Bus Module. Logical device is read-only.
For the Master logical device, the following logical nodes are read-only:
• The LLN0 in the Master logical device, which includes setting group, GOOSE and report control blocks, and datasets
• LPHD1 — Models common issues for physical devices
• GGIO3 — For RxGOOSE Inputs
• Process Bus Module logical nodes
The Edit Data Model panel has middle and right panes. The middle pane has a list of the instantiated logical devices in the
sequence that they appear in SCL, with one device selected. The right pane has a list of the logical nodes presently
assigned to the selected logical device in lexicographic order by logical node name.

In UR version 8.3x and later, the default IEC 61850 data model in the new UR device configuration is very basic. It contains
just enough to allow the IEC 61850 server to run and accept CID files. The ICT tool for the new UR device is EnerVista setup.
The entire default UR IEC 61850 data model is also available and can be used. You have to use the ICT tool to add the
required logical devices and logical nodes for each application, and then send the CID file to configure the UR device. The
process for adding and configuring logical devices and logical nodes is as follows:
In the following example, the Protection logical device has been set to instance name "Prot," its function-related name to
"Feeder1Prot" and its configuration revision to "2016-03-07 08:46."
Right-clicking on a logical device display to invoke a menu allows:
• insertion of a new logical device immediately below the selected one
• deletion of the selected logical device
• editing of the selected logical device's parameters.
Figure 5-23: Menu for logical device
If there are already 16 logical devices instantiated, the insert option is disabled and grayed-out.
If the selected logical device is Master, or it contains any logical nodes other than LLN0, the delete option is disabled and
grayed-out.
The Default LN Name(s) in this LD option resets logical node names to their default values. When the logical node name is
edited, the logical nodes pane displays the edited name followed by the default logical node name in brackets. The right-
click menu at the IED, logical device, and logical node level provides an option to default the logical node name(s) within
the scope of selection. That means that resetting the logical node names to their default values at the IED level, will do the
same for all logical node names in the network. The same applies at the logical device level too. If the insert option is
selected, or the edit option is selected for other than the Master logical device, a logical device parameters edit dialog
opens.

Figure 5-24: Insert new logical device (Edition 2)
If the edit option is selected for the Master logical device, the Product LD inst name setting is not editable.
Figure 5-25: Edit logical device
After confirming the entered values for Product LD inst name and Functional ldName, they are checked for uniqueness in
the UR, and are updated in the pane.
The settings are explained as follows, where <iedName> is a syntactic variable representing the present value of the IED
NAME setting. When adding or editing a logical device entry, these are the fields that need to be completed.
Customized logical nodes are not saved in the URS file.
Product LD inst name

Default: as per the following table
Each logical device has this setting. The value is fixed at "Master" in the first logical device and configurable in all others.
Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a
letter. The entered value sets the logical device inst name. Each logical device inst name is required to be unique within
the device, and it cannot be blank. Also, if the corresponding functional ldName setting is blank, the concatenation of the
IED name and the logical device inst name must form an LDName that is unique within the network for proper operation.
It is recommended that the length of the IED NAME plus the length of this setting be not greater than 64 to respect the
requirements of IEC 61850 7 2:2010 22.2 for LDName.

The factory default configuration is for six logical devices with Product LD inst name settings and logical node
assignments as described above in the Logical devices section.
Functional ldName
Default: empty string
Each logical device has this setting. The value is configurable in all logical devices. Valid characters are upper and
lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. If the number of characters entered is greater than zero, the
setting sets the value of the function-related name used in communications. If an ldName is entered, it must form an
LDName that is unique within the network for proper operation. The standard recommends choosing this name
according to IEC 81346-1. If the number of characters entered is zero, no function-related name is defined.
Throughout the remainder of this IEC 61850 section, <LDName> is a syntactic variable representing the present
LDName of the master logical device. In other contexts, LDName can refer to some other logical device. Depending
on its context, <LDName> can be a product-related name or a function-related name.
configRev
Default:
This data attribute is provided by the protocol to declare changes to the semantic of the data model of the UR. The intent
is that the user changes Master configRev each time that the semantic or data model changes, so that clients can
readily detect the change. A semantic change is a logical node getting a new semantic use; for example, an instance of
logical node CSWI is now serving a different physical switch, or an instance of a logical node PDIS is now used for
another zone. A data model change is a change in the presence of logical nodes, data objects, data attributes, or
instance names.
The scope of Maser configRev is the entire relay configuration, as the Master logical device is the root logical device.
Similar settings are provided for the other logical nodes; the scope of these other configRev settings is limited to the
5
corresponding logical device configuration.
paramRev
Range: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Default: 0
The configurable data attribute paramRev has a scope that includes the entire device, and thus is modified whenever
any setting in the device changes. The UR increments the value of paramRev by one whenever one or multiple setting
changes occurs in one Modbus write request by any means (front panel, Modbus, or MMS) other than by SCL file
download. Incrementing occurs whether or not the setting is represented in the information model. When a UR device or
EnerVista UR Setup accepts an SCL file, paramRev is set to the value in that SCL file. When EnerVista UR Setup changes
one or more settings, and prepares an SCL file, it increments paramRev to the next higher multiple of 10 000.
Each logical device has a name: LDName. (Note the upper-case LD.) LDName has both a product-related form and
a function-related form as per IEC 61850 6:2009 8.5.3.
SCL files invariably use the product-related form of LDName. The product-related form is the concatenation of the
IED name of the device and the individual logical device's inst name. The IED name is the value of the "IED NAME"
setting on the Server Configuration panel, and the logical device inst names are each the value of the
corresponding "Product LD inst name" setting here. The "Product LD inst name" of the first logical device is fixed at
"Master."
Communications use the function-related form of LDName if a function-related name is defined, otherwise
communications use the product-related name. The function-related name is the value of the corresponding
"Functional ldName" setting if this setting is not empty, if empty the function-related name is not defined.
In SCL, the function-related name is specified by the LDevice element attribute ldName (note the lower case ld).
Absence of this attribute indicates the function-related name is not defined. In SCL the product-related name is
specified by the name attribute of the IED element and the inst attribute of the LDevice element.

In the right pane, logical nodes assigned permanently to the Master logical device and LLN0 in all logical devices are
grayed-out as shown earlier. These are not movable. Any other logical node can be dragged to any of the logical devices in
the middle pane, which causes that logical device to be re-assigned to that logical device. Right-clicking a logical node
device displays a menu that lists the logical devices that this logical node can be moved to. Clicking one of these re-assigns
the logical node. Other common keyboard and/or mouse action can be used to select one or more logical nodes and move
the selected nodes together.
Figure 5-26: Move logical node (Edition 2)
GOOSE
GOOSE, Routable GOOSE, and Process Bus GOOSE are supported, depending on hardware and software options.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE.
Support for Routable GOOSE

Unsecured Routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE) is supported in firmware release 7.4 and later for IEC 61850 Edition 2. Routable
GOOSE allows relays and other devices to be located in separate networks. Encryption/decryption of messages can be
performed by a separate gateway device. Messages are routed using a separate router.
Note that R-GOOSE messages effectively contain GOOSE messages, but with the addition of a further communication layer
for UDP and IP. This additional encoding makes R-GOOSE and GOOSE messages incompatible. It is therefore essential that
UR RxGOOSE and TxGOOSE configurations are of the same type. That is, the TxGOOSE configuration of the publisher must
match the RxGOOSE configuration of the subscriber(s).
R-GOOSE is available through the IEC 61850 software option. If R-GOOSE security is required, the CyberSentry
software option also is required.
The Time to Live (TTL) parameter is fixed to 64 seconds for Routable GOOSE
GOOSE and Process Bus Modules

A Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, or 87) is supported to subscribe to sampled value (SV) messages on the process
bus. GOOSE functionality is supported on the module, which allows both reception and transmission of GOOSE messages
in the process bus.

GOOSE publishing (TxGOOSE) on the Process Bus Module has the following limitations:
• A maximum of two GoCBs can be assigned to Process Bus Module ports and only the fast datasets (that are prefixed
with TT6) can be assigned to the Process Bus Module GOOSE messages
• A maximum of 64 data attributes can be published with two TT6 datasets on the Process Bus Module
• Publishing Routable GOOSE messages on a Process Bus Module is not supported
• Dynamic priority is not supported
GOOSE reception (RxGOOSE) on the Process Bus Module has the following limitations:
• A GOOSE message can be subscribed using main CPU or Process Bus Module, but the same message cannot be
subscribed from both
• For GOOSE subscription, a functional constraint data attribute (FCDA) in a given dataset cannot be subscribed more
than once
• Subscribing to Routable GOOSE messages on a Process Bus Module is not supported
On a request to save in the IEC 61850 panel in the EnerVista software, an error message displays if any of the above rules
fail. When a SCL file is imported and the validation against the above rules fail, the SCL file is rejected with an appropriate
error message in the software and UR SCL log.
TxGOOSE
IEC 61850 GOOSE is a method for the simultaneous high-speed delivery of generic substation event information by a
publishing device to more than one subscribing device. A TxGOOSE is a UR element implementing a single IEC 61850
GOOSE message publishing service, controlled by a GOOSE control block (gcb). The subscribing function in URs is
performed by RxGOOSE elements. Each UR with an IEC 61850 order code option has 16 TxGOOSE elements with
associated control blocks. Each TxGOOSE can either use the original format specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 or the routable
GOOSE (R-GOOSE; IEC 61850 Edition 2) format specified in IEC TR 61850-90-5:2012. Each TxGOOSE uses an IEC 61850
5
dataset to determine the data that will be published.
Published TxGOOSE messages configured in the EnerVista UR Setup software can be subscribed by and the published data
values understood by other UR devices. Furthermore, they can be subscribed to and understood by any device of any
manufacturer that implements the IEC 61850 Edition 1 or 2 GOOSE subscription mechanism. The messages are published
with a multicast address so that the network sends the messages to all devices; any number of devices that want to
subscribe can.
For wide-area protection, control, and monitoring schemes, R-GOOSE wraps the original format GOOSE in IP/UDP to
multicast (or unicast) the data over a Wide Area Network (WAN). Sample applications are Wide area Remedial Action
Scheme (RAS) and Under Voltage / Frequency Load Shedding Schemes (UVLS/UFLS). R GOOSE uses IGMPv3 (Internet Group
Management Protocol version-3, RFC 3376) for multicasting.
The IEC data values that are published in GOOSE messages are known as members. The members are itemized in an
ordered list known as a data set. Each TxGOOSE can use any one of the configured data sets. (See the DataSets section
later for details.) The performance of a TxGOOSE is determined by its dataset. Booleans in fast GOOSE datasets are
designed for the TT6 transfer time class (3 ms), while Booleans in the slow datasets are designed for the TT3 class (100 ms).
Due to the significant amount of CPU time required to compose a TT6 TxGOOSE message and the limited amount of time
allowed by the TT6 class, at most four of these can be configured in a given UR. So only four fast GOOSE are allowed to be
configured, and the UR software has a check to disallow the use of more than four fast datasets in GOOSE. If six fast
datasets are configured outside of UR software and the file sent directly to the relay, the relay rejects the file. The design
does allow six fast datasets to be used in report control blocks, which allows fast scanned data in reports.
Each enabled TxGOOSE transmits its message whenever a value change is detected in one or more of its members. If the
changed value is a Boolean in a fast dataset, then the change detection occurs in the TT6 detection time of 3 ms or less. If
the member is an analog value in a fast dataset, the change detection occurs in the TT3 time of 100 ms. In slow GOOSE
Datasets, change detection for all dataset members occurs in the TT3 time of 100 ms. To guard against the possibility that
such a message is lost in the network before it reaches all subscribers, the message is retransmitted quickly several times.
To allow subscribers to verify that their link to the publisher and the publisher itself are healthy, each message is also

retransmitted periodically even while the values are unchanging. These latter messages are known as heartbeat
messages, while the former are known as event messages. Heartbeat messages also enable a subscriber newly online to
receive the published values in the absence of an event.
The details of TxGOOSE message construction are contained in the UR Family Communications Guide. Knowledge of these
details is not required to configure GOOSE.
The UR does not implement the fixed-length encoded GOOSE messages option specified in IEC 61850-8-1:2011 clause A.3;
the UR always uses the ASN.1 Basic Encoding Rules (specified in ISO/IEC 8825-1) as specified in IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 and
optional in IEC 61850 Edition 2.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > TxGOOSE > TxGOOSE1 to access the
settings for the first TxGOOSE. The settings and functionality for the other entries are similar.
Figure 5-27: IEC 61850 TxGOOSE panel (Edition 2 and with Process Bus Module)
A data set needs to be set up and selected in the TxGOOSEx DataSet field for all content to display.
When saving changes, when a "dataset member is empty" message displays, you need to set the member in the bottom
right of the window.
TxGOOSE1 MODE
Range for Edition 2: Disabled, GOOSE, R-GOOSE
Range for Edition 1: Disabled, GOOSE
Default: Disabled
When set to Disabled, TxGOOSE1 messages are not published. When set to GOOSE, TxGOOSE1 messages are published
in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 GOOSE format. When set to R-GOOSE, TxGOOSE1 messages are published in Routable GOOSE
format according to IEC 61850 90-5, and the TxGOOSE1 DST MAC address is set to 00 00 00 00 00 00 and cannot be
changed. The actual destination MAC address used for R-GOOSE transmission is derived from the configured multicast
IP address.

TxGOOSE1 GoCB name

Range: 0 up to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: GoCB01
The entered value sets the GOOSE control block (GoCB) name value for TxGOOSE1.
An ObjectReference to the control block, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0." and the
control block name, is published in the gocbRef field of TxGOOSE1 messages and is used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages. <LDName> is a syntactic variable that is set to the value of setting
Master functional ldName if one or more characters have been entered to that setting, otherwise the value of setting IED
NAME suffixed with "Master".
TxGOOSE1 GoID
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Default: TxGOOSE1
The entered value sets the goID value published in TxGOOSE1 messages, and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
the TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages. Special characters are not allowed, such as <, >, &, ’, and ".
TxGOOSE1 DatSet
Range: None, TT6DataSet1,TT6 DataSet2, … TT3DataSet01,TT3 DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the published data set using the UR Setup software designator for the data set. If None is selected,
no TxGOOSE1 messages are sent.
The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as described later.
Some datasets are designed for the TT6 transfer time class (3 ms), while others are designed for the TT3 class (100 ms).
The performance of a TxGOOSE is determined by its dataset. Use TT6 datasets for trips and blocking applications, TT3
datasets for slow automatic interactions. The IEC 61850 name of the datasets are configured in the Datasets panel. 5
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0." and the data
set name, is published in the datSet field of TxGOOSE1 messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages. <LDName> is a syntactic variable that is set to the value of setting
Master functional ldName if one or more characters have been entered to that setting, otherwise the value of setting IED
NAME suffixed with "Master".
To configure a DataSet, select it at the top of the window from the drop-down list. In the lower part of the window, drag
and drop configuration items to the right side. Dataset members configured here affect other Report or TxGOOSE
control blocks that use the same DataSet.
The performance of the TxGOOSE is determined by the performance of the selected dataset. When the selection is
TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, … it is possible that transient events can be missed.
TxGOOSE1 DST MAC
Range: any 12 digit hexadecimal number
Default: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00 when TxGOOSE1 MODE is set to GOOSE, 00-00-00-00-00-00 when TxGOOSE1 MODE is set to
R-GOOSE
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE is set to R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. If R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is set to
multicast, the destination MAC address is derived from the configured multicast IP address. If R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is set
to unicast IP, the UR resolves the destination MAC address using the ARP protocol. If R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is in the range
of any of the configured static routes (first usable static route), the UR uses the gateway IP of that static route for
resolving the destination MAC. Otherwise, the UR uses the default gateway. The same is repeated on all the configured
ports of the TxGOOSE1 CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT setting.
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE setting is GOOSE, the value entered here sets the Ethernet destination MAC address in
published TxGOOSE1 messages. As the standard requires that the address have the multicast bit set TRUE, that is to say
the second digit is set to an odd number, messages transmitted have the multicast bit set TRUE no matter its value in
this setting.

The destination MAC address can be used by the network to restrict message delivery to selected devices that need to
receive them, reducing network load. This address also can be used by hardware in receiving devices to filter out
messages that are of no interest to them, reducing processor burden. Different filtering algorithms are implemented by
different devices. The standard recommends that the algorithm used by hardware of the receiving device be considered
when assigning destination multicast addresses.
Subscribers can use this address to discriminate TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
The UR supports R-GOOSE messages configured with a unicast destination IP address. This is a non-standard extension
to IEC 61850. In this configuration the UR needs to determine the appropriate destination MAC address to use. This is
done in the following manner. After relay startup, ARP requests are sent to the gateway address (approximately within
30 seconds after relay startup). When the ARP response is received, the ARP table is updated, and the unicast R-GOOSE
messages are published with the resolved MAC address. Every 20 minutes, the UR flushes the ARP table and rebuilds the
ARP table by sending the ARP requests.
• If the gateway router is offline, the UR retransmits the ARP requests at one second intervals for 10 seconds, and the
same sequence is repeated at approximately six minutes until the ARP response is received
• When the network link is disconnected, at the connection, the UR transmits the ARP messages to rebuild the ARP table
and when the ARP table is updated, the UR publishes the unicast messages. The recovery time could be up to five
minutes for publishing the unicast messages.
• Whenever there is a change in static route configuration, the UR transmits the ARP requests to the new gateway
address approximately 70 seconds after the static route configuration change.
The resolved MAC addresses are displayed in the UR web page.
When using a Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, or 87) and configuring multiple TxGOOSE to publish, ensure that
the MAC addresses differ. When the MAC addresses are the same, a message displays to change them, for example
"TxGOOSE1 & TxGOOSE2 assigned to PBM have the same DstMAC address. Unique DstMAC addresses are required
5 between the TxGOOSE for ’PB Port Assignment’ to work correctly."

TxGOOSE1 VLAN PRIORITY
Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 5-4, 6-4, 6-5, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6
Default: 4
When the value entered is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, the User Priority value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published
TxGOOSE1 messages is set to that value. When one of the two-digit values is entered, the dynamic priority feature is
selected: the first event message has the User Priority value of the first digit, and User Priority is decremented in each
following message until reaching the value of the second digit. For instance, if the selected value is 7-5, then the User
Priority values in successive messages beginning with the message triggered by an event is 7, 6, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, and so on.
Do not make a dynamic priority selection when standard behavior is required.
Network devices can forward a message with a higher priority value before a message with a lower priority value, which
speeds delivery of high-priority messages in heavily loaded networks. The standard recommends that higher-priority
messages, such as GOOSE, have priority values in the range of 4 to 7.
TxGOOSE1 VLAN ID
Default: 0
The value entered sets the VID value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published TxGOOSE1 messages. VID can be
used by network devices to direct messages to only selected devices, reducing network burden. VID values of 0 and 1
are assigned by IEEE 802.1Q to other functions and are not to be used for GOOSE.
TxGOOSE1 ETYPE APPID
Default: 0
The value entered sets the APPID value in published GOOSE messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
The standard reserves the value range 0 to 16383 for GOOSE Type 1 (Fast messages), and reserves the value range
32768 to 41151 for GOOSE Type 1A (Trip messages). Some subscribers can process messages in the Type 1A range
faster than messages in the Type 1 range. The standard reserves the default value (0) to indicate lack of configuration.
The standard strongly recommends unique, source-orientated APPIDs within a given system.

TxGOOSE1 CONFREV
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in published GOOSE messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that CONFREV be incremented each time the members or the order of the members published is changed. The standard
states that the value of 0 is reserved.
TxGOOSE1 MIN TIME
Range: 0 to 100 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 4 ms
If the entered time is non-zero, when a member value change is detected, four event transmissions are sent, then
heartbeat transmissions resume. The interval between the first and second event transmissions, and between the
second and third, is the time set here. The interval between the third and the fourth event transmission is double the set
time. If the entered time is zero, only a single event transmission occurs, then heartbeat transmissions resume.
TxGOOSE1 MAX TIME
Range: 1 to 59 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 10 s
This setting specifies the time interval between heartbeat messages, meaning messages that are sent periodically while
no events are detected.
TxGOOSE1 TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE
Default: 20 s
The value entered sets the timeAllowedtoLive value in published TxGOOSE1 messages. The standard requires
subscribers to assume a failure has occurred when another TxGOOSE1 message is not received within the published 5
timeAllowedtoLive time.
Base this setting on the TxGOOSE MAX TIME and the tolerable number of contiguous message delivery misses. For
example, if the heartbeat time is 10 s, and missing up to three successive messages is tolerable, make the setting
10 * 3 + 1 = 31 s. The extra second is to ensure that arrival of the third heartbeat transmission beats the
timeAllowedtoLive timer.
In the imported CID file, if the TxGOOSE1 TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE is greater than 60 seconds, the setting value is
clamped to 60 seconds and an information log is provided in the SCL log file.
TxGOOSE1 CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT
Range: Disabled, Port-1; Port-2; Port-3; Ports-1,2; Ports-2,3; Ports-1,3; Ports-1,2,3
Default: Ports-1,2,3
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This setting specifies the Ethernet ports for transmission of TxGOOSE1. When set to disabled, TxGOOSE1 messages are
not transmitted on any port no matter the state of GoEna. When set to Port-1, TxGOOSE1 is published over Ethernet
Port-1 only; while selecting Ports-1, 3 option, the same TxGOOSE1 is published to both Ports 1 and 3; and similarly, if set
to Ports-1, 2, 3, all ports publish TxGOOSE1.
When setting PRT2 REDUNDANCY to Failover or to PRP, the TxGOOSE 1 CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT needs to be set to
ports 2 and 3 (Ports-2,3).
Also, Port 3 configuration in the CID file is ignored. The Port 3 ConnectedAP elements has no meaning, as ports 2
and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask.
TxGOOSE1 PB PORT ASSIGNMENT
Range: Individual ports may or may not be checked (PB Port-1…PB Port-8)
Default: None of the ports are selected
This setting displays when the order code includes a non-HardFiber Process Bus Module.

When using a UR Process Bus Module, this setting specifies the Ethernet ports on the Process Bus Module for
transmission of TxGOOSE1. When none of the ports are selected, a TxGOOSE1 message is not transmitted on any port no
matter the state of GoEna. When set to PB Port-1, TxGOOSE1 is published over Process Bus Module Port-1 only. Similarly,
if all ports are selected (PB Port-1 to PB Port-8) all Process Bus Module ports publish TxGOOSE1.
When the TxGOOSE1 Mode is set to R-GOOSE, the setting is read-only.
A maximum of 192 data attributes (in one or more datasets) can be transmitted in all TxGOOSE messages that are
configured to transmit on the Process Bus Module.
R-TxGOOSE1 IP CLASS
Default: 46
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise, this setting
selects the IPv4 Differentiated Services Code Point-DSCP (formerly called TypeOfService-TOS) value. This value provides
priority routing, when supported in the routers. The default value is for Expedited Forwarding (101110B, 46 or 2EH).
R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP
Range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255 in steps of 1
Default: 224.0.0.0
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise, this setting
specifies destination IP address for the R-TXGOOSE1 that is entered in Standard IPV4 address format. The destination IP
address needs to be a valid multicast or unicast IP address. The value specified in this setting is used as the IPv4
destination IP address for publishing R-GOOSE1.
5 The default IP address 224.0.0.0 is reserved, and hence not a valid multicast IP address.
The source IP address is that of the UR port from which the R-GOOSE messages are transmitted.
R-TxGOOSE1 SECURITY
Range: None, Signature, SignatureAndEncryption
Default: None
This setting specifies level of security (authentication/encryption) used for TxGOOSE1. None specifies no security
mechanisms are to be used. Signature specifies only signature (no encryption) is to be used. SignatureAndEncryption
specifies that both signature and encryption are to be used.
RxGOOSE
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages.
GOOSE is an efficient method for simultaneous high-speed delivery of generic substation event information by a
publishing device to more than one subscribing device. An RxGOOSE is a UR element implementing a single IEC 61850
GOOSE message subscribing service. The publishing function in URs is performed by TxGOOSE elements, as described in
the previous section.
Each UR with an IEC 61850 order code option has 64 RxGOOSE elements. Each RxGOOSE element can subscribe to GOOSE
messages from a specified publisher. Each RxGOOSE can either use the original format specified in IEC 61850-811:2011 or
the routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE; IEC 61850 Edition 2) format specified in IEC TR 61850-90-5:2012. Subscribed message
members can be DataObjects, SubDataObjects, DataAttributes, or SubAttributes. In E2-2.0 mode, members are restricted
to basic types BOOLEAN, FLOAT32, INT32, Dbpos, TimeStamp, or Quality. Each subscribed message can contain up to 256
values. A member can be a structure containing several values; note that it is the number of values rather than the number
of members that are limited to 256.
GOOSE messages from any device of any manufacturer that implements the IEC 61850 Edition 1 or 2 GOOSE publish
service, or the IEC 61850-90-5 R-GOOSE service (IEC 61850 Edition 2) can be subscribed to. The UR accepts both the
variable-length encoded GOOSE messages specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2004 and the fixed-length encoded GOOSE
messages as specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 clause A.3.

Each enabled RxGOOSE monitors for interruption of the GOOSE messages it subscribes to based on the value in the
timeAllowedtoLive field of the last message received. If a new message is not received within that time interval, the
RxGOOSE assumes that connectivity is lost. FlexLogic operands (for example RxGOOSE1 On, RxGOOSE1 Off) reflect the
status of each RxGOOSE connectivity. An RxGOOSE connection is also considered lost after the UR finishes restart until a
message is received. While any RxGOOSE connectivity is lost, a common RxGOOSE Fail self-test is activated.
Messages that contain the value true in the ndsCom field are never accepted. Messages that contain the value true in the
simulation field are accepted only when the B30 LPHD1.Sim.stVal is true (simulation mode is enabled)..
RxGOOSE messages can be received through a UR CPU module Ethernet port or a UR Process Bus Module Ethernet port. A
maximum of 24 RxGOOSE messages can be received from the Process Bus Module.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages >
RxGOOSE1 to access the settings that specify the messages to be accepted by the first RxGOOSE element. The settings
and functionality for the other RxGOOSE are similar. The following settings are available. They allow RxGOOSE1 to
recognize the GOOSE messages to accept. Most of these settings are configured automatically by the EnerVista UR Setup
software when an association to an RxGOOSE Boolean Input, RxGOOSE DPS Input, and/or RxGOOSE Analog Input is made
as described in the following sections. For IEC 61850 Edition 2, settings R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE, R-RxGOOSE1
SECURITY, and R-RxGOOSE SRC IP need to be completed manually as the information is not contained in publisher SCL.
Read-only settings are grey.
Figure 5-28: IEC 61850 RxGOOSE Messages panel (Edition 2)
RxGOOSE1 MODE
For Ed2: Main CPU GOOSE, Main CPU R-GOOSE, Process Bus Module GOOSE
For Ed1: GOOSE
Default: Main CPU GOOSE
When set to "Main CPU GOOSE," the relay subscribes to RxGOOSE1 messages if received on any of the three main CPU
ports and if they comply with IEC 61850-8-1:2011 GOOSE format.
When set to "Main CPU R-GOOSE," the relay subscribes to RxGOOSE1 messages if received on any of the three main CPU
ports and if they comply with the R-GOOSE format according to IEC 61850-90-5.
When set to "Process Bus Module GOOSE," the relay subscribes to RxGOOSE1 messages if received on any of the eight
UR Process Bus Module ports and if they comply with IEC 61850-8-1:2011 GOOSE format.

RxGOOSE1 goID
If the entered value has one or more characters, the goID field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this
value for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1
does not check the value received in the goID field. Special characters are not allowed, such as <, >, &, ’, and ".
This setting needs match the value of the publisher's TxGOOSE GoID setting.
RxGOOSE1 Dst MAC
Range: any 12 digit hexadecimal number
Default: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used, the destination Media Access
Control (MAC) address for RxGOOSE1 messages is calculated based on the RxGOOSE DST IP address. Otherwise, set this
setting to the MAC address of the publisher. Only received GOOSE messages having a MAC address equal to this value
are accepted as valid RxGOOSE1 messages. An entered address of zero disables RxGOOSE1.
The setting needs to match the value of the publisher’s TxGOOSE DST MAC setting.
RxGOOSE1 ETYPE APPID
Default: 0
If the value entered is non-zero, the APPID field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the
message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the value entered is zero, RxGOOSE1 does not check the value
received in the APPID field.
The setting needs to match the value of the publisher’s TxGOOSE ETYPE APPID setting.
5 RxGOOSE1 GoCBRef
Range: 0 to 129 alphanumeric, underscore, slash, and period characters, beginning with an alpha character
The gocbRef field of incoming GOOSE messages must match this value for the message to be accepted as a valid
RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1 is disabled. If not the empty string, the entry
needs to be an ACSI ObjectReference to the publishing control block in the format:
<LDName>/LLN0.<GoCBName>
where <LDName> is the function-related name if the logical device containing the publishing control block has "ldName"
configured, otherwise the product-related name of that logical device, and <GoCBName> is the name of the publishing
control block.
The T35 translates the ACSI format required for this setting to the MMS format used in GOOSE messages:
<LDName>/LLN0$GO$<GoCBName>
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series or later device, <LDName> is the value of the publisher's Master functional ldName
setting if that setting is not empty, otherwise it is the value of the publisher's IED NAME suffixed with "Master". If the
publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, <GoCBName> is "GoCB" suffixed with the two digit TxGOOSE instance number, for
example "GoCB01". If the publisher is a UR 7.4 series or later device, <GoCBName> is as specified earlier in the TxGOOSE
section of this chapter.
RxGOOSE1 datSet
Range: 0 to 32 alphanumeric and underscore characters, beginning with an alpha character
If the entered value has one or more characters, the datSet field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this
value prefixed by <LDName>/LLN0$ for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. <LDName> is as
specified in the RxGOOSE GoCBRef setting above. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1 does not check the
value received in the datSet field.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, set this setting to the value of the publisher's DataSetxx name setting, where xx
is the instance number of the data set selected by the publisher's TxGOOSE datSet setting. If the publisher is a UR 7.40
series or later device, datSet is as specified in the DataSets section of this chapter.

RxGOOSE1 ConfRev
Default: 1
If the value entered is non-zero, the confRev field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the
message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is zero, RxGOOSE1 does not check the value
received in the confRev field.
Set this setting to match the value of the publisher's TxGOOSE ConfRev setting.
R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE
Range: SSM, ASM, Unicast
Default: SSM
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise it selects the
R-GOOSE reception mode.
R-RxGOOSE RECEPTION MODE specifies the R-RxGOOSE DST IP range. When set to SSM, R-RxGOOSE DST IP must be in
the range of 232.0.0.1 to 232.255.255.255. When set to ASM, R-RxGOOSE DST IP must be in the range of 224.0.0.1 to
239.255.255.255, excluding the SSM range. Note that the SSM range is inside the ASM range and therefore the ASM use
excludes the SSM range. The default destination IP address 224.0.0.0 is reserved, and hence not a valid multicast IP
address.
The reception modes are related to Layer-3 R-GOOSE reception from routers/WAN. The subscription to multicasting of R-
GOOSE is supported using IGMP Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM). It is made available in either Source Specific
Multicast (SSM) mode or Any Source Multicast (ASM) mode. Unicast (over UDP) mode can also be used. In case of
multicasting (IGMPv3 based SSM or ASM), the R-GOOSE subscriber device requests the Last Hop Router (LHR) to
subscribe to a specific multicasting group.
If the publisher is using a unicast destination IP address for this R-GOOSE, then set R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE to 5
Unicast. Otherwise set R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE to the SSM or ASM mode used by the local routers/firewalls.
When the R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE is set to SSM or ASM, the T35 sends the IGMP join group report (source
specific in case of SSM) every 60 seconds and responds to IGMP general queries issued by the router.
R-RxGOOSE1 SRC IP
Default: 127.0.0.1
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. When the RxGOOSE1
MODE setting is R-GOOSE and the R-RxGOOSE RECEPTION MODE setting is ASM, the value of this setting is not used.
Otherwise the Source IP Address field of incoming R-GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the message to
be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. Set this setting to the value of the source IP address used by the publisher.
For UR publishers, this value is in setting PRT# IP ADDRESS.
The UR does not validate the address entered. The default IP address 127.0.0.1 is a reserved, not a valid IP address. Enter
a valid IP source address.
R-RxGOOSE1 DST IP
Default: 224.0.0.0
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise the
Destination IP Address field of incoming R GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the message to be
accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. Set this setting to the same value as the R-GOOSE publisher's Destination IP
Address. For UR publishers, this value is in setting R-TxGOOSE# DST IP.

The destination IP address needs to be a valid multicast or unicast IP address. The UR does not validate the address
entered. The default IP address 224.0.0.0 is reserved, and hence not a valid multicast IP address.
R-RxGOOSE1 SECURITY
Range: None, Signature, SignatureAndEncryption
Default: None
This setting specifies the level of security (authentication/encryption) used for RxGOOSE1. None indicates no security
mechanisms are in use. Signature indicates only signature (no encryption) is in use. SignatureAndEncryption indicates
that both signature and encryption are in use. Normally this setting is set to match the GOOSE publisher's security
method.
RxGOOSE1 Member 1
Range: End of List, BOOLEAN, INT8U, INT16U, INT32U, FLOAT32, INT32, Dbpos (DPS), Quality, TimeStamp, ENUM, STRUCT
Default: End of List
This setting specifies the type that the first member of incoming GOOSE messages must be for the message to be
accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. There are similar settings for each of the up to 64 members that the UR is able
to subscribe to in a given GOOSE message. The member before the first member setting set to "End of List" must be the
last member of the message for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series or later, set these settings to match the basic type of the members of the publisher's
data set selected by the publisher's TxGOOSE datSet setting.
If the publisher dataset includes members with structured data, that is, data attributes, sub-data objects, and/or data
attributes with sub-data attributes, configuration must use one of the UR Setup RxGOOSE Inputs pages. In this case the
Member setting displays as the product-related name used by the publishing IED of the data object or data attribute, in
standard SCSM format (e.g. Publisher1LD1/LLN0$ST$Off$stVal).
5 Note that a dataset can hold at most 256 basic data attribute values, and that a single structured data object or
attribute can contain multiple basic data attribute values. UR Setup software does not allow more than 256 basic data
attribute values to be entered, in which case the last several members settings cannot be changed from End of List.
Note that the publisher's name alone does not contain all the information required for subscription, additional publisher
information model information is stored elsewhere. For this reason, manual entry of the name is not supported.
When this setting is configured manually, "Struct" and "Enum" are not allowed for selection. However, those two
values are placeholders in the software, when the RxGOOSE1 Members are configured using the ADD IED (via
publisher SCL file) option in the RxGOOSE Boolean/DPS/Analog Inputs screen.
RxGOOSE inputs
The values received by RxGOOSE elements need to be converted to FlexLogic or FlexAnalog operands so that they can be
used by other UR elements. This conversion is done by RxGOOSE Boolean, RxGOOSE DPS, and RxGOOSE Analog elements.
Each RxGOOSE Boolean can convert the value of a specified Boolean value received by a specified RxGOOSE to a FlexLogic
operand. Each RxGOOSE DPS can convert the value of a specified Dbpos (Double bit position) value to four FlexLogic
operands, one for each of the four possible Dbpos states. Each RxGOOSE Analog can convert the value of a specified
FLOAT32, INT8U, INT16U, INT32U, INT32 and ENUM value to a FlexAnalog operand. Each of these operands reverts to its
default state when the RxGOOSE connectivity is lost. Other types of values can be present in subscribed GOOSE messages
but cannot be converted to operands.
When an RxGOOSE Input is mapped to a value in the GOOSE message, the associated q value is validated, if the q value is
included in that GOOSE message as part of the data object or if it is part of the same dataset. For such automatic mapping,
the index of associated quality value can be seen in the RxGOOSE Member field as read-only.
RxGOOSE Boolean, RxGOOSE DPS, and RxGOOSE Analog elements are mapped to various data objects in
<iedName>Master/GGIO3. This allows reading of their values via MMS and allows references to them in SCL files. GGIO3
has no settings, nor is it visible in the EnerVista UR Setup software. See the UR Family Communications Guide for more
information on GGIO3.

For each configured RxGOOSE Input, the UR monitors the associated quality attribute if available. An RxGOOSE Input
reverts to its configured default value as follows:
• If the validity bits of the quality attribute (q.validity) are invalid
• If the validity bits of the quality attribute are questionable
• If the test bit of the quality attribute is set and IED Mode is other than Test or Test-Blocked
When the IED Mode setting is Test or Test-Blocked, the q.test bit is not validated. That is, when the relay is in test or test-
blocked mode, the q.test = False is treated same as q.test = True.
When an RxGOOSE Boolean/DPS/Analog Input is mapped to a remote GOOSE message input using the publisher SCL file,
the UR automatically maps and monitors the associated quality member as follows:
• If the publisher dataset includes members with structured data
• If the publisher dataset includes data attributes and associated quality attribute is available in the same dataset (in
any sequence)
If the publisher dataset member that is mapped to RxGOOSE input is structured data, the quality attribute is embedded in
the same structure.
If the publisher dataset member that is mapped to RxGOOSE input is a data attribute, the UR scans the rest of the
attributes in that publisher dataset for a matching quality attribute.
Set up subscriptions
Subscriptions are configured in the RxGOOSE Boolean Inputs, DPS Inputs, and Analog Inputs panels.
There are Add IED and Remove IED buttons. The Add IED button allows SCL files to be used, including ICD, CID, and SCD
(supported in version 7.40 and later). With SCL file import, for Edition 1 the IP address in the ConnectedAP element must
match one IP address of the device, while for Edition 2 one of the three IP addresses in the ConnectedAP element must 5
match. When the file format is SCD, the system lists all IEDs inside the SCD file and lets the user select the ones to add. The
figure shows a selection being made by importing a CID file using the Add IED function.
The "Do NOT default Remote Input ID..." check box applies when configuring GOOSE subscription. It determines if the ID
field is retained or defaulted. When enabled, the ID is retained. When disabled, the ID is defaulted. For example, you
change the ID field from "RxG Bool1" to RxG Bool1west," and the change is retained when the check box is enabled. The
check box applies on drag-and-drop, manual configuration, manual deletion, deletion using the Remove IED button, and
when clicking the Default button in the RxGOOSE message panel. The Default and Reset buttons in the RxGOOSE Boolean
Inputs, DPS Inputs, and Analog Inputs panels default all settings in the panel, including the ID, regardless of the check box.
The check box is available for to UR version 7.4x and later devices.
To subscribe:
1. Click the Add IED button and import a file.
2. Expand the entries by clicking the + box.
3. Drag-and-drop an entry into a Subscribed to field. The software checks for duplicates.
Most of the settings are configured by drag-and-drop. Enter manually the ID, DEFAULT STATE, and EVENTS settings when
the factory default values are not acceptable.
In the example shown, all of the entries at the bottom of the screen have been added to the subscription column.

Figure 5-29: RxGOOSE subscription
RxGOOSE Boolean inputs
5 Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Boolean Inputs.
The number of RxGOOSE Boolean (remote inputs) is 256.
Figure 5-30: RxGOOSE Boolean Input panel (Edition 2)
As outlined earlier, most of the settings are configured by drag-and-drop. Enter manually the ID, DEFAULT STATE, and
EVENTS settings when the factory default values are not acceptable.

RxGOOSE Boolean1 ID
Range: 0 to 20 characters
Default: RxG Bool1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the name of the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. The full
operand name is the value of this setting appended with " On". The basic and enhanced front panels display the first 17
characters of this setting plus " On" to fit the 20 character display.
The setting value is auto-populated and read-only for quality mapped to a configured remote input.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the RxGOOSE containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. If set to
None, the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 Member
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. A setting of 1
selects the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of
members in the message and entering the number of a member which does not contain a BOOLEAN results in the
RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand assuming its default state. The Subscribed to column identifies the particular
Boolean subscribed to even if the member is a structure containing more than one Boolean.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 DEFAULT STATE
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
5
Default: Off
This setting selects the logic state for the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand if the UR has just completed startup and
the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, or the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the
publisher. The following choices are available:
– "On" value defaults the input to logic 1
– "Off" value defaults the input to logic 0
– "Latest/On" freezes the input in case of lost connectivity. If the latest state is unknown, such as after UR power-up
but before the first communication, the input defaults to logic 1. When communication resumes, the input
becomes fully operational.
– "Latest/Off" freezes the input in case of lost connectivity. If the latest state is unknown, such as after UR power-up
but before the first communication, the input defaults to logic 0. When communication resumes, the input
becomes fully operational.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting selects whether Off to On transitions of the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand are recorded by the event
recorder. If set to Enabled, Off to On transitions are recorded. On to Off transitions are never recorded, even if events are
enabled.
RxGOOSE DPS inputs

Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 618560 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE DPS Inputs.

Figure 5-31: RxGOOSE DPS Inputs panel (Edition 2)
5 EVENTS settings when the factory default values are not acceptable.
RxGOOSE DPS1 ID
Default: RxG DPS1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the names of the four RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operands. The
full operand name is the value of this setting appended with "Interm," "On," "Off," or "Bad." The basic and enhanced front
panels display the first 13 characters of this setting plus the state suffix to fit the 20 character display.
RxGOOSE DPS1 RxGOOSE
Default: None
This setting selects the GOOSE message containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand. If set to
None, the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE DPS1 Member
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand. A setting of 1 selects
the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of members in
the message and entering the number of a member that is not a Dbpos results in the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand
assuming its default state. In the case that the member is a structure containing more than one Dbpos, the Subscribed
to column identifies the particular Dbpos subscribed to.

RxGOOSE DPS1 DEFAULT STATE

Range: Intermediate-state, Off, On, Bad-state, Latest
Default: Latest
This setting selects the logic state for the data attribute @Master/GGIO3.IndPos01.stVal and the DPS FlexLogic operands
when the UR has just completed start-up and the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, and when the
RxGOOSE has lost its connection with the publisher. When this setting is selected to Latest, the value of @Master/
GGIO3.IndPosψψ.stVal is Intermediate-state when the UR has just completed start-up and the selected RxGOOSE has
not yet received a message, and the latest received value when the RxGOOSE loses its connectivity with the publisher.
RxGOOSE DPS1 EVENTS
Default: Disabled
This setting selects whether Off to On transitions of the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operands are recorded by the event
recorder. If set to Enabled, Off to On transitions are recorded. On to Off transitions are never recorded, even if events are
enabled.
RxGOOSE analog inputs

Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Analog Inputs.
There are 32 RxGOOSE analog inputs.
Figure 5-32: RxGOOSE Analog Inputs panel (Edition 2)
EVENTS settings when the factory default values are not acceptable.
RxGOOSE Analog1 ID
Default: RxG Analog1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to RxGOOSE Analog1. Unlike RxGOOSE Booleans and RxGOOSE
DPS, the RxGOOSE Analog operands have fixed names, for example RxGOOSE Analog1.

RxGOOSE Analog1 RxGOOSE

Default: None
This setting selects the GOOSE message that drives the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand. If set to None, the
RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE Analog1 Member
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand. A setting of 1
selects the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of
members in the message and entering the number of a member that does not contain a FLOAT32, INT8U, INT16U,
INT32U, INT32, or ENUM results in the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand assuming its default state. The Subscribed
to column identifies the particular FLOAT32 subscribed to even if the member is a structure containing more than one
FLOAT32.
RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT
Range: -1000000.000 to 1000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1000.000
This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the
publisher and the RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT MODE is set to "Default Value." Otherwise this setting has no effect. This
setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all
possible values can be stored. Some values can be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT MODE
Range: Default Value, Last Known
5 Default: Default Value
When the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the publisher and this setting is "Last Known," the value of the
RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexLogic operand remains at the last received value. When the selected RxGOOSE has lost its
connectivity with the publisher and this setting value is "Default Value," then the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexLogic operand is
defined by the RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT setting. After restart, until a message is received, the operand value is the
default value.
RxGOOSE Analog1 UNITS
Range: up to 4 characters
This setting specifies a four-character string that is used in the actual values display of RxGOOSE Analog1.
RxGOOSE Analogs are floating-point values, with no units. The RxGOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to
configure RxGOOSE Analog, so that it can be used in a FlexElement.
RxGOOSE Analogs that represent current, voltage, power, frequency, angles, or power factor can be used in a
FlexElement. The following text must be used in the UNITS setting, to represent these types of analogs: A, V, W, var, VA,
Hz, deg, and no text (blank setting) for power factor.
RxGOOSE Analogs can be compared to other RxGOOSE Analogs with any character string or no string.
RxGOOSE Analog1 PU Base in kilo
Range: 0.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1.000
This setting specifies the per-unit base value for other T35 features to use with the RxGOOSE Analog 1 FlexAnalog
operand. A FlexElement for instance subtracts two quantities after converting their values to integers rescaled to a
common base, the common base being the largest of the base values of the two quantities. If one of quantities is
RxGOOSE Analog1 and its per-unit base value is not appropriate, the rescaling operation can result in unnecessary loss
of precision or overflow in the integer result. The FlexElement Base Units table in the Settings > FlexLogic > FlexElements
section later, which tabulates the per-unit base value used by its pickup setting and implies the per-unit base used by
other FlexAnalogs, can be of use in selecting a value for the RxGOOSE Analog1 PU setting.

Some UR elements have requirements for the type of input operands, for instance current type or voltage type. These
elements assume that RxGOOSE Analog operands are of whatever type is necessary to meet these requirements.
The per-unit base setting represents thousands, not single units. For example, a PU base of 1.000 is actually 1000 and a
PU base of 0.001 is 1.
When using RxGOOSE Analogs and PU base in FlexElements, the largest value that can be displayed in the FlexElement
actual values is 2,140,000.000.
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expression
Range: None, Equal to, Not Equal to, Greater than, Less than
Default: None
This setting specifies the expression type to be used with the RxGOOSE Analog In1 FlexAnalog operand. The result of the
expression is converted into Boolean status and assigned to the RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St operand. When the
expression result is true, RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St operand is set. When the expression set to None, no expression is
assigned and RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St is always in reset state.
When the expression is set to other than "None", RxGOOSE Analog In1 is compared with the configured Expression value
based on the selected Expression type.
When the remote signal type is "Float," the "Equal to" and "Not Equal to" expressions may not give accurate results
due to precision errors in decimals.
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expression Value

Range: -1000000.000 to 1000000 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting specifies the Expression value for comparison.
5
Reports
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports.
Report settings
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports > Report Settings.
ReportSettings rptID
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the RptID attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false. The RptID is the name of the report.
ReportSettings optFields
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the OptFlds attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false.
ReportSettings bufTime
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the BufTm attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
ReportSettings trgOps
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the TrgOps attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS

ReportSettings intgPd
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the IntgPd attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
4.14.4ClientLN Configuration
Following ClientLN configuration screen is only available using Setup tool. They also can be configured in the
software using a CID or SCD file.
PATH: SETTINGS > IEC 61850 > Reports > Report Settings
Figure 5-33: IEC 61850 buffered report pane
Note that the following settings are not front panel accessible and only Enervista or other CID configurable
softwares.
Client Configuration
The button Import SCL allows to select a CID or a SCD file with Client IED configuration. When a SCL file is selected, a
window with the data model of all the IEDs available in the SCL file are displayed. When any Logical Node is selected,
the Data model and the authentication settings of the corresponding IED are auto-populated.
IED Name
Range: 64 Alphanumeric Characters and "-"
The setting specifies the name of the Client IED where the ClientLN resides. IED name must be set, if the Client is
configured to any Report.
apRef
Range: 32 Alphanumeric Characters
The name of the access point via which the IED shall be accessed. Optional, not needed
if the IED has only one access point.
LD Inst


The instance identification of the LD where the LN resides. If not configured, LD0 is populated as LDInst in SCL files.
LN Prefix
LN Class
Range: Any LN Class as defined in IEC 61850-7-4
The LN class according to IEC 61850-7-4 or domain specific standards.
LNInst
Range: 0-9, Max 12 digits
The instance id of this LN instance of below LN class in the IED
IP
Range: Dotted decimal IP address
Default: 127.0.0.0
Client IP address.
PSEL
Range : Any 8 Octet non-empty, even number of characters, maximum 16 characters 0-9, A-F
Default: 00 00 00 01
Presentation Selector.
SSEL 5
Default: 00 01
Session Selector.
TSEL
Default: 00 01
Transport Selector.
AP Title
Range : Any digit comma separated decimal digits and non-repeating commas
Default: 1,1,9999,1
AP Title.
AE Qualifier
Range : 0- 65535
Default: 12
AE Qualifier.
AE Invoke ID
Range : 0- 65535
Default: 1
AE Invoke ID.
AP Invoke ID
Range : 0- 65535
Default: 1
AP Invoke ID.

Buffered and unbuffered reports

Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports > Buffered Reports or Unbuffered
Reports.
Figure 5-34: IEC 61850 buffered report panel
IEC 61850 reports are an efficient method used to deliver generic substation event information from a single server, such
as a B30), to a single client, such as a supervisory control IED. Reports are either buffered or unbuffered. Each configured
report provides a report control block (rcb) that allows the client to control the flow of reports from the B30 IED. The
following table lists the number of IEC 61850 report control blocks of each type provided by the B30.
Each report control uses an IEC 61850 dataset to determine the data that will be reported. Buffered report elements queue
value changes that occur while the client is offline and will be delivered when the client re-connects. Up to 512 events can
be queued. Unbuffered control blocks purge all value change events when the connection to the client is lost; any events
that occur while the client is not connected are lost.
Table 5-8: Number of report control blocks
Number
Buffered reports 30
Unbuffered reports 18

When using IEC 61850 Edition 2, configurable Reports interoperate with any client device of any manufacturer that
conforms to the IEC 61850 Edition 1 or 2 report client requirements.
When using IEC 61850 Edition 1, configurable Reports interoperate with any client device of any manufacturer that
conforms to the IEC 61850 Edition 1 report client requirements.
The entities whose values are reported by a Configurable Report are known as members. The members are itemized in an
ordered list known as a data set. Each Configurable Report can use any one of the data sets provided.
Each enabled Configurable Report transmits an update to its client whenever a value change is detected in one or more of
its members. Also, the control block can be configured to send integrity reports containing the present value of all
members either on demand from the client or periodically. A TCP handshaking mechanism causes messages that are not
read and acknowledged by the client to be retransmitted.
For a Configurable Report to operate, its members must be selected (that is, its data set configured) and a client must open
a connection to, configure, and enable its report control block. Control blocks and data sets can be pre-configured by
sending the T35 a CID file. See the UR Family Communications Guide for details. EnerVista UR Setup also can be used to
select the data set members and to pre-configure the control blocks.
Each buffered report has the following settings.
Buffered Report1 RptID
The name of the report. The entered value sets the RptID value in Buffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by the
client to discriminate Buffered Report1 messages from other messages. If the number of characters entered is zero, the
value used for RptID in messages is an ObjectReference to the report's control block, that is, "<LDName>/
LLN0$BR$"BRCB01".
Buffered Report1 Name
5
Default: BRCB01
The entered value sets the report control block name value for Buffered Report1.
Buffered Report1 DatSet
Range: None, TT6DataSet1, TT6 DataSet2, …, TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the data set whose members' status is reported in Buffered Report1 messages using the UR Setup
software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as
described later.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the data
set name, is used in the datSet field of report messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate Buffered Report1
messages from other messages.
The performance of the report is determined by the performance of the selected dataset. When the selection is
To configure a DataSet, select it at the top of the window from the drop-down list, for example DataSet02 shown in the
previous figure. In the lower part of the window, drag and drop configuration items to the right side. For example select
the ST Ind001 stVal item and drag it to DataSet Member 1. Dataset members configured here affect other Report or
TxGOOSE control blocks that use the same DataSet.
Buffered Report1 ConfRev
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in Buffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by clients to discriminate
report messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRev be incremented each time the members or the order of the members is changed, and each time the data
set name is changed. The standard states that the value of 0 is reserved.

Buffered Report1 OptFlds

Range: The check box for each individual bit can be enabled or not (see figure)
Default: All bits enabled/ true
The OptFlds setting is bitstring that controls which of the optional fields are included in report messages. The figure
shows the available option bits. To reduce message size, uncheck any fields that are not needed.
Figure 5-35: Options for buffered report messages (Edition 2)
Buffered Report1 BufTm

Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the time interval in milliseconds for the buffering of events for inclusion in a single report.
Buffered Report1 TrgOps
5 Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits enabled / true
The TrgOps setting is bitstring that controls which trigger conditions are monitored in this report. The options are as
follows. Uncheck any trigger conditions that are not needed.
– data-change
– quality-change
– integrity
– general interrogation (IEC 61850 Edition 2)
Buffered Report1 IntgPd
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the period in milliseconds for generating Buffered Report1 integrity reports. An integrity report
includes the values of all members of the referenced data set, whether a change has occurred or not.
Buffered Report1 ClientLN
Range: None, Dynamic list of configured ClientLNs
Default: None
The ClientLN setting specifies the name of the LN in the system, which is a client to the Buffered Report1. The ClientLN
is the LN object reference from the list of configured client list, <LDName>/<LN Prefix><LN Class><LN inst>.
For Ex: DUMMYclientLD0/LLN0 or DUT1CR5/LLN0
Each unbuffered report has the following settings.

Unbuffered Report1 RptID

The name of the report. The entered value sets the RptID value in Unbuffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by
the client to discriminate Unbuffered Report1 messages from other messages. If the number of characters entered is
zero, the value used for RptID in messages is an ObjectReference to the report's control block, that is, "<LDName>/
LLN0$RP$"URCB01".
Unbuffered Report1 Name
Range: 0 up to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: URCB01
The entered value sets the report control block name value for Unbuffered Report1.
Unbuffered Report1 DatSet
Range: None, TT6DataSet1, TT6 DataSet2, …, TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the data set whose members' status is reported in Unbuffered Report1 messages using the UR Setup
software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as
described later.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the data
set name, is used in the datSet field of report messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate Unbuffered
Report1 messages from other messages.
The performance of the report is determined by the performance of the selected dataset. When the selection is
Unbuffered Report1 ConfRev
5
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in Unbuffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by clients to discriminate
report messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRev be incremented each time the members or the order of the members is changed, and each time the data
set name is changed. The standard states that the value of 0 is reserved.
Unbuffered Report1 OptFlds
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
The OptFlds setting is bitstring that controls which of the optional fields are included in report messages. The options are
as follows. To reduce message size, uncheck any fields that are not needed.
– sequence-number
– report-time-stamp
– reason-for-inclusion
– data-set-name
– data-reference
– conf-revision
For IEC 61850 Edition 2, the OptFlds bits buffer-overflow and entryID also listed are not applicable to unbuffered reports
even though the bits exist in the protocol. They are unchecked by default.
For IEC 61850 Edition 1, the entryID also listed is not applicable to unbuffered reports even though the bits exist in the
protocol. It is unchecked by default.
Unbuffered Report1 BufTm
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the time interval in milliseconds for the buffering of events for inclusion into a single report.

Unbuffered Report1 TrgOps

Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
The TrgOps setting is bitstring that controls which trigger conditions are monitored in this report. The options are as
follows. Uncheck any trigger conditions that are not needed.
– data-change
– quality-change
– integrity
– general interrogation (IEC 61850 Edition 2)
Unbuffered Report1 IntgPd
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the period in milliseconds for generating Unbuffered Report1 integrity reports. An integrity report
includes the values of all members of the referenced data set, whether a change has occurred or not.
Unbuffered Report1 ClientLN
Range: None, Dynamic list of configured ClientLNs
Default: None
The ClientLN setting specifies the name of the LN in the system, which is a client to the Unbuffered Report1. The ClientLN
is the LN object reference from the list of configured client list, <LDName>/<LN Prefix><LN Class><LN inst>.
For Ex: DUMMYclientLD0/LLN0 or DUT1CR5/LLN0
5 DataSets
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > DataSets.
As outlined, the members whose values are communicated by these services are itemized in an ordered list known as a
data set. Each UR with the IEC 61850 option has 18 data sets (six fast and 12 slow). Each data set can contain as many as
192 members. Any data set can be used simultaneously by any number of TxGOOSE elements and/or by any number of
Configurable Report elements.

Figure 5-36: IEC 61850 DataSets (Edition 2)
5
UR Setup software requires data set members to be IEC 61850 data objects or data attributes with Functional Constraint
ST or MX. Certain FlexLogic and FlexAnalog operands have factory-assigned data attributes as tabulated in the UR Family
Communications Guide. All FlexLogic and FlexAnalog operands can be user-assigned to GGIO1 or GGIO4 data attributes,
so that operands without factory-assigned data attributes can still have their values published. See the GGIO1 and GGIO4
sections later for details.
Datasets used by TxGOOSE1, TxGOOSE2, and/or by reports also provide a chatter suppression service for their Boolean
members. Oscillation in a value, also known as chatter, can be caused by errors in logic programming, inadequate
hysteresis (deadband) on a threshold, or a failed station component. Chatter can flood a communications network with
GOOSE messages, degrading response time for all users. If chatter is detected in a Boolean member, TxGOOSE suspends
GOOSE event message triggering and report message triggering from that member for as long as the condition exists, and
for a minimum period of one second. While sending is suspended, a self-test message identifying the specific data item
detected as oscillating is activated.
For a summary of the panels in which the data sets are used, the path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications >
IEC 61850 > DataSets > Summary.
For the settings, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > DataSets > TT6DataSet1 for the
first data set.
Copy and paste functions are available when right-clicking a DataSet. They allow the target dataset to be configured
based on its order code. If some dataset items are not supported, they are not pasted, and a warning message shows a list
of dataset items that were not supported and not pasted. The DataSet name is not copied or pasted. In short, use this
feature to copy a DataSet Member setting and paste it into another Member setting, a text file, or Word, as examples.

Figure 5-37: Member right-click
5 DataSet01 name
Default: DataSet01
The value entered sets the name of the data set, which is required to be unique within the UR for proper operation. The
value entered sets the name of the data set, which is required to be unique within the UR for proper operation. Fast
datasets start with TT6, and slow datasets start with TT3. Up to six fast datasets are allowed. Up to four fast GOOSE
datasets are allowed.
An ObjectReference to the data set consists of a string that is the concatenation of "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the
DataSet01 name setting value. An ObjectReference to the data set is published in the datSet field of TxGOOSE messages,
and it can be used by subscribers to discriminate the messages of that TxGOOSE from other GOOSE messages. An
ObjectReference to the data set is optionally published in the DatSet field of Report messages. Valid characters are
upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a letter.
DataSet01 No. of DAs
Range: 32, 48, 64, 96, 128, 192
Default: 64
The maximum number of DAs that can be configured in this data set.
DataSet01 No. of Das configured
Range: actual number of DAs configured
Default: 0
The actual number of DAs currently configured in this data set.
DataSet01 shared by
Default:
Names of all control blocks that use this DataSet. Read-only field.

DataSet01 Member1
Range: End of List or any instantiated 61850 data object or data attribute with Functional Constraint ST or MX
Default: End of List
This setting specifies the first member in TxGOOSE1 messages. There is a similar setting for each of the up to 64
members that the UR allows in a Dataset. Only values of members before the first set to End of List are published.
Select the member from the drop-down list. Or right-click an entry to copy, paste, delete, or insert.
Product setup
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Product Setup.
Security
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Product Setup > Security.
Figure 5-38: IEC 61850 Security
SecGSAL1.SecDataClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to clear security data via commands to
SecGSAL1.SecDataClr. "sbo" here is select-before-operate.
SecGSAL1.OpCntRs ctlModel
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to clear security data via commands to SecGSAL1.OpCntRs.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate.
Demand
Deadband parameters of measured values related to the Demand metering are configured here.
Energy
Deadband parameters of measured values related to the Energy metering are configured here.

Real Time Clock

Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Product Setup > Real Time Clock.
Figure 5-39: IEC 61850 Real Time Clock
TmClkLTMS1.TmnsDelta.db
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 %
5 Default: 0.000 %
This setting is a deadband setting and is used by the relay to determine when to update the "mag" and "cVal" values
from the associated "instMag" and "instCVal" values. The value shall represent the percentage of difference between
maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%. The minimum and maximum values for TmnsDelta data object are
-500000000 ns and 500000000 ns respectively and for example, a setting value of 0.002% results in the dead banded
value of (500000000 - (-500000000)) * 0.002 / 100 = 20000 ns. The default setting value of 0.000% does not update the
"mag" and "cVal" values.
Deadband settings
A deadband is a range in which no action occurs, usually expressed as a percentage.
The IEC 61850 panels contain hundreds of deadband settings, such as in the following panels: Product Setup > Real Time
Clock, FlexLogic, Control Elements, and GGIO4. Each panel is not outlined here. The FlexLogic category applies to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
Deadband setting names all end either with "DB" or .db. As they all work the same way, but each on a different analog
value, a single description applicable to all deadband settings is given here. The analog value that each deadband setting
applies is usually obvious from the name of the setting. However, a tabulation of the analog values and their associated
deadband setting can be found in the UR Family Communications Guide.

Figure 5-40: Deadband settings with .db suffix (Edition 2)
GOOSE, buffered report, and unbuffered report messages are for the most part transmitted only when there is a value
change in one or more of their members. Most analog values continuously dither by an amount that is not significant.
Were a report to be sent each time an insignificant analog value change occurred, then the communications network
floods with GOOSE and report messages, degrading response time for all users.
To control this, a deadband setting is provided for each analog value. Also, in addition to the present actual value of each
analog ("instMag" in the following figure), there is a deadbanded value ("mag" in the figure), which is updated with the
present value only when the difference between the two exceeds the deadband setting (db in the figure). Changes to this
5
deadbanded value trigger transmissions when included in GOOSE and report data sets.
Figure 5-41: Deadband settings
Deadband settings are entered in UR Setup software in units of percent of the difference between the "max." and "min." of
the associated analog value. A zero deadband setting suppresses transmission triggering. The range of deadband settings
is 0.000 to 100.000% in steps of 0.001. The default value is 100.000%.
GGIO4 elements have individual settings for "min." and "max." The min. and max. for FlxEIGAPC#.OpSig.db (FLEXELEMENT #
OpSig) are -50 pu and +50 pu respectively. The min. value for all other quantities is 0. The max. values are as follows:
• Phase current — 46 x phase CT primary setting
• Neutral current — 46 x ground CT primary setting
• Ground current (sensitive ground CT) — 4.6 x sensitive ground CT primary setting
• Phase, phase-to-phase, and sequence voltage — 275 x phase VT ratio setting
• Auxiliary voltage — 275 x auxiliary VT ration setting
• Power (real, reactive, apparent, 3-phase, and 1-phase) — 4 × phase CT primary setting × 1.5 × VT Secondary setting ×
VT ratio setting

• Energy (real or imaginary) — 4 × phase CT primary setting × 1.5 × VT Secondary setting × VT ratio setting x 1 hour
• Frequency — 90 Hz
• Frequency rate of change — 90 Hz/s
• Power factor — 2
• Angle — 360 degrees
• Starts per hour lockout time - 60 minutes
• Time between starts lockout time - 300 minutes
• Restart delay lockout time - 50000 seconds
• Thermal lockout time - 65000 minutes
• Total motor lockout time - 65000 minutes
• Thermal lockout time - 65000 minutes
Select the deadband settings from knowledge of the characteristics of the power system quantity measured and
knowledge of the demands of the applications receiving the measurement via GOOSE or report such that changes of
significance to the application are promptly reported, yet the network is not overly burdened with event messages.
Signal sources
Deadband parameters of measured values related to the signal sources are configured here.
Breakers
5 The UR breaker control and status monitoring elements have certain settings that configure how the IEC 61850 protocol
interacts with these elements. These settings are described in this section. See the Breakers section in the System Setup
section of this chapter for details on the operation of breaker control elements.
Navigate to Settings > Communications > IEC 61850 > System Setup > Breakers > Breaker 1 to access the settings that
configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface with the first breaker control and status monitoring element. The settings and
functionality for the others are similar.
Figure 5-42: IEC 61850 Breaker panel (Edition 2)

XCBR1 TagOn ctlModel

Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-with-
enhanced-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the XCBR logical
node. The IEC 61850 client must issue the control request on TagOn data object as per the selected control mode, in
order to tag/remove the tag on respective breaker element.
XCBR1 Pos ctlModel
enhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signal marked
Bkr0XCBR1.Pos.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control while
the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the UR reports to the client the breaker 1 position at
the end of the command sequence.
XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to breaker 1 signal marked
Bkr0XCBR1.Pos.ctlVal in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when XCBR1 Pos ctlModel is
sbo-with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
XCBR1 BlkOpn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security 5
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic. This signal when true blocks breaker 1 trip control while the
operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
XCBR1 BlkCls ctlModel
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.ctlVal signal on the Breaker Control Logic. This signal when true blocks breaker 1 close control while
CSWI1 CmdBlk ctlModel
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for CmdBlk DataObjects in the CSWI logical
node.
CSWI1 Pos ctlModel
enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signals marked
BkrCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control while

CSWI1 Pos sboTimeout

Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to breaker 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos in
order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when CSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normal-
security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
CSWI1 Pos operTimeout
Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 0.100 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between an operate command to breaker 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos until
BkrCSWI1.Pos.stVal enters the commanded state. The command terminates if the commanded state is not reached in
the set time.
CSWI1 BlkOpn ctlModel
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for BlkOpn DataObjects in the CSWI logical
node.
CSWI1 BlkCls ctlModel
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for BlkCls DataObjects in the CSWI logical
5 node.
CSWI1 TagOn ctlModel
enhanced-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the CSWI logical
order to tag/remove the tag on respective breaker element.
Switches
The UR disconnect switch control and status monitoring elements have certain settings that configure how the IEC 61850
protocol interacts with these elements. These settings are described in this section. See the Settings > System Setup >
Disconnect Switches section later in this chapter for details on the operation of the disconnect switch control elements.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > System Setup > Switches > Switch 1 to access
the settings that configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface with the first disconnect switch control and status monitoring
element. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.

Figure 5-43: Switch panel
Disc0XSWI1 TagOn ctlModel

enhanced-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the XSWI logical 5
order to tag/remove the tag on respective switch element.
XSWI1 Pos ctlModel
enhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signal marked
Disc0XCBR1.Pos.ctlVal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram. These signals force a disconnect switch trip or close
control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the T35 reports to the client the disconnect switch 1
position the end of the command sequence.
XSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to disconnect switch 1 signal
marked Disc0XCBR1.Pos.ctlVal in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when XSWI1 Pos
ctlModel is sbo-with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
Disc0XSWI1 BlkOpn ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signal marked
DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal signal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System Setup section later. This
signal when true blocks disconnect switch 1 trip control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is
not active.

Disc0XSWI1 BlkCls ctlModel

DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal signal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System Setup section later. This
signal when true blocks disconnect switch 1 close control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND
is not active.
DiscCSWI1 Pos ctlModel
enhanced-security
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram. These signals force a disconnect switch trip or close
control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
DiscCSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to disconnect switch 1 via
DiscCSWI1.Pos in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when CSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-
with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
DiscCSWI1 Pos operTimeout
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 5.000 s
5 This setting specifies the maximum time between an operate command to disconnect switch 1 via DiscCSWI1.Pos until
DiscCSWI1.Pos.stVal enters the commanded state. The command terminates if the commanded state is not reached in
the set time.
DiscCSWI1 TagOn ctlModel
enhanced-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the CSWI logical
order to tag/remove the tag on the respective switch element.
Setting Groups
The UR implements a setting groups element as detailed in the Control Elements > Setting Groups section of this chapter.
The active setting group and the setting group open for edits can be selected via MMS commands SelectActiveSG and
SelectEditSG. The setting related to these IEC 61850 commands are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Control Elements > Setting Groups to access
the setting that configures the IEC 61850 setting group commands.

Figure 5-44: Setting Groups panel (Edition 2)
Initial Setting Group

Default: 1
The entered value sets the initial value of the non-volatile register normally controlled by the service SelectActiveSG. This
initialization occurs only on the UR reboot immediately following the receipt of a valid CID file.
This setting is not mapped into the IEC 61850 information model, but sets the value of SettingControl element attribute
actSG in SCL files.
5
The Initial Setting Group value is initialized when Control Elements > Setting Groups > Control Mode is set to
"IEC61850 Client." When Control Elements > Setting Groups > Control Mode is set to "Local," the Initial Setting Group
value is ignored, and the priority scheme selects the Active setting group immediately after initialization.
Commands
The UR implements a number of clear records commands as detailed in the Commands and Targets chapter of this
manual. Several of these commands also can be issued via IEC 61850. The settings related to these IEC 61850 commands
are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Settings for Commands to access the settings
that configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface for record clear commands. The content varies with relay capability.

Figure 5-45: Commands panel (Edition 2)
UFltRptRFLO1.RsStat.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR FAULT REPORTS. "sbo"
5 here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the T35 reports to the client the breaker 1 position at the
end of the command sequence.
LLN0.EvtRcdClr.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR EVENT RECORDS.
LPHD1.RsStat.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS.
LPHD1.Sim.ctlModel
This is a command that can be issued via MMS client to enable simulation mode in the relay.
Enabling the SIM CTRL VIA MMS setting allows this MMS command to be accepted by the relay.
LPHD1.TxGoSim.ctlModel
This MMS command enables TxGOOSE sim Mode.
The sim attribute is set to TRUE in the published GOOSE frames from the relay so that the UR plays the simulator role
during the testing and commissioning phases.
OscRDRE1.RcdTrg.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command FORCE TRIGGER.

OscRDRE1.MemClr.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY.
DatLogRDRE1.MemClr.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR DATA LOGGER.
CBArc0SCBR1.MemClr.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ARC AMPS 1.
DmdMtrMMTR1.RsStat.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR DEMAND.
EnrMtrMMTR1.RsStat.ctlModel
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ENERGY.
GGIO1
GGIO1 is a logical node that allows up to 128 UR FlexLogic operands to be user-mapped to IEC 61850 information model
5
data attributes.
For the value of a FlexLogic operand to be read via MMS, included in TxGOOSE messages, or included in buffered/
unbuffered reports, the value must be assigned to a data attribute. GGIO1 allows those FlexLogic operands that have not
yet been factory-assigned to a data attribute to be user-assigned to a generic data attribute, and thus have their values
included in IEC 61850 communications.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO1 to access the settings for GGIO1.
Figure 5-46: IEC 61850 GGIO1 panel (Edition 2)

GGIO1 INDICATION 1
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects the FlexLogic operand whose value is mapped into the IEC 61850 data attribute
<LDName>/GGIO1.Ind001.stVal. See the FlexLogic section in this chapter for a list of FlexLogic operands.
GGIO1 INDICATION 2
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
Selects the FlexLogic operand mapped to <LDName>/GGIO1.Ind002.stVal, and so on.
GGIO2
Virtual Inputs are controllable FlexLogic operands that can be controlled via IEC 61850 commands to GGIO2, by DNP, by
Modbus, and by the UR front panel. The settings related to these IEC 61850 commands are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO2 to access the settings that
configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface for Virtual Input commands.
Figure 5-47: GGIO2 panel (Edition 2)
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1...128 CTLMODEL

This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control Virtual Input 1...128. “sbo” here is select-
before-operate.
In firmware version 8.40 and above, GGIO2 dual control point numbers 01 to 64 have been introduced. DPCSO1 to
DPCSO64 are double control points mapped to the Virtual operate pairs and operate on pairs of Virtual Inputs. One Virtual
input of the pair is set to “1” and the other Virtual input of the pair is set to “0”, so DPCSO01 would be mapped to Virtual
input pair 1,2, for example and DPCSO02 would be mapped to Virtual inputs pair 3,4.
Typical application of DPCSO is when the external client sends dual-point command, for example, point-1 command to
block a function; point-2 command to unblock a function. This point-1 command will correspond to first virtual input to be
“1” and second to be “0”; similarly, if point-2 command is received, the first virtual input set to “0”, and second input to be
“1”.

When both DPCSO control points are set to “0” (false condition), no application action is triggered.
GGIO2 CF DPCSO 1...64 CTLMODEL

This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control Dual Point Control 1...64. “sbo” here is
select-before-operate.
GGIO4
GGIO4 is a logical node that allows up to 32 UR FlexAnalog operands to be user-mapped to an IEC 61850 information
model data attribute.
For the value of a FlexAnalog operand to be read via MMS, included in TxGOOSE messages, or included in buffered/
unbuffered reports, the value must be assigned to a data attribute. GGIO4 allows those FlexAnalog operands that have not
yet been factory-assigned to a data attribute to be user-assigned to a generic data attribute, and thus have their values
included in IEC 61850 communications.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO4 > GGIO4.AnIn1 to access the
settings for the first GGIO4 value. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
Figure 5-48: GGIO4 panel (Edition 2)
ANALOG IN 1 VALUE
Range: any FlexAnalog operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects the FlexAnalog operand whose value is mapped into the IEC 61850 data attribute
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. The value of the FlexAnalog operand is converted automatically to the format and
scaling required by the standard, that is to say primary amperes, primary volts, and so on. See Appendix A for a list of
FlexAnalog operands.
ANALOG IN 1 DB
Range: 0.000 to 100.000% in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000%
This setting specifies the deadband for the ANALOG IN 1 VALUE. The deadband is used to determine when to update the
deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between
the "max." and "min." values. Here, the "max." and "min." are as specified by the settings ANALOG IN 1 MAX and ANALOG IN
1 MIN.

See the Deadband Settings section earlier for a description of deadbanded values.
ANALOG IN 1 MIN
Default: 0.000
This setting specifies the "min." value used in deadband calculations. The scaling of this setting is the same as used by
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of
the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values are rounded to the closest possible
floating point number.
ANALOG IN 1 MAX
Default: 1000000.000
This setting specifies the "max." value used in deadband calculations. The scaling of this setting is the same as used by
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of
the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values are rounded to the closest possible
floating point number.
File transfer by IEC 61850

The T35 supports file transfer by IEC 61850. The approach is as follows, using the SISCO AX-S4 61850 client software as an
example.
1. In the AX-S4 61850 Explorer window, click the Tools menu and access the SISCO File Transfer Utility.
2. Select the Remote AR Name from the drop-down list. Available files appear in the File Specification area on the right
side of the window.
5 3. With the Copy option active, select a file to transfer and click the Go button. The file is copied and displays in the Local
list on the left side of the window.
4. Repeat the process to transfer any other files.
Figure 5-49: File transfer by IEC 61850

5.3.5.13 Legacy fixed GOOSE

"Fixed GOOSE" is a proprietary, non-standard variation of GSSE/GOOSE used in older UR versions. It uses IEC 61850 GSSE
data structures (now deprecated) with modern GOOSE services (including VLAN and priority tagging). Fixed GOOSE is an
intermediate step between GSSE and GOOSE. It is not recommended for new designs, but may be appropriate where
legacy URs are currently configured to use it.
Legacy fixed GOOSE was supported by UR relays with firmware version 7.20 and below. With the introduction of IEC 61850
Edition 2 in firmware version 7.30, support for the legacy fixed GOOSE protocol was discontinued and UR relays with
version 7.30 through 8.30 cannot communicate with relays running firmware version 7.2x and below using the legacy
fixed GOOSE. Firmware version 8.40 re-introduces support for the legacy fixed GOOSE. UR relays with firmware version
8.40 and up can communicate to the legacy UR relays (firmware version 7.2x and below) using fixed GOOSE and to relays
with newer firmware using configurable GOOSE.
The fixed GOOSE publisher and subscriber functionality is proprietary to GE Grid Solutions, although it does use a similar
GOOSE message structure to that specified in IEC 61850 8-1. It is used for implementations that require GOOSE data
transfer between UR IEDs. Unlike regular GOOSE, the dataset transferred using the fixed GOOSE contains the DNA and
UserSt bit pairs. The FlexLogic operands that determine the state of the DNA and UserSt bit pairs are configurable via
settings, but the fixed GOOSE dataset always contains the same DNA and UserSt data structure. For fixed GOOSE
subscription, the configuration of remote devices and remote inputs is outside the IEC 61850 screen.

Publisher settings
Figure 5-50: Fixed GOOSE Tx configuration
DEFAULT UPDATE TIME

Default: 60 s
Sets the time between fixed GOOSE messages when there are no DNA and UserSt bit pair state changes to be sent.
When DNA and UserSt data changes, fixed GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This setting specifies the steady-
state heartbeat time interval.
GOOSE FUNCTION
Default: Disabled
This setting enables or disables the sending of fixed GOOSE messages.

GOOSE ID
Range: 65-character ASCII string
Default: GOOSEOut
This setting represents the IEC 61850 GOOSE application ID (GoID) name string sent as part of fixed GOOSE message.
This string uniquely identifies the GOOSE message at the receiving device.
DESTINATION MAC
Range: any 12-digit multicast MAC value
Default: 01 00 00 00 00 00
This setting specifies the Ethernet destination Media Access Control (MAC) address in published fixed GOOSE messages.
The destination MAC address must be a multicast address. The second digit of the first octet must be an odd number.
Transmitted messages will have the multicast bit set to TRUE.
GOOSE VLAN PRIORITY
Default: 4
This setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than
other Ethernet data. Network devices may forward a message with a higher priority value before a message with a
lower priority value, which can expedite the delivery of high priority messages on heavily loaded networks.
GOOSE VLAN ID
Default: 0
The entered value sets the VID value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published fixed GOOSE messages. VID may
be used by network devices to direct messages to only selected devices, reduces the network burden.
GOOSE ETYPE APPID
Default: 0
The entered value sets the APPID value in published fixed GOOSE messages and is used by subscribers to discriminate
between other fixed GOOSE messages.
DNA Bit pairs

Remote outputs DNA bit pairs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into fixed GOOSE messages that are transmitted to
remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic
operand selected using the DNA bit pair.
DNA-1 OPERAND
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
DNA-1 EVENTS
Default: Disabled
UserSt Bit Pairs

Remote outputs UserSt bit pairs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into fixed GOOSE messages that are transmitted
to remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific
FlexLogic operand selected using the UserSt bit pair.

UserSt-1 OPERAND
Range: Any FlexLogic operand
Default: Off
UserSt-1 EVENTS
Default: Disabled
Subscriber settings
Figure 5-51: Fixed GOOSE Rx configuration
Remote Devices
A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages originating from the remote devices using the remote devices
and remote input settings.

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID
Range: Up to 65 alphanumeric characters
Default: Remote Device 1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote device.
REMOTE DEVICE 1 DST MAC
Range: Any 12-digit hexadecimal number
Default: 00 00 00 00 00 00
This setting identifies the destination MAC address of the received GOOSE message. This setting must match the value of
the publisher's DESTINATION MAC. Fixed GOOSE messages having destination MAC address equal to this value are
accepted as valid.
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID
Default: 0
This setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. It should match the corresponding
settings on the sending device.
REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET
Range: Fixed (Read only)
Default: Fixed
This setting is read only with value “Fixed”.
Remote inputs create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay that are extracted from the received fixed GOOSE
messages. Each remote input can be selected from a list consisting of: DNA-1...32, UserSt-1...32.
REMOTE INPUT 1 ID
Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
5
Default: Rem Ip 1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE
Range: Remote Device 1...16
Default: Remote Device 1
This setting selects the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device
via the REMOTE DEVICE (16) settings.
REMOTE IN 1 ITEM
Range: None, DNA-1...32, UserSt-1...32
Default: None
This setting selects the specific bits of the received fixed GOOSE message to be mapped to that Remote Input.
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
Default: Off
This setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed start-up or the remote device
sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
– Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” defaults the input to logic 1.
– Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to logic 0.
– Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will
default to logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
– Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will

default to logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
5.3.5.14 Web server HTTP protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
 WEB SERVER HTTP TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
 HTTP PROTOCOL  NUMBER(80): 80
The T35 contains an embedded web server and can display pages in a web browser. The web pages are organized as a
series of menus that can be accessed starting at the T35 “Main Menu.” Web pages are read-only and are available
showing IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, and so on. First connect the T35 and a
computer to an Ethernet network, then enter the IP address of the T35 Ethernet port in a web browser.
To close the port, set the port number to 0.
Any change takes effect when the T35 is restarted.
Figure 5-52: Example of UR web page showing event records
those protocols.
5.3.5.15 TFTP protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  TFTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL TFTP MAIN UDP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
  NUMBER(69): 69
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 0
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 0
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the T35 over a network. The T35 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained
from the T35 contains a list and description of all available files, for example event records and oscillography.

The "put" function is not for security reasons. You can enter a "get" command but not a "put" command.
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER — To close the port, set the port number to 0. Any change takes effect when the T35 is
restarted.
those protocols.
5.3.5.16 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC TCP PORT Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
 PROTOCOL  NUMBER(2404): 2404
 IEC NETWORK See below

  CLIENT ADDRESSES
IEC COMMON ADDRESS Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 OF ASDU: 0
IEC CYCLIC DATA Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1

 PERIOD: 60 s
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

 IEC POWER DEFAULT

THRESHOLD: 30000
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
IEC PF DEFAULT Range: 0.00 to 1.00

 THRESHOLD: 1.00
IEC OTHER DEFAULT Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

IEC REDUNDANCY Range: No, Yes

 ENABLED: No
IEC EVENT TIME BASE: Range: Local, UTC

 LOCAL
IEC 60870-5-104 is a transmission protocol for network access, specifically for communication between a control station
and substation over a TCP/IP network.
The T35 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. This protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to IEC 60870-5-104. The T35 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device
connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the T35 maintains two
sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, ideally no more than two masters actively communicate with the T35 at one
time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the T35 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the T35 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD
setting is set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured
value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the T35, the default thresholds are in effect.

The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not. If redundancy is set to Yes,
two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time.
IEC TCP PORT NUMBER — To close the port, set the port number to 0. Any change takes effect when the T35 is restarted.
IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU — The change takes effect when the T35 is restarted.
IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD — The change takes effect when the T35 is restarted.
The T35 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is not
applicable.
those protocols.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL  IEC NETWORK CLIENT
ADDRESSES
 IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS 1: Range: standard IPV4 address format
 CLIENT ADDRESSES  0.0.0.0

CLIENT ADDRESS 5: Range: standard IPV4 address format
 0.0.0.0
The T35 can specify a maximum of five clients for its IEC 104 connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to
which the T35 can connect. A maximum of two simultaneous connections are supported at any given time.
5
5.3.5.17 EGD protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL
 EGD PROTOCOL  FAST PROD EXCH 1 See below
   CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1 See below

  CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 2 See below

  CONFIGURATION
The T35 is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability, specified as a
software option at the time of ordering.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to ‘produce’ EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to ‘consume’ EGD data
exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
The relay supports one fast EGD exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items in the fast-produced
EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD exchange
is not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to a valid
Modbus register address. The default setting value of “0” is considered invalid.
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The T35 has one fast exchange (exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (exchange 2 and 3).
The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange follows.

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
 FAST PROD EXCH 1 EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disable, Enable
 CONFIGURATION  Disable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IP address

 0.0.0.0
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

 1000 ms
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1 (Modbus

 0 register address range)

 0 register address range)
The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges follows.

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1 EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disable, Enable
 CONFIGURATION  Disable
EXCH 1 DESTINATION: Range: standard IP address

 0.0.0.0
EXCH 1 DATA RATE: Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

 1000 ms

 0 register address range)
5

 0 register address range)
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are as follows.
EXCH 1 DESTINATION — This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually
unicast or broadcast.
EXCH 1 DATA RATE — This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms, the
exchange data is updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data is updated and sent
once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to
1000 ms.
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50 — These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any data
from the T35 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting Modbus
register address for the data item in decimal format. See the Modbus memory map in the UR Series Communications
Guide for the addresses. To convert a hexadecimal address to decimal, add a 4 before it for an actual values address and a
3 before a settings address. For example, hexadecimal actual value 82A0 becomes 482A0, which converts to 295584
decimal.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the
first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first
setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus addresses
and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange contains three data items.
To apply a change to the setting EXCH X FUNCTION, for the fast or slow exchanges, the relay must be rebooted.
To fully close the EGD port (UDP port 18246), disable all three EGD data exchanges (one fast and two slow) and
reboot the relay.

5.3.5.18 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103
 IEC103 IEC103 COMMON Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1
 PROTOCOL  ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT: Range: 1 to 1440 min in steps of 1

 1
 IEC103 INPUTS See below

  BINARY
 IEC103 INPUTS See below

  MEASURANDS
 IEC103 COMMANDS See below

 
The T35 is provided with optional IEC 60870-5-103 communications capability, specified as a software option
at the time of ordering.
IEC 60870-5-103 is a companion standard to the IEC 60870-5 suite of standards for transmission protocols. It defines
messages and procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control system in a
substation for communicating on a serial line.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting
is set to IEC 60870-5-103.
5 The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication, exchanging
information with a control system. In the context of this protocol, the protection equipment is the slave and the control
system is the master. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must be able to interpret the
IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
The UR implementation of IEC 60870-5-103 consists of the following functions:
• Report binary inputs
• Report analog values (measurands)
• Commands
• Time synchronization
The RS485 port supports IEC 60870-5-103.
The UR Family Communications Guide contains more information on the protocol.
IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU — This setting uniquely defines this T35 on the serial line. Select an ID between 0 and
254. This ID does not need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller, but it is
recommended. Note that RS485 only allows a maximum of 32 slave stations on a communication line, so the entire range
of 254 addresses is never exhausted.
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT — This setting defines the time that the T35 waits for a synchronization message. The T35
synchronizes its clock using all available sources, with the source synching more frequently overwriting the time of the
other sources. Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870-5-103 master is less frequent than IRIG-B,
PTP, or SNTP, its time is overwritten by these three sources, if any of them is active. If the synchronization timeout occurs
and none of IRIG-B, PTP, or SNTP is active, the T35 sets the invalid bit in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.
The settings for the remaining menus are outlined as follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS BINARY
 IEC103 INPUTS  POINT 0 See below
 BINARY  

 POINT 1 See below

 

 POINT 95 See below
 
 POINT 0 POINT 0 FUN Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

  0
POINT 0 INF Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
POINT 0 Input Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

 POINT 95 POINT 95 FUN Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
  0
POINT 95 INF Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
POINT 95 Input Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
The binary input points are mapped using elements from a list of possible FlexLogic operands. A maximum of 96 binary
inputs (points) can be mapped this way.
The IEC 60870-5-103 point list always starts with point 0 and ends at the first "Off" value. Since the IEC 60870-5-103 point
5
list must be in a continuous block, any points assigned after the first "Off" point are ignored.
For each defined point, set appropriate values for the Function Type (FUN) and Information Number (INF), which form the
Information Object Identifier field of the ASDU, as defined in IEC 60870-5-103.
The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data. They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation received
from the controller or reported spontaneously. Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests.
If the T35 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time, it demands access for Class 1 data transmission (ACD=1 in the
control field of the response).
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS

 IEC103 INPUTS  ASDU 1 See below
 MEASURANDS  

 ASDU 4
 
 ASDU 1 ASDU 1 TYP: Range: 3 or 9

  9
ASDU 1 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
ASDU 1 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
ASDU 1 SCAN TOUT: Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1

 0

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1 Range: FlexAnalog parameter

 Off
ASDU 1 ANALOG 1 Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

 FACTOR: 1.000
ASDU 1 ANALOG 1 Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

 OFFSET: 0

 Off

 FACTOR: 1.000

 OFFSET: 0

 ASDU 4 ASDU 4 TYP: Range: 3 or 9
  9
ASDU 4 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
ASDU 4 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT: Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1

 0
5  ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

 FACTOR: 1.000

 OFFSET: 0

 Off

 FACTOR: 1.000

 OFFSET: 0
The configuration menu allows a maximum of four ASDUs containing measurands.

Measurands are sent as a response to Class 2 requests, which are cyclic requests coming from the master.
TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) — The configuration field TYP indicates how many measurands are present in the corresponding
ASDU. Each ASDU can take either 4 or 9 measurands maximum, depending on the type identification (3 respectively 9). For
any change to take effect, restart the relay.
FUNCTION TYPE (FUN) and INFORMATION NUMBER (INF) — These two fields form the Information Object Identifier of the ASDU
as defined in IEC 60870-103. For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
SCAN TIMEOUT (SCAN TOUT) — This is the cyclic period used by the T35 to decide when a measurand ASDU is included in a
response. The measurand is sent as response to a Class 2 request when the corresponding timeout expires. The default
value 0 means 500 ms.

ANALOG # — This field contains the actual measurand to be sent in the response to the master. The measurands can be
mapped using elements from a list of FlexAnalog operands. The measurands sent are voltage, current, power, power
factor, and frequency. If any other FlexAnalog is chosen, the T35 sends 0 instead of its value. Note that the power is
transmitted in KW, not W. Measurands are transmitted as ASDU 3 or ASDU 9 (type identification value set to measurands I,
respectively measurands II).
Each IEC 60870-5-103 measurands list ends at the first unconfigured ("Off") value. Any measurand assigned after the first
"Off" value is ignored.
At least one measurand per ASDU must be configured in order to configure the following ASDU. For example, the user can
configure only one measurand for each ASDU, but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU 2 and configure measurands in
ASDU 3.
ANALOG # FACTOR and OFFSET — For each measurand included in the ASDU, a factor and offset also can be configured. The
factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands. The final measurement sent to the IEC 60870-103
master is then "a*x + b," where x is the measurand, a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset. The master has to perform
the reversed operation in order to retrieve the actual value if such scaling is done. By default a = 1 and b = 0, so no scaling
is done if these values are left at their defaults. Examples of when scaling is appropriate are as follows:
• If the measured value contains decimals and it is important to preserve the resolution. Since the format for
transmitting the measurand does not permit decimals, a factor a>1 can be applied before transmission. For example,
a frequency F=59.9Hz can be transmitted as Ft = 10 * F = 10 * 59.9 = 599. In this case a = 10, b = 0. The master receives
599 and has to divide by 10 to retrieve the real value 59.9.
• If the measured value is larger than what fits in the format defined in IEC 103. The format defined in the standard
allows for signed integers up to 4095. By offsetting, unsigned integers up to 4096 + 4095 = 8191 are supported.
Scaling using factors <1 can be required in such cases. The calculation is outlined in the IEC 60870-5-103 chapter of
the UR Family Communications Guide. Two examples follow, where you decide factors a and b.
Example 1: Nominal power Pn = 100 MW = 100000 KW (power is transmitted in KW)
5
Since P can be both positive and negative:
Transmitted power Pt = (4095/(Pn*2.4)) * P = (4095/(100000 * 2.4) ) * P
= 0.017 * P
a = 0.017
b=0
Pt = 0.017 * P
For a max power 100000 KW * 2.4 = 240000 KW, we transmit
Pt = 0.017 * 240000 = 4080
A value above 240 MW is indicated by overflow.
Example 2: Nominal voltage Vn = 500000 V

Since RMS voltage V can be only positive:
Transmitted voltage Vt = (8191/(Vn*2.4)) * V - 4096 =
= (8191/(500000 * 2.4) ) * V - 4096 = 0.0068 * V - 4096
a = 0.0068
Since the step is in increments of 0.001, we round it at:
a = 0.006
b = -4096
Vt = 0.006 * V - 4096
For max voltage 500000 V * 2.4 = 1200000 V, we transmit
Vt = 0.006 * 1200000 - 4096 = 7200 - 4096 = 3104

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 COMMANDS

 IEC103 COMMANDS  COMMAND 0 See below
  
 COMMAND 1
 

 COMMAND 31
 
 COMMAND 0 COMMAND 0 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

  0
COMMAND 0 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

 0
COMMAND 0 ON: Range: Virtual input

 Off
COMMAND 0 OFF: Range: Virtual input

 Off

 COMMAND 31 COMMAND 31 FUN: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
  0
COMMAND 31 INF: Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1


5 0
COMMAND 31 ON: Range: Virtual input

 Off
COMMAND 31 OFF: Range: Virtual input

 Off
Commands are received as General Command (Type Identification 20). The user can configure the action to perform when
an ASDU command comes.
A list of available mappings is provided on the T35. This includes 128 virtual inputs (see the following table). The ON and
OFF for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs.
Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type (FUN) and information number (INF). If
the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command, the relay rejects it.
Table 5-9: Commands mapping table
Description Value
Off 0
Virtual Input 1 1
Virtual Input 2 2
... ...
Virtual Input 128 128
5.3.5.19 USB port

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  USB 2.0
 USB 2.0 USB DEVICE PORT Range: Disabled, Enabled
  FUNCTION: Enabled

This setting applies to the USB port on the graphical front panel.
This setting enables/disables the USB port on the graphical front panel. When the port function is "Enabled," a standard
USB serial cable allows a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve, display, and write settings either
individually or collectively, to display status and actual values, to initiate controls, and to retrieve and display event records,
oscillography records, data logger records, and disturbance records. Installation of the EnerVista software automatically
installs the drivers required to use this USB port.
DNP is not available using the USB port on the graphical front panel.
5.3.6 Modbus user map

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  MODBUS USER MAP
 MODBUS USER MAP ADDR 1: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
  VALUE: 0

ADDR 256: 0 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
 VALUE: 0
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. The memory map can be read from the front
panel, the UR Family Communications Guide, or in a web browser. For the web browser, enter the IP address of the T35 and
click a Modbus Memory Map option.
On the front panel, the address to read a specific Modbus register depends on whether the requested value is a setting or
an actual value.
5
Up to firmware version 7.8x, the settings and actual values are in the same Modbus table. To obtain a memory map value,
enter its address on the front panel.
Starting in firmware version 7.90, the settings have their own Modbus memory table and the actual values are in their own
table. To obtain a memory map value, use the following sequence:
1. Obtain the hexadecimal Modbus address of the data item. It must have four digits, such as 024A.
2. Prefix the address by 3 for settings or by 4 for actual values.
3. Convert the resulting hexadecimal number to decimal.
4. Enter the resulting number in the first column of the Modbus user map. The corresponding value (if programmed)
displays in second column (VALUE). A value of "0" in subsequent register lines automatically returns values of Modbus
registers having the address of the previous line incremented by 1. These subsequent addresses are all in the same
Modbus table (settings or actual values) as the address that was entered.
An address value of "0" in the initial register means "none" and values of "0" display for all registers.
Different address values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
Here are two examples of how to add a setting or actual value to the front panel Modbus user map.
To add the setting "Phase TOC 1 Pickup" to the Modbus user map:
1. Find the address of the setting "Phase TOC 1 Pickup," which is 334Eh (334E in hexadecimal format).
2. Prefix this address by 3 to obtain 3334Eh.
3. Convert this value to decimal to obtain 209742 and enter it on the front panel.
To add the actual value "SRC 1 Frequency" to the Modbus user map:
1. Find the address of the actual value "SRC 1 Frequency," which is 1D80h.
2. Prefix this address by 4 to obtain 41D80h.
3. Convert this value to decimal to obtain 269696 and enter it on the front panel.

5.3.7 Real-time clock
5.3.7.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK
 REAL TIME SYNCRONIZING SOURCE: Range: None, PP/IRIG-B/PTP/Other, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/
 CLOCK  None Other, PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other, PBM Clock( with PBM O.C.)
REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Disabled
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated

 None
 PRECISION TIME See below

  PROTOCOL (1588)
 SNTP PROTOCOL See below

 
 LOCAL TIME See below

 
 PBM PTP See below

 
The relay contains a real time clock (RTC) to create time stamps for communications protocols as well as for historical data,
such as event records and oscillography. When the relay restarts, the RTC initializes from an onboard battery-backed
clock, which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month (~23 ppm). Once the RTC
5 is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), IRIG-B, or SNTP, its accuracy approaches that of the synchronizing
time delivered to the relay. While the RTC is not synchronized via PTP or IRIG-B, or the relay determines that it has an offset
possibly greater than 10 µs from the international time standard, the CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED FlexLogic operand is
activated.
The relay supports the adjustment of the leap second (addition as well as removal of a leap second) when the UR is
synchronized using the PTP or IRIG-B. Two Fexlogic operands are available for supporting this functionality: LEAP
SECOND DETECTED and LEAP SECOND ADDED.
The SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting displays in the software when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option. The
setting configures the priority sequence of the time synchronization source, to determine which of the available external
time sources to use for time synchronization. A setting of None causes the RTC and the synchrophasor clock to free-run,
and the clock can be changed from the front panel or from communications protocols. A setting of PP/IRIG-B/PTP/Other,
IRIG-B/PP/PTP/Other, or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other causes the relay to track the first source named that is enabled and
operational, or free-run if none of these are available. Here, PP means a time source that is strictly compliant with PP, PTP
means a time source that is not strictly compliant with PP, and Other means any less precise source (SNTP, IEC 103, IEC 104,
Modbus, or DNP). When a time source fails or recovers, the relay automatically transfers synchronization as required by
this setting.
The setting option "PBM Clock" is only available in the UR with Process Bus Module (PBM) order codes. Selecting “PBM Clock”
causes the relay to use the time source from any non-HardFiber Process Bus Module clock. If the Process Bus Module PTP
FUNCTION setting is enabled and PTP grandmaster is available in the process bus network, the Process Bus Module clock is
synchronized to the PTP grandmaster, else the Process Bus Module clock free-runs. A UR can use a synchronizing source
either from the real-time clock (main CPU) or a Process Bus Module, as outlined in Settings > Product Setup > Real Time
Clock > PBM PTP.

Note that a UR does not need to be time synchronized to accept the sampled values. All the elements (protection, control,
monitoring, logic, and so on) in the UR (except Line Current Differential element) remain fully functional without requiring
any external synchronizing source for the UR, as long as all the sampled values subscribed by the relay are synchronized
according to the Settings > Process Bus Module > General > SmpSynch Check setting and pass the other acceptance
criteria as defined in Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config > Logic.
Some UR applications like oscillography, event recorder, and datalogger use the real-time clock for time-stamping.
When the relay does not have the IEEE 1588 software option and this setting does not display, it uses IRIG-B when enabled
and operational, then failing that SNTP when configured and operational, and otherwise it free-runs unless the clock is
changed from the front panel or from communications protocols.
Setup for IRIG-B is illustrated in the Installation chapter.
For the Other protocols, whenever a time synchronization message is received through any of the active protocols, the T35
clock updates. However, given that IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus, and DNP are low-accuracy time
synchronization methods, avoid their use for synchronization when better accuracy time protocols, such as IRIG-B and PTP,
are active in the system. If IRIG-B or PTP is used to update the relay clock, the other protocols (such as SNTP) are not
allowed to update, even if active.
See the COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME menu section of this manual to manually set the RTC.
When 1 ms accuracy is required for events, oscillography, time stamping, synchrophasors, and 87L asymmetry
with respect to the master clock, the PTP clock needs to be connected to the CPU of a relay. The 1 ms accuracy
cannot be maintained if the CPU of the relay is synchronized through the Process Bus Module due to a delay up to 2
5
ms in transmitting a time stamp from the Process Bus Module to a CPU.
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. The event
records the RTC time before the adjustment. A Date/Time Changed event is generated when:
• The real time clock changed from SNTP/PTP/IRIG-B and the time difference is more than one second
• The real time clock changed from the front panel or via Modbus register. The relay always generates this event
regardless of the time difference.
• The Daylight Saving Time (DST) setting gets enabled and the current relay time is already in the DST zone
• The real time clock enters or leaves DST
To enable IRIG-B synchronization, the input IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE must be set to DC Shift or Amplitude Modulated. IRIG-B
synchronization can be disabled by making this setting None. When IRIG-B is enabled and active, clock synchronization by
communication protocols. (DNP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104) is blocked, and clock synchronization from the front
panel and over Modbus is always enabled.
Clocks can be synchronized locally among several relays using the computer time. When using a time source, such as IRIG-
B, the time is overwritten eventually by the time source. To synchronize clocks among UR devices:
1. In the EnerVista software, expand the main menu in the Online Window area and select the Synchronize Devices
entry. The window opens. The software prompts to acknowledge any offline devices.
2. Click the Synchronize Devices button at the top of the window, and confirm the action at the prompt. The devices
assume the time of the computer being used.
To configure and enable PTP and/or SNTP, or to set local time parameters (for example time zone, daylight savings), refer to
the later sections.
The relay supports the adjustment of real-time clock for the leap second (addition or removal of a leap second) per
applicable standards, when the UR is synchronized using PTP or IRIG-B. The Flexlogic operand 'LEAP SECOND DETECTED'
gets asserted for 1 second when leap second adjustment is made and event is recorded in the events log. The following
functions are affected by the leap second time adjustment:
• Real-time clock

• Synchrophasors publishing and Comtrade recording

• Regular transient recorder Comtrade and data logger Comtrade.
• Event Logger
5.3.7.2 Precision Time Protocol (1588)

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)
 PRECISION TIME STRICT POWER PROFILE: Range: Enabled, Disabled
 PROTOCOL (1588)  Disabled
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER: Range: 0 to 255

 0
PTP VLAN PRIORITY: Range: 0 to 7

 4
PTP VLAN ID: Range: 0 to 4095

 0
 PTP PORT 1 See below

 
5 
 PTP PORT 3
 
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)  PTP PORT 1(3)
 PTP PORT 1 PORT 1 PTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled
  Disabled
PORT 1 PATH DELAY ADDER: Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1

 0 ns
PORT 1 PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY: Range: –1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1

 0 ns
The T35 is provided with optional Precision Time Protocol capability. This feature is specified as the IEEE 1588
software option at the time of ordering.
The T35 supports the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile (PP) specified in
IEEE Std C37.238 2017. This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over an Ethernet network
that implements PP.
The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP. Time accuracy can be less than
specified for a PP network. Tolerated deviations from strict PP include:
• Missing declaration of PP compliance in the messages
• Connection to a network device that does not support the PTP peer delay mechanism
• Jitter substantially greater than 1 µs in received event messages
• Certain non-compliant announce and sync message update rates
The relay implements PTP according to IEEE Std 1588 2008 and the equivalent IEC 61588:2009(E), sometimes referred to as
version 2 PTP. It does not support the previous version of the standard (version 1).

PTP is a protocol that allows multiple clocks in a network to synchronize with one another. It permits synchronization
accuracies better than 1 ns, but this requires that each and every component in the network achieve very high levels of
accuracy and a very high baud rate, faster than normally used for relay communications. When operating over a generic
Ethernet network, time error can amount to 1 ms or more. PP is a profile of PTP which specifies a limited subset of PTP
suitable for use in power system protection, control, automation, and data communication applications, and thereby
facilitates interoperability between different vendor’s clocks and switches. PP specifies a worst-case delivered time error of
less than 1 µs over a 16-hop network.
In a PTP system and in a PP system, the clocks automatically organize themselves into a master-slave synchronization
hierarchy with the “best” clock available making itself the “grandmaster” at the top of the hierarchy; all others make
themselves “slaves” and track the grandmaster. Typically the grandmaster clock receives its time from GPS satellites or
some other link to the international time standard. If the grandmaster fails, the next “best” clock available in the domain
assumes the grandmaster role. When a clock on start-up discovers that it is “better” than the present grandmaster, it
assumes the grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave. The T35 qualification mechanism accepts a
potential master clock as a new grandmaster, when in a four-second interval it has received three announce messages
from it, all better than the present grandmaster clock and better than any other announce in this interval.
Time messages issued by the grandmaster are delayed as they pass through the network both due to the finite speed of
the signal in the interconnecting fiber or wire, and due to processing delays in the Ethernet switches. Each clock and switch
implementing PP measures the propagation delay to each of its PP neighbors, and compensates for these delays in the
time received. Each network device implementing PP measures the processing delay it introduces in each time message
and compensates for this delay in the time it transmits. As a result, the time delivered to end-devices such as the UR are
virtually identical to the grandmaster time. If one of the network devices in the hierarchy does not fully implement PP, the
associated propagation delay and/or latency may not be compensated for, and the time received at the end-device can be
in error by more than 100 µs.
See the preceding Real Time Clock section for a description of when time values received via PTP are used to update the
relay’s real time clock.
The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP. The PTP menu displays only when the option was
5
purchased.
STRICT POWER PROFILE — Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238 2017) requires that the relay only select a power profile compliant
clock as a grandmaster, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be
implemented. With the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects as master the clocks displaying the
IEEE_C37_238 identification codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power
profile setting disabled, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are
present, and uses ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational. This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP
capable ports.
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER — Set this setting to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A
network can support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More
commonly, there is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY — This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued
by the relay’s peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that it be
set to 7 in accordance with PTP. Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN
Priority can have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PTP VLAN ID — This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates
they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so can be left at its default value. Depending on the
characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN ID can have no effect. This setting applies to all of
the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PORT 1 ... 3 FUNCTION — While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not
generate or listen to PTP messages on this port.

PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ADDER — The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time
being used to synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays
not compensated for in the network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms
compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, make this setting zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that always and completely corrects
for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces the worst-case error to half of the range between
minimum and maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ASSYMMETRY — This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay
mechanism to compensate for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in
unusual cases, the two fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so make this setting zero.
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, set this setting to the number of
nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from
the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that
the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the relay
is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is 11000 - 10000 = +1000 ns.
5.3.7.3 SNTP protocol

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  SNTP PROTOCOL
 SNTP PROTOCOL SNTP FUNCTION: Range: Enabled, Disabled
  Disabled
5  SNTP SERVER1 IP
ADDR: 127.0.0.1
Range: standard IP address format
SNTP SERVER2 IP Range: standard IP address format

 ADDR: 127.0.0.1
SNTP SERVER1 UDP Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 PORT: 123
SNTP SERVER2 UDP Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 PORT: 123
The T35 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the T35 can obtain clock time over
an Ethernet network. The T35 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from redundant SNTP/NTP servers, usually a
dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. One or two SNTP servers can be used; use of both
servers for redundancy is recommended but not required.
To use SNTP, enable the function and set SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR and/or SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR to the SNTP/NTP server IP
addresses. The T35 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP SERVER1 SNTP/NTP server. If SERVER1 is not available/
reachable, the T35 switches to the SNTP SERVER2 to get the time value and vice versa.
Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the T35 clock is closely
synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It can take up to 20 minutes for the T35 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the
server is offline, depending on the number and SNTP server modes. Broadcast mode timeout is 10 minutes and unicast
timeout is 80 seconds (corresponds to three unicast request retries).
SNTP FUNCTION — Enables or disables the SNTP feature on the T35.
SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR — The T35 uses the SERVER1 address to contact an SNTP/NTP server to obtain time values. When the
SNTP FUNCTION setting is set to enabled or on startup if the setting is enabled, the T35 SNTP client requests SERVER1 for the
time value. If the SERVER1 channel fails or is not reachable, the T35 switches to SERVER2 SNTP/NTP server.
If SERVER1 SNTP server is set to 127.0.0.1, the T35 considers the SERVER1 SNTP server to be unconfigured.

To use SERVER1 SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR setting to "0.0.0.0" and SNTP FUNCTION to "Enabled."
The T35 SNTP client then listens to SNTP messages sent to the "all ones" broadcast address for the subnet. The T35 waits
up to 18 minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before switching to the alternate
channel.
SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR — The T35 uses this address to contact an SNTP/NTP server if SERVER1 channel fails or is not
reachable. If SERVER2 SNTP server is set to 127.0.0.1, the T35 considers the SERVER2 SNTP server to be unconfigured.
To use SERVER2 SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR setting to "0.0.0.0" and SNTP FUNCTION to "Enabled."
The T35 SNTP client then listens to SNTP messages sent to the "all ones" broadcast address for the subnet. The T35 waits
up to 18 minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before switching to the alternate
channel.
SNTP SERVER1 UDP PORT — This setting is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SERVER1 SNTP is not required, close the port by
changing this setting to zero.
SNTP SERVER2 UDP PORT — This setting is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SERVER2 SNTP is not required, close the port by
changing this setting to zero.
those protocols.
If SERVER1 IP ADDR and UDP PORT settings match the SERVER2 IP ADDR and UDP PORT settings, the T35 considers only
the SERVER1 SNTP server as being configured and an SNTP Failure error message generates. The failure message
also displays when both servers are unavailable.
5.3.7.4 Local time

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  LOCAL TIME
 LOCAL TIME
 LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC: Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hr in steps of 0.25
5
 0.0 hr
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
DST START MONTH: Range: January to December (all months)

 January
DST START DAY: Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
 Sunday
DST START DAY INSTANCE: Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
 First
DST START HOUR: Range: 0:00 to 23:00 in steps of one hour

 2:00
DST STOP MONTH: Range: January to December (all months)

 January
DST STOP DAY: Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)
 Sunday
DST STOP DAY INSTANCE: Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last
 First
DST STOP HOUR: Range: 0:00 to 23:00 in steps of one hour

 2:00
The T35 maintains two times: local time and Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Local time can be provided by IRIG-B
signals. UTC time is provided by SNTP servers.
The real-time clock (RTC) and time stamps reported in historical records and communication protocols can be incorrect if
the Local Time settings are not configured properly.
See the IRIG-B section in the Installation chapter for guidance on these settings when using an IRIG-B source that sets the
IRIG-B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344-1995.

LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC — Used to specify the local time zone offset from UTC (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. Time
zones in the eastern hemisphere have positive values; time zones in the western hemisphere have negative values. A value
of zero causes the relay to use UTC for local time. This setting has two uses. When the system RTC is synchronized with a
communications protocol providing only local time or it is free-running, the offset setting is used to calculate UTC from the
local time these provide. When the RTC is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only UTC (such as PTP or
SNTP), the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided. PTP
ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME and DST — Can be used to allow the relay to follow the DST rules of the local time zone. Note that
when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the local time in the IRIG-B signal contains any daylight savings time offset and
so the DST settings are ignored. Note that the following items do not include the DST: Time of Day Timer Start Time; Time of
Day Timer Stop Time; Event Recorder Last Cleared Date; Source x Demand VAR Maximum Date; Source x Demand WATT
Maximum Date; Source x Demand VA Maximum Date; Source x Demand Ia Maximum Date; Source x Demand Ib Maximum
Date; Source x Demand Ic Maximum Date; PMU x Last Cleared Date; PMU One-Shot Time; Data Logger Newest Time; Data
Logger Oldest Time; Oscillography Last Cleared Date; Last Settings Change Date; User Programmable Fault Report Cleared
Date; Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp; HIZ RMS Capture x Time; and HIZ Capture x Time.
5.3.7.5 PBM PTP

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PBM PTP
 PBM PTP PTP FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Master-Slave, Slave-only
  Disabled
PTP PROFILE: Range: Power Utility Profil, Power Profile

 Power Utility Profil
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER: Range: 0 to 255


5 93
PTP VLAN PRIORITY: Range: 0 to 7

 4
PTP VLAN ID: Range: 0 to 4094

 0
PTP MASTER PRIO1: Range: 0 to 255

 128
PTP MASTER PRIO2: Range: 0 to 255

 128
 Port 1a See below

 
 Port 1b
 

 Port 4a
 
 Port 4b
 
The time synchronizing source for the relay is set using SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK. Another time
source is set for the Process Bus Module.
The Process Bus Module supports the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) as PTP master and slave functionality.
The PTP state of each port is determined by the PTP settings and grandmaster clock availability on the local network.
Time synchronization supports IEEE 1588 PTPv2.

PBM PTP configuration

The T35 supports IEEE 1588 PTPv2 as PTP Slave or PTP Master on its Process Bus Module ports. It can be supplied with an
external RTC clock from the main CPU ports (station bus ports), the Process Bus Module ports, or both. It utilizes one of the
two clocks depending upon the configuration of the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE
and SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION settings, as follows:
• To use an external PTP Grand Master clock from the Process Bus Module port (UR acts as PTP Slave only), configure the
following settings:
– SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE = PBM clock
– SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION = Slave-only
With this configuration, the relay RTC will use the clock from the Process Bus Module port. .
If the SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE setting is “PBM clock” and the SETTINGS >
PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION setting is “Disabled”, the RTC clock free-runs.
• To use an external PTP Grand Master clock from the Process Bus Module port (UR in PTP Slave mode) or to enable the
T35 as PTP Master on its Process Bus Module ports, configure the following settings:
– SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE = PBM clock
– SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION = Master-Slave
With this configuration, the relay RTC uses the clock from the Process Bus Module port.
• To use an external clock through a main CPU port (PTP Slave, IRIG-B, other source) and to enable the T35 as PTP
Master on its Process Bus Module ports, configure the following settings:
– SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > SYNCRONIZING SOURCE = PP/IRIG-B/PTP/Other, or IRIG-B/PP/PTP/
Other, or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other
– SETTINGS > PRODUCT SETUP > REAL TIME CLOCK > PBM PTP > PTP FUNCTION = Master-Slave, or Slave, or Disabled
With this configuration, the relay RTC uses the clock from the main CPU port. 5
Some UR applications like oscillography, event recorder, and datalogger use the real-time clock for time-stamping.
Note that in all of these scenarios, when the Grand Master clock is not available through a CPU port and/or Process Bus
Module, all the elements (protection, control, monitoring, logic, and so on) in the T35, except the Line Current Differential
element, remain functional without requiring any external synchronizing source for the T35, as long as all the sampled
values subscribed by the relay are synchronized according to the setting definition of SMPSYNCH CHECK (SETTINGS >
PROCESS BUS MODULE > GENERAL > SMPSYNCH CHECK) and pass the other acceptance criteria.
PTP FUNCTION — Sets the source for time synchronization for the Process Bus Module.
When set to Disabled, PTP is disabled on all ports of the Process Bus Module.
When set to Master-Slave, the Process Bus Module acts as a PTP slave when a grandmaster clock is available in the
communication path. If no better clock than its own clock is available in the communication path, the module switches to
master mode and provides the grandmaster functionality by sending Announce frames and other supporting PTP Master
frames.
When set to Slave-only, the Process Bus Module acts as a PTP slave ordinary clock if a grandmaster clock is available in the
network. If no grandmaster clock is available in the communication path, the module continues to wait for the Announce
messages.
When PTP is enabled but no grand master is available on any of the Process Bus Module ports, “PB PTP Failure” events are
generated.
To view the synchronizing source, see ACTUAL VALUES  PB MODULE  TIME SYNC  SYNC SOURCE.
PTP PROFILE — Specifies the profile to be used for PTP Master communication. The Power Utility Profile option relates to IEC
61850-9-3, while the Power Profile option relates to IEEE C37.238 2017.
When the Process Bus Module PTP is in the slave state, this setting has no effect. As a slave, the Process Bus Module
accepts both the Power Profile and the Power Utility Profile.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER — Set this to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to synchronize to. A network
can support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. The Power Utility Profile
recommends 93 as the value for the domain number.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY — This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in PTP request messages
issued by the relay.
PTP VLAN ID — This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in PTP request messages issued by the
relay. As these messages have a destination address that indicates they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no
function, and so the setting can be left at its default value. Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the
relay is directly linked, VLAN ID can have no effect.
PTP MASTER PRIO1 — Priority1 is used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm and lower values take precedence.
The operation of the best master clock algorithm selects clocks from a set with a lower value of priority1 over clocks from
a set greater than priority1.
The setting values Priority1 and Priority2 decide when the UR Process Bus Module ports are selected as grandmaster clock.
In a single LAN, GE recommends the following:
• Set the Priority1 of the UR larger than the actual grandmaster, so that the grandmaster(s) takes precedence over UR
• Set the same Priority1 for all the UR Process Bus Module ports participating in one communication path
• Use Priority2 to further prioritize the UR Process Bus Module ports in the network. The UR with lower value of Priority2
is selected as best master when Priority1, clockClass, clockAccuracy, and scaledOffsetLogVariance are the same.
The setting is editable in the software when the PTP FUNCTION setting is Master-Slave.
PTP MASTER PRIO2 — Priority2 is used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm and lower values take precedence.
If the operation of the best master clock algorithm fails to order the clocks based on the values of priority1, clockClass,
clockAccuracy, and scaledOffsetLogVariance, the priority2 attribute allows the creation of up to 256 priorities to further
5 fine-tune the selection of best clocks.

If Priority2 is configured the same for two URs in the same communication path, best master clock algorithm uses
clockIdentity to resolve the tie-breaker.
The setting is editable in the software when the PTP FUNCTION setting is Master-Slave.
Independent of the NETWORK CONFIG and PTP FUNCTION settings, the enabled transceiver ports on the Process Bus
Module operate in stateless transparent clock mode. GE recommends always setting the NETWORK CONFIG setting
to match with the network topology to avoid unnecessary data storms. For example, if the PRP network has
multiple URs connected on PRP LAN and if the UR’s NETWORK CONFIG setting is misconfigured to “Independent” PTP
messages other than PDelay messages are forwarded between the connected ports, which can create a PTP data
storm.
Ports
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL-TIME CLOCK  PBM PTP  Port 1a(4b)
 Port 1a PATH DELAY ADDER: Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1
  0 ns
PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY: Range: -1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1

 0 ns
These setting are editable in the software when the PTP FUNCTION setting is not Disabled.
Up to eight ports display here, depending on the Process Bus Module.
Default port assignments for the Process Bus Module are as follows:
• Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) — Ports 1a and 1b are enabled
• High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) — Ports 1a and 1b are enabled
• Dual HSR — Ports 1a and 1b support HSR-1, and ports 3a and 3b support HSR-2
• INDEPENDENT — Ports 1a to 4b are enabled
Port availability by order code is as follows:

• 85 — Ports 1a and 1b, or 3a and 3b

• 86 — All eight ports
• 87 — All eight ports
For the following two settings, there is no dependency with the NETWORK CONFIG setting. For order code 85, ports 1a, 1b,
3a, and 3b settings are available. For order codes 86 and 87, all the port settings are available. Configure these settings as
per your network. For example, for order code 85, while ports 1a, 1b, 3a, and 3b settings display, configure ports 1a and 1b
when your network uses these two ports.
PATH DELAY ADDER — The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time in this setting prior to the time being used to
synchronize the relay's real-time clock. This is to compensate for time delivery delays not compensated for in the network.
In a fully compliant power utility network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the
delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, use 0 ns for this setting.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated for, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that changes dynamically the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that always corrects completely for
uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces worst-case error to half of the range between minimum and
maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.
Restart the relay after changing this setting, for example using Maintenance > Reboot Relay.
PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY — This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay
mechanism to compensate for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in
unusual cases, the two fiber cables are of essentially identical length and composition, so use 0 ns for this setting.
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, make this setting the number of
nanoseconds that the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and
from the relay. For example, if it is known from the physical length of the fiber cable and the propagation speed in the fiber 5
that the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the
relay is 11 000 ns, then the mean delay is 10 000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is +1 000 ns.
5.3.8 User-programmable fault reports

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
1(2)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
 FAULT REPORT 1  FUNCTION: Disabled
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
FAULT REPORT 1 # 1: Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter

 Off

FAULT REPORT 1 #32: Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter
 Off
When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective
creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the
pre-fault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the
complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the
element resets and no record is created.

The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware
revision (x.xx, for example) and relay model (T35), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (a specific
FlexLogic operand), the name of fault trigger (a specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trigger, the
active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault
trigger), and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger).
The report includes fault duration times for each of the breakers (created by the breaker arcing current feature). To include
fault duration times in the fault report, the user must enable and configure breaker arcing current feature for each of the
breakers. Fault duration is reported on a per-phase basis.
Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The
EnerVista software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when the report
is triggered.
The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from
thermal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to
include voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue.
The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols.
PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER — Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores
one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a record as long as
the operand selected as PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER is “On.” If the operand remains “Off” for 1 second, the element resets and no
record is created.
FAULT 1 TRIGGER — Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores the
data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of the report.
FAULT REPORT 1 # 1 to FAULT REPORT 1 #32 — These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude,
true RMS, phase angle, frequency, temperature, and so on, to be stored when the report is created. Up to 32 channels can
5 be configured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest.
5.3.9 Oscillography
5.3.9.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY NUMBER OF RECORDS: Range: 3 to 64 in steps of 1
  15
TRIGGER MODE: Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

 Automatic Overwrite
TRIGGER POSITION: Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

 50%
TRIGGER SOURCE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: Range: Off, 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

 64 samples/cycle
 DIGITAL CHANNELS See below

 
 ANALOG CHANNELS See below

 
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records can be captured
simultaneously.
To retrieve an Oscillography record from a relay:
1. If not yet set up for oscillography, configure settings under Settings > Product Setup > Oscillography in the EnerVista

software.
2. Access Actual Values > Records > Oscillography in the EnerVista software.
3. In the window that opens, select the record number. The highest number is the most recent record (Newest Record
Number).
4. Click the Read button to get the waveform. When available, waveforms are displayed graphically, and otherwise error
messages display.
5. In the waveform window that opens, you can save the file, for example with the CFG extension.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors, such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES 
RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample
configurations with corresponding cycles/record. The minimum number of oscillographic records is three.
Table 5-10: Oscillography cycles/record example
Records CT/VTs Sample rate Digital Analog Cycles per
channels channels record
3 1 32 32 16 2399
3 1 64 32 16 1450
16 1 32 32 16 666
16 1 64 32 16 402
32 1 32 32 16 352
32 1 64 32 16 213
3 2 32 32 16 1516
3 2 64 32 16 851 5
16 2 32 32 16 421
TRIGGER MODE — A new record automatically overwrites an oldest record when TRIGGER MODE is set to "Automatic
Overwrite", keeping number of available records equal to the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting value. When TRIGGER MODE
is set to "Protected" new records stopped being captured once number of captured records triggered by "Trigger Source" is
becoming equal to the setting NUMBER OF RECORDS value (with an exception when oscillography is triggered manually
from the ACTUAL VALUES \ RECORDS \ OSCILLOGRAPHY \ FORCE TRIGGER menu command), until all oscillography
records are cleared.
TRIGGER POSITION — Set this to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, and so on). A trigger
position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.
TRIGGER SOURCE — Always captured in oscillography and can be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input,
virtual output, and so on). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS — Determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored.
Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of
the relay, which is always 64 samples per cycle. That is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records are cleared.
5.3.9.2 Digital channels

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  DIGITAL CHANNELS
 DIGITAL CHANNELS DIGITAL CHANNEL 1 Range: FlexLogic operand
  Off

DIGITAL CHANNEL 127 Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off

DIGITAL 1(127) CHANNEL — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of
each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored.
There are 127 channels and one trigger, for a total of 128.
To populate quickly the rows in the Offline Window, use Ctrl C/V to copy/paste, or click then double-click a row to display a
quick selection window.
Figure 5-53: Quick selection window
5.3.9.3 Analog channels

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  ANALOG CHANNELS
 ANALOG CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
  Off See Appendix A for list

ANALOG CHANNEL 32: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
 Off See Appendix A for list
5 These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay depend on
• the type of relay,
• the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
• the type and number of analog input hardware modules installed
A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB
designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces appear in the file; only the digital traces appear.
In addition to the standard COMTRADE files *.hdr, *cfg & *.dat, a file with extension ‘*.set’ is also recorded. This file
contains the active settings of the protection and control elements of the relay uppon triggering of the
oscillography file. The ‘*.set’ can be opened in Enervista. The setting names are captured in English language only.
5.3.10 Data logger

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER DATA LOGGER MODE: Range: Continuous, Trigger
  Continuous

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
DATA LOGGER RATE: Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1

 60000 msec
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter

 Off See Appendix A for list

DATA LOGGER CHNL 16: Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
 Off See Appendix A for list
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
 0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data can
be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, so the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. The
following table outlines examples of storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz.
Table 5-11: Data logger storage capacity example
Sampling rate Channels Days Storage capacity
15 ms 1 0.1 482 s
8 0.1 60 s
9
16
0.1
0.1
54 s
30 s
5
1000 ms 1 0.3 32729 s
8 0.1 4091 s
9 0.1 3637 s
16 0.1 2046 s
60000 ms 1 22.7 1963710 s
8 2.8 245460 s
9 2.5 218190 s
16 1.4 127230 s
3600000 ms 1 1362.1 117822600 s
8 170.2 14727600 s
9 151.3 13091400 s
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation clears data in the log.
DATA LOGGER MODE — This setting configures the mode in which the data logger operates. When set to “Continuous,” the
data logger actively records any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The data logger is
idle in this mode when no channels are configured. When set to “Trigger,” the data logger records any configured channels
at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The data logger ignores all
subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full, a CLEAR DATA
LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR
DATA LOGGER command also stops the current record and resets the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER — This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic
operand can be used as the trigger source. This setting only applies when the mode is set to “Trigger.”
DATA LOGGER RATE — This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data is recorded.

DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16) — This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data
log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/VT hardware
modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay
automatically prepares the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in
Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters.
DATA LOGGER CONFIG — This display presents the total amount of time that the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without overwriting old data.
5.3.11 User-programmable LEDs
5.3.11.1 Menu - Enhanced and basic front panels

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE  LED TEST See below
 LEDS  
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS See page 5-143

 

  LED 1

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
  LED 48
5 5.3.11.2 Menu - Graphical front panel

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE  LED TEST See below
 LEDS  
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS See page 5-143

 
 EVENT CAUSE LED 1 See page 5-144

 

 EVENT CAUSE LED 9
 
The LEDs can be customized to illuminate when a selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. The trip and alarm
LEDs can also be customized in a similar manner. To ensure correct functionality of all LEDs, an LED test feature is also
provided.
5.3.11.3 LED test

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST
 LED TEST LED TEST FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
  Disabled
LED TEST CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition, such as a user-
programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all
LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.

For the enhanced and basic front panels, the test consists of the following three stages:
1. All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned.” This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of one minute. After one minute, the test ends.
2. All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for one second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3. All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for one second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top
left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to
more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
For the graphical front panel, the test consists of the following stages:
1. All 22 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is "burned." This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of one minute. After one minute, the test ends.
2. All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on with the orange color for one second, then back off.
The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom for all 14 LEDs. Then the eight pushbutton
LEDs are tested in the same manner. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being
turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3. All the LEDs are turned on with the orange color. One LED at a time turns off for one second, then back on. The test
routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom for all 14 LEDs. Then the eight pushbutton LEDs are
tested in the same manner. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off
from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
4. Additionally, stages 2 and 3 are repeated twice for the five device status LEDs and nine event cause LEDs, one time
with green color on and the other with red color on.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and
monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay 5
and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton does not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is
initiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL
setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is
executed.

Figure 5-54: LED test sequence
READY TO TEST
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
rising edge of the
operand
control input
Start the software image of Restore the LED states

the LEDs from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1 time-out
(all LEDs on) (1 minute)
dropping edge of the

control input
rising edge of the

Wait 1 second
control input
STAGE 2 rising edge of the

(one LED on at a time) control input
rising edge of the
5
Wait 1 second
control input
rising edge
STAGE 3
of the control
(one LED off at a time) input
842011A1.CDR
Application example 1
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. Apply the following
settings.
Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu. (The option does not display when not purchased.)
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”
LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
The test is initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. Keep the pushbutton pressed for as long as the
LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, release the pushbutton. The relay then automatically starts stage 2. At
this point, test can be cancelled by pressing the pushbutton.
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. When
finished, release the pushbutton so that the relay then automatically starts stage 2. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3
starts automatically. The test can be cancelled at any time by pressing the pushbutton.

5.3.11.4 Trip and alarm LEDs

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  TRIP & ALARMS LEDS
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS TRIP LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand
  Off
ALARM LED INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced and graphical front panels) and on LED panel 1 (basic front
panel). Each LED can be programmed to turn on when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
5.3.11.5 User-programmable LED 1(48)

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand
 LED 1  Off
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched

 Self-Reset
For the enhanced and basic front panels, there are 48 amber LEDs across the relay LED panels. Each of these indicators
can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the basic front panel, the LEDs are located as follows:
• LED Panel 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
• LED Panel 3 — User programmable LEDs 25 through 48
For the enhanced front panel, the LEDs are located as follows: 5
• LED column 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
See the LED Indicators section in chapter 4 for information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is “Self-
Reset” (the default setting), the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
“Latched,” the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the front panel RESET button, from a remote device via a
communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5-12: Recommended settings for user-programmable LEDs
Setting Parameter Setting Parameter
LED 1 operand SETTING GROUP ACT 1 LED 13 operand Off
LED 7 operand Off LED 19 operand Off

See the figure in the Setting Groups section of the Control Elements section later in this chapter for an example of group
activation.
5.3.11.6 Event cause LED 1(9)

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  EVENT CAUSE LED 1(9)
 EVENT CAUSE LED 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand
 LED 1  LED PICKUP
LED 1 COLOR: Range: Red, Green, Orange

 Green
LED 1 TYPE: Range: Self-Reset, Latched

 Self-Reset
For the graphical front panel, the event cause LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs.
LED 1 TYPE — If set to "Self-Reset," the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If set to "Latched," the
LED, once lit, remains so even the LED operand state already de-asserts, until reset by the front panel RESET button, from a
remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand.
The table outlines default input operand and output operands for each event cause LED.
Table 5-13: Default input and output operand for event cause LEDs
LED Default input operand Output operand Default color
Event Cause LED 1 LED PICKUP EVENT CAUSE LED 1 Green
Event Cause LED 2 LED VOLTAGE EVENT CAUSE LED 2 Orange
5 Event Cause LED 3

Event Cause LED 4
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
EVENT CAUSE LED 3
EVENT CAUSE LED 4
Orange
Orange
Event Cause LED 5 LED OTHER EVENT CAUSE LED 5 Orange
Event Cause LED 6 LED PHASE A EVENT CAUSE LED 6 Orange
Event Cause LED 7 LED PHASE B EVENT CAUSE LED 7 Orange
Event Cause LED 8 LED PHASE C EVENT CAUSE LED 8 Orange
Event Cause LED 9 LED NEUTRAL/GROUND EVENT CAUSE LED 9 Orange
5.3.12 User-programmable self-tests

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE DIRECT RING BREAK Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
 SELF TESTS  FUNCTION: Enabled with Direct Input/Output module.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
 FUNCTION: Enabled with Direct Input/Output module.
RxGOOSE OFF Range: Disabled, Enabled

FIRST ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

SEC. ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

THIRD ETHERNET FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

SFP MODULE FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

BATTERY FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled


SNTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

IRIG-B FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

PTP FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled

SV STREAM TROUBLE Range: Disabled, Enabled

PB ETH PORT 1a FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled


PB ETH PORT Port 4b FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled
PB SFP MODUL 1a FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled


PB SFP MODUL 4b FAIL Range: Disabled, Enabled
 FUNCTION: Disabled
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets.
This settings menu allows enabling and disabling of most minor self-test alarms.
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms do not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target
messages. Moreover, they do not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in Enabled mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. See the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 5
for information on major and minor self-test alarms.
When using the graphical front panel and setting annunciator alarms, the function needs to be enabled here too, else the
alarm is not triggered.
PB SFP MODUL # FAIL FUNCTION — For order code H85, ports 2a, 2b, 4a, 4b are not available.
5.3.13 Control pushbuttons

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS  CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
 CONTROL CNTRL PUSHBUTTN 1 ID Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
 PUSHBUTTON 1  CTRL PB 1
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

This feature is supported with enhanced and basic front panels.

There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the basic and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
The locations of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.

Figure 5-55: Control pushbuttons (enhanced front panel)
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the basic front panel when the T35 is ordered with the 12 user-
programmable pushbutton option.
Figure 5-56: Control pushbuttons (basic front panel)
67$786 (9(17&$86(
,16(59,&( 92/7$*(
7528%/( &855(17 5(6(7
7(6702'( )5(48(1&<
75,3 27+(5 86(5 7+5((
$/$50 3+$6($ 67$1'$5'
3,&.83 3+$6(% 86(5
3+$6(&
&21752/
1(875$/*5281' 86(5 386+%877216
5
86(5
86(5 )285(;75$
237,21$/
86(5
&21752/
86(5 386+%877216
($"'##1"34B
Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. Each operand need to be configured appropriately to perform
the required function. Each operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the
pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation is recognized
by various features that can use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The front panel keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously—a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.

Figure 5-57: Control pushbutton logic
6(77,1*
&21752/386+%87721
)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
6(77,1*6
^
6<67(06(783
!%5($.(56
!%5($.(5
!%5($.(53%&21752/
$1' 581
:KHQDSSOLFDEOH
2II
2)) 7,0(5
6<67(06(783 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
!%5($.(56 21 &21752/386+%7121
!%5($.(5 PVHF
!%5($.(53%&21752/
2II
$&'5
5.3.14 User-programmable pushbuttons

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1(48)
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
  FUNCTION: Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 USER PB 1
 PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
PUSHBTN 1 ON
5
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
 PUSHBTN 1 OFF
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

 0.1 s
PUSHBTN 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PUSHBTN 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1

 DELAY: 1.0 s
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05

 TIME: 0.00 s
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority

 Disabled
PUSHBUTTON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled


This feature is optional, specified at the time of ordering.

a
User-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The
number depends on the front panel ordered.
• Enhanced horizontal front panel — 16 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Enhanced vertical front panel — 6 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Basic horizontal front panel — 12 user-programmable pushbuttons
• Graphical front panel — 48 user-programmable pushbuttons (eight physical pushbuttons, 40 graphical interface
pushbuttons)
User-programmable pushbuttons require a front panel with that option. If the front panel was ordered separately,
update the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Change Front Panel.
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton or optional graphical front panel
interface) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical
applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. For example, set pushbuttons 1 to
5 to select settings groups 1 to 5, or set pushbutton 1 to clear event records. The user-programmable pushbuttons are
under the control level of password protection.
Example
To clear event records using pushbutton 1, set Settings > Product Setup > Clear Relay Records > Clear Event Records to
5 FlexLogic operand PUSHBUTTON 1 ON. Then program the pushbutton by setting Settings > Product Setup > User-
Programmable Pushbuttons > Pushbutton 1 Function to "Self-reset." For a graphical front panel, to use a side
pushbutton to clear the event records, it also needs to be programmed in a single-line diagram.
The figures show user-configurable pushbuttons for the front panels.
Figure 5-58: User-programmable pushbuttons (enhanced front panel)
USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER
LABEL 1 LABEL 2 LABEL 3 LABEL 4 LABEL 5 LABEL 6 LABEL 7 LABEL 8 LABEL 9 LABEL 10 LABEL 11 LABEL 12 LABEL 13 LABEL 14 LABEL 15 LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 5-59: User-programmable pushbuttons (basic front panel)
1 3 5 7 9 11
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
2 4 6 8 10 12
USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL USER LABEL
842779A1.cdr

Figure 5-60: User-programmable pushbuttons (graphical front panel)
3URJUDPDQ\EXWWRQVIRUSXVKEXWWRQVWR 3XVKEXWWRQVWR

5(6(7 (6&
(17(5
=e\dY\Y^>& >Udg_b[CdQRY\YdiQ^TCi^SXb_`XQc_b=UQcebU]U^dCicdU]
$&'5
Front panel pushbuttons and LEDs can be custom labeled as outlined in the Front Panel Labeling section in the previous
chapter.
Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any
pushbutton is active, the ANY PB ON operand is asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the
corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting. 5
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons depends on whether latched or self-reset mode is
programmed.
• Latched mode — In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET setting, by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton, or with the graphical front panel
interface. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control
power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET
setting, by directly pressing the active front panel pushbutton, or with the graphical front panel interface.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY
settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if
control is not executed within a specified time period.
• Self-reset mode — In self-reset mode, a user-programmable pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the
operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting, by pressing the front panel pushbutton, or by the graphical front panel
interface. A pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed physically or pressed in the graphical front panel
interface, plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via
FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET setting remains On has no effect on the pulse duration.
The pulse duration of the remote set or local front panel pushbutton must be at least 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or
60 ms for a 50 Hz system to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly
operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that can cause transient assertion of the
operating signals.

The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL
and PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings. If local inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands executed
through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands
executed through FlexLogic operands.
The inhibit functions are not applied to the autoreset feature. The inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to
prevent user-programmable pushbutton activation and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The inhibit functions can also be used to prevent pushbutton activation from the accidental pressing of the front panel
pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control
supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder. User-defined messages can also be associated with each
pushbutton and displayed on basic and enhanced front panels when the user-programmable pushbutton is activated, and
when in the latched mode when the user-programmable pushbutton is deactivated. With the graphical front panel
interface, instead of messages, the status of user-programmable pushbuttons can display on a single-line diagram and
can also display in annunciator page windows and in actual values page cells.
For the graphical front panel, the pushbuttons 1 to 8 are linked to the eight physical pushbuttons, and pushbuttons 9 and
above are mapped to the graphical interface pushbuttons. To set the buttons for pushbuttons 9 and above, access
Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor, click the PB symbol in the toolbox, then
configure pushbuttons 9 and above.
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION — This setting selects the mode of the pushbutton (Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled). If set to
“Disabled,” the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If
set to “Latched”, the pushbutton remains on until reset.
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT — This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. For example, the text displays in the Event Record. See the User-
5 definable Displays section in this chapter for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. On a
graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the label of the user-programmable pushbutton component on single-
line diagrams.
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT — This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message
and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the on status
text of the user-programmable pushbutton component on single-line diagrams. This setting is not applied to the physical
pushbuttons on the graphical front panel.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT — This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message
and displays when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Latched.” A message does not
display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be “Off” upon its
release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH MESSAGE
TIME setting. On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the off status text of the user-programmable
pushbutton component on single-line diagrams. This setting is not applied to the physical pushbuttons on the graphical
front panel.
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD — This setting specifies the time required for a front panel pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed
active. This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that user-programmable pushbutton operation requires the
front panel pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a 50 Hz system. This minimum
time is required prior to activating the user-programmable pushbutton hold timer.
PUSHBTN 1 SET — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to activate the user-programmable pushbutton
element. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a 50 Hz system.
PUSHBTN 1 RESET — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to deactivate the user-programmable pushbutton
element. This setting is applicable only if the user-programmable pushbutton is in “Latched” mode.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST — This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable
only if the pushbutton is in “Latched” mode.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY — This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in “Latched”
mode.

PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton
operation from the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton operation
from the front panel pushbuttons. This inhibit functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME — This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the user-
programmable pushbutton active status after the front panel pushbutton or graphical front panel interface pushbutton
has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton; the length
of time the operand selected by PUSHBTN 1 SET remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive the front panel pushbutton LED. If this
setting is “Off,” then LED operation is directly linked to the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. This setting is not applied to
Pushbuttons 9 and above on the graphical front panel, where the label background shows the orange glow color for the
“on” state.
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE — This setting controls the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton on message that is
programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings, and the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton
off message that is programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT settings. This settings has no effect on the
When set to “Disabled” user-programmable pushbutton messages do not display. Otherwise the on message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes activated, and if in the “Latched” mode the off message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes deactivated.
When set to “Normal”, the duration the message displays is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
When set to “High Priority”, the duration of the off message is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting, but the on
message is displayed as long as the user-programmable pushbutton is activated. While activated, target and other
messages are suppressed. To allow front panel keypad operation, when a keypad button is pressed the message is
suppressed for 10 seconds. 5
PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS — If this setting is enabled, each user-programmable pushbutton state change is logged as an
event into the event recorder.
The figures show the user-programmable pushbutton logic.

Figure 5-61: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 1 of 2)

6(77,1*
386+%87721)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
/DWFKHG /$7&+(' 7RXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
6HOI5HVHW SXVKEXWWRQVORJLF
VKHHW
25 )URPIURQWSDQHO
6(77,1* 6(77,1*
386+%71/2&$/ 386+%71+2/'
2II 73.3
)URPIURQWSDQHO $1'

$1'
25 7,0(5
)URPJUDSKLFDOIURQWSDQHO
PV
6(77,1* 25
386+%716(7 PV +]
2II 7,0(5
1RQYRODWLOHODWFK
PV
6(77,1* $1' 6
$1'
386+%715(027( /DWFK
2II PV +] 5
7,0(5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1' PV
386+%877212))

6(77,1*
386+%715(6(7 $1'
2II
25 7RXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
6(77,1* 25 386+%8772121 SXVKEXWWRQVORJLF
6(77,1* VKHHW
386+%71$872567'(/$<
386+%71$872567
73.3
(QDEOHG
$1'
5
'LVDEOHG $1'

7,0(5
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1' PV 25
386+%8772121

6(77,1*
$1' 386+%71'5232877,0(

25
7567
$1'
$FGU

Figure 5-62: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 2 of 2)
OFF MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
LATCHED FLASH MESSAGE TIME
SETTINGS
0 PUSHBTN ID TEXT
AND
OR TRST = XXXXXXXXXX
PUSHBTN OFF TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
Instantaneous
From user-programmable reset * Enhanced and standard front panels
pushbuttons logic sheet 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
AND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON ON PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
ON MESSAGE
SETTING ENGAGE MESSAGE
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
AND
= Disabled
= High Priority SETTINGS
= Normal PUSHBTN ID TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
OR
PUSHBTN ON TEXT
SETTING
= XXXXXXXXXX
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
0 Enhanced and standard front panels
AND
TRST The message is temporarily removed if
5
any keypad button is pressed. Ten
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
Instantaneous
Instantaneous reset is executed if any reset * the message.
front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC

1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
Pushbutton 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND LED
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON 2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
OR ANY PB ON
SETTING Pushbutton 1
LED
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON = any FlexLogic operand
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
842239A1.CDR
5.3.15 Flex state parameters

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
 FLEX STATE PARAMETER 1: Range: FlexLogic operand
 PARAMETERS  Off

PARAMETER 256: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient
monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are
packed so that 16 states are readable in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all states of
interest are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits can be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. Sixteen registers accommodate the 256
state bits.

5.3.16 User-definable displays
5.3.16.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
 USER-DEFINABLE INVOKE AND SCROLL: Range: FlexLogic operand
 DISPLAYS  Off
 USER DISPLAY 1 See below

 

 USER DISPLAY 16
 
This feature is supported with enhanced and basic front panels.

This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAY menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate
text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
This feature is not supported with the optional graphical front panel.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
• Keypad — Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAY menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that
only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the up and down arrow keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
5 • User-programmable control input — The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any
FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the
programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the
first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the down arrow key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay starts to cycle through the user
displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not
at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
5.3.16.2 User display 1(16)

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS  USER DISPLAY 1(16)
 USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
 
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DISP 1 ITEM 1: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
 0

DISP 1 ITEM 5: Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
 0
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the ENTER key. The display then prompts with ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST? After selecting “Yes,” a message
indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus
are automatically configured with the proper content—this content can be edited subsequently.

This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user
display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field – the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered
in a user display – the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A user display can be entered from the front panel keypad or the EnerVista interface (preferred for convenience). The
following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the front panel keypad. Press the
HELP key at any time for context sensitive help information.
1. Select the line to be edited.
2. Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3. Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4. Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6. Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the front panel
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of “0” for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected system
display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion). See the Modbus Memory Map section earlier in this chapter for information on how to calculate the decimal
value to enter on the front panel.
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays show in
sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes” option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
An example of user display setup and result is shown as follows.
5
 USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker
  Current X ~ A
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker
 Current Y ~ A
DISP 1 ITEM 1: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register

 6016 address, corresponding to first tilde marker
DISP 1 ITEM 2: Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register

 6357 address, corresponding to second tilde marker
DISP 1 ITEM 3: This item is not being used. There is no corresponding

 0 tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

 0 tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

 0 tilde marker in top or bottom lines.
USER DISPLAYS Current X 0.850 Shows the resultant display content

 Current Y 0.327 A
If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the bottom
line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items are different.

5.3.17 Direct inputs and outputs
5.3.17.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O
 DIRECT I/O DIRECT OUTPUTS Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1
  DEVICE ID: 1
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING Range: Yes, No

 CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING Range: Yes, No

 CONFIGURATION: Yes
DIRECT I/O DATA Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps

 RATE: 64 kbps
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL Range: Disabled, Enabled

 CROSSOVER: Disabled
 CRC ALARM CH1 See page 5-161

 
 CRC ALARM CH2

 
 UNRETURNED See page 5-162

  MESSAGES ALARM CH1
 UNRETURNED

5  MESSAGES ALARM CH2
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering. With the
option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not
visible.
Direct inputs and outputs exchange status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays connected directly
via type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GOOSE, except that communications
takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards that support two channels,
direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output messages both
ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are sent only in one
direction. Messages are resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver.
Direct Inputs and Outputs are initiated automatically and start running once at least one Direct Output in the given UR is
set to anything but Off.
For the direct I/Os to function properly, all UR devices sending I/Os using an Inter-Relay Communications card must have
identical firmware revisions.
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are disabled, and
vice versa.
Direct output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic operands:
• DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break) — Indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR-series
relay are not being received back by the relay
• DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline) — Indicate that direct output messages
from at least one direct device are not being received

Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name
strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting, which identifies the relay in all direct output
messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring need to have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of
the direct input and output message.
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION is “Yes”), all direct output messages are received back. If not, the direct input/output ring break
self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating
over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel
communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is
approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each "bridge."
Table 5-14: Direct input and output data rates
Module Supported data rates
2A, 2B 64 kbps
2E, 2F (legacy modules) 64 kbps
2G, 2H 128 kbps
2I, 2J 64 kbps, 128 kbps
72, 73 64 kbps, 128 kbps
74, 75 64 kbps
76, 77 64 kbps
7A, 7B, 7C, 7D 64 kbps, 128 kbps
7E, 7F, 7G 64 kbps
7H, 7I, 7J, 7K 64 kbps, 128 kbps 5
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7Q 64 kbps
7R, 7S 64 kbps
7T, 7W 64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to a T35 with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network
regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. See the Inputs
and Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
Example 1: Extending the input/output capabilities of a UR-series relay

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are
connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure.

Figure 5-63: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and
from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection
(for example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).
Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection

5 A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown.
Figure 5-64: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme
85,(' %/2&.
85,(' 85,(' 85,('
($"'!"1!34B
For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown as follows) is recommended for this application.
Figure 5-65: Interlocking bus protection scheme via direct inputs/outputs
7; 5;
85,('
5; 7;
5; 7; 5; 7;

85,(' 85,('
7; 5; 7; 5;
7; 5;
85,('
5; 7;
($"'!&1!34B


Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’ between the
origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications distance’ by a factor of
two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle 5
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power
system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time is adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system cycle.
The complete application requires addressing a number of issues, such as failure of both the communications rings, failure
or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, and so on. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature
primarily are used to address these concerns.
Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes

Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown.

Figure 5-66: Three-terminal line application
85,(' 85,('
85,(' ($"'!#1!34B
A permissive pilot-aided scheme can be implemented in a two-ring configuration, shown as follows (IEDs 1 and 2
constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring).
Figure 5-67: Single-channel open loop configuration
7; 5; 5;

85,(' 85,('
5; 7; 7;
5 85,('
5;
7;
($"'!$1!34B

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
In this scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained
in the Inputs and Outputs section. Implement a blocking pilot-aided scheme with more security and, ideally, faster
message delivery time. This is accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown here.

Figure 5-68: Dual-channel closed loop (dual-ring) configuration
7; 7; 5; 5;

85,(' 85,('
5; 5; 7; 7;
7; 5;
85,('
5; 7;
($"'!%1!34B

DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes” 5
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
The two communications configurations can be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Take speed, reliability,
and cost into account when selecting the required architecture.
5.3.17.2 CRC alarm CH1(2)

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  CRC ALARM CH1(2)
 CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

 MESSAGE COUNT: 600
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

 THRESHOLD: 10
CRC ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

The T35 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds
up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC
ALARM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.

Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output.
Latching and acknowledging conditions—if required—are programmed accordingly.
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that
failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS  CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual value.
• Message count and length of the monitoring window — To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1
message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (at 128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct
outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to “10000,” corresponds a time window of about 160
minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity,
the monitoring time interval shortens. Take this into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC
ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT is set to 10 × 60 × 1 = 600.
• Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER) — The CRC check can fail if one or more bits in a packet are
corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain
assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results
in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4
implies 1 bit error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet,
having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.
5.3.17.3 Unreturned messages alarm CH1(2)

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
 UNRETURNED UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1  FUNCTION: Disabled
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1


5 MESSAGE COUNT: 600
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

 THRESHOLD: 10
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

The T35 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring
configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned
messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of
unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have
failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1
UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output.
Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, are programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.
5.3.18 Teleprotection
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  TELEPROTECTION
 TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION Range: Disabled, Enabled
NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Range: 2, 3

 2

NUMBER OF COMM Range: 1, 2

 CHANNELS: 1
LOCAL RELAY ID Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 0
TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1

 NUMBER: 0
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering. With the
option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not
visible.
Digital teleprotection transfers protection commands between two or three relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and
deterministic way. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT).
Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct fiber,
copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted
continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel
data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and
vice versa.
NUMBER OF TERMINALS — Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.
5
NUMBER OF CHANNELS — Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is “3” (three-terminal system),
set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to “2.” For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to “1” or “2” (redundant
channels).
LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER — In installations that use
multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct
relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and
comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to
loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel. If an incorrect ID is
found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL FlexLogic
operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes,
the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS  CHANNEL TESTS  VALIDITY OF CHANNEL
CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of “0” for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be
checked. On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as
such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.
5.3.19 Installation
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION
 INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
  Not Programmed
RELAY NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 Relay-1
STATION NAME Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 Station-1

REMOTE RESOURCES CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS — To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit does not allow
signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed." This setting is "Not Programmed" by default. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message displays until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
RELAY NAME — This setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name appears on generated reports.
STATION NAME — This setting allows the user to associate the relay with the installed substation.
5.4 Remote resources

5.4.1 Remote resources configuration
When the T35 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in the EnerVista software to allow configuration of the HardFiber system.
Figure 5-69: Remote Resources configuration menu
The remote resources settings configure a T35 with a Process Bus Module to work with HardFiber Bricks. Remote resources
configuration is only available through the EnerVista software, and is not available through the T35 front panel. A Brick
provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to be the remote
interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The T35 with a Process Bus Module has access to
all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection between
specific fiber optic ports on the T35 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure specific
currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
• Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay Process
Bus Module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
• Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages. AC
bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
• Configure signal sources. This functionality of the T35 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents
and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
• Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's
functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other
equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper
wiring.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP
• Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are
distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a Process Bus Module, see the HardFiber Process Bus System
Instruction Manual.
5.5 System setup

5.5.1 AC inputs
5.5.1.1 Current banks

SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  CURRENT BANK F1(U5)
 CURRENT BANK F1 PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
  PRIMARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
 SECONDARY: 1 A
PHASE CT F1 POL: Range: Standard, Inverted-3Ph, Inverted Ph-A,

 STANDARD Inverted Ph-B, Inverted Ph-C
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

 PRIMARY: 1 A
GROUND CT F1 Range: 1 A, 5 A
 SECONDARY: 1 A 5
GROUND CT F1 POL: Range: Standard, Inverted
 STANDARD
Six banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents
the module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M, U} and a = {1, 5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3I0) is used as the input
for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor can also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input can be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. See chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation,
the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given the
following current banks:
• F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio
• F5: CT bank with 1000:1 ratio
• M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1 Eq. 5-6
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 and 800:1 ratio
CTs are adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1
currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu operates on 1000 A primary.

SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
The T35 allows the reversal of the CT polarity for a single phase or three phases without changing the wiring of the relay CT
slots through settings PHASE CT F1 (Xa) POL and GROUND CT F1 (Xa) POL.
PHASE CT F1 POL — If CTs are wired with the correct polarity in all phases, i.e. CT polarity reversal is not required, “Standard”
should be selected. If CT polarity is incorrect in just one phase, then select “Inverted Ph-A (B or C)”; choosing the affected
phase. If CT polarities of all three phases are incorrect, select “Inverted-3Ph” to correct the CT polarities for all three phases.
It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture the CTs current signal as applied to the relay terminal
irrespective of this setting. This ensures correct relay behavior when recorded oscillography is played back to the relay.
GROUND CT F1 POL — If the ground CT is wired with the correct polarity, select “Standard” for this setting. If the Ground CT
polarity is incorrect, then select “Inverted” to correct it. It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture ground
CT current signal as applied to the relay terminal irrespective of this setting. This ensures the correct relay behavior when
recorded oscillography is played back to the relay.
It is important that the settings PHASE CT F1 POL and GROUND CT F1 POL are set to the correct values before putting
the relay into operation. Selecting the wrong value or changing this setting whilst relay is in operation would result
in undesirable operation of the protection and control functions.
5.5.1.2 Voltage banks

SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  VOLTAGE BANK F5(U5)
 VOLTAGE BANK F5 PHASE VT F5 Range: Wye, Delta
  CONNECTION: Wye
PHASE VT F5 Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1


5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V
PHASE VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

 RATIO: 1.00 :1
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca

 CONNECTION: Vag
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

 SECONDARY: 66.4 V
AUXILIARY VT F5 Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

 RATIO: 1.00 :1
Three banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M, U} and a = {5}
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta.” An open-delta source VT connection is entered as “Delta.”
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta
connection, the secondary voltage is 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage, which is 115 / 3 = 66.4.
On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage
value entered is 120; that is, 14400 / 120.
Any ordered module banks containing VTs must be plugged into slot F.

5.5.2 Power system

SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM
 POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
  60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION: Range: ABC, ACB

 ABC
FREQUENCY AND PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 REFERENCE: SRC 1
SIGNAL TO TRACK: Range: Auto, 3-ph VT, 1-ph VT, 3-ph CT, 1-ph CT
 Auto
ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 REFERENCE: None
ALT SIGNAL TO TRACK: Range: 3-ph VT, 1-ph VT, 3-ph CT, 1-ph CT
 3-ph VT
FREQUENCY TRACKING: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Enabled
NOMINAL FREQUENCY — The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if
the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This can happen if the signals are not present or are
heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid
frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
When using a Process Bus Module and SV streams, the SV streams need to be defaulted before changing this setting, 5
under Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config. After changing the NOMINAL FREQUENCY, restart the relay using
Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.
PHASE ROTATION — The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and
power parameters. The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence and informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected
to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE — This setting determines which signal source is used for frequency tracking and phase
angle reference. Within this source, a specific signal shall be selected for tracking frequency calculation and for the phase
angle reference, and such selection will be determined by SIGNAL TO TRACK setting below.
SIGNAL TO TRACK — This setting specifies the signal in a source to be used for tracking frequency calculation and for phase
angle reference.
When Auto is selected, the AC signal to be used in a source is prioritized based on the AC inputs configuration in this
source, in which phase voltages takes precedence, followed by the auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally
ground current, as it was in legacy UR f/w releases. With the Auto setting, the signal selection is static rather than dynamic,
i.e. AC signals are selected based upon the source configuration only, regardless of whether a particular signal is applied to
the relay or not. If VT or CT is selected (3-ph VT, 1-ph VT, 3-ph CT, 1-ph CT), the AC signal to be used is directly based on this
selection and will revert to nominal frequency if selected signal is below 0.06pu.
For the three-phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing (ANGLE REF = VA or IA), while Clarke transformation of
the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking (VFREQUENCY = (2VA - VB - VC) / 3) for better performance
during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
Phase angle of the reference signal always displays zero degrees and all other phase angles are relative to this signal. If
the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced to any external
AC signal and are referenced to the internal reference to continue maintaining proper phase relationship between all other
measured AC signal.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. This results in very precise correlation of phase angle indications between different UR-
series relays.

ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS REFERE — This setting determines the alternative source for frequency tracking and phase angle
reference. If the signal specified by the main FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting is lost, the reference will be
switched to this alternative reference.
The switching between the main reference and the alternative reference shall be allowed (activated) only if the following
conditions are true,
1. Frequency tracking is enabled, AND
2. The alternative reference is set to a source other than None, AND
3. The selected signals between main and alternative FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE are different.
Note that even the same source is selected in the main and in the alternative FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE, but
different signals are selected in the main and the alternative SIGNAL TO TRACK, the switching is also allowed (activated).
When main source signal becomes available again, relay will switch back to the main source.
ALT SIGNAL TO TRACK — Same as the SIGNAL TO TRACK setting in the main FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE, but the
signal defined here is used for the ALTERNATE FREQ AND PHS REFERENCE. When the same source is selected in both main
REFERENCE and alternate REFERENCE, the signal selected in this setting must be different from the signal selected in the
main REFERENCE, otherwise no switching is performed.
If neither main nor alternate signals are available, tracking frequency is reverting to nominal until either main or alternate
signals are available and measurable.
FREQUENCY TRACKING — Set it to “Disabled” only in unusual circumstances; consult GE Grid Solutions for special variable-
frequency applications.
The frequency tracking feature functions only when the T35 is in the “Programmed” mode. If the T35 is “Not
Programmed,” then metering values are available but can exhibit significant errors.
5
Systems with an ACB phase sequence require special consideration. See the Phase Relationships of Three-phase
Transformers section of chapter 5.
5.5.3 Signal sources

SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES  SOURCE 1(6)
 SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1 NAME: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
  SRC 1
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT
 None inputs are displayed.
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT
 None inputs are displayed.
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: Range: None, F5, M5, U5

 None Only phase voltage inputs are displayed
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: Range: None, F5, M5, U5

 None Only auxiliary voltage inputs are displayed
SRC 1 ALT PHASE CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs

 None
SRC 1 ALT GROUND CT: Range: None, F1,... up to any 6 CTs

 None
SWITCH TO ALT CT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

SRC 1 ALT PHASE VT: Range: None, F5, M5, U5

 None
SRC 1 ALT AUX VT: Range: None, F5, M5, U5

 None
SRC 1 SWITCH ALT VT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate
for the associated source.
The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter
represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called
“5” in a particular CT/VT module. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for details.
It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others are referred.
For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5,” scaled to whichever CT
has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio
and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered,
including specifying which CTs are summed together.
5.5.3.1 User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the
element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the
parameter can be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One 5
setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
5.5.3.2 AC input actual values

The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and
voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels display
here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values.
5.5.3.3 Disturbance detectors (internal)

The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on
the protected system. The 50DD function is used directly in some elements in the relay, for example VT Fuse Failure
detector or Fault Report. It can also be used to supervise current-based elements to prevent maloperation as a result of
the wrong settings or external CT wiring problem. A disturbance detector is provided for each source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector logic is as
follows.

Figure 5-70: Disturbance detector logic (example using six sources)

6(77,1*
352'8&76(783',63/$<
$&78$/
3523(57,(6&855(17
6285&( &872))/(9(/
&855(173+$625
7,0(5
,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2)) )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'

,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2)) 25 F\F 65&''23
,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2))
:KHUH,·LVF\FOHVROG
6(77,1*
352'8&76(783',63/$<
$&78$/
3523(57,(6&855(17
6285&( &872))/(9(/
&855(173+$625
7,0(5
,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2)) )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'

,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2)) 25 F\F 65&''23
,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2))
:KHUH,·LVF\FOHVROG
6(77,1*
352'8&76(783',63/$<
$&78$/
3523(57,(6&855(17
5
6285&( &872))/(9(/
&855(173+$625
7,0(5
,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2)) )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'

,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2)) 25 F\F 65&''23
,B __,B_ _,B _ _ ! &87 2))
:KHUH,·LVF\FOHVROG
$FGU
The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting
(PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.
5.5.3.4 Example for use of sources

An example of the use of sources is shown in the following figure. A relay can have the following hardware configuration:
Increasing slot position letter -->
UR CT/VT module 1 CT/VT module 2 CT/VT module 3
B30, B90, C70, F35, N60, T35 8 CTs 4 CTs, 4 VTs 4 CTs, 4 VTs
C60, C95, D60, G30, G60, L30, L90, M60, T60 CTs VTs not applicable
This configuration can be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half
system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application,
and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.

Figure 5-71: Example of use of sources
F1 DSP Bank
F5
Source 1 Source 2
Amps Amps
Source 3
51BF-1 51BF-2
U1 Volts Amps
A W Var 87T
A W Var 51P
Volts Amps
M1
M1 Source 4
5
UR Relay
M5
827794A1.CDR
Y LV D HV AUX
SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 3
Phase CT M1 F1+F5 None
Ground CT M1 None None
Phase VT M5 None None
Aux VT None None U1
5.5.3.5 Source switching

The T35 supports providing current and voltage signals input from both main and alternate CTs and VTs with a user-
defined switching between them. This is beneficial in applications, where the T35 can provide protection when main CT or
VT are not available due to station re-configuration. Some application examples are shown as follows.

Figure 5-72: Examples of VTs (a) and CTs (b) switching from the main to alternate
Bus 1 Main bus

VT 1 VT 2 Transfer VT 1
Bus 2 bus
CT 1 CT 2
CT 1 UR UR
a) b)
859791A1.vsdx
This figure depicts examples of VT switching from VT1 to VT2 when Bus 1 is de-energized, and the line is energized via Bus
2. CT switching example (b) depicts connecting bus transfer breaker CT to the line relay when main line breaker is taken for
maintenance and the line is energized via transfer bus, in this case the UR senses current from either CT 1 when line is
energized via main line breaker or via CT 2 when the line is energized via transfer bus breaker.
Figure 5-73: Logic diagram of switching CTs and VTs from the main to alternate banks
SETTINGS SETTINGS
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:
5 None
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:

None
SOURCE 1 AUX VT:
None None
To SOURCE 1 To SOURCE 1
SRC 1 ALT PHASE CT: currents phasor SRC 1 ALT PHASE VT: voltage phasor
calculations calculations
None None
SRC 1 ALT GROUND CT: SRC 1 ALT AUX VT:
None None
SRC 1 SWITCH ALT CT: SRC 1 SWITCH ALT VT:

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off 0c SRC1 CT SW PROT BLK Off 0c SRC1 VT SW PROT BLK
2c 2c
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC1 CT ALT BANK ON
SRC1 VT ALT BANK ON
859825A1.vsdx
When a FlexLogic operand assigned to SRC 1 SWITCH ALT CT/VT is logical "0," the analog data is processed from the main CT
and VT analog data banks. When this operand is logical "1," the analog data is processed from the alternate CT and VT
analog data banks.
Note that
• Banks assigned to the same function for the main and alternate input data have to have the same CTs and VTs
nominals and connections, otherwise a warning is generated and switching functionality is prohibited. For example,
banks assigned to the PHASE CT and ALT PHASE CT have to have same primary and secondary CT values. Ground CT
input has to be same type (cannot be one regular and another sensitive ground CT input).
• During switching from the main CT/VT input data to alternate input data and vice versa, all relay functions are blocked
for two power cycles and metering data does not update
• CT bank switching is allowed if both main and alternate CT banks have the exact same combination for CTs
summation
• When it is required that switching state from the main to alternate be memorized in case of T35 restart or when the
switching signal is a pulse by nature, such as a pushbutton or IEC 61850 GOOSE, use Non-volatile Latches

• Since switching occurs in both the Phase and Ground CT (Phase and Aux VT), it is possible to keep the same set, for
example phase bank under both the main source and alternate source, but different set for ground/aux signal
5.5.4 Transformer
5.5.4.1 Menu
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER
 TRANSFORMER  GENERAL See below
  
 WINDING 1 See page 5-175

 

 WINDING 6
 
 THERMAL INPUTS See page 5-185

 
The T35 provides primary protection for medium to high voltage power transformers. It performs this function on a variety
of power transformer configurations with up to six sets of three phase inputs available.
5.5.4.2 General transformer settings

SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  GENERAL 5
 GENERAL NUMBER OF WINDINGS: Range: 2 to 6 in steps of 1
  2
REFERENCE WINDING: Range: Automatic Selection, Winding 1, Winding 2,...,

 Winding 1 Winding 6
PHASE COMPENSATION: Range: Internal (software), External (with CTs)

 Internal (software)
LOAD LOSS AT RATED Range: 1 to 20000 kW in steps of 1

 LOAD: 100 kW
RATED WINDING TEMP Range: 55°C (oil), 65°C (oil), 80°C (dry), 115°C (dry),
 RISE: 65°C (oil) 150°C (dry)
NO LOAD LOSS: Range: 1 to 20000 kW in steps of 1

 10 kW
TYPE OF COOLING: Range: OA, FA, Non-directed FOA/FOW, Directed FOA/FOW

 OA
TOP-OIL RISE OVER Range: 1 to 200°C in steps of 1

 AMBIENT: 35°C
THERMAL CAPACITY: Range: 0.00 to 200.00 kWh/°C in steps of 0.01

 100.00 kWh/°C
WINDING THERMAL TIME Range: 0.25 to 15.00 min. in steps of 0.01

 CONSTANT: 2.00 min
The general transformer settings apply to all windings. Settings specific to each winding are shown in the following section.
NUMBER OF WINDINGS — Selects the number of windings for transformer setup.
REFERENCE WINDING — Reference winding is the winding to which all other winding currents are scaled. That is, the
currents from all other windings are normalized (magnitude compensation) to this winding, and the per unit value of the
differential currents, the restraint currents, and the corresponding differential characteristics (pickup, break points, and so

on) are all based on the CT Nominal of this winding. The reference winding can be selected either automatically or
manually. When automatic reference winding selection is chosen, the winding with the smallest margin of CT primary
current with respect to the winding rated current is selected as the reference winding (see details in Magnitude
Compensation section later in this chapter). The selected reference winding can be viewed under Actual Values >
Metering > Transformer > Differential and Restraint.
In some applications where CT primary of the winding is much higher than the winding rated current, automatic
selection of reference winding can result in excessive magnitude compensation factor, and as a result can cause
the winding current clipping. Therefore, with the automatic selection of the reference winding, further checking is
required to ensure no winding currents after magnitude compensation can exceed 46 pu. If this happens, use
manual selection of reference winding to avoid this. See the T35/T60 Reference Winding Selection and CT Ratio
Mismatch Application Note (GET-8548) for information.
PHASE COMPENSATION — Selects the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay.
If set to “Internal (software)”, the transformer phase shift is compensated internally by the relay algorithm.
If set to “External (with CTs)”, the transformer phase shift is externally compensated by the CT connections. The Delta
connected CTs on the Wye winding compensate the phase shift of the currents between the transformer primary and
secondary windings (see the following figure). This is the old way of phase compensation.
And also to measure the currents on both sides of the transformer that correspond to the transformation ratio, divide the
CT primary by SQRT 3. This compensates for the increase of SQRT 3 caused by the Delta CT connection.
Therefore, the Actual Value of current and power cannot be used for measurements in this case.
Figure 5-74: Wye winding and Delta CT connection
LOAD LOSS AT RATED LOAD — Take this setting from the transformer nameplate. If not available from the nameplate, the
2
setting value can be computed as P R = I n W u R , where In(w) is the winding rated current and R is the three-phase series
resistance. The setting is used as an input for the calculation of the hottest-spot winding temperature.
RATED WINDING TEMP RISE — This setting defines the winding temperature rise over 30 °C ambient temperature. The setting
is selected automatically for the transformer type as shown in the following table.
The loss of life function calculates the insulation aging acceleration factor using the settings entered in this section, by
following equation:
15000
§ ------------------------ 15000
- -------------------------·
© 4 H_R + 273 – 4 H t + 273¹
F AA t = e Eq. 5-7
where ΘH_R is the rated hottest-spot temperature as per the table,

and ΘH(t) is the actual computed winding hottest-spot temperature

The aging acceleration factor is computed every minute. It has a value of 1.0 when the actual winding hottest spot
temperature is equal to the rated temperature, is greater than 1 if the actual temperature is above the rated temperature,
and less than 1 if the actual temperature is below the rated temperature.
Table 5-15: Automatic Rated Winding Temperature Selection
Rated Winding Power Capacity Normal Life At ΘH_R
Temperature Expectancy
Oil 55 °C ≤ 500 kVA 180000 hrs 95 °C
4
≤ 100 MVA 6.5 × 10 hrs 95 °C
65 °C ≤ 500 kVA 20 years 110 °C
≤ 100 MVA 6.5 × 104 hrs 110 °C
> 100 MVA 6.5 × 104 hrs 110 °C
Dry 80 °C Any 20 years 140 °C
115 °C Any 20 years 175 °C
150 °C Any 20 years 210 °C
NO LOAD LOSS — This setting is obtained from the transformer data and is used to calculate the aging acceleration factor.
TYPE OF COOLING — Defines the type of transformer cooling and is used to calculate the aging acceleration factor. The
values and their description for this setting are as follows:
“OA”: oil-air
“FA”: forced air
“Non-directed FOA/FOW”: non-directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water
“Directed FOA/FOW”: directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water
TOP OIL RISE OVER AMBIENT — Available from the transformer nameplate data
5
THERMAL CAPACITY — Available from the transformer nameplate data. If not, see the following calculations. For the “OA”
and “FA” cooling types:
C = 0.06 (core and coil assembly in lbs.) + 0.04 (tank and fittings in lbs.) +1.33 (gallons of oil), Wh/°C; or
C = 0.0272 (core and coil assembly in kg) + 0.01814 (tank and fittings in kg) + 5.034 (L of oil), Wh/°C
For the “Non-directed FOA/FOW” (non-directed forced-oil-air/forced-oil-water) or “Directed FOA/FOW” (directed forced-oil-
air/forced-oil-water) cooling types, the thermal capacity is given by:
C = 0.06 (core and coil assembly in lbs.) + 0.06 (tank and fittings in lbs.) + 1.93 (gallons of oil), Wh/°C; or
C =0.0272 (weight of core and coil assembly in kg) + 0.0272 (weight of tank and fittings in kg) + 7.305 (L of oil), Wh/°C
For dry-type power transformers:
C = 0.048 × (weight of copper winding); or
C = 0.015 × (weight of core and copper windings from the nameplate); or
C = 0.12 × (weight of aluminum windings); or
C = 0.02 × (weight of core and aluminum coils from the nameplate)
WINDING THERMAL TIME CONSTANT — Required for insulation aging calculation. If this value is not available from the
transformer data, select “2 min.”
5.5.4.3 Windings 1 to 6
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING 1(6)
 WINDING 1 WINDING 1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
  SRC 1 (or the user-defined name)
WINDING 1 STATUS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 On
WINDING 1 RATED MVA: Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 MVA in steps of 0.001

 100.000 MVA

WINDING 1 NOM φ-φ Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 kV in steps of 0.001

 VOLTAGE: 220.000 kV
WINDING 1 Range: Wye, Delta, Zig-zag

 CONNECTION: Wye
WINDING 1 GROUNDING: Range: Not within zone, Within zone

 Not within zone
WINDING ~ ANGLE WRT Range: –359.9 to 0.0° in steps of 0.1, (‘~’ > 1)
 WINDING 1: 0.0° (shown when viewed Winding is not Winding 1)
WINDING 1 RESISTANCE Range: 0.0001 to 100.0000 ohms in steps of 0.0001

 3φ: 10.0000 ohms
The T35 is provided with this optional feature, specified as an option at the time of ordering.
The settings specific to each winding are shown in the table.

Transformer differential protection uses the following calculated quantities (per phase): fundamental, second harmonic,
and fifth harmonic differential current phasors, and restraint current phasors. This information is extracted from the
current transformers (CTs) connected to the relay by correcting the magnitude and phase relationships of the currents for
each winding, so as to obtain zero (or near zero) differential currents under normal operating conditions. Traditionally,
these corrections were accomplished by interposing CTs and tapped relay windings with some combination of CT
connections.
The T35 simplifies these configuration issues. All CTs at the transformer are connected wye (polarity markings pointing
5 away from the transformer). User-entered settings in the relay characterizing the transformer being protected and allow
the relay to automatically perform all necessary magnitude, phase angle, and zero-sequence compensation.
This section describes the algorithms in the relay that perform this compensation and produce the required calculated
quantities for transformer differential protection, by means of the following example of a delta-wye (Δ-Y) connected power
transformer with the following data:
Table 5-16: Example of delta-wye connected power transformer data
Data Winding 1 Winding 2
Δ (delta) connection Y (wye) connection
Voltage Phasor Diagram
Phase Shift 0° 30° lag (i.e. phases of wye winding lag

corresponding phases of delta winding by 30°)
Grounding In-zone grounding bank Ungrounded
Rated MVA 100/133/166 MVA 100/133/166 MVA
Nominal φ-φ Voltage 220 kV 69 kV
CT Connection Wye Wye
CT Ratio 500/5 1500/5
Auxiliary Cooling Two stages of forced air Two stages of forced air
The abbreviated nomenclature for applicable relay settings is as follows:

Rotation = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  PHASE ROTATION
wtotal = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  GENERAL  NUMBER OF WINDINGS
Compensation = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  GENERAL  PHASE COMPENSATION
Source [w] = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING w  WINDING w SOURCE
Prated [w] = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING w  WINDING w RATED MVA

Vnominal [w] = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING w  WINDING w NOM F-F VOLTAGE
Connection [w] = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING w  WINDING w CONNECTION
Grounding [w] = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING w  WINDING w GROUNDING
Φ[w] = SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING w  WINDING w ANGLE WRT WINDING 1
CT primary [w] = the phase CT primary associated with Source [w]
Note that w = winding number, 1 to wtotal
The following transformer setup rules must be observed:
• The angle for the first winding from the transformer setup must be 0°, and the angles for the following windings must
be entered as negative (lagging) with respect to (WRT) the winding 1 angle
• The “Within zone” and “Not within zone” setting values refer to whether the winding is grounded. Select “Within zone”
if a neutral of a wye type winding, or a corner of a delta winding, is grounded within the zone, or whenever a
grounding transformer falls into the zone of protection.
• The connection status of a given winding with respect to the differential zone is provided dynamically by FlexLogic
operands (setting WINDING # STATUS). When the FlexLogic operand assigned to WINDING # STATUS is logical "1," the
corresponding winding is included with the differential zone. When the FlexLogic operand assigned to WINDING #
STATUS is logical "0," the corresponding winding is excluded from the differential zone. Typically, the operands formed
from the contact inputs that reflect positions of switches and/or breakers are used for such status control. If contact
discrepancy filtering is needed, accomplish this using appropriate FlexLogic to form a Virtual Output, representing the
current circuit status. If there is no need for a given winding to be dynamically switched in or out from the differential
zone, FlexLogic constant "On" can be used as the status, which has been preset as the default value of the STATUS
input of each winding.
5.5.4.4 Phase relationships of three-phase transformers

Power transformers that are built in accordance with ANSI and IEC standards are required to identify winding terminals
5
and phase relationships among the windings of the transformer.
ANSI standard C.37.12.70 requires that the terminal labels include the characters 1, 2, 3 to represent the names of the
individual phases. The phase relationship among the windings must be shown as a phasor diagram on the nameplate,
with the winding terminals clearly labeled. This standard states that the phase relationships are established for a condition
where the source phase sequence of 1-2-3 is connected to transformer windings labeled 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
IEC standard 60076-1 (1993) states that the terminal markings of the three phases follow national practice. The phase
relationship among the windings is shown as a specified notation on the nameplate, and there can be a phasor diagram.
In this standard, the arbitrary labeling of the windings is shown as I, II, and III. This standard states that the phase
relationships are established for a condition where a source phase sequence of I-II-III is connected to transformer
windings labeled I, II, and III respectively.
The reason the source phase sequence must be stated when describing the winding phase relationships is that these
relationships change when the phase sequence changes. The following example shows why this happens, using a
transformer described in IEC nomenclature as a type “Yd1” or in GE Multilin nomenclature as a “Y/d30.”
The example shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a phase angle in the delta winding that
lag the respective wye winding by 30°. The currents in the windings are also identified. Note that the total current out of the
delta winding is described by an equation.

Figure 5-75: Example of transformer

A B C N
IA IB IC
Ia' Ib' Ic'
Ia = Ia' – Ic' Ib = Ib' – Ia' Ic = Ic' – Ib'

a b c 828716A1.CDR
Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ABC, is connected to transformer terminals ABC respectively. The currents
then present for a balanced load are shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-76: Phasors for ABC sequence
828717A1.CDR
Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30° (in agreement with the transformer nameplate).
Now assume that a source, with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals ACB respectively. The currents
present for a balanced load are shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-77: Phasors for ACB sequence
$&'5

Note that the delta winding currents leads the wye winding currents by 30°, (which is a type Yd11 in IEC nomenclature and
a type Y/d330 in GE Multilin nomenclature) and which is in disagreement with the transformer nameplate. This is because
the physical connections and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed. The
transformer nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated phase sequence.
Phase relationship for the ACB sequence can be returned the transformer nameplate values by connecting source phases
A, B, and C to transformer terminals A, C, and B respectively. Although this restores the nameplate phase shifts, it causes
incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay and is therefore not recommended.
All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A, B, and C terminals to the power system
phases A, B, and C respectively. The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system phase
sequence of ABC, in accordance with the standards for power transformers. Users with a system phase sequence of ACB
must determine the transformer type for this sequence.
If a power system with ACB rotation is connected to the Wye winding terminals 1, 2, and 3, respectively, from a Y/d30
transformer, select a Power Rotation setting of ACB in the relay and enter data for the Y/d330 transformer type.
5.5.4.5 Magnitude compensation

Transformer protection presents problems in the application of current transformers. CTs should be matched to the
current rating of each transformer winding, so that normal current through the power transformer is equal on the
secondary side of the CT on different windings. However, because only standard CT ratios are available, this matching is
not always exact.
In our example, the transformer has a voltage ratio of 220 kV / 69 kV (that is, about 3.188 to 1) and a compensating CT ratio
is 500 A to 1500 A (that is, 1 to 3). Historically, this would have resulted in a steady state current at the differential relay.
Interposing CTs or tapped relay windings were used to minimize this error.
The T35 automatically corrects for CT mismatch errors. All currents are magnitude compensated to be in units of the CTs of
one winding before the calculation of differential and restraint quantities. 5
The reference winding (wref) is the winding to which all currents are referred. This means that the differential and restraint
currents are in per unit of nominal of the CTs on the reference winding. This is important to know because the settings of
the operate characteristic of the percent differential element (pickup, breakpoints 1 and 2) are entered in terms of the
same per unit of nominal.
The reference winding is chosen by the relay to be the winding that has the smallest margin of CT primary current with
respect to winding rated current, meaning that the CTs on the reference winding most likely begin to saturate before those
on other windings with heavy through currents. The characteristics of the reference winding CTs determine how the
percent differential element operate characteristic need to be set.
The T35 determines the reference winding as follows:
1. Calculate the rated current (Irated) for each winding:
P rated > w @
I rated > w @ = --------------------------------
- , where w = 1, 2, }w total
3 u V nom > w @ Eq. 5-8
Note: enter the self-cooled MVA rating for the Prated setting.
2. Calculate the CT margin (Imargin) for each winding:
CT primary > w @
I margin = ---------------------------------- , where w = 1, 2, }w total
I rated > w @ Eq. 5-9
3. Choose the winding with the lowest CT margin.
In our example, the reference winding is chosen as follows.
1. Calculate the rated current for windings 1 and 2:
P rated > 1 @ 100 MVA P rated > 2 @ 100 MVA

I rated > 1 @ = -------------------------------
- = ---------------------------- = 262.4 A , I rated > 2 @ = -------------------------------
- = ------------------------- = 836.7 A
3 u V nom > 1 @ 3 u 220 kV 3 u V nom > 2 @ 3 u 69 kV Eq. 5-10
ÖØ Ö ÖØ ÖØ
2. With these rated currents, calculate the CT margin for windings 1 and 2:
CT primary > 1 @ 500 A CT primary > 2 @ 1500 A

I margin > 1 @ = --------------------------------- = ----------------- = 1.91 , I margin > 2 @ = --------------------------------- = ----------------- = 1.79
I rated > 1 @ 262.4 A I rated > 2 @ 836.7 A Eq. 5-11
ÖØ Ö ÖØ ÖØ
ÖØ Ö ÖØ ÖØ
3. Since Imargin[2] < Imargin[1], the reference winding wref is winding 2.
The reference winding is shown in ACTUAL VALUESÖØ
ÖØ Ö
 METERINGÖ ÖØ
 TRANSFORMERÖØ ÖØ
 DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINTÖØ

REFERENCE WINDING.
The unit for calculation of the differential and restraint currents and base for the differential restraint settings is the CT
primary associated with the reference winding. In this example, the unit CT is 1500:5 on winding 2.
Magnitude compensation factors (M) are the scaling values by which each winding current is multiplied to refer it to the
reference winding. The T35 calculates magnitude compensation factors for each winding as follows:
I primary > w @ u V nom > w @
- , where w = 1, 2, }w total
M > w @ = ---------------------------------------------------------------
I primary > w ref @ u V nom > w ref @ Eq. 5-12
In our example, the magnitude compensation factors are calculated as follows:
I primary > 1 @ u V nom > 1 @ 500 A u 220 kV

M > 1 @ = -------------------------------------------------
- = ----------------------------------- = 1.0628
I primary > 2 @ u V nom > 2 @ 1500 A u 69 kV Eq. 5-13
I primary > 2 @ u V nom > 2 @ 1500 A u 69 kV

M > 2 @ = -------------------------------------------------
- = ----------------------------------- = 1.0000
I primary > 2 @ u V nom > 2 @ 1500 A u 69 kV Eq. 5-14
The maximum allowed magnitude compensation factor (and hence the maximum allowed CT ratio mismatch) is 32.
5
5.5.4.6 Phase and zero sequence compensation
Power transformers can be connected to provide phase shift, such as the common Δ-Y connection with its 30° phase shift.
Historically, CT connections were arranged to compensate for this phase error so that the relaying operated correctly.
In our example, the transformer has the Δ-Y connection. Traditionally, CTs on the Wye connected transformer winding
(winding 2) are connected in a delta arrangement, which compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the Delta
connected winding (winding 1), so that line currents from both windings can be compared at the relay. The Delta
connection of CTs, however, inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence components of the phase currents. If
there is a grounding bank on the Delta winding of the power transformer within the zone of protection, a ground fault
results in differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. In such a case, it is necessary to insert a zero sequence current
trap with the Wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of the transformer.
In general, zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding but not
the other winding. Transformer windings that are grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero sequence current flow
in that winding, and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.
The T35 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically, based on the settings
entered for the transformer. All CTs are connected Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). All currents
are phase and zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint quantities.
The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding to have a phase shift of 0° applied to it. For the ease of entering settings,
the T35 allows the user to enter the phase angles with respect to Winding 1. Internally, however, the delta or zigzag (non-
wye) winding with the lowest winding index is selected as a reference winding and all other winding angles are adjusted to
this reference based on WINDING ~ ANGLE WRT WINDING 1. For a transformer that has no delta or zigzag windings, Winding
1 is chosen as a phase reference winding.
The phase compensation angle (Φcomp), the angle by which a winding current is shifted to refer it to the phase reference
winding, is calculated by the T35 for each winding as follows:
Φcomp[w] = | Φ[wf ] – Φ[w] | where Rotation = “ABC” Eq. 5-15
Φcomp[w] = | Φ[w] – Φ[wf ] | where Rotation = “ACB” Eq. 5-16

In our example, the phase reference winding is winding 1, the first delta winding (that is, wf = 1). The phase compensation
angle for each winding is then calculated as follows (assuming Rotation = “ABC”):
Φcomp[1] = 0° – 0° = 0° Eq. 5-17
Φcomp[2] = 0° – (–30°) = 30° = 330° lag Eq. 5-18
The following table shows the linear combination of phases of a transformer winding that achieves the phase shift and
zero sequence removal for typical values of Φcomp
where
IA[w] = uncompensated winding ‘w’ phase A current
IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding ‘w’ phase A current

Table 5-17: Phase and zero sequence compensation for typical values of Φcomp
)comp[w] Grounding[w] = “Not within zone” Grounding[w] = “Within zone”
0° p p 2 1 1
IA > w @ = IA > w @ I A > w @ = --I A > w @ – --I B > w @ – --I C > w @
3 3 3
p
IB > w @ = IB > w @ p 2 1 1
I B > w @ = --I B > w @ – --I A > w @ – --I C > w @
p 3 3 3
IC > w @ = IC > w @
p 2 1 1
I C > w @ = --I C > w @ – --I A > w @ – --I B > w @
3 3 3
30° lag p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I C > w @ I A > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I C > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I B > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I A > w @ I B > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I B > w @ I C > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3 3 3
60° lag p p 2 1 1
IA > w @ = –IC > w @ I A > w @ = – --I C > w @ + --I A > w @ + --I B > w @
3 3 3
p
IB > w @ = –IA > w @ p 2 1 1
I B > w @ = – --I A > w @ + --I B > w @ + --I C > w @
p 3 3 3
IC > w @ = –IB > w @
p 2 1 1
I C > w @ = – --I B > w @ + --I A > w @ + --I C > w @
3 3 3
90° lag p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I C > w @ I A > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I C > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I B > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I A > w @ I B > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3 3 3
5 p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3
p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3
120° lag p p 2 1 1
IA > w @ = IB > w @ I A > w @ = --I B > w @ – --I A > w @ – --I C > w @
3 3 3
p
IB > w @ = IC > w @ p 2 1 1
I B > w @ = --I C > w @ – --I A > w @ – --I B > w @
p 3 3 3
IC > w @ = IA > w @
p 2 1 1
I C > w @ = --I A > w @ – --I B > w @ – --I C > w @
3 3 3
150° lag p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I A > w @ I A > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I B > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I B > w @ I B > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I C > w @ I C > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I C > w @
3 3 3 3
180° lag p p 2 1 1
IA > w @ = –IA > w @ I A > w @ = – --I A > w @ + --I B > w @ + --I C > w @
3 3 3
p
IB > w @ = –IB > w @ p 2 1 1
I B > w @ = – --I B > w @ + --I A > w @ + --I C > w @
p 3 3 3
IC > w @ = –IC > w @
p 2 1 1
I C > w @ = – --I C > w @ + --I A > w @ + --I B > w @
3 3 3
210° lag p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I A > w @ I A > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I B > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I B > w @ I B > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I C > w @ I C > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I C > w @
3 3 3 3

)comp[w] Grounding[w] = “Not within zone” Grounding[w] = “Within zone”

240° lag p p 2 1 1
IA > w @ = IC > w @ I A > w @ = --I C > w @ – --I A > w @ – --I B > w @
3 3 3
p
IB > w @ = IA > w @ p 2 1 1
I B > w @ = --I A > w @ – --I B > w @ – --I C > w @
p 3 3 3
IC > w @ = IB > w @
p 2 1 1
I C > w @ = --I B > w @ – --I A > w @ – --I C > w @
3 3 3
270° lag p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I B > w @ I A > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I B > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I C > w @ I B > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I C > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I A > w @ I C > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3 3 3
300° lag p p 2 1 1
IA > w @ = –IB > w @ I A > w @ = – --I B > w @ + --I A > w @ + --I C > w @
3 3 3
p
IB > w @ = –IC > w @ p 2 1 1
I B > w @ = – --I C > w @ + --I A > w @ + --I B > w @
p 3 3 3
IC > w @ = –IA > w @
p 2 1 1
I C > w @ = – --I A > w @ + --I B > w @ + --I C > w @
3 3 3
330° lag p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I B > w @ I A > w @ = ------I A > w @ – ------I B > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1 p 1 1
I B > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I C > w @ I B > w @ = ------I B > w @ – ------I C > w @
3 3 3 3
p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3
p 1 1
I C > w @ = ------I C > w @ – ------I A > w @
3 3 5
In our example, the following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations would be used:
For Winding 1:
p 2 1 1 p 2 1 1 p 2 1 1
I A > 1 @ = --I A > 1 @ – --I B > 1 @ – --I C > 1 @ ; I B > 1 @ = --I B > 1 @ – --I A > 1 @ – --I C > 1 @ ; I C > 1 @ = --I C > 1 @ – --I A > 1 @ – --I B > 1 @ Eq. 5-19
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
For Winding 2:
p 1 1 p 1 1 p 1 1
I A > w @ = ------I A > 2 @ – ------I B > 2 @ ; I B > w @ = ------I B > 2 @ – ------I C > 2 @ ; I C > w @ = ------I C > 2 @ – ------I A > 2 @
3 3 3 3 3 3 Eq. 5-20
5.5.4.7 Magnitude, phase angle, and zero sequence compensation

Complete magnitude, phase angle, and zero sequence compensation is as follows:
IAc[w] = M [w] x IAp[w], where w = 1, 2, ..., wtotal Eq. 5-21
IBc[w] = M [w] x IBp[w], where w = 1, 2, ..., wtotal Eq. 5-22
ICc[w] = M [w] x ICp[w], where w = 1, 2, ..., wtotal Eq. 5-23

where
IAc[w], IBc[w], and ICc[w] = magnitude, phase, and zero-sequence compensated winding w phase currents
M [w] = magnitude compensation factor for winding w (see previous sections)
IAp[w], IBc[w], and ICc[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents (see earlier)

5.5.4.8 Differential and restraint current calculations

Differential and restraint currents are calculated as follows:
IdA = IAc[1] + IAc[2] + ... + IAc[wtotal] Eq. 5-24
IdB = IBc[1] + IBc[2] + ... + IBc[wtotal] Eq. 5-25
IdC = ICc[1] + ICc[2] + ... + ICc[wtotal] Eq. 5-26
IrA = max (|IAc[1]|, |IAc[2]|, ... , IAc[wtotal]) Eq. 5-27
IrB = max (|IBc[1]|, |IBc[2]|, ... , IBc[wtotal]) Eq. 5-28
IrC = max (|ICc[1]|, |ICc[2]|, ... , ICc[wtotal]) Eq. 5-29

where
IdA, IdB, and IdC are the phase differential currents
IrA, IrB, and Irc are the phase restraint currents
5.5.4.9 Transformer windings between two breakers

When the relay is to protect a transformer with windings connected between two breakers, such as in a ring bus or
breaker-and-a-half station configuration, one of the methods for configuring currents into the relay presented as follows
should be used (see the Breaker-and-a-Half Scheme diagram in the Overview section of this chapter).
For this example, assumed that winding 1 is connected between two breakers and winding 2 is connected to a single
breaker. The CTs associated with winding 1 are CTX, at 1200/5 A and CTY, at 1000/5 A. CTX is connected to current input
channels 1 through 3 inclusive and CTY is connected to current input channels 5 through 7 inclusive on a type 8H CT/VT
5 module in relay slot “F.” The CT2 on winding 2 is 5000/5 A and is connected to current input channels 1 through 4 inclusive
on a type 8F CT/VT module in relay slot “M.”
Setup method A (preferred)

This approach is preferred because it provides increased sensitivity as the current from each individual set of CTs
participates directly in the calculation of CT ratio mismatch, phase compensation, zero-sequence removal (if required) and
the differential restraint current. The concept used in this approach is to consider that each set of CTs connected to
winding 1 represents a connection to an individual winding. For our example, consider the two-winding transformer to be
a three-winding transformer.
1. Enter the settings for each set of CTs in the SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  CURRENT BANK settings menu.
PHASE CT F1 PRIMARY: “1200 A”
PHASE CT F1 SECONDARY: “5 A”
GROUND CT F1 PRIMARY: “1 A” (default value)
GROUND CT F1 SECONDARY: “1 A” (default value)
PHASE CT F5 PRIMARY: “1000 A”
PHASE CT F5 SECONDARY: “5 A”
GROUND CT F5 PRIMARY: “1 A” (default value)
GROUND CT F5 SECONDARY: “1 A” (default value)
PHASE CT M1 PRIMARY: “5000 A”
PHASE CT M1 SECONDARY: “5 A”
GROUND CT M5 PRIMARY: “5000 A”
GROUND CT M5 SECONDARY: “5 A”
2. Configure source n (source 1 for this example) as the current from CTX in Winding 1 in the SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL
SOURCES  SOURCE 1(6) settings menu.
SOURCE 1 NAME: “WDG 1X”
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: “F1”
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: “None”
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: “None”
SOURCE 1 AUX VT: “None”

3. Configure source n (source 2 for this example) as the current from CTY in Winding 1 in the SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL
SOURCE 2 NAME: “WDG 1Y”
SOURCE 2 PHASE CT: “F5”
4. Configure source n (source 3 for this example) to be used as the current in Winding 2 in the SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL
SOURCE 3 NAME: “WDG 2"
SOURCE 3 PHASE CT: “M1”
SOURCE 3 GROUND CT: “M1”
5. Configure the source setting of the transformer windings in the SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING n
settings menu.
WINDING 1 SOURCE: “WDG 1X”
WINDING 2 SOURCE: “WDG 1Y”
WINDING 3 SOURCE: “WDG 2"
Setup method B (alternate)

This approach adds the current from each phase of the CT1 and CT2 together to represent the total winding 1 current. The
procedure is outlined as follows.
1. Enter the settings for each set of CTs in the SYSTEM SETUP  AC INPUTS  CURRENT BANK settings menu, as shown for
method A.
5
2. Configure Source n (Source 1 for this example) to be used as the summed current in Winding 1 in the SYSTEM SETUP 
SIGNAL SOURCES  SOURCE n settings menu.
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: “F1 + F5”
3. Configure Source n (Source 2 for this example) to be used as the Winding 2 current in the SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL
SOURCES  SOURCE n settings menu.
SOURCE 2 PHASE CT: “M1”
SOURCE 2 GROUND CT: “M1”
5.5.4.10 Transformer thermal inputs

SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  THERMAL INPUTS
 THERMAL INPUTS WINDING CURRENTS: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
  SRC 1 (or the user-defined name)
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: Range: RTD Input 1,,..., RTD Input 8, dcmA Input 1,...,
 Monthly Average dcmA Input 8, RRTD Input 1,..., RRTD Input 12, Monthly
Average
TOP OIL TEMPERATURE: Range: RTD Input 1,..., RTD Input 8, dcmA Input 1,...,
 RTD Input 1 dcmA Input 8, RRTD Input 1,..., RRTD Input 12, Monthly
Average, Computed

The thermal inputs settings are used for computation of hottest-spot winding temperature, aging factor, and accumulated
loss of life.
WINDING CURRENTS — Enter a source that represents the true winding load currents.
In cases where two or more sets of CTs are associated to the winding and where thermal elements are to be set (for
example, in a breaker-and-a-half scheme), use a spare source for current summation from these CTs to obtain the total
true winding current. Otherwise, select the only source representing the other winding current.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE — Select an RTD, DCmA, or remote RTD (RRTD) input if the ambient temperature is to be measured
directly. Otherwise, select “Monthly Average” and enter an average temperature for each month of the year if a directly
measured device output is not available (see the monthly settings that follow).
TOP OIL TEMPERATURE — Select RTD, DCmA, or remote RTD input for direct measurement of top-oil temperature. If an RTD or
DCmA input is not available, select “Computed.”
The following menu displays when AMBIENT TEMPERATURE is “Monthly Average.”
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  THERMAL INPUTS  AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: JANUARY AVERAGE: Range: –60 to 60°C in steps of 1
Monthly Average  –20°C
FEBRUARY AVERAGE: Range: –60 to 60°C in steps of 1

 –30°C
MARCH AVERAGE: Range: –60 to 60°C in steps of 1

 –10°C

DECEMBER AVERAGE: Range: –60 to 60°C in steps of 1
 –10°C
5
5.5.5 Breakers
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  COMMON SETTINGS
 COMMON SETTINGS BKR INTERM & BAD ST Range: Common, Distinct
  TIMERS: Common
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(6)

 BREAKER 1 BREAKER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
BREAKER 1 NAME: Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

 Bkr 1
BREAKER 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

 3-Pole
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLSD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

BREAKER 1 ΦC CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 RACKED-IN: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BRK1 COMMS OPEN CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BRK1 COMMS CLS CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER1 PB CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER1 TOPERATE: Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

 70 ms
 BREAKER 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS:

0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 5
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 0.000 s
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BRK1 BLK BYPASS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
BREAKER 1 TAGGING: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
BREAKER 1 SUBSTITUTN: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
BREAKER 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL Range: Disabled, Enabled

 CTRL: Disabled
BRK1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP Range: Disabled, Enabled

 BYPASS: Disabled
BREAKER 1 LOCAL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BRK1 BLK ML CMD IN LOCAL: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled

BRK1 CSWI LOC STAT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BRK1 STATION AUTHOR: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 OPEN INTERLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 SYNCCHECK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED Range: Enabled, Disabled

 CHECK: Enabled
The breaker control element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of a
circuit breaker from protection, autoreclose, SCADA, or through the front panel interface. The breaker control element can
be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the breaker position, both the 52/a and
52/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them.
To use this element, configure the contact outputs that trip and close the breaker to use FlexLogic operands BREAKER 1
OFF CMD (or BREAKER 1 TRIP A/B/C in the case of single-pole tripping) and BREAKER 1 ON CMD, and configure the
breaker control element inputs as described here.
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features from the front panel is provided in
chapter 4.
BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS — When set to “Common”, the breaker element considers both “00” and “11” states of 52a and
5 52b as an intermediate state and when the Toperate timer expires, declares the breaker as bad status. When set to
“Distinct”, the breaker element considers “00” state of 52a and 52b as an intermediate state and “11” as bad status. When
the breaker status detected is 00, the breaker element waits for the Toperate timer to expire before declaring the
intermediate state. When the breaker status detected is 11, the breaker element waits for the Bad ST Tsuppress timer to
expire before declaring the bad state. See breaker logic diagrams 2 and 4.
The following settings are available for each breaker control element.
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker 1 control feature.
BREAKER 1 NAME — Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name is used in flash messages
related to breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 MODE — Selects “3-Pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or selects “1-Pole” mode
where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P OPND — Selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is for a normally-closed 52/b status input that
creates a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted 52/a status
signal or the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
BREAKER1 ΦA/3P CLSD — Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking
mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 52/a status input that creates a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If the
BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole” this setting selects a single 52/a input as the operand used to track the
breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole” the input mentioned is used to track phase A and the
BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
BREAKER1 ΦB OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER1 ΦB CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER1 ΦC OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER1 ΦC CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.

BREAKER 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY — This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the
pole position tracking operands does not declare a pole discrepancy. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the
poles.
If single-pole tripping and reclosing is used, the breaker can trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum
alarm delay setting must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin.
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM — This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input connected to a breaker alarm
reporting contact. While the selected operand is active, the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE operand is activated.
BREAKER 1 RACKED-IN — This setting selects a contact input to show whether the breaker is racked-in or racked-out. The
racked-in or racked-out status is used to indicate dynamically the status of breaker symbol, only applied in the single-line
diagram on the graphical front panel. If this setting is set to Off, the racked status is not considered.
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV — Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Breaker 1 open/trip command. Open command is not executed
when blocked by the operand assigned to BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN setting.
BRK1 COMMS OPEN CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Breaker 1 open command. The setting is intended for
commands received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote
status. The open command is not executed if IED is in the local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to BREAKER 1 BLK
OPEN setting.
BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Breaker 1 close command. Close command is not executed when
blocked by operand assigned to BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE setting.
BKR 1 COMMS CLS CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Breaker 1 close command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status. The close
command is not executed if the IED is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE setting.
BREAKER 1 PB CONTROL — Local breaker control operations (that is, open/close) are allowed from front panel pushbuttons
when the selected operand value is high.
5
BREAKER 1 TOPERATE — This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a
and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.
BREAKER 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS — When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to “Distinct” this setting specifies the
required interval to overcome the transient state of 11 during the breaker operation. If the 11 state still exists after this
time, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted. When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to
“Common” this setting is not used.
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the close commands due to an operator-initiated
manual close command to the circuit breaker.
BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the three-pole open command initiated by either the
Trip Out element or a manual open command to the circuit breaker.
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN — Selects an operand that prevents initiation of Breaker 1 open and individual phase trip commands.
This setting can be used for blocking circuit breaker tripping for instance when breaker monitoring detects conditions such
as low SF6 gas density during which breaker opening can cause damage.
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE — Selects an operand that prevents initiation of Breaker 1 close commands. This setting can be used
for blocking circuit breaker closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed ground switch.
BRK1 BLK BYPASS — Set to “Enable” to allow the graphical front panel to bypass breaker 1 blocking. When asserted, BREAKER
1 BLK OPEN and BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE settings are bypassed. This setting is only available if the order code includes GFP.
BREAKER 1 TAGGING — Breaker tagging is used to block certain operation when it is tagged for safety purposes. No other
action is needed after enabling the function; it is handled internally where certain functions are blocked.
Set to “Enable No Override” to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag breaker 1. When tagged
from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt to remove
tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from IEC 61850 MMS control,
tagging can be removed only by MMS control.

Set to “Enable With Override” to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag breaker 1. When tagged
tagging can be removed by MMS control or from the graphical front panel. That is, the graphical front panel has an
override function.
When tagged, the following operations are disabled: pushbutton open/close, IEC 61850 open/close, and close command
initiated by BREAKER 1 CLOSE setting. The trip command issued by the Trip Out element or BREAKER 1 OPEN setting is not
affected. This setting is only available if the order code includes GFP.
BREAKER1 SUBSTITUTN — Set to “Enable” to allow the graphical front panel/IEC 61850 to substitute breaker 1 status. When
substituted, breaker 1 control open/close status is forced to the substituted value. This setting is only available if the order
code includes GFP.
BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL — Set to “Enable” to allow CILO interlock to apply to front panel and FlexLogic operand
controls. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.
BRK1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP BYPASS — Set to “Enable” to allow the graphical front panel to bypass the CILO interlock for front
panel and FlexLogic operand controls. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850 and GFP.
BREAKER 1 LOCAL — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Breaker in the
switch yard is in Local or Remote mode. When the operand value is set, it indicates that the Breaker is in Local mode. For
the IEC 61850 order code option, refer to the below Control Authority table for control behavior.
BRK1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL — When set to “Enabled” and the BREAKER 1 LOCAL operand state is logic “1” (i.e. the Breaker is
in Local mode and Bkr0XCBR1.Loc is TRUE), manual commands originating from the front panel pushbuttons, graphical
front panel and BREAKER 1 OPEN/CLOSE CMD are blocked. When set to “Disabled”, manual commands originating from relay
are allowed even when the Breaker is in Local mode (BREAKER 1 LOCAL operand state is logic “1”). Please refer to the Control
Authority table below for control behavior. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.
5 BKR1 CSWI LOC STAT — Selects an operand that indicates the breaker residing in that bay is in Local or Remote mode. When
the operand state is logic “1”, the bay is considered in Local mode and when the operand state is “0”, the bay is considered
in Remote mode. The operand status is modeled in the IEC 61850 server using the respective breaker’s CSWI Loc data
object and the user should refer to the operand status in the Control Authority table below to determine the control
authority for different levels. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.
BKR1 STATION AUTHOR — Selects an operand that indicates the Station level authority status. The operand status is modeled
in the IEC 61850 server using the respective breaker’s CSWI LocSta data object the user should refer to the operand status
in the Control Authority table below to determine the control authority for different levels. This setting is available only if the
order code includes IEC 61850.
BREAKER 1 OPEN INTERLOCK — Selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Breaker Open commands. This
operand state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 BkrCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 open
command when the selected operand state is at logic “0” (BkrCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC 61850
client can select to check or skip the interlock condition to execute the command using the “Check” parameter in control
command.
Additionally, the interlock condition can be applied to the local commands as well, which can originate from the front local
HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel (GFP) and FlexLogic Operands assigned to BREAKER 1 OPEN CMD
setting. This is achieved by selecting setting BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL as “Enabled”. This setting is available only if the
BREAKER 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK — Selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Breaker Open commands. This
operand state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 BkrCILO1.EnaCls.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 close
command when the selected operand state is at logic “0” (BkrCILO1.EnaCls.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC 61850
command.
HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel (GFP) and FlexLogic Operands assigned to BREAKER 1 CLOSE CMD
setting. This is achieved by selecting setting BRK1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL as “Enabled”. This setting is available only if the

BREAKER 1 SYNCCHECK CLOSE - Selects an operand that indicates the status of the synchrocheck function of the Breaker.
When the operand value is set, the remote commands from IEC 61850 client are rejected if the IEC 61850 client set the
synchrocheck bit in the “Check” parameter of the control command. This setting is only available if the order code includes
IEC 61850.
BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED CHECK — When “Enabled”, the IEC 61850 control value is checked for current Breaker status and is
rejected if the command value (Open/Close) from IEC 61850 client match with the present Breaker status. When “Disabled”,
the current Breaker status is not verified to accept the control. This setting is only available if the order code includes IEC
61850.
Before software release version 7.90, ST.LOC OPERAND, INTERLOCK OPN, INTERLOCK CLS and SYNCCHECK CLOSE
settings were available in IEC 61850 configurator under System Setup > Breaker. From version 7.90 onwards, the
above mentioned settings were removed from the IEC 61850 configurator and merged with the Breaker settings
screen under Settings > System Setup > Breakers (outside the IEC 61850 configurator). Also, the name of the setting
ST.LOC OPERAND has been changed to LOCAL.
BREAKER 1 LOCAL, INTERLOCK OPEN, INTERLOCK CLOSE, SYNCCHECK CLOSE settings are not available on the front panel
and can be configured either from EnerVista Software or via SCL files. Refer to the MICS document online for
respective settings modeling in SCL files. BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED CHECK is only configurable via EnerVista
software.
Control authority
Within the substation, control commands to the primary equipment, such as the breaker or disconnect switch, can be
originated from one of three levels - Bay, Station or Remote. Station level commands are those originating from either the
substation gateway or from the station HMI and Remote commands are from the remote Network Control Center (NCC).
Bay level commands, however, are commands originating from bay devices such as bay controllers (e.g. C264) or IEDs
(protection relays), either using 61850 control services or using non-61850 control methods (front panel pushbuttons,
graphical front panel or commands initiated through FlexOperands).
5
Under certain operational conditions, such as during maintenance, it is necessary to block commands from one or more of
these levels. The local/remote control feature (described in IEC61850 7-4: Annex B) allows users to enable or disable control
authority from one or more of the three levels, as illustrated in the below table. IEC61850 commands originating from the
various levels are differentiated using the Origin.OrCat attribute value in the 61850 command. The IEC61850 7-4 Local/
Remote table is extended with Bay level non-61850 commands and those commands are only allowed when the Bay level
has the control authority.
Table 5-18: Control Authority

Switch Bay Control Command from
Bay Station NCC
Mode of Local Control Manual orCat
switching Control Authority At Control at
authority for Behavior Station Level Switch
local control (process)
BKR1 BLK XCBR.LocX LLN0.MltLev CSWI.Loc CSWI.LocSta Non Local Station Remote
MNL CMD IN SWI.Loc 61850 Bay Ctl
LOCAL Control (Bay)
Enabled T F n.a. n.a. AA NA NA NA NA
Disabled T F n.a. n.a. AA AA NA NA NA
n.a. F F T n.a. AA AA AA NA NA
n.a. F F F T AA NA NA AA NA
n.a. F F F F AA NA NA NA AA
Enabled T T n.a. n.a. AA NA NA NA NA
Disabled T T n.a. n.a. AA AA NA NA NA
n.a. F T T n.a. AA AA AA NA NA
n.a. F T F T AA AA AA AA NA
Default n.a. F T F F AA AA AA AA AA

n.a. - not applicable

AA - Always Allowed
NA - Not Allowed
Non-61850 Bay Control - Any manual control from the relay, i.e. from the front panel, the relay push buttons or a FlexOperand initiated
command.
Manual Control at Switch (process) - Control external to the IED, e.g. the breaker may be controlled directly from the control panel.
Cells highlighted in gray are not defined in the standard and reflect UR’s commitment to maintaining backwards compatibility.

Figure 5-78: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 1 of 4)

6(77,1*
%5($.(5)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
6(77,1* %NU&,/2 (QD2SQ VW9DO
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%5.&,/2,175/.
%5($.(57$*21
72/2&$/&75/ (QDEOHG
6(77,1* )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%5($.(5386+%87721 %5./2&$/23(1&,/2
&21752/ %5. &,/2%<3$6621 $1'
2Ⱥ
$1' 6(77,1*
86(52))21
%UHDNHU2SHQ,QWHUORFN
7RRSHQ%.5 QDPH )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
25 2Ⱥ
$1' %5. /2&$/$87+2521
%UHDNHU2SHQ 25
)URPJUDSKLFDO IURQWSDQHO C
%NU&6:,/RF6WDFWO9DO )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$1' $1' %5. 5(0$87+2521
6(77,1*
25
%5.67$7,21$87+25 $1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2Ⱥ 25
$1' $1' %5. 67$71$87+2521
6(77,1* $1'
%5.&6:,/2&67$7 $1' )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2Ⱥ $1' 25 %5. %$<$87+2521
$1'
6(77,1*
0XOWL/HYHO&RQWURO
$1' $1' %NU&6:,2S2SQJHQHUD
(1$%/('
O
6(77,1* $1' )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%5.%/.01/&0',1/2&$/
(1$%/(' $1' %5($.(501/23(1
$1'
6(77,1*
%UHDNHU/RFDO 25
2Ⱥ
$1' )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%NUR;&%53RVFWO9DO RȺ $1' 25 $1' %5($.(52))&0'
%NU&6:,3RVFWO9DO RȺ 25
6(77,1*
)URP ,(&SURWRFRO $1'
%5($.(523(1
25 6($/,1
)URPVKHHW RI )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
7 3.3 25
%UHDNHU2SHQFRPPDQG $1' %5($.(575,3$
$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
75,3 32/(
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
75,33+$6($
25 $1' %5($.(575,3%
75,33+$6(%
75,33+$6(&
5
2Q'/ /IURP7ULS
2XWSXWRQO\RQEUHDNHU )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)URP ,(&SURWRFRO $1' 25 $1' %5($.(575,3&
%NU&6:,%ON2SQFWO9DO RQ
%NU;&%5 %ON2SQFWO9DO RQ

$1'
6(77,1* %NU&6:,%ON2SQVW9DO
%5($.(5%/.23(1 25 7RSURWRFRO
2Ⱥ
%NU;&%5%ON2SQVW9DO
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1' $1'
%5. %/.%<3$6621 %NU&,/2 (QD&OV VW9DO
)URP ,(&SURWRFRO %NU&6:,&PG%ONVW9DO
$1'
%NU&6:,&PG%ONFWO9DO RQ
7RSURWRFRO
6(77,1*
$1'
%UHDNHU&ORVH,QWHUORFN
$1' %NU&6:,%ONVW9DO
2Ⱥ
$1' 7RSURWRFRO
86(52))21 $1'
7RFORVH%.5 QDPH
25
25 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%UHDNHU&ORVH
%5./2&$/&/6&,/2
)URP JUDSKLFDO IURQW SDQHO $1'

%NU;&%53RVFWO9DO RQ
25 $1' )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%NU&6:,3RVFWO9DO RQ
$1' $1' %5($.(501/&/6
25
25
)URPVKHHW RI 6(77,1*
$1' 0$18$/&/26(
%UHDNHU &ORVH FRPPDQG $1'
5(&$/7,0( %NU&6:,2S&OVJHQHUDO
7 3.3

)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1' 25 $1' %5($.(521&0'
%5($.(5(1$5&/6 $1'
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
$5&/26(%.5
2Q&'/ /EUHDNHU $1'
PV 25
DQGIURP$XWRUHFORVH 25
%NU&6:,%ON&OVFWO9DO RQ
%NU;&%5%ON&OVFWO9DO RQ %NU&6:,%ON&OVVW9DO

$1'
6(77,1* 25 %NU;&%5%ON&OVVW9DO
%5($.(5%/.&/26(
$1' 7RSURWRFRO
2Ⱥ
(QDEOH
WRVKHHW
&6:,FPG %.5
%ONWR /2&$/WR
VKHHW VKHHW
$FGU


from sheet 1
SETTING
Enable
BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS
= COM MON
SETTING
= DIS TINCT to shee t 4
BRE AKER 1 M ODE
= 1-Pole
= 3-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRE AKER 1 SU BD CLSD
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 SU BD OPEN BKR1 A CLOS ED AND BRE AKER 1 ΦA CLS D
AND
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA/3P CLSD
OR BKR1 A OPENED AND BRE AKER 1 ΦA OP EN
= Off AND
AND
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND SETTING AND BRE AKER 1 ΦA INTERM
OR AND
= Off AND BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR T P KP BRE AKER 1 ΦA BAD S T
AND
AND 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 B CLOS ED AND BRE AKER 1 ΦB CLS D
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦB CLS D FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR BKR1 B OPENED AND BRE AKER 1 ΦB OP EN
= Off AND
AND
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦB OPENE D
OR AND AND BRE AKER 1 ΦB INTERM
= Off AND
OR SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AND BRE AKER 1 ΦB BAD S T
T P KP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 C CLOS ED AND BRE AKER 1 ΦC CLS D
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦC CLS D FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR BKR1 C OPENED AND BRE AKER 1 ΦC OP EN
= Off
5
AND
AND
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦC OPENE D AND
OR AND BRE AKER 1 ΦC INTERM
= Off AND
OR SETTING
AND AND BRE AKER 1 ΦC BAD ST
T P KP
0
FLE XLOGIC OPERAND

OR BRE AKER 1 BAD STATUS
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 EXT ALARM
AND BRE AKER 1 TROU BLE
= Off OR
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

BKR1 A CLOS ED AND BRE AKER 1 CLOS ED
OR
BKR1 B CLOS ED
When the BKR INTERM & BAD AND
BKR1 C CLOS ED SETTING
ST TIMERS setting is BRE AKER 1 ALARM DELAY
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
“Common,” breaker element AND BRE AKER 1 D ISCREP
T P KP
uses the logic highlighted in AND
0
dashed box for Breaker 1 ΦA/
ΦB/ΦC INTERM and BAD ST BKR1 A OPENED
FlexLogic operands BKR1 B OPENED
AND BRE AKER 1 OPEN
BKR1 C OPENED OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 A CLOS ED AND BRE AKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BKR1 B CLOS ED AND
BKR1 C CLOS ED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND BRE AKER 1 1P OPEN
XOR
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 OUT OF S V FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= Off AND BRE AKER 1 OOS
Enable
to shee t 3
859814A1.vsdx

Figure 5-80: Dual breaker / graphical front panel control logic (Sheet 3 of 4)
IURPVKHHW IURPVKHHW
&6:,FPG %.5
6(77,1* %ON /2&$/
%5($.(57$**,1*
(QDEOH1R2YHUULGH 25
(QDEOHZLWK2YHUULGH
IURPVKHHW
$1' (QDEOH
%NU&6:,7DJ 2QFWO9DO 2Q $1'
25
%NU;&%57DJ 2QFWO9DO 2Q 1RQYRODWLOH
25 5HVHWGRPLQDQW
%UHDNHU7DJ 6 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)URPJUDSKLFDOIURQWSDQHO /DWFK %5($.(57$*21
$1' %5($.(57$*2))
25 5
25
$1'
%UHDNHU5HPRYH7DJ
25
%NU&6:,7DJ 2QFWO9DO 2Ⱥ $1'
$1'
25
%NU;&%57DJ 2QFWO9DO 2Ⱥ
6(77,1*
%5($.(568%67,7871
1RQYRODWLOH
(QDEOHG
5HVHWGRPLQDQW
%UHDNHU6XEVWLWXWH2SHQ 6 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/DWFK %5($.(568%'23(1
%UHDNHU5HPRYH6XEVWLWXWLRQ
25 5
%UHDNHU6XEVWLWXWH&ORVHG 6 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/DWFK %5($.(568%'&/6'
25 5
6(77,1*
%5($.(5 %/.%<3$66
(QDEOHG 1RQYRODWLOH
5HVHWGRPLQDQW
5
%UHDNHU %ON%\SDVV 6 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/DWFK %5. %/.%<3$6621
%UHDNHU5HPRYH %ON%\SDVV
)URP JUDSKLFDO IURQWS DQHO 25 5 %5. %/.%<3$662))
)RUUHOD\VZLWK$5HOHPHQW
6(77,1*
%5($.(5$5%/2&.
(QDEOHG 1RQYRODWLOH
5HVHWGRPLQDQW
%UHDNHU%ORFN$XWRUHFORVH 6 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
/DWFK %5($.(5%/.5&/6
%UHDNHU8QEORFN$XWRUHFORVH
25 5 %5($.(5(1$5&/6
6(77,1*
%5.&,/2,17(5/2&.*)3
%<3$66 (QDEOHG 1RQYRODWLOH
5HVHWGRPLQDQW
%UHDNHU ,QWHUORFN%\SDVV 6 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%5.&,/2 %<3$6621
/DWFK
%UHDNHU 5HPRYH ,QWHUORFN %\SDVV %5.&,/2 %<3$662))
)URPJUDSKLFDOIURQWSDQHO 5
25
$FGU
Settings marked “**” are only available in order codes that include IEC 61850 and GFP.
Settings marked “***” are only available in order codes that include GFP.
The breaker element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram. This allows
remote open/close operation of each breaker, using either CSWI or XCBR IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-before-
operate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking of open/close commands are provided. Note
that the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one protection pass only. To maintain the close/
open command for a certain time, do so by setting the seal-in timers BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN and MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1
TIME, on the contact outputs using the “Seal-in” setting, in the Trip Output element, and/or in FlexLogic.


BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS = D istinct
from sheet 2 1-Pole Enable
SETTING
BRE AKER1 BAD ST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TSU PPRESS
T P KP AND BRE AKER 1 ΦA BAD ST
AND 0
SETTING
AND T P KP AND BRE AKER 1 ΦA INTERM
0
1-Pole Enable
When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST SETTING

TIMERS setting is "Distinct," breaker BRE AKER1 BAD ST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
element replaces the sheet 2 TSU PPRESS
AND BRE AKER 1 Φ Θ BAD ST
highlighted logic in dashed box with AND T P KP
0
logic shown here for Breaker 1 ΦA/
ΦB/ ΦC INTERM and BAD ST
SETTING
FlexLogic operands
AND T P KP AND BRE AKER 1 ΦΘINTERM
0
Where Θ is B and C
859815A1.vsdx
5.5.6 Disconnect switch control

5 SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  COMMON SETTINGS
 COMMON SETTINGS SW INTERM & BAD ST Range: Common, Distinct
  TIMERS: Common
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  SWITCH 1(24)

 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
  Disabled
SWITCH 1 NAME: Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

 SW 1
SWITCH 1 MODE: Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

 3-Pole
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 0.000 s

SWITCH 1 OPEN CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SW1 COMMS OPEN CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SW1 COMMS CLS CMD: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE: Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

 70 ms
SWITCH 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS: Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

 0 ms
SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 0.000 s
SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN: Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 0.000 s
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
 SWITCH 1 BLK BYPASS:

Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled 5
SWITCH 1 TAGGING: Range: Disabled, Enable No Override, Enable with
 Disabled Override
SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SWITCH 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SW1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL Range: Disabled, Enabled

 CTRL: Disabled
SW1 CILO INTERLOCK GFP Range: Disabled, Enabled

 BYPASS: Disabled
SWITCH 1 LOCAL: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SW1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SW1 CSWI LOC STAT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SW1 STATION AUTHOR: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 OPEN INTERLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 CLOSE INTERLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED CHECK: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Enabled

The disconnect switch control element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and
closing of disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch control element
can be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the
89/a and 89/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them. The number of available
disconnect switches is four per breaker. The disconnect switch control element is executed and status updated every ½
power cycle.
To use this element, configure the contact outputs that open and close the disconnect switch to use FlexLogic operands
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD and SWITCH 1 ON CMD, and configure the disconnect switch control element's inputs as outlined
here.
SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS — When set to “Common” the switch element considers both “00” and “11” states of 89/a and
89/b as intermediate state and when the Toperate timer expires, declares the switch as bad status. When set to “Distinct”
the switch element considers “00” state of 89/a and 89/b as intermediate state and “11” as bad status. When the switch
status detected is 00, the switch element waits for Toperate timer to expire before declaring the intermediate state. When
the switch status detected is 11, the switch element waits for Bad ST Tsuppress timer to expire before declaring the bad
state. See the switch logic diagrams 2 and 4.
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables operation of the disconnect switch element.
SWITCH 1 NAME — Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name is used in flash
messages related to disconnect switch 1.
SWITCH 1 MODE — This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary
switch, or “1-Pole” mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch.
SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND — This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is for a normally-closed 89/b status
input that creates a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 89/b contact input is not available, then an
inverted 89/a status signal can be used.
5 SWTCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD — This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary
position tracking mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 89/a status input that creates a logic 1 when the
disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole,” this setting selects a single 89/a input as
the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole,” the input
mentioned is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 ΦB and SWITCH 1 ΦC settings select operands to track phases B and
C, respectively.
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 ΦC CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 ALARM PDisc DELAY — This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the
pole position tracking operands do not declare a pole discrepancy. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the
poles.
SWITCH 1 OPEN CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Switch 1 open command. Open command is not executed when
blocked by the operand assigned to SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN setting.
SW1 COMMS OPEN CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Switch 1 open command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status. The open
command is not executed if the IED is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN setting.
SWITCH 1 CLOSE CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Switch 1 close command. Close command is not executed when
blocked by operand assigned to SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE setting.
SW1 COMMS CLS CMD — Selects an operand that initiates Switch 1 close command. The setting is intended for commands
received via communication protocols (DNP3, IEC104 and Modbus) to be supervised by IED Local/Remote status. The close
command is not executed if the IED is in local mode or blocked by the operand assigned to SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE setting.

SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL — Local disconnect switch control operations (for example, open/close) are allowed from front panel
pushbuttons when the selected FlexLogic operand value is high.
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE — This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 89/a
and 89/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.
SWITCH 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS — When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to “Distinct” this setting specifies the
required interval to overcome the transient state of 11 during the switch operation. If the 11 state still exists after this time,
the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted. When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to
“Common” this setting is not used.
SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open command due to an operator-initiated manual
open command to the disconnect switch.
SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the close command due to an operator-initiated manual
close command to the disconnect switch.
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN — This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of the disconnect Switch 1 command. This
setting can be used to block the disconnect switch from opening, for instance when switch yard monitoring indicates that
current exceeding the switch's interrupting rating can be flowing through the switch.
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE — This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of disconnect Switch 1 close commands. This
setting can be used to block the disconnect switch from closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed ground
switch.
SWITCH 1 BLK BYPASS —Set to “Enable” to allow the graphical front panel to bypass switch 1 interlocking. When asserted,
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN and SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE settings are bypassed. This setting is available only if the order code includes
GFP.
SWITCH 1 TAGGING — Switch tagging is used to block certain operation when it is tagged for safety purposes. No other
action is needed after enabling the function; it is handled internally where certain functions are blocked. 5
Set to “Enable No Override” to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag switch 1. When tagged from
the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt to remove tagging
using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged using IEC 61850 MMS control, tagging can
be removed only by MMS control.
Set to “Enable With Override” to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag switch 1. When tagged
tagging can be removed by MMS control or from the graphical front panel. That is, the graphical front panel has an
override function.
When tagged, the following operations are disabled:
• Pushbutton open/close
• IEC 61850 open/close
• Open command initiated by SWITCH 1 OPEN setting
• Close command initiated by SWITCH 1 CLOSE setting
This setting is available only if the order code includes GFP.
SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN — Set to “Enable” to allow the graphical front panel to substitute switch 1 status. When substituted,
switch 1 control open/close status is forced to the substituted value. This setting is available only if the order code includes
GFP.
SWITCH 1 LOCAL — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Switch control
behavior from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set, it indicates the Switch in Local mode and the remote
commands from IEC 61850 client are blocked.
SW1 BLK MNL CMD IN LOCAL — When set to “Enabled” and the SWITCH 1 LOCAL operand state is logic “1” (i.e. the Switch is in
Local mode and Disc0XSWI1.Loc is TRUE), manual commands originating from the front panel pushbuttons, graphical front
panel and SWITCH 1 OPEN/CLOSE CMD are blocked. When set to “Disabled”, manual commands originating from relay are

allowed even when the Switch is in Local mode (SWITCH 1 LOCAL operand state is logic “1”). Please refer to the table in the
Control Authority section above for further information on control behavior. This setting is available only if the order code
includes IEC 61850.
SW1 CSWI LOC STAT — Selects an operand, that indicates the switch residing in that bay is in Local or Remote mode. When
the operand state is logic “1”, the bay is considered in Local mode and when the operand state is “0”, the bay is considered
in remote mode. The operand status is modeled in IEC 61850 server using respective Switch CSWI Loc data object and the
user should refer to the operand status in the table in the Control Authority section above to determine the control
authority for different levels. This setting is available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.
SW1 STATION AUTHOR — Selects an operand, that indicates the Station level authority status. The operand status is modeled
in IEC 61850 server using respective breaker’s CSWI LocSta data object and the user should refer to the operand status in
the table in the Control Authority section above to determine the control authority for different levels. This setting is
available only if the order code includes IEC 61850.
SWITCH 1 OPEN INTERLOCK — Selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Switch Open commands. This
operand state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 DiscCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 open
command when the selected operand state is at logic “0” (DiscCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC 61850
command.
HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel (GFP) and FlexLogic Operands assigned to SWITCH 1 OPEN CMD setting.
This is achieved by selecting setting SW1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL as “Enabled”. This setting is available only if the order
code includes IEC 61850.
SWITCH 1 INTERLOCK CLOSE — Selects an operand that indicates the interlock status for the Switch Close commands. This
operand state is mapped directly to the IEC 61850 DiscCILO1.EnaCls.stVal, which is used to reject the IEC 61850 close
command when the selected operand state is at logic “0” (DiscCILO1.EnaCls.stVal is set to false). However, the IEC 61850
5 client can select to check or skip the interlock condition to execute the command using the “Check” parameter in control
command.
HMI, front panel push buttons, graphical front panel (GFP) and FlexLogic Operands assigned to SWITCH 1 CLOSE CMD
setting. This is achieved by selecting setting SW1 CILO INTRLK TO LOCAL CTRL as “Enabled”. This setting is available only if the
SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED CHECK — Set in the EnerVista software. When “Enabled”, the IEC 61850 control value is checked for
current Switch status and is rejected if the command value (Open/Close) from IEC 61850 client match with the present
Switch status. When “Disabled”, the current Switch status is not verified to accept the control. This setting is only available
if the order code includes IEC 61850.
Before software release version 7.90, ST.LOC OPERAND, INTERLOCK OPN and INTERLOCK CLS settings were available in
IEC 61850 configurator under System Setup > Switches. From version 7.90 onwards, the above mentioned settings
were removed from the IEC 61850 configurator and merged with the Breaker settings screen under Settings >
System Setup > Switches (outside the IEC 61850 configurator). Also, the name of the setting ST.LOC OPERAND has
been changed to LOCAL.
SWITCH 1 LOCAL, INTERLOCK OPEN, INTERLOCK CLOSE and SYNCCHECK CLOSE settings are not available on the front
panel and can be configured either from EnerVista Software or via SCL files. Refer to the MICS document online for
respective settings modeling in SCL files. SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED CHECK is only configurable via EnerVista software
The switch element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagrams. This allows
remote open/close operation of each switch, using either CSWI or XSWI IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-before-
operate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking open/close commands are provided. Note that
the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one protection pass only. To maintain close/open
command for a certain time, do so using the seal-in timers SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN and SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL-IN, on the
contact outputs using the setting, or in FlexLogic.

Figure 5-82: Disconnect switch control logic (sheet 1 of 4)

SETTING
SW ITCH 1 FU NCTION
= E nabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 TAG ON
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 PB CONTROL
=Off
AND
SW ITCH 1 Ope n
From graphical front panel
SETTING (on 61850 page ) DiscCSWI1.OpOpn.general

SW ITCH1 LOCAL To IEC 61850 protocol
= Off
AND OR
Disc0XSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off
OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off SE TTI NG
AND OR AND SW ITCH 1 OFF CMD
From IEC 61850 protocol SW ITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN
T P KP
SETTING 0 AND
SW ITCH 1 OPEN
AND
= Off
AND
DiscCSW I1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
OR To IEC 61850 protocol
Disc0XS WI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on AND DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
From IEC 61850 protocol
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 BLOCK OPEN OR Disc0XSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
= Off To IEC 61850 protocol
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S ON
To IEC 61850 protocol
AND DiscCSWI1.CmdBlk.stVal
DiscCSWI1.CmdBlk.ctlVal = on
AND To IEC 61850 protocol
5
SW ITCH 1 Close AND DiscCSWI1.Blk.stVal
From graphical front panel
AND
OR
Disc0XSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on SE TTI NG
AND OR AND SW ITCH 1 ON CMD
From IEC 61850 protocol SW ITCH 1 CLOS E SEAL-IN
T P KP
SETTING 0 AND DiscCSWI1.OpCls.gene ral
SW ITCH 1 CLOS E
AND To IEC 61850 protocol
= Off
AND DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on AND
OR
Disc0XS WI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
OR Disc0XSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
SETTING To 61850 protocol
SW ITCH 1 BLK CLOSE AND Enable
= Off to shee t 2
CSWI cmd Switch 1

Blk to Local
Sheet 3 to Sheet 3
859828A1.vsdx

Figure 5-83: Disconnect switch control status logic (sheet 2 of 4)

from sheet 1
SETTING Enable
SW INTERM & BAD ST TIM ERS
SETTING = COM MON
SW ITCH 1 M ODE = DIS TINCT to shee t 4
= 1-Pole
= 3-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SW ITCH 1 SU BD CLSD
SW ITCH 1 SU BD OPEN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW 1 A CLOSED AND SW ITCH 1 ΦA CLS D
SETTING AND
SW ITCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR SW 1 A OPENE D AND SW ITCH 1 ΦA OPEN
= Off AND
AND
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND AND SW ITCH 1 ΦA INTERM
OR AND SETTING
= Off AND
SW ITCH 1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
T P KP AND SW ITCH 1 ΦA BAD S T
AND 0
SW 1 B CLOSED FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND
AND SW ITCH 1 ΦB CLS D
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦB CLS D FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR SW 1 B OPENED AND SW ITCH 1 ΦB OPEN
= Off AND
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦB OP ENE D FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND AND SW ITCH 1 ΦB INTERM
= Off AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 TOPERATE
AND AND SW ITCH 1 ΦB BAD S T
T P KP
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW 1 C CLOSED AND SW ITCH 1 ΦC CLS D
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦC CLS D FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR SW 1 C OPENE D
5
= Off AND SW ITCH 1 ΦC OPEN
AND
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦC OPENE D FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND AND
= Off AND SW ITCH 1 ΦC INTERM
OR SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 TOPERATE
AND AND SW ITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST
T P KP
0
When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

“Common,” switch element uses the logic OR SW ITCH 1 BAD STATUS
highlighted in dashed boxes for SWITCH1 ΦA/ΦB/
ΦC INTERM and BAD ST FlexLogic operands.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND SW ITCH 1 TROU BLE
OR

SW 1 A CLOSED AND SW ITCH 1 CLOS ED
OR
SW 1 B CLOSED
AND
SW 1 C CLOSED SE TTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ALARM DELAY
AND SW ITCH 1 D ISCREP
T P KP
AND
0
SW 1 A OPENE D
SW 1 B OPENED
AND SW ITCH 1 OPEN
SW 1 C OPENE D OR
AND
Enable
to shee t 3 859812A1.vsdx

Figure 5-84: Disconnect switch control graphical front panel logic (sheet 3 of 4)
from sheet 1 from sheet 1
CSWI cmd Switch 1
SETTING Blk LOCAL
SW ITCH 1 TAGG ING
= Enable No Override OR
= Enable with Override
from sheet 2
AND Enable
DiscCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On AND
OR
Disc0XS WI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On Non-volatile,
OR Reset-dominant
SW ITCH 1 Tag S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
From graphical front panel Latch SW ITCH 1 TAG ON
AND SW ITCH 1 TAG OFF
OR R
OR
AND
SW ITCH 1 Remove Tag
OR
DiscCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off AND
AND
OR
Disc0XS WI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 SU BSTITUTN
= E nabled Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
SW ITCH 1 Substitute Open S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Latch SW ITCH 1 SU BD OPEN
SW ITCH 1 Remove Substitution
OR R
SW ITCH 1 Substitute Closed S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

From graphical front panel Latch SW ITCH 1 SU BD CLSD
OR R
SETTING
5
SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S
= E nabled Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
SW ITCH 1 Bypass S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 Remove Bypass Latch SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S ON
From graphical front panel OR R SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S OFF
859829A1.vsdx
Figure 5-85: Disconnect switch control status logic (sheet 4 of 4)

SW INTERM & BAD ST TIM ERS = DIS TI NCT
from sheet 2 1-Pole Enable
SETTING
SW ITCH1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
T P KP AND SW ITCH1 ΦA BAD ST
AND 0
SETTING
SW ITCH1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND T P KP AND SW ITCH1 ΦA INTERM
0
1-Pole Enable
When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS

SETTING
setting is “Distinct,” switch element SW ITCH1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
replaces the sheet 2 highlighted logic in AND SW ITCH1 Φ Θ BAD ST
AND T P KP
dashed box with sheet 4 logic for 0
SWITCH1 ΦA/ΦB/ΦC INTERM and BAD
ST FlexLogic operands SETTING
SW ITCH1 TOPERATE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND T P KP AND SW ITCH1 ΦΘINTERM
0
Where Θ is B and C
859813A1.vsdx

5.5.7 FlexCurves
5.5.7.1 Settings
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  FLEXCURVES  FLEXCURE A(D)
 FLEXCURVE A FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
  0.00 xPKP: 0 ms
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

 0.05 xPKP: 0 ms

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
 20.00xPKP: 0 ms
FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98
and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a
custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE up/down keys) for the required protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5-19: FlexCurve table

Reset Time Reset Time Operate Time Operate Time Operate Time Operate Time
ms ms ms ms ms ms
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
5 0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Take
care when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is
recommended to set the two times to a similar value, otherwise the linear approximation can result in undesired
behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

5.5.7.2 FlexCurve configuration with EnerVista software

The EnerVista software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points.
Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then
specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by
selecting the EnerVista Import Data From setting (Settings > System Setup > FlexCurves > FlexCurve).
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by
editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero
(implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
5.5.7.3 Recloser curve editing

Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite
operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and
downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown
here appears when the Initialize From setting in the EnerVista software is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize
FlexCurve button is clicked.
Figure 5-86: Recloser curve initialization
0XOWLSOLHU6FDOHV PXOWLSOLHV WKHFXUYHRSHUDWLQJWLPHV
$GGU$GGVWKHWLPHVSHFLILHGLQWKLVILHOG LQPV WRHDFK

FXUYHRSHUDWLQJWLPHYDOXH
5
0LQLPXP5HVSRQVH7LPH 057 ,IHQDEOHGWKH057VHWWLQJ
GHILQHVWKHVKRUWHVWRSHUDWLQJWLPHHYHQLIWKHFXUYHVXJJHVWV
DVKRUWHUWLPHDWKLJKHUFXUUHQWPXOWLSOHV$FRPSRVLWHRSHUDWLQJ
FKDUDFWHULVWLFLVHIIHFWLYHO\GHILQHG)RUFXUUHQWPXOWLSOHVORZHU
WKDQWKHLQWHUVHFWLRQSRLQWWKHFXUYHGLFWDWHVWKHRSHUDWLQJWLPH
RWKHUZLVHWKH057GRHV$QLQIRUPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV
ZKHQDWWHPSWLQJWRDSSO\DQ057VKRUWHUWKDQWKHPLQLPXP
FXUYHWLPH
+LJK&XUUHQW7LPH$OORZVWKHXVHUWRVHWDSLFNXSPXOWLSOH
IURPZKLFKSRLQWRQZDUGVWKHRSHUDWLQJWLPHLVIL[HG7KLVLV
QRUPDOO\RQO\UHTXLUHGDWKLJKHUFXUUHQWOHYHOV7KH+&75DWLR
GHILQHVWKHKLJKFXUUHQWSLFNXSPXOWLSOHWKH+&7GHILQHVWKH
RSHUDWLQJWLPH
($"'"!1!34B
The Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT
settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
5.5.7.4 Example
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at eight times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four times pickup, the curve operating
time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms.

Figure 5-87: Composite recloser curve with HCT disabled
($"'!)1!34B
With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding eight times pickup.
Figure 5-88: Composite recloser curve with HCT enabled
($"'" 1!34B
Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If
this is attempted, the EnerVista software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
5.5.7.5 Standard recloser curves

The following graphs display standard recloser curves available for the T35.

Figure 5-89: Recloser curves GE101 to GE106
(&

5*.& TFD
(&
(& (&

(& (&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'"#1!34B
5
Figure 5-90: Recloser curves GE113, GE120, GE138, and GE142

(&

(&
5*.& TFD
(&
(&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'"%1!34B

Figure 5-91: Recloser curves GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151, and GE201

(&
5*.& TFD
(&

(& (&

(&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ
5
($"'# 1!34B
Figure 5-92: Recloser curves GE131, GE141, GE152, and GE200

(&

5*.& TFD
(&

(&

(&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'"(1!34B

Figure 5-93: Recloser curves GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164, and GE165

(&

5*.& TFD
(&

(&

(&

(&
(&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'")1!34B
Figure 5-94: Recloser curves GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, and GE139
5

(&

5*.& TFD
(&

(&

(&

(& (&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'"&1!34B

Figure 5-95: Recloser curves GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, and GE122

(&

5*.& TFD

(&

(&
(&

(& (&

(&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'"$1!34B
5
Figure 5-96: Recloser curves GE119, GE135, and GE202

(&

5*.& TFD
(&
(&

$633&/5 NVMUJQMFPGQJDLVQ ($"'"'1!34B

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS PROCESS BUS MODULE
5.6 Process Bus Module

This feature requires a Process Bus Module (order code 85, 86, or 87).
Process Bus GOOSE requires IEC 61850 and IEEE 1588 software options.
The UR provides a digital process bus by use of a Process Bus Module. A digital process bus enables digital transmission of
data between the switchyard and relays in a control house using communication cables instead of hard-wired
connections.
The Process Bus Module supports the IEC 61850-9-2LE and IEC 61869 protocols, switched networks, and two redundancy
protocols (Parallel Redundancy Protocol and High-Availability Seamless Redundancy). The module is used to transfer data
streams in protection and control networks, including dataset samples referred to as sampled values (SVs), with the
stability of redundancy.
A Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87 is distinct from the HardFiber Process Bus Module with order code 81.
This section does not apply to the HardFiber module.
Configuration includes that for redundancy and synchronization of time-clock sources because data transfer occurs
among multiple devices.
For any device that is connected to a copper SFP of the Process Bus Module, set its port speed to Auto Negotiate.
The copper SFP supports 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps speeds in auto-negotiate mode. If the device connecting to the
Process Bus Module has a fixed port speed, does not support auto-negotiation, or its auto-negotiate is disabled,
then the link speed of the copper SFP is fixed at 1 Gbps and it communicates only with a device that supports 1
Gbps.
5
5.6.1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP enables seamless switchover and zero recovery time during a single network failure in substation automation
networks. It ensures that critical data, such as GOOSE and sampled value (SV) data, are transmitted without delay in case
of local area network (LAN) defects. In other words, with PRP functionality, the Process Bus Module can be connected to
redundant LANs and work with zero recovery time.
PRP is supported to the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard, Clause 4.
The figure shows that PRP achieves redundancy by using a combination of frame and LAN duplication. Identical frames,
here labeled frames A and B, are sent on two independent networks that connect source and destination. The frames carry
GOOSE or supervisory data. Under normal circumstances, both frames reach the destination and one of them is sent up
the stack to the destination application, while the other frame is discarded. If an error occurs in one of the networks and
traffic is prevented from flowing on that path, connectivity is provided by the other network to ensure continuous
communication. When designing this network care was taken to ensure that there is no single point of failure in the two
LANs, such as a common power supply, as such scenarios can bring down simultaneously both LANs.

PROCESS BUS MODULE CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-97: PRP redundant network example
RedBox Gateway
SAN
LAN A LAN B
Bridges / switches Bridges / switches

Merging
Units
A-frame B-frame
B-frame A-frame
1a 1b
1b 1a
5 UR DANP (Source) UR DANP (Destination) 859778A1.ppt
PRP implements redundancy in the nodes rather than in the network by using specialized nodes called Doubly Attached
Nodes Running PRP (DANP) for handling the duplicated frames. The figure shows an example. Each DANP node has two
ports that are connected to the two independent LANs with similar (but not necessarily identical) topology. A source DANP
sends identical frames over both LANs and a destination DANP receives both frames from the two LANs within a certain
time period, consumes the first frame, and discards the duplicate frame.
Each UR device in this example implements PRP on ports 1a and 1b of the Process Bus Module. Both URs require a Process
Bus Module. Ports 1a and 1b act as DANP in the PRP network. With two ports required, Process Bus Modules with order
code 85, 86, or 87 can be used. While this example shows a UR as receiving the frames, the receiver can be a merging unit
or UR.
A device with only one port, such as a printer or computer, is called a Singly Attached Node (SAN). It is a node with non-
redundant network adapters. A SAN can communicate with other SANs and DANPs on the same LAN. When a SAN is
attached to a redundant LAN by a Redundancy Box (RedBox) device, the SAN can communicate with all DANPs and SANs
in both LANs. In other words, if redundancy for a SAN is required, the SAN is connected to both LANs through a RedBox.
A merging unit (MU), such as the GE MU320, is an interface between analog and digital worlds. With an MU, the analog
signals from the CTs and VTs in the yard are converted to digital signals and transmitted via the sampled value (SV)
network communication protocol.
The bridges shown are network switches that connect devices participating in the PRP network and otherwise do not have
an active role in PRP.
5.6.2 High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR)

Similar to PRP, High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) enables seamless switchover and zero recovery time during a
single network failure in substation automation networks. It ensures that critical data, such as GOOSE and SV data, are
transmitted without delay in case of LAN defects.
HSR is supported to IEC 62439-3, Clause 5. SV data can be received from merging units meeting IEC 61869-9.

HSR is used in network topology with rings and rings of rings. All nodes in the ring are doubly attached. The figure shows an
example. The Doubly Attached Node with HSR (DANH) is a node that has two ports interconnected by full-duplex links and
participates in the HSR ring. The source node receives a frame from its upper layer, inserts an HSR tag to identify
duplicates, and sends it over its two ports in different directions, shown by the red and blue arrows. In a normal, fault-free
state, the identical frames reach the destination DANH within a certain interval, the destination DANH removes the HSR
tag, sends the first frame up the stack to the destination application and discards the second frame. If an error occurs in
one of the network nodes and traffic cannot flow on that path, connectivity is provided through the other direction and
ensures continuous communication.
Figure 5-98: HSR single-ring configuration example
UR DANH (Source) UR DANH

SAN
1a 1b 1b 1a
UR DANH (Destination)
RedBox
5
Merging Unit Merging Unit Merging Unit

859776A1.ppt
A Singly Attached Node, or SAN, such as a computer or printer, is a node with non-redundant network adapters. It uses a
redundancy box (RedBox) to connect to the ring.
A merging unit (MU), such as the GE MU320, is an interface between analog and digital worlds. With an MU, the analog
signals from the CTs and VTs in the yard are converted to digital signals and transmitted via the sampled value (SV)
network communication protocol.
A UR with the Process Bus Module implements either single or dual HSR capability. It supports hierarchical ring topologies,
such as connected rings, mesh topology, and an HSR ring in a PRP network.
In single HSR configuration, ports 1a and 1b of the Process Bus Module act as DANH, and any other ports on the Process
Bus Module are disabled. Point-to-point configuration is not available. For single HSR, Process Bus Module 85, 86, or 87 can
be used.

In dual HSR configuration, the UR to connect to two independent HSR rings. Ports 1a and 1b form one DANH node, and
ports 3a and 3b form the second DANH node. Any other ports on the module are disabled. Traffic from HSR-1 ring is not
forwarded to the HSR-2 ring and vice versa. The UR does not facilitate any message communication between the two
independent HSR rings. In dual HSR, with four ports required, a Process Bus Module with order code 86 or 87 can be used.
While the UR does not provide RedBox functionality, an HSR ring can be connected to a PRP network using two RedBoxes,
one for each redundant LAN of the PRP network. The RedBoxes are configured to handle PRP frames on the interlinks and
HSR frames on the HSR ring. As per the IEC 62439-3:2016 standard, up to seven PRP networks can be connected to the
same HSR ring.
While the UR does not provide QuadBox functionality, a QuadBox can be added to interconnect two HSR rings, which is
beneficial when traffic on a single ring exceeds the ring’s capability.
Figure 5-99: Dual HSR, double-ring configuration example
UR DANH (Source)
1a 3a
1b 3b
HSR Ring 1 HSR Ring 2
HSR 1 Nodes HSR 2 Nodes
UR DANH UR DANH
Merging Unit Merging Unit

859777A1.ppt
5.6.3 General
SETTINGS  PROCESS BUS MODULE  GENERAL
 GENERAL NETWORK CONFIG: Range: INDEPENDENT, PRP, HSR, Dual HSR
  INDEPENDENT
PRP SUPV MCST ADDR: Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF

 01154E000100
HSR-1 SUPV MCST ADDR: Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF

 01154E000100
HSR-2 SUPV MCST ADDR: Range: 01 15 4E 00 01 00 to 01 15 4E 00 01 FF

 01154E000101

PORT 1a FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Enabled

PORT 4b FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
 Enabled
SV TRBL PRT BLOCK: Range: Global, Partial

 Global
SV TRBL CONT OP BLK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SV DELAY ALARM: Range: 1.0 ms to 10.0 ms in steps of 0.1 ms

 6.0 ms
QUALITY CHECK: Range: Reject Questionable, Accept Questionable

 Reject Questionable
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SMPSYNCH CHECK: Range: Global, Local, Local-87L, Any

 Global
Fallback GmID: Range: 8 Octet string

 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
TARGET: Click to view or Range: List of available Targets. Access in EnerVista.

 edit selected Targets
EVENTS: Click to view or Range: List of available FlexLogic operand types

 edit selected Events from SV Stream Processing. Access in EnerVista.
5
Restart the relay after changing these settings, under Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.
NETWORK CONFIG — This setting specifies the network configuration and redundancy for the Process Bus Module.
If set to INDEPENDENT, all ports on the Process Bus Module are enabled, and the Process Bus Module can be connected
directly to merging units (MUs) or to a switch without redundancy. To enable and disable individual ports on the Process
Bus Module in a point-to-point (PPP) network, use the PORT x FUNCTION settings.
If set to PRP or HSR, ports 1a and 1b are enabled. The PORT 1a FUNCTION and PORT 1b FUNCTION settings change.
If set to Dual HSR, ports 1a and 1b are enabled for one HSR ring, and when using a Process Bus Module with order codes
86 or 87 then ports 3a and 3b are enabled for another HSR ring. The PORT x FUNCTION settings change.
PRP SUPV MCST ADDR — This setting changes the multicast address used by the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
supervision frames. Configure all DANP devices in the PRP network with the same multicast address for the network
supervision to operate properly. This setting is editable when the NETWORK CONFIG setting is set to PRP.
HSR-1 SUPV MCST ADDR — This setting changes the multicast address used by High-Availability Seamless Redundancy ring
one (HSR-1 ports 1a and 1b) supervision frames, for single HSR configuration. Configure all DANH devices in the HSR
network with the same multicast address for the network supervision to operate properly. This setting is editable when the
NETWORK CONFIG setting is set to HSR or Dual HSR.
HSR-2 SUPV MCST ADDR — This setting changes the multicast address used by the HSR-2 (ports 3a and 3b) supervision
frames for the second DANH in a Dual HSR configuration. Configure all DANH devices in the HSR network with the same
multicast address for the network supervision to operate properly. This setting is editable when the NETWORK CONFIG
setting is set to Dual HSR.
PORT 1a to 4b FUNCTION — These settings manually enable and disable Process Bus Module Ethernet ports. Typically,
Process Bus Module ports are order-code dependent, and the INDEPENDENT network configuration enables all the ports
by default, changing the settings shown here. These settings allow individual ports to be enabled and disabled. For
example, to connect only a few of the ports, other ports can be disabled to avoid a PBEthPort-# Offline self-test error.
The fields active depend on order code and NETWORK CONFIG setting. For order code 85, ports 1a, 1b, 3a, and 3b are
available to be turned on or off. For order codes 86 and 87, all eight ports can be available to be turned on or off.
When a port is disabled, all transmitting and receiving traffic on the port is blocked.

Relay restart is not required when changing these port function fields.
SV TRBL PRT BLOCK — In case of loss of any subscribed SV streams or due to bad quality of any subscribed SV frames, the
protection functions of the relay need to be blocked to avoid undesired operation. This setting specifies the type of
blocking applied.
When set to Global, all the protection functions that utilize the sampled values are blocked. Communications, data logging,
and oscillography remain functional. Availability of switchgear control is determined by the SV TRBL CONT OP BLK operand.
When set to Partial, only those protection functions are blocked that utilize the sampled values from the affected SV
stream. All other protection functions remain operational. Communications, data logging, and oscillography remain
functional. Availability of switchgear control is determined by the SV TRBL CONT OP BLK operand.
SV TRBL CONT OP BLK — Selects a FlexLogic operand that determines if the contact outputs are blocked or not. When the
state of the operand is low, the contact outputs are not blocked when there is a loss of any SV stream or received SV
frames have bad quality. The user can execute control action, thus, enabling switchgear control through contact outputs
during SV stream trouble.
When the operand is high, the contact outputs are blocked when there is a loss of any SV stream or received SV frames
have bad quality. The switchgear control is not available through contact outputs during SV stream trouble.
SV DELAY ALARM — The sampled value (SV) frames can arrive with a delay from the MUs, which can be due to the MU
performance or different network path delays. This setting specifies the maximum delay expected between the time a
sample is taken at the MU and the time of arrival of that SV message, where sampling time is estimated based on the UR
Process Bus Module clock and the sampling rate. If the calculated frame delay is more than this setting value, the RxSV#
Delay Alm On FlexLogic operand asserts. The setting value needs to be calibrated and set at the commissioning time for
the given network topology. An alarm in runtime indicates the network performance is degrading over the time. In short,
this setting specifies how long the UR waits to declare that a sample is delayed. Protection is not blocked by this setting.
QUALITY CHECK — Flags are used to assess quality of sampled value data to ensure protection. This setting specifies how
5 the sampled values are processed by the UR when the associated q.validity is set to Questionable. Quality is checked per
AC bank, not per SV stream.
When set to Reject Questionable, the questionable data is treated the same as Invalid and the frame is rejected. Only Good
quality data is accepted.
Set it to Accept Questionable only if it is absolutely known that questionable quality from a MU is not compromising the
quality of the data for various applications. When set to Accept Questionable, the Good and Questionable quality data are
accepted.
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER — This setting activates or deactivates the anti-aliasing filter, which conditions the sampled values
from the Process Bus network.
If Merging Unit providing sampled values is applying anti-aliasing filter, then this setting has to be set to Disabled.
Otherwise, it can be set to Enabled to apply filtering for the received sampled values. When Enabled, the device applies a
low-pass-filter attenuating all the harmonics above the 15th order harmonics. Refer the Product Specifications chapter for
measurement accuracy for the higher harmonics.
SMPSYNCH CHECK — This setting is a time synchronization check. It specifies the time synchronization source of an SV
stream (SmpSynch attribute value in an SV message header) expected by the UR Process Bus Module.
When set to “Global”, only the SV streams with SmpSynch indicating a Global (2) value are accepted. A stream with a
SmpSynch value other than Global (2) is rejected.
When set to “Local” or “Local-87L”, all SV streams with SmpSynch indicating a Local (1) or Global (2) area clock are
accepted.
When set to “Any”, any SmpSynch value in the range of 0 to 254 is acceptable (0 to 127 for UR 7.80), and streams outside
the range are rejected.
When all the subscribed MU streams support IEC61850 Ed 2.1, an additional acceptance criterion as outlined in the
description of setting Fallback GmID, has been added from UR version 8.5 and onwards.
Fallback GmID:

Range: 8 Octet string

Default: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
From UR version 8.5, along with SmpSynch attribute, SynchSrcID attribute published in the RxSV streams supporting
IEC61850 Ed 2.1 is used as acceptance criteria for the RxSV streams to be used by the Protection elements.
In the absence of Global Clock, this setting indicates the GmID of the local clock to which all subscribed MUs have to be
synchronized for RxSV streams to be accepted. The effect of the Fallback GmID is explained as below:
• "When SMPSYNCH CHECK is set to "Global", only the RxSV streams with SmpSynch attribute indicating a Global (2)
value are accepted. SynchSrcID(GmID) Check is not done as all the streams accepted are Globally synchronized.
• "When SMPSYNCH CHECK is set to "LocaL" only the SV streams with SmpSynch attribute value of Global (2) or Local(1)
are accepted. Here three different use case scenarios arise and the RxSV stream acceptance is as given below:
– 1) All streams have SmpSynch attribute value of Global(2): All RxSVs are accepted by SmpSynch Check setting.
GmID Check is not done as all streams are Global.
– 2) All streams SmpSynch attribute value of Local(1): All RxSVs are accepted by SmpSynch Check setting. From the
above accepted RxSVs, only the RxSVs streams whose GmID matches 'Fall-back GmID' are accepted. If 'Fall-back
GmID' is '00 00 …' then the RxSVs streams whose GmID matches with the GmID of one of the subscribed RxSV
stream as reference, will only be accepted.
– 3) Mix of streams with SmpSynch attribute value of Global and Local : RxSV streams with SmpSync attribute
values of Global and Local only are accepted by SmpSynch Check setting. From the above streams, only the RxSV
streams with SmpSync attribute value of Global will remain valid and the RxSV streams with SmpSync attribute
value of Local will be rejected. SynchSrcID(GmID) Check is not done as all the valid streams are Global.
• When SMPSYNCH CHECK is set to Any, RxSV streams with SmpSynch attribute values of Global (2) or Local(1) or No
Sync(0) are accepted. All RxSVs are accepted by SmpSynch Check setting. SynchSrcID(GmID) Check is not done as user
expects all RxSVs to be accepted.
• 5

Figure 5-100: SympSynchCheck with GmID Flowchart
Table 5-20: Effect of SMPSYNCH CHECK setting and attribute

MU UR Setting: SMPSYNCH CHECK
Smpsynch
Global Local Any
Attribute
Global Protection elements Protection elements Protection elements
operational operational operational
Local Protection elements blocked Protection elements Protection elements
operational operational
if GmId=GmIDRef
Any Protection elements blocked Protection elements blocked Other protection elements
operational

TARGET — This setting is available in the EnerVista software, where the user can select the target messages of the affected
SV stream(s) to be displayed on the front panel. The target gets self-reset once the issue with the SV stream is resolved.
Note that a selected target message applies to all the configured SV streams. For example, if target message 'RxSV DELAY
ALM ON' is selected, then a target displays when any of the configured SV streams has an active SV Delay Alarm. When set
to Disabled, no target message displays on the front panel.
Figure 5-101: FlexLogic operand target selection
EVENTS — This setting is available in the EnerVista software, where user can select the flexlogic operands which will
generate the events of the affected SV stream(s), to be recorded in the event recorder. Note that a selected event from the
menu applies to all the configured SV streams. When set to Disabled, no event is recorded in the event recorder.

Figure 5-102: FlexLogic operand event selection
5
Choose carefully the events to be recorded in the event recorder. If an SV stream is noisy, there is risk of event
recorder overflow. Apart from testing, select a minimal number of events following relay commissioning.
5.6.4 SV Stream Config

The UR platform can subscribe up to eight sampled value (SV) streams. Up to six banks and up to six sources can be used
for protection.
Reception of a sampled value (RxSV) can be enabled in the IEC 61850-9-2LE or IEC 61869-9/13 format.
These settings are available in the software only. They also can be configured in the software using a CID file.
The path is Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config. If a message displays that the data cannot be opened, it
can mean that access timed out; try again.

Figure 5-103: Example of sampled values configuration
The configuration window is explained as follows:

• The four areas of the window (Common Setting, RxSV Streams, Advanced Config, AC Banks, and Sources) collapse and
expand by clicking their buttons
• A column collapses and expands by clicking its heading
• The Show Enabled button toggles active/configured content
• The Show Custom Layout button toggles changes made to formatting, such as column width. Such changes can be
made with or without the button active, and they are retained when the panel is closed.
• There are up to eight RxSV, eight AC Bank, and six Source columns. A B30 can have up to 24 RxSV, 30 AC Bank (24 CT
and six VT), and 30 Source columns.
• With IEC 61869-9, the Advanced Config fields populate and are read-only when importing a file
• Rules are enforced and the configuration cannot be saved until the rules are followed. For example, Neutral Origin 1
and Neutral Origin 2 cannot be mapped to the same SV stream. See the troubleshooting section that follows.

• The window is configured based on the separate areas and not based on columns. For example, stream RxSV1 is
configured in the SV Messages area of the window, not the first column in the entire window. Or for example, Source1
in the first column can be configured to use AC Bank B2 in the second column.
• The following example shows that Source1 at the bottom of the window is set to map to AC Bank B2, which is mapped
to the first stream (RxSV1) and its available VT1 phase voltage and VT2 neutral voltage.
Figure 5-104: Understanding SV configuration
• The UR allows switching AC banks (essentially streams) from the main measuring MU to the alternate measuring MU.
Once an operand assigned to the SWITCH ALT CT/VT setting is logical "1," the input data to this source is switched from
the banks assigned to PHASE CT/GROUND CT to the banks assigned to ALT PHASE CT/ALT GROUND CT settings for
current transformers. This is similar for voltage transformers.
• Banks assigned to the same function for the main and alternate input data have to have the same CT and VT
nominals and connections, otherwise a warning is generated and switching functionality is prohibited. For example,
banks assigned to the PHASE CT and ALT PHASE CT have to have same primary and secondary CT values.
• During switching from the main CT/VT input data to alternate input data and vice versa, all relay functions are blocked
for two power cycles and metering data does not update
• See the Source Switching section under SETTINGS > SYSTEM SETUP > SIGNAL SOURCES in this manual for application
examples of AC bank switching

An example of the configuration process is as follows:

1. Configure SV streams by importing an MU CID file. This populates the SV Messages area of the window.
2. Configure the Sources fields.
3. Map the AC Bank fields to the RxSV Stream fields.
4. Troubleshoot using the messages displayed during configuration and/or upon save so that the rules are followed.
Saving frequently during configuration helps to deal with issues early.
5. Restart the relay for the changes to take effect.
The table outlines mapping examples using CT channels. VT channels are similar.
Table 5-21: CT configuration mapping examples
Scenario AC Bank configuration Advanced Config configuration
No CT signal in the SV stream --- ---
One neutral Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
Two neutrals Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
Neutral Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/NTR CT2-N maps to AC2
Three phases Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C map to AC1, 2, 3
Three phases followed by one neutral Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR
One neutral followed by three phases Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C map to AC2, 3, 4
One neutral followed by three phases, then Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT1-N maps to AC1
followed by one neutral Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C, N map to AC2, 3, 4, 5
Three phases followed by one neutral, then
another neutral
Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS
CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
CT2-N maps to AC5 5
Two three-phases Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C map to AC1, 2, 3
Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C map to AC4, 5, 6
Three phases followed by one neutral, then Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
another three phases Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT2-A, B, C map to AC5, 6, 7
Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS
Three phases followed by another three phases, Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C map to AC1, 2, 3
then one neutral Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS CT2-A, B, C, N map to AC4, 5, 6, 7
Three phases, one neutral, then another three Phase Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/PHS CT1-A, B, C, N map to AC1, 2, 3, 4
phases and one neutral. Neutral Origin 1 = RxSV1-CT1/NTR CT2-A, B, C, N map to AC5, 6, 7, 8
See the following figure. Phase Origin 2 = RxSV2-CT2/PHS

Figure 5-105: Example three phases, one neutral, then three phases and one neutral
5.6.4.1 Logic
The logic diagram follows.

Figure 5-106: SV stream logic diagram
SV streams are accepted based on the following settings that need to match the MU:
• SmpSynch Check — Time synchronization check as outlined earlier in the General section
• Quality Check — Outlined earlier
• svID — Multicast Sampled Value Identification of a stream
• Dst MAC — Destination Media Access Control address in the header of the SV message
• ConfRev — When the configuration revision is non-zero, the UR accepts the frame when it matches its configured
value
The relay decodes an SV stream when the DstMAC attribute of the injected SV stream matches any of the
configured SV stream subscriptions.
Each qualified SV stream (that is, with matching svID, Dst MAC, and ConfRev) that is mapped to any of the AC Banks is
checked for the SV delay, matching Sim bit, time synchronization source, and quality checks.
When four samples in 1/8th of power cycle duration fail any of these checks, a corresponding FlexLogic operand is
asserted, with a drop-out timer of one protection pass. The drop-out timer is retriggered each time that the check fails.

The RxSV# Lost FlexLogic operand is set when consecutive 160 samples (two cycles) are lost following the assertion of SV
DELAY ALARM. The time accuracy for the assertion of this operand can be up to two protection passes.
The RxSV# Off FlexLogic operand is set when the "Miss Sample Algorithm" fails (for example, due to temporary loss of
stream or stream rejected due to any condition check failure) or the stream is lost, with a drop-out time of 17 protection
passes. Every "Miss Sample Algorithm" fail condition for that RxSV# stream retriggers the drop-out timer for the RxSV# Off
operand.
5.6.4.2 Message troubleshooting

Examples for messages displayed are as follows:
• The SvID attribute of RxSV1 is empty — Type a name for the stream in the svID field
• The number of channels being selected for CT2-N...exceed the total allowable 7 CT channels — Set the CT2-N field to
None, or increase the CT Channels field to 8
• The number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the total allowable 4 CT channels — The CT Channels
field is set at 4 and there are entries in the CT2-A/B/C/N fields. Set the latter fields to None or increase the number of
channels.
• The selected ’RxSV3’ stream is disabled. Configure stream before assigning to AC Bank Phase Origin — Enable the
RxSV3 stream in its SV Stream field
• The AC Bank 2 assigned to Source 1 is not configured — B2 is set in a Source1 field at the bottom of the window. In the
AC BANKS area of the window, go to the B2 column, and set one of the fields.
• The AC Bank 2 is a Voltage channel and is assigned to Phase CT of Source 1 — In the Source area of the window,
change the B2 assignment from Phase CT to VT
• The AC Bank x assigned...is not configured.., — Configure the AC Banks section in the software window before setting
the field
5 • The CT channels set of the selected ’RxSV1-CT1’ are not configured — In the Advanced Config section, set the CT fields
5.6.4.3 SV quality processing

• Any degradation in the measurement or sampled value data of the merging unit inhibits the protection functions of
the IED. IEC 61850 assigns quality attributes to each sampled value channel, to identify the data validity. The UR
Process Bus Module interface uses the quality flags of subscribed analog channels to enable or inhibit the protection
functions
• Quality is checked per channel in an ASDU/frame. For example, if A-phase current has invalid quality, but other current
channels have good quality, the frames with good quality are still accepted and values are displayed in the metering.
However, if any channel in the AC Bank has invalid quality, protection functions using this AC bank are blocked until all
four channels have good quality.
• For protection functions to work correctly, q.validity needs to be good. Samples with invalid quality can result in
unacceptable behavior from the protection functions. An SV analog quantity with q.validity = invalid is ignored.
• When “Quality Check” is set to 'Accept questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is valid. When
“Quality Check” is set to 'Reject questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is ignored.
• When the relay is in-service, or test function is Disabled, the data with q.test set to TRUE is processed as invalid
• When the relay test function is forced or isolated, the data with q.test set to TRUE and q.test set to FALSE is valid.
• If any channel value within a sampled value stream is rejected due to a quality check, the device sets a FlexLogic
operand “RxSV# QualChk Fail” for the duration of the quality check failure.
5.6.4.4 SV simulation processing

When received SV frames have Sim Bit TRUE, the frame is ignored unless the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is true
(@Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is true when Settings > Simulation > Subscribe to Simulated Values > Simulation Mode is
Enabled). When @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is TRUE
• Once subscribed SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are accepted, subscribed SV messages with simulation bit
FALSE are ignored and the received SV messages with the simulation bit TRUE are used in place of the actual SV
messages until @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is set to FALSE

• When a SV frame is received with simulation bit TRUE, the FlexLogic operand for the corresponding stream is set as
RxSV# SimBit On. After the latest change in simulation bit as recorded by the "Latest Sim Bit Change" time stamp, the
relay takes 4 to 8 msec to process and assert the RxSV# SimBit On FlexLogic operand.
• If SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are not received, the RxSv# continues to use the actual SV frames
• When the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal changes from TRUE to FALSE
– Subscribed SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are ignored immediately after this change
– Only subscribed SV messages with simulation bit FALSE are accepted
5.6.4.5 Settings
The following settings are available.
RxSV Format
Range: IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1, IEC 61869-9 ed1.0
Default: IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1
This setting selects the SV frame format, or protocol.
When set to “IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1”, the IED assumes that the received SV frame references datasets that comply with
IEC 61850-9-2LE, Table 6: Dataset (PhsMeas1). The IED must be configured with a system frequency of 50 or 60 Hz for
correct operation.
When set to “IEC 61869-9 ed1.0”, the IED assumes that the dataset rules comply with IEC 61869-9 ed1.0 and that the
number of Application-layer Service Data Units (ASDUs) are user-configurable.
When a file using a single SV stream (either IEC 61850-9-2LE r2-1 or IEC 61869-9 ed1.0) is converted from firmware
version 8.2x and below to firmware versions 8.3x and above, the conversion will complete with no errors and the
RxSV Format setting will have the same value as the original file. 5
If there is a mix of SV streams in the original file, then the user will be notified of this error and all configured SV
streams will be set to the SV Stream default; “Disabled”. The RxSV Format setting will also default to “IEC 61850-9-2LE
r2-1”.
SV Stream
Default: Disabled
This setting enables an SV stream. When set to “Disabled”, all other RxSV# settings are not editable and set to default.
svID
Range: 1 up to 129 Visible String characters
svID refers to the name of the sampled value packet. The svID field of incoming SV messages must exactly match this
value for the message to be accepted as a valid RxSV# message. The svID field of the sampled value frame must be
unique within the system/substation.
Dst MAC
Range: any valid multicast MAC (12-digit hexadecimal number)
Default: 01-0C-CD-04-00-00
Only received SV messages having a destination Media Access Control (MAC) address equal to this value are accepted as
valid RxSV# messages. Each address must be unique.
The destination MAC increases the overall performance of multicast message reception by filtering only the configured
messages for processing. For a received SV message, the Dst MAC is validated if it matches with any of the configured
RxSV# Dst MAC. If validation is successful, the message is forwarded for further checks. There is no explicit check for the
configured Dst MAC versus the SvID for a received SV message.

ConfRev
Default: 0
ConfRev refers to configuration revision, which is a count of configuration changes in the SV control block. If the value
entered here is non-zero, the ConfRev field of incoming SV messages must match this value for the message to be
accepted as a valid RxSV# message. If the setting is zero, RxSV# does not check the value received in the ConfRev field.
Force MU Out of Service
Default: Off
This setting is intended specifically for forcing a faulty Merging Unit (MU) out of service in applications where a circuit can
be energized from more than one side, such as breaker and a half application, and the redundancy at MU level is not
available. For such application current from both sides are summed up using UR source mechanism and if one MU fails,
it will block all protection functions from using this source.
Figure 5-107: Forcing MU1 out of service for a Breaker-and-a-half configuration
dƌĂŶƐŵŝƐƐŝŽŶ>ŝŶĞ
Zǆ^sϭ Zǆ^sϮ
Dhϭ DhϮ
KƵƚKĨ^ĞƌǀŝĐĞ
hZ
ϴϰϮϴϯϵϭ͘ĐĚƌ
For example, in the above figure it is possible to open Breaker1 and still keep the system energized through Breaker 2. The
setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE allows MU1to be taken out of service while keeping the protection and control elements
operational by using the RxSV stream from MU2 only. If redundancy is available at MU level, then the protection can be
kept operational without using setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE, through the Cross-checking functionality. Please refer to
the description of settings CROSS-CHECKING, PHASE ORIGIN 1, 2 and NEUTRAL ORIGIN 1, 2 for more details.
To put an MU out of service, the corresponding breaker has to be opened before asserting the FlexLogic selected in the
setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE to the “ON” state. The MU can now be disconnected for troubleshooting purposes. The
current channels from the affected MU will be treated as “online” with sampled current values forced to ZEROs. The
protection using respective source remains operational based on the current values sent by the other MU which is located
on the closed breaker side.
It should be noted that:
• Keeping RxSV online (with current substituted as ZEROs) is applicable to current channels only. The status of voltage
channels will become “Offline”, and the protection elements will get blocked according to the setting SV TRBL PRT
BLOCK.
• The FlexLogic operands on the SV Config logic show the actual state of the affected the RxSV stream (i.e., RxSV# Off/
On), irrespective of setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE being “Off” or “On”.

The user must ensure that the primary circuit to which the affected MU is connected remains de-energized for the
entire duration of forcing MU out of service, otherwise the protection elements will mal-operate. The circuit should
be de-energized before changing the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE to “On”. The circuit should be energized only
after the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is set to “Off”.
SV stream processing FlexLogic operands must not be used to automate FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE. It is strongly
recommended that FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is manually controlled (for example, through a pushbutton, contact
input, virtual input, or GOOSE).
The setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE is intended for applications where a breaker can be opened, and the
corresponding MU can be taken out of service while the circuit is energized through another breaker such as in
breaker-and-a-half application. For any other application, the use of this setting should be carefully evaluated.
Application of the setting FORCE MU OUT OF SERVICE together with cross-checking function is not recommended.
Stream Status
This is an LED status indicator for the reception of an SV stream (RxSV#).
A green LED reflects the RxSV# On FlexLogic operand, meaning that the SV stream is online.
A red LED reflects the RxSV# Off FlexLogic operand, meaning that the SV stream is offline.
When the EnerVista UR Setup software is not online or the stream is disabled, the LED is grayed-out with Not Available,
or “-NA-” status.
Advanced Configuration
Click the button to display or hide the fields.
These are settings to import an MU CID file and/or support IEC 61869-9 based SV streams, as per Table 902 on Standard
sample rates. IEC 61869-9 allows flexibility on numbers of current and voltage channels. It can be in one of these 5
sequences: A, B, C, N or A, AB, B, BC, C, CA, N. The UR supports up to eight CT channels and up to eight VT channels and
one or two ASDUs for protection applications. The following settings are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC
61869-9, and they also depend on the MU Variant Code.
MU SCL Import
Use this feature to configure SV streams by importing an MU CID file. The setting file comparison with IEC 61869-9-2LE
configuration is not available. The IEC 61850 Merge feature with IEC 61869-9-2LE is not available.
Upon clicking the Import button and selecting a .cid file, a window appears from which to select the stream to import.
Figure 5-108: Selecting a stream to import from a merging unit CID file
Rules for accepting a CID file include

• The same remote channel cannot be mapped to more than one AC bank channel
• An AC bank channel cannot be mapped to more than one remote channel
• For each AC bank, there are three phase inputs from the same SV control block and all three inputs are configured
• Phase 1 and Phase 2 inputs are not from the same SV control block
• Phase 1 and Phase 2 aux inputs are not from the same SV control block

• A configured Phase consumes three analog channels and Aux consumes one analog channel, with a maximum of 24
channels
SvCBRef
Range: 0 up to 129 alphanumeric, underscore, slash, and period characters, beginning with an alpha character
This field is read-only. When imported, the MU SCL file populates this field. The value is an ObjectReference to the
publishing control block in the format:
<LDName>/LLN0.<SvCBName>
where <LDName> is the function-related name, if any, of the logical device containing the publishing control block,
otherwise the product-related name of that logical device, and <SvCBName> is the name of the publishing control block.
When RxSV# is configured manually, the field is empty.
CT Channels
Range: 0 to 8
Default: 4
This setting specifies the number of CT channels available in the subscribed RxSV# message from the publisher MU. The
CT-1 fields reflect the number selected here. The number of current quantities matches the number specified by the
Variant Code of the MU.
Typically, a CT channel includes four current channels (three phase-ground currents and one ground/neutral/earth
current). A current channel is the combination of the current sample value attribute (AmpSv.instMag.i) and the
subsequent quality attribute (AmpSv.q).
If CT Channels is 4, CT1-A/B/C/N are supported for the stream.
If CT Channels is 8, CT2-A/B/C/N also are supported for the stream.
5 If CT Channels is 0, no CT channels display for AC input selection.
This setting is read-only and fixed at 4 when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
If a message displays that "the number of channels being selected for CT inputs...exceeds the total allowable 4 CT
channels," it means that the CT Channels field is set at 4 and there are entries in the CT2-A/B/C/N fields. Set the latter
fields to None or increase the number of channels.
VT Channels
Range: 0 to 8
Default: 4
This setting specifies the number of VT channels in the subscribed RxSV# message from the publisher MU. Typically, VT
channels include four voltage channels (three phase-ground voltages and auxiliary voltage). This setting specifies the
number of voltage channels in the subscribed RxSV# message. The voltage channel is the combination of voltage
sample value attribute (VolSv.instMag.i) and the corresponding quality attribute (VolSv.q). The VT-1 fields reflect the
number selected here. The number of voltage quantities matches the number specified by the Variant Code of the
dataset.
If VT Channels is 4, VT1-A/B/C/N are supported for the stream.
If VT Channels is 8, VT2-A/B/C/ also are supported for the stream.
If VT Channels is 0, no VT channels display for AC input selection.
This setting is read-only and fixed at 4 when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
If a message displays that "the number of channels being selected for VI inputs...exceeds the total allowable 2 VT
channels," it means that the VT Channels field is set at 2 and there are more than two entries in the VT1-A/B/C/N fields.
The number of configured VT1 fields needs to match the VT Channels field.
ASDUs
Range: 1, 2
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of Application-layer Service Data Units (ASDUs) concatenated in one Application
Protocol Data Unit (APDU) in the subscribed RxSV# message. When concatenating several ASDUs into one frame, the
ASDU with the oldest samples is the first one in the frame.

This setting is read-only and set at the default when an SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE. When SV Strem is set to IEC
61869-9, this setting can only be set to the default value 1 in UR8.50 , it can be set to other value in the previous versions.
Recycle power to the relay when changing this setting.
Variant Code
The EnerVista software auto-populates the Variant Code for the RxSV# message based on the settings Sample Rate, the
number of ASDUs, the number of CT Channels, and the number of VT Channels configured.
For example, F4800S2I8U0 describes sampled values with 4800 samples per second, two ASDU (samples) per message,
8 currents, and no voltages.
As another example, F4800S1I8U4 means sampled values with 4800 samples per second, 1 ASDU per message, 8 CT
channels, and 4 VT channels.
This field is read-only as per IEC 61869-9: 2016, Clause-6.903.2.
The number of samples (sample rate) in the variant code is set based on the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER
SYSTEM  NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting. This value displays 4000 Hz for 50 Hz nominal frequency. This value displays
4800 Hz for 60 Hz nominal frequency or any other nominal frequency except 50 Hz. IEC 61869-9 suggests the 4800 Hz
sample rate for general measuring and protective applications, regardless of the power system frequency.
CT1-A/B/C
Range: None, AC1 to AC16
Default: AC1/AC2/AC3
This setting specifies the sequence of Analog Channel (per phase) that is mapped to the CT-1 of the corresponding
stream. An origin to CT Phase input defines the physical measurement input to the CT bank by mapping specific AC
inputs from that merging unit (or SV message).
The fields are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9. The CT1 phases are available if the number of CT
Channels is 4 or below. CT2 is added if CT Channels is 5 or higher.
The fields are set to the defaults and are read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
5
CT1- N
Default: AC4
This setting specifies the Analog Channel that is mapped to the CT ground/neutral input. An origin to CT1-N input
defines the physical measurement input to the CT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV message). If
the MU does not publish any CT1-N inputs, configure the setting as None.
In the EnerVista software, the CT Aux input setting only populates the current channels of that RxSV#.
This CT Aux input setting is active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9.
This CT Aux input setting is set to AC4 and is read-only when the SV Stream is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
VT1-A/B/C
Default: AC5/AC6/AC7
This setting specifies the Analog Channel (per phase) that is mapped to the VT1- phase inputs. An origin to VT Phase
input defines the physical measurement input to the VT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV
message). If the MU does not publish any VT channels, configure the setting as None.
The VT1 phase fields are active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9. The VT1 phases are available if the
number of VT Channels is 4 or below. VT2 is added if VT Channels is 5 or higher.
The fields are set to the defaults and are read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
VT1-N
Default: AC8
This setting specifies the Analog Channel that is mapped to the VT Aux/neutral input. An origin to VT input defines the
physical measurement input to the VT bank by mapping specific AC inputs from that MU (or SV message). If the MU does
not publish any VT1-N inputs, configure the setting as None.

In the EnerVista software, the VT Aux input setting only populates the voltage channels of that RxSV#.
The VT1-N input setting is active when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61869-9.
The VT1-N input setting is set to the default and is read-only when the SV Stream field is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE.
AC BANKS
The UR platform supports up to six AC Banks. They can be CT or VT banks (similar to SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  AC
INPUTS  CURRENT/VOLTAGE BANK). That is, each AC Bank can be configured either as current or voltage (not both). If
configured as current, inapplicable voltage settings (such as VT ratio, VT secondary) are inactive. Similarly, if a bank is
configured as voltage, current settings (such as CT primary, CT secondary) are inactive. In addition, bank level
redundancy (that is, Origin-1 and Origin-2) is supported using crosschecking of each channel signal received from two
different SV streams that are connected to the same electrical point on the primary power system. A maximum 24
channels can be configured to the AC Banks.
Click the button to display or hide the fields.
The following settings are available for each AC bank.
Each Phase Origin setting consumes three phase channels Ia/Va, Ib/Vb, or Ic/Vc, and a Neutral Origin setting consumes
one ground or Aux Channel In/Vn, which means that
– An AC Bank with Phase Origin1 and Neutral Origin1 settings configured consumes four channels
– An AC Bank with both Phase Origin 1 and Phase Origin 2 and both Neutral Origin 1 and Neutral Origin 2 settings
configured consumes eight channels
A maximum of 24 channels can be configured to the AC Banks.
For changes in this section, restart the relay, for example using Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.
Phase Origin 1, 2
5 Range: None, RxSV1-CT1/PHS, RxSV1-VT1/PHS to RxSV8-CT1/PHS, RxSV8-VT1/PHS
Default: None
An origin to an AC bank defines the physical measurement input to the bank by mapping specific AC inputs from a
specific MU to the bank.
The UR Process Bus Module provides for the reliability of AC values for protection, metering, and oscillography by
allowing duplicate origins of AC data. An origin is considered unavailable when set to None. If origin 1 is available, the
relay uses the values from origin 1 for protection, metering, and oscillography. Otherwise if origin 2 is available, the relay
uses the values from origin 2. If both origins are unavailable, then the bank AC values are forced to zero to prevent
ambiguity of measurement.
With crosschecking, the relay can use different origins. See the Crosschecking setting for information regarding
automatic protection blocking possibilities on loss of one or both origins.
The two-phase origins in an AC bank must be of the same type and connected to the same electrical point in the primary
power system. The two origins must be two currents with the same CT settings, or two voltages with the same VT
settings. The current/voltage type of the phase and auxiliary origins must also match on each AC bank. It is intended
that the origin AC inputs measure the same primary quantity with the same ratio. The same ratio and connection
settings are applied to both origins.
Neutral Origin 1, 2
Range: None, RxSV1-CT1/NTR, RxSV1-VT1/ NTR to RxSV8-CT1/NTR, RxSV8-VT1/ NTR
Default: None
These settings specify the field units that are the origins of the auxiliary input IN or VN. Duplicate auxiliary origins are
supported in the same way as phase origins.
The two auxiliary origins in an AC bank must be of the same type. The two origins must be two currents with the same CT
secondary setting, or two voltages. The current/voltage type of the phase and auxiliary origins also must match on each
AC bank. It is intended that the origin AC inputs measure the same primary quantity with the same ratio. The same ratio
and connection settings are applied to both origins.

Crosschecking
Range: None, Depend Origin-1 Pref, Depend Origin-2 Pref
Default: None
The crosschecking feature allows application-level redundancy by checking between two independent SV streams from
the same electrical connection of the instrument transformers. In addition to the network redundancy provided by PRP/
HSR, the UR Process Bus Module allows the relay to communicate with redundant merging units.
When set to None, crosschecking is disabled. Use this on a non-protection-critical AC bank, such as one used for a
synchrocheck voltage. GE strongly recommends setting it to None when redundancy is not supported at the merging
unit level; otherwise the "ACBank# Orig1(2) In Use" operand status is inaccurate.
Origin preference is supported in case of discrepancy in dependability mode. This allows testing (secondary injection) or
replacement of an MU that is configured to non-preferred origin without affecting protection functions since these
functions are using a preferred origin stream when online. As such, dependability with Origin-1 preference allows
continued use of Origin-1 in case of discrepancy between both online origin stream sampled values. Similarly,
dependability with Origin-2 preference allows continued use of Origin-2 in case of discrepancy between both online
origin stream sampled values.
The table shows how the Crosschecking setting, the availability of AC bank origins, and discrepancy checks determine
whether protection is blocked. Blocked here means only protection elements. It does not inhibit metering, actual values,
oscillography, or other functions.
When set to Depend Origin-1 Pref, protection is blocked if there is no good signal from both the Origin-1 and Origin-2
sources. When both the merging unit sources are good, the preference is given always for Origin-1. When the preferred
MU sources fails, the alternate MU source is used for protection and measurement.
When set to Depend Origin-2 Pref, protection is blocked if there is no good signal from both the Origin-1 and Origin-2
sources. When both the merging unit sources are good, the preference is given always for Origin-2. When the preferred
MU sources fails, the alternate MU source is used for protection and measurement.
5
While switching from a preferred to non-preferred channel, the protection functions are delayed for two cycles.
While switching back to a preferred channel, the protection functions are delayed for one cycle.
Table 5-22: Crosschecking and protection behavior

Crosschecking Origin-1 RxSV stream Origin-2 RxSV Discrepancy check Protection operation
setting status stream status
None Not relevant Not relevant No check Normal
Depend Origin-1 Not mapped Not mapped No check Normal
Pref
Online Online OK / discrepant Normal using Origin-1 stream
Online Offline No check Normal using Origin-1 stream
Offline Online No check Normal using Origin-2 stream
Offline Offline No check Blocked
Depend Origin-2 Not mapped Not mapped No check Normal
Pref
Online Online OK / discrepant Normal using Origin-2 stream
Online Offline No check Normal using Origin-1 stream
Offline Online No check Normal using Origin-2 stream
Offline Offline No check Blocked
Origin1 becomes offline and switches to Origin2 for the following reasons:
• When more than three of five frame samples received are invalid or a frame with sequence number is received after
three consecutive missed frames for any channel of origin.
The reason for invalid frames can be any of the following reasons:
– If one or more AmpSv.q or VolSv.q attribute(s) are invalid from the assigned SV frame channels to the AC bank
origin

– When “Quality Check” is set to 'Reject questionable' data, the data with q.validity = questionable is processed as
invalid
– When the relay is in-service or the test function is Disabled, the SV data with q.test set to TRUE is processed invalid
– When received SV frames with Sim Bit TRUE, the frame is invalid unless the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is
true (that is Settings > Simulation > GOOSE/SV > Accept Sim GOOSE&SV or Settings > Simulation > Subscribe
to Simulated Values > Simulation Mode is set to Enabled)
– If the value of @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is TRUE, once a subscribed SV messages with simulation bit TRUE are
received, subscribed SV messages with simulation bit FALSE are invalid until @Master/LPHD1.Sim.stVal is set to
FALSE
– SV streams with “SmpSync” value out of the following specified ranges are rejected:
i. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Global” (2), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set to Global (2) are
accepted
ii. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Local” (1), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set to Global (2) or Local (1)
are accepted
iii. When the “SmpSynch Check” is set to “Any” (0 to 254), SV streams with “SmpSynch” value set in the range of 0
to 254 are accepted. For 7.80 version, the accepted range is 0 to 127.
• SV frames are delayed/not received for more than 1.9 power system cycles
The selected Origin quality will be the quality of the AC Bank.
If both Origins have invalid quality, then the AC Bank data is marked as invalid and does not participate in protection.
Phase/Ground CT Primary
Range: 1 to 65000 A insteps of 1
Default: 1
5 Enter the rated CT primary current value in Amperes. For 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, enter 1000.
Phase/Ground CT Secondary
Range: 1A, 5A
Default: 1A
Enter the rated CT secondary current value in Amperes. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the
setting (that must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
Phase CT Polarity
Range: Standard, Inverted-3ph, Inverted Ph-A, Inverted Ph-B, Inverted Ph-C
Default: Standard
If CTs are wired with the correct polarity in all phases, i.e. CT polarity reversal is not required, “Standard” should be
selected. If CT polarity is incorrect in just one phase, then select “Inverted Ph-A (B or C)”; choosing the affected phase. If
CT polarities of all three phases are incorrect, select “Inverted-3Ph” to correct the CT polarities for all three phases. It
should be noted that the oscillography record will capture the CTs current signal as applied to the relay terminal
irrespective of this setting. This ensures correct relay behavior when recorded oscillography is played back to the relay.
Ground CT Polarity
Range: Standard, Inverted
Default: Standard
If the ground CT is wired with the correct polarity, select “Standard” for this setting. If the Ground CT polarity is incorrect,
then select “Inverted” to correct it. It should be noted that the oscillography record will capture ground CT current signal
as applied to the relay terminal irrespective of this setting. This ensures the correct relay behavior when recorded
oscillography is played back to the relay.
It is important that the settings PHASE CT POLARITY and GROUND CT POLARITY are set to the correct values before
putting the relay into operation. Selecting the wrong value or changing this setting whilst relay is in operation would
result in undesirable operation of the protection and control functions.
If the user intends to use the crosschecking functionality (redundancy at MU level), then this setting should be used
carefully to ensure that CT Polarity is the same on both MUs on each phase/neutral channel.

SIGNAL SOURCES
Click the button to display or hide the fields. The first six Sources are the platform sources and can accept both current
banks and voltage banks and are associated with AC bank 1 to 6. The first six sources allow current summation for
phase and auxiliary CTs.
Recycle power to the relay when changing a source.
Name
Default: SRC 1
This setting specifies an alphanumeric name for the source.
Phase CT
Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6, B1+B2, ... B1+B2+B3+B4+B5+B6 or B7...B28
Default: None
This setting selects the phase CTs of an AC bank or the sum of the phase CTs of multiple AC banks to be the phase
current of the source. That is, it select the AC Banks section above in the window.
If you see the message "the AC Bank x assigned...is not configured..," it means that you need to configure the AC Banks
section in the software window before setting this field. The AC Bank selected can match the Origins fields and Sources,
such as a Phase CT set at B1 with Phase Origin 1 RxSV1-CT1/PHS and source SRC1. Another example is to use Phase CT
set at B2 with Phase Origin 1 RxSV2-CT1/PHS and source SRC2.
Ground CT
Default: None
This setting selects the ground CTs of an AC bank or the sum of the ground CTs of multiple AC banks to be the ground 5
current of the source. That is, it selects the AC Banks section above in the window.
Phase VT
Range: None, B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B6
Default: None
This setting selects the phase VTs of an AC bank to be the phase voltages of the source.
Aux VT
Default: None
This setting selects the auxiliary VT input of an AC bank to be the auxiliary voltage of the source.
Alt Phase CT
Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the alternate phase CTs of an AC bank or the
sum of the phase CTs of multiple AC banks to be the phase current of the source.
Alt Ground CT
Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the ground CTs of an AC bank or the sum of
the ground CTs of multiple AC banks to be the ground current of the source.
Switch Alt CT
Default: Off
This setting is for switching the alternate source on or off.

FLEXLOGIC CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Alt Phase VT
Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the phase VTs of an AC bank to be the phase
voltages of the source.
Alt Aux VT
Default: None
This setting is for switching between main and alternate sources. It selects the auxiliary VT input of an AC bank to be the
auxiliary voltage of the source.
Switch Alt VT
Default: Off
This setting is for switching the alternate source on or off.
5.7 FlexLogic
5.7.1 FlexLogic operands
For flexibility, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon
which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from contact input signals through elements or
5 combinations of elements to contact outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through
FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs that it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The
figure shows major subsystems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC
Figure 5-109: UR architecture overview
CTs DSP
VTs (A/D) FlexLogic™ Virtual
equations outputs
Calculate
DCmA parameters Measuring
Analog and
or
input decision Digital Flags
RTD
(A/D) elements elements
inputs
V I
Contact Form-A and
inputs FlexLogic™ SCR only
Block counters
operation Contact
(each outputs
element)
Keypad
Virtual Remote
inputs (FlexLogic operands) outputs
OR
Remote Display
inputs Control and LEDs
(GOOSE) and Display
monitoring
features
fiber Analog
Direct output (D/A)
G.703 inputs
RS422 (dcmA)
5
(Status) Fiber
Direct
G.703
outputs
RS422
(Actual values) (Status)
EnerVista UR Setup and LAN communications
827022A7.cdr
The states of all digital signals used in the T35 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in
this section). A digital “1” is represented by a set flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is wanted, this selection is made when programming the
element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes,
and human operators.
If more complex logic than shown in the figure is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, to have the closed
state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase
time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the
two control inputs to produce a virtual output that is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be
used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs is field-programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is
available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers, and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of operands to be assigned as inputs to

specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output.
Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of
parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, or flag set) or 0
(=OFF, or flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least four times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances, for example contact and remote inputs. These types
of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the front panel display. The table lists characteristics
of the different types of operands.
Table 5-23: T35 FlexLogic operand types
Operand type State Example of format Characteristics
[Input Is ‘1’ (= ON) if...]
Contact Input On Cont Ip On Voltage is applied presently to the input (external contact
closed)
Off Cont Ip Off Voltage is not applied presently to the input (external
contact open)
Contact Output Contact Closed Cont Op 1 Closed Contact output is closed
(type Form-A contact
Current On Cont Op 1 Ion Current is flowing through the contact
only)
Voltage On Cont Op 1 VOn Voltage exists across the contact
Voltage Off Cont Op 1 VOff Voltage does not exist across the contact
Direct Input On DIRECT INPUT 1 On The direct input is presently in the ON state
Element Pickup PHASE TOC1 PKP The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
5 (Analog) of an element that responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element that responds to falling values
Dropout PHASE TOC1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate PHASE TOC1 OP The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing
Block PHASE TOC1 BLK The output of the comparator is set to the block function
Element Pickup Dig Element 1 PKP The input operand is at logic 1
(Digital)
Dropout Dig Element 1 DPO This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate Dig Element 1 OP The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing
Element Higher than Counter 1 HI The number of pulses counted is above the set number
(Digital Counter)
Equal to Counter 1 EQL The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number
Lower than Counter 1 LO The number of pulses counted is below the set number
Fixed On On Logic 1
Off Off Logic 0
RxGOOSE Boolean On RxGOOSE Boolean 1 On The RxGOOSE Boolean is presently in the ON state
Virtual Input On Virt Ip 1 On The virtual input is presently in the ON state
Virtual Output On Virt Op 1 On The virtual output is presently in the set state (that is,
evaluation of the equation that produces this virtual output
results in a "1")
The following table lists the operands available for the relay. The operands can be viewed online by entering the IP address
of the relay in a web browser and accessing the Device Information Menu.

Any FlexLogic operands that are visible online but not listed below, are intended for factory use.
Table 5-24: T35 FlexLogic operands

Operand type Operand syntax Operand description
ANNUNCIATOR ANY ANCTR ABNORMAL On for one second when any annunciator window state changes from
Graphical front panel normal to abnormal
ANY ANCTR ALARMED On while any annunciator window state is abnormal
CONTROL CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed
PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed
Enhanced and basic CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed
front panels CONTROL PUSHBTN 4 ON Control pushbutton 4 is being pressed
CONTROL PUSHBTN 5 ON Control pushbutton 5 is being pressed
CYBERSENTRY ROLE ADMIN ACT Administrator role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE SUPERVISOR ACT Supervisor role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE ENGINEER ACT Engineer role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE OPERATOR ACT Operator role is active and is set to true when that is the case
ROLE OBSERVER ACT Observer role is active and is set to true when that is the case
AUTHENTICATION FAIL Operand set for Failed Authentication self-test and alarm
UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT Operand set for firmware lock self-test and alarm
UNAUTH SETTING WRITE Operand set for settings lock self-test and alarm
FACTORY MODE ACTIVE Factory mode is enabled and set to true
ROLE M2M ACT Machine to machine role is active (CyberSecurity)
DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16On
DIRECT DEVICE 1Off
Flag is set, logic=1
5
↓ ↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16Off Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT INPUT/ DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC
OUTPUT CHANNEL exceeded the user-specified level
MONITORING DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level
DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only)
DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only)
ELEMENT: SRC 1 CT SW PROT BLK Protection blocked due to Source 1 CT switching
AC sources switching SRC 1 VT SW PROT BLK Protection blocked due to Source 1 VT switching
SRC1 CT ALT BANK ON Source 1 switched CT input from Main to Alternate
SRC1 CT ALT BANK OFF Source 1 switched CT input from Alternate to Main
SRC1 VT ALT BANK ON Source 1 switched VT input from Main to Alternate
SRC1 VT ALT BANK OFF Source 1 switched VT input from Alternate to Main
SRC 1 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for SRC 1
ELEMENT: BKR ARC 1 OP Breaker arcing current 1 has operated
Breaker arcing BKR ARC 1 DPO Breaker arcing current 1 has dropped out
BKR ARC 1 MAX OP Breaker arcing current 1 max interrupting current has operated
BKR ARC 1 MAX DPO Breaker arcing current 1 max interrupting current has dropped out
BKR ARC 2 OP Breaker arcing current 2 has operated
BKR ARC 2 DPO Breaker arcing current 2 has dropped out
BKR ARC 2 MAX OP Breaker arcing current 2 max interrupting current has operated
BKR ARC 2 MAX DPO Breaker arcing current 2 max interrupting current has dropped out
BKR ARC 3 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for BKR ARC 1


ELEMENT: BREAKER 1 OFF CMD Breaker 1 3-pole open command/trip initiated
Breaker control BREAKER 1 ON CMD Breaker 1 close command initiated
BREAKER 1 ΦA BAD ST Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦA INTERM Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
BREAKER 1 ΦA CLSD Breaker 1 phase A is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦA OPEN Breaker 1 phase A is open
BREAKER 1 ΦB BAD ST Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦB INTERM Breaker 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from one
BREAKER 1 ΦB CLSD Breaker 1 phase B is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦB OPEN Breaker 1 phase B is open
BREAKER 1 ΦC BAD ST Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
BREAKER 1 ΦC INTERM Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from one
BREAKER 1 ΦC CLSD Breaker 1 phase C is closed
BREAKER 1 ΦC OPEN Breaker 1 phase C is open
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
BREAKER 1 CLOSED Breaker 1 is closed
BREAKER 1 OPEN Breaker 1 is open
BREAKER 1 DISCREP Breaker 1 has discrepancy
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE Breaker 1 trouble alarm
BREAKER 1 MNL OPEN Breaker 1 manual open
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS Breaker 1 manual close
BREAKER 1 TRIP A Breaker 1 trip phase A command
BREAKER 1 TRIP B Breaker 1 trip phase B command
BREAKER 1 TRIP C Breaker 1 trip phase C command
5 BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN

BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 1 TAG ON Breaker 1 tagged so manual trip and close and autoreclose are blocked
BREAKER 1 TAG OFF Breaker 1 not tagged
BREAKER 1 SUBD CLSD Breaker 1 status manually substituted to closed
BREAKER 1 SUBD OPEN Breaker 1 status manually substituted to open
BREAKER 1 BYPASS ON Breaker 1 control interlocking is manually bypassed
BREAKER 1 BYPASS OFF Breaker 1 control interlocking is not manually bypassed
BREAKER 1 BLK RCLS Breaker 1 command to manually block autoreclose
BREAKER 1 ENA RCLS Breaker 1 command to manually enable autoreclose
BREAKER 1 BAY AUTHOR ON Breaker 1 Bay Level authority is on
BREAKER 1 STATN AUTHOR ON Breaker 1 Station Level authority is on
BREAKER 1 REM AUTHOR ON Breaker 1 Remote Level Authority is on
BREAKER 1 LOCAL AUTHOR ON Breaker 1 Local Control Authority is on
BREAKER 2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
ELEMENT: CT FAIL 1 PKP CT fail has picked up
CT fail CT FAIL 1 OP CT fail has dropped out
CT FAIL 2 to 6 Same set of operands as per CT FAIL 1
ELEMENT: Counter 1 HI Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital counters Counter 1 EQL Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Counter 1 LO Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
Counter 2 to 8 Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
ELEMENT: Dig Element 1 PKP Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital elements Dig Element 1 OP Digital Element 1 is operated
Dig Element 1 DPO Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to 96 Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
ELEMENT: FxE 1 PKP FlexElement 1 has picked up
FlexElements FxE 1 OP FlexElement 1 has operated
FxE 1 DPO FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to 16 Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
ELEMENT: GROUND IOC1 PKP Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground GROUND IOC1 OP Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
instantaneous GROUND IOC1 DPO Ground instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
overcurrent


GROUND IOC2 to 12 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT: GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground time GROUND TOC1 OP Ground time overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent GROUND TOC1 DPO Ground time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
Element: HARMONIC DET 1 PKP At least one phase (or the average current) of HARMONIC DET 1 has picked up
Harmonic detection HARMONIC DET 1 PKP A HARMONIC DET 1 has picked up in phase A
HARMONIC DET 1 PKP B HARMONIC DET 1 has picked up in phase B
HARMONIC DET 1 PKP C HARMONIC DET 1 has picked up in phase C
HARMONIC DET 1 PKP G HARMONIC DET 1 has picked up in Ground channel
HARMONIC DET 1 OP HARMONIC DET 1 has operated per Phases for Operation selection
HARMONIC DET 1 OP A Phase A of HARMONIC DET 1 has operated
HARMONIC DET 1 OP B Phase B of HARMONIC DET 1 has operated
HARMONIC DET 1 OP C Phase C of HARMONIC DET 1 has operated
HARMONIC DET 1 OP G HARMONIC DET 1 has operated in Ground channel
ELEMENT: IED BEH TEST Relay in Test mode
IED mode IED BEH TEST-BLOCKED Relay in Test Blocked mode
IED BEH ON Relay mode is On
ELEMENT: LATCH 1 ON Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-volatile latches LATCH 1 OFF Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
LATCH 2 to 16 Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
ELEMENT: PHASE IOC1 PKP At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase instantaneous PHASE IOC1 OP At least one phase of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent PHASE IOC1 DPO All phases of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 have dropped out
PHASE IOC1 PKP A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 PKP C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE IOC1 OP A
PHASE IOC1 OP B
Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
5
PHASE IOC1 OP C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE IOC1 DPO A Phase A of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO B Phase B of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC1 DPO C Phase C of phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2 to 12 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
ELEMENT: PHASE TOC1 PKP At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
Phase time PHASE TOC1 OP At least one phase of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
overcurrent PHASE TOC1 DPO All phases of phase time overcurrent 1 have dropped out
PHASE TOC1 PKP A Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP B Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 PKP C Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has picked up
PHASE TOC1 OP A Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP B Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 OP C Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has operated
PHASE TOC1 DPO A Phase A of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO B Phase B of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC1 DPO C Phase C of phase time overcurrent 1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
ELEMENT: RESTD GND FT1 PKP Restricted ground fault 1 has picked up
Restricted ground RESTD GND FT1 OP Restricted ground fault 1 has operated
fault RESTD GND FT1 DPO Restricted ground fault 1 has dropped out
RESTD GND FT2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for RESTD GND FT1
ELEMENT: SELECTOR 1 POS Y Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)
Selector switch SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 ALARM Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 2 Same set of operands as shown for SELECTOR 1


ELEMENT: SETTING GROUP ACT 1 Setting group 1 is active
Setting group SETTING GROUP ACT 2 Setting group 2 is active
SETTING GROUP ACT 3 Setting group 3 is active
ELEMENT: SRC1 50DD OP Source 1 disturbance detector has operated
Disturbance detector SRC2 50DD OP Source 2 disturbance detector has operated
SRC3 50DD OP Source 3 disturbance detector has operated
ELEMENT: SWITCH 1 OFF CMD Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated
Disconnect switch SWITCH 1 ON CMD Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
SWITCH 1 CLOSED Disconnect switch 1 is closed
SWITCH 1 OPEN Disconnect switch 1 is open
SWITCH 1 DISCREP Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
SWITCH 1 ΦA CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦA OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
SWITCH 1 ΦA BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 89/a and 89/b contacts)
SWITCH 1 ΦA INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
SWITCH 1 ΦB CLSD Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
SWITCH 1 ΦB OPEN Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
SWITCH 1 ΦB BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦB INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from
5 SWITCH 1 ΦC CLSD
SWITCH 1 ΦC OPEN
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
SWITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
SWITCH 1 ΦC INTERM Disconnect switch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
SWITCH 1 TAG ON Switch 1 tagged so manual trip and close is blocked
SWITCH 1 TAG OFF Switch 1 not tagged
SWITCH 1 SUBD CLSD Switch 1 status manually substituted to closed
SWITCH 1 SUBD OPEN Switch 1 status manually substituted to open
SWITCH 1 BYPASS ON Switch 1 control interlocking is bypassed manually
SWITCH 1 BYPASS OFF Switch 1 control interlocking is not bypassed manually
SWITCH 2 to 24 Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
ELEMENT: TELEPRO CH1 FAIL Channel 1 failed
Teleprotection TELEPRO CH2 FAIL Channel 2 failed
channel tests TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed
TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed
TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1
TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2
TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST CRC detected lost packet on channel 1
TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST CRC detected lost packet on channel 2
ELEMENT: TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On Flag is set, Logic =1
Teleprotection ↓ ↓
inputs/outputs TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On Flag is set, Logic =1
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On Flag is set, Logic =1
↓ ↓
TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On Flag is set, Logic =1
ELEMENT: THERMAL PROT 1 PKP Thermal overload protection 1 picked up
Thermal overload THERMAL PROT 1 OP Thermal overload protection 1 operated
protection THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM Thermal protection 1 has reached the selected alarm level
THERMAL PROT 2 to 4 Same set of operands as shown for THERMAL PROT 1
ELEMENT: TRIP BUS 1 PKP Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up
Trip bus TRIP BUS 1 OP Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates
TRIP BUS 2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1


ELEMENT: UNDERFREQ 1 PKP Underfrequency 1 has picked up
Underfrequency UNDERFREQ 1 OP Underfrequency 1 has operated
UNDERFREQ 1 DPO Underfrequency 1 has dropped out
UNDERFREQ 2 to 6 Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ 1
ELEMENT: XFMR AGING FCTR PKP The transformer aging factor element has picked up
Transformer aging XFMR AGING FCTR OP The transformer aging factor element has operated
factor XFMR AGING FCTR DPO The transformer aging factor element has dropped out
ELEMENT: XFMR INST DIFF OP At least one phase of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
Transformer XFMR INST DIFF OP A Phase A of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
instantaneous XFMR INST DIFF OP B Phase B of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
differential XFMR INST DIFF OP C Phase C of transformer instantaneous differential has operated
ELEMENT: XFMR HST-SPOT °C PKP The hottest-spot temperature element has picked up
Hottest-spot XFMR HST-SPOT °C OP The hottest-spot temperature element has operated
temperature XFMR HST-SPOT °C DPO The hottest-spot temperature element has dropped out
ELEMENT: XFMR LIFE LOST PKP The transformer loss of life element has picked up
Transformer loss of XFMR LIFE LOST OP The transformer loss of life element has operated
life
ELEMENT: XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP A Transformer percent differential protection has picked up in phase A
Transformer percent XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP B Transformer percent differential protection has picked up in phase B
differential XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP C Transformer percent differential protection has picked up in phase C
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND A The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase A
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND B The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase B
XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND C The 2nd harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase C
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH A The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase A
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH B The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase B
XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH C The 5th harmonic of transformer percent differential has blocked phase C
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP At least one phase of transformer percent differential has operated
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP A
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP B
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP C
Phase A of transformer percent differential has operated
Phase B of transformer percent differential has operated
Phase C of transformer percent differential has operated
5
XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT A Transformer percent differential SAT flag has triggered on phase A
XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT B Transformer percent differential SAT flag has triggered on phase B
XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT C Transformer percent differential SAT flag has triggered on phase C
XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR A Transformer percent differential DIR flag has triggered on phase A
XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR B Transformer percent differential DIR flag has triggered on phase B
XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR C Transformer percent differential DIR flag has triggered on phase C
XFMR PCNT DIFF WARN Transformer percent differential current has exceeded 0.5xPKP for 10s


ELEMENT: THRU FLT 1 EVENT A Through fault current detected in phase A
Transformer THRU FLT 1 EVENT B Through fault current detected in phase B
through-fault THRU FLT 1 EVENT C Through fault current detected in phase C
monitoring THRU FLT 1 EVE START Through fault current detected in at least one of the phases (an event started)
THRU FLT 1 EVE END Through fault current has dropped out in all of the phases (an event ended)
THRU FLT 1 CNT OP A Phase A number of through fault currents has exceeded Fault Counter Max
setting
THRU FLT 1 CNT OP B Phase B number of through fault currents has exceeded Fault Counter Max
setting
THRU FLT 1 CNT OP C Phase C number of through fault currents has exceeded Fault Counter Max
setting
THRU FLT 1 CNT OP At least one of the phases number of fault currents has exceeded Fault
Counter Max setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC WRN A Phase A total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded 0.9 of Total Acc
Max setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC WRN B Phase B total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded 0.9 of Total Acc
Max setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC WRN C Phase C total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded 0.9 of Total Acc
Max setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC OP A Phase A total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded Total Acc Max
setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC OP B Phase B total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded Total Acc Max
setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC OP C Phase C total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded Total Acc Max
setting
THRU FLT 1 ACC OP At least one of the phases total thermal/mechanical damage has exceeded
Total Acc Max setting
THRU FLT 1 OP A Either number of faults or total damage has exceeded the settings in phase A
THRU FLT 1 OP B Either number of faults or total damage has exceeded the settings in phase B
THRU FLT 1 OP C Either number of faults or total damage has exceeded the settings in phase C
5 THRU FLT 1 OP
THRU FLT 1 CLR

Either number of faults or total damage has exceeded the settings in at least
one of the phases
The records of the transformer through fault monitoring element are cleared
THF 2 to 3 Same set of operands as per THF 1
ELEMENT: XFMR INTTURN 1 PKP A Transformer interturn fault detection 1 has picked up in phase A
Transformer XFMR INTTURN 1 PKP B Transformer interturn fault detection 1 has picked up in phase B
interturn fault XFMR INTTURN 1 PKP C Transformer interturn fault detection 1 has picked up in phase C
detection XFMR INTTURN 1 PKP At least one phase of transformer Interturn fault detection 1 has picked up
XFMR INTTURN 1 OP A Transformer interturn fault detection 1 has operated in phase A
XFMR INTTURN 1 OP B Transformer interturn fault detection 1 has operated in phase B
XFMR INTTURN 1 OP C Transformer interturn fault detection 1 has operated in phase C
XFMR INTTURN 1 OP At least one phase of transformer Interturn fault detection 1 has operated
XFMR INTTURN 1 WRN A Transformer interturn fault detection operating quantity has exceeded 0.7 ×
PKP for 10 s in phase A
XFMR INTTURN 1 WRN B Transformer interturn fault detection operating quantity has exceeded 0.7 ×
PKP for 10 s in phase B
XFMR INTTURN 1 WRN C Transformer interturn fault detection operating quantity has exceeded 0.7 ×
PKP for 10 s in phase C
INTTURN FLT DET 2 Same set of operands as shown for INTTURN FLT DET 1
ELEMENT: TGFD 1 FORWARD Transient ground fault detector 1 has picked forward transient ground fault
Transient ground TGFD 1 REVERSE Transient ground fault detector 1 has picked reverse transient ground fault
fault detection TGFD 1 START Transient ground fault detector 1 has started
TGFD 2 to 4 Same set of operands as per TGFD 1
FIXED OPERANDS Off Logic = 0. Does nothing and can be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Ip 1 On (does not appear unless ordered)
Contact inputs Cont Ip 2 On (does not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 1 Off (does not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
Cont Ip 120 On (does not appear unless ordered)


INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 IOn (does not appear unless ordered)
Contact outputs, Cont Op 2 IOn (does not appear unless ordered)
current ↓ ↓
(from detector on Cont Op 72 IOn (does not appear unless ordered)
form-A output only)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Cont Op 1 VOn (does not appear unless ordered)
Contact outputs, Cont Op 2 VOn (does not appear unless ordered)
voltage ↓ ↓
(from detector on Cont Op 72 VOn (does not appear unless ordered)
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1 VOff (does not appear unless ordered)
↓ ↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: DIRECT INPUT 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Direct inputs ↓ ↓
DIRECT INPUT 64 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: RxG DPS 1 BAD Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is in the bad state
RxGOOSE DPS RxG DPS 1 INTERM Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is in the intermediate
state
RxG DPS 1 OFF Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is off
RxG DPS 1 ON Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is on
RxG DPS 2 to 16 Same set of operands as per RxG DPS 1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: RxG Bool 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
RxGOOSE Booleans RxG Bool 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
RxG Bool 3 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
RxG Bool 256 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Fixed GOOSE
FG REM DEV1 On
FG REM DEV1 Off
Remote Device 1 messages are being received
Remote Device 1 messages are not being received
5
FG REM IN1 On Remote Input 1 status is “true”
Osc Fixed GOOSE One or more operands configured in DNA and UserSt bit pair are oscillating
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Ip 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual inputs Virt Ip 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virt Ip 3 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
Virt Ip 128 On Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virt Op 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virtual outputs Virt Op 2 On Flag is set, logic=1
Virt Op 3 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
Virt Op 256 On Flag is set, logic=1
LED INDICATORS: LED IN SERVICE Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on
Enhanced and basic LED TROUBLE Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on
front panels LED TEST MODE Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on
LED TRIP Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on
LED ALARM Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on
LED PICKUP Asserted when an element picks up and to turn PICKUP LED on
LED VOLTAGE Asserted when a voltage element involved and to turn VOLTAGE LED on
LED CURRENT Asserted when a current element involved and to turn CURRENT LED on
LED FREQUENCY Asserted when a frequency element involved and to turn FREQUENCY LED on
LED OTHER Asserted when a composite element involved and to turn OTHER LED on
LED PHASE A Asserted when phase A involved and to turn PHASE A LED on
LED PHASE B Asserted when phase B involved and to turn PHASE B LED on
LED PHASE C Asserted when phase C involved and to turn PHASE C LED on
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND Asserted when a neutral or ground element involved and to turn NEUTRAL/
GROUND LED on


LED INDICATORS: LED IN SERVICE Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on
Graphical front panel LED TROUBLE Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on
LED TEST MODE Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on
LED TRIP Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on
LED ALARM Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on
LED PICKUP Asserted when an element picks up and to turn Event Cause LED 1 on by
default
LED VOLTAGE Asserted when a voltage element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 2 on
by default
LED CURRENT Asserted when a current element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 3 on
by default
LED FREQUENCY Asserted when a frequency element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 4
on by default
LED OTHER Asserted when a composite element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 5
on by default
LED PHASE A Asserted when phase A involved and to turn Event Cause LED 6 on by default
LED PHASE B Asserted when phase B involved and to turn Event Cause LED 7 on by default
LED PHASE C Asserted when phase C involved and to turn Event Cause LED 8 on by default
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND Asserted when a neutral or ground element involved and to turn Event Cause
LED 9 on by default
LED INDICATORS: LED TEST IN PROGRESS An LED test has been initiated and has not finished
LED test
LED INDICATORS: LED USER 1 Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on
User-programmable
LEDs
Enhanced and basic
front panels
LED USER 2 to 48 The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48
5 LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
LEDs
EVENT CAUSE LED 1
EVENT CAUSE LED 2 to 9
Asserted when event cause LED 1 is on
Same operand as EVENT CAUSE LED 1
Graphical front panel
PASSWORD ACCESS LOC SETG OFF Asserted when local setting access is disabled
SECURITY ACCESS LOC SETG ON Asserted when local setting access is enabled
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF Asserted when local command access is disabled
ACCESS LOC CMND ON Asserted when local command access is enabled
ACCESS REM SETG OFF Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
ACCESS REM SETG ON Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
ACCESS REM CMND OFF Asserted when remote command access is disabled
ACCESS REM CMND ON Asserted when remote command access is enabled
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the T35
UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT Firmware upgrade attempted when LOCK FIRMWARE setting is Enabled
LOC SET ACCS AUT OFF Dual-Permission local access settings authorization is off
LOC SET ACCS AUT ON Dual-Permission local access settings authorization is on
REM SET ACCS AUT OFF Dual-Permission remote access settings authorization is off
REM SET ACCS AUT ON Dual-Permission remote access settings authorization is on


PROCESS BUS PBEthPort-1 Offline Process Bus Module port 1 failure
MODULE RxSV1 On RxSV1 stream is online (messages are received and accepted)
(order code 85, 86, RxSV1 Off RxSV1 stream is offline (SV are received but not accepted or SV frames are
87) not received)
RxSV1 Lost On RxSV1 stream is completely lost (SV stream frames are not received)
RxSV1 Lost Off RxSV1 stream message delay is below the configured delay
RxSV1 Delay Alarm On RxSV1 stream message that delay exceeds the configured delay
RxSV1 Delay Alarm Off RxSV1 stream message that delay is below the configured delay
RxSV1 SimBit On RxSV1 messages are received with simulation bit TRUE, while "Accept Sim
GOOSE&SV" setting is Enabled
RxSV1 SimBit Off RxSV1 messages are received with Sim bit FALSE, or "Accept Sim GOOSE&SV"
is set to Disabled
RxSV1 SynChk Fail RxSV1 message that the synchronization source check failed
RxSV1 SynChk OK RxSV1 message synchronization source check successful
RxSV# GmIdChk Fail RxSV# message GM Identity doesn't match with the Reference GM ID
RxSV# GmIdChk OK RxSV# message GM Identity matches with the Reference GM ID
RxSV1 QualChk Fail RxSV1 message that at least one channel quality check failed
RxSV1 QualChk OK RxSV1 message that the quality check of all channels successful
Dlyd Processing On Analog data from at least one of the SV streams is delayed in oscillography
record
Dlyd Processing Off Analog data from none of the SV streams is delayed in Oscillography record
SV1 Processing Fail No frame received from RxSV1 stream or received sample processing failed
SV1 Processing OK Frame received from RxSV1 stream and sample successfully processed
ACBank1 Orig1 in Use ACBank1 is using Origin1 SV stream
ACBank1 Orig2 in Use ACBank1 is using Origin2 SV stream
SV TRBL PARTIAL BLK Partial blocking of UR elements applied due to SV stream trouble
SV TRBL GLOBAL BLK Global blocking of UR elements applied due to SV stream trouble
SV TRBL Cont Op BLKD Contact outputs are blocked due to SV stream trouble
RxGOOSE RxGOOSE 1 On Flag is set, logic=1
↓ ↓
RxGOOSE 64 On
RxGOOSE 1 Off
5
↓ ↓
RxGOOSE 64 Off Flag is set, logic=1
<RxGOOSE Boolean1 ID> On Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE Boolean1 status of "true"
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> Bad Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status of "bad-state"
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> Interm Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status is "intermediate-state"
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> Off Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status is "off"
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> On Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status is "on"
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St RxGOOSE Analog In1 Expression status
RxGOOSE INVLD ON One or more Rx GOOSE Inputs are received with Invalid quality
RxGOOSE QUES ON One or more Rx GOOSE Inputs are received with questionable quality
RESETTING RESET OP Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below)
RESET OP (COMMS) Communications source of the reset command
RESET OP (OPERAND) Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu) source of
the reset command
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
RESET ANCTR OP Reset annunciator command is operated (set by any operands below)
RESET ANCTR OP(OPRD) Reset operand (assigned in INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
ANNUNCIATOR menu) source of the reset annunciator command
RESET ANCTR OP(MNUL) Reset manual (pushbutton or EnerVista software) source of the reset
annunciator command
GRAPHICAL FRONT ENABLE CTRL FROM GFP Controls enabled when operand assigned to Enable Controls From GFP
PANEL setting is ON. An Enable Control side pushbutton displays, which displays
other side pushbuttons.
Disabled otherwise, and Enable Control side pushbutton does not display.


SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ANY MAJOR ERROR Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
(See Relay Self-tests ANY MINOR ERROR Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
descriptions in ANY SELF-TESTS Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
Chapter 7: BATTERY FAIL The battery is weak or not functioning. Replace as outlined in the
Commands and Maintenance chapter.
Targets) CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard
DIRECT DEVICE OFF A direct device is configured but not connected
DIRECT RING BREAK The Direct I/O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN A FlexLogic equation is incorrect
IRIG-B FAILURE "Bad IRIG-B Signal" self-test. See Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
LATCHING OUT ERROR A difference is detected between the desired and actual latch contact state
MAINTENANCE ALERT A subset of the minor self-test errors generated, see Chapter 7
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL Link failure detected. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
PROCESS BUS FAILURE See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
PTP FAILURE “Bad PTP Signal” self-test as described in Chapter 7
RxGOOSE OFF One or more GOOSE messages are not being received
RRTD COMM FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
SNTP FAILURE SNTP server is not responding
SYSTEM EXCEPTION See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
TEMP MONITOR Monitors ambient temperature and maximum operating temperature
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED The product SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAYS SETTINGS setting is not
programmed
SETTING CHANGED Any device settings changed over any available interface; operand is
asserted for at least one second and then self-reset
PROCESS BUS PTP FAILURE No grandmaster clock available on any of the Process Bus Module ports
PB-CPU CLK MISMATCH Process Bus Module and main CPU clocks are free-running independently
and the clocks are deviating more than 100 micro seconds. Resets when the
5 PB CLOCK UNSYNCD
deviation is below 100 micro seconds.
Process Bus Module clock is free-running, that is, when both PTP
grandmaster clock on Process Bus Module and one pulse per second (PPS)
from main CPU are not available. Resets when any of the references is
available.
REAL-TIME CLOCK LEAP SECOND DETECTED Leap second adjustment has been applied.
LEAP SECOND ADDED Leap second has been added to real-time clock
SIMULATION TxGOOSE SIM ON Sim bit enabled in all Tx GOOSE
IED IN SIM MODE ON Relay is in simulation mode and accepts simulated GOOSE and SV values
IED IN SIM MODE OFF Relay is not in simulation mode and does not accept simulated GOOSE and
SV values
TEMPERATURE TEMP MONITOR Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum
MONITOR operating temperature (80°C)
USER- PUSHBUTTON 1 ON Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position
PUSHBUTTONS ANY PB ON Any of 12 pushbuttons is in the “On” position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 6, 12, 16, or 48 Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
depending on front panel
Some operands can be re-named. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification)
of contact inputs and outputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name appears in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the
FlexLogic operands table.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated in the following table, and the operators available in FlexLogic are
listed in the FlexLogic operators table.

Table 5-25: FlexLogic gate characteristics

Gates Number of inputs Output is ‘1’ (= ON) if...
NOT 1 input is ‘0’
OR 2 to 16 any input is ‘1’
AND 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘1’
NOR 2 to 16 all inputs are ‘0’
NAND 2 to 16 any input is ‘0’
XOR 2 only one input is ‘1’
Table 5-26: FlexLogic operators

Type Syntax Description Notes
Editor INSERT Insert a parameter in an equation list
DELETE Delete a parameter from an equation list
End END The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic parameters
One-shot POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that
generates a pulse in response to an edge on
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a negative going edge
the input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is
DUAL ONE SHOT One shot that responds to both the positive and True (positive) for only one pass through the
negative going edges FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of
64 ‘one shots.’
Logic NOT Logical NOT Operates on the previous parameter
gate
OR(2) 2 input OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters
↓ ↓ ↓
OR(16) 16 input OR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters 5
AND(2) 2 input AND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters
↓ ↓ ↓
AND(16) 16 input AND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters
NOR(2) 2 input NOR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters
↓ ↓ ↓
NOR(16) 16 input NOR gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters
NAND(2) 2 input NAND gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters
↓ ↓ ↓
NAND(16) 16 input NAND gate Operates on the 16 previous parameters
XOR(2) 2 input Exclusive OR gate Operates on the 2 previous parameters
LATCH (S,R) Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the
reset input. The parameter preceding the
reset input is the set input.
Timer TIMER 1 Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings The timer is started by the preceding
↓ ↓ parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER 32 Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings TIMER #.
Assign = Virt Op 1 Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual The virtual output is set by the preceding
virtual ↓ output 1 parameter
output = Virt Op 256 ↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual
output 256
5.7.2 FlexLogic rules

When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1. Operands must precede the operator that uses the operands as inputs.
2. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3. Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4. A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") can be used once

only. If this rule is broken, a syntax error is declared.
5.7.3 FlexLogic evaluation

Each equation is evaluated in the ascending order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic provides built-in latches that by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. These built-in latches are reset dominant, meaning that if logical "1" is applied to both set
and reset entries simultaneously, then the output of the latch is logical "0." However, they are volatile, meaning that
they reset upon removal of control power.
When making changes to FlexLogic entries in the settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any
new FlexLogic entry value is entered, and as a result of the re-compile all latches are reset automatically.
To implement FlexLogic using a graphical user interface, see the FlexLogic Design and Monitoring using Engineer
section in the previous chapter.
5.7.4 FlexLogic example

This section provides an example of logic implementation for a typical application. The sequence of steps is important to
minimize the work to develop the relay settings. Note that the example in the following figure demonstrates the procedure,
not to solve a specific application situation.
Note that there is also a graphical interface with which to draw logic and populate FlexLogic equation entries. See the
Engineer content at the end of the previous chapter.
In the example, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a
5 part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used; a
virtual output designation (1 to 256) can be assigned only once.
Figure 5-110: Logic example
9LUWXDORXWSXW
VWDWH 2Q
9LUWXDORXWSXW
6HW
VWDWH 2Q
/DWFK
9LUWXDOLQSXW 25 5HVHW
VWDWH 2Q
;25
'LJLWDOHOHPHQW 7LPHU
VWDWH 3LFNXS 7LPH'HOD\ 2SHUDWHRXWSXW
25
RQGURSRXW UHOD\+
'LJLWDOHOHPHQW 7LPHU
PV
VWDWH 2SHUDWHG 7LPHGHOD\
$1' RQSLFNXS
PV
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
VWDWH &ORVHG
$&'5
1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic
operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the
operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a
virtual output.

For the example shown, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore
be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (that is, Virtual Output 3). The final output must also
be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which is programmed in the contact output section to operate relay
H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and
virtual output 4, shown as follows.
Figure 5-111: Logic example with virtual outputs
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
Set
state = On
Latch
OR #1 Reset
Virtual input 1
state = On Timer 2
XOR Time delay
Digital element 1 OR #2 Virtual output 4
on dropout
state = Pickup
(200 ms)
Digital element 1 Timer 1

state = Operated Time delay
AND on pickup
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed Virtual output 3
827026A2.CDR
2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output is used as an operand in the virtual 5
output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that is used as an operand first, so that when these operands
are required they already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3
is shown as follows with the final output assigned.
Figure 5-112: Logic for virtual output 3
Digital element 2
state= Operated
AND(2) Virtual output 3
Contact input H1c

state = Closed
827027A2.CDR
3. Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as
virtual output 3, shown as follows.

Figure 5-113: Logic for virtual output 4
9LUWXDORXWSXW
VWDWH 2Q
9LUWXDORXWSXW
6HW
VWDWH 2Q
/DWFK
25 5HVHW
9LUWXDOLQSXW
VWDWH 2Q 7LPHU
;25 7LPHGHOD\
25 9LUWXDORXWSXW
'LJLWDOHOHPHQW RQGURSRXW
VWDWH 3LFNXS
PV
7LPHU
9LUWXDORXWSXW 7LPHGHOD\
VWDWH 2Q RQSLFNXS
PV
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
VWDWH &ORVHG
$&'5
4. Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The
equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended
to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final outputs are arbitrarily identified as parameter
99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested
that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared shown as follows.
Figure 5-114: FlexLogic worksheet
5
01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:

– 99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This
parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3".
– 98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a
2-input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND operates on the two
operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
– 97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next
parameter is “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter
input next.
– 96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to
be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example that the state is to be ON for a closed
contact. The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.

– 95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital
element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order forms the equation for virtual output 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters produces the required logic by converting the set of
parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for
virtual output 3 diagram as a check.
Figure 5-115: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3
FlexLogic entry:
95
Dig Element 2 (DE2) OP
AND Virtual output 3
FlexLogic entry:
96
Cont Ip 2 On (H1c)
FlexLogic entry:
97
NOT
FlexLogic entry:
98
AND (2)
FlexLogic entry:
99
= Virt Op 3 (VO3)
827030A2.CDR
6. Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
– 99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4, which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
– 98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for
the timer are established in the timer programming section.
5
– 97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
– 96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
– 95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
– 94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
– 93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
– 92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR,
which is parameter “OR(4)”.
– 91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
– 90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
– 89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
– 88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
– 87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
– 86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
– 85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for virtual output 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On

[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
Now check that the selection of parameters produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a
logic diagram. The result is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.
Figure 5-116: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 4
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
9LUW2S2Q 92
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
9LUW2S2Q 92
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
9LUW2S2Q 92
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\ 6HW
/DWFK
9LUW,S2Q 9,
;25 25 5HVHW
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
'LJ(OHPHQW '( 3.3
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
;25 ,QSXW
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
9LUW2S2Q 92
25 7 9LUWXDORXWSXW
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
25 ,QSXW
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
/DWFK 6HW5HVHW
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
9LUW2S2Q 92 7
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
7LPHU
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\

5
&RQW,S2Q +F
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
25 ,QSXW
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
7LPHU
)OH[/RJLFHQWU\
9LUW2S 92
$&'5
7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that are used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this can be difficult to achieve, but in most cases does not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the following
order:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)

TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In this expression, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of
feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8. Always test the logic after it is loaded into the relay, in the same way as has been used in the past. Testing can be
simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations are evaluated up
to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.7.5 FlexLogic equation editor

SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1 Range: FlexLogic operands
 EQUATION EDITOR  END

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1024 Range: FlexLogic operands
 END
There are 1,024 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 1024, with default END entry settings. If a “Disabled”
element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag is never set to ‘1’. Press the +/– key when editing
FlexLogic equations to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
There are two ways to create, edit and maintain the FlexLogic equations:
1. Using the FlexLogic Equation Editor available at FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor
5
2. Using the Logic Designer available at Engineer > Logic Designer
EnerVista Engineer is only available through the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup.
Please refer to the FlexLogic design using Engineer section in the Interfaces chapter for more information.
5.7.6 FlexLogic timers

SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC TIMERS  FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(64)
 FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1 Range: millisecond, second, minute
 TIMER 1  TYPE: millisecond
TIMER 1 PICKUP Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

 DELAY: 0
TIMER 1 DROPOUT Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

 DELAY: 0
There are 64 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers are used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE — Selects the time measurement unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY — Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0."
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY — Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0."

5.7.7 FlexElements
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
 FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

 FxE 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

 Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

 Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT Range: SIGNED, ABSOLUTE

 MODE: SIGNED
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP Range: LEVEL, DELTA

 MODE: LEVEL
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: OVER, UNDER

 DIRECTION: OVER
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

 PICKUP: 1.000 pu
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1

 HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes


5 UNIT: Milliseconds
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1

 20
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 0.000 s
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Disabled, Latched

 TARGET: Self-reset
FLEXELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net
difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal can be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value can be used.
FlexElements run every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold, as
per your choice.

Figure 5-117: FlexElement logic
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
)/(;(/(0(17
)81&7,21 )/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'(
(QDEOHG )/(;(/(0(17&203
02'(
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21
6(77,1*
)/(;(/(0(173,&.83
)/(;(/(0(17%/. )/(;(/(0(17,1387
$1' +<67(5(6,6
2II
)/(;(/(0(17GW81,7 6(77,1*
6(77,1* )/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17GW '(/$<
)/(;(/(0(17,1 )/(;(/(0(17567
581 '(/$<
$FWXDO9DOXH )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
W3.3
)/(;(/(0(17,1 )[(23
W567
$FWXDO9DOXH )[('32
)[(3.3
$&78$/9$/8(
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
$&'5
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN — This setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off.” For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
does not assert its output operands.
Filter the InputPlus or InputMinus field in the software by double-clicking it, then entering a value.
5
FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN — Specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is
set to “Off.” For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element does not
assert its output operands. This input is used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element
respond to a differential signal, such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element does not operate
if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the
effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed” The
element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute.” Sample applications for
the “Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in
both directions, monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend.
The element responds directly to its operating signal—as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings—if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Level.” The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta.” In this case, the
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION — Enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following
figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP, and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS
settings.

Figure 5-118: FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
+<67(5(6,6 RI3,&.83
3,&.83
)OH[(OHPHQW 6LJ2S
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 8QGHU
+<67(5(6,6 RI3,&.83
)OH[(OHPHQW 6LJ2S
3,&.83
$&'5
In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting, the element can be programmed to provide two extra
characteristics, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-119: FlexElement input mode setting
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( 6LJQHG
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( $EVROXWH
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 8QGHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( 6LJQHG 5
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 8QGHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( $EVROXWH
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
$&'5
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP — This setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If
set to “Over,” the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under,” the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
When using FlexElements for Voltage Elements, 1 pu is always equal to phase to ground voltage nominal secondary
voltage, even if you select a phase to phase voltage as an operating quantity.
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS — This setting controls the element dropout. Notice that both the operating signal and the
pickup threshold can be negative, facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be
programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in
per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 5-27: FlexElement base units
Unit Description
BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Acc Arc Amp A, B, and C)

Unit Description
BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 1 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs
DELTA TIME BASE = 1 µs
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
THRU FLT x TOT ACC A BASE = 1.00 pu
THRU FLT x TOT ACC B
THRU FLT x TOT ACC C
Transformer total thermal/
mechanical damage
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Xfmr Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
differential currents)
XFMR VOLTAGE COMPENSATED IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
(Intturn# Cmp Iad Mag, Intturn# differential currents)
Cmp IBd Mag and Intturn# Cmp Icd
5 Mag)
XFMR RAW DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Intturn# Raw Iad Mag, Intturn# Raw (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
IBd Mag and Intturn# Raw Icd Mag) differential currents)
INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION BASE=0.1
COEFFICENTS
(Intturn# Coef Ka Mag, Intturn# Coef
Kb Mag, Intturn# Coef Kc Mag)
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL HARMONIC BASE = 10%
CONTENT
(Xfmr Harm2 Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag)
XFMR RESTRAINING CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Xfmr Iar, Ibr, and Icr Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS — This setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram.
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT — Specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta.”
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt — Specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is
applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta.”
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY — Specifies the pickup delay of the element.
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY — Specifies the reset delay of the element.
5.7.8 Non-volatile latches

SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

 NON-VOLATILE  LATCH 1
 LATCH  
 LATCH 2
 
 ...
 
  LATCH 16
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  NON-VOLATILE LATCHES  LATCH 1 (16)

 LATCH 1 LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
LATCH 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 NV Latch 1
LATCH 1 TYPE: Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant

 Reset Dominant
LATCH 1 SET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
LATCH 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
LATCH 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

 LATCH 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

5
EVENTS: Disabled
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and do not reset upon restart after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently blocking relay functions,
such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch.
LATCH 1 TYPE — This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
LATCH 1 SET — If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
LATCH 1 RESET — If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
Figure 5-120: Non-volatile latch operation table (N = 1 to 16) and logic

6(77,1* 6(77,1*
/$7&+)81&7,21 /$7&+7<3(
(QDEOHG 581
6(77,1*
/$7&+6(7
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
2II 6(7 /$7&+21
/$7&+2))
6(77,1*
/$7&+5(6(7
2II 5(6(7 $&'5
Latch n type Latch n set Latch n reset Latch n on Latch n off

Reset Dominant ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF Previous State Previous State
ON ON OFF ON

GROUPED ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Latch n type Latch n set Latch n reset Latch n on Latch n off

OFF ON OFF ON
Set Dominant ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON OFF
OFF OFF Previous State Previous State
OFF ON OFF ON
5.8 Grouped elements

5.8.1 Overview
Each protection element can be assigned up to six sets of settings with designations 1 to 6. The performance of these
elements is defined by the active setting group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently
change protection settings for different operating situations (for example, altered power system configuration or season of
the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected in the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Elements section
later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.8.2 Setting group 1

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)
 SETTING GROUP 1  TRANSFORMER See below

5  
 PHASE CURRENT See page 5-274

 
 GROUND CURRENT See page 5-288

 
Each of the six setting group menus is identical. Setting group 1 (the default active group) is active automatically when no
other group is active.
If the device incorrectly switches to group 1 after power cycling, upgrade the firmware to version 7.31 or later to correct
this issue.
5.8.3 Transformer elements
5.8.3.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER
 TRANSFORMER  PERCENT See below
   DIFFERENTIAL
 INTERTURN FAULT See page 5-268

  DETECTION
 INSTANTANEOUS See page 5-271

  DIFFERENTIAL
 HOTTEST-SPOT See page 5-271

  TEMPERATURE
 AGING FACTOR See page 5-272

 
 LOSS OF LIFE See page 5-273

 

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS
This menu contains the settings for the transformer differential elements and the transformer thermal elements.
The thermal elements include hottest-spot temperature, aging factor and loss of life. The computation of these elements
follows IEEE standards C57.91-1995: “IEEE Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Transformers” and C57.96-1989: “IEEE
Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution Transformers”. The computations are based on transformer loading conditions,
ambient temperature, and the entered transformer data.
5.8.3.2 Percent differential (ANSI 87T)

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER  PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
 PERCENT PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL Range: Disabled, Enabled
 DIFFERENTIAL  FUNCTION: Disabled
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1

 SLOPE 1: 25%

 BREAK 1: 2.000 pu

 BREAK 2: 8.000 pu
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL Range: 20 to 100% in steps of 1

 SLOPE 2: 90%
INRUSH INHIBIT Range: Disabled, Adapt. 2nd, Trad. 2nd

 FUNCTION: Adapt. 2nd
 INRUSH INHIBIT
MODE: Per phase
Range: Per phase, 2-out-of-3, Average, 1-out-of-3 5
INRUSH INHIBIT Range: 1.0 to 40.0% of f0 in steps of 0.1
 LEVEL: 20.0% fo
OVEREXCITN INHIBIT Range: Disabled, 5th

OVEREXCITN INHIBIT Range: 1.0 to 40.0% of f0 in steps of 0.1

 LEVEL: 10.0% fo
PERCENT DIFF BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL Range: Disabled, Enabled

The calculation of differential (Id) and restraint (Ir) currents for the purposes of the percent differential element is described
by the following block diagram, where “Σ” has as its output the vector sum of inputs, and “max” has as its output the input
of maximum magnitude; these calculations are performed for each phase.
The differential current is calculated as a vector sum of currents from all windings after magnitude and angle
compensation.
I d = I 1 comp + I 2 comp + I 3 comp + I 4 comp + I 5comp + I 6 comp Eq. 5-30
The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated currents.
I r = max ( I 1 comp , I 2comp , I 3 comp , I 4 comp , I 5 comp , I 6 comp ) Eq. 5-31

The element operates if Id > PKP and Id / Ir > K, where PKP represents a percent differential pickup setting and K is a
restraint factor defined by the relays settings Slope 1, Slope 2, and a transition area between breakpoint 1 and breakpoint
2 settings.
Figure 5-121: Percent differential calculations
Winding 1 Winding 2 Winding ‘n’

current
waveform
current
waveform ... current
waveform
Magnitude Magnitude Magnitude

phase angle, and phase angle, and phase angle, and
zero sequence zero sequence zero sequence
compensation compensation compensation
(as required) (as required) (as required)
Decaying dc Decaying dc Decaying dc

offset filter offset filter offset filter
Discrete Fourier Discrete Fourier Discrete Fourier

Transform Transform Transform
5 ∑ MAX
Differential Restraint
phasor phasor
828714A1.CDR
The percent differential element is based on a configurable dual-breakpoint / dual-slope differential restraint
characteristic. The purpose of this characteristic is to define the differential/restraint ratio for the transformer winding
currents at different loading and fault conditions to securely distinguish between external and internal faults. Increased
differential current can occur under load or external fault conditions due to current unbalance between transformer
windings and can be caused by the following:
• Inherent CT inaccuracies
• Onload tap changer operation: it adjusts the transformer ratio and consequently the winding currents
• CT saturation
To provide higher security during CT saturation conditions and to ease CT requirements, the T35 incorporates a dedicated
CT saturation detection mechanism. The T35 CT saturation detector can detect saturation happening after approximately
3 ms from fault inception. In case CT saturation is detected, the percent differential is blocked instantly and relies further
on the directional element in case fault evolved from external to internal to operate without any delays. Directional
element supervision is not applied if no CT saturation is detected.
The saturation detector is an integral part of the transformer percent differential element. It has no settings but uses some
of the differential characteristic parameters. The flags indicating CT saturation are available on a per-phase basis as
FlexLogic operands.

The directional principle is also an integral part of the transformer percent differential element and has no associated
settings. The directional element dynamically identifies what appears to be the faulted circuit and compares its current
angle with that of the sum of the remaining currents of the protected zone. The element declares a transformer internal
fault if the angle is less than 90°. Directional indicating flags signal operation on a per-phase basis and are available as
FlexLogic operands.
For more information on CT saturation detection and directional principle, see the Theory of Operation chapter.
Figure 5-122: Percent differential operating characteristic
10
Breakpoint 2
8
OPERATE
6
Transition region
Id (Ir)
(cubic spline) Slope 2

region
4
Breakpoint 1
BLOCK
2
Pickup
5
0 2 4 6 8 10
Ir
828750A2.CDR
Settings are defined as follows.

PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP — This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. It is chosen,
based on the amount of differential current that can be seen under normal operating conditions. Two factors can create
differential current during the normal transformer operation: errors due to CT inaccuracies and current variation due to
onload tap changer operation. To prevent the relay from picking up during normal operating conditions, configure this
pickup setting at 10% or higher and take into account maximum magnitude compensation factor, that is
PICKUP ≥ 0.1 x max(M[w]) pu Eq. 5-32
where M is the magnitude compensation factor and w is the winding index. The magnitude compensation factor for each
winding is explained in the Magnitude Compensation section earlier.
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 1 — Defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents below the lower breakpoint
(BREAK 1). This setting determines the sensitivity of the relay for low current internal faults. The setting must be set high
enough to cope with the spurious differential current resulting from inaccuracy of the CTs operating in their linear mode,
that is, in load conditions and during distant external faults.
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 1 — Defines the lower breakpoint of the dual-slope differential operating characteristic. This
setting needs to be set above the maximum load current and can be moved to the AC current under which all the CTs are
guaranteed to transform without saturation. This includes the effect of DC components and/or residual magnetism. The
latter can be as high as 80% of the nominal flux, effectively reducing the CT capabilities by the factor of five. When
adjusting this setting, it must be kept in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum of all the input
currents.
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL BREAK 2 — Defines the higher breakpoint of the dual-slope operating characteristic. Set BREAK 2
setting below the fault current that is likely to saturate the weakest CT feeding the relay. When adjusting this setting, keep
in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum of all the input currents.

PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL SLOPE 2 — Defines the percentage bias for the restraining currents above the higher breakpoint
(BREAK 2). This setting affects stability of the relay for heavy external faults. Traditionally, the value chosen for this setting
needs to be high enough to accommodate the spurious differential current resulting from saturation of the CTs during
heavy external faults. This requirement can be considerably relaxed in favor of sensitivity and speed of operation as the
relay detects CT saturation and upon detection applies the directional principle to prevent maloperation. When adjusting
this setting, keep in mind that the restraining signal is created as the maximum of all the input currents.
INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION — This setting provides a choice for 2nd harmonic differential protection blocking during
magnetizing inrush conditions. Two choices are available: “Adapt. 2nd” – adaptive 2nd harmonic, and “Trad. 2nd” –
traditional 2nd harmonic blocking. The adaptive 2nd harmonic restraint responds to magnitudes and phase angles of the
2nd harmonic and the fundamental frequency component. The traditional 2nd harmonic restraint responds to the ratio of
magnitudes of the 2nd harmonic and fundamental frequency components. If low second harmonic ratios during
magnetizing inrush conditions are not expected, set the relay to a traditional way of restraining.
INRUSH INHIBIT MODE — This setting specifies mode of blocking on magnetizing inrush conditions. Modern transformers can
produce small 2nd harmonic ratios during inrush conditions. This can result in undesired tripping of the protected
transformer. Reducing the 2nd harmonic inhibit threshold can jeopardize dependability and speed of protection. The 2nd
harmonic ratio, if low, causes problems in one phase only. This can be utilized as a means to ensure security by applying
cross-phase blocking rather than lowering the inrush inhibit threshold.
If set to “Per phase,” the relay performs inrush inhibit individually in each phase. If used on modern transformers, combine
this setting with adaptive 2nd harmonic function.
If set to “2-out-of-3,” the relay checks 2nd harmonic level in all three phases individually. If any two phases establish a
blocking condition, the remaining phase is restrained automatically. Note that in this mode, the "2-out-of-3" logic is used
only if all three phases of differential currents exceed the hardcoded cutoff level of 0.04 pu, otherwise, "1-out-of-3" logic is
used.
If set to “Average,” the relay first calculates the average 2nd harmonic ratio, then applies the inrush threshold to the
5 calculated average. This mode works only in conjunction with the traditional 2nd harmonic function.
If set to "1-out-of-3," the relay checks 2nd harmonic level in all three phases individually. If any phase establishes a
blocking condition, differential protection in all three phases are blocked. This mode is also known as "cross-blocking"
method.
INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL — Specifies the level of 2nd harmonic component in the transformer magnetizing inrush current
above which the percent differential element is inhibited from operating. The value of the INRUSH INHIBIT MODE setting
must be taken into account when programming this value. The INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL is set typically to 20%.
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT MODE — An overexcitation condition resulting from an increased volts/hertz ratio poses a danger
to the protected transformer, hence the volts/hertz protection. A given transformer can, however, tolerate an overfluxing
condition for a limited time, as the danger is associated with thermal processes in the core. Instantaneous tripping of the
transformer from the differential protection is not desirable. The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic ratio for inhibiting its
differential function during overexcitation conditions.
OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT LEVEL — This setting is provided to block the differential protection during overexcitation. When the
5th harmonic level exceeds the specified setting (5th harmonic ratio) the differential element is blocked. The overexcitation
inhibit works on a per-phase basis.
The relay produces three FlexLogic operands that can be used for testing or for special applications, such as building
custom logic (1-out-of-3) or supervising some protection functions (ground time overcurrent, for example) from the 2nd
harmonic inhibit.

Figure 5-123: Percent differential logic

SETTING SETTINGS
PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
FUNCTION: PICKUP:
Enabled = 1 PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
SLOPE 1:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP A
BREAK 1:
PERCENT DIFF BLOCK: XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP B
XFMR PCNT DIFF PKP C
Off = 0 SLOPE 2:
ACTUAL VALUES FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BREAK 2:
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP A
DIFF PHASOR AND RUN
XFMR PCNT DIFF OP B
Iad
Iad XFMR PCNT DIFF OP C
Ibd AND
Icd Iar
AND RUN
Ibd
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ACTUAL VALUES
AND OR XFMR PCNT DIFF OP
REST PHASOR Ibr
AND RUN
Iar Icd
Ibr
Icr AND
Icr
SETTING SETTING
INRUSH INHIBIT INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL:
FUNCTION:
Disabled =0 INRUSH INHIBIT MODE:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
5
Adapt. 2nd
=1 RUN
Trad. 2nd Iad2 > LEVEL XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND A
RUN
ACTUAL VALUES XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND B
Ibd2 > LEVEL
DIFF 2ND HARM RUN
Icd2 > LEVEL XFMR PCNT DIFF 2ND C
Iad2
Ibd2
Icd2
SETTING
OVEREXC ITN INHIBIT SETTING
FUNCTION: OVEREXC ITN INHIBIT
Disabled = 0 LEVEL: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
5th = 1 RUN
Iad5 > LEVEL XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH A
ACTUAL VALUES RUN

Ibd5 > LEVEL XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH B
DIFF 5TH HARM
RUN
Icd5 > LEVEL XFMR PCNT DIFF 5TH C
Iad5
Ibd5
Icd5
SETTINGS
PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Iad > 0.5xPKP
10 s
Ibd > 0.5xPKP OR XFMR PCNT DIFF WARN
0
Icd > 0.5xPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR A
OR
XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT A
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR B
OR
XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT B
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR C
OR
XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT C
828004A1.CDR

5.8.3.3 Interturn fault detection

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER  INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION 
INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION1(2)
 INTERTURN FAULT INTERTURN FLT DET1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
 DETECTION 1  FUNCTION: Disabled
INTERTURN FLT DET1 Range: XFMR 1, XFMR 2

 PROT XFMR: XFMR 1
INTERTURN FLT DET1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SUPV SRC: SRC 1
INTERTURN FLT DET1 Range: NONE, AUTO, MANUAL

 AUTOSET MODE: AUTO
INTERTURN FLT DET1 Range: 1 to 240 min in steps of 1

 K-FACT UPDT: 30 min
FORCE INTURN 1 K UP: Range: Off, FlexLogic operand

 Off
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 Range: 0.010 to 0.500 PU in steps of 0.001

 PKP CUR: 0.050 PU
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 Range: 0.05 to 60.00 seconds in steps of 0.01

 PKP DELAY: 0.20 s
INTERTURN FLT 1 BLK: Range: Off, FlexLogic operand

 Off
5  INTERTURN FLT DET 1

TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
INTERTURN FLT DET1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element is a complement to the percent differential function. It detects interturn fault conditions using voltage
compensated differential currents. The voltage-based compensation term cancels out steady state differential current of
each phase. The resulting compensated differential current is sensitive enough to pick up turn-to-turn faults.
The three phase differential currents (Iad, Ibd, Icd) are calculated same way as for percent differential element but without
applying any cutoff level. Fundamental frequency phasor magnitudes of the selected supervising source voltages and
currents are used for detecting disturbances and blocking the function.
See the Theory of Operation chapter for more information.
INTERTURN FLT DET1 FUNCTION — Enables or disables the element.
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 PROT XFMR — This setting determines the transformer to be monitored by the element. Differential
currents, supervising source, and blocking operands, all then become available from the associated transformer sources
and Percent Differential function.
The transformer Percent Differential function must be enabled for this transformer, otherwise Interturn Fault Detection is
not functional.
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 SUPV SRC — The three phase voltages are used for the K-factors (compensating coefficients)
calculation and voltage compensated differential currents calculation. Also, this source provides the three phase current
and voltages for steady state condition supervision. Set the selected source to have three phase voltages and three phase
currents assigned in System Setup menu.
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 AUTOSET MODE — This setting provides a choice between automatic (recurring) updates of K-factors or
manual updates (from keypad command).
Selecting NONE means this function do not operate until new K-factors are calculated and applied in either Manual or Auto
mode.

For Manual mode, updating K-factors can be requested using a command, which is required when for example switching
from NONE to Manual mode, or whenever updating K-factors is preferred. This command is further explained in the
Transformer Auto-Setting section of the Commands chapter.
For Auto mode, K-factors updating period is explained later in the INTERTURN FLT DET 1 KFAC UPD PER setting description.
When a K-factor update is requested, dependent on the auto-setting procedure RUN signal status, a "XFMR INTTURN 1 K-
FACTOR APPLIED" or " XFMR INTTURN 1 K-FACTOR RECALC FAIL" message is displayed for the duration of the Display Flash
Message Time. The auto-setting procedure RUN signal only allows update of the K-factors when supervisory conditions are
satisfied. The last applied K-factor values can be seen in the ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSFORMER  INTERTURN
FAULT DETECTION  INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION1(2) menu.
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 K-FACT UPDT — This setting defines the recurring timer length for automatic recalculation of K-factors.
It allows for dynamic compensation of steady state differential current for algorithm security. Update periods are in
minutes range to allow enough time for the differential current to reach above pick up when a turn-to-turn fault occurs.
In Auto mode, depending on the recurring update being successful or blocked, the corresponding messages, "XFMR
INTTURN 1 K-FACTOR APPLIED" or "XFMR INTTURN 1 K-FACTOR RECALC FAIL," are displayed as frequently as this setting
value.
FORCE INTURN 1 K UP — This setting gives the option to force recalculation of K-factors based on the assigned input status.
One application is compensating steady state differential current value due to tap changer operation. It is essential to use
this setting if onload tap changer operation is employed on the monitored transformer. It is expected that this signal goes
to high state after tap change takes place and then the signal goes back to zero (use a pulse type signal with length of
greater than two cycles).
It is possible that the element can miss detection of the legitimate interturn fault if FORCE INTURN 1 K UP pulse is applied
during pickup condition of this element. To prevent this, block the tap changing operation, using the XFMR INTTURN 1
PKP operand.
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 PKP CUR — Even though the algorithm applies compensation of steady state differential current, the 5
operating quantity is still non-zero at no fault conditions. This relates to site specific noises or any measurement errors
after the last K-factor calculation moment. Choosing the pickup level is a compromise between the lowest percentage
turn-to-turn fault detection (sensitivity) and algorithm security for not picking up for steady state non-zero values.
Therefore, for maximum turn-to-turn fault coverage, it is suggested to use Data Logger (under the Product Setup menu)
and record the available per phase FlexAnalog values (for example for phase A: Intturn1 Cmp Iad Mag) to find the minimum
value to avoid nuisance pickup or warning.
Note that compensated differential current and its associated pickup level are in per-unit (see Reference Winding
explanation under General Transformer Settings).
INTERTURN FLT DET 1 PKP DELAY — This setting selects the operating time of the Interturn Fault Detection element. Because
the function is very sensitive, allowing sufficient delay ensures algorithm security.
INTERTURN FLT 1 BLK — This operand can be used for customized blocking of the element’s disturbance detector, K-factor
recalculation, and pickup level comparators.
If element is in pickup condition, blocking by this FlexLogic operand can cause missed detection of the legitimate
interturn fault and should be prevented.

Figure 5-124: Transformer interturn fault detection logic

5.8.3.4 Instantaneous differential

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER  INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL
 INSTANTANEOUS INST DIFFERENTIAL Range: Disabled, Enabled
 DIFFERENTIAL  FUNCTION: Disabled
INST DIFFERENTIAL Range: 2.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

INST DIFF BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
INST DIFFERENTIAL Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

INST DIFFERENTIAL Range: Disabled, Enabled

The instantaneous differential element acts as an instantaneous overcurrent element responding to the measured
differential current magnitude (filtered fundamental frequency component) and applying a user-selectable pickup
threshold. Set the pickup threshold greater than the maximum spurious differential current that can be encountered under
non-internal fault conditions (typically magnetizing inrush current or an external fault with extremely severe CT saturation).
Figure 5-125: Instantaneous differential logic
SETTING
INST DIFFERENTIAL
FUNCTION: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
Enabled=1 XFMR INST DIFF OP A
5
INST DIFFERENTIAL
XFMR INST DIFF OP B
PICKUP:
SETTING XFMR INST DIFF OP C
AND RUN
Iad > PICKUP
INST DIFF BLOCK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RUN
Off=0 Ibd > PICKUP OR XFMR INST DIFF OP
RUN
ACTUAL VALUE Icd > PICKUP
828000A2.CDR
DIFF PHASOR
Iad
Ibd
Icd
5.8.3.5 Hottest-spot temperature

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER  HOTTEST-SPOT TEMPERATURE
 HOTTEST-SPOT XFMR HST FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
 TEMPERATURE  Disabled
XFMR HST PICKUP: Range: 50 to 300°C in steps of 1

 140°C
XFMR HST DELAY: Range: 0 to 30000 min. in steps of 1

 1 min
XFMR HST BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
XFMR HST TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

 Self-reset
XFMR HST EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled

The Hottest-Spot Temperature element provides a mechanism to detect abnormal winding hottest-spot temperatures
inside the transformer. It can be set to alarm or trip in cases where the computed hottest-spot temperature is above the
pickup threshold for a user-specified time (considered as transformer overheating).
XFMR HST PICKUP — Enter the hottest-spot temperature required for operation of the element. Base this setting on the
maximum permissible hottest-spot temperature under emergency transformer loading conditions and maximum ambient
temperature.
XFMR HST DELAY — Enter an appropriate time delay before operation of the element.
Figure 5-126: Transformer hottest-spot temperature logic
SETTING
SETTINGS
HOTTEST-SPOT t°
FUNCTION: HOTTEST-SPOT t°
PICKUP:
Enable=1
HOTTEST-SPOT t°
PICKUP TIME DELAY:
SETTING
AND RUN
HOTTEST-SPOT t° FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BLOCK:
XFMR HST-SPOT t°C PKP
Off=0 t°C > PKP
XFMR HST-SPOT t°C DPO
ACTUAL VALUE
HOTTEST-SPOT t° XFMR HST-SPOT t°C OP

tPKP
828731A4.cdr
5
5.8.3.6 Aging factor
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER  AGING FACTOR
 AGING FACTOR AGING FACTOR Range: Disabled, Enabled
AGING FACTOR Range: 1.1 to 10.0 pu in steps of 0.1

 PICKUP: 2.0 pu
AGING FACTOR Range: 0 to 30000 min. in steps of 1

 DELAY: 10 min
AGING FACTOR BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
AGING FACTOR TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

 Self-reset
AGING FACTOR EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
The Aging Factor element detects transformer aging in per-unit normal insulation aging. The element can be set to alarm
or trip whenever the computed aging factor is greater than the user-defined pickup setting for the specified time delay.
AGING FACTOR PICKUP — Enter a value above which the aging factor element is to operate. Enter a setting greater than the
maximum permissible aging factor under emergency loading conditions and maximum ambient temperature.

Figure 5-127: Transformer aging factor logic
SETTING
SETTINGS
AGING FACTOR
FUNCTION: AGING FACTOR
PICKUP:
Enable=1
AGING FACTOR
PICKUP DELAY:
SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN
AGING FACTOR
AGING FACTOR PKP
BLOCK:
Off=0 FAA > PKP
AGING FACTOR DPO
ACTUAL VALUE
AGING FACTOR OP
tPKP
AGING FACTOR-FAA
828733A3.cdr
5.8.3.7 Loss of life

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  TRANSFORMER  LOSS OF LIFE
 LOSS OF LIFE LOSS OF LIFE Range: Disabled, Enabled
LOSS OF LIFE INITIAL Range: 0 to 500000 hrs. in steps of 1

 VALUE: 0 hrs
LOSS OF LIFE Range: 0 to 500000 hrs. in steps of 1

 PICKUP: 180000 hrs
 LOSS OF LIFE BLOCK:

Off
Range: FlexLogic operand 5
LOSS OF LIFE TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
 Self-reset
LOSS OF LIFE EVENT: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
The Loss of Life element detects the accumulated total consumed transformer life. This element can be set to issue an
alarm or trip when the actual accumulated transformer life becomes larger than the user-specified loss of life pickup
value. For new transformers installations, set the XFMR INITIAL LOSS OF LIFE setting to “0.” For previously installed
transformers, pre-determine the consumed transformer life in hours.
LOSS OF LIFE INITIAL VALUE — Enter a setting for the consumed transformer life in hours. When the Loss of Life element is
enabled, the computed loss of life is added to the initial loss of life.
LOSS OF LIFE PICKUP — Enter the expended life, in hours, required for operation of the element. Set this setting above the
total transformer life set as a reference based on nominal loading conditions and a 30°C ambient temperature, as outlined
in the IEEE standards.

Figure 5-128: Transformer loss of life logic
SETTING
LOSS OF LIFE
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Enable=1
LOSS OF LIFE
PICKUP:
SETTING
AND RUN
LOSS OF LIFE
BLOCK:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off=0
LOL > PKP LOSS OF LIFE PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
LOSS OF LIFE OP
XFMR LIFE LOST
828732A3.cdr
5.8.4 Phase current
5.8.4.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT
 PHASE CURRENT  PHASE TOC 1 See page 5-280
  

5   PHASE TOC 6

 PHASE IOC 1 See page 5-282

 

 PHASE IOC 12
 
5.8.4.2 Inverse TOC curve characteristics

The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard
curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices.
If none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves can be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The
definite time curve is also an option that can be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5-28: Overcurrent curve types
IEEE IEC GE type IAC Other
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEC Curve A (BS142) IAC Extremely Inverse I2t
IEEE Very Inverse IEC Curve B (BS142) IAC Very Inverse FlexCurves A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inverse IEC Curve C (BS142) IAC Inverse Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse IAC Short Inverse Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable
indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element operates. If less than 100% energy
capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value,

the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed.” The
“Instantaneous” selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” selection can be used where the
relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
The URs calculate operate time corresponding to the values in the range of 1.03 to 20 multiples of the pickup current.
Above 20 multiples of the pickup current, URs clamp the operate time to the value at a multiple of 20, resulting in the flat
part of the characteristics. Reset time is calculated in the range of 0 to 0.97 multiples of the pickup current.
IEEE curves
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for
extremely, very, and moderately inverse curves. The IEEE curves are derived from the operate and reset time equations.
A tr
------------------------------- + B -------------------------------
-
I ·p
T = TDM u § ------------- , T RESET = TDM u I 2 Eq. 5-33
© I pickup¹ – 1
- 1 – §© -------------- ·¹
I pickup
where
T = operate time (in seconds)
TDM = Multiplier setting
I = input current
Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants defined in the table
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”)
tr = characteristic constant defined in the table
Table 5-29: IEEE inverse time curve constants
5
IEEE curve shape A B p tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02000 4.85
Table 5-30: IEEE curve trip times (in seconds)

Multiplier Current ( I / Ipickup)
(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891


(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068
IEC curves
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The IEC curves are derived by the operate and reset time
equations.
K tr
----------------------------------- ----------------------------------
-
T = TDM u I e I pickup – 1
E
, T RESET = TDM u 1 – I e I 2 Eq. 5-34
pickup
where
5 I = input current
K, E = constants defined in the table
Table 5-31: IEC (BS) inverse time curve constants
IEC (BS) curve shape K E tr
IEC Curve A (BS142) 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142) 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142) 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Short Inverse 0.050 0.040 0.500
Table 5-32: IEC curve trip times (in seconds)

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150


(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Short Inverse
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80
1.00
2.446
3.058
1.423
1.778
0.890
1.113
0.702
0.877
0.602
0.752
0.538
0.673
0.494
0.618
0.461
0.576
0.435
0.544
0.415
0.518
5
IAC curves
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
§ B D E ·
T = TDM u ¨ A + --------------------------- + ---------------------------------2 + ---------------------------------3¸ tr
, T RESET = TDM u ---------------------------- Eq. 5-35
I e I pkp – C I e I pkp – C I e I pkp – C ¹ -
© 2
1 – I e I pkp
where
I = Input current
Ipkp = Pickup Current setting
A to E = constants defined in the table
Table 5-33: GE type IAC inverse time curve constants
IAC curve shape A B C D E tr
IAC Extreme Inverse 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 –1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 –0.4180 0.1947 0.990
IAC Short Inverse 0.0428 0.0609 0.6200 –0.0010 0.0221 0.222

Table 5-34: GE type IAC curve trip times

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse
0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
5 1.0
2.0
1.155
2.310
0.749
1.499
0.532
1.064
0.443
0.885
0.392
0.784
0.360
0.719
0.337
0.674
0.320
0.640
0.307
0.614
0.297
0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
IAC Short Inverse
0.5 0.072 0.047 0.035 0.031 0.028 0.027 0.026 0.026 0.025 0.025
1.0 0.143 0.095 0.070 0.061 0.057 0.054 0.052 0.051 0.050 0.049
2.0 0.286 0.190 0.140 0.123 0.114 0.108 0.105 0.102 0.100 0.099
4.0 0.573 0.379 0.279 0.245 0.228 0.217 0.210 0.204 0.200 0.197
6.0 0.859 0.569 0.419 0.368 0.341 0.325 0.314 0.307 0.301 0.296
8.0 1.145 0.759 0.559 0.490 0.455 0.434 0.419 0.409 0.401 0.394
10.0 1.431 0.948 0.699 0.613 0.569 0.542 0.524 0.511 0.501 0.493
I2t curves
The I2t curves are derived as follows:
100 100
----------------------- -------------------------
I · 2 , T RESET = TDM u § I · –2
T = TDM u § ------------- Eq. 5-36
- --------------
© I pickup ¹ © I pickup ¹
where

T = Operate time (in seconds)

I = Input current
Table 5-35: I2t curve trip times

(TDM)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.44 0.25 0.11 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01
0.10 4.44 2.50 1.11 0.63 0.40 0.28 0.20 0.16 0.12 0.10
1.00 44.44 25.00 11.11 6.25 4.00 2.78 2.04 1.56 1.23 1.00
10.00 444.44 250.00 111.11 62.50 40.00 27.78 20.41 15.63 12.35 10.00
100.00 4444.4 2500.0 1111.1 625.00 400.00 277.78 204.08 156.25 123.46 100.00
600.00 26666.7 15000.0 6666.7 3750.0 2400.0 1666.7 1224.5 937.50 740.74 600.00
FlexCurves
FlexCurves are described in the FlexCurves section later in this chapter. The curve shapes for the FlexCurves are derived
from the formulae:
I I
T = TDM u FlexCurve Time at §© --------------·¹ when §© --------------·¹ t 1.00
I pickup I pickup Eq. 5-37
I
T RESET = TDM u FlexCurve Time at §© --------------·¹
I
when §© --------------·¹ d 0.98
5
I pickup I pickup Eq. 5-38
where
I = Input Current
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Definite time curve

The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from
instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The definite time curve shapes are defined as follows:
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup Eq. 5-39
T RESET = TDM in seconds Eq. 5-40
where
T = Operate Time (in seconds)
I = Input Current
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

Recloser curves
The T35 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. See the FlexCurves settings section
earlier in this chapter for details.
5.8.4.3 Phase time overcurrent (ANSI 51P, IEC PTOC)

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE TOC1(6)
 PHASE TOC 1 PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS

 INPUT: Phasor
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE TOC1 Range: see Overcurrent Curve Types table

 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
PHASE TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
PHASE TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed

 RESET: Instantaneous
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE Range: Disabled, Enabled

 RESTRAINT: Disabled
5 PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
PHASE TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase time overcurrent element can provide a specified time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple definite time element. The phase current input quantities can be programmed as fundamental
phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics
section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times, and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator resets according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to
“Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator clears immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be reduced dynamically by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is
accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic
curve (see the figure); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint
feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.

Figure 5-129: Phase time overcurrent voltage restraint characteristic
Multiplier for Pickup Current

1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC FOR PHASE TIME O/C
818784A4.CDR
FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the phase time overcurrent protection element.
SIGNAL SOURCE — Selects the signal source for the phase time overcurrent protection element.
INPUT — Selects how phase current input quantities are interpreted by the T35. Inputs can be selected as fundamental
phasor magnitudes or total waveform RMS magnitudes as required by the application.
PICKUP — Specifies the phase time overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values.
CURVE — Selects the time inverse overcurrent curve style.
TD MULTIPLIER — When TOC1 CURVE setting is set to Definite Time, this setting defines time delay to element pickup. When
5
TOC1 CURVE setting is set to any inverse time curve, this setting defines inverse curve multiplier, used in the chosen curve
equation.
RESET — The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which
set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset method can be
used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT — Enables and disables the phase time overcurrent voltage restraint feature.
BLOCK A — Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks phase A of the phase time overcurrent element.
EVENTS — Enables and disables the logging of phase time overcurrent events in the sequence of events recorder.

Figure 5-130: Phase time overcurrent 1 logic

SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
PHASE TOC1 INPUT:
BLOCK-C:
PHASE TOC1
Off=0 PICKUP:
PHASE TOC1
SETTING CURVE:
PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1
SOURCE: TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
IB RESET: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IC AND RUN PHASE TOC1 A PKP
IA PICKUP
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB PHASE TOC1 A DPO
MULTIPLY INPUTS
RUN
t PHASE TOC1 A OP
VAB VAC Set
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup AND RUN PHASE TOC1 B PKP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase A IB PICKUP
Set PHASE TOC1 B DPO
VBC VBA Set Pickup
Calculate Multiplier t PHASE TOC1 B OP
RUN
Multiplier-Phase B
Set AND RUN PHASE TOC1 C PKP
VCA VCB IC PICKUP
Calculate Multiplier Set Pickup PHASE TOC1 C DPO
Multiplier-Phase C
t PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING OR PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT:
5
OR PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND PHASE TOC1 DPO
827072A5.CDR
5.8.4.4 Phase instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50P, IEC PIOC)

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  PHASE CURRENT  PHASE IOC 1(12)
 PHASE IOC 1 PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1
PHASE IOC1 Range: 0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
PHASE IOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PHASE IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled


The phase instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the phase instantaneous overcurrent protection element.
SOURCE — Selects the signal source for the phase instantaneous overcurrent protection element.
PICKUP — Specifies the phase instantaneous overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values.
DELAY —Delays the assertion of the PHASE IOC OP operands. It is used to achieve timing coordination with other elements
and relays.
RESET DELAY — Specifies a delay for the reset of the phase instantaneous overcurrent element between the operate output
state and the return to logic 0 after the input passes outside the defined pickup range. This setting is used to ensure that
the relay output contacts are closed long enough to ensure reception by downstream equipment.
BLOCK A — Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting block’s phase A of the phase instantaneous overcurrent
element.
EVENTS — Enables and disables the logging of phase instantaneous overcurrent events in the sequence of events recorder.
Figure 5-131: Phase instantaneous overcurrent 1 logic
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING
SETTING Pickup Delay PHASE IOC1 A PKP
Function
Pickup Reset Delay PHASE IOC1 A DPO
AND RUN TPKP PHASE IOC1 B PKP
1 = Enabled
IA > Pickup PHASE IOC1 B DPO
TRST PHASE IOC1 C PKP
AND RUN TPKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO
SETTING
Source IB > Pickup
TRST
= IA FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN TPKP
= IB PHASE IOC1 A OP
5
IC > Pickup PHASE IOC1 B OP
= IC TRST
PHASE IOC1 C OP
SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

Block A OR PHASE IOC1 PKP
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Block B
OR PHASE IOC1 OP
= Off
Block C FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= Off AND PHASE IOC1 DPO
827033A8.CDR
5.8.5 Neutral current
5.8.5.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT
 NEUTRAL CURRENT  TRANSIENT GROUND See below
   FAULT 1

 TRANSIENT GROUND
  FAULT 4
5.8.5.2 Transient ground fault detection

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  NEUTRAL CURRENT  TRANS GND FLT 1(4)
 TRANS GND FLT 1 TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1

TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: Calculated VN, Measured VX

 VOLT: Measured VX
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: Calculated IN, Measured IG

 AMP: Measured IG
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: 0.0 to 100.0 W in steps of 0.01

 PWR THLD: 3.0
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: 0.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01

 VOLT PKP: 0.10
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: Off, On, FlexLogic operand

 BLOCK: Off
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

For a solid single phase to ground fault in an ungrounded three-phase system, the voltage of the faulted phase becomes
equal to the earth potential (zero) while that of healthy phases become 3 times the nominal value. The fault current in
ungrounded systems is equal to the sum of the charging currents drawn by the healthy phases, which is three times the
normal charging current. The higher charging current can lead to arcing at the fault point and this arcing might not be
self-extinguishing due to significant amount of fault (charging) current. Therefore, Petersen's coil, which is an inductive coil,
is placed in the neutral of the three-phase system to compensate for the capacitive charging currents, which in turn
reduces or eliminates the fault current.
Depending on the level of compensation of the Petersen's coil, three conditions can arise:
5 •
•
Over compensation (inductive fault current)
Under (capacitive fault current) compensation
• Resonant compensation (no fault current)
The figure shows an ungrounded system. The zero-sequence current in the healthy feeder the current is capacitive in
nature, while the zero-sequence current in faulted phase is inductive in nature. This observation can be utilized to identify
and isolate the faulty feeder in ungrounded systems.
Figure 5-132: Single-phase to ground fault in ungrounded system
Capacitive
Inductive
859810A1.vsdx

However, in the case of Petersen's coil grounded system, zero-sequence current of a faulty feeder can become capacitive,
inductive, resistive, or altogether disappear, depending upon the level of compensation, the charging current of the
system, or the fault impedance. For example, the next figure shows the single-phase to ground fault in Petersen's coil
grounded network with 100% compensation (resonant compensation). It can be observed that all of the charging current
is supplied via neutral of the compensated system, thus making the current at the fault point equal to 0. Consequently, the
zero-sequence current of the faulty feeder like a healthy feeder also becomes capacitive in nature. Thus, the standard
directional protection cannot be applied to systems grounded through Petersen coil.
Figure 5-133: Single-phase to ground fault in Petersen coil grounded system with 100% compensation
Capacitive
Capacitive
5
859811A1.vsdx
To overcome this challenge, a patented algorithm is used, which does not require special hardware or high acquisition
frequency, to precisely determine the fault direction. The algorithm utilizes the concept of transient reactive power to
identify the direction of the fault. The algorithm also applies to high-resistive grounded and ungrounded systems. The
technique involves the application of band pass filters to measured residual voltage (VN) and current signals (IN). The center
frequency of the band pass filters is 220 Hz and 264 Hz for nominal frequencies of 50 and 60 Hz respectively. Band pass
filters remove the fundamental frequency component and introduce a 90° shift in anti-clockwise direction in the voltage
signal. The outputs of voltage and current band pass filters are denoted by V'N and I'N respectively. The transient reactive
power is obtained by multiplying V'N and I'N.
If the feeder has a fault, the circuit is inductive in the frequency range of the interest. Consequently, the transient reactive
power is negative as V'N. and I'N are in phase opposition (figure a). On the other hand, if the feeder is healthy the circuit is
capacitive in nature, thereby making the transient reactive power positive (figure b). Note that the phasors shown in the
figure represent the voltage and current relationship surrounding the frequencies 220 Hz and 264 Hz for 50 and 60 Hz
systems respectively.

Figure 5-134: Transient ground fault
V’ N V’ N
I’N IN
90o 90o
VN VN
I’N IN Faulty Feeder Healthy Feeder

(a) (b)
Figure shows the phase relationship of the frequency components of V N, IN, V’N, and I’N
in the region surrounding 220 Hz in 50 Hz system or 264 Hz for 60 Hz system
859799A1.vsdx
Similarly, the decision about the direction of the fault can also be made using transient active power. In case the minimum
threshold of transient reactive power is not met, the direction of the fault can be identified using transient active power.
5 TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the Transient Ground Fault Detection function.
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 SOURCE — This setting selects the signal source for Transient Ground Fault Detection function.
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 VOLT — The element uses neutral voltage (that is, three times the zero-sequence voltage). This setting
allows selecting between the internally calculated neutral voltage or the externally supplied voltage (broken delta VT
connected to the auxiliary channel bank of the relay). When the latter selection is made, the auxiliary channel must be
identified by the user as a neutral voltage under the VT bank settings. This element operates when the auxiliary voltage is
configured as neutral.
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 AMP — The element responds to the neutral current (that is, three times zero-sequence current), either
calculated internally from the phase currents or supplied externally via the ground CT input from more accurate sources
such as the core balanced CT. This setting allows selecting the source of the operating current.
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 PWR THLD — This setting is used to calculate dynamic power threshold which in turn is used to
determine residual fault direction. Increasing the value of this setting increases the security and decreases the sensitivity
of the element. The minimum value that can be applied to this setting to avoid overlap with "small P/Q" area is 3 W. As
shown in the next figure, "small P/Q" area refers to the condition when the calculated transient reactive or active power is
small enough to introduce ambiguity in sensing the direction of the fault. This setting is given in secondary value.

Figure 5-135: Transient ground fault power threshold
Reactive Power selected Active Power selected
Average Reactive Average Reactive

Power Power
Dynamic Threshold P Positive

Dynamic Threshold P Negative
Dynamic Threshold Q Positive
2 5 2 5
-5 -2 -5 -2
Average Active Average Active
Power Power
Dynamic Threshold Q Negative
Reverse Should never happen
Forward Should never happen

859801A1.vsdx 5
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 VOLT PKP — Voltage pickup threshold that is used to determine if Transient Ground Fault Detection
element starts or not. If the measured neutral voltage is above this setting the element Transient Ground Fault Detection
starts. Typical value of this setting is 0.10 pu.
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 BLOCK — Assertion of the FlexLogic operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of Transient
Ground Fault Detection element.
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 EVENTS — This setting enables and disables the logging of Transient Ground Fault Detection events in
the event recorder.

Figure 5-136: Transient ground fault detection logic

SETTING
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
=60Hz
Available at: SETTINGS > SYSTEM RUN RUN RUN
SETUP > POWER SYSTEM RUN
Voltage band- V’N Calculate dynamic threshold
SETTING pass Filter (90o Q, max average Q and
Average Transient Q
shift) evaluate Positive/Negative Q
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 SOURCE: I’N FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Current band-
pass Filter TGFD 1 REVERSE
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 AMP:
Center frequency of the filters:
Calculated IN Measured IG 50 Hz System: 220 Hz RUN
Directional logic
60 Hz System: 264 Hz
RUN Calculate dynamic threshold
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 VOLT:
P, max average P and
Calculated VN Measured VX Average Transient P evaluate Positive/Negative P FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
V1 TGFD 1 FORWARD
SETTING
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 PWR
THLD: RUN
3.00W
Select Power P or Q
Only applicable when setting
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1
VOLT=Calculated VN SETTING
TIMER TRANSIENT GND FLT 1 VOLT

PKP:
2cyc
|V1|> 0.8 pu RUN
1 cyc TIMER
Activate TGFD: 0
RMS V N > Setting
300 ms
SETTING
TRNST GND FLT 1 BLK: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 AND TGFD 1 START
SETTING
TRANSIENT GND FLT 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1 859800A3.vsdx
5
5.8.6 Ground current
5.8.6.1 Menu
SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT
 GROUND CURRENT  GROUND TOC1 See below
  

 GROUND TOC6
 
 GROUND IOC 1 See page 5-290

 

 GROUND IOC12
 
 RESTRICTED GROUND See page 5-291

  FAULT 1

 RESTRICTED GROUND
  FAULT 6

5.8.6.2 Ground time overcurrent (ANSI 51G, IEC PTOC)

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND TOC1(6)
 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND TOC1 Range: Phasor, RMS

 INPUT: Phasor
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

GROUND TOC1 Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table

 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
GROUND TOC1 Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00
GROUND TOC1 Range: Instantaneous, Timed

 RESET: Instantaneous
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
GROUND TOC1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

GROUND TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element can provide a required time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
5
definite time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the
fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous”
(see the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator resets
according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the
element is blocked, the time accumulator clears immediately.
GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the ground time overcurrent protection element.
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE — This setting selects the signal source for the ground time overcurrent protection element.
GROUND TOC1 INPUT — This setting selects how ground current input quantities are interpreted by the T35. Inputs can be
selected as fundamental phasor magnitudes or total waveform RMS magnitudes as required by the application.
GROUND TOC1 PICKUP — This setting specifies the ground time overcurrent pickup level in per-unit values. With a Process
Bus Module, accuracy of the element is determined by the sum of the relay internal processing errors and input signal from
the merging unit errors, which can be significant depending on the merging unit design. For low level pickup settings,
especially less than 0.020 pu with a Process Bus Module, ensure that the selected merging unit meets given application
accuracy requirements.
GROUND TOC1 CURVE — This setting selects the inverse time overcurrent curve style.
GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER — This setting specifies a multiple of the base curve shape specified by the CURVE setting.
Programming this value to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
GROUND TOC1 RESET — The “Instantaneous” reset method is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static
relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The “Timed” reset
method can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK — Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the ground time overcurrent
element.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.

This channel can be also equipped with a sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002
to 4.6 times the CT rating.
Figure 5-137: Ground TOC1 logic
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
SETTING GROUND TOC1
GROUND TOC1 PICKUP:
FUNCTION: GROUND TOC1
Enabled = 1 CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
RESET: GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1
AND RUN IG PICKUP GROUND TOC1 DPO
SOURCE:
GROUND TOC1 OP
IG t
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
827036A4.VSD
Off = 0
5.8.6.3 Ground instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI 50G, IEC PIOC)

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  GROUND IOC1(12)
5  GROUND IOC1
  GROUND IOC 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
GROUND IOC 1 SIGNAL Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1
GROUND IOC 1 Range: 0.020 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

GROUND IOC 1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC 1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
GROUND IOC 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
GROUND IOC 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

GROUND IOC 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

The ground instantaneous overcurrent element can be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
definite time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental
phasor magnitude.
GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the element.
GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE — This setting selects the signal source for the element.
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP — This setting specifies the pickup level in per-unit values. With a Process Bus Module, accuracy of
the element is determined by the sum of the relay internal processing errors and input signal from the merging unit errors,
which can be significant depending on the merging unit design. For low level pickup settings, especially less than 0.020 pu
with a Process Bus Module, ensure that the selected merging unit meets the given application accuracy requirements.
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY — This setting specifies the definite time delay after which the operate signal asserts.
GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY — This setting specifies the reset time delay.

GROUND IOC1 BLOCK — Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the element.
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. The conversion
range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating.
This channel can be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is
from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
Figure 5-138: Ground IOC1 logic
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOC1 PKP
SETTING GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1
SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 OP
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
SETTING DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESET
SETTING
PICKUP: DELAY:
GROUND IOC1
AND RUN tPKP
SOURCE:
IG
IG PICKUP tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
827037A5.VSD
Off = 0
5.8.6.4 Restricted ground fault (ANSI 87RGF, IEC PNDF) 5

SETTINGS  GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6)  GROUND CURRENT  RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT
1(6)
 RESTRICTED GROUND RESTD GND FT1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
 FAULT 1  FUNCTION: Disabled
RESTD GND FT1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1
RESTD GND FT1 Range: 0.005 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

RESTD GND FT1 Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

 SLOPE: 40%
RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.03 s
RESTD GND FT1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
RESTD GND FT1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
RESTD GND FT1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

RESTD GND FT1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

Restricted ground fault (RGF) protection provides sensitive ground fault detection for low-magnitude fault currents,
primarily faults close to the neutral point of a wye-connected winding. An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded
wye winding produces a fault current dependent on the ground impedance value and the fault position on the winding
with respect to the neutral point. The resultant primary current is negligible for faults on the lower 30% of the winding since
the fault voltage is not the system voltage, but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings

and the percentage of shorted turns on the secondary. Therefore, the resultant differential currents can be below the slope
threshold of the main differential element and the fault can go undetected. Application of the restricted ground fault
protection extends the coverage towards the neutral point (see the following figure).
Figure 5-139: RGF and percent differential zones of protection
G9>49>7
#%
B76 49665B5>D91<J?>5
BW
J?>5
($"'#!1!34B
This protection is often applied to transformers having impedance-grounded wye windings. The element can also be
applied to the stator winding of a generator having the neutral point grounded with a CT installed in the grounding path, or
the ground current obtained by external summation of the neutral-side stator CTs. The following figure shows the basic
application and wiring rules.

Figure 5-140: Typical applications of RGF protection

D ) )
7UDQVIRUPHU:LQGLQJ F 6WDWRU:LQGLQJ
,$ ,$
,% ,%
,& ,&
) ,* ) ,*

0
E 7UDQVIRUPHU:LQGLQJ ,$ ,% ,& G 6WDWRU:LQGLQJ
) ,$
,$
,%
,%
,&
,&
5
) ,* ,$ ,% ,& 0
,*

H
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHU:LQGLQJ ,$ ,% ,& )
) ,* ,$ ,% ,& 0

$&'5

The next figures show distribution of the ground fault current through the grounded neutral point of the wye winding and
primary delta winding as a function of the fault location as a percentage of the whole wye winding. Magnitude of the
transformer winding fault is controlled by several factors, such as supply source impedance, wye winding neutral
grounding impedance, transformer leakage reactance, fault voltage windings connection and position of the fault on the
winding with respect to the neutral point.
Figure 5-141: Fault current through transformer neutral against primary current
(left is resistance-ground neutral, right is solidly grounded neutral)
5
Figure 5-142: Fault current through transformer neutral against primary current (winding current flow during ground
fault)
IP
IP
RG
IF
859819A1.vsdx
The settings are as follows.

RESTD GND FT1 SOURCE — Identifies the signal source for the restricted ground fault (RGF) function. It is important that
source includes a set of three-phase CTs on the line side of the wye winding of the transformer assigned to the Phase CT
setting of this source and a neutral point CT assigned to the Ground CT setting of this source. In case of more breaker-and-
a-half connections on the line side of the transformer or autotransformer application, Phase CT arrangement need to
include the sum of CT banks contributing to the differential signal. When the summed CTs have a different ratio, the relay
automatically re-scales to the maximum CT primary nominal value.
RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP — Defines the minimum ground differential current required for operation. The relay automatically
matches the CT ratios between the phase and ground CTs by re-scaling the ground CT to the phase CT level, which
becomes a base value for the differential and restraint currents. For example, for 10 MVA, 33 kV to 11 kV transformer, 10%
impedance, D / Y-1, RG = 6.3Ω, with Phase CT ratio = 600 / 1 A.

Maximum phase-to-ground fault current IGMAX = 11 kV / ( 3 × 6.3Ω) = 1000 A primary.

For a winding fault point at 5% distance from the neutral:
IGPKP = 0.05 x IGMAX = 0.05 x 1000 = 50 A primary. The pickup setting is chosen as PKP = 50 A / 600 A = 0.083 pu
Note that for correct operation of the element, the CURRENT CUTOFF setting under Display Properties has to be set at least
two times less than the PICKUP setting.
RESTD GND FT1 SLOPE — Defines the restrain characteristics for this element. Set the slope to provide extra restraint for
external faults, but not prevent operation for the winding fault during heavy transformer load. Transformer nominal
winding current is IN(W) = 10 MVA / ( 3 × 11 kV) = 525 A = 525 A / 600 A = 0.875 pu. Considering that RGF algorithm
restraint is defined by the positive-sequence current during load, and for currents below 2 pu restraint is equal to I1/8,
slope can be estimated as follows:
Slope = PKP / (1.2 x IN(W) / 8) x 100% = 0.083 pu / (1.2 x 0.875 / 8) x 100% = 63%
where 1.2 factor accounts for 20% temporary overload of the transformer
Because the final slope has to be set lower than this calculated value to have some safety margin, the final setting can be
selected as 43%.
RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP DELAY — Defines element delay from the pickup to assertion of the RESTD GND FT1 OP operand.
GE recommends a short time delay to overcome spurious zero-sequence current due to switch-off transients for this
sensitive protection.
RESTD GND FT1 RESET DELAY — Defines how long the RESTD GND FT1 OP operand stays asserted after pickup conditions
disappear.
The relay incorporates low-impedance restricted ground fault protection. This low-impedance form of protection faces
potential stability problems. An external phase-to-phase fault is an ultimate case. Ideally, there is neither ground (IG) nor
neutral (IN = IA + IB + IC) current present. If one or more of the phase CTs saturate, a spurious neutral current is seen by the 5
relay. This is similar to a single infeed situation and can be mistaken for an internal fault. Similar difficulties occur in a
breaker-and-a-half application of the restricted ground fault, where any through fault with a weak infeed from the
winding itself can cause problems.
The UR uses a novel definition of the restraining signal to cope with the above stability problems while providing fast and
sensitive protection. Even with the improved definition of the restraining signal, the breaker-and-a-half application of the
restricted ground fault must be approached with care, and is not recommended unless the settings are carefully selected
to avoid maloperation due to CT saturation.
The differential current is produced as an unbalance current between the ground current of the neutral CT (IG) and the
neutral current derived from the phase CTs (IN = IA + IB + IC):
Igd = |IG + IN| = |IG + IA + IB + IC| Eq. 5-41
The restraining signal ensures stability of protection during CT saturation conditions and is produced as a maximum value
among three components related to zero, negative, and positive-sequence currents of the three phase CTs as follows:
Irest = max(IR0, IR1, IR2) Eq. 5-42
The zero-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR0) is meant to provide maximum restraint during external
ground faults, and therefore is calculated as a vectorial difference of the ground and neutral currents:
IR0 = |IG - IN| = |IG - (IA + IB + IC)| Eq. 5-43
The equation above brings an advantage of generating the restraining signal of twice the external ground fault current,
while reducing the restraint below the internal ground fault current. The negative-sequence component of the restraining
signal (IR2) is meant to provide maximum restraint during external phase-to-phase faults and is calculated as follows:
IR2 = |I_2| or IR2 = 3 x |I_2| Eq. 5-44
Following complete de-energization of the windings (all three phase currents below 5% of nominal for at least five cycles),
the relay uses a multiplier of 1 in preparation for the next energization. The multiplier of 3 is used during normal operation;
that is, two cycles after the winding has been energized. The lower multiplier is used to ensure better sensitivity when
energizing a faulty winding.
The positive-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR1) is adaptive and provides restraint during symmetrical
conditions, either symmetrical faults or load.

Additionally, the algorithm detects a long-lasting DC during energization, which can saturate line CTs and increase IR1.
Long lasting DC in phase A (same in other two phases) is estimated with the following condition:
DC_A = |I_ARMS - 9 x I_AMAG / 8| > 0 Eq. 5-45
When this condition is satisfied in any phase for three cycles, DCACTIVE is set and is reset in 60 cycles once the condition
disappears. Overall IR1 is calculated according to the following algorithm:
IF |I_1| > 2 pu AND |I_1| > |I_0|, THEN IR1 = 3 × (I_1MAG - I_0MAG)
IF DCACTIVE THEN IR1 = I_1MAG / 2
OTHERWISE IR1 = I_1MAG / 8
During an external fault involving ground when positive-sequence current exceeds 200% of the phase CT nominal and
positive-sequence current exceeds zero-sequence current, IR1 restraint is set to the maximum value. During energization
with the long-lasting DC, IR1 is set to half of the positive-sequence current to ensure extra restraint. If none of two
conditions are present, then IR1 is set to the minimum value of the 1/8 of the positive-sequence current to ensure
sensitivity during load conditions.
The raw restraining signal (Irest) is further post-filtered for better performance during external faults with heavy CT
saturation and for better switch-off transient control:
Igr(k) = max(Irest(k), α x Igr(k - 1)) Eq. 5-46
where
k represents a present sample
k – 1 represents the previous sample
α is a factory constant (α < 1)
The equation above introduces a decaying memory to the restraining signal. Should the raw restraining signal (Irest)
5 disappear or drop significantly, such as when an external fault gets cleared or a CT saturates heavily, the actual restraining
signal (Igr(k)) does not reduce instantly but keeps decaying decreasing its value by 50% each 15.5 power system cycles.
For additional security, the element applies a ground current of the transformer neutral CT (IG) supervision by allowing
element pickup and operation when the IG magnitude is above 0.8 x Pickup setting.
Having the differential and restraining signals developed, the element applies a single slope differential characteristic with
a minimum pickup as shown in the following logic diagram.

Figure 5-143: Restricted ground fault logic
6(77,1*
5(67'*1')7
)81&7,21 6(77,1*
(QDEOHG 5(67'*1')7
3,&.83
6(77,1*6
6(77,1* 581
$1' ,JG!3,&.83 5(67'*1')73,&.83
5(67'*1')7 '(/$<
%/2&. )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
5(67'*1')75(6(7
2II 581 5(67'*1')73.3
'(/$<
,*![3,&.83 $1' 5(67'*1')7'32
W 3.3 5(67'*1')723
6(77,1* W 567
5(67'*1')7 6(77,1*
6285&(
5(67'*1')7
,* 6/23(
,1 'LIIHUHQWLDO 581
DQG
,B
5HVWUDLQLQJ
,B &XUUHQWV
,JG х6/23([ _,JU_
,B $&78$/9$/8(6
5*),JG0DJ
5*),JU0DJ
$FGU
The following examples explain how the restraining signal is created for maximum sensitivity and security. These examples
clarify the operating principle and provide guidance for testing of the element. 5
Example 1: External single-line-to-ground fault
Given the following inputs: IA = 1 pu ∠0°, IB = 0, IC = 0, and IG = 1 pu ∠180°
The relay calculates the following values:
1 1 1e3
Igd = 0, IR0 = abs §© 3 u -- – – 1 ·¹ = 2 pu , IR2 = 3 u -- = 1 pu , IR1 = --------- = 0.042 pu , and Igr = 2 pu
3 3 8
The restraining signal is twice the fault current. This gives extra margin if the phase or neutral CT saturates.
Example 2: External high-current SLG fault

Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu ∠0°, IB = 0, IC = 0, and IG = 10 pu ∠–180°
§ 1 10 10 10
Igd = 0, IR0 = abs © 3 u -- – – 10 · = 20 pu , IR2 = 3 u ----- = 10 pu , IR1 = 3 u § ----- – -----· = 0 , and Igr = 20 pu
3 ¹ 3 ©3 3¹
Example 3: External high-current three-phase symmetrical fault

Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu ∠0°, IB = 10 pu ∠–120°, IC = 10 pu ∠120°, and IG = 0 pu
10
Igd = 0, IR0 = abs 3 u 0 – 0 = 0 pu , IR2 = 3 u 0 = 0 pu , IR1 = 3 u § ----- – 0· = 10 pu , and Igr = 10 pu
©3 ¹

CONTROL ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Example 4: Internal low-current single-line-to-ground fault under full load

Given the following inputs: IA = 1.10 pu ∠0°, IB = 1.0 pu ∠–120°, IC = 1.0 pu ∠120°, and IG = 0.05 pu ∠0°
I_0 = 0.033 pu ∠0°, I_2 = 0.033 pu ∠0°, and I_1 = 1.033 pu ∠0°
Igd = abs(3 × 0.0333 + 0.05) = 0.15 pu, IR0 = abs(3 × 0.033 – (0.05)) = 0.05 pu, IR2 = 3 × 0.033 = 0.10 pu,
IR1 = 1.033 / 8 = 0.1292 pu, and Igr = 0.1292 pu
Despite very low fault current level, the differential current is above 100% of the restraining current.
5.9 Control elements

5.9.1 Overview
Control elements are used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of
this chapter for information.
5.9.2 Trip bus

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  TRIP BUS  TRIP BUS 1(6)
 TRIP BUS 1 TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled
5  TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:

Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 RESET Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

 DELAY: 0.00 s
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

 LATCHING: Disabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
TRIP BUS 1: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning
them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning
such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista software under Settings > Protection
Summary. Navigate to a specific protection or control protection element and check the bus box by hovering over the
blank check box and selecting an option that displays. Once the required element is selected for a specific bus, a list of
element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is
required, it can be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-144: Trip bus fields in the protection summary
The following settings are available.

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK — The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is used.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. Set the time delay long enough to
allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action. 5
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 — These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip
bus.
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING — This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when lockout is
required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET — The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the RESET
OP operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command from the front panel interface or via
communications resets the trip bus output.

Figure 5-145: Trip bus logic

SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
DELAY
= Off Non-volatile,
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
OR set-dominant
***
DELAY
AND S TPKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 TRIP BUS 1 OP
Latch
= Off TRST
R
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FUNCTION
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK AND
= Off
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP 842023A1.CDR
5 5.9.3 Setting groups

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS
 SETTING GROUPS SETTING GROUPS Range: Disabled, Enabled
Control Mode: Range: Local, IEC61850 Client

 Local
SETTING GROUPS BLK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
GROUP 1 NAME: Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters



GROUP 6 NAME: Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

SETTING GROUP Range: Disabled, Enabled
The setting groups menu controls the activation and deactivation of up to six groups of settings in the GROUPED ELEMENTS
settings menu. The active setting group can be indicated on the front display of the T35 by configuring User-
Programmable LEDs to display the state of the SETTING GROUP ACT FlexLogic operands.
On a setting group change, protection elements are blocked temporarily to allow the relay to re-initialize with the new
settings. The duration of the block depends on relay configuration and can last up to four cycles. The actual block duration
on the group switching can be verified by the PROTSUPV operand.

SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION — When Enabled, allows setting groups other than group 1 (the default active group) to be
activated. When Disabled, the default setting group is forced active. When changed from Disabled to Enabled, it resets the
active setting group to 1 independent of the Control Mode setting.
Control Mode — This setting displays when IEC 61850 is used by the T35. It selects the active setting group selection control
mode. When set to "Local," active setting group selection is based on the FlexLogic operand states selected by GROUP
ACTIVATE ON settings and the SelectActiveSG request from an IEC 61850 client generates a negative response. When set to
"IEC61850 Client," the SelectActiveSG request from an IEC 61850 client selects the active setting group and the FlexLogic
operand states of the GROUP ACTIVATE ON settings are ignored/not used.
The logic diagram shows the active setting group selection behavior based on the Control Mode setting.
When the Control Mode is "Local," the priority scheme makes active the highest numbered group selected by the GROUP
ACTIVATE ON settings. The most recent active group selection is preserved while the T35 is powered down or reset.
When the Control Mode is "IEC61850 Client," the SelectActiveSG selection has an initial value that can be set on a CID file
download by the IEC 61850 setting Initial Setting Group. See the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850
protocol > Setting Groups section earlier for details. The most recent SelectActiveSG selection is preserved while the T35 is
powered down or reset. If it becomes necessary to cancel the SelectActiveSG selection without using a SelectActiveSG
service request, change the SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION setting to Disabled. This resets the SelectActiveSG selection to 1.
When the Control Mode is changed, the current active setting group selection is preserved.
Figure 5-146: Logic diagram for Control Mode setting
SETT ING
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION
= Enabled
5
SETT ING
SETTING GROUPS BLK
= Off AND RUN
Priority Scheme
SETT ING
Group # Activate On
= FlexLogic operand
SETT ING Local Setting Group

S
Control M ode A
Active setting group
= Local / IEC61850 Client
se lection
IEC 61850 Client
AND RUN
IEC 61850 SG
se rvice processing
<MasterLD>/LLN0.ActSG
From IEC 61850 client 859788A1.vsd
Active setting group selection can be made either by IEC 61850 MMS SelectActiveSG service or Local by the
FlexLogic operand states selected by GROUP # ACTIVATE ON settings. Simultaneous setting group control is not
permissible.
SETTING GROUPS BLK — Prevents the active setting group from changing when the selected FlexLogic operand is "On." This
can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as during a
control sequence.
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON to GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON — Selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, makes the particular setting
group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time — the
highest-numbered group that is activated by its ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups.
There is no activate on setting for group 1 (the default active group), because group 1 automatically becomes active if no
other group is active.

The settings are read-only with default values when the Control Mode setting is set to "IEC61850 Client."
A setting group selection can also be made by the IEC 61850 MMS service SelectActiveSG to the control block @Master/
LLN0.SGCB. An active group selection can be done either by SelectActiveSG service from a IEC 61850 client or by GROUP
ACTIVATE ON settings, but mixed operation is not allowed.
An initial setting group value is initialized to the GROUP ACTIVATE ON setting value on T35 reboot immediately following the
receipt of a valid CID file.
SETTING GROUP 1 NAME to SETTING GROUP 6 NAME — Allows the user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups.
Once programmed, this name appears on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUP 1(6) menu display.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the following figure) illustrates requests via remote communications
(for example, VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ON) or from a local contact input (for example, CONTACT IP 1 ON) to initiate the use of
a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the
particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular
settings group.
Figure 5-147: Example of FlexLogic control of a setting group
9,57,321 9,
25
&217,321 +$
25
$1' 9,5723 92
3+$6(72&3.3
127
5
3+$6(72&3.3
127
$1'
9,5723 92
(1'
$&'5
5.9.4 Selector switch

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH  SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
 SELECTOR SWITCH 1 SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
  Disabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1

 RANGE: 7
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1

 5.0 s
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

 MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 ACK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off


 Off

 Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

 MODE: Time-out
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore

 MODE: Restore
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

 Self-reset
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows
setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after
time-out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile
memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word
(user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input
being out of range.
5
A selector switch runs every two power cycles.
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE — This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available
positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct three-bit control
word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the
range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the
SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT — This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the
following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out,” the setting specifies the required period of inactivity
of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is
“Acknowledge,” the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by
any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT timer expires;
otherwise, the change does not take place and an alarm is set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP — This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at
each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to
the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each rising
edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG INITIATED target
message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH
MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out (“Time-out” mode), or when the
acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode). When the new position is applied, the
relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is
configured as the stepping up control input.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE — This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out,” the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge,” the selector
changes its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging
signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is
established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for three seconds.

SELECTOR 1 ACK — This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected position
is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of operation.
The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of
the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2 — These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2 A1 A0 Position
0 0 0 rest
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7
The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the three-
bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out,” the pre-selected position is applied in
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Acknowledge,”
the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-out
mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
5 SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE — This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out,” the selector changes
its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require
explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge,” the selector changes its position only
after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined
period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM
FlexLogic operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK — This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-
OUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-bit
control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE — This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to “Restore,” the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the
relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm
is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
When set to “Synchronize,” the selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range), then the selector
switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch attempts to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The “Synch/
Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant
(two relay) protection schemes.

SELECTOR 1 EVENTS — If enabled, the following events are logged:
Event name Description

SELECTOR 1 POS Z Selector 1 changed its position to Z
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the
time out
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time
out
The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.

Figure 5-148: Time-out mode
TIME OUT MODE OF OPERATION
pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with a changed to 7 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input pushbutton a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T T
POS 1
POS 2
5 POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR

Figure 5-149: Acknowledge mode
ACKNOWLEDGE MODE OF OPERATION
pre-existing changed to 4 with changed to 1 with changed to 2 with

position 2 a pushbutton a 3-bit input a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
5
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Application example
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group is to be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group is to be applied automatically after five seconds of inactivity of
the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it is to synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.

Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS menu:
FUNCTION: “Enabled”
Block: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2"
GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH 
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled”
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
5 OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The figure shows the logic for the selector switch.

Figure 5-150: Selector switch logic
6(77,1*6
6(/(&725)8//5$1*(
6(/(&72567(38302'(
6(/(&725%,702'(
6(/(&7257,0(287 $&78$/9$/8(
6(77,1*6
6(/(&725326,7,21
6(/(&725)81&7,21 6(/(&72532:(58302'(
(QDEOHG 581
6(/(&72567(383 )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
2II VWHSXS 6(/(&725326

6(/(&725$&. 6(/(&725326

2II DFNQRZOHGJH 6(/(&725326
6(/(&725%,7$
6(/(&725326
WKUHHELWFRQWUROLQSXW
2II 6(/(&725326
21
6(/(&725%,7$
6(/(&725326
2II
6(/(&725326
6(/(&725%,7$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
6(/(&725%,7$&.
6(/(&725673$/$50
2II ELWDFNQRZOHGJH
6(/(&725%,7$/$50
ELWSRVLWLRQRXW
25
6(/(&725$/$50
6(/(&7253:5$/$50
6(/(&725%,7
6(/(&725%,7
6(/(&725%,7
$&'5
5
5.9.5 Underfrequency (ANSI 81U)
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  UNDERFREQUENCY  UNDERFREQUENCY 1(6)
 UNDERFREQUENCY 1 UNDFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
  Disabled
UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6

 SRC 1
UNDERFREQ 1 MIN Range: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

 VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP: Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

 59.50 Hz
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 2.000 s
UNDERFREQ 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 2.000 s
UNDERFREQ 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

 Self-reset
UNDERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated power
and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit or the isolation of part of
the system from the rest of the system, the effect is a reduction in frequency. If the control systems of the system

generators do not respond fast enough, the system can collapse. A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between
load and generation is to automatically disconnect selected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique,
called “load-shedding,” maintains system integrity and minimize widespread outages. After the frequency returns to
normal, the load can be restored automatically or manually.
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE — This setting is used to select the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for
a live phase voltage available from the selected source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase
current. If neither voltage nor current is available, the element does not operate, as it does not measure a parameter below
the minimum voltage/current setting.
UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP — Selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfrequency
element to operate. This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure.
UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP — Selects the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system
frequency is 60 Hz and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting is 59.50 Hz.
Figure 5-151: Underfrequency logic
SETTING
UNDERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTING SETTING SETTING

UNDERFREQ 1 UNDERFREQ 1
UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK: PICKUP : PICKUP DELAY :
AND RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off = 0 UNDERFREQ 1
UNDERFREQ 1 PKP
RESET DELAY :
SETTING UNDERFREQ 1 DPO
SETTING tPKP
UNDERFREQ 1 0 < f < PICKUP tRST UNDERFREQ 1 OP
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE: ACTUAL VALUES MIN VOLT / AMP:
Level < Min
VOLT / AMP 827079A9.CDR
Frequency
5
5.9.6 Digital elements
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(96)
 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

 Dig Element 1
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 0.000 s
DIG ELEM 1 RESET Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 0.000 s
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 PICKUP LED: Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled


Digital elements run once per power system cycle.

As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block signal with a duration less than one power system
cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to one power system cycle later than the pickup
and reset delay settings indicate.
Do not use digital elements with transient signals, such as communications commands. Do not use digital elements
where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.
There are 96 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 96. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include a name to be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand,
and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT — Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY — Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a pickup delay
is not required, set to "0," To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY — Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0.”
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED — This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to “Disabled,” the
operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
Figure 5-152: Digital element logic
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION: SETTINGS
Enabled = 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
SETTING
5
PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING
NAME: RESET DELAY: DIG ELEM 01 DPO
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
AND RUN tPKP
INPUT: DIG ELEM 01 PKP
Off = 0 DIG ELEM 01 OP
INPUT = 1 tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827042A2.VSD
Circuit monitoring applications

Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts.
The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the Cont
Op 1 VOn FlexLogic operand is set (for contact input 1—corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If the
output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current drops below the threshold and the
Cont Op 1 VOff FlexLogic operand is set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the
integrity of the circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.
Example 1: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring

In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so that problems can be detected before a trip
operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output
contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high
resistance, the trickle current falls below the monitor threshold, and an alarm is declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact that is open when the
breaker is open (see figure). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the
breaker position.

Figure 5-153: Trip circuit example 1

UR-series device
with form-A contacts
H1a
I
H1b DC–
V DC+
H1c 52a Trip coil
I = current monitor
V = voltage monitor 827073A2.CDR
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output is given an ID name; for
example, “Cont Op 1." Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H5a to monitor breaker status.
Using the contact input settings, this input is given an ID name, for example, “Cont Ip 1," and is set “On” when the breaker is
closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated (EnerVista example shown).

Example 2: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring

If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the
following figure). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off.” In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista example shown).
Figure 5-154: Trip circuit example 2

UR-series device
5
with form-A contacts
Values for resistor “R”

H1a
Power supply Resistance Power
I
24 V DC 1000 O 2W
H1b DC– 30 V DC 5000 O 2W
48 V DC 10000 O 2W
V DC+
110 V DC 25000 O 5W
H1c 52a Trip coil
125 V DC 25000 O 5W
R
250 V DC 50000 O 5W
Bypass
I = current monitor resistor
V = voltage monitor 827074A3.CDR
The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and
solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
5.9.7 Digital counters

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  COUNTER 1(8)
 COUNTER 1 COUNTER 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
COUNTER 1 NAME: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

 Counter 1
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Range: up to six alphanumeric characters


COUNTER 1 PRESET: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
 0

COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

 0
COUNTER 1 UP: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
COUNTER 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
There are eight identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions
from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of
an external contact (for example, breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
COUNTER 1 UNITS — Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The
units label appears in the corresponding actual values status.
COUNTER 1 PRESET — Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a
5 substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE — Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set value.
COUNTER 1 UP — Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the
accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter rolls over to –2,147,483,648.
COUNTER 1 DOWN — Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter rolls over to +2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 BLOCK — Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.
CNT1 SET TO PRESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter sets to the
preset value in the following situations:
• When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and
CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter sets to 0)
• When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO PRESET
changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count)
• When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1
(when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 0, the
counter sets to 0)
COUNTER 1 RESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending on the
state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a
separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0.”
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT — Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a
separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and
captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted,
the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power-down operation.

Figure 5-155: Digital counter logic

SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1 SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
SETTING AND COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
COUNTER 1 UP:
RUN
Off = 0 SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: OPERANDS
SETTING
CALCULATE Count more than Comp. COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Count equal to Comp.
VALUE COUNTER 1 EQL
Off = 0 Count less than Comp. COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
SET TO PRESET VALUE
Off = 0
SET TO ZERO
SETTING ACTUAL VALUE
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
OR
Off = 0
AND
SETTING AND ACTUAL VALUE

COUNTER 1 RESET:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
Off = 0 OR
STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
SETTING
5
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
827065A4.VSD
5.9.8 Monitoring elements
5.9.8.1 Menu
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS
 MONITORING  BREAKER 1 See below
 ELEMENTS   ARCING CURRENT

 BREAKER 6
  ARCING CURRENT
 CT FAILURE See page 5-319

  DETECTOR 1

 CT FAILURE
  DETECTOR 6
 THERMAL OVERLOAD See page 5-320

  PROTECTION
 TRANSFORMER THRU See page 5-324

  FAULT MONITORING
 HARMONIC See page 5-328

  DETECTION

5.9.8.2 Breaker arcing current

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  BREAKER 1(6) ARCING CURRENT
 BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Disabled, Enabled
 ARCING CURRENT  FUNCTION: Disabled
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE: SRC 1
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-C: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 0.000 s
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT: Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1

 1000 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 INTERRUPTION Range: 0.0 to 100.0 kA in steps of 0.1

 RATING: 31.5 kA
BKR 1 CLR ARC AMPS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
5  BKR 1 ARC AMP

TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
BKR 1 ARC AMP Range: Disabled, Enabled

There is one breaker arcing current element available per CT bank, with a minimum of two elements.
This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the
current squared passing through the breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals
for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay
can set an output operand to “1.” The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays, and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, measure the interval between change-of-
state of the operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation for the specific installation. Integration of the measured current
continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
The feature is programmed to perform fault duration calculations. Fault duration is defined as a time between operation of
the disturbance detector occurring before initiation of this feature, and reset of an internal low-set overcurrent function.
Correction is implemented to account for a non-zero reset time of the overcurrent function.
Breaker arcing currents and fault duration values are available under the ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  MAINTENANCE 
BREAKER 1(6) menus.
BKR 1 ARC AMP INT-A(C) — Select the same output operands that are configured to operate the output relays used to trip the
breaker. In three-pole tripping applications, configure the same operand to initiate arcing current calculations for poles A,
B, and C of the breaker. In single-pole tripping applications, configure per-pole tripping operands to initiate the calculations
for the poles that are actually tripped.
BKR 1 ARC AMP DELAY — This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence is
initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT — Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.

BKR 1 CLR ARC AMPS — Selects a FlexLogic Operand to clear the accumulated I2t values (kA2-cycle), reset fault duration
items (breaker operating time), clear ARCING AMPS (kA2-cycle) and AMP MAX (kA) values of the last event.
BKR 1 INTERUPTION RATING — This setting specifies the maximum symmetrical interruption rating of the circuit breaker.
Figure 5-156: Arcing current measurement

Breaker
Contacts Arc
Initiate Part Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kA cycle)
Programmable
Start Delay 100 ms
Start Stop
Integration Integration
827792A1.CDR

5
5-318
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING SETTING

AMP FUNCTION :
AND BREAKER 1 ARCING
Enabled = 1
AMP DELAY :
100ms
SETTING OR 0
CONTROL ELEMENTS
AND 0
BREAKER 1 ARCING AND
AMP BLOCK :
Off = 0
SETTING
AND BREAKER 1 ARCING

SETTINGS
AMP DELAY :
100ms
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT - A: OR 0
0
Off = 0 AND
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT - B:
Off = 0
BREAKER 1 ARCING SETTING ACTUAL VALUES
AMP INIT - C :
AND BREAKER 1 ARCING BKR 1 AMP MAX FA
Off = 0 AMP DELAY: BKR 1 AMP MAX FB
100 ms
BKR 1 AMP MAX FC
OR 0 CALCULATE CALCULATE
0 SETTING
AND OR RUN Interruption Rating
Select greatest FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
value RUN
Imax > Interruption Rating BKR ARC 1 MAX OP
BKR ARC 1 MAX DPO
Calculate Imax
RUN
SETTING Integrate
BREAKER 1 ARCING Add to SETTING
AMP SOURCE : RUN Accumulator BREAKER 1 ARCING
IA IA 2 - Cycle AMP LIMIT : FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Select
2
Figure 5-157: Breaker arcing current logic
IB Integrate IB 2 - Cycle Highest KA * Cycle Limit BKR 1 ARC OP

IC IC 2 - Cycle Value BKR 1 ARC DPO
RUN
COMMAND
CLEAR BREAKER 1 Integrate ACTUAL VALUE

ARCING AMPS :
Set All To Zero BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP FA
NO = 0
BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP FB
YES = 1
OR BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP FC
SETTING BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FA
BKR 1 CLR ARC AMPS BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FB
Off=0
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME FC
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME .
ACTUAL VALUES
BKR 1 ARCING AMP FA
BKR 1 ARCING AMP FB
BKR 1 ARCING AMP FC
827071A5CDR

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.9.8.3 CT failure detector

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  CT FAILURE DETECTOR 1(6)
 CT FAILURE CT FAIL 1 FUNCTION: Range: Disabled, Enabled
 DETECTOR 1  Disabled
CT FAIL 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 1: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SRC 1
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 1 Range: 0.1 to 2.0 pu in steps of 0.1

 PKP: 0.2 pu
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 2: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SRC 2
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INP 2 Range: 0.1 to 2.0 pu in steps of 0.1

 PKP: 0.2 pu
CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT: Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SRC 1
CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT Range: 0.04 to 2.00 pu in steps of 0.01

 PKP: 0.20 pu
CT FAIL 1 PICKUP Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

 DELAY: 1.000 s
CT FAIL 1 TARGET: Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

 Self-reset
 CT FAIL 1 EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

5
Disabled
The CT failure function detects problems with system current transformers used to supply current to the relay. This logic
detects the presence of a zero-sequence current at the supervised source of current without a simultaneous zero-
sequence current at another source, zero-sequence voltage, or some protection element condition.
The CT failure logic (see later) is based on the presence of the zero-sequence current in the supervised CT source and the
absence of one of three or all of the three following conditions:
• Zero-sequence current at different source current (can be different set of CTs or different CT core of the same CT)
• Zero-sequence voltage at the assigned source
• Appropriate protection element or remote signal
Settings are described as follows.
CT FAIL 1 FUNCTION — Enables or disables operation of the CT failure element.
CT FAIL 1 BLOCK — Selects a FlexLogic operand to block operation of the element during some condition (for example, an
open pole in process of the single pole tripping-reclosing). Local signals or remote signals representing operation of some
remote current protection elements via communication channels can also be chosen.
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 1 — Selects the current source for input 1. The most critical protection element should also be assigned
to the same source.
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 1 PICKUP — Selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 1 (the main supervised CT source).
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 2 — Selects the current source for input 2. Input 2 should use a different set of CTs or a different CT core
of the same CT. If 3I_0 does not exist at source 2, then a CT failure is declared.
CT FAIL 1 3I0 INPUT 2 PICKUP — Selects the 3I_0 pickup value for input 2 (different CT input) of the relay.
CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT — Selects the voltage source.
CT FAIL 1 3V0 INPUT PICKUP — Specifies the pickup value for the 3V_0 source.
CT FAIL 1 PICKUP DELAY — Specifies the pickup delay of the CT failure element.

Figure 5-158: CT failure detector logic
6(77,1*
&7)$,/)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
6(77,1*
&7)$,/%/2&.
2II 6(77,1*
6(77,1* 6(77,1* &7)$,/3,&.83'(/$<

)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'6
&7)$,/,2,1387 &7)$,/,2,13873.3 $1' &7)$,/23
65& 581 ,2!3,&.83
&7)$,/3.3
6(77,1* 6(77,1*
&7)$,/,2,1387 &7)$,/,2,13873.3
65& 581 ,2!3,&.83
6(77,1* 6(77,1*
25
&7)$,/92,1387 &7)$,/92,1387
65& 581 92!3,&.83 $&'5
5 5.9.8.4 Thermal overload protection

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION  THERMAL
PROTECTION 1(4)
 THERMAL THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
 PROTECTION 1  FUNCTION: Disabled
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6

 SOURCE: SRC1
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: 3-Phase, 1-Phase

 MODE: 3-PHASE
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: 0.20 to 3.00 pu in steps of 0.01

 BASE CURR: 0.80 pu
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: 0.20 to 4.00 in steps of 0.05

 k FACTOR: 1.10
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: 0.2 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.1

 ALARM LEVEL: 0.5 pu
THERM PROT 1 TRIP Range: 0.0 to 999.0 minutes in steps of 0.1

 TIME CONST: 45.0 min
THERM PROT 1 RESET Range: 0.0 to 999.0 minutes in steps of 0.1

 TIME CONST: 45.0 min
THERM PROT 1 MINIM Range: 0.0 to 999.0 minutes in steps of 0.1

 RESET TIME: 20.0 min
THERM PROT 1 RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
THERM PROT 1 BLOCK: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off

THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

THERMAL PROTECTION 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

The thermal overload protection element corresponds to the IEC 255-8 standard and is used to detect thermal overload
conditions in protected power system elements. Choosing an appropriate time constant element can be used to protect
different elements of the power system.
The cold curve characteristic is applied when the estimated Ip current is less than 10% of the base current. If Ip current is
greater or equal than 10% than the base current, then the hot curve characteristic is applied. The Ip current is estimated
with a fixed time constant for both cooling and heating that reaches to the final value in two seconds on a step change
(either step up or step down) signal.
The IEC255-8 cold curve is defined as follows:
§ 2 ·
I
t op = W op u ln ¨ ---------------------------
2
-¸
2 Eq. 5-47
© I – k u IB ¹
The IEC255-8 hot curve is defined as follows:
2 2
§ I – Ip ·
t op = W op u ln ¨ ---------------------------
-¸ Eq. 5-48
© I 2 – k u I B 2¹
where
top = time to operate
τop = thermal protection trip time constant 5
I = measured overload RMS current
Ip = measured load RMS current before overload occurs
k = IEC 255-8 k-factor applied to IB, defining maximum permissible current above nominal current. A typical value range for
this k factor is 1.0 to 1.5 per the standard.
IB = protected element base (nominal) current
To ensure element accuracy for high overcurrent conditions, the maximum value of I/(k x IB) is limited to 8, even when
realistically it is exceeding this value.
The reset time of the thermal overload protection element is also time delayed using following formula:
2
§ k u IB ·
t rst = W rst u ln ¨ ------------------------------
-¸ + T min
2
© I – k u IB ¹ 2 Eq. 5-49
where
τrst = thermal protection trip time constant
Tmin = a minimum reset time setting

Figure 5-159: IEC 255-8 sample operate and reset curves

100
Tmin = 10
10
τrst = 30
τop = 30
t (min)
5
0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
I / Ipkp
827724A1.CDR
The thermal overload protection element estimates accumulated thermal energy E using the following equations
calculated each power cycle. When current is greater than the pickup level, In > k × IB, element starts increasing the
thermal energy:
't
E n = E n – 1 + --------------
t op In Eq. 5-50
When current is less than the dropout level, In > 0.97 × k × IB, the element starts decreasing the thermal energy:
't
E n = E n – 1 – -------------- Eq. 5-51
t rst In
where
∆t is the power cycle duration
n is the power cycle index
top(In) is the trip time calculated at index n as per the IEC255-8 cold curve or hot curve equations
trst(In) is the reset time calculated at index n as per the reset time equation

In is the measured overload RMS current at index n

En is the accumulated energy at index n
En – 1 is the accumulated energy at index n – 1
The thermal overload protection element removes the THERMAL PROT 1 OP and THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM output
operand when E < 0.05. In case of emergency, the thermal memory and as a result THERMAL PROT 1 OP and
THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM output operands can be reset using THERM PROT 1 RESET setting.
The calculations are performed per the selected mode (three-phase or single-phase). For three-phase, calculations are
performed per phase. If the accumulated energy reaches value 1 pu in any phase, the thermal overload protection
element operates and only resets when energy is less than 0.05 in all three phases. The THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM
operand asserts if accumulated energy reaches the selected THERMAL PROTECTION 1 ALARM LEVEL setting in any phase an
resets only when energy is below 0.05 in all three phases.
In single-phase mode, the thermal energy of only the ground channel IG of the assigned source is accumulated.
Table 5-36: Typical time constants

Protected equipment Time constant Minimum reset time
Capacitor bank 10 minutes 30 minutes
Overhead line 10 minutes 20 minutes
Air-core reactor 40 minutes 30 minutes
Busbar 60 minutes 20 minutes
Underground cable 20 to 60 minutes 60 minutes
The figure shows the logic for the thermal overload protection element.
Figure 5-160: Thermal overload protection logic 5
SETTINGS
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
THERM PROT 1 BLOCK:

Off = 0 THERMAL PROT 1 PKP
SETTINGS
THERMAL PROTECTION 1
MODE: SETTINGS
AND
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1

SETTINGS BASE CURR: ALARM LEVEL:
S FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERMAL PROTECTION 1 THERM PROT 1 TRIP LATCH THERMAL PROT 1 ALARM
SOURCE: k FACTOR: TIME CONST:
IA RMS IA > k * Ib R
RUN
IB RMS IB > k * Ib E =>ALRM Reset dominant
OR
IC RMS IC > k * Ib FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

IG RMS IG > k * Ib S
E =>1 THERMAL PROT 1 OP
LATCH
R
Reset dominant
LOAD CURRENT ES TIMATION

THERM PROT 1 RESET
IApn
IBpn TIME CONST:
ICpn THERM PROT 1 MINIM
IGp n RESET TIME:
RUN
SETTINGS
E < 0.05
THERM PROT 1 RESET:
Off = 0 Reset E to 0
827014A1.vsdx

5.9.8.5 Through-fault monitoring

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  TRANSFORMER THRU FAULT MONITORING 
THROUGH FAULT MONITORING 1(3)
 THROUGH FAULT THROUGH FAULT MON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
 MONITORING 1  FUNCTION: Disabled
THROUGH FAULT MON 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6
 SOURCE 1: SRC1
THROUGH FAULT MON 1 Range: None, SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC
 SOURCE 2: None 6
THRU FLT MON 1 CT Range: None, SQRT 3

 COMPENSATION: None
THRU FLT MON 1 WINDG Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 in steps of 0.001

 RATED MVA: 100.000
THRU FLT MON 1 WINDG Range: 0.001 to 2000.000 in steps of 0.001

 NOMФ-Ф KV: 220.000
THROUGH FAULT MON 1 Range: I, II, III, IV

 WINDING CATEGORY: IV
THRU FLT MON 1 MAX Range: 2.50 to 25.00 pu in steps of 0.01

 FLT CUR: 10.00 pu
THRU FLT MON 1 FREQ Range: 0.10 to 5.00 pu in steps of 0.01

 FLT LEVEL: 0.50 pu
5  THRU FLT MON 1 TOTAL

ACC MAX: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.100 to 10.000 pu in steps of 0.001
THRU FLT MON 1 FAULT Range: 1 to 2000 in steps of 1

 COUNTER MAX: 500
THRU FLT MON 1 CLR: Range: Off, FlexLogic operand

 Off
THRU FLT MON 1 BLK: Range: Off, FlexLogic operand

 Off
THROUGH FAULT MON 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

THROUGH FAULT MON 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element monitors external faults passing through the transformer. During each detected through-fault event at each
execution (twice per cycle), the thermal/mechanical damage in per-unit of the withstand limits provided by IEEE C57.109-
2018 and IEEE C57.12.59-2015 is calculated. For each event, these executions are added up and eventually each event's
damage is added to a total cumulated thermal/mechanical damage quantity.
The per phase total damage quantities are available as actual values and FlexAnalog quantities. Moreover, per phase
through-fault counters, last five through-fault events' start date, time, duration, thermal/mechanical damage, and max
RMS current per phase are available as actual values. The user-programmable fault report (available under the Settings >
Product Setup menu) can be used to generate reports when each new through-fault event happens. For this purpose, use
the THRU FLT x EVE START FlexLogic operand as a pre-fault trigger and THRU FLT x EVE END as a fault trigger. Select
analog channels for the fault report using THRU FLT x TOT ACC A, THRU FLT x TOT ACC B, and THRU FLT x TOT
ACC C.
THROUGH FAULT MON 1 SOURCE 1 — Selects the current signal source for the winding to be monitored.
THROUGH FAULT MON 1 SOURCE 2 — Specifies the second source for configurations where two CTs are feeding the
transformer winding, such as breaker and half configuration. When a CT bank is assigned for this second source, the
summation of source 1 and source 2 currents are used by the element.

The preferred method is to use Source to sum two breaker currents and use just one input to this element. Only assign two
separate sources to this element using this setting when Source summation is not possible because it can experience
some inaccuracy in RMS calculation, especially if fault current has significant amount of harmonics.
THRU FLT MON 1 CT COMPENSATION — Select "None" when the currents measured by the relay are true winding currents.
Selecting SQRT 3 divides the CT current by SQRT(3). This provides the required current compensation when the relay
measures line currents from a delta connected winding with wye connected CTs or when there is an external phase
compensation with interposing CTs for wye transformer winding with delta connected CTs.
THRU FLT MON 1 WINDG RATED MVA — Defines the three phase self-cooled MVA of the monitored winding, for calculation of
normal base current by the element.
THRU FLT MON 1 WINDG NOM Ф-Ф KV — Defines the rated phase to phase voltage of the winding in kilovolts, for calculation of
normal base current by the element.
THRU FLT MON 1 WINDING CATEGORY — Select the monitored winding category as per the table.
Category Single phase (kVA) Three-phase (kVA)

I 1 - 500 15 -500
II 501 - 1667 501 - 5000
III 1668 - 10000 5001 - 30000
IV Above 10000 Above 30000
The minimum kVA for single phase Category I liquid immersed transformers is 5 kVA. Category IV applies only to liquid
immersed transformers.
THRU FLT MON 1 MAX FLT CUR — This setting defines the maximum symmetrical fault current in pu of the base current.
For transformers of category II and above, when measured symmetrical through fault current is closer to this maximum
fault value, the element changes the damage limit to worst-case mechanical duty (see the Theory of Operation chapter for
details). This duty is 2 seconds at maximum possible fault current.
5
For category I transformers this setting does not impact the element operation.
For category II, III, and IV transformers, this value can be selected equal to inverse of the transformer per unit short-circuit
impedance. For example, for a transformer short-circuit impedance of 12% (0.12 pu) the maximum fault current is 1/0.12 =
8.33 pu. For maximum symmetrical fault currents greater than 25 pu, select 25 pu.
When the transformer is category III or IV, system impedance (in per unit of the specified winding ratings base) is
suggested to be added to the transformer impedance for maximum symmetrical short-circuit current calculation.
THRU FLT MON 1 FREQ FLT LEVEL — For category II and III transformers, the distinguishing factor for considering thermal/
mechanical damage limits (rather than only thermal) is whether the winding is subjected to frequent occurring faults.
Because effects are cumulative over the life of the transformer, this setting provides the option to define a threshold for the
Total Thermal/Mechanical damage as a measure of this fault exposure. Meaning that when THRU FLT 1 TOT ACC (for a
corresponding phase) is below this threshold, only the thermal damage curve is applied, and when above this threshold,
thermal/mechanical damage curves apply.
For category I and IV transformers, this setting does not impact the element operation.
THRU FLT MON 1 TOTAL ACC MAX — This setting defines the cumulative thermal/mechanical damage threshold beyond
which the THRU FLT 1 ACC OP operand of the corresponding phase asserts.
The Thermal/Mechanical damage limit curves are provided by IEEE Std C57. 109-2018 and IEEE Std C57. 12. 59 -
2015 as a uniform minimum standard for withstand capability. Select settings higher than 1 pu only if the
transformer manufacturer confirms higher cumulated thermal/mechanical damage withstand.
If the transformer was protected by another relay before, reduce this threshold proportional to the previous cumulated
damage. For example, if total cumulated damage was 0.3 pu and your setting was 1.0 pu, for the new relay select your
threshold as 0.7 pu.

THRU FLT MON 1 FAULT COUNTER MAX — This setting defines a threshold for the number of detected through-faults per
phase. If the number of faults exceed this threshold, the corresponding phase THRU FLT 1 CNT OP operand asserts.
If the transformer was protected by another relay before, reduce this threshold proportional to the previous relay fault
counter. For example, if maximum faults among the phases is 50 and setting was 500, then select your new relay setting
as 450.
THRU FLT MON 1 CLR — Because records of this element are stored in non-volatile memory, this setting selects a FlexLogic
operand to clear all records of this element and reset all of its operands.
The CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS command does not clear this element's records. Only the selected FlexLogic operand of
the setting can do that.
THRU FAULT MON 1 BLK — Selects a FlexLogic operand to inhibit inclusion of inrush currents and internal transformer faults
as transformer through-faults.

Figure 5-161: Through-fault monitoring logic
Lines not connected show

that for Phase B and
Phase C there is similar
logic

5.9.8.6 Harmonic detection

SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  MONITORING ELEMENTS  HARMONIC DETECTION  HARMONIC DET 1(6)
 HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
HARMONIC DET 1 Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4, SRC 5, SRC 6

 SOURCE: SRC 1
HARMONIC DET 1 Range: DC, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, THD

 HARMONIC: 2nd
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN Range: 0.1 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.01

 PHS CUR: 0.2 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX Range: 1.0 to 30 pu in steps of 0.01

 PHS CUR: 5.0 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 PHASE Range: ANY ONE, ANY TWO, ALL THREE, AVERAGE
 FOR OPER: ANY ONE
HARMONIC DET 1 PHS Range: 2.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1

 PICKUP: 20%
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN Range: 0.1 to 1.0 pu in steps of 0.01

 GND CUR: 0.2 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX Range: 1.0 to 30 pu in steps of 0.01

 GND CUR: 1.0 pu
HARMONIC DET 1 GND Range: 0.1 to 100% in steps of 0.1

 PICKUP: 20%
5 HARMONIC DET 1 PKP Range: 0.00 to 600 s in steps of 0.01
 DELAY: 0 s
HARMONIC DET 1 BLK: Range: Off, On, FlexLogic operand

 Off
HARMONIC DET 1 Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

HARMONIC DET 1: Range: Disabled, Enabled

Transformer energization, voltage recovery following a clearance of external faults, startup or shutdown of generators
connected to transformers, or following a load injection can cause excessive magnetizing inrush current. The nature of the
magnetizing inrush current contains significant harmonics. The fundamental magnitude of this magnetizing inrush current
can be several times of the rated transformer overload current. Depending on the sensitivity of the feeder or line
overcurrent protection elements, magnetizing inrush current can cause an undesired operation on these overcurrent
protection elements.
In addition, DC offset can cause saturation in current transformers as well as in the input current transformers of
protective relays and can also result in undesired operation on some sensitive protection elements, such as differential
protection, restricted earth fault protection, or sequence overcurrent protection elements.
The Harmonic Detection element monitors one of the selected quantities, including DC offset, 2nd to 5th harmonic, or Total
Harmonics Distortion (THD), that are present in the phase currents and ground current. It adds delay or blocking to prevent
undesired operation. Harmonics are calculated and presented as a percent value relative to the fundamental frequency
phasor magnitude.
When the output of this element is used for blocking protection functions, apply it directly (combination with other
FlexLogic operands adds delay to the blocking).
HARMONIC DET 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the Harmonic Detection element.

HARMONIC DET 1 SOURCE — Indicates the signal source for this element. Phase currents are taken from the three-phase CT
bank assigned to this source. Ground current is taken from the same source from the ground CT channel.
HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC — This setting selects DC, harmonic (2nd to 5th), or THD as the input quantity to be compared
against the pickup threshold in this element. Note that DC, harmonic, and THD are expressed in percent relative to the
fundamental magnitude. This setting applies to all four channels of the selected source. If detection of another harmonic is
required, then set up a separate Harmonic Detection element.
This setting applies to all four channels of the selected source, if detection of another harmonic is required, then set up a
separate Harmonic Detection element.
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN PHS CUR — This setting defines the minimum fundamental frequency current phasor magnitude
required to allow the respective (phase) logic in the harmonic detection element to operate.
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX PHS CUR — This setting defines the maximum fundamental frequency current phasor magnitude of
the phases above which the harmonic detection phase output is inhibited.
HARMONIC DET 1 PHASE FOR OPER — This setting defines the phases required for assertion of the HARMONIC DET 1 OP
operand (except ground current channel). Options are as follows:
ANY ONE — At least one phase picked up (DEFAULT)
ANY TWO — Two or more phases picked up
ALL THREE — All three phases picked up
AVERAGE — The average of three-phase harmonics or THDs picked up
If set to AVERAGE, the relay calculates the average level of the selected harmonic and compares this level against the
pickup setting. Averaging of the selected harmonic follows an adaptive algorithm depending on the fundamental current
magnitude per-phase. If the fundamental magnitude on any of the three phases falls outside of the defined range based
on the MIN PHS CUR and the MAX PHS CUR settings, the selected harmonic current from that phase is dropped (zeroed)
from the equation for averaging, and the divider is decreased from 3 to 2. The same happens if the magnitude of the
fundamental phasor on one of the remaining two phases falls out of the defined range based on the MIN PHS CUR and
5
MAX PHS CUR settings. In this case, the selected harmonic on this phase is dropped from summation, and the divider is
decreased to 1.
HARMONIC DET 1 PHS PICKUP — This setting defines the pickup setting for the phase harmonic detection comparator of this
element.
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN GND CUR — This setting defines the minimum fundamental frequency ground current phasor
magnitude required to allow the respective (ground) logic in this harmonic detection element to operate.
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX GND CUR — This setting defines the maximum fundamental frequency ground current phasor
magnitude above which the harmonic detection ground output is inhibited.
HARMONIC DET 1 GND PICKUP — This setting defines the pickup setting for ground harmonic detection comparator of this
element.
The ground harmonic detection comparator of this element is connected to the ground channel of a CT module. For
standard channels, the conversion range is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating. For sensitive channels (sensitive ground CT
types), the conversion range is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
HARMONIC DET 1 PKP DELAY — This setting defines the pickup delay setting for this element.
HARMONIC DET 1 BLK — Assertion of the operand assigned to this setting blocks operation of the Harmonic Detection
element.
HARMONIC DET 1 EVENTS — This setting enables and disables the logging of Harmonic Detection events in the event
recorder.

INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-162: Harmonic detection logic

SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX
PHS CUR:
RUN
IA > MAX PHS CUR AND
RUN
IB > MAX PHS CUR AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SETTING O HARMONIC DET 1 PKP
RUN R
HARMONIC DET 1
FUNCTION: IC > MAX PHS CUR
AND
Enabled = 1 RUN
AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
IAVG > MAX PHS CUR
SETTING AND HARMONIC DET 1 PKP A
HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1 PKP B
BLOCK: HARMONIC DET 1 PKP C
SETTINGS
Off = 0 SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN SETTINGS
PHS CUR: HARMONIC DET HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1 OP A
SETTING RUN 1 PHS PICKUP: PICKUP DELAY: HARMONIC DET 1 OP B
HARMONIC DET 1 RUN HARMONIC DET 1 OP C
SOURCE: IA > MIN PHS CUR TPKP
RUN HARM IA > PHS Pickup 20 ms
IA
IB IB > MIN PHS CUR RUN
TPKP SETTINGS
IC RUN HARM IB > PHS Pickup 20 ms
IAVG PHASES FOR
IC > MIN PHS CUR RUN TPKP OPERATION
IG HARM IC > PHS Pickup 20 ms
THD IA RUN
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Harm IA [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] IAVG > MIN PHS CUR TPKP ANY ONE
HARM AVG > PHS Pickup 20 ms HARMONIC DET 1 OP
THD IB
Harm IB [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] SETTING ANY TWO
THD IC HARMONIC DET 1
Harm IC [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] HARMONIC: ALL THREE
THD IAVG PHASE A HARM# SELECT AVERAGE
Harm IAVG [0, 2, 3, 4, 5]
THD IG PHASE B HARM# SELECT
Harm IG [0, 2, 3, 4, 5] PHASE C HARM# SELECT
AVG HARM# SELECT
GND HARM# SELECT FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

HARMONIC DET 1 PKP G
5 SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1 MAX
GND CUR:
SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1
GND PICKUP:
SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1
PICKUP DELAY:
RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND RUN TPKP
IG > MAX GND CUR HARMONIC DET 1 OP G
HARM IG > GND Pickup 20 ms
SETTINGS
HARMONIC DET 1 MIN
GND CUR:
RUN
IG > MIN GND CUR
859807A1.vsdx
5.10 Inputs/outputs
5.10.1 Contact inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS / OUTPUTS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS

 CONTACT INPUT H5a

 
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric

 Cont Ip 1 characters
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

 DEBNCE TIME: 6.0 ms
CONTACT INPUT H5a Range: Disabled, Enabled

↓
 CONTACT INPUT xxx
 

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS
 CONTACT INPUT
  THRESHOLDS
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

 THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

 THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
↓
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
 THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Wet and dry contacts
are supported.
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each
group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules)
which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID can be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The
CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off
corresponds to contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a
maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If
CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is set to “Enabled,” every change in the contact input state triggers an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the following
figure. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a
user-settable debounce time in order for the Product to validate the new contact state. In the following figure, the
debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once
validated (de-bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
5
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the
contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the figure).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the
figure that follows). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions,
as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration
of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically
a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1 ms.
For example, eight protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a
contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 ms accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 shown). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the
debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the
change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8) transitions.

92/7$*(
Figure 5-163: Input contact debouncing mechanism and time stamp sample timing
,1387
86(5352*5$00$%/(7+5(6+2/'

7LPHVWDPSRIWKHILUVW
7LPHVWDPSRIWKHILUVW $WWKLVWLPHWKH 7KH)OH[/RJLF70 VFDQFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKH
$WWKLVWLPHWKHQHZ
VFDQFRUUHVSRQGLQJWR QHZ +,*+ RSHUDQGLVJRLQJWR QHZYDOLGDWHGVWDWHLV
/2: FRQWDFWVWDWHLV
WKHQHZYDOLGDWHGVWDWHLV FRQWDFWVWDWHLV EHDVVHUWHGDWWKLV ORJJHGLQWKH62(UHFRUG
YDOLGDWHG
ORJJHGLQWKH62(UHFRUG YDOLGDWHG SURWHFWLRQSDVV

5$: &217$&7
7KH)OH[/RJLF70
RSHUDQGLVJRLQJWREH
67$7(
GHDVVHUWHGDWWKLV
SURWHFWLRQSDVV
'(%281&(7,0(
XVHUVHWWLQJ

7KH)OH[/RJLF70RSHUDQG
'(%281&(7,0(
7KH)OH[/RJLF70RSHUDQG FKDQJHVUHIOHFWLQJWKH
6&$17,0( XVHUVHWWLQJ
FKDQJHVUHIOHFWLQJWKH YDOLGDWHGFRQWDFWVWDWH
)/(;/2*,&70
PVHF YDOLGDWHGFRQWDFWVWDWH
23(5$1'
3527(&7,213$66
WLPHVDF\FOHFRQWUROOHGE\WKH
IUHTXHQF\WUDFNLQJPHFKDQLVP
$FGU
5 Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value is selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources
and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it
in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
5.10.2 Virtual inputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUT 1(128)
 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Self-Reset, Latched

 TYPE: Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the
device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The virtual inputs can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COMMANDS menu)
and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to “Off” (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal
is received.

If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to “Disabled,” the input is forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to “Enabled,” the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x type is “Self-Reset,” when the input signal
transits from off to on, the output operand is set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to
off. If set to “Latched,” the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the
operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it likely needs to be lengthened in time. A
FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
Figure 5-164: Virtual inputs logic
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1 S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0” R VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING (Flexlogic Operand)
OR
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched AND
5
Self - Reset 827080A3.CDR
5.10.3 Contact outputs
5.10.3.1 Digital outputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1(H72)
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
  Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

 EVENTS: Enabled
A contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Wet and dry contacts
are supported.
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor determines from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and then presents the settings for only these outputs. Where the contact input is non-
latching, the settings are as shown.
An ID can be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output can be any FlexLogic
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand can be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A
contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor sets a flag (see the specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; for example, Cont OP 1 IOn.

In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect
operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in
the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the
tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized using the Cont OP 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
Figure 5-165: Contact input/output module type 6A contact 1 logic

SETT ING
CONTACT OUTPU T H1 OPERATE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= On
OR Cont Op 1 Closed
Cont Op 1 Ion
Cont Op 1 Von
Cont Op 1 Voff
SETT ING
CONTACT OUTPU T H1 SEAL-IN H1a
AND
= On
H1b
5 H1c
859743A1.vsd
5.10.3.2 Latching outputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1a CONTACT OUTPUT H1a ID Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
  L-Cont Op 1
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
OUTPUT H1a RESET: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
OUTPUT H1a SEAL-IN: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant

 Operate-dominant
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a Range: Disabled, Enabled

The latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and
populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the
hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts open. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts
when replacing a module.

Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring
capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test
error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
Settings shown use H1a as an example. The menu varies; not all fields shown display.
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE — This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The relay seals-
in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the
OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active
(logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a RESET or SEAL-IN — This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay
seals-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity
of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs
active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a TYPE — This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact closes if set to
“Operate-dominant” and opens if set to “Reset-dominant.”
Figure 5-166: Contact input/output module type 4L contact 1 logic
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a OPERATE Non-volatile,
= On Set-dominant
AND S
SETTING OR Latch On
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a TYPE Close
= Operate-dominant R
H1b
= Reset-dominant
Non-volatile,
SETTING OR Set-dominant
H1a
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a RESET
= On
AND S
Latch
Open
5
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Cont Op 1 Closed
859744A1.vsd
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings are applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):

OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”

OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they do not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time can occur.
Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay do not guarantee any specific sequence of operation
(such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of
the control inputs as shown in the next application example.
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).
5
Set both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact is to remain closed as long as VO1
is high, and is to remain opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):


5.10.4 Virtual outputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(256)
 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
  Virt Op 1
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the
device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The virtual outputs can be assigned using FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output is forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic 0). An ID also can be
assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the FlexLogic
equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings is
programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5.10.5 Resetting
5
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand
  Off

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING RESET OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand
  Off
RESET ANNUNCIATOR: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
Some events can be programmed to latch the front panel LED event indicators, target messages, and/or graphical front
panel annunciator windows. Once set, the latching mechanism holds the latched indicators, messages, or windows in the
set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including
FlexLogic latches) to the reset state where the initiating condition has cleared. The RESET command can be sent from the
front panel RESET button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any selected operand. The Modbus execute
function 05h with operation code 1 command is also available to perform the same function as the front panel RESET key.
RESET OPERAND — The three sources of RESET commands each activates the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual
source of a RESET command also activates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS), or
RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. Each of these three operands generates an event in the
event record when activated. The RESET OPERAND setting here selects the operand that activates the RESET OP
(OPERAND) operand.
RESET ANNUNCIATOR — Used to select a FlexLogic operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator
windows on the graphical front panel. The other methods to acknowledge/reset annunciator windows include:

• On the displayed page, press the RESET pushbutton with none of the annunciator windows selected to acknowledge/
reset all annunciator windows on that page
• To acknowledge/reset a specific annunciator window, use the Up, Down, Left and Right pushbuttons to select the
window, and press the RESET or ENTER pushbutton
• All annunciator windows can be reset remotely by programming a Virtual Input (for example Virtual Input 1) as the
input to the RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting. Then the Modbus execute function 05h with operation code 1000h command
(or function 10h with address 400h) is used to set the state of Virtual Input 1.
For the RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting, the RESET ANCTR OP FlexLogic operand is activated by the two sources of RESET
command, operand source and manual source. Each individual source of a RESET ANNUNCIATOR command also activates
its individual operand RESET OP (OPRD) or RESET ANCTR OP (MNUL) to identify the source of the command. Each of
these two operands generates an event in the event record when activated. The setting here selects the operand that
activates the RESET ANCTR OP (OPRD) operand. The RESET pushbutton on the front panel or the reset command from
the software activates the RESET ANCTR OP (MNUL) operand.
5.10.6 Direct inputs and outputs
5.10.6.1 Direct inputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT INPUTS  DIRECT INPUT 1(64)
 DIRECT INPUT 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
  NAME: Dir Ip 1
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: 0 to 16

 DEVICE ID: 0
5  DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 32
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off

 DEFAULT: Off
DIRECT INPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

These settings specify how the direct input information is processed.

DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME — This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct input.
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID — Represents the source of direct input 1. The specified direct input is driven by the device
identified here.
DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER — The bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit
identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE — Represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
• On — Defaults the input to Logic 1
• Off — Defaults the input to Logic 0
• Latest/On — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as after relay
power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 1. When communication resumes,
the input becomes fully operational.
• Latest/Off — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as after relay
power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 0. When communication resumes,
the input becomes fully operational.

5.10.6.2 Direct outputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUT 1(64)
 DIRECT OUTPUT 1 DIR OUT 1 NAME: Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
  Dir Out 1
DIR OUT 1 OPERAND: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
DIRECT OUTPUT 1 Range: Enabled, Disabled

DIR OUT 1 NAME — This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output.
DIR OUT 1 OPERAND — This sets the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output.
5.10.6.3 Application examples

The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs and Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued
here to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.
Example 1: Extending input/output capabilities of a UR relay

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The figure shows that two
IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards.
Figure 5-167: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs
TX1
5
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Assume that contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings are applied (Direct Input 5 and
bit number 12 are used, as an example).
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection

A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure.

Figure 5-168: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme
85,(' %/2&.
85,(' 85,(' 85,('
($"'!"1!34B
Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
trips the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings are applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to send the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8,
and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals).
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 4:
5 DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability


Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT
INPUT 9 ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or
to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes

Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-169: Three-terminal line application
85,(' 85,('
85,(' ($"'!#1!34B
Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown as
follows. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
Figure 5-170: Single-channel open-loop configuration
7; 5; 5;

85,(' 85,('
5; 7; 7;
85,('
5; 5
7;
($"'!$1!34B
In this architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a "bridge." The following
settings are applied:
UR IEC 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3:
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
The figure shows the signal flow among the three IEDs.

Figure 5-171: Signal flow for direct input and output
85,(' 85,('
',5(&7287 +<%32777; ',5(&7,1387
',5(&7,1387 ',5(&7287 +<%32777;
',5(&7,1387 ',5(&7287 ',5(&7,1387
',5(&7287 ',5(&7,1387
',5(&7,1387
85,(' ',5(&7,1387
',5(&7,1387
',5(&7287 +<%32777;
($"'!'1!34B
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct
inputs 5 and 6 are ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1
setting).
5.10.7 Teleprotection
5 5.10.7.1 Overview
The relay provides 16 teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and 16
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only,
numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by
assigning FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create
distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional
comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping. Note that failures of communications channels affect
teleprotection functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.
5.10.7.2 Teleprotection inputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT INPUTS
 TELEPROT INPUTS TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
  DEFAULT: Off

TELEPROT INPUT 1-16 Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
 DEFAULT: Off

 DEFAULT: Off

 DEFAULT: Off
Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to “On” defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of “Off”
defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The “Latest/On” and “Latest/Off” values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known,
such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for “Latest/
On” and logic 0 for “Latest/Off.”

5.10.7.3 Teleprotection outputs

SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT OUTPUTS
 TELEPROT OUTPUTS TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: Range: FlexLogic operand
  Off

TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-16: Range: FlexLogic operand
 Off

 Off

 Off
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of
communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each
channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand
on both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end).
On three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of
channel failure between any pair of relays.
Figure 5-172: Teleprotection input/output processing
EB! EB"
13DE1<F1<E5C C5DD9>7
C5DD9>7
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED!!*
381>>5<!CD1DEC* D5<5@B?D9>@ED!!
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b!"!!& 5
cQ]UV_b!"!!& ?^ 6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
6QY\
?VV6\Uh\_WYS?ÙbQ^T ?VV D5<5@B?9>@ED!!?^
?; ?B
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
13DE1<F1<E5C
C5DD9>7
381>>5<!CD1DEC*
D5<5@B?D9>@ED!! 3_]]e^YSQdY_^SXQ^Û\!
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b!"!!& DU\U`b_dUSdY_^9?5^QR\UT C5DD9>7
6<5H<?793?@5B1>4 D5<5@B?D?ED@ED!!*
?^ cQ]UV_b!"!!&
6QY\
D5<5@B?9>@ED!!?^ ?VV
?B ?; ?VV6\Uh\_WYS?ÙbQ^T
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
EB"_bEB#
13DE1<F1<E5C C5DD9>7
381>>5<"CD1DEC* D5<5@B?D9>@ED"!
4561E<D*
C5DD9>7 cQ]UV_b"""!&
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED"!*
cQ]UV_b!"!!& ?^ 6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
6QY\
?VV D5<5@B?9>@ED"!?^
?VV6\Uh\_WYS?ÙbQ^T ?; ?B
cQ]UV_b"""!&
13DE1<F1<E5C
C5DD9>7
381>>5<"CD1DEC*
D5<5@B?D9>@ED"! 3_]]e^YSQdY_^SXQ^Û\"
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b!"!!& ?^#dUb]Y^Q\cicdU]_b"dUb]Y^Q\ C5DD9>7
6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
gYdXbUTe^TQ^dSXQ^Û\
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED"!*
?^ cQ]UV_b"""!&
6QY\
D5<5@B?9>@ED"!?^ ?VV
?B ?; ?VV6\Uh\_WYS?ÙbQ^T
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
($"'% 1"34B


TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.11 Transducer inputs/outputs

5.11.1 DCmA inputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT F1(W8)
 DCMA INPUT F1 DCMA INPUT F1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
DCMA INPUT F1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 DCMA Ip 1
DCMA INPUT F1 Range: six alphanumeric characters

 UNITS: μA
DCMA INPUT F1 Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5

 RANGE: 0 to -1 mA mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 m
DCMA INPUT F1 MIN Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

 VALUE: 0.000
DCMA INPUT F1 MAX Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

 VALUE: 0.000
The T35 is provided with optional DCmA capability, specified at the time of ordering.
5 Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from external transducers and to convert these signals into a
digital format for use as required. The relay accepts inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most
common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Hardware details are
contained in chapter 3.
Before the DCmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
DCmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. Configure the individual channels with the
settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are generated automatically for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel
of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot F.
The function of the channel can be “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled,” no actual values are created for the channel. An
alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID is included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed
units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, and so on. This ID is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The DCMA
INPUT F1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT F1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250 °C; in this case the DCMA INPUT F1
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE value is “250.” Another example is a watts transducer with a span
from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT F1 MIN VALUE value is “–20” and the DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE value is
“180.” Intermediate values between the minimum and maximum values are scaled linearly.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.11.2 RTD inputs

SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT F1(W8)
 RTD INPUT F1 RTD INPUT F1 Range: Disabled, Enabled
RTD INPUT F1 ID: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 RTD Ip 1
RTD INPUT F1 TYPE: Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
 100Ω Platinum 120Ω Nickel
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel
of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
The function of the channel can be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled,” there is not an actual value created for the
channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID is included in the channel actual values. It is also used to
reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type
of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
5
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature. In
FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting the
operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an output
contact directly.
See the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.

Table 5-37: RTD temperature vs. resistance

Temperature Resistance (in ohms)
°C °F 100 Ω Pt 120 Ω Ni 100 Ω Ni 10 Ω Cu
(DIN 43760)
–50 –58 80.31 86.17 71.81 7.10
–40 –40 84.27 92.76 77.30 7.49
–30 –22 88.22 99.41 82.84 7.88
–20 –4 92.16 106.15 88.45 8.26
–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.17 8.65
0 32 100.00 120.00 100.00 9.04
10 50 103.90 127.17 105.97 9.42
20 68 107.79 134.52 112.10 9.81
30 86 111.67 142.06 118.38 10.19
40 104 115.54 149.79 124.82 10.58
50 122 119.39 157.74 131.45 10.97
60 140 123.24 165.90 138.25 11.35
70 158 127.07 174.25 145.20 11.74
80 176 130.89 182.84 152.37 12.12
90 194 134.70 191.64 159.70 12.51
100 212 138.50 200.64 167.20 12.90
110 230 142.29 209.85 174.87 13.28
120 248 146.06 219.29 182.75 13.67
5 130 266 149.82 228.96 190.80 14.06
140 284 153.58 238.85 199.04 14.44
150 302 157.32 248.95 207.45 14.83
160 320 161.04 259.30 216.08 15.22
170 338 164.76 269.91 224.92 15.61
180 356 168.47 280.77 233.97 16.00
190 374 172.46 291.96 243.30 16.39
200 392 175.84 303.46 252.88 16.78
210 410 179.51 315.31 262.76 17.17
220 428 183.17 327.54 272.94 17.56
230 446 186.82 340.14 283.45 17.95
240 464 190.45 353.14 294.28 18.34
250 482 194.08 366.53 305.44 18.73
5.11.3 DCmA outputs

SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA OUTPUTS  DCMA OUTPUT F1(W8)
 DCMA OUTPUT F1 DCMA OUTPUT F1 Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
  SOURCE: Off
DCMA OUTPUT F1 Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA

 RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
DCMA OUTPUT F1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

 MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
DCMA OUTPUT F1 Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

 MAX VAL: 1.000 pu

Hardware and software is provided to generate DCmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Hardware
details are contained in chapter 3. The DCmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or CT
and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings as follows.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used
for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as
the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an
example for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently re-
scales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The
following equation is applied:
I min if x < MIN VAL

°
I out = ® I max if x > MAX VAL Eq. 5-52
°
¯ k x – MIN VAL + I min otherwise
where
x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting
Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
I max – I min
k = -------------------------------------------
- Eq. 5-53
MAX VAL – MIN VAL
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, for example when MAX VAL
5
– MIN VAL < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-173: DCmA output characteristic
9]Qh
?ED@ED3EBB5>D
9]Y^
4B9F9>7C97>1<
($"'#)1!34B =9>F1< =1HF1<
Settings
DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE — This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving DCmA outputs. See Appendix A for a list of FlexAnalog parameters.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 RANGE — This setting allows selection of the output range. Each DCmA channel can be set independently
to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.

DCMA OUTPUT F1 MIN VAL — This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is
used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit
values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL — This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting
is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit
values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT F1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (that is,
if the DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
Three application examples follow.
Example: Power monitoring

A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the DCmA H1
output of the range of –1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT
connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The
power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal.
The nominal three-phase power is:
P = 3 u 13.8 kV u 0.8 kA u 0.9 = 17.21 MW Eq. 5-54
The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is:
P max = 1.2 u 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW Eq. 5-55

5 The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
P BASE = 115 V u 120 u 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW Eq. 5-56
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
– 20.65 MW 20.65 MW
minimum power = -------------------------- = – 1.247 pu, maximum power = ----------------------- = 1.247 pu Eq. 5-57
16.56 MW 16.56 MW
The following settings are entered:

DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: “SRC 1 P”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: “–1 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAl: “–1.247 pu”
DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: “1.247 pu”
With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for
this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ±0.005 x (1-(-1)) x 20.65 MW = ±0.207 MW
• ±1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9
For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 × 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW.
Example: Current monitoring

The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA.
The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current is to be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing
for 50% overload.
The phase current with the 50% overload margin is:
I max = 1.5 u 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA Eq. 5-58

The base unit for current (see the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
I BASE = 5 kA Eq. 5-59
The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are:
0 kA 6.3 kA
minimum current = ---------- = 0 pu, maximum current = -------------- = 1.26 pu Eq. 5-60
5 kA 5 kA

DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: “SRC 1 Ia RMS”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: “4 to 20 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: “0.000 pu”
The worst-case error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ±0.005 x (20 - 4) x 6.3 kA = ±0.504 kA
• ±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal
For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 × 4.2 kA, 0.001 × 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA.
Example: Voltage monitoring

A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via source 2 is to be monitored by the DCmA H3 output with a
range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is “Delta.”
The voltage is to be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal.
The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are:
400 kV 400 kV
5
V min = 0.7 u ---------------- = 161.66 kV, Vmax = 1.1 u ---------------- = 254.03 kV
3 3 Eq. 5-61
The base unit for voltage (see the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is:
V BASE = 0.0664 kV u 6024 = 400 kV Eq. 5-62
The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are:
161.66 kV 254.03 kV
minimum voltage = ----------------------- = 0.404 pu, maximum voltage = ----------------------- = 0.635 pu Eq. 5-63
400 kV 400 kV
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: “SRC 2 V_1 mag”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: “0 to 1 mA”
DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: “0.404 pu”
The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities
scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in “Delta” (see the Metering Conventions section in
chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in this
example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 .
The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error:
• ±0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or ± 0.005 x (1-0) x 254.03 kV = ±1.27 kV
• ±0.5% of reading
For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is
0.005 × 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

TESTING CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.12 Testing
5.12.1 IED mode config
SETTINGS  TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG
 IED MODE CONFIG IED MODE: Range: On, Test, Test Blocked
  On
TEST MODE INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
TEST-BLK MODE INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
MODE CTRL VIA MMS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 On (displays with IEC 61850)
CONTACT I/O FORCING: Range: FlexLogic operand

 On
IED MODE TARGET: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 ENABLED
IED BEHAVIOR: Range: On, Test, Test Blocked

 On
TEST MODE TRIP Range: Enabled, Disabled
 SECURITY: Disabled
5 The T35 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication functions
and the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU, where applicable), using simulated conditions. It is accessible in the software and
IED MODE — Can be in one of three states: On, Test, or Test Blocked. In UR 7.7 and later, as outlined in the Simulation section
that follows, the UR test mode and GOOSE simulation mode are isolated, and they no longer depend on the mode setting
here.
The On mode is for normal in service operation; the relay protection, control, and communication function is normal. Test
features are disabled, except channel tests and PMU tests remain usable when provided. In On mode, the front panel Test
Mode LED is off.
The Test Blocked mode is implemented per IEC61850-7-4 standard. This allows the relay to be isolated quickly so that it
cannot negatively affect the power system or other parts of the substation automation system. This is primarily used for
testing purposes, but can also be used for loading new firmware, changing hardware modules, and changing
communication connections etc., providing all local or regional safety/testing guidelines are adhered to.
As far as practical, all relay output signals are blocked, contact outputs are de-energized, and latching outputs are frozen.
Commands to HardFiber Bricks are blocked. The test bit of quality attribute of values that can be output via IEC 61850
services is set to "TRUE." The validity bit of the quality attribute of the data sent via IEC 61850 services is set to "GOOD" if no
major error is active. Direct I/O, 87L channel and PMU tests are operational on applicable models. In Test Blocked mode,
the front panel Test Mode LED is on.
The Test mode is for testing involving forcing relay operation by test signal injection and verifying correct relay output. This
mode is also for tests to verify the relay outputs (both contact and communications) have the intended impact on specific
power system devices or on specific other substation automation devices. Contact outputs can be selectively enabled or
forced as described in the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs sections that follow. Shared outputs to Bricks
have their test mode flag raised, which results in their value only being accepted by relays also in forcible Test mode. The
test bit and validity bit of the quality attribute of data sent via IEC 61850 services are set as "TRUE" and "GOOD"
respectively. In Test mode, the front panel Test Mode LED flashes.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS TESTING
Otherwise, the UR remains fully operational while in the Test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular,
the protection and control elements, and FlexLogic function normally. Other than the IEC 61850 protocol, communications
based inputs and outputs remain fully operational. The test procedure must take this into account. Direct I/O channel tests
and PMU tests are usable on applicable models.
When set to Test mode and the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting is "On"
• If the FORCE Cont Ip # setting is set to Open or Closed, the respective quality attribute of the data sent via IEC 61850
services is set to q.source = "substituted"
• If the FORCE Cont Op # setting is set to Energized, De-energized, or Freeze, the respective quality attribute of the data
sent via IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = "substituted"
When the Breaker Status is substituted manually from a graphical front panel, the respective quality attribute of the
breaker position data sett via IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = "substituted."
The IED MODE setting can be selected through
• Front panel
• EnerVista UR Setup software
• FlexLogic operands
• IEC 61850 control to LLN0.Mod
• "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting (under SIMULATION > SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES menu)
It is important to note that following the writing of a new setting file to the relay, IED behavior will change according
to the IED MODE CONFIG settings in the new file. The user must ensure that IED MODE CONFIG settings in the new
file are set according to the expected behavior following the writing of the new setting file.
TEST MODE INPUT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that can put the UR into Test mode as per the logic diagram.
5
Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable forcible Test mode, that is driven by any remote inputs, logic outputs,
front panel (user-programmable push buttons), and so on.
TEST-BLK MODE INPUT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that can put the UR into Test Blocked mode as per the
logic diagram. Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable test isolated mode, that is driven by any remote inputs,
logic outputs, front panel (user-programmable push buttons) and so on.
MODE CTRL VIA MMS — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand for an IEC 61850 client to control the IED mode. When the
operand is low/off, IED mode control from the IEC 61850 client is disabled, and the control request to LLN0.Mod.ctlVal
returns return a negative response. When high/on, IED mode control by an IEC 61850 client is accepted.
CONTACT I/O FORCING — When in Test mode, the operand selected by this setting dictates further response of the UR to
testing conditions, as described in the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs sections that follow. When no
operand is specified in this setting, forcing of inputs and outputs during Test mode are not available.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay front panel by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service
LED indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the table.
IED MODE TARGET — When this setting is Enabled, the corresponding target message of IED Mode Config is displayed on
the front panel when the relay behavior is either TEST or TEST BLOCKED. The target message gets self-reset when the relay
behavior is ON.
When this setting is Disabled, target message is not displayed when the relay behavior is either TEST or TEST BLOCKED.
Table 5-38: Test mode operation
IED MODE In-Service LED Test Mode LED Critical fail relay CONTACT I/O Contact input and output
setting FORCING setting behavior
On Unaffected Off Normal No effect Normal
Test Blocked Off On De-energized No effect Contact outputs disabled
Test Off Flashing De-energized Off Normal
On Controlled by forcing
features

TESTING CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.
Before uploading settings to the Online Window from the Offline Window of the software, ensure that the settings
in this panel in the Offline Window have been set to required values. Otherwise, undesired relay operation can
occur.
IED BEHAVIOR — Displays the actual behavior of the IED based on different inputs to control the IED MODE. Note that the test
mode can be changed through the front panel, EnerVista software, FlexLogic operands, IEC 61850 control to LLN0.Mod,
and INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting, with the following behavior.
TEST MODE TRIP SECURITY — This setting is used to govern both IOC Trip Security and Differential Trip Security functions. It is
in effect only when the IED is not in the normal in-service operation mode (i.e., IED Mode is set to a value other than On).
Table 5-39: IED fields based on input
Change to IED MODE Behavior
Using front panel IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR change in software
Using software IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR change on front panel
Using operand IED MODE does not change in software or front panel, IED BEHAVIOR reflects change
Using INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR do not change in software or front panel
5.12.1.1 IED mode process

The IED MODE setting is changed to Test or Test Blocked (depending upon the selected setting value for "INITIATE TEST
5 MODE ON SIM") when the relay is put into simulation mode. After this, the IED MODE is controlled by the TESTING  IED MODE
CONFIG menu.
The IED MODE selection is illustrated in the logic diagram.
The SR Latch that drives the UR into Test mode or On mode are reset-dominant, which means that Test Blocked mode has
the highest priority over Test and On modes, when simultaneous commands are active. For example, if both the FlexLogic
operands assigned to the TEST MODE INPUT and TEST-BLK MODE INPUT settings are ON, then the IED MODE is Test Blocked.
If Any Major error FlexLogic operand is set, then IED MODE is set to Test Blocked.
Following UR restart or power-up, the IED MODE remains latched at the last value, until change is trigged by another input/
command.
When the relay simulation mode is enabled (LPHD.Sim.stVal = TRUE), the "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting triggers
respective test mode. If the relay is already in Test or Test Blocked mode, the priority scheme defined in the IED MODE
processing logic decides the resulting IED mode.
In summary, enabling the Test or Test Blocked mode in the TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG menu has no impact on the
simulation mode. However, enabling the simulation mode triggers the respective test mode selected by the "INITIATE TEST
MODE ON SIM" setting and the resulting IED mode is decided by the IED MODE process logic diagram. Once the simulation
mode is enabled, the user can switch independently among IED modes using the IED MODE CONFIG settings while the
simulation mode continues.
As shown in the logic diagram, the "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting triggers the respective IED mode only when the
relay is entering into simulation mode (meaning on the positive edge trigger of RLY IN SIM MODE FlexLogic operand) or
there is a change in the "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting value. Once simulation mode is enabled, any command to
change the IED Mode triggers the respective IED mode. When the simulation mode is disabled, the test mode initiated by
"INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting resets.

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS TESTING
Figure 5-174: IED mode processing logic

IEC 618 50 protocol
LLN0.Mod.ctlVal = Test
AND
SETTINGS A’’
TEST MODE INPU T: LLN0.Mod.stVal= Test

A
Off=0 SET
OR OR
OR A’ LLN0.Beh.stVal= Test
SETTINGS IED Beh Test
IED MODE: SET
OR RES ET
(From front panel o r EnerVista) A’ AND
A
Re set dominant
Test FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test RES ET
Test-Blo cked FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Set dominant
IED Beh Test-Blocked
On C
D
OR SIM_Test_Q AND
C’’
A’
D’’
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY MAJOR ERROR
LLN0.Mod.stVal= Test-Blocked
SETTINGS
TEST-BLK MODE INP UT: C

C’
OR SET LLN0.Beh.stVal= Test-Blo cked
Off=0 OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND IED Beh Test-Blo cked
OR
IEC 618 50 protocol OR
LLN0.Mod.ctlVal = Test-Blocked C’’ RES ET
AND Re set dominant
SET
C’ AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test-Blocked RES ET
Set dominant
A
D AND
OR SIM_Test_Blk_Q
C’
A’’
D’’
IEC 618 50 protocol D LLN0.Beh.stVal= On
LLN0.Mod.ctlVal = On OR SET FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
A
AND D’’ IED Beh On
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
5
SETTINGS
IED Beh Test-Blocked
MOD E CTRL VIA MMS: OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND RES ET
(From front panel o r EnerVista)
IED Beh Test Re set dominant
Off=0
A’’ OR
C’’
FLEXLOGIC OPERAN D
D’’
IED IN SIM MOD E SET
AND
SETTINGS SIM_Test_Q
RES ET
INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM:
Set dominant
(From front panel o r EnerVista)
Disabled SET
Test SIM_Test_Blk_Q
AND
Test-Blocked RES ET
Set dominant
Legend:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAN D OR Rising edge trigger.
IED IN SIM MOD E Ho lds state for one pass.
859 785A1.vsdx
5.12.2 Force contact inputs

SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Ip 1 Range: Normal, Open, Closed
 INPUTS  Normal
FORCE Cont Ip 2 Range: Normal, Open, Closed

 Normal

FORCE Cont Ip xx Range: Normal, Open, Closed
 Normal
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs.
While in Test mode, the relay contact inputs can be pre-programmed to respond in the following ways:

SIMULATION CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
• If set to “Normal,” the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. Select this value if a given input must be operational during the test. This
includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
• If set to “Open,” the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) while the operand selected by CONTACT I/O FORCING
setting is On, regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. While the selected operand is Off, the input behaves
as it does when in service.
• If set to “Closed,” the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) while the operand selected by CONTACT I/O FORCING
setting is On regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. While the selected operand is Off, the input behaves
as it does when in service.
5.12.3 Force contact outputs

SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT FORCE Cont Op 1 Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
 OUTPUTS  Normal
FORCE Cont Op 2 Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

 Normal

FORCE Cont Op xx Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

5 Normal
The force contact outputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact outputs.
While in Test mode, the relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond in the following ways:
• If set to “Normal,” the contact output remains fully operational. It operates when its control operand is logic 1 and
resets when its control operand is logic 0.
• If set to “Energized,” the output closes and remains closed while the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O FORCING
setting is On, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. While the selected
operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
• If set to “De-energized,” the output opens and remains opened while the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O
FORCING setting is On, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. While the
selected operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
• If set to “Freeze,” the output retains its position at the instant before the IED MODE was Test and the operand selected
by the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting was On, regardless of later changes in the status of the operand configured to
control the output contact. While the selected operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
5.13 Simulation
SETTINGS  SIMULATION
 SETTINGS  SUBSCRIBE TO See below
 SIMULATION   SIMULATED VALUES
 PUBLISH See page 5-356

  SIMULATED VALUES

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS SIMULATION
5.13.1 Subscribe to simulated values

SETTINGS  SIMULATION  SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES
 SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATION MODE: Range: Disabled, Enabled
 SIMULATED VALUES  Disabled
SIM MODE INPUT: Range: FlexLogic operand

 Off
SIM CTRL VIA MMS: Range: FlexLogic operand

 On
INITIATE TEST MODE Range: Disabled, Test, Test-Blocked

 ON SIM: Test-Blocked
SIM MODE TARGET: Range: Enabled, Disabled

 Enabled
SIM MODE EVENTS: Range: Disabled, Enabled

 Disabled
SIMULATION MODE Range: Disabled, Enabled

 STATUS: Disabled
The T35 is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications that include simulation. The option is specified at
the time of ordering. The field reads "Unavailable" when IEC 61850 is not present.
Prior to UR 7.7, when the UR TEST MODE FUNCTION is set to "Test Blocked" or "Test," the sim bit in the header of all
transmitted GOOSE messages is set to "TRUE," so that the UR plays the simulator role during the testing and
commissioning phases. The "Sim" data attribute in the relay is set (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.stVal = TRUE), so that if GOOSE
5
messages are received with the "simulation" flag set, these are used in place of the normal messages. The quality attribute
values that are transmitted via GOOSE services are set to "valid" + "test."
In UR 7.7 and later, the UR test mode and GOOSE simulation mode are isolated. The sim bit in the transmitted GOOSE
messages and the relay "Sim" attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.stVal) are controlled via new Modbus settings and MMS
control requests. They no longer depend on the UR TEST MODE FUNCTION or IED MODE.
The settings also display in the software when the T35 is set to IEC 61850 Edition 2. When using IEC 61850 Edition 1, the
settings are read-only.
SIMULATION MODE — When set to Disabled, the relay "Sim" attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.StVal) is set to False and the
GOOSE/SV messages received with simulation flag/bit set are ignored.
When set to Enabled, the relay "Sim" attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.StVal) is set to True, so that if GOOSE/SV messages
are received with the "simulation" flag/bit set, these are used in place of the normal messages.
SV messages has a simulation bit in the Reserved 1 field.
SIM MODE INPUT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand. When set, the relay Simulation mode is enabled and, if the
messages (either GOOSE or SV) are received with the simulation bit true, messages from simulation devices are used in
place of actual messages. Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable simulation mode, that is, driven by any
remote inputs, logic outputs, front panel (user-programmable pushbuttons), and so on.
SIM CTRL VIA MMS — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand for the IEC 61850 client to control the simulation mode.
When set to Off, simulation mode selection via IEC 61850 client is disabled and control request to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal returns
return negative response.
When set to On, simulation mode selection via IEC 61850 client is accepted.
This setting can be set from the front panel, EnerVista UR Setup software, FlexLogic operand, and IEC61850 control to
LPHD.Sim.ctlVal.
INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM — This setting initiates the selected test mode when simulation mode is enabled.

When set to Disabled, any command (from an IEC 61850 client, front panel, or Flex Operand) to set the simulation mode
enables the Sim mode irrespective of the current IED mode.
When set to Test or Test-Blocked, any command to set the simulation mode selects respective test mode, if the relay is not
already in Test or Test-Blocked mode. If the relay is already in Test or Test-Blocked mode by any user command (from IEC
61850 client, front panel, or Flex Operand), the respective priority defined in test mode processing decides the resultant
test mode.
In summary, enabling the Test or Test-Blocked mode via the IED MODE setting (from front panel or EnerVista), via a
IEC61850 client command to LLN0.Mod.ctlVal, or via TEST MODE INPUT and TEST-BLK MODE INPUT settings (FlexLogic
operands) has no impact on the simulation mode. However, enabling the simulation mode using the SIMULATION MODE
setting (from front panel or EnerVista), via an IEC61850 client command to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal, or via SIM MODE INPUT setting
(FlexLogic operand) enables the selected test mode by the INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting. A user can independently
disable the test or test-blocked mode by any specified command type, but the relay simulation mode continues and
accepts the simulated values in place of actual values until the simulation mode is disabled.
SIM MODE TARGET — When this setting is Enabled, a target message ‘IED IN SIM MODE’ is displayed on the front panel when
the relay is in Simulation mode. The target message gets self-reset when the relay exits the Simulation mode.
When this setting is Disabled, target message is not displayed when the relay is in Simulation mode.
SIM MODE EVENT — This setting is used to control whether the change in Simulation mode of relay is recorded in the event
recorder. When this setting is Enabled, the event showing the change in the status of Simulation is recorded. If this setting
is Disabled, the events related to Simulation mode are not recorded.
SIMULATION MODE STATUS — This is an actual value that indicates the present simulation mode of the relay.
Figure 5-175: Simulation mode logic

SETTINGS
5 SIMULATION MODE:
(From front panel or EnerVista)
Enabled=1
A
OR
SETTINGS
SIM MODE INPUT:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0 IED IN SIM MODE OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR IED IN SIM MODE ON
LPHD1.Sim.ctlVal = TRUE
LPHD1.Sim.stVal
SETTINGS
AND SET
SIM CTRL VIA MMS:
(From front panel or EnerVista)
A
Enabled=1 RESET
OR
Set dominant
From IEC 61850 protocol AND

LPHD1.Sim.ctlVal = FALSE
859831A1.vsdx
5.13.2 Publish simulated values

SETTINGS  SIMULATION  PUBLISH SIMULATED VALUES
 PUBLISH TxGOOSE SIM MODE: Range: Disabled, Enabled
 SIMULATED VALUES  Disabled
SIM Q.VALIDITY: Range: NONE, GOOD, INVALID, QUESTIONABLE

 NONE

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS SIMULATION
SIM Q.TEST: Range: NONE, TRUE, FALSE

 NONE
TxGOOSE SIM MODE — When set to Disabled, the sim bits in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to FALSE.
When set to Enabled, the sim bits in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to TRUE.
This setting can be modified through the front panel, EnerVista UR Setup software, IEC 61850 client control to <MasterLD>/
LPHD1.TxGoSim.
SIM Q.VALIDITY — This setting simulates the validity bits of the quality attribute values included in all transmitted GOOSE
messages. When set to NONE, the q.Validity bits are set based on the logical node behavior value. When set to any other
value, the q.Validity bits of quality attributes included in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to the selected value.
This setting is used when TxGOOSE SIM MODE is set to Enabled. It can be modified through the front panel and EnerVista UR
Setup software.
SIM Q.TEST — This setting simulates the Test bit of the quality attribute values included in all transmitted GOOSE messages.
When set to NONE, the q.Test bit is set based on the relay TEST MODE FUNCTION / IED MODE. When set to any other value,
the q.Test bit of quality attributes included in all transmitted GOOSE messages is set to the selected value.
This setting is used when TxGOOSE SIM MODE is set to Enabled. It can be modified through the front panel and EnerVista UR
Setup software.


Chapter 6: Actual values
Actual values
This chapter outlines viewing of data on the front panel, software, and/or web browser.
6.1 Actual values menu
 ACTUAL VALUES  Access in EnerVista

 FRONT PANEL   See page 6-3

 ACTUAL VALUES  IED See page 6-5
 STATUS  
 CONTACT INPUTS See page 6-5

  
 VIRTUAL INPUTS See page 6-5

 
 RxGOOSE BOOLEANS See page 6-5

 
 RxGOOSE DPS See page 6-6

 

  INPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS See page 6-6

 
 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS See page 6-7

 
 RxGOOSE STATUS See page 6-7

 
 RxGOOSE See page 6-7

  STATISTICS
 FIXED GOOSE See page 6-8

 

ACTUAL VALUES MENU CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
 DIGITAL COUNTERS See page 6-8

 
 BREAKER STATUS See page 6-9

 
 SELECTOR SWITCHES See page 6-9

 
 FLEX STATES See page 6-10

 
 ETHERNET See page 6-10

 
 REAL TIME CLOCK See page 6-10

  SYNCHRONIZING
 DIRECT INPUTS See page 6-11

 
 DIRECT DEVICES See page 6-12

  STATUS
 EGD PROTOCOL See page 6-12

  STATUS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS See page 6-12

 
 COMM STATUS See page 6-13

  REMAINING CONNECT
 PRP STATUS See page 6-13

 
 TxGOOSE STATUS See page 6-14

 
 PROTOCOL See page 6-15

 
6 
 ACTUAL VALUES  TRANSFORMER See page 6-19

 METERING  
 SOURCE SRC 1 See page 6-20

  
 SOURCE SRC 2
 
 SOURCE SRC 3
 
 SOURCE SRC 4
 
 SOURCE SRC 5
 
 SOURCE SRC 6
 
 TRACKING FREQUENCY See page 6-24

 
 FLEXELEMENTS See page 6-24

 
 RxGOOSE Analogs See page 6-25

 

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES FRONT PANEL
 RESTRICTED GROUND See page 6-25

  FAULT CURRENTS
 TRANSDUCER I/O See page 6-25

  DCMA INPUTS
 TRANSDUCER I/O See page 6-25

  RTD INPUTS
 HARMONIC See page 6-26

   DETECTION
 ACTUAL VALUES  FIELD UNIT U1 See page 6-26

 REMOTE RESOURCES   ID: U 1

 FIELD UNIT U8
   ID: U 8
 ACTUAL VALUES  GENERAL STATUS See page 6-27

 PB MODULE  
 RxSV Status See page 6-27

  
 TIME SYNC See page 6-28

  
 ACTUAL VALUES  USER PROGRAMMABLE See page 6-31

 RECORDS   FAULT REPORTS
 EVENT RECORDS See page 6-32

  
 OSCILLOGRAPHY See page 6-34

 
 DATA LOGGER See page 6-34

 
   MAINTENANCE

See page 6-35 6
 ACTUAL VALUES  MODEL INFORMATION See page 6-36
 PRODUCT INFO  
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS See page 6-37

 
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
6.2 Front panel

6.2.1 Enhanced and standard front panels
The front panel can be viewed and used in the EnerVista software, for example to view an error message displayed on the
front panel. Settings cannot be changed in this interface.
To view the front panel in EnerVista software:
1. Click Actual Values > Front Panel.
2. Click the pushbutton or LCD area to enlarge it.

FRONT PANEL CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 6-1: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown)

The graphical front panel is a hardware option.
6 Annunciator alarms can be acknowledged and reset, and LEDs and pushbuttons can be viewed.
To view alarms for the graphical front panel in EnerVista:
1. Access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Panel. Alarms are listed, allowing remote acknowledgement/
reset.
2. Click the Acknowledge or Reset button for an alarm.
Figure 6-2: Annunciator alarms displayed in the software)
To view LEDs and pushbuttons on the graphical front panel in EnerVista:

1. Access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > LEDs or Pushbuttons. The window displays.

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
6.3 Status
6.3.1 IED
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  IED
 IED IED BEHAVIOUR: Range: On, Test, Test Blocked
  On
SIMULATION MODE Range: Disabled, Enabled

 STATUS: Disabled Displays with IEC 61850
IED BEHAVIOUR — Displays the SETTINGS  TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG  IED MODE value.
SIMULATION MODE STATUS — Displays the SETTINGS  SIMULATION  SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES  SIMULATION MODE
value, meaning if simulation mode is enabled or disabled on a device.
6.3.2 Contact inputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS Cont Ip 1 Range: On, Off
  Off

Cont Ip xx Range: On, Off
 Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
6.3.3 Virtual inputs 6

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 VIRTUAL INPUTS Virt Ip 1 Range: On, Off
  Off

Virt Ip 128 Range: On, Off
 Off
The present status of the 128 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.3.4 RxGOOSE boolean inputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE BOOLEANS
 RxGOOSE BOOLEANS RxGOOSE BOOLEAN 1 Range: On, Off
  STATUS: Off

RxGOOSE BOOLEAN 256 Range: On, Off
 STATUS: Off

STATUS CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
6.3.5 RxGOOSE DPS inputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE DPS
 RxGOOSE DPS RxGOOSE DPS 1 Range: On, Off, intermediate, Bad
  Status: intermediate

RxGOOSE DPS 16 Range: On, Off, intermediate, Bad
 Status: intermediate
6.3.6 Teleprotection inputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
 TELEPROTECTION TELEPROTECTION Range: On, Off
 INPUTS  INPUT 1-1: Off

TELEPROTECTION Range: On, Off
 INPUT 1-16: Off

 INPUT 2-1: Off
6 
 INPUT 2-16: Off
The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed is
that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed.
6.3.7 Contact outputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT OUTPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS Cont Op 1 Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
  Off

Cont Op xx Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
 Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff, On, IOn, and VOn.
For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.

6.3.8 Virtual outputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS Virt Op 1 Range: On, Off
  Off

Virt Op 256 Range: On, Off
 Off
The present state of each virtual output displays here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6.3.9 RxGOOSE status

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE STATUS
 RxGOOSE All RxGOOSE Online: Range: Yes, No
 STATUS  Yes
RxGOOSE 1 Status: Range: Online, Offline

 Offline

RxGOOSE 64 Status: Range: Online, Offline
 Offline
The All RxGOOSE Online actual value does not consider RxGOOSE that are not configured or are not used by any RxGOOSE
Input. 6
If fixed GOOSE is configured, the All RxGOOSE Online actual value reflects the status of both the configurable GOOSE
subscriptions and the fixed GOOSE subscriptions. For All RxGOOSE Online status to have the value “Yes”, all RxGOOSE x Status
actual values must be “Online” and the fixed GOOSE All Remote Devices Online status must have the value “Yes”.
6.3.10 RxGOOSE statistics

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE STATISTICS  RxGOOSE 1(64)
 RxGOOSE 1 RxGOOSE 1 Range: 0 up to 4,294,967,295
  stNum 0
RxGOOSE 1 Range: 0 up to 4,294,967,295

 sqNum 0
stNum — State number. The most recently received value in GOOSE message field stNum. The publisher increments stNum
each time that the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is sent with a revised value.
sqNum — Sequence number. The most recently received value in GOOSE message field sqNum. The publisher sets sqNum
to zero each time the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is sent with a new value, and it increments it
whenever a GOOSE message is resent without any member value change.

6.3.11 Fixed GOOSE
6.3.11.1 Remote devices

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FIXED GOOSE  REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
 REMOTE DEVICE ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE: Range: Yes, No
 STATUS  Yes
REMOTE DEVICE 1 STATUS: Range: Online, Offline

 Off

REMOTE DEVICE 16 STATUS: Range: On, Off
 Off
Displays the present state of the programmed remote devices.

ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE — Indicates whether all programmed devices are online or not. If the state is “No”, then at least
one required remote device is not online.
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FIXED GOOSE  REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS  REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
 REMOTE DEVICE 1 REMOTE DEVICE 1 stNum: Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295
  0
REMOTE DEVICE 1 sqNum: Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295

 0
REMOTE DEVICES 1 stNum — This indicates the most recently received value in the received Fixed GOOSE message field
stNum (state number). The publisher increments stNum each time that the state of one or more of the Fixed GOOSE
message members is sent with a revised value.
REMOTE DEVICES 1 sqNum — This indicates the most recently received value in the received Fixed GOOSE message field
sqNum (sequence number). The publisher sets sqNum to zero each time the state of one or more of the GOOSE message
6 members is sent with a new value, and it increments it whenever a Fixed GOOSE message is resent without any member
value change.
This number rolls over to zero when the maximum count of 4,294,967,295 is reached.
6.3.11.2 Remote inputs

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FIXED GOOSE  REMOTE INPUTS  REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
 REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 STATUS Range: On, Off
  Off
REMOTE INPUT 2 STATUS Range: On, Off

 Off

REMOTE INPUT 32 STATUS: Range: On, Off
 Off
6.3.12 Digital counters

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8 )
 DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1 ACCUM:
 Counter 1  0
Counter 1 FROZEN:
 0

Counter 1 FROZEN: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 1970/01/01 00:00:00
Counter 1 MICROS: Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1

 0
The present status of the eight digital counters displays here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label also appears). Also included, is the date and time
stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.3.13 Breaker status

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  BREAKERS
 BREAKERS BREAKER 1 ΦA/3P STATE: Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert
  N/A
BREAKER 1 ΦB STATE: Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

 N/A
BREAKER 1 ΦC STATE: Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

 N/A

BREAKER x ΦA/3P STATE: Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert
 N/A
BREAKER x ΦB STATE: Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

 N/A
BREAKER 1 ΦC STATE: Range: N/A, Opened, Closed, Alert

 N/A
“N/A” is shown when BREAKER 1 FUNCTION is “Disabled”.

“Closed” is shown when the breaker is closed.
“Opened” is shown when the breaker is opened.
6
“Alert” is the state that represents one of the following breaker conditions:
– Bad
– Intermediate
– Racked-out
– Out of Service
– Pole Discrepancy
– Trouble
6.3.14 Selector switches

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  SELECTOR SWITCHES
 SELECTOR SWITCHES SELECTOR SWITCH 1 Range: Current Position / 7
  POSITION: 0/7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2 Range: Current Position / 7

 POSITION: 0/7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.

6.3.15 Flex States

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FLEX STATES
 FLEX STATES PARAM 1: Off Range: On, Off
  Off

PARAM 256: Off Range: On, Off
 Off
There are 256 FlexStateTM bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
6.3.16 Ethernet
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  ETHERNET
 ETHERNET ETHERNET PRI LINK Range: Fail, OK
  STATUS: Fail
ETHERNET SEC LINK Range: Fail, OK

 STATUS: OK
ETHERNET TER LINK Range: Fail, OK

 STATUS: Fail
These values indicate the status of the first, second, and third Ethernet ports.
6.3.17 Real time clock synchronizing

ACTUAL VALUES  PROCESS BUS MODULE  TIME SYNC
 REAL TIME CLOCK RTC SYNC SOURCE: Range: None, Port 1(3) PTP Clock, IRIG-B, Other,
 SYNCHRONIZING  None Process Bus Module Clock, SNTP1, SNTP2
6  GRANDMASTER ID:
0000000000000000
Range: any 8 octet value
ACCURACY: Range: 0 to 999,999,999 ns

 999999999 ns
PBM SW1 PTP State: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synchro-

 DISABLED nized, Qualifying, Idea, Master
PBM SW2 PTP State: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synchro-

 DISABLED nized, Qualifying, Idea, Master
PORT 1 PTP STATE: Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No

 No Signal Pdelay), Synchronized


PTP - IRIG-B DELTA: Range: -500,000,000 to +500,000,000 ns

 500000000 ns
This menu displays when the product includes an IEEE 1588 software option.

RTC SYNC SOURCE — The time synchronizing source the relay is using at present. Possible sources include Port 1 PTP Clock
to Port 3 PTP Clock. A value of Other means a less precise source (IEC 103, IEC 104, Modbus, DNP). An actual value displays
when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option.
When the SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting in Settings > Product Setup > Real Time Clock is set to “PBM Clock”, the RTC
SYNC SOURCE should also be set to “Process Bus Module Clock”.
GRANDMASTER ID — The grandmasterIdentity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When the
relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmasterIdentity code is specified by PTP to be
globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable
clocks.
ACCURACY — The estimated maximum time error at present in the RTC, considering the quality information embedded in
the received time signal. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the magnitude of the estimated error is one second or more,
or that the error cannot be estimated.
PORT 1…3 PTP STATE — The present state of the port’s PTP clock. The PTP clock state is:
• Disabled if the port’s function setting is Disabled
• No Signal if enabled but no signal from an active master has been found and selected
• Calibrating if an active master has been selected but lock is not at present established
• Synch’d (No Pdelay) if the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is non-operational
• Synch’d (Inv UTCoff) when Synchronized to PTP master with currentUtcOffsetValid =False
• Synch’d (Nopd INVoff) if the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is non-operational and PTP master
has currentUtcOffsetValid =False
• Synchronized if synchronized
PTP - IRIG-B DELTA — The time difference, measured in nanoseconds, between the fractional seconds portion of the time
being received via PTP and that being received via IRIG-B. A positive value indicates that PTP time is fast compared to IRIG-
B time.
6.3.18 Direct inputs 6

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 DIRECT INPUTS AVERAGE MSG RETURN
  TIME CH1: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
 COUNT CH1: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT

 CH1: 0
AVERAGE MSG RETURN

 TIME CH2: 0 ms
UNRETURNED MSG
 COUNT CH2: 0
CRC FAIL COUNT

 CH2: 0
DIRECT INPUT 1
 On

DIRECT INPUT 64
 On

The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last
ten messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts can indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT values represent the state of each direct input.
6.3.19 Direct devices status

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
 DIRECT DEVICES DIRECT DEVICE 1 Range: Offline, Online
 STATUS  STATUS: Offline

DIRECT DEVICE 16 Range: Offline, Online
 STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
6.3.20 EGD protocol status
6.3.20.1 Fast exchange

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  FAST EXCHANGE 1
 FAST EXCHANGE 1 FAST EXCHANGE 1
  SIGNATURE: 0
6  FAST EXCHANGE 1
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information for debugging an Ethernet Global Data (EGD) network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the fast EGD exchange display.
6.3.20.2 Slow exchange

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
 SLOW EXCHANGE 1 SLOW EXCHANGE 1
  SIGNATURE: 0
SLOW EXCHANGE 1
 DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the slow EGD
exchanges display.
6.3.21 Teleprotection channel tests

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROT CH TESTS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS CHANNEL 1 Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
  STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL 1 LOST Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

 PACKETS: 1

CHANNEL 2 Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

 STATUS: n/a
CHANNEL 2 LOST Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

 PACKETS: 1
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

 CONFIGURATION: FAIL
The status information for two channels is shown here.

CHANNEL 1 STATUS — This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is “OK,” teleprotection is enabled and
data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL,” teleprotection enabled and data is not being received
from the remote terminal. If “n/a,” teleprotection is disabled.
CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS — Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle.
The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu.
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION — This value displays the current state of the communications channel identification
check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the “FAIL” message
displays. The “N/A” value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of “0,” the channel is failed, or if the
teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled.
6.3.22 Remaining connection status

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  COMM STATUS REMAINING CONNECT
 COMM STATUS MMS TCP (max 6) Range: 0 to 6
 REMAINING CONNECT  6
Modbus TCP (max 4) Range: 0 to 4

 4
DNP TCP (max 2) Range: 0 to 2

 2
 IEC-104 TCP (max 2)

2
Range: 0 to 2 6
SFTP (max 4) Range: 0 to 4
 4
These values specify the remaining number of TCP connections still available for each protocol. The display depends on the
options applicable to your device. Each time a connection is used, the remaining number of connections decrements.
When released, the remaining number of connections increments. If no connection is made over the specific protocol, the
number equals the maximum number available for the specific protocol.
For example, the maximum number of Modbus TCP connections is 4. Once an EnerVista session is opened on a computer
connected to the UR over Ethernet, the Modbus TCP status shows 3. If the EnerVista application is closed, the Modbus TCP
status shows 4.
For the graphical front panel, the remaining connections refer to TCP connections only.
MMS TCP — The number of IEC 61850 connections remaining.
6.3.23 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)

The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation
networks.

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  PRP STATUS

 PRP STATUS Total Rx Port A: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled
  0
Total Rx Port B: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

 0
Total Errors Port A: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

 0
Total Errors Port A: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled
 0
Mismatches Port B: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

 0
Mismatches Port B: Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

 0
FER Port A: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
FER Port B: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
Link Active Port A: Range: Yes, No

 No
Link Active Port B: Range: Yes, No

 No
This menu displays when the product includes a PRP software option.
Total Received Port A is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port A.
Total Received Port B is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port B.
6 Total Errors is a counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short).
Mismatches Port A is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A (PRP frame, but port received through
and LAN ID in the frame do not match).
Mismatches Port B is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B (PRP frame, but port received through
and LAN ID in the frame do not match).
6.3.24 TxGOOSE status

ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TxGOOSE STATUS
 TxGOOSE STATUS R-TxGOOSE 1 Range: On, Off
  ARP: Off

R-TxGOOSE 16 Range: On, Off
 ARP: Off
This status is relevant to R-GOOSE reception when configured for SSM or ASM reception modes. It is not relevant for GOOSE
or for R-GOOSE in unicast reception mode.

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES METERING
ARP — The unicast mode of R-GOOSE transmission requires Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) for the resolution of the
network layer address into the MAC layer address. R-TxGOOSE## ARP status On indicates that ARP responses are being
received and the destination MAC address for R-GOOSE transmissions has been obtained. This status remains Off if
TxGOOSE## is not configured for R-GOOSE. It also remains Off if setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is set to a multicast address. In
the case where setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is configured with a unicast address and this status indicates Off, TxGOOSE##
transmission will be off, and therefore communication network diagnosis needs to be carried out.
This status is only applicable for R-GOOSE transmission with setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP set to a unicast IP address. It is not
applicable for GOOSE or for R-GOOSE when setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is multicast.
6.3.25 Protocol
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  PROTOCOL
 PROTOCOL IEC61850 EDITION: Range: Edition1, Edition2
  Edition2
Displays the IEC 61850 edition currently being used, as set under Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Protocol
> IEC61850 Edition. This value displays only on the front panel.
6.4 Metering
6.4.1 Metering conventions
6.4.1.1 UR convention for measuring power and energy

The figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR devices.
6

METERING CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 6-3: Flow direction of signed values for watts and VARs
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS
Generator
Parameters as seen by
G the UR-series relays
Voltage +Q
VCG
Watts = Positive IC
PF = Lead PF = Lag
Vars = Positive
PF = Lag IA
VAG –P +P
Current IB IA
PF = Lag PF = Lead
UR-SERIES IED
VBG
–Q
M LOAD –Θ1°
Inductive Resistive S=VI
Generator
G
VCG +Q
Voltage
PF = Lead PF = Lag
Watts = Positive IA
Vars = Negative IC
PF = Lead VAG –P +P
IA
Current
PF = Lag PF = Lead
IB
UR-SERIES IED
VBG –Q
S=VI
LOAD
–Θ2°
Resistive
Inductive Resistive
M LOAD
VCG +Q
Voltage PF = Lead PF = Lag

IB
IA
Watts = Negative
Vars = Negative VAG –P +P
PF = Lag
6
IA
IC PF = Lag PF = Lead
Current
VBG
–Q
UR-SERIES IED
G S=VI
–Θ3°
Generator
Resistive
LOAD
+Q
VCG
Voltage IB
PF = Lead PF = Lag
Watts = Negative IA
Vars = Positive VAG –P +P
PF = Lead
IA IC
Current PF = Lag PF = Lead

VBG
UR-SERIES IED –Q
G S=VI
–Θ4°
Generator 827239AC.CDR
6.4.1.2 UR convention for measuring phase angles

All phasors calculated by URs and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that maintain
the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting defines a
particular AC signal source to be used as the reference.

The relay first determines if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is used
as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. The figure illustrates this.
Figure 6-4: UR phase angle measurement convention
-270o
-225o -315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o 0o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o -45o
-90o
827845A1.CDR
6.4.1.3 UR convention for measuring symmetrical components

The URs calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and
symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase 6
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common
reference as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-connected instrument transformers

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
1 1
V_0 = -- V AG + V BG + V CG V_0 = -- V AG + V BG + V CG
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_1 = -- V AG + aV BG + a V CG V_1 = -- V AG + a V BG + aV CG
3 3
1 2 1 2
V_2 = -- V AG + a V BG + aV CG V_2 = -- V AG + aV BG + a V CG
3 3
The above equations apply to currents as well.

DELTA-connected instrument transformers

• ABC phase rotation: • ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A V_0 = N/A

1 – 30 q 2 1 30q 2
V_1 = ------------------ V AB + aV BC + a V CA V_1 = --------------- V AB + a V BC + aV CA
3 3 3 3
1 30q 2 1 – 30 q 2
V_2 = --------------- V AB + a V BC + aV CA V_2 = ------------------ V AB + aV BC + a V CA
3 3 3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6-1: Symmetrical components calculation example
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, sec. V * VT conn. relay INPUTS, sec. V SYMM. COMP, sec. V
VAG VBG VCG VAB VBC VCA F5ac F6ac F7ac V0 V1 V2
13.9 76.2 79.7 84.9 138.3 85.4 WYE 13.9 76.2 79.7 19.5 56.5 23.3
∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–313° ∠–97° ∠–241° ∠0° ∠–125° ∠–250° ∠–192° ∠–7° ∠–187°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 84.9 138.3 85.4 DELTA 84.9 138.3 85.4 N/A 56.5 23.3
can be determined) ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠0° ∠–144° ∠–288° ∠–54° ∠–234°
* The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the T35 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS 
SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM  FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 6-5: Measurement convention for symmetrical components
System voltages Symmetrical
components
UR-series phase
angle reference
6
UR-series phase
angle reference
1
A
Wye VTs
C
B
0
2
UR
an -s
gl eri
e es
re p
fe ha
re s
nc e
e
U 1
A an R-s
gl eri
e es
re p
fe ha
re s
Delta VTs nc e
e
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR

6.4.2 Transformer
6.4.2.1 Differential and restraint currents

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSFORMER  DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT
 DIFFERENTIAL AND REFERENCE WINDING:
 RESTRAINT  Winding 1
DIFF PHASOR Iad:

 0.000 pu 0.0°
REST PHASOR Iar:

 0.000 pu 0.0°
DIFF 2ND HARM Iad:

 0.0% fo 0.0°
DIFF 5TH HARM Iad:

 0.0% fo 0.0°
DIFF PHASOR Ibd:

 0.000 pu 0.0°
REST PHASOR Ibr:

 0.000 pu 0.0°
DIFF 2ND HARM Ibd:

 0.0% fo 0.0°
DIFF 5TH HARM Ibd:

 0.0% fo 0.0°
DIFF PHASOR Icd:

 0.000 pu 0.0°
REST PHASOR Icr:

 0.000 pu 0.0°
 DIFF 2ND HARM Icd:

0.0% fo 0.0° 6
DIFF 5TH HARM Icd:
 0.0% fo 0.0°
The metered differential current, restraint current, second harmonic current, and fifth harmonic current are displayed for
each phase. See the Percent Differential section in chapter 5 for details on how these values are calculated.
If differential current in any phase is below the hard-coded cutoff of 0.04 pu, then the differential, 2nd harmonic, and 5th
harmonic currents are forced to zero.
6.4.2.2 Interturn fault detection

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSFORMER  INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION  INTERTURN FAULT
DETECTION1(2)
 INTERTURN FAULT Raw Iad: Phase A raw (with no cutoff) percent differential
 DETECTION 1  0.0000 pu 0.0 º current phasor
Raw Ibd: Phase B raw (with no cutoff) percent differential

 0.0000 pu 0.0 º current phasor
Raw Icd: Phase C raw (with no cutoff) percent differential

 0.0000 pu 0.0 º current phasor
Comp Iad: Phase A voltage compensated differential current

 0.0000 pu 0.0 ° phasor

Comp Ibd: Phase B voltage compensated differential current

 0.0000 pu 0.0 ° phasor
Comp Icd: Phase C voltage compensated differential current

 0.0000 pu 0.0 ° phasor
KA: Phase A K-factor

 0.0000 pu 0.0 °
KB: Phase B K-factor

 0.0000 pu 0.0 °
KC: Phase C K-factor

 0.0000 pu 0.0 °
6.4.2.3 Thermal elements

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSFORMER  THERMAL ELEMENTS
 THERMAL ELEMENTS TOP OIL °C:
  70°C
HOTTEST-SPOT °C:
 30°C
AGING FACTOR:
 1.2 PU
DAILY RATE LOL:

 0.000 Hours
XFMR LIFE LOST:

 0.000 Hours
The daily rate loss of life is summarized at 00:00 h, and displayed for the next 24 hour period. The transformer
accumulated loss of life in hours is also available. It can be reset by either changing the XFMR INITIAL LOSS OF LIFE setting or
6 through the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  CLEAR LOSS OF LIFE RECORDS command.
6.4.3 Sources
6.4.3.1 Menu
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1
 SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE CURRENT See below
   SRC 1
 GROUND CURRENT See page 6-21

  SRC 1
 PHASE VOLTAGE See page 6-22

  SRC 1
 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE See page 6-22

  SRC 1
 POWER See page 6-23

  SRC 1
 FREQUENCY See page 6-24

  SRC 1
This menu displays the metered values available for each source.

Metered values presented for each source depend on the phase and auxiliary VTs and phase and ground CTs assignments
for this particular source. For example, if no phase VT is assigned to this source, then any voltage, energy, and power
values are unavailable.
6.4.3.2 Phase current metering

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE CURRENT
 PHASE CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000
 SRC 1  b: 0.000 c: 0.000 kA
SRC 1 RMS Ia:

 0.000 kA
SRC 1 RMS Ib:

 0.000 kA
SRC 1 RMS Ic:

 0.000 kA
SRC 1 RMS In:

 0.000 kA
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR In:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
6
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
 0.000 kA 0.0°
The metered phase current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text gets replaced by whatever name was
programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
6.4.3.3 Ground current metering

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  GROUND CURRENT
 GROUND CURRENT SRC 1 RMS Ig:
 SRC 1  0.0 A
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:

 0.0 A 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:

 0.000 kA 0.0°
The metered ground current values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text is replaced by the name programmed by
the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).

6.4.3.4 Phase voltage metering

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  PHASE VOLTAGE
 PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vag:
 SRC 1  0.0 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:

 0.0 V
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:

 0.0 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:

 0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:

 0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:

 0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 RMS Vab:

 0.0 V
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:

 0.0 V
SRC 1 RMS Vca:

 0.0 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:

 0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:

 0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:

 0.0 V 0.0°
6  SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:

0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:

 0.0 V 0.0°
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:

 0.0 V 0.0°
The metered phase voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text is replaced by the name programmed by
6.4.3.5 Auxiliary voltage metering

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
 AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1 RMS Vx:
 SRC 1  0.00 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:

 0.00 V 0.0°
The metered auxiliary voltage values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text is replaced by the name programmed by

6.4.3.6 Power metering

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  POWER
 POWER SRC 1 REAL POWER
 SRC 1  3φ: 0.000 kW
SRC 1 REAL POWER

 φa: 0.000 kW
SRC 1 REAL POWER

 φb: 0.000 kW
SRC 1 REAL POWER

 φc: 0.000 kW
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

 3φ: 0.000 kvar
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

 φa: 0.000 kvar
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

 φb: 0.000 kvar
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR

 φc: 0.000 kvar
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

 3φ: 0.000 kVA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

 φa: 0.000 kVA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

 φb: 0.000 kVA
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR

 φc: 0.000 kVA
 SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

3φ: 1.000 6
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR
 φa: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

 φb: 1.000
SRC 1 POWER FACTOR

 φc: 1.000
This menu displays metered values for real, reactive, and apparent power, as well as power factor. The "SRC 1" text is
replaced by the name programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL
SOURCES).
When VTs are configured in wye, the T35 calculates power in each phase and three-phase power is measured as
S = VA x ÎA + VB x ÎB + VC x ÎC Eq. 6-1
When VTs are configured in delta, the T35 does not calculate power in each phase and three-phase power is measured as
S = VAB x ÎA + VCB x ÎC Eq. 6-2
where
S is the apparent power
VA, VB, VC, IA, IB, IC are phase voltage and phase current phasors
VAB and VCB are phase-to-phase voltage phasors
Î is the conjugate of I

6.4.3.7 Frequency metering

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  SOURCE SRC 1  FREQUENCY
 FREQUENCY SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
 SRC 1  0.000 Hz
The metered frequency values are displayed in this menu. The "SRC 1" text is replaced by the name programmed by the
user for the associated source (see SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SIGNAL SOURCES).
SOURCE FREQUENCY is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
(see the SYSTEM SETUP  POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The final
frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
6.4.4 Tracking frequency

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRACKING FREQUENCY
 TRACKING FREQUENCY TRACKING FREQUENCY:
  60.00 Hz
ACTIVE FREQ AND PHS REF:

 MAIN
MAIN REF FREQUENCY:

 60.00 Hz
ALT REF FREQUENCY:

 60.00 Hz
The Tracking Frequency and the Active Frequency and Phase Reference are metered as shown here. The tracking
frequency is calculated from the signals defined in the Active Frequency and Phase Reference. Note that based on the
signal availability and the settings defined in the Main and Alternate Frequency and Phase Reference, the Active Frequency
and Phase Reference might be switched between main and alternate frequency reference in runtime.
6 The frequency calculated in main and alternate reference respectively are also metered as shown here. They will be
displayed as 0 if the signal in this reference is lost or it’s not configured.
6.4.5 FlexElements
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
 FLEXELEMENT 1 FLEXELEMENT 1
  OpSig: 0.000
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 6-2: FlexElement base units
Base unit Description
BREAKER ACC ARCING AMPS BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Acc Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BREAKER ARCING AMPS BASE = 1 kA2 × cycle
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
DCmA BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs BASE = 100°C

Base unit Description

SOURCE CURRENT IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE POWER PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Xfmr Iad, Ibd, and Icd Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
XFMR DIFFERENTIAL HARMONIC BASE = 100%
CONTENT
XFMR RESTRAINING CURRENT IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and -IN inputs
(Xfmr Iar, Ibr, and Icr Mag) (CT primary for source currents, and transformer reference primary current for transformer
6.4.6 RxGOOSE analogs

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  RxGOOSE Analogs
 RxGOOSE RxGOOSE Analog 1
 Analogs  0.000

RxGOOSE Analog 32
 0.000
RxGOOSE An1 ExpnSt:

 Off
The RxGOOSE Analog values display in this menu. The RxGOOSE Analog values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE 6
messages sent from other devices.
6.4.7 Restricted ground fault

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS  RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(6)
 RESTRICTED RGF 1 DIFF Igd:
 GROUND FAULT 1  0.000 kA
RGF 1 RESTR Igr:

 0.000 kA
This menu displays the differential and restraint current values for the restricted ground fault element.
6.4.8 Transducer inputs/outputs

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT xx
 DCMA INPUT xx DCMA INPUT xx
  0.000 mA
Actual values for each DCmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.

REMOTE RESOURCES CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT xx

 RTD INPUT xx RTD INPUT xx
  -50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value.
6.4.9 Harmonic detection

ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  HARMONIC DETECTION  HARMONIC DETECTOR 1(6)
 HARMONIC DET 1 HARMONIC DET 1
  IA: 0.0%
HARMONIC DET 1
 IB: 0.0%
HARMONIC DET 1
 IC: 0.0%
HARMONIC DET 1
 IAVG: 0.0%
HARMONIC DET 1
 IG: 0.0%
6.5 Remote resources

6.5.1 Field unit
6 ACTUAL VALUES  REMOTE RESOURCES  FIELD UNIT U1(U8)
 FIELD UNIT U1 FIELD UNIT STATUS: Range: Disabled, Enabled
 ID: U 1  DISABLED
BRICK SERIAL NUMBER:


BRICK ORDER CODE:
 CC-55
BRICK DIGITAL CORE:

 0
LOCAL TRANSCEIVER:
 TX POWER: 0.0 dBm
BRICK TRANSCEIVER
 RX POWER: 0.0 dBm
BRICK TRANSCEIVER
 TX POWER: 0.0 dBm
LOCAL TRANSCEIVER
 RX POWER: 0.0 dBm
This menu displays when using a Process Bus Module for a HardFiber Brick.

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES PROCESS BUS MODULE
6.6 Process Bus Module

6.6.1 General status
ACTUAL VALUES  PB MODULE  GENERAL STATUS
 GENERAL STATUS NETWORK CONFIG: Range: INDEPENDENT, PRP, HSR, Dual HSR
  INDEPENDENT
Port 1a Status: Range: Disabled, Enabled, Active

 Disabled

Port 4b Status: Range: Disabled, Enabled, Active
 Disabled
These menus display when the product includes a Process Bus Module with order code 85, 86, or 87. The
actual values display on the front panel and software. Additional values display in a web browser; enter the IP
address of the relay and access the Process Card Menu.
Ports applicable to the Process Bus Module display. The example shows all eight ports.
The information also displays in a web browser under Process Card Menu > Process Card Port Information.
6.6.2 RxSV status

ACTUAL VALUES  PB MODULE  RxSV Status
 RxSV Status All RxSV Online: Range: Yes, No
  No
 RxSV 1 See below

 
 6
 RxSV 8
 
ACTUAL VALUES  PB MODULE  RxSV Status  RxSV1(8)

 RxSV 1 SV 1 Status: Range: Off, On, Not Configured
  Off
SV 1 Sync Status: Range: Local, Global, No Sync

 No Sync
SV 1 SynchSrcID: Range: Any 8-octet value

 0000000000000000
SV 1 Sim Flag: Range: Off, On

 Off
SV 1 Delay: Range: µs
 0 µs
SV 1 Missed Frames: Range: Yes, No

 No
SV 1 Ch 1 Quality: Range: 0000000000000

 0

SV 1 Ch16 Quality:
 0

PROCESS BUS MODULE CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Additional actual values for sampled values display in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the relay and access Process
Card Menu > Process Card Diagnostics, for which the following fields are explained.
All SV diagnostics are volatile and are cleared when power is cycled.
Sample Value processing delay...Min Delay — The minimum time delay in received sample values. The accuracy threshold of
this diagnostics is within 1/8 of a power system cycle.
Sample Value processing delay...Max Delay — The maximum time delay in received sample values. The accuracy threshold of
this diagnostics is within 1/8 of a power system cycle.
Sample Value processing delay...Avg Delay — The average time delay for received sample values. A delay up to about 1.5
milliseconds (1500 µsec) is normal. The accuracy threshold of this diagnostics is within 1/8 of a power system cycle.
SV Delay Alarm Counter — The number of times that sampled values from a configured SV stream are delayed for more than
the Settings > Process Bus Module > General > SV Delay Alarm setting. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.
Sample Estimation Counter — The number of times that the relay used an internal estimation algorithm to substitute a
missing sample value. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.
Stream Status — The status of a configured SV stream. If the Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config > SV Stream
setting is set to Disabled, this value is shown as Disabled. If the setting is set to IEC 61850-9-2LE or IEC 61869-9 and
received sample values are accepted by the relay, this value is shown as Online. If received sample values are rejected, or
sample values are lost (frames not received), stream status changes to Offline.
Latest Unacceptable Quality — Time stamp of the latest sample value with unacceptable quality, in any data item in a
dataset. This time stamp has 1/8 of a power system cycle accuracy threshold.
Latest Sim Bit Change — The time stamp of latest change in simulation bit status of the received RxSV# messages. This time
stamp has 1/8 of a power system cycle accuracy threshold.
SmpSync Latest Update Time — The time stamp of the latest sample value for which the SmpSync attribute was different
from the previous samples. This value determines when the time source that sample value stream is synchronized to has
changed. This time stamp has 1/8 of a power system cycle accuracy threshold.
SmpSync Changes in Past 24hrs — The number of times the SmpSync attribute in the sample value messages from this
stream has changed in the past 24 hours. This counter is updated every hour. Counters wrap around when they reach
4294967295. The accuracy of this metric is 1.5 hours over a 24-hour period.
6 Sample Estimate Fail-Last 10s — The number of times that three or more out of five consecutive samples has been lost in the
last 10 seconds. This counter is updated every second. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.
Sample Value Trouble Counter — The number of times that the SV Stream Trouble On minor self-test error is detected by the
Process Bus Module. Counters wrap around when they reach 4294967295.
6.6.3 Time synchronizing

ACTUAL VALUES  PB MODULE  TIME SYNC
 TIME SYNC Sync Source: Range: CPU Clock, PBM PTP Clock, PBM Internal
  None Clock, None
Grandmaster ID: Range: any 8 octet value

 00000000000000000
Accuracy: Range: 0 to 999,999,999 ns

 0 ns
Additional actual values for time are available under Actual Values > Status > Real Time Clock Synchronizing.
Sync Source — This is the time synchronizing source that the UR Process Bus Module is using at present. It displays CPU
Clock when the 1 pulse per second (PPS) signal from the main CPU drives the Process Bus Module clock. It displays None
when the Process Bus Module clock free runs. It displays SV Sync Stream when the Process Bus Module clock is
synchronized to the configured reference stream. It displays PBM Clock when the Process Bus Module clock is
synchronized to a PTP grandmaster clock. The time synchronizing source itself is set using SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
REAL TIME CLOCK and SETTINGS  PROCESS BUS MODULE  PBM PTP  PTP FUNCTION. If the latter is not set, then the Sync
Source displays None even when the REAL TIME CLOCK setting is configured.

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES PROCESS BUS MODULE
Grandmaster ID — This is the grandmaster clock (grandmasterIdentity) of the present PTP network if any. When the UR
Process Bus Module is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is set to the ID of that relay and the relay is acting
as grandmaster in the network. The ID code is specified by PTP to be globally unique, so one can always know which clock
is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable clocks.
Accuracy — This is the estimated time error based on the clockAccuracy information embedded in the received time signal.
This actual value indicates the grandmaster clock accuracy. The clockAccuracy enumeration information received from
the grandmaster is translated into nanoseconds as specified in the following table. The value 999,999,999 indicates that
the magnitude of the estimated error is one second or more, or that the error cannot be estimated. The value 999,999,999
is used if the clockAccuracy received from grandmaster is in the ranges: 00 - 1F and 2F - FF. If the relay is the grandmaster,
the actual value indicates the estimated accuracy of the local clock and the same information is embedded in the
transmitted PTP messages. See defaultDS.clockQuality.clockAccuracy for more information.
Table 6-3: Clock accuracy
Value (hex) Specification
00-1F Reserved
20 The time is accurate to within 25 ns
23 The time is accurate to within 1 µs
24 The time is accurate to within 2.5 µs
29 The time is accurate to within 1 ms
2A The time is accurate to within 2.5 ms
2B The time is accurate to within 10 ms
2C The time is accurate to within 25 ms
2D
2E
The time is accurate to within 100 ms
The time is accurate to within 250 ms
6
2F The time is accurate to within 1 s
30 The time is accurate to within 10 s
31 The time is accurate to greater than 10 s
32-7F Reserved
80-FD For use by alternate PTP profiles
FE Unknown
FF Reserved
6.6.4 PRP
ACTUAL VALUES  PB Module PBM PRP Status
 PBM PRP Status Total Rx Port A: Range: 0 t0 4G

  0
Total Rx Port B: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
Total Errors Port A: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0

PROCESS BUS MODULE CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Total Errors Port B: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
Mismatches Port A: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
Mismatches Port B: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
FER Port A: Range: 0 t0 4G
 0
FER Port B: Range: 0 t0 4G

 0
Link Active Port A: Range: Yes, No

 No
Link Active Port B: Range: Yes, No

 No
Total Rx Port A Counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on
Port A
Total Rx Port B Counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on
Port B
Total Errors Port A Counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame
length too short) on Port A
Total Errors Port B Counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame
length too short) on Port B
Mismatches Port A Counter for total messages received with an error on Port A (PRP frame, but
port received through and LAN id in the frame don’t match)
Mismatches Port B Counter for total messages received with an error on Port B (PRP frame, but
6 port received through and LAN id in the frame don’t match),
FER Port A Frame Error Rate is a counter which counts Erroneous messages on channel
A for every 1000 messages forwarded to Application.
FER Port B Frame Error Rate is a counter which counts Erroneous messages on channel
B for every 1000 messages forwarded to Application.
Link Active Port A If true, link is up and channel A is receiving telegrams within a specified time
interval (5 s).
Link Active Port B If true, link is up and channel B is receiving telegrams within a specified time
interval (5 s).
.
Actual values for the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) display in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the relay and
access the Process Card Menu > Process Card PRP Statistics, which displays only when PRP is used.

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS
PRP Status — PRP is Enabled if Settings > Process Bus Module > General > Network Config is set to PRP, else it is Disabled.
Total Rx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port A, for example port 1a.
Total Rx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port B, for example port 1b.
Total Tx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port A, for example port 1a.
Total Tx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port B, for example port 1b.
Mismatches Port A — Counter indicating the number of erroneous frames received on port A, for example port 1a.
Mismatches Port B — Counter indicating the number of erroneous frames received on port B, for example port 1b.
Duplicates Removed Port A — Number of PRP duplicate frames received from port A and discarded, for example port 1a.
Duplicates Removed Port B — Number of PRP duplicate frames received from port B and discarded, for example port 1b.
6.6.5 HSR
Actual values for High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) display in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the relay 6
and access the Process Card Menu > Process Card HSR Statistics, which displays only when HSR is used.
HSR1 Status — Status of the first ring, either enabled or disabled. Enabled when redundancy is set to HSR or Dual-HSR.
HSR2 Status — Status of the second ring, either enabled or disabled. Enabled when redundancy is set to HSR or Dual-HSR.
Total Rx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port A, for example port 1a.
Total Rx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames received on port B for example port 1b.
Total Tx Port A — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port A, for example port 1a.
Total Tx Port B — Counter indicating the number of frames sent on port B, for example port 1b.
Duplicates Removed Port A — Number of HSR duplicate frames received from port A and discarded, for example port 1a.
Duplicates Removed Port B — Number of HSR duplicate frames received from port B and discarded, for example port 1b.
6.7 Records
6.7.1 User programmable fault reports
ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  USER PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS
 USER PROGRAMMABLE NEWEST RECORD
 FAULT REPORTS  NUMBER: 0

RECORDS CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
LAST CLEARED DATE:

 2020/08/11 14:23:57
LAST REPORT DATE:

 2020/10/09 08:25:27
This menu displays the user-programmable fault report actual values. See the User Programmable Fault Report section in
chapter 5 for information on this feature.
6.7.2 Event records

6.7.2.1 Enhanced and standard front panels
ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  EVENT RECORDS
 EVENT RECORDS EVENT: XXX
  XXX
 Date and time stamps
EVENT: 3 EVENT 3
 POWER ON   DATE: 2020/07/14
EVENT: 2 EVENT 3
 POWER OFF  TIME: 14:53:00.03405
EVENT: 1
 EVENTS CLEARED
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological
order from most recent to oldest. When all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record is removed as a new
record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated
with the event trigger. See the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
Only major output operands generate events, not every operand. Elements that assert output per phase, for example, log
operating phase output only without asserting the common three-phase operand event.
6 See also the system log (syslog) information in the previous chapter.
The event records are viewable in the software and in a web browser. The figure shows the event records in the software.

Figure 6-6: Event records viewed in EnerVista software
To view events in a web browser:

1. Enter the IP address of the device.
To download an oscillography waveform:
1. Click the Oscillography icon in the Data column (not shown in the figure).

To display the event records page, press the Home pushbutton then the Event Record Tab pushbutton.
The newest event is always at the top.
6
Up and Down pushbuttons move the event selector up and down. When the selector is at the bottom of the display, the
Down pushbutton also scrolls the page, and similarly when the active selector is at the top of the display the Up
pushbutton scroll the page.
A selected event is highlighted in yellow and becomes active by pressing the Up or Down pushbutton.
There are two event markers, one green, the other cyan. To mark some an event, use the Up and Down pushbuttons to
select it (highlight in yellow), then press the green or cyan Mark Event Tab pushbutton. The mark color hides the selector
until the selector is moved. A field at the top of the page shows the interval between the two marks.

RECORDS CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 6-7: Event record
6.7.3 Oscillography

ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY FORCE TRIGGER? Range: No, Yes
  No
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
 0
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
 0
CYCLES PER RECORD:


6 0
LAST CLEARED DATE:

 2019/07/14 15:40:16
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The cycles
per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography
section of chapter 5 for details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting “Yes” to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. See the COMMANDS  CLEAR
RECORDS menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.
To view a waveform:
2. Access Actual Values > Records > Oscillography in the EnerVista software.
3. In the window that opens, select the record number. The highest number is the most recent record (Newest Record
Number).
4. Click the Read button to get the waveform. When available, waveforms are displayed graphically, and otherwise error
messages display.
5. In the waveform window that opens, you can save the file, for example with the CFG extension.
6.7.4 Data logger

ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:
  2020/01/14 13:45:51

NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:

 2020/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It is static until the log gets
full, at which time it starts counting at the defined sampling rate.
The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling
rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then both values are static.
See the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.
6.7.5 Breaker maintenance

ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  MAINTENANCE  BREAKER 1(6)
 BREAKER 1 BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP
  φA: 0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP

 φB: 0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP

 φC: 0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 OPERATING TIME

 φA: 0 ms

 φB: 0 ms

 φC: 0 ms
BKR 1 OPERATING
 TIME: 0 ms
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φA:

 0.00 kA2-cyc
 BKR 1 ARCING AMP φB: 6

0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φC:

 0.00 kA2-cyc
BKR 1 AMP MAX φA:

 0.00 kA
BKR 1 AMP MAX φB:

 0.00 kA
BKR 1 AMP MAX φC:

 0.00 kA
There is an identical menu for each of the breakers.

The BKR 1 ACC ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2-cycles. See the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing
breaker arcing current records.
The BREAKER OPERATING TIME is defined as the slowest operating time of breaker poles that were initiated to open.
All of the values are stored in non-volatile memory and retained with power cycling.

PRODUCT INFORMATION CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.7.6 Through-fault monitoring

ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  MAINTENANCE  TRANSFORMER THRU FAULT MONITORING 1(3)
 THROUGH FAULT THRU FLT 1 CNT A: Range: 0 to 2000
 MONITORING 1  0
THRU FLT 1 CNT B: Range: 0 to 2000

 0
THRU FLT 1 CNT C: Range: 0 to 2000

 0
THRU FLT 1 TOT ACC Range: 0.000 to 10.000 pu

 A: 0.000 pu

 B: 0.000 pu

 C: 0.000 pu
THRU FLT 1 EV# TIME: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2020/07/14 15:40:16
THRU FLT 1 EV# Range: 0.0 to 120.0 cyc in steps of 0.5

 DURATION: 0.0 cyc
THRU FLT 1 EV# MAX Range: 0.00 to 50.00 pu in steps of 0.01

 CUR A: 0.00 pu

 CUR B: 0.00 pu

 CUR C: 0.00 pu
THRU FLT 1 EV# ACC: Range: 0.0000 to 2.0000 pu in steps of 0.0001

 A: 0.0000 pu
6  THRU FLT 1 EV# ACC:

B: 0.0000 pu
Range: 0.0000 to 2.0000 pu in steps of 0.0001
THRU FLT 1 EV# ACC: Range: 0.0000 to 2.0000 pu in steps of 0.0001

 C: 0.0000 pu
6.8 Product information

6.8.1 Model information
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION
 MODEL INFORMATION ORDER CODE LINE 1: Range: standard GE order code format
  T35-A00-AAA-A0A-A0A-
ORDER CODE LINE 2: Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

 A0A-A0A-A0A



SERIAL NUMBER: Range: standard GE serial number format


CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFORMATION
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format

 000000000000
MANUFACTURING DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS


OPERATING TIME: Range: HH:MM:SS
 0:00:00
PMU FEATURE ACTIVE: Range: Yes, No

 No
CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG Range: Yes, No

 ACTIVE: No
LAST SETTING CHANGE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2019/01/01 23:11:19
PBM MAC ADDRESS: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 664422113344
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.
The rear panel on the device contains similar information. The information is read-only in the software and modifiable on
the front panel. For example, the order code can be corrected using the front panel.
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS — UR devices with firmware 7.0x and above have three Ethernet ports that can be used on three
networks. The MAC address displays for port 1. The MAC address for port 2 is one higher. The MAC address for port 3 is one
higher than port 2. In redundant mode, the MAC addresses for ports 2 and 3 are the same as port 2.
PBM MAC ADDRESS — The MAC address for the Process Bus Module.
6.8.2 Firmware revisions

ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  FIRMWARE REVISIONS
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
  T35
REVISION: 7.9x
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the application firmware.
6
MODIFICATION FILE Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
 NUMBER: 0 Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 7.06 Revision number of the boot program firmware.
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 2.01 Revision number of front panel program firmware.
COMPILE DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2021/04/09 04:55:16 Date and time when product firmware was built.
BOOT DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2021/02/23 16:41:32 Date and time when the boot program was built.
PROCESS BUS BOOT Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 0.00
PB BOOT DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2018/09/15 04:55:16
PROCESS BUS Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 7.9x
PROCESS BUS DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2018/09/15 04:55:16

PRODUCT INFORMATION CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
PB CVSOC FPGA Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 0.00
PB CVFPGA FPGA Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 0.00
PB CVFPGA SIGN: Range:

 33272
FPGA PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 02.02 Revision number for FPGA.
FPGA DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2016/09/15 16:41:32 Date and time when the FPGA was built.
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed. PB and process bus refer to the Process Bus Module.

With a graphical front panel (GFP), the following additional items display in the software.
GFP PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35
 REVISION: 7.80
GFP COMPILE DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2018/09/15 04:55:16
GFP BOOT PROGRAM Range: 0.00 to 655.35

 REVISION: 655.35
GFP BOOT COMP. DATE: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

 2016/09/15 04:55:16

Chapter 7: Commands and targets
Commands and targets
This chapter outlines the Commands and Targets menus and self-tests/error messages. Commands related to the IEC
61850 protocol are outlined in the IEC 61850 section of the Settings chapter. Log/error messages for IEC 61850 are
outlined in the UR Family Communications Guide.
7.1 Commands menu
COMMANDS

 COMMANDS
  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS
  CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS
  SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS
  RELAY MAINTENANCE
 COMMANDS
  SECURITY
 COMMANDS
  TRANSFORMER AUTO-SET...
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash
message appears after successfully command entry.
COMMAND
EXECUTED

COMMANDS MENU CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1.1 Virtual inputs

COMMANDS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS Virt Ip 1 Range: Off, On
 VIRTUAL INPUTS  Off
Virt Ip 2 Range: Off, On

 Off

Virt Ip 128 Range: Off, On
 Off
The states of up to 128 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status is a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).
7.1.2 Clear records

COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS CLEAR USER FAULT Range: No, Yes
 CLEAR RECORDS  REPORTS? No
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? Range: No, Yes

 No
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? Range: No, Yes

 No
CLEAR DATA LOGGER? Range: No, Yes

 No
CLEAR BREAKER 1 Range: No, Yes

 ARCING AMPS? No
CLEAR BREAKER 2 Range: No, Yes

 ARCING AMPS? No
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED Range: No, Yes

 ACCESS? No
CLEAR DIRECT I/O Range: No, Yes.

 COUNTERS? No Valid only for units with Direct Input/Output module.
7  CLEAR TELEPROTECT
COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR THROUGH Range: No, Yes

 FAULT MON? No
 CLEAR IEC61850 See below

  XWSI OPCNT
 CLEAR IEC61850 See below

  XCBR OPCNT
CLEAR SV Range: No, Yes

 DIAGNOSTICS? No
CLEAR ALL RELAY Range: No, Yes

 RECORDS? No
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a
command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to
“No.”

CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS COMMANDS MENU
CLEAR SV DIAGNOSTICS — Clears the sampled value diagnostics information for a non-HardFiber Process Bus Module. All
other Process Bus Module diagnostics information is reset up relay power cycling, such as HSR and PTP.
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  CLEAR IEC61850 XWSI OPCNT
 CLEAR IEC61850 CLEAR XSWI 1 Range: No, Yes
 XWSI OPCNT  OpCnt? No

CLEAR XSWI 24 Range: No, Yes
 OpCnt? No
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  CLEAR IEC61850 XCBR OPCNT

 CLEAR IEC61850 CLEAR XCBR 1 Range: No, Yes
 XCBR OPCNT  OpCnt? No

CLEAR XCBR 8 Range: No, Yes
 OpCnt? No
The Clear XSWI commands clear the disconnect operation counters for each phase and the three-phase counter. Similarly,
the Clear XCBR commands clear the circuit breaker operation counters for each phase and the three-phase counter.
7.1.3 Set date and time

COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME: Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
 SET DATE AND TIME  2020/01/14 13:47:03
The date and time can be entered on the front panel keypad. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete
date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time and date take effect when the
ENTER key is pressed.
The clock also can be synchronized to the local computer time among several UR devices. Use the Synchronize Devices
entry in the Online Window area of the EnerVista software. (Click the button at the top of the window that opens.)
When the relay is synchronizing to an external time source such as PTP, IRIG-B, or SNTP, the manually entered time or the
manually synchronized time is over-written.
The timescale of the entered time is local time, including daylight savings time where and when applicable.
7
7.1.4 Relay maintenance
COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE
 COMMANDS PERFORM LAMP TEST? Range: No, Yes
 RELAY MAINTENANCE  No
PERFORM LCD TEST? Range: Off, Red, Green, Blue, White & Text Pattern,
 Off Black & Text Pattern, TV Test Pattern
PERFORM PUSHBUTTON Range: No, Yes

 TEST? No
UPDATE ORDER CODE? Range: No, Yes

 No
REBOOT RELAY? Range: No, Yes

 No
SERVICE COMMAND Range: 0, 101, 20511

 0

COMMANDS MENU CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
SAVE VOLATILE DATA? Range: No, Yes

 No
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are
activated by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting then automatically
reverts to “No.” The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.
Not all commands display in the software; use the front panel when required.
PERFORM LAMP TEST — Turns on all front panel LEDs and display pixels for a short duration.
PERFORM LCD TEST — This command detects either stuck-ON or stuck-OFF pixels (dead pixels) in the display screen on the
graphical front panel. RED/GREEN/BLUE is to display the solid background color in the whole screen. WHITE & TEXT
PATTERN shows the white background and black texts. BLACK & TEXT PATTERN shows the black background and white
texts. TV TEST PATTERN displays a standard television test pattern (SMPTE color bars). The test screen can be canceled by
pressing any pushbutton or after 30 seconds of inactivity.
PERFORM PUSHBUTTON TEST — This command tests the pushbuttons on the graphical front panel. During testing, press the
corresponding pushbutton according to the prompt text. A failure message is given if the expected action is not detected
in one minute. Holding the ESCAPE button for five seconds to interrupt the test sequence. The designated function of a
specific pushbutton is bypassed in the test.
UPDATE ORDER CODE — Use this command to read and update the order code, for example when hardware modules have
been changed inside the relay. It causes the relay to scan the backplane for the modules and update the order code to
match. All settings are defaulted with an update. When an update occurs, the following message displays and the relay
restarts.
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message displays.
REBOOT RELAY — Restarts the relay so that changes to configuration settings can take effect. In most cases, if changes are
made to the configuration settings these changes do not take effect unless the relay is rebooted.
With the CyberSentry option, the Administrator and Operator roles can initiate the Reboot Relay command.
SERVICE COMMAND — Performs specific T35 service actions. Presently, there are two service actions available. Code "20511"
returns all settings to their factory default value and restarts the relay (then you re-enter IP address, restart, set unit to
"Programmed"). Code “101” is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a code
other than these two is entered, the command is ignored and no action is taken. Various self-checking diagnostics are
performed in the background while the T35 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile memory
from time to time based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the T35 is
shipped from the factory, the user may want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain
7 circumstances. For example, you clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic
information is cleared, all self-checking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics restart from scratch.
SAVE VOLATILE DATA — Saves this data to compact flash memory prior to shutdown. This allows the saved data to be as
recent as possible instead of relying on the periodic timer to save the data.
7.1.5 Security
COMMANDS  SECURITY
 SECURITY ADMINISTRATOR Range: Yes, No
  LOGOFF: No
ENGINEER Range: Yes, No

 LOGOFF: No
OPERATOR Range: Yes, No

 LOGOFF: No
CLEAR SECURITY DATA: Range: Yes, No

 No

CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS TARGETS MENU
With the CyberSentry option, this setting is available to enable or disable the following commands.
ADMINISTRATOR LOGOFF — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an administrator session.
ENGINEER LOGOFF — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an engineer session.
OPERATOR LOGOFF — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an operator session.
CLEAR SECURITY DATA — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully clear all the security logs and clears all the
operands associated with the self-tests.
7.1.6 Transformer auto-setting

COMMANDS  TRANSFORMER AUTO-SETTING  INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION1(2)
 INTERTURN FAULT RECALC INTTURN FLT Range: Yes, No
 DETECTION 1  DET 1 K-FACTORS?
When INTERTURN FLT DET 1 AUTOSET MODE is selected as Manual, this command can be used to require new K-factors for
the Interturn Fault Detection element to be calculated by the relay and written to this function.
When applying this command and a "XFMR INTTURN 1 K-FACTOR RECALC FAIL" message displays, it means that the
update of K-factors is not applied, for example due to INTERTURN FLT DET 1 SUPV SRC voltage or current not satisfying the
supervisory conditions (see the logic diagram). As a result, update request should be tried another time. When successful,
a "XFMR INTTURN 1 K-FACTOR APPLIED" message displays and this command feature switches to 'No' itself.
7.2 Targets menu
TARGETS

DIGITAL COUNTER 1: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
 LATCHED Example shown.
DIGITAL COUNTER 16: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
 LATCHED Example shown.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 48: Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
 LATCHED

Example shown.
7

A target enables the EnerVista UR Setup software to monitor automatically and display the status of any active target
messages of all the devices inserted into that site.
Each T35 element with a TARGET setting has a target message that when activated by its element is displayed in sequence
with any other currently active target messages in the TARGETS menu. In the example shown, the Phase TOC4 and Digital
Element 48 target settings are active and so have their targets displayed. And the Digital Counter 1 and Digital Counter 16
target settings are active (and none between the two) and so have their targets displayed. The down arrow below the two
elements indicates that there can be other active elements beyond these two.
For more information, see the description of target messages in the next section, and the Introduction to Elements section
in the Settings chapter for instructions on TARGET setting.
When no targets are active, the display reads NO ACTIVE TARGETS.

TARGETS MENU CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.2.1 Target messages

When there are no active targets, the first target to become active causes the display to immediately default to that
message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message
timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display again defaults back to the
target message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information is included if applicable. If a target
message status changes, the status with the highest priority displays.
Table 7-1: Target message priority status
Priority Active status Description
1 OP element operated and still picked up
2 PKP element picked up and timed out
3 LATCHED element had operated but has dropped out
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7.2.2 Relay self-tests
7.2.2.1 Description
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major
and minor) are listed in the following tables. When either type of error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator turns on and a
target message displays. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
• The critical fail relay on the power supply module de-energizes
• All other output relays de-energize and are prevented from further operation
• The front panel In Service LED indicator turns off
• A RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
To view error messages in EnerVista software:
1. Access Actual Values > Records > Event Records.
7
Messages display on the front panel with one or two lines of text. An example is as follows. In the tables that follow,
messages are grouped using the first line of text. For example, MAINTENANCE ALERT, then a row for 4L Discrepancy, then a
row for Bad IRIG-B Signal.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
Bad IRIG-B Signal
7.2.2.2 Major self-test error messages

The major self-test errors are outlined in this section.

Table 7-2: Major self-test errors

Error Latched? Description Test frequency Action
DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE ___:
Self Test Error No Internal recovery failure Upon recovery Extract a Service Report through UR
detected Setup software. Contact technical
support and supply details of the
failure code on the display.
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH:
2nd line detail No The number or type of On power up. Check all modules against the order
installed hardware modules Afterwards, the code, ensure they are inserted
does not match the order backplane is properly, and cycle control power. If a
code stored in the T35. An checked for missing module has intentionally been added
example is when a basic front cards every five or removed, refresh the order code
panel is installed and the seconds under Device Setup. If the problem
order code on the T35 persists, contact the factory.
expects a graphical front
panel. As another example,
"Card F8L Missing" means
that hardware module 8L is
missing from slot F inside the
UR device.
FLEXLOGIC ERROR:
2nd line detail No A FlexLogic equation is Event driven, Finish all equation editing and use self
incorrect performed whenever tests to debug any errors.
FlexLogic equations
are modified
RAM FILESYSTEM FAIL:
Self-Test Error Yes The relay failed to create the On relay startup Contact factory service
RAM file system
SYSTEM FAILURE ___:
2nd line detail Yes Relay system failure detected Continuous Extract a Service Report through UR
Setup software. Contact technical
support and supply details of the
failure code on the display.
SYSTEM FAILURE:
Card F8L Yes This is an indication that the The recommendation is to replace this
DSP module has failed. The DSP. Extract a Service Report through
slot and DSP type are UR Setup software and provide it to GE
indicated in the message. customer service.
TO INSTALL SETTINGS:
CHECK LOG AND REBOOT Yes Certain settings require a A new CID is sent Restart relay 7
reboot to be applied, for and it includes
example DNP settings, IEC changes in settings
104 settings. After a CID file that require a reboot
was send to the relay, a to be
manual reboot of the relay is applied
required to apply those
settings that require a
reboot
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED:
Check Settings No The PRODUCT SETUP  On power up and Program all settings and then set
INSTALLATION  RELAY whenever the PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION
SETTINGS setting indicates PRODUCT SETUP  RELAY SETTINGS to “Programmed”
the T35 is not programmed  INSTALLATION
 RELAY SETTINGS
setting is altered
7.2.2.3 Minor self-test error messages

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. See the settings in the User-programmable Self-tests section in chapter
5.

Table 7-3: Minor self-test errors

DIAGNOSTIC ALARM COP:
Self-test Error Yes This is a preliminary warning Module or feature Extract a Service Report through UR
that transient errors were dependent Setup software and provide it to GE
detected in the coprocessor. customer service
The relay remains operational
but some elements can
operate slightly delayed.
DIAGNOSTIC ALARM DSP:
Card F8L Yes This is a preliminary warning Every protection Extract a Service Report through UR
that there is something wrong pass Setup software and provide it to GE
with a DSP. The slot and DSP customer service
type is indicated in the
message.
DIAGNOSTICS FAILURE Yes This is a warning that there is Every protection Extract a Service Report through UR
something wrong with the pass Setup software and provide it to GE
DSP/coprocessor subsystem. customer service
The source of the problem is
unknown as there are
multiple contributors.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF:
COMM Path Incomplete No A direct device is configured Every second Check direct input and output
but not connected configuration and wiring
DOS PARTITION ALARM:
SELF-TEST ERROR There is a problem with the On relay power-up Contact the factory
Compact Flash memory in the and afterwards once
CPU module every 24 hours
FACTORY MODE ACTIVE No Factory Mode is active This is a reminder for the Supervisor (if
enabled) or Administrator to disable
Settings > Product Setup > Security >
Supervisory > Factory Service Mode
as soon as it is not needed
LOW ON MEMORY:
with 2nd line detail Yes The relay periodically checks Every five seconds Contact the factory
the amount of free RAM
memory available and the
amount of free stack
available for each task
against pre-defined
7 thresholds. The second line of
the self-test indicates which
of the tests failed. It asserts
this self-test if those tests fail.
MAINTENANCE ALERT:
4L Discrepancy No A discrepancy has been Upon initiation of a Verify the state of the output contact
detected between the actual contact output state and contact the factory if the problem
and desired state of a change persists
latching contact output of an
installed type “4L” module
Bad IRIG-B Signal No A bad IRIG-B input signal has Monitored whenever Ensure the following:
been detected an IRIG-B signal is - The IRIG-B cable is properly
received connected.
- Proper cable functionality (that is,
check for physical damage or perform
a continuity test).
- The IRIG-B receiver is functioning.
- Check the input signal level (it can be
less than specification).
If none of these apply, then contact the
factory.


Bad PB PTP Signal No No PTP enabled port has Activated when no Ensure the following:
Bad PTP Signal good PTP signal input acceptable signal is - The Ethernet cable(s) are properly
being received connected.
- At least one PTP grandmaster-
capable clock is functioning.
- If a strict power profile (PP) is enabled,
that entire network is PP compliant.
- The network is delivering PTP
messages to the relay.
Direct Ring Break No Direct input and output Every second Check direct input and output
settings are configured for a configuration and wiring
ring, but the connection is not
in a ring
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL Yes A link loss detection on an Check the connection
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL Ethernet port. The link loss is
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL due to unplugging the cable
or the switch port being
down.
Front Panel Trouble No The graphical front panel is Every second Contact the factory
not responsive for more than
five seconds. The relay is still
protecting, and the main CPU
is not affected by this self-
test.
GFP Version Mismatch No The graphical front panel Whenever Perform a UR firmware upgrade with
firmware revision is not connection is the graphical front panel connected to
synchronized with that of the established between the CPU module in the relay. It can be
CPU module in the relay the graphical front done using any communication
panel and the CPU interface (Ethernet or USB). This
module in the relay synchronizes the graphical firmware
revision with that of the relay. If trouble
persists, contact the factory.
Oscillatory GOOSE No A data item in a configurable Upon scanning of Evaluate all logic pertaining to this item
GOOSE data set is oscillating each configurable
GOOSE data set
Replace Battery Yes The battery is weak or not Every five seconds. Replace the battery as outlined in the
functioning. It powers the real The error message Maintenance chapter. To minimize the
time clock. This message displays after 60 disruption until battery replacement,
displays as Battery Fail in the seconds if the temporarily disable the battery fail
event records. When the problem persists. function under Settings > Product
battery weakness reaches a Setup > User-Programmable Self
critical level, the message Tests.
displays persistently on the
front panel and no front panel 7
key navigation is possible.
SFP MODULE # FAIL No A faulty small form-factor The web page "SFP Transceiver
pluggable port (SFP) or Information" described in the previous
unplugging of the SFP row applies for this self test as well. The
generates this self test "SFP Module Fail" has higher priority
message and it suppresses the "Ethernet Fail"
target message. The "SFP MODULE FAIL
FUNCTION" setting enables/disables
this self test. The target for this self test
is priority-based, with the third one
being the highest priority. For example,
if all three SFP modules fail, then the
third SFP target is activated. If the third
SFP module failure resolves, then the
second SFP target is activated.


SNTP Failure No The SNTP server is not Every 10 to 60 Check that Ethernet cable(s) are
responding seconds properly connected. Check that
configuration for the SNTP server
corresponds to the actual server
settings. Check connectivity to the
server (ping the server IP address).
Check that UR settings for both SNTP
servers are configured with different IP
addresses and port numbers.
PBEthPort-# Offline Process Bus Module Ethernet Every five seconds Check connection to network switch/
port failure. Merging Unit and network switch
Error registers when an
enabled port fails.
PB SFP Module # Fail Small form-factor pluggable Every five seconds Connect or replace with same SFP type
port (SFP) at back of Process
Bus Module is faulty or
unplugged
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE:
Self Test Error Seen until the build is tagged Seen on startup and Update firmware to either of these
as being 'release candidate' then continuous builds
or 'gold' build
RRTD COMM FAIL:
Self Test Error No Communications with remote Runs only if "Com2 Check COM2 port settings, check
RTD unit (RRTD) or GPM-F Usage" is set to RRTD RS485 cables
failed for longer than 10 or RRTD&GPM-F.
seconds Checked every five
seconds.
RxGOOSE FAIL:
Missing messages No One or more RxGOOSE The self-test is Check GOOSE setup
messages are not being activated when no
received message is received
within the expected
time interval, which
is the time-to-live
time in the previous
message. This time
can be from
milliseconds to
minutes.
RxGOOSE OFFLINE:
7 COMM Path Incomplete No One or more RxGOOSE Event driven. The test Check GOOSE setup
messages are not responding is performed when a
device programmed
to receive GOOSE
messages stops
receiving. This can be
from 1 to 60
seconds, depending
on GOOSE packets.
OSC FIXED GOOSE:
Self Test Error No A FlexOperand configured in Upon scanning each Check Fixed GOOSE oscillation history
DNA and UserSt bit pair is DNA or UserSt bit on UR web page and evaluate all logic
oscillating pair pertaining to this item
SETTINGS SAVE ERROR:
Contact Factory Yes The relay failed to store the When a setting is Contact the factory
settings to the flash memory changed


STORAGE MEDIA ALARM:
Self Test Error No The CPU module fails to read On power up. Contact the factory
from or write to the Compact Afterwards, every
Flash (CF) card inside the time the CPU
module. The CF card stores accesses the CF card
certain non-volatile data, for reading or writing
such as event records,
oscillography and datalogger
records, fault report values,
and non-volatile actual
values. Settings are not stored
in CF and hence are
unaffected by this self-test.
SV# STREAM TROUBLE ON Yes Asserted when Every protection Check:
1. “3 out of 5 lost” errors are pass 1. Connection between Merging Unit
detected (MU) and relay
2. No sampled values have 2. SV stream configuration in the relay
been received for ~2 power is matching the SV stream, for example
cycles check svID and confRev fields
3. Mismatch of test mode or 3. Check the Actual Values > PB
simulation bit between UR Module > RXSV status> rxsv1(16) page
and subscribed SV streams in the EnerVista software to verify the
4. Merging units subscribed Sync Status, Quality, and delays of the
by UR are not synchronized to received sampled values and
the same grandmaster and troubleshoot accordingly
the drift is ~2 power cycles 4. Check that all merging units
5. Sampled values subscribed subscribed by the UR are synchronized
by the relay are not according to the SMPSYNCH CHECK
synchronized according to setting
the SMPSYNCH CHECK
setting defined in the relay
6. Quality of the received
sampled values is not
acceptable (either the quality
is invalid, or questionable with
Quality Check = Reject
Questionable)
SYSTEM EXCEPTION:
Press RESET key Yes Abnormal restart from Event driven Contact the factory
modules being removed or
inserted while the T35 is
powered-up, when there is an
abnormal DC supply, or as a
TEMP MONITOR:
result of internal relay failure.
7
OVER TEMPERATURE Yes The ambient temperature is Every hour Remove the T35 from service and
greater than the maximum install in a location that meets
operating temperature operating temperature standards
(+80°C)
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED:
with 2nd line DSP slot number Yes DSP module is not calibrated On relay startup The respective DSP module has to be
detail or calibration data is out of replaced, contact factory service
range
VOLTAGE MONITOR:
with 2nd line detail Yes The relay detected a problem Every five seconds Contact GE customer service
with the internal voltage rails
Power Supply 12V Low for longer than 25 seconds
Power Supply 12V High
Power Supply 5V Low
Power Supply 5V High


WRONG TRANSCEIVER:
Self Test Error Yes The type of SFP does not A web page "SFP Transceiver
match the CPU type. The SFP Information" is provided. This page
is a silver device that plugs displays the type of the SFP in it. This
into the rear of the CPU data is to be used with the CPU type to
module. know the cause of the problem.
T-type CPU = All ports support

fiber SFPs only
U-type CPU = Maintenance
port needs RJ45 SFP and the
other two ports fiber SFPs
V-type CPU = All ports support
RJ45 SFPs only
The consequence of an
incorrect SFP can range from
damage to the T35 to no
power information for the T35
on its web page (enter IP
address in a web browser,
then click the SFP
Transceiver Information —
only the type of SFP displays
and not power data).
7.2.2.4 HardFiber major self-test error messages

In addition to those provided by the standard UR-series devices, the UR devices implement HardFiber self-tests. These are
listed here. Any abnormal diagnostic condition indicated by the LEDs or the critical failure relay also results in a self-test
message, so troubleshooting is described here. For other relays, such at the B95Plus, see that product’s instruction manual.

Table 7-4: HardFiber major self-test errors

Error Description Severity Action
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH The number or type of installed Protection is not Check all modules against the order code. Ensure
hardware modules does not available and all they are inserted properly, and cycle the control
match the order code stored in contact outputs and power. If a module has intentionally been added
the CPU. The standard UR-series shared outputs are de- or removed use the Update Order Code
Equipment Mismatch self-test is asserted command to notify the relay that the current
extended to cover the possible module configuration is correct.
presence of a Process Card.
MODULE FAILURE UR-series device module Protection is not Contact the factory and supply the failure code
hardware failure detected available and all noted in the display. Text in the message
contact outputs and identifies the failed module (for example, H81). If
shared outputs are de- operated on a Process Card failure, the Module
asserted Fail self-test seals-in (latches) till the UR-series
device is restarted.
PROCESS BUS FAILURE Mission critical data is not Protection is not First rectify any Process Bus Trouble and Brick
available via the process bus. An available and all Trouble self-test errors. Check the actual value of
AC quantity is considered critical contact outputs and the operand referenced by the Process Bus
if both AC bank origins and the shared outputs are de- Failure Operand setting, and if “On,” determine
crosschecking settings are other asserted the cause and rectify.
than None. This self-test is also
initiated by an AC input If the problem persists with the foregoing all clear,
discrepancy being detected. See the cause must be an AC input discrepancy,
the description in the which is typically the result of problems in the
Crosschecking setting in the input signals to the Bricks, or faults in the Brick
HardFiber manual for further input conditioning hardware. If the error was
information. In addition, this self- annunciated the first time significant signal was
test can be initiated by user logic encountered, suspect the former cause and
responding to loss of critical check the copper connections external to the
contact input/output or other Brick. Where multiple UR-series devices have
data using the Process Bus self-test errors, look for common causes.
Failure Operand user-
programmable self-test setting. To further isolate AC input discrepancy errors, put
This setting is located in the the relay in test-isolated mode, then one by one,
Settings > Product Setup > temporally change an AC bank Crosschecking
User-Programmable Self Test setting to None, until the Process Bus Failure
menu. clears. Once the problem AC bank has been
identified, the values from each of the two Bricks
can be examined individually by temporarily
mapping each to an AC bank with a single origin.

7.2.2.5 HardFiber minor self-test error messages
Table 7-5: HardFiber minor self-test errors

Error Description Severity Action
BRICK TROUBLE Brick internal self-testing has This self-test error does Check the Brick environment for over/under
detected trouble internal to the not directly inhibit temperatures and the voltage of its power
Brick protection. However, source. If the ambient temperature and supply
some or all of the voltage are within Brick specifications, consult
affected Brick inputs/ the factory. Troubles resulting from a Brick output
outputs may not be failing to respond to an output command can
available to the UR only be detected while the command is active,
device. and so in this case the target is latched. A latched
target can be unlatched by pressing the front
panel reset key if the command has ended,
however the output can still be non-functional.
PROCESS BUS TROUBLE Communications problems with This self-test error does Check the field unit actual values. An indication of
one or more Bricks. The text of not directly inhibit equipment mismatch means that messages are
the message identifies the protection. However, being received from a Brick, but there is a
affected field units. This self-test the affected Brick discrepancy between the settings and the actual
is initiated by low received signal inputs/outputs may Brick serial number, order code, and/or core
levels at either the Brick or not be available to the number.
Process Card end, and by the UR device.
sustained failure to receive poll Check that the correct core on the correct Brick is
responses from the proper Brick. patched through to the correct Process Card
port, and that the field unit settings are correct.
An indication of communications loss means that
no messages are being received.
Check that the patching is correct, and that the

Brick has power. If that is not the problem, use a
professional optical fiber connector cleaning kit
to clean both sides of all optical fiber connections
from the Process Card through to the affected
Brick. If the problem continues after cleaning,
consult the factory.
RTD TROUBLE:
Self Test Error The Brick is reporting that the Not latched Check field RTD settings and connections
sensed RTD field connection
does not match that of an RTD or
the reported DC input value is
outside of the RTD temperature
range, greater than 250°C (likely
7 open sensor circuit fault) or less
than -50°C (likely shorted sensor
fault).
TDR TROUBLE:
Self Test Error The Brick is reporting that the Not latched Check field transducer settings and connections
sensed transducer field
connection does not match that
of a transducer, or the reported
DC input value is outside of the
set transducer input range, or
the minimum value setting is
equal to the maximum value
setting.
7.2.2.6 Instantaneous protection elements trip security

Some self-tests are not fast enough to detect erroneous data and block protection elements, requiring additional
measures. A bit-flip in program memory is typically detected during a memory scan, which may be too late to inhibit
instantaneous protection element. To secure instantaneous elements, in addition to the self-tests described, there are
supervising elements that validate “fault” conditions and release IOC and differential elements operation.

These trip security elements use currents samples and phasors from the same sources as supervised protection elements
to detect independently true “fault” conditions from IOC or differential. Trip security elements do not have any user settings
and are enabled as soon as corresponding instantaneous elements are enabled. During laboratory testing, these elements
can be disabled by activating any IED test mode via the SETTINGS  TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG menu by setting IED
MODE to anything except “On.”
Trip security elements do not affect protection performance in any way.
Instantaneous Overcurrent
All enabled Phase IOC, Negative-Sequence, and Neutral IOCs in the active setting group are supervised by the trip security
element. The goals of the IOC trip security are as follows:
• Detect erroneous operate current due to wiring or data acquisition problem resulting in one phase current dropping to
zero, resulting in erroneous negative-sequence and neutral currents
• Justify current phasor magnitude increase with simultaneous current changes from samples
This is achieved by comparing current values of the current phasors and samples change with the values taken two cycles
before. Additionally, trip security elements monitor "pre-fault" current to detect if operate condition is happening as a
result of current decrease instead of increase.
The element is armed when there are no disturbances in currents for five cycles.
Differential elements (bus, transformer, stator, if applicable to the product)

Differential trip security runs for each differential zone. It monitors if differential current increase above the pickup setting
is confirmed by the disturbance detectors 50DD for each differential zone input. When a differential zone fault occurs and
at least two zone inputs carry some load, at least two disturbance detectors have to be activated. Or when there is no load
at any zone inputs (zone is energized but does not carry any load), at least one disturbance detector has to be activated.
Consequently:
• If there is not any disturbance detector activation in at least one zone input — Differential trip is inhibited
• If there is just one zone input disturbance detector activation but load is present in at least two zone inputs prior to the
“fault” — Differential trip is inhibited
• If there is more than one disturbance detector zone input activation — Differential trip is allowed (normal scenario)
• If differential trip is inhibited by the trip security element —active setting group change is not allowed
Activation of the 50DDs is essential especially when there is load in at least two zone inputs prior to the zone fault.
Sensitivity of the 50DD is defined by the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
setting with a range of 0.002pu to 0.02pu of the zone input CT. In case of the high-resistive zone fault there may be enough
current change in the source zone input causing sufficient differential current, but small change in the load zone input-this
situation can be addressed by reducing CURRENT CUTOFF LEVEL setting to the sufficient sensitivity level. 50DD operates if 7
there is a change at least 2 x CUTOFF in either positive-sequence, or negative sequence or zero-sequence currents.


Chapter 8: Commissioning
Commissioning
8.1 Differential characteristic test
Instantaneous protection elements trip security can impact the testing of the overcurrent and differential elements.
Please refer to the Instantaneous Protection Elements Trip Security section in the Commands and Targets chapter
for more details on this subject and to Application note GET-20105A (UR Relays Percent Differential Element
Testing) for proper testing methods.
8.1.1 Description
The following commissioning tests are organized in two parts: general procedures for testing points of the differential-
restraint characteristics, and examples of the percent differential element response, based on different transformer
configurations and fault current distribution. The following tests can be performed by using either 2 or 3 individually
adjustable currents, and do not require additional specialized equipment.
8.1.1.1 Preparation
1. Select a 0° or 180° transformer phase shift and identical winding connection type into the relay.
2. Select the “Not Within Zone” setting value for each winding grounding setting.
3. Select and set the CT ratios for each winding.
4. Calculate the magnitude compensation factors M[1] and M[2] for each winding.
5. Enable the Transformer Percent Differential element, and enter the required test settings to shape the differential
restraint characteristic.
6. Connect the relay test set to inject x current (Ix) into the Winding 1 Phase A CT input, and y current (IY) into the Winding
2 Phase A CT input.
8.1.1.2 Testing
The tests of the differential restraint characteristic verify the minimum pickup point, the intersection point of Breakpoint 1
and Slope 1, and the intersection point of Breakpoint 2 and Slope 2.
For simplicity, enter the following settings for each winding:
SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING 1(4)  WINDING 1(4) CONNECTION: “Wye”
SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING 1(4)  WINDING 1(4) GROUNDING: “Not Within Zone”

DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING
SYSTEM SETUP  TRANSFORMER  WINDING 2(4)  WINDING 2(4) ANGLE WRT WINDING 1: “0°”
If the power transformer phase shift is 0°, make the two currents to be injected to the relay 180° apart. This 180° phase
shift results from the inversion of the field CT, as their positive marks are away from the protected transformer terminals
and are connected to the positively marked terminals on the relay.
8.1.1.3 Minimum pickup

Inject current (Ix) into Winding 1 Phase A and monitor the per-unit Phase A differential current until it exceeds the minimum
pickup setting. The theoretical injected current for minimum pickup verification can be computed as follows:
CT
I x = minimum pickup u ---------- Eq. 8-1
M[1]
where CT is the 1 A or 5 A tap, and M[1] is the calculated magnitude compensation factor (see the Transformer section in
Chapter 5 for details on calculating the M[1] and M[2] factors).
8.1.1.4 Slope 1 / Breakpoint 1

The point of Slope 1 and Breakpoint 1 is tested as follows. See the Differential Restraint Characteristic figure in the next
section for details.
1. Inject current (Iy) into Winding 2 Phase A as follows:
CT
I YB1 = Breakpoint 1 u ---------- Eq. 8-2
M[2]
2. At Breakpoint 1, the injected current IXOP1 is determined by:
CT
I XOP1 = Breakpoint 1 u 1 – Slope 1 u ---------- Eq. 8-3
M[1]
and the differential current is then equal to:
Id = Slope 1 (in %) x Breakpoint 1 (in pu) Eq. 8-4
3. Preset the Ix current to 1.05 x IXOP1. Switch on the test set. The relay should restraint, as the differential to restraint
ratio becomes less than the Slope 1 setting. Switch off the current.
4. Preset the Ix current to 0.95 x IXOP1. Switch on the test set. The relay operates. Switch off the current.
To test any other point from the Slope 1 section of the curve, inject a per-unit restraint current smaller than the Breakpoint
1 current and repeat the steps above by substituting the Breakpoint 1 value with the new per-unit restraint current value
into the equations.
8.1.1.5 Slope 2 / Breakpoint 2

The point of Slope 2 and Breakpoint 2 is tested as follows. The figure shows details.
1. Preset the Iy current to a magnitude that results in the restraint current being equal to Breakpoint 2. Use the following
8 calculation to define the magnitude of the injected current:
CT
I YB2 = Breakpoint 2 u ---------- Eq. 8-5
M[2]
2. At the above current (restraint), the IXOP2 current required to operate the element is calculated as:
CT
I XOP2 = Breakpoint 2 u 1 – Slope 2 u ---------- Eq. 8-6
M[1]
3. Preset the Ix current to1.05 x IXOP1 and switch on the test set. The relay should restrain, as the differential to restraint
ratio becomes less than the Slope 2 setting. Switch off the current.
4. Preset the Ix current to 0.95 x IXOP1. Switch on the test set and verify relay operation. Switch off the current.

CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST EXAMPLES
To test any point from the Slope 2 portion of the characteristic, inject a per-unit restraint current greater than the
Breakpoint 2 current as restraint and repeat the steps above by substituting the Breakpoint 2 value in the equations with
the new per-unit restraint current value.
The two tests can be repeated for Phases B and C.
Figure 8-1: Differential restraint characteristic
Id (pu)
S2
S1
PKP
B1 B2 Ir (pu)
828735A1.CDR
8.2 Differential characteristic test examples

8.2.1 Overview
The T35 commissioning tests are based on secondary current injections, where two or three individually adjustable
currents are required. The differential protection compares the magnitudes of the varying HV and LV currents in real time.
Therefore, the test set currents and their angles must be an exact replica of the HV and LV currents and angles shown in
the diagrams, along with the correct CT polarity and orientation.
Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded. Stopping the injection of the currents to the relay
by using contact outputs triggered by protection operation can prevent this from occurring.
Due to the complexity of the mathematics defining the operating characteristic of the region between Breakpoint 1 and 2,
the use of a factory-supplied Microsoft Excel simulation utility is highly recommended. This utility indicates graphically
whether the relay should operate, based on the settings and winding current injection. This allows the tester to define and
confirm various points on the operating characteristic. The spreadsheet can be found at GE Grid Solutions website (look for
the T35/T60 Percent Differential Element Simulator in the support documents for the product).

DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC TEST EXAMPLES CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING
Figure 8-2: Current distribution on a Y/YG0° transformer with b-c fault on LV side
Y/y0°
Transformer
~c ~b ~c
~b
IA = 0 pu Ia = 0 pu
~c BC Fault
~b
~c ~b
Ib = 0.866 ∠–270° pu
IB = 0.866 ∠–90° pu
~c ~b ~b ~c
IC = 0.866 ∠–270° pu Ic = 0.866 ∠–90° pu

828736A1.CDR
Consider the above system, which illustrates the importance of CT orientation, polarity, and relay connection. These
factors also apply when performing the tests outlined in the next examples.
The transformer high voltage (HV) and low voltage (LV) side fault currents, and angles are all related. More specifically, the
HV and LV primary fault currents are displaced by 180°. The CT polarity marks point away from the protected zone and are
connected to the ~a terminals of the relay. The displayed current is what is reported by the relay.
The ~a and ~b terminal identifications are illustrative only. See the CT/VT Modules section in Chapter 3 for specific
terminal identification.
8.2.2 Test example 1

Transformer data — 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kV, CT (HV) = 200:1, CT (LV) = 1000:1, Y/y0° with a grounded LV neutral
8.2.2.1 Test set configuration

The fault current distribution for an external b-c fault is identical for the HV and LV transformer sides and can be simulated
easily with two current sources. Connect the first current source to the relay Phase “B” and “C” terminals, corresponding to
8 the HV winding CTs in series, and the second source to the Phase “b” and “c” relay terminals, corresponding to the LV CTs.
Ensure that the polarity is correct and the relative phase angles are similar to that shown in the figure, that is, 180°
between IB and IC, 180° between Ib and Ic, 180° between IB and Ib, and 180° between IC and Ic. Follow the magnitudes
and angles of the injected currents from the following tables to ensure that the test performs correctly.
8.2.2.2 Operating criteria

The differential element operates if the differential current (Id) exceeds the characteristic defined by the relay settings for
restraint current magnitude (Ir). The differential current Id is the vector sum of the compensated currents, and Ir is the
largest compensated current. Compensation refers to vector and magnitude corrections applied to the currents from the
HV and LV transformer sides.
The tests verify the operation and no-operation response for points from all regions of the percentage differential
characteristic. These tests are:
• Test for zero differential current

• Minimum pickup
• Slope 1
• The region between Slope 1 and Slope 2
• Slope 2
8.2.2.3 Relay configuration

The AC Inputs and Source are configured as follows.
Table 8-1: AC Inputs and Source configuration
AC Inputs setting CT F1 CT M1 Source setting Source 1 Source 2
Phase CT Primary 200 1000 Name SRC 1 SRC 2
Phase CT Secondary 1 1 Phase CT F1 M1
Ground CT Primary X X Ground CT X X
Ground CT Secondary X X Phase VT X X
Aux VT X X
8.2.2.4 Two winding transformer configuration

Table 8-2: Winding configuration
Winding 1 settings Value Winding 2 Settings Value Percent Diff Value
Source SRC 1 Source SRC 2 Minimum PKP 0.1 pu
Rated MVA 20 MVA Rated MVA 20 MVA Slope 1 15%
Nom Ph-Ph Voltage 115 kV Nom Ph-Ph Voltage 12.47 kV Breakpoint 1 2 pu
Connection Wye Connection Wye Breakpoint 2 8 pu
Grounding Not within zone Grounding Within zone Slope 2 95%
Angle WRT 0° Angle WRT 0°
Resistance 3Ph 10.000 ohms Resistance 3Ph 10.000 ohms
Application of excessive current (> 3 ´ In) for extended periods damages the relay.
8.2.2.5 Test for zero differential current

1. Inject the following currents into the relay.
Winding 1 Winding 2
Phase Single current (I1) Phase Single current (I2)
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B
C
0.434 A ∠0°
0.434 A ∠–180°
B
C
0.8 A ∠–180°
0.8 A ∠0°
8
2. These are determined as follows.
6 6
20 u 10 VA 20 u 10 VA
I n w 1 = ---------------------------------------- = 100.4 A, I n w 2 = -------------------------------------------- = 925.98 A
3 3
3 u 115 u 10 V 3 u 12.47 u 10 V Eq. 8-7
From the Current Distribution diagram earlier, there is a 0.866 pu x 100.4 A/200 = 0.434 A secondary current for HV
phases B and C, and a 0.866 pu x 925.98 A/1000 = 0.8 A secondary current for LV phases b and c.
3. When test setup is correct, the relay displays the following differential and restraint currents, and the element does

not operate.
Phase Differential current (Id) Phase Restraint current (Ir)
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 0 ∠0° B 0.801 pu ∠–180°
C 0 ∠0° C 0.801 pu ∠0°
8.2.2.6 Minimum pickup test

Reduce the restraint current Ir to a value lower than 0.67 pu (the restraint corresponding to the intersection of Slope 1 and
the pickup). This is obtained from Ir = 0.1/0.15 = 0.67 pu, where 0.1 is the differential setting of minimum pickup, and 0.15 is
the setting of Slope 1. Note that
0 < Ir < Iri Eq. 8-8
where Iri is an intersection of Minimum PKP and Slope 1 calculated as PKP/Slope 1 value.
1. Change the current magnitude as follows.
Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 0.15 A ∠0° B 0.23 A ∠–180°
C 0.15 A ∠–180° C 0.23 A ∠0°
2. Read the following differential and restraint current values from the T35 actual values menu.
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 0.044 pu ∠0° B 0.275 pu ∠–180°
C 0.044 pu ∠0° C 0.275 pu ∠0°
The relay does not operate since Id is still lower that the 0.1 pu MINIMUM PICKUP setting.
3. Increase I1 to 0.2 A. The differential current increases to Id = 0.136 pu > Min PKP and Ir < 0.67 pu.
4. Verify that the Percent Differential element operates and the following are displayed in the actual values menu.
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 0.136 ∠0° B 0.367 pu ∠–180°
C 0.136 ∠0° C 0.367 pu ∠0°
8.2.2.7 Slope 1 test
8 Inject current in such a manner that the magnitude of Ir is larger than the restraint current of 0.67 pu, corresponding to the
intersection of the minimum PKP and Slope 1 and smaller than the Breakpoint 1 setting; that is,
Ir(intersection of Min PKP and Slope 1) < Ir(actual) < Ir(Break 1) Eq. 8-9
1. Change the current magnitudes as follows.

Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 0.48 A ∠0° B 1 A ∠–180°
C 0.48 A ∠–180° C 1 A ∠0°

A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 0.113 pu ∠0° B 1 pu ∠–180°
C 0.113 pu ∠0° C 1 pu ∠0°
The Percent Differential element does not operate even though Id is larger than the Minimum Pickup, because Id is not
large enough to make the Id/Ir ratio larger than the Slope 1 setting of 15%. The actual ratio is 11.3%.
3. Adjust the I1 current as follows (thereby increasing Id) and verify that the element operates.
Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 0.45 A ∠0° B 1 A ∠–180°
C 0.45 A ∠–180° C 1 A ∠0°
4. Read the following differential and restraint current values in the T35 actual values menu.
Phase Differential Current (Id) Phase Restraint current (Ir)
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 0.170 pu ∠0° B 1 pu ∠–180°
C 0.170 pu ∠0° C 1 pu ∠0°
5. The actual Id/Ir ratio is now 17%. Verify that the element operates correctly.
8.2.2.8 Intermediate curve between Breakpoint 1 and Breakpoint 2

This procedure tests the intermediate section of the differential characteristic curve that lies between the Breakpoint 1 and
Breakpoint 2 points (points B1 and B2 on the Differential Restraint Characteristic diagram).
1. Inject currents so that the magnitude of Ir is between the restraint magnitudes defined by Breakpoint 1 and
Breakpoint 2; that is:
Ir (at Breakpoint 1) > Ir < Ir (at Breakpoint 2) Eq. 8-10
For this example, 2 pu < Ir < 8 pu. Remember that the maximum current is the restraint current Ir = 3.5 pu.
Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 1.2 A ∠0° B 3.5 A ∠–180°
C 1.2 A ∠–180° C 3.5 A ∠0°
8
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 1.287 pu ∠–180° B 3.5 pu ∠–180°
C 1.287 pu ∠0° C 3.5 pu ∠0°
The Id/Ir ratio is 36.77% and the Differential element does not operate because the actual Id = 1.287 pu is still too low
at Ir = 3.5 pu.

Due to the mathematical complexity involved in shaping the curve between Breakpoint 1 and Breakpoint 2, an
Excel-based simulation tool is available from the GE Grid Solutions website (look for the T35/T60 Percent Differential
Element Simulator in the support documents for the product). With this tool, you can see the preset Id/Ir curve point
ratios and the actual Id/Ir ratio as per the entered test currents. The tool graphically indicates differential and
restraint current magnitudes and indicates whether the relay operates.
3. In this example, a ratio of Id/Ir > 38% causes the element to trip. Decreasing I1 as shown in the table increases the
differential current Id, causing the element to operate.
Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 1.1 A ∠0° B 3.5 A ∠–180°
C 1.1 A ∠–180° C 3.5 A ∠0°
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 1.471 pu ∠–180° B 3.5 pu ∠–180°
C 1.471 pu ∠0° C 3.5 pu ∠0°
8.2.2.9 Slope 2 test

Inject currents in such a manner that the magnitude of Ir is larger than the restraint current at Breakpoint 2; that is,
Ir > Ir(Break 2) = 8 pu Eq. 8-11
1. Change the current magnitudes as follows.

Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 0.5 A ∠0° B 9 A ∠–180°
C 0.5 A ∠–180° C 9 A ∠0°
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 8.078 pu ∠–180° B 9 pu ∠–180°
C 8.078 pu ∠0° C 9 pu ∠0°
8 Since Id/Ir = 89.8% and lower than the required 95%, the Percent Differential element does not operate.
3. Adjust the I1 current as follows (thereby increasing Id) and verify that the relay operates.
Winding 1 Winding 2
A 0 A ∠0° A 0 A ∠0°
B 0.2 A ∠0° B 9 A ∠–180°
C 0.2 A ∠–180° C 9 A ∠0°

4. Read the following differential and restraint current values in the T35 actual values menu.
A 0 ∠0° A 0 ∠0°
B 8.631 pu ∠–180° B 9 pu ∠–180°
C 8.631 pu ∠0° C 9 pu ∠0°
5. The actual Id/Ir ratio is now 95.9%. Verify that the element operates correctly.
8.2.2.10 Summary
The tests described the principles of testing the differential element for all regions from the operating characteristic.
For verification of more points, consider adjusting the magnitude of the restraint current Ir to the required portion of the
characteristic and change the other current to vary Id until the relay operates. Use the Excel tool to compare the actual
and expected operating values.
A blank result table is provided at the end of this chapter for convenience.
8.2.3.1 D/yg30° transformer with phase A to ground fault on the grounded Wye
Transformer data — D/y30°, 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kv, CT1 (200:1), CT2 (1000:1)
Figure 8-3: Current distribution of a D/yg30° transformer with an LV-side ground fault
D/y30° Transformer
IA(f) = 0.577 pu ∠0° Ia(f) = 1 pu ∠0°

A A
Fault
IB(f) = 0 pu Ib(f) = 0
B B
C C
IC(f) = 0.577 pu ∠–180° Ic(f) = 0
828737A1.CDR
Test Phase Injected current Displayed current Status

8
W1 current W2 current Differential Restraint
Balanced A 0.29 ∠0° 0.926 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.5349 ∠–180° Not Applicable
Condition
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.29 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0.5349 ∠0°
Minimum A 0.137 ∠0° 0.521 ∠–180° 0.048 ∠0° 0.3 ∠–180° Block
Pickup Id = 0.048 < Min PKP
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.137 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.048 ∠0° 0.3 ∠0°
Minimum A 0.108 ∠0° 0.521 ∠–180° 0.102 ∠0° 0.3 ∠–180° Operate
Pickup Id = 0.102 > Min PKP
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.108 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.102 ∠0° 0.3 ∠0°


Slope 1 A 0.4435 ∠0° 1.6 ∠–180° 0.110 ∠0° 0.9026 ∠–180° Block
Id /Ir = 11.9%
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.4435 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
Slope 1 A 0.4425 ∠0° 1.7 ∠–180° 0.165 ∠0° 0.979 ∠–180° Operate
Id /Ir = 16.8%
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.4425 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.165 ∠0° 0.979 ∠0°
Intermediate A 1.2 ∠0° 5 ∠–180° 0.675 ∠–180° 2.882 ∠–180° Block
Slope 1 & 2 Id /Ir = 23.4%
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 1.2 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.675 ∠0° 2.882 ∠0°
Intermediate A 1.1 ∠0° 5 ∠–180° 0.860 ∠–180° 2.882 ∠–180° Operate
Slope 1 & 2 Id /Ir = 29.8%
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 1.1 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.860 ∠0° 2.882 ∠0°
Slope 2 A 0.4 ∠0° 15 ∠–180° 7.915 ∠–180° 8.646 ∠–180° Block
Id /Ir = 91.5%
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.4 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 7.915 ∠0° 8.646 ∠0°
Slope 2 A 0.2 ∠0° 15 ∠–180° 7.918 ∠–180° 8.650 ∠–180° Operate
Id /Ir = 95.7%
B 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0°
C 0.2 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 7.916 ∠0° 8.650 ∠0°
8.2.4.1 Yg/D30° transformer with phase B to C fault on the Delta side

Transformer data — Y/D30°, 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kv, CT1 (200:1), CT2 (1000:1)
Figure 8-4: Current Distribution on a Yg/D30° transformer with an a to b fault on the LV side
Y/d30° Transformer
IA(f) = 0.5 pu ∠–270° Ia(f) = 0
A A
IB(f) = 1 pu ∠–90° Ib(f) = 0.866 pu ∠–90°
8 B
F
B
C C
IC(f) = 0.5 pu ∠–270° Ic(f) = 0.866 pu ∠–270°
828738A1.CDR
Three adjustable currents are required in this case. The Phase A and C Wye-side line currents, identical in magnitude but
displaced by 180°, can be simulated with one current source passed through these relay terminals in series. The second
current source simulates the Phase B primary current. The third source simulates the delta “b” and “c” phase currents, also
equal in magnitude but displaced by 180°.


Balanced A 0.25 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Not Applicable
Condition
B 0.5 ∠–180° 0.8 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0.8 ∠0°
C 0.25 ∠0° 0.8 ∠–180° 0 ∠0° 0.8 ∠–180°
Min Pickup: A 0.25 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
change the Min Id = 0.051 < Min PKP
B 0.5 ∠–180° 0.95 ∠0° 0.154 ∠0° 0.948 ∠0°
PKP to 0.2 pu
C 0.25 ∠0° 0.95 ∠–180° 0.155 ∠0° 0.950 ∠–180°
Minimum A 0.25 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Pickup Id = 0.102 > Min PKP
B 0.5 ∠–180° 1.05 ∠0° 0.253 ∠0° 1.049 ∠0°
C 0.25 ∠0° 1.05 ∠–180° 0.255 ∠0° 1.050 ∠–180°
Slope 1: A 0.25 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
return the Min Id /Ir = 13.2%
B 0.5 ∠–180° 0.92 ∠0° 0.123 ∠0° 0.919 ∠0°
PKP to 0.1 pu
C 0.25 ∠0° 0.92 ∠–180° 0.123 ∠0° 0.919 ∠–180°
Slope 1 A 0.25 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Id /Ir = 15.9%
B 0.5 ∠–180° 0.95 ∠0° 0.153 ∠0° 0.948 ∠0°
C 0.25 ∠0° 0.95 ∠–180° 0.153 ∠0° 0.948 ∠–180°
Intermediate A 2 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
Slope 1 & 2 Id /Ir = 84.3%
B 4 ∠–180° 1 ∠0° 5.37 ∠–180° 6.37 ∠0°
< 86.6% computed
C 2 ∠0° 1 ∠–180° 5.37 ∠0° 6.37 ∠–180°
Intermediate A 2 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Slope 1 & 2 Id /Ir = 87.5%
B 4 ∠–180° 0.8 ∠0° 5.57 ∠–180° 6.37 ∠0°
> 86.6% computed
C 2 ∠0° 0.8 ∠–180° 5.57 ∠0° 6.37 ∠–180°
Slope 2 A 4 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
Id /Ir = 93.7%
B 8 ∠–180° 0.8 ∠0° 11.93 ∠–180° 12.73 ∠0°
< Slope 2 = 95%
C 4 ∠0° 0.8 ∠–180° 11.93 ∠0° 12.73 ∠–180°
Slope 2 A 4 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Id /Ir = 95.7%
B 8 ∠–180° 0.6 ∠0° 12.13 ∠–180° 12.73 ∠0°
> Slope 2 = 95%
C 4 ∠0° 0.6 ∠–180° 12.13 ∠0° 12.73 ∠–180°

8.2.5.1 D/D0° transformer with phase b to c fault on the secondary delta winding
Transformer data — D/D0°, 20 MVA, 115/12.47 kv, CT1 (200:1), CT2 (1000:1)

Figure 8-5: Current distribution of D/D transformer with an a to b fault on the LV side
D/d0° Transformer
IA(f) = 0 Ia(f) = 0
A A
H winding X winding
IB(f) = 0.866 pu ∠–90° Ib(f) = 0.866 pu ∠–90°
B B
F
C C
IC(f) = 0.866 pu ∠–270°. Ic(f) = 0.866 pu ∠–270°
828739A1.CDR

Balanced A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Not Applicable
Condition
B 0.435 ∠–90° 0.8 ∠–270° 0 ∠0° 0.8 ∠–270°
C 0.435 ∠–270° 0.8 ∠–90° 0 ∠0° 0.8 ∠–90°
Min Pickup A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
Id = 0.065 < Min PKP
B 0.09 ∠–90° 0.23 ∠–270° 0.065 ∠0° 0.230 ∠–270°
C 0.09 ∠–270° 0.23 ∠–90° 0.065 ∠0° 0.230 ∠–90°
Min Pickup A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Id = 0.101 > Min PKP
B 0.21 ∠–90° 0.486 ∠–270° 0.102 ∠0° 0.486 ∠–270°
C 0.21 ∠–270° 0.486 ∠–90° 0.101 ∠0° 0.486 ∠–90°
Slope 1 A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
Id /Ir = 14% < 15%
B 0.651 ∠–90° 1.39 ∠–270° 0.195 ∠0° 1.39 ∠–270°
C 0.651 ∠–270° 1.39 ∠–90° 0.195 ∠0° 1.39 ∠–90°
Slope 1 A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Id /Ir = 16.8% > 15%
B 0.63 ∠–90° 1.39 ∠–270° 0.233 ∠0° 1.39 ∠–270°
C 0.63 ∠–270° 1.39 ∠–90° 0.233 ∠0° 1.39 ∠–90°
Intermediate A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
Slope 1 & 2 Id /Ir = 52.6%
B 1.2 ∠–90° 4.63 ∠–270° 2.44 ∠–270° 4.63 ∠–270°
< 60% computed
C 1.2 ∠–270° 4.63 ∠–90° 2.44 ∠–90° 4.63 ∠–90°
8 Intermediate A
Slope 1 & 2
0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Id /Ir = 68.8%
B 0.8 ∠–90° 4.63 ∠–270° 3.18 ∠–270° 4.63 ∠–270°
> 60% computed
C 0.8 ∠–270° 4.63 ∠–90° 3.18 ∠–90° 4.63 ∠–90°
Slope 2 A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Block
Id /Ir = 93.2%
B 0.315 ∠–90° 8.33 ∠–270° 7.77 ∠–270° 8.33 ∠–270°
< Slope 2 = 95%
C 0.315 ∠–270° 8.33 ∠–90° 7.77 ∠–90° 8.33 ∠–90°
Slope 2 A 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° 0 ∠0° Operate
Id /Ir = 96%
B 0.18 ∠–90° 8.33 ∠–270° 8 ∠–270° 8.33 ∠–270°
> Slope 2 = 95%
C 0.18 ∠–270° 8.33 ∠–90° 8 ∠–90° 8.33 ∠–90°

CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING INRUSH INHIBIT TEST
8.3 Inrush inhibit test

8.3.1 Inrush inhibit test procedure
The Inrush Inhibit Test requires a secondary injection test capable of producing a current with an adjustable second
harmonic component. Use the appropriate commissioning tables at the end of this chapter to record values.
This procedure is based upon the example provided in the Differential Characteristic Test Example section. The transformer
parameters are as follows.
• Transformer data — Y/y0°, 230/69 kV, CT1 (300:1), CT2 (1000:1)
• 2nd Harmonic Setting — 20%
1. Connect the relay test set to inject current into the Winding 1 Phase A CT input.
2. Inject currents into the relay as shown in the following table until the biased differential element picks up.
3. Confirm that only the percent differential element has operated.
4. Increase the harmonic content until the element drops out. Record this value as the Inrush Inhibit Level Pickup.
5. Gradually decrease the harmonic content level until the element picks up. Record this value as the Inrush Inhibit Level
Dropout.
6. Switch off the current.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for phases B and C.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for Winding 2 (and Windings 3 and 4 if necessary).
Table 8-3: Inrush inhibit test summary
Phase Injected Displayed Status
W1 Current W1 2nd W2 Current W2 2nd Id 2nd Ir
Harmonic Harmonic Harmonic
A 1 A ∠0° 18.01% 0 A ∠0° 0 0.997 pu 18% 0.997 pu Operate
1 A ∠0° 19.97% 0 A ∠0° 0 0.997 pu 20% 0.997 pu Block
B 4 A ∠0° 16.72% 2 A ∠–180° 15% 2 pu 18% 4 pu Operate
4 A ∠0° 17.60% 2 A ∠–180° 15% 2 pu 20% 4 pu Block
C 2 A ∠0° 15% 4 A ∠–180° 16.3% 2 pu 18% 4 pu Operate
2 A ∠0° 15% 4 A ∠–180° 17.3% 2 pu 20% 4 pu Block
The second harmonic inhibit feature can be verified by setting the INRUSH INHIBIT MODE setting as follows.
For INRUSH INHIBIT MODE set to "2-out-of-3":
1. Set the INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION to "Trad. 2nd" and the INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL to "20%".
2. Inject currents into one CT bank (one winding only) until the biased differential operates for all three phases.
3. Apply a second harmonic to Phase A higher than the set threshold and monitor operation of Phases A, B, and C. The 8
element needs to remain operating on all three phases.
4. Apply a second harmonic to Phase B with a level less than the set threshold.
5. Increase the second harmonic level in Phase B. When it passes the set threshold, all three phases of differential
protection need to drop out.
For INRUSH INHIBIT MODE set to "Average":
1. Set the INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION to "Trad. 2nd" and the INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL to "20%".
2. Inject currents into one CT bank (one winding only) until the biased differential operates for all three phases.
3. Apply a second harmonic to Phase A with a level greater than the set threshold and monitor the operation of the
Percent Differential element. The element should drop out when the injected second harmonic level becomes three
times larger than the set threshold.

OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT TEST CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING
8.4 Overexcitation inhibit test

8.4.1 Overexcitation inhibit test procedure
The Overexcitation Inhibit Test requires a secondary injection from a source capable of producing an adjustable 5th
harmonic component. Use the appropriate commissioning tables at the end of this chapter to record values.
This procedure is based upon the example provided in the Differential Characteristic Test Example section. The transformer
parameters are as follows:
• Transformer — Y/y0°, 230/69 kV, CT1 (300:1), CT2 (1000:1)
• 5th Harmonic Setting — 10%
1. Connect the relay test set to inject current into the Winding 1 Phase A CT input.
2. Inject a current into the relay until the biased Differential element operates.
3. Confirm that ONLY the differential element has operated.
4. Increase the 5th harmonic content level until the element drops out. Record this value as the Overexcitation Inhibit
Level Pickup.
5. Gradually decrease the harmonic content level until the element picks up. Record this value as the Overexcitation
Inhibit Level Dropout.
6. Switch off the current.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for phases B and C.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for winding 2 (and windings 3 and 4 if necessary).
Table 8-4: Overexcitation inhibit test summary
W1 Current W1 5th W2 Current W2 5th Id 5th Ir
Harmonic Harmonic Harmonic
A 1 A ∠0° 8% 0 A ∠0° 0 1 pu 8% 1 pu Operate
1 A ∠0° 10% 0 A ∠0° 0 1 pu 10% 1 pu Block
B 4 A ∠0° 8.5% 2 A ∠–180° 9% 2 pu 8% 4 pu Operate
4 A ∠0° 9.5% 2 A ∠–180° 9% 2 pu 10% 4 pu Block
C 2 A ∠0° 9% 4 A ∠–180° 8.5% 2 pu 8% 4 pu Operate
2 A ∠0° 9% 4 A ∠–180° 9.5% 2 pu 10% 4 pu Block
8.5 Blank test tables

8
8.5.1 Differential restraint tests
Table 8-5: Differential characteristic test table

W1 Current W2 Current Differential Restraint
Balanced A Not Applicable
Condition
B
C

CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING BLANK TEST TABLES

W1 Current W2 Current Differential Restraint
Min Pickup A Status: ____________
B
Id = _______________
C
Min Pickup A Status: ____________
B
Id = _______________
C
Slope 1 A Status: ____________
B
Id /Ir = _____________
C
B
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Intermediate A Status: ____________
Slope 1 & 2
B
Id /Ir = _____________
C
Intermediate A Status: ____________
Slope 1 & 2
B
Id /Ir = _____________
C
B
Id /Ir = _____________
C
B
Id /Ir = _____________
C
8.5.2 Inrush inhibit tests

Table 8-6: Inrush inhibit test table

(Block/Operate)
W1 Current W1 2nd W2 Current W2 2nd Id (pu) 2nd Ir (pu)
(A) Harmonic (A) Harmonic Harmonic
(%) (%) (%)
A
B
8
C

BLANK TEST TABLES CHAPTER 8: COMMISSIONING
8.5.3 Overexcitation inhibit tests

Results follow.
Table 8-7: Overexcitation inhibit test results
W1 Current W1 5th W2 Current W2 5th Id (PU) 5th Ir (pu)
(Block/Operate)
(a) Harmonic (a) Harmonic Harmonic
(%) (%) (%)
A

Chapter 9: Theory of operation
Theory of operation
This chapter outlines advanced information on operation.
9.1 Directional principle

9.1.1 Current directional protection
For better security, the T35 uses the current directional protection principle to dynamically supervise the main current
differential function. The directional principle is in effect permanently for low differential currents (region 1 in the Two
Regions of Differential Characteristic figure) and is switched on dynamically for large differential currents (region 2 in the
same figure) by the saturation detector (see the Saturation Detector section) upon detecting CT saturation.
The directional principle responds to a relative direction of the fault currents. This means that a reference signal, such as
transformer voltage, is not required. The directional principle declares that
• If all of the fault currents flow in one direction, the fault is internal, or
• If at least one fault current flows in an opposite direction compared with the sum of the remaining currents, the fault is
external
The directional principle is implemented in two stages.
First, based on the magnitude of a given current, it is determined whether the current is a fault current. If so, its relative
phase relation has to be considered. The angle check must not be initiated for the load currents as the direction is out of
the transformer even during internal faults. The auxiliary comparator of this stage applies an adaptable threshold. The
threshold is a fraction of the restraining current. The current from a particular feeder is used for bus directional
comparison as a contributor feeder if its magnitude is greater than 0.2 × Irestraint or it is greater than 2 times its CT rating.
Second, for the selected fault currents, the phase angle between a given current and the sum of all the remaining currents
is checked. The sum of all the remaining currents is the differential current less the current under consideration. Therefore,
for each, say the pth, current to be considered, the angle between the Ip and ID - Ip phasors is to be checked.
There should be at least one contributor feeder in the zone, satisfying magnitude check conditions above to allow
directional principle to declare internal fault and at least two contributor feeders to discriminate internal against external
fault.
Ideally, during external faults, the said angle is close to 180° (as shown); and close to 0 degrees during internal faults.

SATURATION DETECTOR CHAPTER 9: THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 9-1: Directional principle operation during external faults
External Fault Conditions
⎛ Ip ⎞
imag ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ID − I p ⎟ OPERATE
⎝ ⎠
BLOCK
⎛ Ip ⎞
ID - Ip real ⎜ ⎟
Ip ⎜ ID − I p ⎟
⎝ ⎠
BLOCK
OPERATE
836726A2.CDR
Figure 9-2: Directional principle operation during internal faults

Internal Fault Conditions
⎛ Ip ⎞
imag ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ID − I p ⎟ OPERATE
⎝ ⎠
BLOCK
⎛ Ip ⎞
ID - Ip real ⎜ ⎟
⎜ ID − I p ⎟
⎝ ⎠
Ip
BLOCK
OPERATE
836727A2.CDR
The T35 implementation calculates the maximum angle for the considered currents and compares it against a fixed
threshold of 90°. The flag indicating whether the directional protection principle is satisfied is available as the FlexLogic
operand XFMR PCNT DIFF DIR A/B/C.
9.2 Saturation detector

9 9.2.1 CT saturation detection
The saturation detector of the T35 takes advantage of the fact that any CT operates correctly for a short period of time,
even under very large primary currents that would subsequently cause a very deep saturation. As a result, in the case of
an external fault, the differential current stays very low during the initial period of linear operation of the CTs while the
restraining signal develops rapidly. Once one or more CTs saturate, the differential current increases. The restraining signal,
however, yields by at least a few milliseconds. During internal faults, both the differential and restraining currents develop
simultaneously. This creates characteristic patterns for the differential - restraining trajectory, as shown.

CHAPTER 9: THEORY OF OPERATION SATURATION DETECTOR
Figure 9-3: CT saturation detection internal and external fault patterns
N
differential
TTER
RN
TTE
LT PA
OPERATE
A
LT P
L FAU
FAU
BLOCK
RNA
NAL
INTE
E R
EXT
TERN
EXTERNAL FAULT PAT
restraining
836728A1.CDR
The CT saturation condition is declared by the saturation detector when the magnitude of the restraining signal becomes
larger than the higher breakpoint (BREAK 2) and at the same time the differential current is below the first slope (SLOPE 1)
and its extension. The said condition is of a transient nature and requires a seal-in. A special logic in the form of a “state
machine” is used for this purpose as depicted in the following figure on saturation detector state machine.
As the phasor estimator introduces a delay into the measurement process, the aforementioned saturation test fails to
detect CT saturation occurring very fast. In order to cope with very fast CT saturation, another condition is checked that
uses relations between the signals at the waveform level. The basic principle is similar to that described. Additionally, the
sample-based stage of the saturation detector uses the time derivative of the restraining signal (di/dt) to better trace the
saturation pattern shown in the following figure.
The saturation detector is capable of detecting saturation occurring in approximately 3 ms from fault inception. The
saturation detector, although having no dedicated settings, uses the main differential characteristic for proper operation.
This must be kept in mind when setting the characteristic as its parameters must retain their original meaning.
The operation of the saturation detector is available as the FlexLogic operand XFMR PCNT DIFF SAT A/B/C.

TRANSFORMER THROUGH-FAULT MONITORING CHAPTER 9: THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 9-4: Saturation detector state machine
NORMAL
SAT := 0
The differential
current below the saturation
first slope for a condition
certain period of
time
EXTERNAL
FAULT
SAT := 1
The differential-
The differential restraining trajectory
characteristic out of the differential
entered characteristic for a
certain period of time
EXTERNAL
FAULT and CT
SATURATION
SAT := 1
836729A1.CDR
9.3 Transformer through-fault monitoring

IEEE C57.109- 2018 and IEEE C57.12.59- 2015 provide maximum through-fault current duration limit curves for liquid-
immersed and dry type transformers, respectively.
Category I has a single curve reflecting both thermal and mechanical damages. For currents greater than five times the
rated current, thermal/mechanical damage can happen when I2t is greater than 1250 (square of pu symmetrical fault
current multiplied by duration of fault in seconds). For Category I of liquid-immersed transformers, the standard
recommended curve covers up to 40 pu fault currents (time limit equal to 0.78 seconds). For all other transformer
categories and types, the maximum symmetrical short circuit current covered by the curves is 25 pu.
Category II and III transformers subjected to infrequent faults also are represented by the same threshold of 1250. Beyond
this threshold, thermal damage can occur to the transformer.
Category II and III transformers subject to frequent faults, and Category IV transformers have thermal/mechanical
damage curves. These curves define the damage threshold based on maximum fault current for the transformer as
defined by the THRU FLT MON 1 MAX FLT CUR setting. For Category II transformers, cumulative mechanical damage can
occur if the symmetrical through fault current is above 70% of maximum fault current. For Category III and IV, symmetrical
through fault currents above 50% of the maximum fault current can cause cumulative mechanical damage. Damage
threshold for fault current levels beyond above points is equal to: 2 times square of the THRU FLT MON 1 MAX FLT CUR. This
reflects the worst-case mechanical duty of 2 seconds at maximum fault current. The damage threshold for fault current
levels below these mentioned fault current points is 1250 (primarily thermal damage).
This element determines the thermal/mechanical damage withstand capability (Limit_exec in the logic diagram) at each
9 execution and integrates the damages of all detected through faults in per unit of the associated withstand capability.
When the total damage or the total number of faults exceeds the defined settings, it asserts the corresponding phase
THRU FLT 1 OP operand.

CHAPTER 9: THEORY OF OPERATION TRANSFORMER INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION
9.4 Transformer interturn fault detection

During steady state, the transformer differential current mainly contains excitation current, measurement errors, and
noise. Inherent CT inaccuracies are very low when the transformer carries normal load current. For a power transformer,
with the core and windings in healthy condition, the excitation current mainly depends on the transformer terminal
voltage. So, an additional term, which is a function of system voltage, can be added to the existing current differential
equation to compensate for the steady state excitation current component. However, the voltage-dependent additional
term also compensates a portion of the measurement errors. So, during steady state, the compensated differential current
mainly contains noise and a fraction of the measurement errors. Traditional current differential protection becomes more
sensitive due to the addition of this voltage dependent compensation term. As a result, a smaller change in the differential
current (caused by interturn fault) can be detected in this approach.
The compensated phase differential currents (denoted by single quote superscript) are calculated using the following
formulas:
I’ad= Iad – KA × VA Eq. 9-1
I’bd= Ibd – KB × VB Eq. 9-2
I’cd = Icd – KC × VC Eq. 9-3
where
KA, KB, and KC are the coefficients (K-factors) calculated during steady state, meaning during the time that no system
disturbance is detected as per the logic diagram of the element
VA, VB, and VC are per unit phase voltages of the chosen supervising source
Iad is Phase A differential current phasor without any cutoff applied and in per unit of nominal of the CTs on the reference
winding
Ibd is Phase B differential current phasor without any cutoff applied and in per unit of nominal of the CTs on the reference
winding
Icd is Phase C differential current phasor without any cutoff applied and in per unit of nominal of the CTs on the reference
winding
During steady state, K-factors KA, KB, and KC are calculated such that
I’ad = 0 Eq. 9-4
I’bd = 0 Eq. 9-5
I’cd = 0 Eq. 9-6
So
I ad_steady
K A = ---------------------
- Eq. 9-7
V A_steady
I bd_steady
K B = ---------------------
- Eq. 9-8
V B_steady
I cd_steady
K C = ---------------------
- Eq. 9-9
V C_steady
where
Iad_steady is Iad measured during steady state
Ibd_steady is Ibd measured during steady state 9
Icd_steady is Icd measured during steady state
VA_steady is VA measured during steady state
VB_steady is VB measured during steady state
VC_steady is VC measured during steady state

TRANSFORMER INTERTURN FAULT DETECTION CHAPTER 9: THEORY OF OPERATION
These equations are vector calculations. They assume a Wye connected VT. For Delta connected VTs, the corresponding
line voltages are used (VAB, VBC, and VCA).
To account for the above-mentioned steady state calculation condition, the algorithm applies a calculation blocking signal
when the supervising source voltages or currents in any of the phases undergo a major change. That is when the
difference between two cycle old and present time fundamental frequency phasor magnitudes reaches above 0.1 pu.
Furthermore, the transformer Percent Differential element's SAT flag (external faults), Second Harmonic Inhibit (Inrush
currents), Fifth Harmonic Inhibit (over-excitation), and Percent Differential element pickup operands do block K-factor
calculations and comparators.
An interturn fault involving fewer turns has negligible effect on system voltages. Compensated phase differential current
increases when an interturn fault takes place in a phase. The K-factors KA, KB, and KC calculated during steady state are
maintained through the evolving turn-to-turn fault and this consequently leads to detection of the turn-to-turn fault
condition.

Chapter 10: Maintenance
Maintenance
This chapter outlines monitoring, maintenance, repair, storage, and disposal of the hardware and software.
10.1 Monitoring
Devices and data can be monitored.
10.1.1 Devices with Site Targets

To view an overview of devices:
1. Access the Site Targets item in the Online Window area, below the list of devices. It can take a few minutes for all
devices to be read.
2. Acknowledge any messages for unaccessible devices. The Site Targets window opens when done.
Figure 10-1: Site Targets window
10.1.2 Data with Modbus Analyzer

Use the Modbus Analyzer under Maintenance > Modbus Analyzer to monitor the values of the UR device. Use the Modbus
memory map addresses outlined in the UR Family Communications Guide for the entries.
The upper part of the window displays values. The lower part of the window is for factory service use.

MONITORING CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
The first row in the figure shows that Contact Output 1 operation is being monitored. Its Modbus address is CAFA. The
actual value read from the device is 0, which means that it is off.
The second row in the figure shows the Contact Output 1 Name. It has a Modbus address of CAF0 and a default value of
"Cont Op 1." None of Selection column settings render this value because they present the information based on
numbering systems.
Figure 10-2: Modbus Analyzer used to monitor actual values on a UR
Address (HEX) — Modbus address in hexadecimal. See the Modbus memory map in the UR Family Communications Guide
or in the web interface (enter IP address of UR device in a web browser). Convert the decimal address in the Modbus
memory map to hexadecimal.
Modbus Type
Actual Value — To read the data in the UR device
Setting — To read a setting in the UR device
Coil — To read a command in the UR device
# of — Element, input, or output to read. An example is 1 for Contact Output 1.
Selection (examples demonstrate various ways to represent 0)
Hex — A decimal numbering system based on 16 possible values, from 0 to 9 and A to F. An example is 0x0000.
Char — A single unicode character, such as C. An example is 0.
Int — A 32-bit number, either positive or negative. An example is 0.
UInt — Unsigned 32-bit integer, which means that it cannot be negative but can be twice as large as a signed integer. An
example is 0.
Long — A 64-bit number, either positive or negative. An example is 0.
ULong — Unsigned 64-bit number, which means that it cannot be negative but can be twice as large as a signed 64-bit
number. An example is 0.
Float — A numbering system with no fixed number of digits before or after the decimal point. An example is 0.000000.
Binary — A numbering system using 0 and 1. An example is 0000-0000-0000-0000.
Entries are not saved when closing the window.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE
10.2 General maintenance

The T35 requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time.
Expected service life is 20 years for UR devices manufactured June 2014 or later when applied in a controlled indoor
environment and electrical conditions within specification.
While the T35 performs continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be scheduled with other system
maintenance. This maintenance can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
10.2.1 In-service maintenance

1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the
corresponding system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3. LED test.
4. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
5. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
10.2.2 Out-of-service maintenance

1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated
test equipment is required.
3. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against
relay settings schedule).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
7. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.
state once per year, for one hour continuously.
10.2.3 Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)

View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.
10.3 Retrieve files

Data, oscillography, log, events, routing, ARP, and other files can be transferred using the EnerVista software when using
the graphical front panel. These files can be requested by technical support staff.
To retrieve a file using EnerVista software:
1. If the CyberSentry option is enabled, log in to the EnerVista software using the Administrator role.
2. In the Online Window area of EnerVista, access Maintenance > Retrieve File. The window opens.
3. Note the destination folder to which the file is to be saved at the top and change it if required. You can copy the path
or open the folder for convenience at this time.
4. Select the file to download from the UR device. 10

RETRIEVE FILES CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
5. Click the Read File button. The file is saved to the destination folder. The EnerVista window remains open to download
additional files.
10.3.1 CyberSentry security event files

CyberSentry security events are available in the following two files: SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV and SETTING_CHANGES.LOG.
10.3.1.1 Security events file

The figure shows the content for the SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV file.
Figure 10-3: Security events file
Time — Local time.

Activity — The actual security event.
1 = Authentication Failed
2 = User Lockout
3 = FW Upgrade
4 = FW Lock
5 = Settings Lock
6 = Settings Change, this can fill the entire event log. Hence it is supported by the already existing
SETTINGS_CHANGE.LOG file. This event is not required.
7 = Clear Oscillography command
8 = Clear Data Logger command
9 = Clear Demand Records command
10 = Clear Energy command
11 = Reset Unauthorized Access
12 = Clear Teleprotection Counters
13 = Clear All Records
14 = Role Log out
15 = Role Log in
16 = Factory Mode enabled
17 = Factory Mode disabled
Change Method — Format code F229 for the settings control change method.
0 = None
1 = Keypad
2 = Front port
3 = COM1 (not used)
4 = COM2 (RS485)
5 = Ethernet
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE CONVERT DEVICE SETTINGS
10.3.1.2 Setting changes file

The SETTING_CHANGES.LOG file stores all the setting changes. A total of 1024 events are stored in a circular buffer in
volatile memory.
Figure 10-4: Setting changes file
10.4 Convert device settings

Settings files can be upgraded or downgraded to other firmware versions. For example, version 7.4 settings can be
upgraded to version 7.6.
Settings are reset to factory default upon conversion. For a graphical front panel, for example when upgrading from
version 7.6 to 7.7, single-line diagrams and cells configured for the Metering Editor are defaulted, while other graphical
front panel settings are retained.
When converting a settings file from version 7.20 or earlier to 7.70 or later, any IEC 61850 settings are defaulted, and
Edition 2 is used.
When converting a settings file from version since 7.30 inclusive to 7.70 or later, any IEC 61850 settings are converted and
Edition 2 is used.
When converting a settings file with IEC 61850 Edition 1 to version 7.80 or later with a non-HardFiber Process Bus Module
(order code 85, 86, or 87), conversion does not take place and an error message displays. The Process Bus Module does not
support Edition 1.
Conversions between PBM and non-PBM order codes are not permitted.
With version 8.00 and later, when a file is converted between order codes, the logical node prefix names and instance
numbers are defaulted and the respective dataset member references are removed.
To convert settings:
1. If not already in the Offline Window area, right-click the online device in the EnerVista software and select the Add
Device to Offline Window option. This copies the settings to the Offline Window area. Any message about file repair
usually means that settings were missing in the original file and have been added with default values to the new file.
2. Make a copy of the settings file in the Offline Window area by right-clicking the file and selecting Duplicate Device. A
copy of the file is made and the file name start with “Copy of”. Optionally rename the file by right-clicking it and
selecting the Rename Device option.
3. Convert the settings by right-clicking one of the files in the Offline Window and selecting the Convert Device Settings
option.
If the option does not display, click the Admin > User Management menu item and enable the Update Info check box
for the user. Save.
Or if the option does not display, click the Admin > User Management menu item and enable the Enable Security
check box. Save. Select the Admin > User Login menu item. Enter "Administrator" for the user and enter the password.
(Contact GE Grid Solutions if you do not know the default password.)
10

CONVERT DEVICE SETTINGS CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
GE recommends converting settings in firmware steps, for example when converting from 6.0 to 7.4x, convert first to
7.0 then 7.4 in order to follow embedded conversion rules and keep settings.
The settings convert and a report generates.
Figure 10-5: Upgrade settings
4. Review the conversion report. The values of all settings that have been defaulted during conversion are not listed in
the conversion report; to find the value of a setting before conversion, inspect the device backup file made before
conversion.
In the example shown here, settings have been reset to factory defaults and several settings are new in firmware
version 7.6 under Settings > System Setup > Switches and Breakers.
Figure 10-6: Conversion report
5. Change settings in the new file, for example by looking at the original file.
6. Write the converted file to the device, for example by dragging and dropping from the Offline Window to the Online
Window.
7. Check settings and operation.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE COPY SETTINGS TO OTHER DEVICE
10.5 Copy settings to other device

Settings from one T35 device can be copied to another T35 device for rapid deployment. The order codes and IEC 61850
edition must match. See the Settings File section at the beginning of the Interfaces chapter for a list of settings not
deployed.
1. Right-click the device in the Online window and select the Add Device to Offline Window option. A window opens.
2. Check the file path and name the file, then click the Receive button. An example is to save the files in
D:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power Management\URPC\Data\ and to name the source device
T35_Deployment. At the prompt, confirm the action. The settings are saved in .cid, .icd, and .urs files, and the entry
displays in the Offline window area.
3. Right-click the device in the Offline window area and select the Duplicate Device option. The device is copied with a
prefix of "Copy of." Multiple duplicates results in files being named "Copy of Copy of" for example, which can be
avoided by deleting the folder copies from the path shown on mouse-over.
4. Right-click the copied device and rename it.
5. Right-click the copied device and select the Edit Device Properties option. Make the changes for the new device.
6. Send the file to new device by dragging and dropping it into the Online Window area. Or right-click and select the
Write Settings to Device option.
7. Update the remaining settings, such as IP address.
10.6 Export settings

All or specific groups of settings are exportable.
1. Right-click a device in the Offline Window area and select the Export Settings option. A window opens. When the
Export All Settings option is enabled, the individual settings groups are inactive.
Figure 10-7: Export settings
2. For groups of settings, enable the Export Selected Settings option, then enable the check boxes of the options to
export. The example shows that FlexLogic equations are to be exported.
3. Click the OK button, and specify a file name in the window that opens. The format is XML. Click the button to start the
export, which takes a minute or two.
10

COMPARE SETTINGS CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
If prompted about a file being repaired, review the report. The path to the file displays, and otherwise it sits with the
URS, CID, and ICD files of the device with a file name of _Repair_Report.txt, such as B30 81x_Repair_Report.txt. The
example shows that some settings were added at default values. The explanation is that the EnerVista software was
updated, but the offline file predates the update.
Figure 10-8: Settings report
10.7 Compare settings

Settings are comparable against default values and between two UR devices.
Some of the IEC 61850 settings use floating point data, which guarantees accurate representation of real numbers up to
seven digits. Numbers with more than seven digits are approximated within a certain precision. This can result in
differences between what is entered and what is saved, and for example results in differences shown on a settings
comparison report.
When comparing two settings files with the graphical front panel, all graphical front panel features are compared except
for the single-line diagrams.
10.7.1 Compare against defaults

1. Right-click the device in the Offline Window area and select Compare Settings With Defaults. The file generates and
the number of differences displays.
2. To save the report, click File > Save As, select the TXT, PDF, or CSV format from the drop-down list, and enter a name
for the file.
In the figure, the first entry is from the device, while the second is the default value.
Figure 10-9: Device settings compared with default values
10.7.2 Compare two devices

Preferences are set under File > Preferences as follows:
• Comparison Report: Sequential File 1, File 2 Layout — When disabled (default), the report shows only what differs, as
shown in the previous figure. When enabled, the report indicates differences by device.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE BACK UP AND RESTORE SETTINGS
Figure 10-10: Device settings compared between two devices, displayed sequentially
There are two ways to compare devices: devices in the Offline area or between Online and Offline devices.
To compare settings of two devices in the Offline Window area:
1. Right-click a first device in the Offline Window area and select Compare Two Devices.
2. In the window that opens, select a second device and click the OK button. The file generates and the number of
differences displays.
Alternatively, in the window that opens, enter a path/file name at the bottom of the window; users can select either a
URS or a CID file. When selecting URS files users should be aware that for IEC 61850 order codes the information in a
URS data file is incomplete and therefore a comparison with an IEC 61850-enabled device will show many differences.
3. To save the report, click File > Save As, select the TXT, PDF, or CSV format from the drop-down list, and enter a name
for the file.
To compare settings between Online and Offline devices:

1. Right-click a device in the Online Window area and select Compare with Device.
2. In the window that opens, select an offline device and click the OK button. The file generates and the number of
differences displays.
Alternatively, in the window that opens, enter a path/file name at the bottom of the window; users can select either a
URS or a CID file. When selecting URS files users should be aware that for IEC 61850 order codes the information in a
URS data file is incomplete and therefore a comparison with an IEC 61850-enabled device will show many differences.
3. Click the OK button. The file generates, and the differences are highlighted in red, which is for the first device.
10.8 Back up and restore settings

Back up a copy of the in-service settings for each commissioned UR device, so as to revert to the commissioned settings
after inadvertent, unauthorized, or temporary setting changes are made, after the settings defaulted due to firmware
upgrade, or when the device has to be replaced. This section describes how to backup settings to a file and how to use
that file to restore the settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay.
For reference, settings can saved with Online > Print Device Information and Online > Export Device Information. They
cannot be restored using these options.
10.8.1 Back up settings

The following file types can be saved:
• URS — UR settings file — When the IEC 61850 option is not present
• IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings on UR
• ICD — IED Capability Description file — Default settings on UR
• CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not contain the present settings)
UR device settings can be saved in a backup URS file using the EnerVista UR Setup software. The URS file is the standard
UR settings file. For an introduction to settings files in the URS format, see the beginning of the Interfaces chapter.
10

BACK UP AND RESTORE SETTINGS CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
When the IEC 61850 option is present, the settings can be saved alternatively in a backup IID file either using the EnerVista
UR Setup software in online mode or by using any of the supported file transfer protocols. The IID file is one of several IEC
61850 Substation Configuration Language (SCL) file types; see the IEC 61850 chapter in the UR Series Communications
Guide for an introduction to SCL.
"TBD" displays when a setting in a modeled element is configured with a non-modeled operand. For example, Phase IOC is
modeled in a firmware release, while the LED operands are not modeled. If the block setting of the Phase IOC is configured
with LED operands, its displays as TBD in IID and CID files, the web interface, or in an MMS client.
The options that display in the EnerVista software when right-clicking depend on device options.
Preferences are set in the File > Preferences > IEC 61850 menu. There are two options as follows:
• Preserve custom attributes when importing SCD/CID files — Applies to the Add Device to Offline Window option.
When enabled, the IID file also is to be copied to the computer. The IID file that is retrieved from the relay is therefore
assumed to be in synchronization with the resulting .urs file, and in fact in this situation the IID file on the computer is
a copy of the IID file that was read from the online device. When disabled, the IID file on the computer is to be left
unchanged. The location of the IID file is C:\ProgramData\GE Power Management\urpc\Offline, for example.
• Do not update IID file when updating SCL files — When enabled (default), an IID file is not to be created on the
computer and if one is already present there, it is neither removed nor updated. Have this option enabled when you
want to keep the IID file from the UR device instead of from another tool. The location of the file is C:\ProgramData\GE
Power Management\urpc\Offline, for example.
An Environment backup stores a list of sites and devices in the Online and Offline Window areas. Settings files are not
contained within the environment file. If a settings file is moved, renamed, or deleted after the backup, it is removed from
the Offline Window during the restore.
To save a settings file in the URS format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, connect to the device in the Online Window area.
2. Right-click the device name in the Online Window area and select Add Device to Offline Window. A window opens.
3. Select or enter a file name and location, and click the Receive button. A .urs file is created in the Offline Window area.
To create a new settings file in the URS format in EnerVista Offline Window:
1. In EnerVista, right-click in the Offline Window area and select New Device. A window opens.
2. Change the file name at the end of the Path field, keeping the .urs extension.
3. From the Associate File with Device drop-down list, select the UR device. Other fields complete automatically.
Otherwise, when you do not select a device from the drop-down list, all fields need to be completed manually and
only devices that match the entered order code and version display in the list.
4. The Serial # Lock field is the serial number of the intended device. It ensures that the settings file is sent only to the
specific relay that matches the serial number.
5. Click the OK button to create the .urs file in the Offline Window area.
To save settings in the IID format in EnerVista Online Window:

2. Right-click the device name in the Online Window area and select Read IID File. The option is not present when the
device does not have the IEC 61850 option. A window opens when successful.
3. Select or enter a file name and location, and click the Receive button. A .iid file is created.
To save settings in the IID format in EnerVista Offline Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area.
10 2. Select the Create IID File option for firmware below 7.3. The option is not always available. Select the Save As option
for firmware 7.3 and later, and select the IID option from drop-down list.

No file is generated. The IID file on the computer is copied to the location specified.
3. If the Do not update IID file when updating SCL files preference is enabled under File > Preferences > IEC 61850,
then a message displays to that effect. This means that there is no IID file available on the computer to be copied, so
a new one is generated.
To save settings in the IID format using TFTP:

1. On a computer on the same subnetwork as the UR device, open a command window.
2. Enter
TFTP <IP address> GET ur.iid <destination>
where
<IP address> is the IP address of the UR device
ur.iid is the internal name of the IID file in the UR device
<destination> is the path and file name of the IID file. If omitted, the file is saved as ur.iid in the command window
default directory.
An example is
TFTP 192.168.1.101 GET ur.iid Feeder1.iid
To save settings in the ICD format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Online Window area.
2. Select the Read ICD File option. A window opens.
3. Enter a path/name for the file, and click the Save button.
To save settings in the ICD format in EnerVista Offline Window:

2. Select the Create ICD File option. Or select the Save As option, and select the ICD option from drop-down list.
You can be prompted to specify if the file is for firmware version 7.12 or later.
The file is saved to the location specified.
To save settings in the CID format in EnerVista Online Window:

1. In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Online Window area.
2. Select the Read ICD File option. A window opens.
3. Enter a path/name for the file, and click the Save button.
To save settings in the CID format in EnerVista Offline Window:

2. Select the Save As option, which displays for firmware 7.3 and later, and select the CID option from the drop-down list.
The file is copied from the computer to the location specified.
To save list of sites and devices with an Environment backup:

1. In EnerVista, click File > Environment > Backup. A window opens.
2. Name and save the .ENV file.
10

BACK UP AND RESTORE SETTINGS CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
10.8.2 Restore settings

UR device settings can be restored to the values they were at when a URS backup file was created using the EnerVista UR
Setup software. When the IEC 61850 option is present, the settings can alternatively be to the values they were at when an
IID type backup was created either using the EnerVista UR Setup software in online mode or by using any of the supported
file transfer protocols. Note that TFTP cannot be used here, as TFTP "put" mode is disabled for security reasons.
To restore completely, a few settings need to be entered manually either via EnerVista UR Setup or via the UR device front
panel. If the restore operation is to be via Ethernet, first the UR device must have its IP address settings entered via the
front panel. These are located at SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK 1(3) and SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IPv4 ROUTE TABLE 1(6)  DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE  GATEWAY ADDRESS.
When importing a file, it cannot have a blank numeric value. All numeric values must be non-blank, otherwise the file is
rejected.
URS and IID procedures are outlined here.
To restore settings from a URS file:
2. Right-click the .urs file in the Offline Window area and select Add Device from File to locate a file, and/or drag-and-
drop the file from the Offline Window area to the device in the Online Window area.
Figure 10-11: Restoring a URS settings file
3. Two prompts are possible, first that the URS file does not include the complete IEC 61850 configuration and that it
needs to be recreated if you continue. This means that the URS file is from UR version 7.30 or higher, has the IEC 61850
software option in the order code, but any IEC 61850 content will be compromised and will need to be configured.
Second, a message can display that the URS file is part of a device folder and to use the device’s CID file. This means
that the URS file is from UR version 7.3 or higher, has the IEC 61850 software option in the order code, and is part of the
device folder. The user is trying to add a URS file from inside a device’s folder. Instead, the user needs to use the CID file
from the device folder.
10 These messages display because the roles of the protection engineer and network engineer can be separate. The
former can require a URS file, while the latter can require stored Modbus settings and protection schemes.

4. Manually copy the remaining settings, outlined as follows.
To restore settings from an IID file using EnerVista software:

1. In Windows, make a copy of the .iid backup file, and change the extension to .cid on the new copy.
2. In the Online Window area of the UR EnerVista Setup software, connect to the device to establish communication.
3. In the Offline Window area, right-click Devices and select Import Devices from SCD.
Figure 10-12: Importing an SCD or CID file
4. Navigate to and select the file with .cid extension. When prompted, enter a file name to give to an intermediate URS
file. The URS file is added to the Offline Window area.
5. Drag the imported file in the Offline Window to the device in the Online Window. Note that the RELAY SETTINGS value
also is written to a device, and the accepting relay is put into "Programmed" or "Not Programmed" mode as
configured in the offline file.
To restore settings from an IID using SFTP:

1. Verify that transfer by SFTP is enabled under SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS 
PROTOCOL SFTP PROTOCOL.
2. Close EnerVista UR Setup software.
3. In Windows, make a copy of the .iid backup file, and change the extension to .cid on the new copy.
4. On a computer on the same subnetwork as the UR device, open an SFTP client application, such as WinSCP. Note that
TFTP cannot be used here.
5. Use the device's IP address as the host name.
6. If the device has the CyberSentry option, use the User Name of "Administrator" or "Engineer," and the password
programmed for the selected role. The default password is "ChangeMe1#" (without quotation marks). Log in to the
device.
7. If the device does not have the CyberSentry option, use the User Name of "Setting," and the password programmed for
the Setting role. The default password is "ChangeMe1#" (without quotation marks). Log in to the device.
8. Upload the backup file copy with the .cid extension. WinSCP uses drag-and-drop or copy-and-paste for this file
transfer.
To manually copy remaining settings:

1. Settings listed in section 4.1.2 Settings Files are not transferred to the UR device with settings files. Enter them
manually either via the front panel or via EnerVista UR Setup software. The values that these settings had at the time
the backup was created are contained within the backup file, accessed through EnerVista UR Setup software.
10

UPGRADE SOFTWARE CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
To restore the list of sites and devices from an Environment backup:

1. In EnerVista, click File > Environment > Restore. A window opens.
2. Select the .ENV file to restore.
10.9 Upgrade software

In general, the latest releases of the EnerVista software can be used with all firmware versions. For example, EnerVista
software released for UR 8.2 can be used to access multiple UR devices that have version 8.2x, 7.4x, and 6.0x firmware
installed.
Existing installations do not need to be uninstalled before upgrade.
You can also downgrade the software; use the same procedure.
Silent installation also is possible.
When upgrading on a computer with Windows Server 2012, its Release 2 needs the KB2919355 update first. Follow the
instructions described in the link, which works in Internet Explorer, not Chrome.
https://www.microsoft.com/en-US/download/details.aspx?id=42334
To upgrade the EnerVista software:

1. If a beta version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed, uninstall it, for example using the Windows Control
Panel.
2. For Windows 10, disconnect any USB cable to the T35, else the UR USB drivers do no install correctly.
3. Download the latest EnerVista software and/or firmware from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?prod=urfamily&type=7
4. Double-click the file and complete the wizard. The software installs.
5. Access the software.
The prompt "Do you want to create device folders for all your pre-existing off line devices" determines the folder
structure on the computer. Clicking Yes means that CID, ICD, and URS files are to be grouped together in a folder, and
the URS file is also one level above. Clicking No leaves folder structure unchanged.
6. Check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does not display, try uninstalling the software and
reinstalling the new version.
7. For Windows 10, to finish installing the UR USB driver, open Device Manager > Ports, then plug in the USB cable (to
connect the relay and computer). A new port starting with "GE Virtual Serial Port" is available. If available, click the OK
button to complete the installation.
If not available, uninstall the existing GE USB driver in the Device Manager > Ports. (Right-click and "Uninstall.")
When complete, unplug and re-plug the USB cable connecting the UR device. The "GE Virtual Serial Port" driver is now
available.
A message can display about a version not being supported. An example is when upgrading from version 7.12K to 7.4x.
The 7.12K entry is removed from the Offline Window area.
A message can display in the EnerVista software upon launch that "a device from the environment was not recognized."
This means that a device is online and its firmware version conflicts with the software version. In the example shown, a
C60 with firmware version 7.5x is online, but the software version is 7.3x. Updating removed incompatible files and
changed the device to version 7.3x, after which you need to make the order codes consistent as outlined next.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE UPGRADE FIRMWARE
Figure 10-13: Mismatch in order code between software and device
To make the order codes consistent:

1. In EnerVista, click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
2. Expand the entry for the UR device.
3. Click the Read Order Code button. The order code and version of the device are populated to the software.
4. Click the OK button to save the change.
The silent installation is not truly silent because it invokes the user interface. The installation is silent at step 5. Double-
clicking on the .exe file for installation is faster.
To install the software silently:
1. Uninstall any existing EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. In a command line window, run the executable file, such as entering URPC810.exe -r
3. Follow the prompts to install the software using the wizard. The action creates a setup.iss file in the C:\WINNT,
C:\Windows\Setup, or other folder that records user inputs.
4. Copy the .exe and .iss files to the same folder.
5. In a command line window, enter URPC810.exe /s, where URPC810.exe is the executable file name. The software
installs and generates a setup.log file in the same folder. A result code of "0" at the end the log file means that the
installation succeeded.
10.10 Upgrade firmware

If upgrading both firmware and EnerVista software, upgrade the software first.
The firmware of the T35 device can be upgraded locally or remotely, using the EnerVista software.
Upgrades are possible for the same release (such as 8.01 to 8.02) and from one firmware version to another (such as 7.2 to
7.3). When upgrading to another firmware version, check the release notes on the GE Multilin website for compatibility.
If you are upgrading from version 7.0 or 7.1 to 7.2 or later, some CPU modules require a new boot version. Update this first.
Address any equipment mismatch error before upgrade. For example, if you have a basic front panel attached and the
order code in the device is for a graphical front panel, the upgrade only works with a graphical front panel.
You can also downgrade firmware; use the same procedure.
Upgrading the firmware takes the relay out of service. At the end of the upgrade, the relay restores the “In Service” state
that existed before the upgrade.
Any DSP manufactured between 1 January 2013 and 1 December 2015 with versions 7.27, 7.28, or 7.60 and up must be
sent back to the factory for updates before updating the firmware.
10

UPGRADE FIRMWARE CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
To upgrade the firmware using EnerVista software:

1. If required, download the bootcode file and/or firmware from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?prod=urfamily&type=7
The firmware is a .SFD file. The boot file is a .000 file. Bootcode files 7.03 and later are for CPUs T, U, V, or W, which have
9T, 9U, 9V, or 9W on the label.
2. For a relay without the CyberSentry software option, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security and ensure that
the Remote Setting Authorized and Local Setting Authorized settings are “ON”. On the front panel of the device, the
path is SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS.
3. For a relay with CyberSentry Lvl 1 software option, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security > Access
Supervision or Settings > Product Setup > Security > Supervisory and disable the Lock Firmware setting. To change
this setting, the Supervisor role is required, or the Administrator role if the Supervisor role is not used.
4. In EnerVista, back up the device settings by right-clicking the device and selecting Add Device to Offline Window. In
the window that displays, select an existing file to overwrite, or enter a name for a new settings file and optionally a
location for the new file. Click the Receive button to start the backup.
If an “Incompatible device order codes or versions” message displays, it means that you are trying to overwrite a file
for another product. You access the Convert Device Settings option by right-clicking the file in the Offline Window
area at the lower left. GE recommends converting settings in firmware steps, for example when converting from 6.0 to
7.4x, convert first to 7.0 then 7.4 in order to follow embedded conversion rules and keep settings. Note that the values
of all settings that have been defaulted during conversion are not listed in the conversion report; to find the value of a
setting before conversion, inspect the device backups made before conversion.
5. In EnerVista, navigate to Maintenance > Update Firmware.
First select the boot file, if applicable, locating the .000 file, and proceed with the update. Note that settings are not
lost during this update. When done, the relay restarts automatically; continue with the next step.
When updating the boot file, ensure that power is not lost, else the relay must be returned to the
factory for repair.
To update the firmware, select the firmware update by locating the .SFD file, and proceed with the update.
EnerVista software only enables users to upgrade the firmware in the relay after validating the source of the SFD file
and its authenticity, by verifying the digital signature included in the file before sending it to the relay. If the digital
signature validation fails, the firmware upgrade process is aborted. If the digital signature validation succeeds,
EnerVista proceeds with the firmware upgrade. The relay records the outcome of the signature validation in the
security events.
When asked if upgrading over the Internet, the difference is the flash memory buffer size each time the software
sends data to the relay. Yes means that the flash memory buffer size is 256 bytes. No means that it is 1024 bytes,
which is faster.
If a warning message displays about the firmware not being supported by the EnerVista software, it means that the
firmware is a later version than the software. Upgrade the software to the same or later version as the firmware, then
try again.
If an "Unable to put relay in flash mode" message displays, set the Settings > Product Setup > Security > Dual
Permission Security Access > Remote Setting Authorized and Local Setting Authorized settings to "ON" and try
again.
When the update is finished, the relay restarts automatically. The upgrade process takes about 20 minutes when
using a graphical front panel because of writing to the front panel.
6. Restart the EnerVista software, and refresh the order code in EnerVista under the Device Setup button.
7. Verify the boot and firmware version while the device is starting up or in EnerVista under Actual Values > Product Info
> Firmware Revisions. The Revision is the firmware version, for example, revision 8.20 is UR firmware release 8.20.
The Boot Program Revision is the bootloader release.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE REPLACE MODULE
Figure 10-14: Check upgrades
8. Set the device to "programmed" under Settings > Product Setup > Installation. A self-test error displays on the device
until this is done.
9. If you changed the Remote Setting Authorized, the Local Setting Authorized settings, or relay lock settings, return
them to their previous settings.
10. If you changed the Lock Firmware setting, enable it again.
11. To apply any previously saved settings, right-click the saved settings file in the Offline Window area and select Write
to Device. Optionally convert the saved settings to the new firmware version before writing to the device by right-
clicking and selecting Convert Device Settings.
The field-programmable gate array (FPGA) can be upgraded under Maintenance > Update FPGA when the device
is connected via serial cable and the firmware revision is 7.0 or higher.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (that is, default
values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) can change slightly from version to version of
firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or
modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable,
self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware.
This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
10.11 Replace module

This section outlines how to replace a module.
Withdraw or insert a module only when control power has been removed from the unit, and be
sure to insert only the correct module type into a slot, else personal injury, damage to the unit or
connected equipment, or undesired operation can result.
To avoid damage to the equipment, use proper electrostatic discharge protection (for example, a
static strap) when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized.
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Replace modules only with like
modules in their original factory configured slots.
Two procedures follow: replace a module with the same module, and upgrade a module.
To replace a module with the same module:
1. Open the enhanced front panel to the left once the thumb screw has been removed. This allows for easy access of the
modules for withdrawal. The new wide-angle hinge assembly in the enhanced front panel opens completely and
allows easy access to all modules in the T35.
10

REPLACE MODULE CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
Figure 10-15: Modules inside relay with front cover open (enhanced front panel)
The basic front panel can be opened to the left once the black plastic sliding latch on the right side has been pushed
up, as shown below.
Figure 10-16: Removing module (basic front panel)
2. With power to the unit off, disconnect individually the connections at the front and back of the module before
removing the module from the chassis.
For any Process Bus Module in slot H for use with a HardFiber Brick, also remove the two screws at the back that
attach the module to the chassis.
3. To properly remove a module, pull simultaneously the ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of the
module. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the
correct slot. While modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits, for CT/VT modules it
is recommended to short/isolate external circuits accordingly for maximum safety.
4. To properly insert a module, ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/
inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module
is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips
simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is fully inserted.
When adding a module (versus replacing a module), check that settings have not changed. Depending on the
module, settings can reset to default values.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE BATTERY
The new CT/VT modules can only be used with new CPUs; similarly, old CT/VT modules can only be used with old
CPUs. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay does not function and a
DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error displays.
An upgrade example is replacing the CPU module with a more recent one, such as swapping 9G/9H/9N with 9T/9U/9V/9W.
A power supply module upgrade does not affect an order code.
To upgrade a module:
1. Back up settings by sending the device to the Offline Window area. Convert the settings to the new order code by
right-clicking in the Offline Window area. Replace the module as outlined in the previous procedure. In the Online
Window area, reset all settings to factory defaults and read the new order code from the device using Commands >
Relay Maintenance > Update Order Code. Send the saved settings from the Offline Window area to the online device.
Refresh the order code in the Device Setup window and set the device to "Programmed" under Settings > Product
Setup > Installation.
10.12 Battery
For the SH and SL models and earlier, a battery provides backup power for the real-time clock. The TH model does not
contain a battery, it uses a supercapacitor to provide backup power for the relay's real time clock.
For the SH and SL models, the battery can be replaced when required. The battery type is 3 V cylindrical. For the TH model,
no maintenance is required.
Note: The power supply modules were upgraded in 2014 from RH/RL to SH/SL. However, the order code when purchasing
a UR with redundant power supply remained as RH/RL so that customers can continue to use the same order codes. The
order code can read RH or RL, while the module inside the unit reads SH, SL or TH. The order code remains RH for power
supplies RH/SH/TH and RL for power supplies RL/SL.
This does not apply to replacement modules. The order code for replacement redundant power supply modules is SH, SL or
TH
10.12.1 Replace battery

When required, the battery can be replaced. The power supply module contains the battery.
To avoid injury, ensure that the unit has been powered off for a minimum of three minutes before
replacing the battery.
Risk of fire if battery is replaced with incorrect type or polarity.
1. Turn off the power to the unit.
2. Wait a minimum of three minutes to ensure that there is no power to the battery.
3. As outlined in the previous section, open the unit by sliding up the plastic latch on the right side of the front panel
(basic front panel) or unscrewing the panel (enhanced front panel).
4. For the basic front panel, it needs to be removed in order to access the power supply module, which is typically in the
first slot on the left side and blocked by the hinge of the front panel. To remove the front panel, unscrew the bracket on
the left side of the unit.
5. Remove the power supply module by simultaneously pulling the ejector clips at the top and bottom of the module and
sliding it out.
6. Unscrew all four screws (not three) that attach the metal cover to the module. The fourth screw is at the back end of
the module, on the opposite side from the clips, beside the white electronics part (see figure).
7. Slide the metal cover away from the clips about 0.5 cm (1/8 inch) and remove the cover.
8. Unclip the black plastic holder that keeps the battery in place. The plastic clips into the socket at the bottom on both
sides—pull the plastic away from the battery. Use a flat-head screwdriver if you cannot unclip the plastic with your
fingers.
10

BATTERY CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
9. Replace the battery with the identical make and model. For example, do not use a rechargeable battery. Observe the
+ and - polarity of the battery and replace it with the same polarity as marked on the battery holder.
Figure 10-17: Battery location on power supply module
10. Reinstall the battery holder and the metal cover, and reinsert the power supply module into the unit.
11. Power on the unit.
12. Dispose of the old battery as outlined in the next section.
10.12.2 Dispose of battery
10.12.2.1 EN Battery disposal

This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. See the
product documentation for specific battery information. The battery is marked with this symbol, which may include
lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling return the battery to your supplier or to a
designated collection point. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.2 CS Nakládání s bateriemi

Tento produkt obsahuje baterie, které nemohou být zneškodněny v Evropské unii jako netříděný komunální odpadu. Viz
dokumentace k produktu pro informace pro konkrétní baterie. Baterie je označena tímto symbolem, který může zahrnovat
i uvedena písmena, kadmium (Cd), olovo (Pb), nebo rtuť (Hg). Pro správnou recyklaci baterií vraťte svémudodavateli nebo
na určeném sběrném místě. Pro více informací viz: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.3 DA Batteri affald

Dette produkt indeholder et batteri som ikke kan bortskaffes sammen med almindeligt husholdningsaffald i Europa. Se
produktinformation for specifikke informationer om batteriet. Batteriet er forsynet med indgraveret symboler for hvad
batteriet indeholder: kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb) og kviksølv (Hg). Europæiske brugere af elektrisk udstyr skal aflevere kasserede
10 produkter til genbrug eller til leverandøren. Yderligere oplysninger findes på webstedet www.recyclethis.info.

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE BATTERY
10.12.2.4 DE Entsorgung von Batterien

Dieses Produkt beinhaltet eine Batterie, die nicht als unsortierter städtischer Abfall in der europäischen Union entsorgt
werden darf. Beachten Sie die spezifischen Batterie-informationen in der Produktdokumentation. Die Batterie ist mit
diesem Symbol gekennzeichnet, welches auch Hinweise auf möglicherweise enthaltene Stoffe wie Kadmium (Cd), Blei (Pb)
oder Quecksilber (Hektogramm) darstellt. Für die korrekte Wiederverwertung bringen Sie diese Batterie zu Ihrem lokalen
Lieferanten zurück oder entsorgen Sie das Produkt an den gekennzeichneten Sammelstellen. Weitere Informationen
hierzu finden Sie auf der folgenden Website: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.5 EL Απόρριψη μπαταριών

Αυτό το προϊόν περιέχει μια μπαταρία που δεν πρέπει να απορρίπτεται σε δημόσια συστήματα απόρριψης στην
Ευρωπαϊκή Κοινότητα. ∆είτε την τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος για συγκεκριμένες πληροφορίες που αφορούν τη μπαταρία.
Η μπαταρία είναι φέρει σήμανση με αυτό το σύμβολο, το οποίο μπορεί να περιλαμβάνει γράμματα για να δηλώσουν το
κάδμιο (Cd), τον μόλυβδο (Pb), ή τον υδράργυρο (Hg). Για την κατάλληλη ανακύκλωση επιστρέψτε την μπαταρία στον
προμηθευτή σας ή σε καθορισμένο σημείο συλλογής. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες δείτε: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.6 ES Eliminacion de baterias

Este producto contiene una batería que no se pueda eliminar como basura normal sin clasificar en la Unión Europea.
Examine la documentación del producto para la información específica de la batería. La batería se marca con este
símbolo, que puede incluir siglas para indicar el cadmio (Cd), el plomo (Pb), o el mercurio (Hg ). Para el reciclaje apropiado,
devuelva este producto a su distribuidor ó deshágase de él en los puntos de reciclaje designados. Para mas información :
wwwrecyclethis.info.
10.12.2.7 ET Patareide kõrvaldamine

Käesolev toode sisaldab patareisid, mida Euroopa Liidus ei tohi kõrvaldada sorteerimata olmejäätmetena. Andmeid
patareide kohta vaadake toote dokumentatsioonist. Patareid on märgistatud käesoleva sümboliga, millel võib olla
kaadmiumi (Cd), pliid (Pb) või elavhõbedat (Hg) tähistavad tähed. Nõuetekohaseks ringlusse võtmiseks tagastage patarei
tarnijale või kindlaksmääratud vastuvõtupunkti. Lisainformatsiooni saab Internetist aadressil: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.8 FI Paristoje ja akkujen hävittäminen

Tuote sisältää pariston, jota ei saa hävittää Euroopan Unionin alueella talousjätteen mukana. Tarkista tuoteselosteesta
tuotteen tiedot. Paristo on merkitty tällä symbolilla ja saattaa sisältää cadmiumia (Cd), lyijyä (Pb) tai elohopeaa (Hg). Oikean
kierrätystavan varmistamiseksi palauta tuote paikalliselle jälleenmyyjälle tai palauta se paristojen keräyspisteeseen.
Lisätietoja sivuilla www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.9 FR Élimination des piles

Ce produit contient une batterie qui ne peuvent être éliminés comme déchets municipaux non triés dans l'Union
européenne. Voir la documentation du produit au niveau des renseignements sur la pile. La batterie est marqué de ce
symbole, qui comprennent les indications cadmium (Cd), plomb (Pb), ou mercure (Hg). Pour le recyclage, retourner la
batterie à votre fournisseur ou à un point de collecte. Pour plus d'informations, voir: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.10 HU Akkumulátor hulladék kezelése

Ezen termék akkumulátort tartalmaz, amely az Európai Unión belül csak a kijelölt módon és helyen dobható ki. A terméken
illetve a mellékelt ismertetőn olvasható a kadmium (Cd), ólom (Pb) vagy higany (Hg) tartalomra utaló betűjelzés. A hulladék
akkumulátor leadható a termék forgalmazójánál új akkumulátor vásárlásakor, vagy a kijelölt elektronikai
hulladékudvarokban. További információ a www.recyclethis.info oldalon.
10

BATTERY CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
10.12.2.11 IT Smaltimento batterie

Questo prodotto contiene una batteria che non può essere smaltita nei comuni contenitori per lo smaltimento rifiuti, nell'
Unione Europea. Controllate la documentazione del prodotto per le informazioni specifiche sulla batteria. La batteria è
contrassegnata con questo simbolo e può includere alcuni caratteri ad indicare la presenza di cadmio (Cd), piombo (Pb)
oppure mercurio (Hg). Per il corretto smaltimento, potete restituirli al vostro fornitore locale, oppure rivolgervi e consegnarli
presso i centri di raccolta preposti. Per maggiori informazioni vedere: ww.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.12 LT Baterijų šalinimas

Šios įrangos sudėtyje yra baterijų, kurias draudžiama šalinti Europos Sąjungos viešose nerūšiuotų atliekų šalinimo
sistemose. Informaciją apie baterijas galite rasti įrangos techninėje dokumentacijoje. Baterijos žymimos šiuo simboliu,
papildomai gali būti nurodoma kad baterijų sudėtyje yra kadmio (Cd), švino (Pb) ar gyvsidabrio (Hg). Eksploatavimui
nebetinkamas baterijas pristatykite į tam skirtas surinkimo vietas arba grąžinkite jas tiesioginiam tiekėjui, kad jos būtų
tinkamai utilizuotos. Daugiau informacijos rasite šioje interneto svetainėje: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.13 LV Bateriju likvidēšana

Šis produkts satur bateriju vai akumulatoru, kuru nedrīkst izmest Eiropas Savienībā esošajās sadzīves atkritumu sistēmās.
Sk. produkta dokumentācijā, kur ir norādīta konkrēta informācija par bateriju vai akumulatoru. Baterijas vai akumulatora
marķējumā ir šis simbols, kas var ietvert burtus, kuri norāda kadmiju (Cd), svinu (Pb) vai dzīvsudrabu (Hg). Pēc
ekspluatācijas laika beigām baterijas vai akumulatori jānodod piegādātājam vai specializētā bateriju savākšanas vietā.
Sīkāku informāciju var iegūt vietnē: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.14 NL Verwijderen van baterijen

Dit product bevat een batterij welke niet kan verwijdert worden via de gemeentelijke huisvuilscheiding in de Europese
Gemeenschap. Gelieve de product documentatie te controleren voor specifieke batterij informatie. De batterijen met deze
label kunnen volgende indictaies bevatten cadium (Cd), lood (Pb) of kwik (Hg). Voor correcte vorm van kringloop, geef je de
producten terug aan jou locale leverancier of geef het af aan een gespecialiseerde verzamelpunt. Meer informatie vindt u
op de volgende website: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.15 NO Retur av batteri

Dette produkt inneholder et batteri som ikke kan kastes med usortert kommunalt søppel i den Europeiske Unionen. Se
produktdokumentasjonen for spesifikk batteriinformasjon. Batteriet er merket med dette symbolet som kan inkludere
symboler for å indikere at kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb), eller kvikksølv (Hg) forekommer. Returner batteriet til leverandøren din
eller til et dedikert oppsamlingspunkt for korrekt gjenvinning. For mer informasjon se: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.16 PL Pozbywanie się zużytych baterii

Ten produkt zawiera baterie, które w Unii Europejskiej mogą być usuwane tylko jako posegregowane odpady komunalne.
Dokładne informacje dotyczące użytych baterii znajdują się w dokumentacji produktu. Baterie oznaczone tym symbolem
mogą zawierać dodatkowe oznaczenia literowe wskazujące na zawartość kadmu (Cd), ołowiu (Pb) lub rtęci (Hg). Dla
zapewnienia właściwej utylizacji, należy zwrócić baterie do dostawcy albo do wyznaczonego punktu zbiórki. Więcej
informacji można znaleźć na stronie internetowej www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.17 PT Eliminação de Baterias

Este produto contêm uma bateria que não pode ser considerado lixo municipal na União Europeia. Consulte a
documentação do produto para obter informação específica da bateria. A bateria é identificada por meio de este símbolo,
que pode incluir a rotulação para indicar o cádmio (Cd), chumbo (Pb), ou o mercúrio (hg). Para uma reciclagem apropriada
envie a bateria para o seu fornecedor ou para um ponto de recolha designado. Para mais informação veja:
www.recyclethis.info.
10

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE CLEAR FILES AND DATA AFTER UNINSTALL
10.12.2.18 RU Утилизация батарей

Согласно европейской директиве об отходах электрического и электронного оборудования, продукты, содержащие
батареи, нельзя утилизировать как обычные отходы на территории ЕС. Более подробную информацию вы найдете в
документации к продукту. На этом символе могут присутствовать буквы, которые означают, что батарея собержит
кадмий (Cd), свинец (Pb) или ртуть (Hg). Для надлежащей утилизации по окончании срока эксплуатации пользователь
должен возвратить батареи локальному поставщику или сдать в специальный пункт приема. Подробности можно
найти на веб-сайте: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.19 SK Zaobchádzanie s batériami

Tento produkt obsahuje batériu, s ktorou sa v Európskej únii nesmie nakladať ako s netriedeným komunálnym odpadom.
Dokumentácia k produktu obsahuje špecifické informácie o batérii. Batéria je označená týmto symbolom, ktorý môže
obsahovať písmená na označenie kadmia (Cd), olova (Pb), alebo ortuti (Hg). Na správnu recykláciu vráťte batériu vášmu
lokálnemu dodávateľovi alebo na určené zberné miesto. Pre viac informácii pozrite: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.20 SL Odlaganje baterij

Ta izdelek vsebuje baterijo, ki je v Evropski uniji ni dovoljeno odstranjevati kot nesortiran komunalni odpadek. Za posebne
informacije o bateriji glejte dokumentacijo izdelka. Baterija je označena s tem simbolom, ki lahko vključuje napise, ki
označujejo kadmij (Cd), svinec (Pb) ali živo srebro (Hg). Za ustrezno recikliranje baterijo vrnite dobavitelju ali jo odstranite na
določenem zbirališču. Za več informacij obiščite spletno stran: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.21 SV Kassering av batteri

Denna produkt innehåller ett batteri som inte får kastas i allmänna sophanteringssytem inom den europeiska unionen. Se
produktdokumentationen för specifik batteriinformation. Batteriet är märkt med denna symbol, vilket kan innebära att det
innehåller kadmium (Cd), bly (Pb) eller kvicksilver (Hg). För korrekt återvinning skall batteriet returneras till leverantören eller
till en därför avsedd deponering. För mer information, se: www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.22 TR Pil Geri Dönüşümü

Bu ürün Avrupa Birliği genel atık sistemlerine atılmaması gereken pil içermektedir. Daha detaylı pil bilgisi için ürünün
kataloğunu inceleyiniz. Bu sembolle işaretlenmiş piller Kadmiyum(Cd), Kurşun(Pb) ya da Civa(Hg) içerebilir. Doğru geri
dönüşüm için ürünü yerel tedarikçinize geri veriniz ya da özel işaretlenmiş toplama noktlarına atınız. Daha fazla bilgi için:
www.recyclethis.info.
10.12.2.23 Global contacts

North America 905-294-6222
Latin America +55 11 3614 1700
Europe, Middle East, Africa +(34) 94 485 88 00
Asia +86-21-2401-3208
India +91 80 41314617
From GE Part Number 1604-0021-A1, GE Publication Number GEK-113574.
10.13 Clear files and data after uninstall

The unit can be decommissioned by turning off power to the unit and disconnecting the wires to it.
To clear files and settings in the UR:
1. On the UR front panel, navigate to COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE  SERVICE COMMAND, enter the value 20511,
and press the ENTER key. The relay restarts and clears the UR.
2. Clear the flash memory using the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS command.
10

REPAIRS CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
To clear files and settings on the computer:

1. Uninstall the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2. Find and delete the following UR files:
– .URS, .CID, and .ICD settings
– .EVT event records
– .CFG and .DAT COMTRADE
10.14 Repairs
The battery and modules inside the case can be replaced without return of the device to the factory. The firmware and
software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
Fuses in the power supply module are not field-replaceable.
Files can be requested for use by technical support staff, for example the Service Report or under Maintenance > Retrieve
File, as outlined elsewhere in this document.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion
the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of
cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
GE GRID SOLUTIONS
650 MARKLAND STREET
MARKHAM, ONTARIO
CANADA L6C 0M1
ATTN: SERVICE DEPT.
RMA# : ______________
Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department in Canada at +1 905 927 5098.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
10.15 Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage temperature range
outlined in the Specifications.
10 state once per year, for one hour continuously.

CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE DISPOSAL
10.16 Disposal
Other than the battery, there are no special requirements for disposal of the unit at the end its service life. For customers
located in the European Union, dispose of the battery as outlined earlier. To prevent non-intended use of the unit, remove
the modules as outlined earlier, dismantle the unit, and recycle the metal when possible. See the UR Family Recycling and
Disposal Instructions (GET-20096).
10

DISPOSAL CHAPTER 10: MAINTENANCE
10

Appendix A: FlexAnalog operands
Appendices
FlexAnalog operands
This appendix outlines FlexAnalog parameters.
A.1 FlexAnalog items

A FlexAnalog parameter is an analog parameter.
FlexAnalog items specific to your device are viewable in a web browser. Enter the IP address of the UR, access the Device
Information Menu option, then the FlexAnalog Parameter Listing option. Entries displayed online depend on order code.
Each FlexAnalog address is the Modbus memory map address prefixed with 0004. For example, with Modbus address of
1638, the FlexAnalog address is 00041638.
A.1.1 T35 FlexAnalog data items

Please note that this manual must be opened with Adobe Acrobat Reader to allow access to the attached spreadsheet.
This program is freely available on the Adobe website. The spreadsheets may be opened using free web-based software
such as Google Sheets.
An Open File dialogue box may open with a warning message about potential harm from programs, macros or viruses. The
files supplied do not contain any harmful content, and may be safely opened.
Click on the button below to open the T35 FlexAnalog data items spreadsheet for version 8.5x.
FlexAnalog T35 850
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL A-1

FLEXANALOG ITEMS APPENDIX A: FLEXANALOG OPERANDS
A-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Appendix B: RADIUS server configuration
RADIUS server configuration
This appendix outlines how to set up a RADIUS server for user authentication.
B.1 RADIUS server configuration

The following procedure is an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. You install the RADIUS server software on
a separate computer. In this example, we use FreeRADIUS third-party software.
1. Download and install FreeRADIUS from www.freeradius.org as the RADIUS server. This is a Windows 32-bit installation
that is known to work. If you try another third-party tool and it does not work, use the FreeRADIUS software.
2. Open the radiusd.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, locate the "bind_address" field, and enter your
RADIUS server IP address. An example is
bind_address = 10.14.61.122
Text editor software that supports direct editing and saving of UNIX text encodings and line breaks, such as EditPad
Lite, is needed for this editing.
3. In the users.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following text to configure a user "Tester" with
an Administrator role.
Tester User-Password == "TesterPw1#"
GE-UR-Role = Administrator
4. In the clients.conf file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following text to define the UR as a RADIUS
client, where in this example the client IP address is 10.14.61.132, the shared secret specified here is also configured
on the UR device for successful authentication, and the shortname is a short, optional alias that can be used in place
of the IP address.
client 10.14.61.132 {
secret = Testing!123
shortname = ur1-test
}
Alternatively, you may specify one secret for a network of clients, where in the example below the clients are all within
the 10.14.61.0/24 subnet and the shared secret specified here is also configured on all the UR devices in the subnet for
successful authentication.
client 10.14.61.0/24 {
secret = Testing!123
shortname = net1-test
}
5. In the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, create a file called dictionary.ge and add the following content.
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL B-1

RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION APPENDIX B: RADIUS SERVER CONFIGURATION
# ##########################################################
# GE VSAs
############################################################
VENDOR GE 2910
# Management authorization
BEGIN-VENDOR GE
B # Role ID
ATTRIBUTE GE-UR-Role 1 integer
# GE-UR-ROLE values
VALUE GE-UR-Role Administrator 1
VALUE GE-UR-Role Supervisor 2
VALUE GE-UR-Role Engineer 3
VALUE GE-UR-Role Operator 4
VALUE GE-UR-Role Observer 5
END-VENDOR GE
#############################################################
6. In the dictionary file in the <Path_to_Radius>\etc\raddb folder, add the following line.
$INCLUDE dictionary.ge
For example, the file can look like the following:
$INCLUDE ../share/freeradius/dictionary
$INCLUDE dictionary.ge
7. For the first start, run the RADIUS server in debug mode to ensure that there are no compiling errors.
<Path_to_Radius>/start_radiusd_debug.bat
8. Set up the RADIUS parameters on the UR as follows.
8.1. If logging in, select Device for the Authentication Type, and use Administrator for the User Name. The default
password is "ChangeMe1#".
8.2. Access Settings > Product Setup > Security. Configure the IP address (10.14.61.122 in this example) and ports
(default values in this example) for the RADIUS server. Leave the GE vendor ID field at the default of 2910.
Update the RADIUS shared secret (Testing!123 in this example) as specified in the clients.conf file. Restart the
relay for the IP address and port changes to take effect.
9. Verify operation. Log in to the UR software as follows. In the login window, select Server as the Authentication Type,
enter the user name entered (for example user name Tester and password "TesterPw1#"). Check that the RADIUS
server log file shows the access with an "Access-Accept" entry.
B-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Appendix C: Command line interface
Command line interface
This appendix outlines command line access to the software.
C.1 Command line interface

SetupCLI is a command line interface to communicate with the EnerVista UR Setup software. Commands can be sent from
a DOS prompt or a Windows batch file.
The interface is installed with the EnerVista software. Its default location is similar to
C:\Program Files\EnerVista\Tools\SetupCLI
The EnerVista software needs to be installed on a computer to run the command line interface. The command line
interface does not provide a remote connection to a computer running the EnerVista software.
Items to note are as follows:
• Works with EnerVista UR Setup version 6.10 and later
• Available in English only
• The graphical user interface of the software is not available concurrently with the command line interface
• It does not support concurrent commands
• It has limited functionality with CyberSentry
• It does not interface with UR Engineer
• It does not work when EnerVista UR Setup security is enabled, meaning when login is required
Command syntax is as follows:
• Options enclosed in [ ] are optional
• Values enclosed in < > are replaced with your own values
• <Application> is replaced with the EnerVista software to receive the command. Use "URPC" for EnerVista UR Setup.
• <device> is the UR device name, as displayed in the Device Name field of the Device Setup window and listed in the
Online Window. Use quotes with spaces, such as "B30 Belfort".
• "-s" can be used with any command to suppress error messages
• All commands, their return codes, and error description are logged in the file
C:\ProgramData\EnerVista\Tools\SetupCLI\SetupCLI.log
• When the Supervisor account is enabled, the LOCK SETTINGS setting must be disabled (default) before the putsettings,
inservice, or reboot command can be used. This setting cannot be changed using the command line interface.
• Use quotes ("") to enclose any parameter containing a space
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL C-1

COMMAND LINE INTERFACE APPENDIX C: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
• Commands, options, and parameters are case sensitive

• All commands have a return code of 0-255. 0 indicates success and 1-255 indicate different errors
• If SetupCLI is automated (in a batch file), make sure that only a single batch is running at a time. SetupCLI does not
support concurrent operations.
To run the command line interface:

1. In Windows, click the Start button, enter cmd, and press the Enter key. After prompting for permission, the Windows
command window opens.
2. Enter SetupCLI followed by the action to execute. An example of use is to enter "SetupCLI -h" to display help,
specifically the commands and explanations outlined here.
Figure C-1: Command line interface run in the command window
C
SetupCLI -h
Display help.
It displays the content outline here.
SetupCLI <Application> start [-c] [-s]

Launch application with name <Application>.
To start in client mode, which is the graphical user interface, include option '-c'. Before use, the software must be idle
without any windows open. Any activity or open windows can cause unexpected behavior. When in client mode, do not
use Launchpad's Site Management feature.
To suppress errors, include option -s.
Example: SetupCLI URPC start -c
SetupCLI <Application> exit [-s]

Exit application with name <Application>.
Example: SetupCLI URPC exit
SetupCLI <Application> login -d <device> [-A <authentication type>] [-a <account>] -w <password> [-s]
Authenticate with device <device> using password <password>.
For non-CyberSentry devices — Set <authentication type> to "traditional". Note that <authentication type> defaults to
"traditional" if not specified. Set <account> to "COMMANDS" or "SETTINGS". If not specified, the SETTINGS account is
used.
Example: SetupCLI URPC login -d "C30 Melbourne" -A traditional -a SETTINGS -w 1password1
C-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX C: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
Example of a batch file that checks for an error (this batch file uses standard batch file operations to check the return
code (ERRORLEVEL) and jump to an error handler):
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC login -d demoDevice -a SETTINGS -w WrongPassword -A traditional
IF NOT ERRORLEVEL 0 GOTO FAILED
SetupCLI URPC putsettings -d demoDevice -f "example file.urs"
SetupCLI URPC inservice -d demoDevice
SetupCLI URPC reboot -d demoDevice
SetupCLI URPC exit
exit
:FAILED
echo Please try again C
exit
For CyberSentry devices with local authentication — Set <authentication type> to "local". Set <account> to
"Supervisor", "Administrator", "Engineer", "Operator", or "Observer".
For CyberSentry devices with RADIUS authentication — Set <authentication type> to "radius". Set <account> to the
user's account on the RADIUS server.
SetupCLI <Application> logout -d <device> [-s]

Log out of device <device>.
Example: SetupCLI URPC logout -d C30
SetupCLI <Application> getsettings -d <device> -f <File> [-s]

Read settings from device <device> and save them to the .urs file <File>. The <File> must not already exist. The default
path to the output file is C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power Management\URPC\Data
Example: SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d C30 -f "C30 Markham.urs"
Example of a batch file to retrieve a settings file:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d demoDevice -f C:\example.urs
SetupCLI URPC exit
Example of a batch file to retrieve a settings file from a relay that requires RADIUS authentication:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC login -d demoDevice -a %1 -w %2 -A radius
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d demoDevice -f "example file.urs"
SetupCLI URPC logout -d demoDevice
SetupCLI URPC exit
Although a user name and password could have been entered in this batch file, it would have created a security risk.
Batch files allow you to pass in runtime parameters and refer to them in your script as %1, %2, and so on. For example,
if this file is called example.bat, one calls it as follows: "example.bat MyUserName MyPassword"
SetupCLI <Application> putsettings -d <device> -f <File> [-s]

Write the settings file <File> to the device <device>.
For CyberSentry devices, putsettings is only supported for users with the "Administrator" role.
Example: SetupCLI URPC putsettings -d C30 -f "C30 Markham.urs"

SetupCLI <Application> compare -f <File1> -r <File2> -o <OutputFile> [-s]

Compare settings files <File1> and <File2>, and save output to <OutputFile>.
Example: SetupCLI URPC compare -f may.urs -r september.urs -o compared.txt
Batch file example that retrieves a settings file, compares it with an existing settings file, and opens the resulting
comparison file:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d demoDevice -f devicefile.urs
SetupCLI URPC compare -f existingfile.urs -r devicefile.urs -o output.txt
The output is similar to the following:

Comparing settings file aaa.urs : C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power Management\URPC\Data\ with bbb.urs
: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\GE Power Management\URPC\Data\
C
# Setting Name (Group,Module,Item) Value
1 + Default Message Timeout (1,1,1) = 299 s

2 - Default Message Timeout (1,1,1) = 300 s
3 + Flash Message Time (1,1,1) = 0.9 s
4 - Flash Message Time (1,1,1) = 1.0 s
SetupCLI <Application> inservice -d <device> [-n] [-s]

Put the device in service. Include option -n to take the device out of service.
Example: SetupCLI URPC inservice -d C30
SetupCLI <Application> reboot -d <device> [-s]

Reboot the relay <device>. This is necessary after changing IEC 61850 settings and aggregator source settings.
Example: SetupCLI URPC reboot -d "C30_Instanbul"
SetupCLI <Application> adddevice -I <IP Address> -S <Slave Address> -P <Modbus Port>

Connect to a device using its IP address, slave address, and Modbus port. Show the device in the EnerVista interface
under the SetupCLI Site as DEV@SETUP_CLI.
EnerVista UR Setup 7.30 or higher supports this command.
Figure C-2: Device added using IP address
The device is named as DEV@SETUP_CLI, which is used as the device name required by the <device> parameter of other
SetupCLI commands.

APPENDIX C: COMMAND LINE INTERFACE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE
The device name DEV@SETUP_CLI is always assigned to the device that is connected most recently by performing
'adddevice' command. It means that the Application only keeps up to one device named as DEV@SETUP_CLI, the
'adddevice' command disconnects/deletes the device DEV@SETUP _CLI that was connected previously by performing
'adddevice' command.
The device name DEV@SETUP_CLI is never used to configure/connect to a device through the graphical user interface.
Example of a batch file using a device IP address to retrieve its settings file:
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC adddevice -I 192.168.140.113 -S 113 -P 502
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d DEV@SETUP_CLI -f C:\example.urs
SetupCLI URPC exit
After connecting the device using IP address, the device name DEV@SETUP_CLI is used to identify this device in
'getsettings' command.
Example of a batch file using a device IP address to retrieve a settings file when RADIUS authentication is required: C
SetupCLI URPC start
SetupCLI URPC adddevice -I 192.168.140.113 -S 113 -P 502
SetupCLI URPC login -d DEV@SETUP_CLI -a %1 -w %2 -A radius
SetupCLI URPC getsettings -d DEV@SETUP_CLI -f "example file.urs"
SetupCLI URPC logout -d DEV@SETUP_CLI
SetupCLI URPC exit
DEV@SETUP_CLI has to be used as the device name in the commands followed by the 'adddevice' command.


Appendix D: Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
This chapter provides the warranty, revision history, and open source information.
D.1 Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE Grid Solutions warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years.
For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see the Terms and Conditions at
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
D.2 Revision history

The tables outline the releases and revision history of this document.
Table D-1: Revision history (English)
Manual P/N T35 revision Release date ECO
1601-0114-B1 2.8x 12 October 2001 URT-010
1601-0114-B2 2.9x 03 December 2001 URT-012
1601-0114-B3 2.9x 11 April 2002 URT-015
1601-0114-C1 3.0x 03 July 2002 URT-016
1601-0114-C2 3.1x 30 August 2002 URT-017
1601-0114-C3 3.0x 18 November 2002 URT-019
1601-0114-C4 3.1x 18 November 2002 URT-020
1601-0114-C5 3.0x 11 February 2003 URT-023
1601-0114-C6 3.1x 11 February 2003 URT-025
1601-0114-D1 3.2x 11 February 2003 URT-027
1601-0114-D2 3.2x 02 June 2003 URX-084
1601-0114-E1 3.3x 01 May 2003 URX-080
1601-0114-E2 3.3x 29 May 2003 URX-083
1601-0114-F1 3.4x 10 December 2003 URX-111
1601-0114-F2 3.4x 09 February 2004 URX-115
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL D-1

REVISION HISTORY APPENDIX D: MISCELLANEOUS

1601-0114-G1 4.0x 23 March 2004 URX-123
1601-0114-G2 4.0x 17 May 2004 URX-136
1601-0114-H1 4.2x 30 June 2004 URX-145
1601-0114-H2 4.2x 23 July 2004 URX-151
1601-0114-J1 4.4x 15 September 2004 URX-156
1601-0114-K1 4.6x 15 February 2005 URX-176
1601-0114-L1 4.8x 05 August 2005 URX-202
1601-0114-M1 4.9x 15 December 2005 URX-208
1601-0114-M2 4.9x 27 February 2006 URX-214
1601-0114-N1 5.0x 31 March 2006 URX-217
1601-0114-N2 5.0x 26 May 2006 URX-220
1601-0114-P1 5.2x 23 October 2006 URX-230
1601-0114-P2 5.2x 24 January 2007 URX-232
1601-0114-R1 5.4x 26 June 2007 URX-242
1601-0114-R2 5.4x 31 August 2007 URX-246
D 1601-0114-R3
1601-0114-S1
5.4x
5.5x
17 October 2007
7 December 2007
URX-251
URX-253
1601-0114-S2 5.5x 22 February 2008 URX-258
1601-0114-S3 5.5x 12 March 2008 URX-260
1601-0114-T1 5.6x 27 June 2008 08-0390
1601-0114-U1 5.7x 29 May 2009 09-0938
1601-0114-U2 5.7x 30 September 2009 09-1165
1601-0114-V1 5.8x 29 May 2010 09-1457
1601-0114-V2 5.8x 04 January 2011 11-2237
1601-0114-W1 5.9x 12 January 2011 11-2227
1601-0114-X1 6.0x 21 December 2011 11-2840
1601-0114-X2 6.0x 5 April 2012 12-3254
1601-0114-Y1 7.0x 30 September 2012 12-3529
1601-0114-Y2 7.0x 11 November 2012 12-3601
1601-0114-Z1 7.1x 30 March 2013 13-0126
1601-0114-AA1 7.2x 1 August 2013 13-0401
1601-0114-AB1 7.3x 7 November 2014 14-1408
1601-0114-AB2 7.3x 1 September 2015 15-2215
1601-0114-AC1 7.40x 8 December 2016 16-3319
1601-0114-AE1 7.41x 31 January 2017 17-3427
1601-0114-AE3 7.4x 28 April 2017 17-3561
1601-0114-AF1 7.6x 30 June 2017 17-3779
1601-0114-AF2 7.6x 31 October 2017 17-3935
1601-0114-AG1 7.7x 31 March 2018 18-4430
1601-0114-AG2 7.7x 4 May 2018 18-4517
1601-0114-AH1 7.8x 17 December 2018 18-4703
1601-0114-AI1 7.9x 24 October 2019 19-5181
1601-0114-AJ1 8.0x 30 October 2019 19-5182
1601-0114-AJ2 8.0x 12 June 2020 20-5580
1601-0114-AK1 8.1x 20 November 2020 20-6096
1601-0114-AL1 8.2x 16 February 2021 21-6228
1601-0114-AL2 8.2x 23 July 2021 21-6482
D-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

APPENDIX D: MISCELLANEOUS OPEN SOURCE LICENSES

1601-0114-AM1 8.3x 6 May 2022 22-6815
1601-0114-AM2 8.3x 14 October 2022 22-7224
1601-0114-AN1 8.4x 14 December 2022 22-7333
1601-0114-AN2 8.4x 28 June 2023 23-7692
1601-0114-AP1 8.5x 30 November 2023 23-7922
D.2.1 Major changes

For information on the updates included in this release of the T35 Transformer Protection System manual, please refer to
the latest release notes for the UR T35 8.5x version online.
D.3 Open source licenses

The optional IEC 61850-9-2LE/IEC 61869 Process Bus Modules include open source code. See the UR-OpenSourceLicense
folder installed at the root level with the software, such as at C:\Program Files (x86)\GE Power Management\URPC\
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL D-3

OPEN SOURCE LICENSES APPENDIX D: MISCELLANEOUS
D-4 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Glossary
Abbreviations
CONN Connection
Abbreviations
A Ampere
AC Alternating Current CONT Continuous, Contact
A/D Analog to Digital CO-ORD Coordination
AE Accidental Energization, Application Entity CPU Central Processing Unit
AMP Ampere CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code/Check
ANG Angle CRL Certificate Revocation List
ANSI American National Standards Institute CRT, CRNT Current
APDU Application Protocol Data Unit CSA Canadian Standards Association
AR Automatic Reclosure CT Current Transformer
ARP Address Resolution Protocol CVT Capacitive Voltage Transformer
ASDU Application-layer Service Data Unit
ASYM Asymmetry D/A Digital to Analog
AUTO Automatic DA Data Attribute
AUX Auxiliary DANH Doubly Attached Node with HSR
AVG Average DANP Doubly Attached Node with DANP
AWG American Wire Gauge DC (dc) Direct Current
DCE Data Communications Equipment
BCD Binary-Coded Decimal DCS Distributed Control System
BCS Best Clock Selector DD Disturbance Detector
BER Bit Error Rate DFLT Default
BF Breaker Fail DGNST Diagnostics
BFI Breaker Failure Initiate DIFF Differential
BKR Breaker DIR Directional
BLK Block DISCREP Discrepancy
BLKG Blocking DIST Distance
BNC Bayonet Neill-Concelman DMD Demand
BPNT Breakpoint of a characteristic DNP Distributed Network Protocol
BRKR Breaker DPO Dropout
DPS Double-Point Status
CA Certificate Authority DSP Digital Signal Processor
CAP Capacitor DST Daylight Savings Time
CC Coupling Capacitor dt Rate of Change
CCVT Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer DTT Direct Transfer Trip
CFG Configure / Configurable DUTT Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip
.CFG Filename extension for oscillography files
CHK Check EAD Expert Arc Detector
CHNL Channel EGD Ethernet Global Data
CID Configured IED Description ENCRMNT Encroachment
CLS Close EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
CLSD Closed .EVT Filename extension for event recorder files
CMND Command EXT Extension, External
CMPRSN Comparison
CO Contact Output F Field
COM Communication FAIL Failure
COMM Communications FCDA Functional Constraint Data Attributes
COMP Compensated, Comparison FD Fault Detector
ConfRev Configuration Revision FDH Fault Detector high-set
FDL Fault Detector low-set
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL i

ABBREVIATIONS
FIR Finite Impulse Response LDBN Bias Neutral Level Detector

FLA Full Load Current LED Light Emitting Diode
FO Fiber Optic LEO Line End Open
FPGA Field-programmable Gate Array LFT BLD Left Blinder
FREQ Frequency LOOP Loopback
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying LPU Line Pickup
FTP File Transfer Protocol LRA Locked-Rotor Current
FxE FlexElement™ LTC Load Tap-Changer
FWD Forward LV Low Voltage
G Generator M Machine
GCM Galois Counter Mode M2M Machine to Machine
GDOI Group Domain of Interpretation mA MilliAmpere
GE General Electric MAG Magnitude
GFP Graphical Front Panel MAN Manual / Manually
GIS Gas Insulated Switchgear MAX Maximum
GND Ground Mb Megabit
GNTR Generator MIC Model Implementation Conformance
GoCB GOOSE Control Block MIN Minimum, Minutes
GOOSE General Object Oriented Substation Event MMI Man Machine Interface
GPS Global Positioning System MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
GSU Generator Step-Up MRT Minimum Response Time
MSG Message
HARM Harmonic / Harmonics MTA Maximum Torque Angle
HCT High Current Time MTR Motor
HGF High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT) MU Merging Unit
HIZ High-Impedance and Arcing Ground MVA MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
HMI Human-Machine Interface MVA_A MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy MVA_B MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol MVA_C MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
HV High Voltage MVAR MegaVar (total 3-phase)
HYB Hybrid MVAR_A MegaVar (phase A)
Hz Hertz MVAR_B MegaVar (phase B)
MVAR_C MegaVar (phase C)
I Instantaneous MVARH MegaVar-Hour
I_0 Zero Sequence current MW MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
I_1 Positive Sequence current MW_A MegaWatt (phase A)
I_2 Negative Sequence current MW_B MegaWatt (phase B)
IA Phase A current MW_C MegaWatt (phase C)
IAB Phase A minus B current MWH MegaWatt-Hour
IB Phase B current
IBC Phase B minus C current N Neutral
IC Phase C current N/A, n/a Not Applicable
ICA Phase C minus A current NCIT Non-conventional instrument transformer
ICD IED Capability Description NEG Negative
ID Identification NMPLT Nameplate
IED Intelligent Electronic Device NOM Nominal
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission NTR Neutral
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IG Ground (not residual) current O Over
Igd Differential Ground current OC, O/C Overcurrent
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol OCSP Online Certificate Status Protocol
IID Instantiated IED Capability Description OF Overload Factor
IN CT Residual Current (3I0) or Input O/P, Op Output
INC SEQ Incomplete Sequence OP Operate
INIT Initiate OPER Operate
INST Instantaneous OPERATG Operating
INV Inverse O/S Operating System
I/O Input/Output OSI Open Systems Interconnect
IOC Instantaneous Overcurrent OSB Out-of-Step Blocking
IOV Instantaneous Overvoltage OUT Output
IRC Inter-Relay Communication OV Overvoltage
IRIG Inter-Range Instrumentation Group OVERFREQ Overfrequency
ISO International Standards Organization OVLD Overload
IUV Instantaneous Undervoltage
P Phase
K0 Zero Sequence Current Compensation PB Process Bus
kA kiloAmpere PBM Process Bus Module
KDC Key Distribution Center PC Phase Comparison, Personal Computer
kV kiloVolt PCNT Percent
PF Power Factor (total 3-phase)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display PF_A Power Factor (phase A)
ii T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ABBREVIATIONS
PF_B Power Factor (phase B) SSB Single Side Band

PF_C Power Factor (phase C) SSEL Session Selector
PFLL Phase and Frequency Lock Loop STATS Statistics
PHS Phase SUPN Supervision
PICS Protocol Implementation & Conformance SUPV Supervise / Supervision
Statement SV Supervision, Service, Sampled Value
PKI Public Key Infrastructure SYNC Synchrocheck
PKP Pickup SYNCHCHK Synchrocheck
PLC Power Line Carrier
POS Positive T Time, transformer
POTT Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip TC Thermal Capacity
PP Power Profile TCP Transmission Control Protocol
PPP Point-to-Point TCU Thermal Capacity Used
PPS Pulse per Second TD MULT Time Dial Multiplier
PRESS Pressure TEMP Temperature
PRI Primary TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
PROT Protection TGFD Transient Ground Fault Detection
PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol THD Total Harmonic Distortion
PSEL Presentation Selector TMR Timer
PTP Precision Time Protocol TOC Time Overcurrent
pu Per Unit TOV Time Overvoltage
PUIB Pickup Current Block TRANS Transient
PUIT Pickup Current Trip TRANSF Transfer
PUSHBTN Pushbutton TSEL Transport Selector
PUTT Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip TUC Time Undercurrent
PWM Pulse Width Modulated TUV Time Undervoltage
PWR Power TX (Tx) Transmit, Transmitter
QUAD Quadrilateral U Under

UC Undercurrent
R Rate, Reverse UCA Utility Communications Architecture
RA Registration Authority UDP User Datagram Protocol
RCA Reach Characteristic Angle UL Underwriters Laboratories
RedBox Redundancy Box UNBAL Unbalance
REF Reference UR Universal Relay
REM Remote URC Universal Recloser Control
REV Reverse .URS Filename extension for settings files
R-GOOSE Routable GOOSE UV Undervoltage
RI Reclose Initiate
RIP Reclose In Progress V/Hz Volts per hertz
RGT BLD Right Blinder V_0 Zero Sequence voltage
RMA Return Materials Authorization V_1 Positive Sequence voltage
RMS Root Mean Square V_2 Negative Sequence voltage
ROCOF Rate of Change of Frequency VA Phase A voltage
ROD Remote Open Detector VAB Phase A to B voltage
RRTD Remote Resistance Temperature Detector VAG Phase A to Ground voltage
RST Reset VARH Var-hour voltage
RSTR Restrained VB Phase B voltage
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector VBA Phase B to A voltage
RTU Remote Terminal Unit VBG Phase B to Ground voltage
RX (Rx) Receive, Receiver VC Phase C voltage
VCA Phase C to A voltage
s second VCG Phase C to Ground voltage
S Sensitive VF Variable Frequency
SAN Singly Attached Node VIBR Vibration
SAT CT Saturation VT Voltage Transformer
SBO Select Before Operate VTFF Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition VTLOS Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
SCC Serial Communication Controller
SCD System Configuration Description WDG Winding
SCL Substation Configuration Language WH Watt-hour
SCEP Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol w/ opt With Option
SEC Secondary WGS World Geodetic System
SEL Select / Selector / Selection WRT With Respect To
SENS Sensitive
SEQ Sequence X Reactance
SFTP Secure Shell (SSH) File Transfer Protocol, Secure XDUCER Transducer
File Transfer Protocol XFMR Transformer
SIR Source Impedance Ratio
SmpSynch Samples Synchronized Z Impedance, Zone
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC Source

ABBREVIATIONS

Index
Index
Administrator
Symbols command to force logoff ................................................................7-4
........................................................................................................................5-74 no automatic logout from front panel ................................... 5-20
role for CyberSentry ...........................................................................2-5
Aging factor
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-20
Numerics FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-243
10BASE-F settings ...............................................................................5-47 logic diagram ...................................................................................5-273
4L Discrepancy message .................................................................. 7-8 settings ...............................................................................................5-272
7R module ................................................................................................3-43 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-20
7S module ................................................................................................3-42 Alarm LEDs ............................................................................................5-143
Alarms
acknowledge ....................................................................4-35, 6-3, 6-4
A add .............................................................................................. 4-36, 5-38
AC Bank assigned is not configured ......................................5-235 messages ................................................................................................7-6
AC current inputs overview ............................................................................................... 4-33
explained ..............................................................................................3-17 reset ...............................................................................................4-35, 6-4
settings ...............................................................................................5-165 AND gate explained ........................................................................... 4-85
specifications ......................................................................................2-25 Annunciator editor ............................................................................. 4-36
AC voltage input specifications ...................................................2-25 ANSI device numbers ...........................................................................2-2
Accents ......................................................................................................4-57 Apparent power
Access Violation message ..............................................................3-70 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-23
Acknowledge alarm ............................................................................. 6-4 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-24
Activate relay .........................................................................................3-55 Application examples
Active setting group ........................................................................5-262 breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................................5-313
Actual values ............................................................................................ 6-1 contact inputs ..................................................................................5-332
alarms for graphical front panel ................................................. 6-3 direct inputs and outputs ...........................................................5-339
display on graphical front panel ...................................4-36, 4-37 latching outputs ..............................................................................5-335
monitor with Modbus Analyzer ..................................................10-1 windings between two breakers ............................................5-184
not activated graphical front panel .........................................4-54 Apply settings to other device ..................................................... 10-7
Add Device from File option Approvals ................................................................................................. 2-35
restore settings to online device ............................................10-12 Architecture, relay ............................................................................5-236
save to Offline Window ..................................................................3-78 Arcing current .....................................................................................5-316
Add Device to Offline Window preferences ......................10-10 Audit list of port numbers ............................................................... 5-47
Add module, check settings not defaulted ........................10-18 Authentication by device or server ........................................... 5-15
Add relay ...................................................................................................3-60 Automatic discovery of UR devices .......................................... 3-69
Auxiliary voltage channel ............................................................... 3-17
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL i

INDEX
Auxiliary voltage metering ............................................................ 6-22 Brick

AWG wire size ....................................................................................... 3-49 interface module described ........................................................ 3-18
CT/VT ...................................................................................................... 3-17 remote resources actual values ............................................... 6-26
F485 converter .................................................................................. 3-57 remote resources settings ........................................................ 5-164
G.703 interface .................................................................................. 3-42 self-test errors ................................................................................... 7-12
module 7S ........................................................................................... 3-42 Trouble message .............................................................................. 7-14
modules 6X, 6W ................................................................................ 3-21 Brightness ................................................................................................ 5-28
modules 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, 75 .......................................................... 3-49
modules 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74 ......................................................... 3-48
modules 7T, 7W ................................................................................ 3-46 C
RS422 and fiber interface ............................................................ 3-48
C37.94 communications ..................................................... 3-50, 3-53
Cannot log in .............................................................................................2-5
Caution symbol in Offline Window ............................................ 4-71
B CE certification ...................................................................................... 2-35
Back up settings ...................................................................... 5-63, 10-9 Certification ............................................................................................ 2-35
Bad IRIG-B Signal message ............................................................. 7-8 Changes ...................................................................................................... D-1
Bad PTP Signal message ................................................................... 7-9 Channel
Banks ........................................................................................ 5-165, 5-166 banks .....................................................................................5-165, 5-166
Basic front panel tests ........................................................................................................ 6-12
dimensions ............................................................................................. 3-2 Check Settings message ....................................................................7-7
FlexLogic ............................................................................................5-239 Chinese limited to 10 character input ..................................... 5-28
interface ............................................................................................... 4-16 CID file, SCD file .................................................................................... 5-81
IP rating ................................................................................................ 2-33 CID files
keypad .................................................................................................. 4-39 create ..................................................................................................... 5-63
labels ...................................................................................................... 4-49 explained .............................................................................................. 3-78
LEDs ..........................................................................................4-41, 5-143 import ..................................................................................... 3-78, 10-13
navigation ........................................................................................... 4-51 import preferences ....................................................................... 10-10
order code over two lines ............................................................ 4-39 view ......................................................................................................... 5-63
order codes ............................................................................................ 2-8 Circuit monitoring applications ................................................ 5-311
pushbuttons .....................................................................................5-147 Cleaning .................................................................................................... 2-35
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22 Clear
use, change setting ......................................................................... 4-53 files and records ............................................................................ 10-23
Battery LEDs ..................................................................................................... 5-337
disposal ..............................................................................................10-20 relay records using IEC 61850 ................................................ 5-105
monitor with annunciator alarm .............................................. 4-36 relay records using settings ........................................................ 5-43
monitor with Engineer ................................................................... 4-77 security logs ...........................................................................................7-4
monitor with FlexLogic ................................................................5-248 Clock
monitor with metering window ................................................. 4-37 graphical front panel format .......................................... 5-31, 5-32
monitor with self-test alarm .....................................................5-144 IRIG-B ..................................................................................................... 3-37
replace ................................................................................................10-19 PTP ........................................................................................................ 5-128
Baud rate ................................................................................................. 5-44 set ...............................................................................................................7-3
Blinking alarm ....................................................................................... 4-35 settings .....................................................................5-126, 5-132, 6-28
Block setting ............................................................................................. 5-5 settings with Process Bus Module ...............5-132, 5-214, 6-28
Bootloader upgrade ........................................................................10-15 synchronize several devices .................................................... 5-127
Breaker arcing current Close
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-35 HTTP port ........................................................................................... 5-116
clearing ........................................................................................ 5-43, 7-2 IEC 60870-5-104 port .................................................................. 5-118
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-239 Modbus port ....................................................................................... 5-53
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-318 TFTP port ........................................................................................... 5-117
measurement ..................................................................................5-317 Web access port ............................................................................ 5-116
settings ...............................................................................................5-316 COMM Path Incomplete message ....................................7-8, 7-10
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-21 Comm status remaining connections ..................................... 6-13
Breaker control Command line interface to software ..........................................C-1
control of two breakers ................................................................. 4-60 Command password ................................................. 4-61, 5-11, 5-12
dual breaker logic ..........................................................................5-193 Commands
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-240 menu .........................................................................................................7-1
settings ...............................................................................................5-186 with IEC 61850 ................................................................................ 5-105
with IEC 61850 ................................................................................5-100
ii T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX
Commissioning ....................................................................................... 8-1 CRC alarm ..............................................................................................5-161

Communications Create device folders prompt ....................................................10-14
10BASE-F ..............................................................................................5-47 Critical failure relay specifications ............................................ 2-28
connecting to the UR ..........................................................3-67, 3-70 CSA certification .................................................................................. 2-35
DNP ..........................................................................................................5-56 CT bank settings ................................................................................5-165
EGD .......................................................................................................5-118 CT failure
HTTP .....................................................................................................5-116 FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-240
IEC 60870-5-10 ...............................................................................5-120 logic diagram ...................................................................................5-320
IEC 60870-5-104 ............................................................................5-117 settings ...............................................................................................5-319
inter-relay specifications ...............................................................2-30 CT inputs .....................................................................................3-16, 5-165
Modbus registers ...........................................................................5-125 CT wiring ................................................................................................... 3-17
Modbus settings ................................................................................5-53 Current bank ........................................................................................5-165
modem ..................................................................................................3-68 Current metering actual values .................................................. 6-21
Protocol selection ..............................................................5-54, 10-13 Curves
RS232 .........................................................................................3-33, 5-44 definite time ......................................................................................5-279
RS485 .........................................................................................3-36, 5-44 FlexCurves ..........................................................................5-204, 5-279
settings ......................................................................................5-47, 5-56 IAC .........................................................................................................5-277
specifications ..........................................................................2-29, 2-30 IEC .........................................................................................................5-276
web server ........................................................................................5-116 IEEE .......................................................................................................5-275
Compare settings ................................................................................10-8 types .....................................................................................................5-274
Comparison Report button ............................................................3-77 Cutout, panel ............................................................................................3-2
Compliance .............................................................................................2-35 CyberSentry
COMTRADE files, view ........................................................................4-82 FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-239
Conducted RFI specifications .......................................................2-34 installation ............................................................................... 3-73, 5-24
Connect, unable to ..................................................................3-70, 5-48 RS485 port limitation ...................................................................... 5-16
Connectors, LC and ST ......................................................................3-13 security commands ...........................................................................7-4
Contact inputs security overview ................................................................................2-5
actual values ......................................................................................... 6-5 software options .............................................................................. 2-32
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-244 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-32
settings ...............................................................................................5-330 system logs ......................................................................................... 5-25
specifications ......................................................................................2-25
thresholds .........................................................................................5-331
wet and dry connections ..............................................................3-26
Contact outputs
D
actual values ............................................................................. 6-6, 6-29
D400 connection ................................................................................. 3-79
explained ...........................................................................................5-333 Dark graphical front panel ............................................................ 5-33
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-245 Data logger
settings ...............................................................................................5-333 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-34
Control elements ...............................................................................5-298 clearing ........................................................................................5-43, 7-2
Control power settings ...............................................................................................5-138
description ...........................................................................................3-15 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-24
specifications ......................................................................................2-28 Data set
Control pushbuttons defined .................................................................................................. 5-71
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-239 Data, reading values ............................................................................6-1
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-147 Dataset member is empty message ....................................... 5-72
settings ...............................................................................................5-145 Date
specifications ......................................................................................2-23 firmware ............................................................................................... 6-37
Convert device settings ....................................................................10-5 last cleared fault report date ...................................................... 6-31
Copper SFP cable length .................................................................3-11 last cleared oscillography date ................................................. 6-34
Copy of Copy of ....................................................................................10-7 last fault report date ....................................................................... 6-31
last settings change ....................................................................... 6-36
Copy settings for upgrading ..........................................................10-5
manufacturing date ........................................................................ 6-36
Copy settings to other device .......................................................10-7
set ......................................................... 5-30, 5-126, 5-132, 6-28, 7-3
Counters
DCmA inputs .......................................................................................... 6-25
actual values ................................................................................6-8, 6-9
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-25
settings ...............................................................................................5-313
settings ...............................................................................................5-344
targets ...................................................................................................... 7-5
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-25
CPU module diagram ........................................................................3-12
CPU wiring ...............................................................................................3-34

INDEX
DCmA outputs Direct inputs

description .......................................................................................... 3-31 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-11
settings ...............................................................................................5-346 application example .................................................................... 5-339
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-29 clearing counters ................................................................................7-2
Decommission ....................................................................................10-23 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-245
Default settings ........................................................................ 10-8, 10-9 settings ............................................................................................... 5-338
Default settings to factory default ............................................... 7-3 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-26
Definite time curve ...........................................................................5-279 Direct outputs
Delete files and records ....................................................5-43, 10-23 application example .................................................................... 5-339
Deploy .......................................................................................................... 8-1 clearing counters ................................................................................7-2
Deploy settings ..................................................................................... 10-7 settings ............................................................................................... 5-339
Device authentication ...................................................................... 5-15 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-29
Device Connectivity Report in Engineer ................................ 4-78 Direct Ring Break message ..............................................................7-9
Device information files ......................................................... 1-2, 4-78 Disconnect switch
Device overview .................................................................................. 10-1 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-242
Device setup .......................................................................................... 3-69 logic ..................................................................................................... 5-201
settings ............................................................................................... 5-196
Diagnostic Alarm COP message ................................................... 7-8
Discover button .................................................................................... 3-69
Diagnostic Alarm DSP message .................................................... 7-8
Disk space required ........................................................................... 3-57
Diagnostic Failure message ............................................................ 7-7
Display settings .................................................................................... 5-27
Diagnostics Failure message .......................................................... 7-8
Disposal ................................................................................................. 10-25
Dielectric strength .............................................................................. 3-15
Dispose of battery ............................................................................ 10-20
Differential
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-19
Disturbance detector
FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-242
calculations ......................................................................................5-263
characteristics .................................................................................5-265 DNP
instantaneous logic diagram ...................................................5-271 connections remaining .................................................................. 6-13
instantaneous settings ................................................................5-271 select protocol .................................................................... 5-54, 10-13
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-267 settings .................................................................................................. 5-56
percent ................................................................................................5-263 view Points List in web browser ................................................ 5-59
settings ...............................................................................................5-263 Do not default Remote Input ID check box .......................... 5-81
transformer ........................................................ 5-176, 5-184, 5-263 Do you want to create device folders .................................. 10-14
Digital counters DOS Partition Alarm message ........................................................7-8
actual values ................................................................................6-8, 6-9 Downgrade
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-240 firmware ............................................................................................ 10-15
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-315 software ............................................................................................. 10-14
settings ...............................................................................................5-313 Download
Digital elements files from relay ................................................................................... 10-3
application example .....................................................................5-312 settings to relay ................................................................................ 10-7
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-240 Drag and drop files ................................................................................4-3
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-311 Duplicate
settings ...............................................................................................5-310 device settings ................................................................................... 10-7
Digital outputs settings for upgrading ................................................................... 10-5
see Contact outputs
Dimensions ................................................................................................ 3-2
Direct Device Off message ............................................................... 7-8 E
Direct devices Edit data model .................................................................................... 5-65
settings ...............................................................................................5-338 EGD protocol
status ..................................................................................................... 6-12 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-12
Direct I/O install software .................................................................................. 3-59
application example .....................................................................5-339 settings ............................................................................................... 5-118
configuration examples ..............................................................5-157 Electrostatic discharge specifications .................................... 2-34
settings ...............................................................................................5-338 Elements ......................................................................................................5-4
Enable Controls from GFP .............................................................. 5-32
End of life .............................................................................................. 10-25

INDEX
EnerVista UR setup Event recorder

command line interface .................................................................. C-1 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-32
drag and drop files ............................................................................. 4-3 clearing ........................................................................................5-43, 7-2
event recorder ...................................................................................... 4-2 records explained ...............................................................................4-2
firmware upgrade or downgrade ..........................................10-15 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-23
installation ...........................................................................................3-58 system logs ......................................................................................... 5-25
oscillography ........................................................................................ 4-2 via EnerVista software ......................................................................4-2
requirements ......................................................................................3-57 view event records .......................................................................... 6-32
restart relay ........................................................................................... 5-1 Events setting ...........................................................................................5-6
Engineer Export settings ...................................................................................... 10-9
command to force user logoff ...................................................... 7-4
create logic diagram .......................................................................4-64
Error messages ..................................................................................4-72 F
toolbar ...................................................................................................4-82
F485 ............................................................................................................ 3-57
Warning messages ..........................................................................4-73
Factory default reset .......................................................5-9, 5-21, 7-3
Enhanced front panel
FlexLogic ............................................................................................5-239
Far-End Fault Indication .................................................................. 5-49
interface ................................................................................................4-16 Fast form-C relay specifications ................................................ 2-28
IP rating .................................................................................................2-33 Fast transient testing specifications ........................................ 2-34
keypad ...................................................................................................4-39 Fault, ground detection .................................................................5-283
labels ......................................................................................................4-45 Fault, interturn or fault-to-fault detection ..........................5-268
LEDs .........................................................................................4-40, 5-143 Features .......................................................................................................2-1
navigation ............................................................................................4-51 Feeder
order codes ........................................................................................... 2-8 single-line diagram ......................................................................... 4-22
pushbuttons .....................................................................................5-147 Fiber signal loss detection ............................................................. 5-49
Rev. 1 and 2 explained ..................................................................... 3-2 File transfer by IEC 61850 .............................................5-110, 5-111
specifications ......................................................................................2-22 File transfer by TFTP ........................................................................5-116
use, change setting .........................................................................4-53 File transfer SFTP disable ................................................................ 5-55
Environment backup ......................................................................10-10 Files
Equations delete ...................................................................................................10-23
definite time curve ........................................................................5-279 download from relay ...................................................................... 10-3
FlexCurves .........................................................................................5-279 drag and drop .......................................................................................4-3
FlexLogic ............................................................................................5-255 protect FlexLogic with password .............................................. 4-10
FlexLogic, protect .............................................................................4-10 protect with password ......................................................................4-8
IAC curves ..........................................................................................5-277 repaired ................................................................................................ 10-7
IEC curves ..........................................................................................5-276 transfer from relay .......................................................................... 4-18
IEEE curves ........................................................................................5-275 transfer to relay .......................................................................4-1, 4-18
Equipment Mismatch message ......................................... 7-7, 7-13 Filter software fields using double-click ..............................5-257
Error messages ....................................................................................... 7-6 Firmware
device not recognized .................................................................10-14 lock ...................................................................... 3-73, 5-12, 5-22, 5-24
in Engineer ...........................................................................................4-72 Firmware not supported by EnerVista ..................................10-16
Ethernet Firmware revision ............................................................................... 6-37
actual values .......................................................................................6-10 Firmware upgrade or downgrade ...........................................10-15
configuration ......................................................................................3-67 Firmware version does not match EnerVista ...................10-14
port failure monitoring ...................................................................5-40 First Ethernet Fail
port settings ........................................................................................5-47 error message ......................................................................................7-9
port, turn on or off ............................................................................5-47 set alarm .............................................................................................. 5-40
ports on rear panel ..........................................................................3-12 Flash memory .....................................................................................10-23
Quick Connect ....................................................................................3-72 Flash memory data storage ......................................................... 3-16
Ethernet Global Data Flash messages ................................................................................... 5-28
install software ..................................................................................3-59 Flex State parameters
settings ...............................................................................................5-118 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-10
Event cause indicators .....................................................................4-40 settings ...............................................................................................5-153
Event Cause LEDs ................................................................................4-42 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22
FlexAnalog parameters ......................................................................A-1
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL v

INDEX
FlexCurves Frequency tracking ............................................................................ 6-24

equation .............................................................................................5-279 Frequency, nominal ........................................................................ 5-167
settings ...............................................................................................5-204 Front panel .................................................................................................3-2
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22 clear ..................................................................................................... 5-337
table .....................................................................................................5-204 custom labels ..................................................................................... 4-45
FlexElements dimensions .............................................................................................3-2
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-24 interface ............................................................................................... 4-16
direction .............................................................................................5-257 keypad ................................................................................................... 4-39
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-240 labels ...................................................................................................... 4-45
hysteresis ...........................................................................................5-257 language .............................................................................................. 5-27
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-257 LEDs ........................................................................................................ 4-40
pickup ..................................................................................................5-257 number of characters .................................................................... 4-18
settings ...............................................................................................5-256 order code with two lines on basic panel ............................. 4-39
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22 password change ............................................................................ 4-60
FlexLogic pushbuttons .................................................................................... 5-147
create logic diagram with Engineer ........................................ 4-64 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-32
edit with equation editor ............................................................5-255 switch between enhanced and basic ..................................... 3-58
equation editor ...............................................................................5-255 trouble message ..................................................................................7-9
equation example ..........................................................................5-302 types ....................................................................................................... 4-16
error message ...................................................................................... 7-7 use ........................................................................................................... 4-16
evaluation ..........................................................................................5-250 use in EnerVista ........................................................................4-18, 6-3
example ..............................................................................................5-250 Function setting ......................................................................................5-5
export .................................................................................................... 10-7 Fuse specifications ............................................................................. 2-27
gate characteristics ......................................................................5-248 Fuses not field-replaceable ........................................................ 10-24
import operands .............................................................................. 3-74
lock equations ................................................................................... 4-10
lock equations to serial number ............................................... 4-12
operands ............................................................................................5-238
G
operators ...........................................................................................5-248 G.703 .......................................................................................................... 3-42
rules ......................................................................................................5-249 wire size ................................................................................................ 3-42
security ................................................................................................. 4-10 Gates, logic explained ...................................................................... 4-85
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22 Gateway address .................................................................... 3-61, 5-50
status in single-line diagram of graphical front panel ... 4-33 GE type IAC curves .......................................................................... 5-277
timer settings ...................................................................................5-255 Getting help ...............................................................................................1-2
worksheet ..........................................................................................5-252 GFP Version Mismatch message ...................................................7-9
Force contact inputs .......................................................................5-353 GOOSE
Force contact outputs .................................................... 5-354, 5-356 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-25
Foreign language Process Bus Module limitations ................................................. 5-70
keyboard .............................................................................................. 4-57 Process Bus requires module and software options ..........2-8
setting ................................................................................................... 5-27 settings .................................................................................................. 5-70
Form-A relay simulation operands .................................................................... 5-248
actual values ............................................................................. 6-6, 6-29 simulation settings ....................................................................... 5-355
high-impedance circuits .............................................................. 3-20 GOOSE & SV simulation settings ............................................. 5-355
outputs .................................................................................................. 3-19
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-27
Form-C
actual values ............................................................................. 6-6, 6-29
order codes ............................................................................................ 2-8
outputs .................................................................................................. 3-19
replacement modules ................................................................... 2-14
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-28
FPGA
revision ................................................................................................. 6-37
upgrade ..............................................................................................10-17
Frequency metering
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-24
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-24
Frequency specifications ............................................................... 2-25
vi T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX
Graphical front panel Harmonic detection

actual value menu not activated ..............................................4-54 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-26
actual values, phasors ...................................................................4-58 FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-241
alarm acknowledge, reset .........................................4-35, 6-3, 6-4 settings ...............................................................................................5-328
alarm setup .........................................................................................5-38 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-21
annunciator editor ...........................................................................4-36 Heartbeat messages ............................................................ 5-71, 5-75
date and time .........................................................................5-31, 5-32 Help, getting ..............................................................................................1-2
explained ..............................................................................................4-19 Hexadecimal conversion to decimal .....................................5-119
FlexLogic ............................................................................................5-239 Hexadecimal convert to decimal .............................................5-125
Home page configuration ............................................................5-30 Home page configuration .............................................................. 5-30
interface ................................................................................................4-18 Hottest-spot temperature
IP rating .................................................................................................2-32 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-20
labels ......................................................................................................4-50 FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-243
LEDs .........................................................................................4-43, 5-143 logic diagram ...................................................................................5-272
Metering Editor ..................................................................................4-37 settings ...............................................................................................5-271
navigation ............................................................................................4-52 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-20
navigation keys ..................................................................................4-39 HSR
no display .............................................................................................5-33 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-31
order codes ........................................................................................... 2-8 explained ............................................................................................5-212
phasor diagram .....................................................................4-58, 5-34 support .....................................................................................................2-2
pushbutton testing ............................................................................ 7-3 HTTP ..........................................................................................................5-116
pushbuttons .........................................................................5-32, 5-147 port, close ..........................................................................................5-116
pushbuttons 9 to 16 ........................................................................4-31 Humidity specifications ................................................................... 2-32
settings ..................................................................................................5-30
Hysteresis ..............................................................................................5-257
settings, breaker ............................................................................5-189
settings, switch ...............................................................................5-199
single-line diagrams ........................................................................4-21
specifications ..........................................................................2-29, 2-32 I
time .............................................................................................5-31, 5-32 IAC curves ..............................................................................................5-277
USB port .............................................................................................5-124 ICD file ........................................................................................................ 5-81
use, change setting .........................................................................4-54 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
view LEDs and pushbuttons in software ................................. 6-4 explained ............................................................................................5-120
Ground current metering ................................................................6-21 select protocol .....................................................................5-54, 10-13
Ground fault settings ...............................................................................................5-120
detection ............................................................................................5-283 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
Ground IOC connections remaining ................................................................. 6-13
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-240 port, close ..........................................................................................5-118
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-291 select protocol .....................................................................5-54, 10-13
settings ...............................................................................................5-290 settings ...............................................................................................5-117
specifications ......................................................................................2-20 IEC 61850 protocol
Ground TOC DstMAC addresses message ...................................................... 5-74
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-241 explained .............................................................................................. 5-60
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-290 file transfer .........................................................................5-110, 5-111
settings ...............................................................................................5-289 heartbeat messages .......................................................... 5-71, 5-75
specifications ......................................................................................2-20 IID file ..................................................................................................... 10-9
Group 1 switch after powerup ..................................................5-262 settings in EnerVista ....................................................................... 5-60
Grouped elements ...........................................................................5-262 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-29
Guarantee ..................................................................................................D-1 IEC CID files ............................................................................................. 5-63
IED setup .................................................................................................. 3-58
IEEE C37.94 communications .......................................... 3-50, 3-53
H IEEE curves ............................................................................................5-275
IID file ................................................................................. 3-78, 5-63, 10-9
HardFiber
import preferences ........................................................................10-10
Brick Trouble message ...................................................................7-14
interface module described .........................................................3-18
Import SCL file when using Process Bus Module .............. 5-71
order codes for compatible URs .................................................. 2-8 Import settings file .............................................................................. 3-74
remote resources actual values ................................................6-26 Import settings from SCD or CID file ......................................10-13
remote resources settings ........................................................5-164 In service indicator ................................................................................7-6
self-test errors ....................................................................................7-12 In Service LED ........................................................................................ 3-55
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL vii

INDEX
Incompatible device order codes or versions ..................10-16 IRIG-B

Inputs connection on rear panel ............................................................. 3-12
AC current specifications ............................................................. 2-25 CPU wiring ........................................................................................... 3-34
AC currents .......................................................................................5-165 explained .............................................................................................. 3-37
AC voltage .........................................................................................5-166 port on rear panel ............................................................................ 3-12
AC voltage specifications ............................................................. 2-25 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-26
contact input specifications ....................................................... 2-25 ISO standards ........................................................................................ 2-35
contact inputs .................................................................. 5-330, 5-353
DCmA input specifications .......................................................... 2-25
DCmA inputs ...................................................................................... 3-31 J
direct input specifications ........................................................... 2-26
Japanese limited to 10 character input ................................. 5-28
IRIG-B ..................................................................................................... 3-37
IRIG-B specifications ...................................................................... 2-26
RTD input specifications ............................................................... 2-26
RTD inputs ........................................................................................... 3-31 K
virtual ...................................................................................................5-332 Keyboard .................................................................................................. 4-57
Installation ................................................................................................. 3-2 Keypad ...................................................................................................... 4-39
activate relay ..................................................................................... 3-55
add UR devices with auto discovery ....................................... 3-69
communications .............................................................................. 3-34 L
CT inputs .............................................................................................. 3-17
Labels, front panel .................................................................. 4-45, 4-78
EGD software ..................................................................................... 3-59
Lamp test ....................................................................................................7-3
RS485 ..................................................................................................... 3-36
set relay to Programmed ............................................................. 3-55
Language setting ................................................................................ 5-27
settings ...............................................................................................5-163 Laser module ......................................................................................... 3-41
silent .....................................................................................................10-15 Latching outputs
Instantaneous differential application examples .................................................................. 5-335
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-243 settings ............................................................................................... 5-334
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-271 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-27
settings ...............................................................................................5-271 LC fiber .............................................................................................2-8, 3-12
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-19 LC fiber connector .............................................................................. 3-13
Instantaneous overcurrent LED test
see Phase, Ground, and Neutral IOCs commands .............................................................................................7-3
Interface FlexLogic operand ........................................................................ 5-246
front panel ........................................................................................... 4-16 settings ............................................................................................... 5-140
software .................................................................................................. 4-1 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22
Internet access ...................................................................................5-116 LEDs
Inter-relay communication specifications ........................... 2-30 clear ..................................................................................................... 5-337
Interturn fault detection custom labels ..................................................................................... 4-45
actual values ........................................................................5-269, 6-19 explained .............................................................................................. 4-40
commands ............................................................................................. 7-5 In Service .............................................................................................. 3-55
settings ...............................................................................................5-268 power supply module ..................................................................... 3-16
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-19 settings ............................................................................................... 5-143
Trouble .................................................................................................. 3-55
IOC
view in software for graphical front panel ..............................6-4
see Phase, Ground, and Neutral IOCs
License
IP address
open source .......................................................................................... D-3
enter in software .............................................................................. 5-47
single user ........................................................................................... 3-58
enter on front panel ............................................................ 3-61, 4-39
gateway ............................................................................................... 5-50
Link power budget .............................................................................. 2-30
rules ........................................................................................................ 3-60 Load shedding ................................................................................... 5-309
view ........................................................................................................ 5-47 Local access denied message ......................................... 4-62, 5-21
IP address migration ......................................................................... 3-78 Local access, explained ................................................................... 5-10
IP rating .................................................................................................... 2-33 Local Setting Authorization ........................................................ 10-16
IP54 for enhanced front panel ...................................................... 3-2 Lock
firmware ........................................................... 3-73, 5-12, 5-22, 5-24
settings .......................................................................... 3-73, 5-22, 5-24
Log in with password ................................................ 3-73, 5-11, 5-12
Log in, multiple users cannot ..........................................................2-5
viii T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX
Log out Modbus

Administrator manually from front panel .............................5-20 connections remaining ................................................................. 6-13
users forcefully .................................................................................... 7-3 enter values in Modbus Analyzer ............................................. 10-1
Logic diagram Flex State parameters .................................................................5-153
create .....................................................................................................4-64 Modbus Analyzer window ............................................................ 10-1
explained ..............................................................................................4-63 port, close ............................................................................................ 5-53
Logic gates, FlexLogic ........................................................4-85, 5-249 register entry ....................................................................................5-125
Logical node or device ......................................................................5-65 settings ................................................................................................. 5-53
Logs, system ...........................................................................................5-25 user map ............................................................................................5-125
Loss of life Model information, view .................................................................. 6-36
actual values .......................................................................................6-20 Model number ..........................................................................................3-1
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-243 Modem connection ............................................................................ 3-68
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-274 Modification file number ................................................................. 6-37
settings ...............................................................................................5-273 Module 7R ................................................................................................ 3-43
Loss of life transformer specifications ....................................2-20 Module 7S ................................................................................................ 3-42
Lost password ......................................................................................... 5-9 Module Failure message ................................................................. 7-13
Low on Memory message ................................................................ 7-8 Modules
add and check settings not defaulted .................................10-18
communications ............................................................................... 3-34
M CT/VT ...................................................................................................... 3-16
order codes ......................................................................................... 2-14
MAC address
power supply ...................................................................................... 3-15
actual values .......................................................................................6-36
replace ................................................................................................10-17
examples ..............................................................................................5-46
transducer I/O ................................................................................... 3-32
RxGOOSE ...............................................................................................5-78
Monitor
settings for redundancy ................................................................5-48
actual values ...................................................................................... 10-1
TxGOOSE ...............................................................................................5-73
actual values with Metering Editor .......................................... 5-34
Maintenance
devices .................................................................................................. 10-1
actual values .......................................................................................6-35
use alarms ........................................................................................... 5-38
alert error message ........................................................................... 7-8
Mounting .....................................................................................................3-2
battery replacement ....................................................................10-19
cleaning .................................................................................................2-35
commands ............................................................................................. 7-3
module replacement ....................................................................10-17 N
upgrade or downgrade ...............................................................10-15 Nameplate, rear ......................................................................................3-1
Manufacturing date ...........................................................................6-36 NAND gate explained ....................................................................... 4-85
Maximum 6X, 6X wire size ..............................................................3-21 Navigation keys ................................................................................... 4-39
Maximum CT/VT wire size ...............................................................3-17 Network settings migration .......................................................... 3-74
Measurements of UR and panel cutout ................................... 3-2 Neutral directional overcurrent
Media storage alarm message ....................................................7-11 settings ...............................................................................................5-283
Memory low message ......................................................................... 7-8 No connection ....................................................................................... 5-48
Memory requirements ......................................................................3-57 Non-volatile data storage .............................................................. 3-16
Menu navigation ..................................................................................4-51 Non-volatile latches
Message about upgrade over Internet ................................10-16 FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-241
Messages settings ...............................................................................................5-261
clear front panel .............................................................................5-337 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22
error .......................................................................................................... 7-6 NOR gate explained ........................................................................... 4-85
errors and warnings in Engineer ...............................................4-71 NOT gate explained ........................................................................... 4-85
Metering Number of channels exceeds total allowable, SV Stream
conventions .............................................................................6-15, 6-16 Config .............................................................................................5-230
editor in graphical front panel ....................................................4-37
frequency specifications ...............................................................2-24
power specifications .......................................................................2-24 O
voltage specifications .....................................................................2-24
Obtain list of port numbers ........................................................... 5-47
Microsoft Windows requirement ................................................3-57
One-shot
Mimic diagrams ....................................................................................4-21
error compiling in Engineer ......................................................... 4-72
Missing messages, RxGOOSE fail ................................................7-10
FlexLogic operators ......................................................................5-249
MMS connections remaining ........................................................6-13
Open source licenses .......................................................................... D-3
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ix

INDEX
Operating system Passwords

language .............................................................................................. 3-58 authentication by device or server .......................................... 5-15
requirements ..................................................................................... 3-57 bypass authentication ................................................................... 5-23
Operating temperature ................................................................... 2-32 change .................................................................................................. 4-60
Operating times ................................................................................... 2-19 change after installation .............................................................. 3-73
Operator command to force logoff ............................................. 7-4 change does not take relay out of service ..............................5-1
OR gate explained .............................................................................. 4-85 command .................................................................... 4-61, 5-11, 5-12
Order codes ............................................................................................... 2-8 explained .................................................................................................2-4
two lines on basic front panel .................................................... 4-39 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-246
update .......................................................................................... 3-68, 7-3 lockout ................................................................................................... 4-62
view as actual values ..................................................................... 6-36 lost password ........................................................................................5-9
Oscillatory GOOSE maintenance message ............................. 7-9 requirements .........................................................................................5-9
Oscillatory transient testing specifications .......................... 2-34 reset to factory defaults ...................................................................5-9
Oscillography rules ...........................................................................................................5-9
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-34 settings .......................................................................... 4-61, 5-11, 5-12
clearing ........................................................................................ 5-43, 7-2 settings templates ..............................................................................4-8
how to .................................................................................................5-136 wrong entry ........................................................................................ 4-62
settings ...............................................................................................5-136 PBM PTP settings ................................................................5-132, 5-214
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-23 Percent differential
via EnerVista software ...................................................................... 4-2 calculations ...................................................................................... 5-263
view waveform in actual values window ............................. 6-34 characteristics ................................................................................ 5-265
view waveform in event record ................................................ 6-32 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-243
Out of service ........................................................................................... 5-1 logic diagram .................................................................................. 5-267
Outputs settings ............................................................................................... 5-263
contact outputs ..............................................................................5-333 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-19
control power specifications ...................................................... 2-28 Per-unit quantity .....................................................................................5-5
critical failure relay specifications ........................................... 2-28 Phase angle metering ...................................................................... 6-16
Fast form-C relay specifications ............................................... 2-28 Phase compensation ..................................................................... 5-180
Form-A relay .......................................................................... 2-27, 3-19 Phase current metering .................................................................. 6-21
Form-C relay ...................................................................................... 3-19 Phase IOC
Form-C relay specifications ........................................................ 2-28 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-241
latching output specifications ................................................... 2-27 logic diagram .................................................................................. 5-283
latching outputs .............................................................................5-334 settings ............................................................................................... 5-282
virtual outputs .................................................................................5-337 Phase rotation .................................................................................... 5-167
Over Temperature message ........................................................ 7-11 Phase TOC
Overcurrent curves FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-241
FlexCurves .........................................................................................5-279 logic diagram .................................................................................. 5-282
IAC .........................................................................................................5-277 settings ............................................................................................... 5-280
IEC .........................................................................................................5-276 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-20
types ....................................................................................................5-274 Phasor display graphical front panel .......................... 4-58, 5-34
Ping test times out .............................................................................. 5-48
PMU
P status of activation .......................................................................... 6-37
Points List, view DNP ......................................................................... 5-59
Panel cutout .............................................................................................. 3-2
Port
Parallel Redundancy Protocol
Ethernet, turn on or off .................................................................. 5-47
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-13
failure monitoring ............................................................................ 5-40
explained ............................................................................................. 5-49
HTTP, close ....................................................................................... 5-116
settings ................................................................................................. 5-47
IEC 60870-5-104, close ............................................................... 5-118
settings with Process Bus Module .........................................5-211
Modbus, close .................................................................................... 5-53
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-30
on rear panel ...................................................................................... 3-12
Parity .......................................................................................................... 5-44
settings for Process Bus Module ............................................ 5-134
Part numbering ....................................................................................... 2-8
TFTP, close ........................................................................................ 5-117
USB .......................................................................................................... 4-18
x T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX
Port number Process Bus Module

combinations with protocols ......................................................5-54 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-27
connectivity report of those used .............................................4-78 FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-247
DNP ..........................................................................................................5-56 GOOSE limitations ............................................................................ 5-70
HTTP .....................................................................................................5-116 PBM PTP settings .............................................................5-132, 5-214
IEC 60870-5-104 ............................................................................5-117 port speeds ......................................................................................... 3-13
list of .......................................................................................................5-47 ports .....................................................................................................5-134
Modbus ..................................................................................................5-53 PRP ........................................................................................................5-211
Modbus during installation ..........................................................3-68 remote resources actual values ............................................... 6-26
RADIUS ...................................................................................................5-18 SV Stream Config settings .........................................................5-220
SNTP .....................................................................................................5-130 Time Sync settings ........................................................................... 6-28
speed for Process Bus Module ...................................................3-13 time with PTP .........................................................5-132, 5-214, 6-28
system log ................................................................................5-18, 5-19 Process Bus Trouble message ..................................................... 7-14
TFTP ......................................................................................................5-116 Product information
Power metering actual values ...................................................................................... 6-36
specifications ......................................................................................2-24 Device Connectivity Report in Engineer ................................ 4-78
values .....................................................................................................6-23 firmware revision ............................................................................. 6-37
Power off, save data first ................................................................3-16 Programmed mode ........................................................................... 3-55
Power supply Protection elements .............................................................................5-4
description ...........................................................................................3-15 Protection Summary interface ............................ 3-71, 4-5, 5-298
diagram .................................................................................................3-12 Protocol selection .................................................................5-54, 10-13
LED on module ...................................................................................3-16 Prototype Firmware message ..................................................... 7-10
removal to replace battery .......................................................10-19 PRP
specifications ......................................................................................2-26 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-13
wire size .................................................................................................3-16 explained .............................................................................................. 5-49
Power system settings ...................................................................5-167 Process Bus Module ......................................................................5-211
Precision Time Protocol settings ................................................................................................. 5-47
clock settings ........................................................ 5-126, 5-132, 6-28 settings with Process Bus Module ..........................................5-211
port behavior ......................................................................................5-48 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-30
settings ...............................................................................................5-128 PTP
settings with Process Bus Module .............. 5-132, 5-214, 6-28 clock settings ........................................................5-126, 5-132, 6-28
specifications ......................................................................................2-30 port behavior ...................................................................................... 5-48
Preferences settings ...............................................................................................5-128
comparing settings ..........................................................................10-8 settings with Process Bus Module ...............5-132, 5-214, 6-28
Engineer ................................................................................................4-79 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-30
IEC 61850 ..............................................................................................5-65 pu quantity .................................................................................................5-5
import file ..........................................................................................10-10 Pushbuttons
Preserve custom attributes importing SCD/CID files ...10-10 control FlexLogic ............................................................................5-239
Press Reset Key message ...............................................................7-11 control logic diagram ...................................................................5-147
Print front panel labels .........................................................4-45, 4-78 control settings ...............................................................................5-145
Process bus control specifications ..................................................................... 2-23
error messages ..................................................................................7-12 enable for graphical front panel ............................................... 5-32
order codes for compatible URs .................................................. 2-8 testing .......................................................................................................7-3
overview ................................................................................................3-18 user-programmable FlexLogic ................................................5-248
Process Bus Failure message .......................................................7-13 user-programmable logic diagrams .....................................5-152
Process Bus GOOSE user-programmable settings ...................................................5-147
requires module and software options .................................... 2-8 user-programmable specifications ......................................... 2-23
view in software for graphical front panel ..............................6-4
Q
Quick Connect ........................................................................... 3-71, 3-72
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL xi

INDEX
Restore settings ................................................................................... 10-9

R Restricted ground fault
RADIUS server actual values ...................................................................................... 6-25
authentication ................................................................................... 5-15 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-241
explained .......................................................................................2-5, 2-7 logic diagram .................................................................................. 5-297
setup .........................................................................................................B-1 settings ............................................................................................... 5-291
RAM Filesystem Fail message ........................................................ 7-7 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-19
RAM required ......................................................................................... 3-57 Revision history ...................................................................................... D-1
Reactive power RF immunity specifications ........................................................... 2-34
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-23 RFI, conducted specifications ...................................................... 2-34
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-24 RJ-45 .................................................................................................2-8, 3-12
Real power .............................................................................................. 6-23 RMS voltage specifications ............................................................ 2-24
Real power specifications .............................................................. 2-24 Roles for login ...........................................................................................2-5
Real-time clock RRTD Comm Fail message ............................................................. 7-10
settings .................................................................... 5-126, 5-132, 6-28 RS232
settings with Process Bus Module .............. 5-132, 5-214, 6-28 baud rate ............................................................................................. 5-44
Reboot relay configuration ...................................................................................... 3-71
using EnerVista .................................................................................... 5-1 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-29
using relay .............................................................................................. 7-3 wiring ..................................................................................................... 3-33
Recloser curves ................................................................... 5-206, 5-280 RS422
Recycling ................................................................................................10-25 configuration ...................................................................................... 3-46
Redundancy timing ..................................................................................................... 3-47
HSR support ........................................................................................... 2-2 two-channel application ............................................................... 3-46
PRP actual values ............................................................................ 6-13 with fiber interface .......................................................................... 3-48
PRP explained .................................................................................... 5-49 RS485
settings ................................................................................................. 5-47 description ........................................................................................... 3-36
SNTP .....................................................................................................5-130 limitation with CyberSentry ......................................................... 5-16
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-30 port on rear panel ............................................................................ 3-12
Relay architecture ............................................................................5-236 settings .................................................................................................. 5-44
Relay maintenance ............................................................................... 7-3 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-29
Relay name ...........................................................................................5-163 RTD inputs
Release Notes .....................................................................................10-15 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-26
Remote access of front panel in EnerVista ................. 4-18, 6-3 settings ............................................................................................... 5-345
Remote access, explained ............................................................. 5-10 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-26
Remote devices RTD Trouble message ....................................................................... 7-14
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-26 Rules for passwords .............................................................................5-9
Remote Input ID check box ........................................................... 5-81 RxGOOSE
Remote resources actual values ...................................................................................... 6-25
settings ...............................................................................................5-164 settings .................................................................................................. 5-76
Remote Setting Authorization ...................................................10-16 RxGOOSE Fail message ................................................................... 7-10
Rename logical node or device .................................................. 5-66 RxGOOSE Offline message ............................................................. 7-10
Repair ....................................................................................1-2, 10-24, D-1
Repaired file message ...................................................................... 10-7
Replace battery ..................................................................................10-19 S
Replace Battery message ................................................................. 7-9 Sampled value explained ............................................................ 5-211
Replacement modules .......................................................2-14, 10-17 Save settings .............................................................................................4-1
Requirements for installation ...................................................... 3-57 Saving setting does not take relay out of service ...............5-1
Reserved settings .................................................................................. 4-4 SCADA protocol selection ................................................ 5-54, 10-13
Reset alarm ............................................................................................... 6-4 SCD file
Reset to factory defaults ....................................................... 5-9, 5-21 import ................................................................................................. 10-13
Resetting import preferences ....................................................................... 10-10
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-247 SCL compatible ..................................................................................... 5-60
setting to clear LEDs and messages .....................................5-337 SCL file import ....................................................................................... 5-81
to factory defaults .....................................................................5-9, 7-3 preferences ...................................................................................... 10-10
Restart relay Process Bus Module and GOOSE error ................................... 5-71
using EnerVista .................................................................................... 5-1
using relay .............................................................................................. 7-3
xii T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX
Second Ethernet Fail Settings ........................................................................................................5-1

error message ...................................................................................... 7-9 back up ..................................................................................... 5-63, 10-9
set alarm ...............................................................................................5-40 change .................................................................................................. 4-53
Security change does not take relay out of service ..............................5-1
commands ............................................................................................. 7-4 compare ............................................................................................... 10-8
delete files and records ..............................................................10-23 convert .................................................................................................. 10-5
EnerVista and UR secure with SSH ............................................. 2-5 default to factory defaults ..............................................................7-3
failed authentication lockout ......................................................5-21 edit .......................................................................................................... 4-53
forceful user logout ........................................................................... 7-3 export ........................................................................................ 10-7, 10-9
lock FlexLogic equations ...............................................................4-10 import .................................................................................................... 3-74
lock settings .......................................................................................... 4-6 lock .........................................................................3-73, 4-6, 5-22, 5-24
password for settings template ................................................... 4-8 not updated automatically among computers ................. 3-70
passwords for settings and commands ........4-61, 5-11, 5-12 read from device with Modbus Analyzer .............................. 10-1
RADIUS server for user authentication ..................................... B-1 restore ................................................................................................... 10-9
role-based user access .................................................................... 2-5 upgrade ................................................................................................ 10-5
settings ..................................................................................................5-19 write to device with Modbus Analyzer ................................... 10-1
software options ...............................................................................2-32 Settings file ............................................................................................. 5-63
specifications ......................................................................................2-32 description ..............................................................................................4-1
system and event logs ...................................................................5-25 import .................................................................................................... 3-74
Security audit list of port numbers ............................................5-47 takes relay out of service when loaded ....................................4-2
Selector switch traceability .......................................................................................... 4-13
actual values ......................................................................................... 6-9 transfer with USB stick .................................................................. 4-18
application example .....................................................................5-307 Settings password ...................................................... 4-61, 5-11, 5-12
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-241 Settings Save Error message ....................................................... 7-10
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-309 Settings templates
settings ...............................................................................................5-302 description ..............................................................................................4-6
specifications ......................................................................................2-23 edit .............................................................................................................4-7
timing ..................................................................................................5-306 enable .......................................................................................................4-6
Self-tests password protection .........................................................................4-8
description ............................................................................................. 7-6 remove .................................................................................................. 4-10
error messages .................................................................................... 7-6 view ...........................................................................................................4-8
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-248 SFP
user-programmable .....................................................................5-144 explained .............................................................................................. 3-11
Serial number ................................................................... 3-1, 4-12, 6-36 maximum cable length ................................................................. 3-11
Serial ports module fail message .........................................................................7-9
device setup with ..............................................................................3-66 SFTP
location ..................................................................................................4-16 enable or disable .............................................................................. 5-55
settings ..................................................................................................5-44 transfer settings .............................................................................10-13
specifications ......................................................................................2-29 Show Custom Layout button .....................................................5-221
wiring ......................................................................................................3-48 Show Enabled button .....................................................................5-221
Server authentication .......................................................................5-15 Signal loss detection for fiber ...................................................... 5-49
Service life expected ..........................................................................10-3 Signal sources
Service Report ......................................................................................... 1-2 metering ............................................................................................... 6-21
Setting groups ..................................................................... 5-262, 5-300 settings ...............................................................................................5-168
active setting group .....................................................................5-262 Silent software installation ..........................................................10-15
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-242 Simulation
troubleshooting ..............................................................................5-262 operands ............................................................................................5-248
settings ...............................................................................................5-355
Simulation bit .......................................................................................5-350
Single-line diagram ...............................................................................2-3
create, explained .............................................................................. 4-21
save as separate file ....................................................................... 4-26
T means tagged breaker .............................................................. 4-25
Site Targets ............................................................................................. 10-1
Size of UR and panel cutout .............................................................3-2
SNTP Failure message ...................................................................... 7-10
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL xiii

INDEX
SNTP protocol Target Device Report button ........................................................ 3-77

accuracy specifications ................................................................ 2-29 Targets
redundant source ..........................................................................5-130 defined .................................................................................................. 4-20
settings ...............................................................................................5-130 menu .........................................................................................................7-5
Software messages ................................................................................................7-6
install EGD ........................................................................................... 3-59 overview by device .......................................................................... 10-1
installation ........................................................................................... 3-58 settings .....................................................................................................5-5
interface explained ............................................................................ 4-1 TBD ........................................................................................................... 10-10
language .............................................................................................. 5-28 TCP port number for web access ............................................ 5-116
license ................................................................................................... 3-58 TDR Trouble message ....................................................................... 7-14
silent installation ............................................................................10-15 Technical support ..................................................................................1-2
system requirements ..................................................................... 3-57 files .................................................................................................1-2, 10-3
update or downgrade .................................................................10-14 Teleprotection
Source frequency ................................................................................ 6-24 actual values .........................................................................................6-6
Sources clearing counters ................................................................................7-2
example of use ................................................................................5-170 FlexLogic operands ...................................................................... 5-242
metering ............................................................................................... 6-21 logic diagram .................................................................................. 5-343
settings ...............................................................................................5-168 overview ............................................................................................ 5-342
Special characters ............................................................................. 4-57 settings .................................................................. 5-162, 5-342, 5-343
Specifications ........................................................................................ 2-18 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-26
ST fiber ............................................................................................. 2-8, 3-12 Temp Monitor message ................................................................... 7-11
ST fiber connector .............................................................................. 3-13 Temperature
Standards, certification ................................................................... 2-35 FlexLogic monitor operand ...................................................... 5-248
Status LEDs ................................................................................. 4-42, 4-43 operating .............................................................................................. 2-32
Stop blinking alarm ............................................................................ 4-35 transformer hot-spot settings ................................................. 5-271
Storage Media Alarm message .................................................. 7-11 Test voltages .......................................................................................... 3-15
Storage, UR ...........................................................................................10-24 Testing ..........................................................................................................8-1
Substation D400 .................................................................................. 3-79 force contact inputs ..................................................................... 5-353
Support, technical ................................................................................. 1-2 force contact outputs ...................................................5-354, 5-356
Surge immunity specifications .................................................... 2-34 lamp test .................................................................................................7-3
SV simulation settings ....................................................................5-355 LEDs ...........................................................................................................7-3
SV Stream Config message troubleshooting ....................5-226 pushbuttons ..........................................................................................7-3
SV Stream Config settings ...........................................................5-220 self-test error messages ..................................................................7-6
stream filtering criteria ................................................................5-225 settings ............................................................................................... 5-350
SV Stream Trouble On message ................................................ 7-11 TFTP
Switch port, close ......................................................................................... 5-117
actual values ......................................................................................... 6-9 put cannot be done ...................................................................... 5-116
settings ............................................................................................... 5-116
control with IEC 61850 ................................................................5-102
settings ................................................................................ 5-196, 5-302 The URS file is part of a device folder ................................... 10-12
Synchronize Thermal inputs
clock using time source ................................... 5-126, 5-132, 6-28 actual values ...................................................................................... 6-20
clocks of UR devices to local computer ..............................5-127 settings ............................................................................................... 5-185
files between offline and online ................................................ 4-71 Thermal overload protection
Synchronize Devices setting for clocks ...............................5-127 logic diagram .................................................................................. 5-323
Syslog ......................................................................................................... 5-25 settings ............................................................................................... 5-320
System and device information ................................................. 4-78 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-21
System Exception message .......................................................... 7-11 Third Ethernet Fail
error message ......................................................................................7-9
System Failure message .................................................................... 7-7
set alarm .............................................................................................. 5-40
System frequency .............................................................................5-167
Tilda on front panel ............................................................................ 4-18
System logs ............................................................................................ 5-25
Time
System requirements ....................................................................... 3-57
actual values .......................................................................... 6-34, 6-35
System setup .......................................................................................5-165
FlexLogic timer settings ............................................................. 5-255
graphical front panel format .......................................... 5-31, 5-32
operating .............................................................................................. 6-36
T overwritten by external source ....................................................7-3
T in single-line diagram ................................................................... 4-25 set ......................................................... 5-30, 5-126, 5-132, 6-28, 7-3
Tagged breaker in single-line diagram .................................. 4-25 synchronize ............................................................5-126, 5-132, 6-28
xiv T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INDEX
Time overcurrent TxGOOSE

see Phase, Neutral, and Ground TOCs actual values ...................................................................................... 6-14
Time Sync settings ..............................................................................6-28 settings ................................................................................................. 5-71
To Install Settings message ............................................................. 7-7 TxGOOSEa & TxGOOSEb assigned to PBM message ...... 5-74
TOC
ground ................................................................................................5-289
phase ...................................................................................................5-280 U
specifications ......................................................................................2-20 UDP for TFTP ........................................................................................5-116
Toolbar .......................................................................................................4-82 UL certification ..................................................................................... 2-35
Torque for screws ........................................................2-35, 3-12, 3-21 Unable to connect to relay ................................................ 3-70, 5-48
Traceability Unable to put relay in flash mode ...........................................10-16
data .........................................................................................................4-14
Unauthorized access
overview ................................................................................................4-13
commands .......................................................................................... 5-43
rules .........................................................................................................4-15
resetting ..................................................................................................7-2
view data ..............................................................................................4-15
Underfrequency
Tracking frequency .............................................................................6-24
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-243
Transducer I/O logic diagram ...................................................................................5-310
actual values .......................................................................................6-25
settings ...............................................................................................5-309
settings ...............................................................................................5-344
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-21
specifications ......................................................................................2-26
Uninstall ..................................................................................................10-23
wiring ......................................................................................................3-32
Unit Not Calibrated message ....................................................... 7-11
Transfer files to relay .........................................................................10-7
Unit not programmed .......................................................... 5-163, 7-7
Transfer files with USB drive ..........................................................4-18
Unpacking the relay .............................................................................3-1
Transformer
Unreturned messages alarm .....................................................5-162
actual values ........................................................................5-269, 6-19
Update SCL files prompt ................................................................. 4-71
aging factor ..........................................................................2-20, 5-272
hottest-spot temperature ..............................................2-20, 5-271
Update settings with Convert Device Settings .................. 10-5
interturn fault detection .............................................................5-268 Updates
loss of life ...............................................................................2-20, 5-273 bootloader .........................................................................................10-15
metering .................................................................................5-269, 6-19 device not recognized ..................................................................10-14
phase relationships ......................................................................5-177 firmware .............................................................................................10-15
settings ...............................................................................................5-173 firmware lock ................................................. 3-73, 5-12, 5-22, 5-24
thermal inputs .................................................................................5-185 FPGA .....................................................................................................10-17
through-fault monitoring ..........................2-20, 5-324, 6-36, 9-4 instruction manual .............................................................................3-1
Transformer differential ................................................. 5-176, 5-184 order code ..............................................................................................7-3
single-line diagrams not retained ............................................ 4-26
Transient ground fault detection
software .............................................................................................10-14
settings ...............................................................................................5-283
Upgrade device settings ................................................................. 10-5
specifications ......................................................................................2-22 Upgrade over Internet message ..............................................10-16
Triangle in Offline Window .............................................................4-71 Upload settings to relay .................................................................. 10-7
Trip bus URS file does not include IEC 61850 configuration .......10-12
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-242 URS file is part of a device folder .............................................10-12
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-300 URS settings file ........................................................... 3-78, 5-63, 10-9
settings ...............................................................................................5-298 USB port
Trip LEDs ................................................................................................5-143 graphical front panel ........................................................4-18, 5-124
Trouble indicator .................................................................................... 7-6 Quick Connect ................................................................................... 3-72
Trouble LED .............................................................................................3-55 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-29
Troubleshooting USB to serial converter .................................................................... 3-66
access to device ................................................................................3-70 User accounts
breaker not working .....................................................................5-311 authentication by device or server .......................................... 5-15
connection ...........................................................................................5-48 multiple login limitation CyberSentry ........................................2-5
dark graphical front panel ............................................................5-33 passwords for settings and commands ....... 4-61, 5-11, 5-12
Engineer ....................................................................................4-72, 4-73 permissions by role ............................................................................2-5
error messages .................................................................................... 7-6 User-definable displays
setting not working .......................................................................5-311 example ..............................................................................................5-155
SV Stream Config window .........................................................5-226 invoking and scrolling ..................................................................5-154
unit not programmed error ......................................................5-163 settings ...............................................................................................5-154
Turn off alarm ........................................................................................4-35 specifications ..................................................................................... 2-23
T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL xv

INDEX
User-programmable fault report Winding

actual values ...................................................................................... 6-31 application example .................................................................... 5-184
clearing ........................................................................................ 5-43, 7-2 settings ............................................................................................... 5-175
settings ...............................................................................................5-135 Windows 10
User-programmable LEDs disconnect USB cable when upgrading ............................. 10-14
custom labels .................................................................................... 4-45 driver for USB to serial cable ...................................................... 3-66
defaults ................................................................................................. 4-43 Windows requirement ...................................................................... 3-57
settings ...............................................................................................5-143 Wire size
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-22 CT/VT ...................................................................................................... 3-17
User-programmable pushbuttons F485 converter .................................................................................. 3-57
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-248 G.703 and fiber interface .............................................................. 3-49
graphical front panel buttons 9 to 16 .................................... 4-31 G.703 interface .................................................................................. 3-42
logic diagrams .................................................................................5-152 module 7S ............................................................................................ 3-42
settings ...............................................................................................5-147 modules 6X, 6W ................................................................................ 3-21
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-23 modules 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, 75 ........................................................... 3-49
testing ...................................................................................................... 7-3 modules 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74 .......................................................... 3-48
User-programmable self-test settings .................................5-144 modules 7T, 7W ................................................................................ 3-46
power supply module ..................................................................... 3-16
RS422 and fiber interface ............................................................. 3-48
V RS422 interface ................................................................................. 3-46
Wiring diagram ..................................................................................... 3-14
Vibration testing specifications .................................................. 2-34
Withdraw UR from operation .................................................... 10-23
Virtual inputs
actual values ......................................................................................... 6-5
Wrong Transceiver message ....................................................... 7-12
commands ............................................................................................. 7-2
explained ...........................................................................................5-332
FlexLogic operands .......................................................................5-245 X
logic diagram ...................................................................................5-333 XOR gate explained ............................................................................ 4-85
settings ...............................................................................................5-332
Virtual outputs
actual values ......................................................................................... 6-7 Y
explained ...........................................................................................5-337
Yellow caution icon in Offline Window ................................... 4-71
settings ...............................................................................................5-337
Voltage banks .....................................................................................5-166
Voltage deviation specifications ................................................ 2-34 Z
Voltage elements Zero-sequence compensation ................................................. 5-180
FlexElement is phase to ground .............................................5-259 Zero-sequence core balance ....................................................... 3-17
Voltage metering
actual values ...................................................................................... 6-22
specifications ..................................................................................... 2-24
Voltage Monitor message .............................................................. 7-11
Voltage restraint characteristic ................................................5-280
VT inputs ........................................................................3-16, 3-17, 5-166
VT wiring .................................................................................................. 3-17
W
Warning messages in Engineer .................................................. 4-73
Warning symbol in Offline Window .......................................... 4-71
Warning, firmware upload not supported .........................10-16
Warranty .....................................................................................................D-1
Waveform
view in actual values window .................................................... 6-34
view in event record ....................................................................... 6-32
Waveform files, view ......................................................................... 4-82
Web access port ...............................................................................5-116
Web server protocol ........................................................................5-116
xvi T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

T35-8.5x-AP1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T35-8.5x-AP1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T35-8.5x-AP1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Safety symbols and definitions ........................................................................... 1-1

2 PRODUCT 2.1 Product description ............................................................................................... 2-1

3 INSTALLATION 3.1 Unpack and inspect ............................................................................................... 3-1

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL iii

3.2.3 Rear terminal layout......................................................................................................... 3-10

4 INTERFACES 4.1 EnerVista software interface................................................................................4-1

iv T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4.1.7 Settings templates............................................................................................................... 4-6

5 SETTINGS 5.1 Settings menu......................................................................................................... 5-2

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL v

5.5.4 Transformer....................................................................................................................... 5-173

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 Actual values menu................................................................................................6-1

vi T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.2 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 6-3

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL vii

6.8.2 Firmware revisions ............................................................................................................ 6-37

7 COMMANDS AND 7.1 Commands menu ...................................................................................................7-1

8 COMMISSIONING 8.1 Differential characteristic test.............................................................................8-1

9 THEORY OF 9.1 Directional principle...............................................................................................9-1

10 MAINTENANCE 10.1 Monitoring .............................................................................................................10-1

viii T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

10.8 Back up and restore settings ............................................................................. 10-9

A FLEXANALOG A.1 FlexAnalog items .................................................................................................... A-1

B RADIUS SERVER B.1 RADIUS server configuration ............................................................................... B-1

C COMMAND LINE C.1 Command line interface ....................................................................................... C-1

D MISCELLANEOUS D.1 Warranty .................................................................................................................D-1

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ix

x T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

This chapter outlines safety and technical support information.

1.1 Safety symbols and definitions

Indicates practices not related to personal injury.

1.1.1 General cautions and warnings

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1-1

1.2 For further assistance

1-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Figure 1-1: Generate service report in EnerVista software

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1-3

1-4 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Chapter 2: Product description

This chapter outlines the product, order codes, and specifications.

2.1 Product description

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2-1

2-2 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Figure 2-1: Single-line diagram

51P 50/87 51P

Transducer input FlexElementTM

T35 Transformer Protection System

Table 2-2: Other device functions

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2-3

• Password security — Basic security present by default

2 2.2.0.1 EnerVista security

2.2.0.2 Password security

2-4 T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

2.2.0.3 CyberSentry security

CyberSentry user roles

The table lists user roles and permissions.

Table 2-3: Permissions by user role with CyberSentry

T35 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2-5

Administrator Engineer Operator Supervisor Observer

T35 - * ** - * * * - F - H - M - P - U - W/X For Full Size Horizontal Mount

T35 - * ** - * * * - F - H - M - P - U - W/X For Full Size Horizontal Mount

r 2 260 V Eq. 2-1

r 2 46rated A Eq. 2-2